CiXIV80b
author: Kittel, Ferdinand

..

s

s

-

iz

o

T

-

o

e

i

=

e

s

..

5

=

s

o

-

o

0

v

o

o

i

R

i

i

=

o

A

o2

g

%

R

%

%

i

B

o

A

Y

AT

a3

S

&

(%

hd

5

b et

Ve

i

.

“

e

-

§

.

w

3

S

Nos

L4

A

¥

bt

£

s

7

-

b

&

#

ST

s,

5

o

i

%

R

5

A 3

TR

RO

N

w e

e

2

"

S

e

o

.

G

e

s

v

%

N

et

%

b

e

)

%

"

e

»

s

Ly

5

P

3

o

"

>

Ry

ot

s

ey

WX

i

A

S

-

o

P

G

%

o

e e

e

By

%

o

i

ey

%

%

i

x

S

o

T

o

e

e

i

,m

i

¥

o a

>

2

A

e

"

oy

&

i

A

s

"o

&

e

SRR e g

o

e

o

&~

X

N

“

T

s

e

%

oL

e

%

S

s

%

o o

o s

e e v

Gk

5

F

3

.

¥

P

P

e

%

w

e

>

»

%%,

by

@i

®

R

e

Ak

S

e

TR,

o,

e

)

ok

M

¥

m‘y.

>

%

¥

f

v

b

R

S

W

i

-

s

e

%

Fos

™

b

%

e

e

o o

X

i

"

",

e

v

s

w

e

s

e

W

%

Ao

g

b\

-

LR

or &

"

b

b,

e

w

%

¥

&

%

\

&~

o

4

N

NS

S

&

&

e e

¥

v,

&

%

¢

5

5

~

-

Lo

-

3

P

i

¢

i

o

.

5

¥ T

S

%

4

S

o

&

&

b

%

A

i

"

%

:

~

&

%

e

¥:

&

e

o v

=

v

.

-

%

.

b W

o

&

&

&

P

e

s

st

£

R

&

v

<

v

<

RS

¥

¥

i

¥

&)

&

-

ot

i

W

o

v

A

oo

Lo vk

o

¥

v

“y

B

&

S

&

-

b

y

-

o

%

A

e

A

A AR

7

Ry

&

1~

&

3 S

s

A

b

S

o

e

«

o

%

%

w

-

&

.

W

g

>

P

e

B

N

(=

.

3 5

£

b

%

o

EoEReN

A

e o,

3

B

&

o

s

i A

e

)

>

o

=

B

>

o

b

s

s

ek

i g

¥

e

A5

~

e,

%

B

e

2

P

¥

W

oA

S

-

o

R

m

O

w

Neh,

e,

S

e

%

-

s

X

%

e

o

%«

ot

NCw

”

&

4

R

2

S

BN

>

Ah,

b P

N

A

%

Sy

&

%

e

v

£

“

;

>

%

i v

Z

R

e

.

‘.

S

3

S

b

.

4

e

i e 3

N

o

W

D

)

e e

W

N

Y

\,m,

o

eyt

o

.

¥

e

«

i

-

oy

St

"y

o

e

o

&

&

R s

o

@

i

o

e

B

KRN S

e

&

e

S

S

S

o, 1,

S

v

e

%

7

W

.

s

ey

St

i

Y

A

G

53 e

Wk

e

b

i

i

;

b

A

R

e

G

Lo

e

e

e, G0

I~

o s

-

A

K

W

g

o

O

4

o

i

o

s

o

Ny

>

e

-

2

e

oS

o

e

-

>

% A

R,

.

>

Wi

——

e

o

<

e

Sl e e

S

7 A

e

&

b

" o

o

p:

m

S

ar

B

P

e

e,

&

W

B

5

SN

o

s

& e

ok

«

m

i

Mg

>

&

ik

&

i Sper

i

sl

S

v

b e e

o

-

o

i

ke %

i,

i

s

o

v

e

=

5

»

b

5

e %

%

by

By

%

v

v

&

PR

Ar A

e

o

i ar

wn

s

&,

%

s

=

o i

=

g

i

v

SO

NEY

S

»

&

%

p

P

e M

ey

£

i

%

o

ek

o

W

o

Y.

e

=

&9

e b

(5

B

ey

5

PRI

I

%

s

-

5

e

>

5

¥

&

w

by

S

o

e

s

i

G

A b

-

e b

5

%

%,

-

-

'

& e

R

i

ok

i~

i

%

o

-

b

o

%

°

o

e

W

4

.

W

s

R

%

S

N

o

0

s

b,

S

-

A,

¥

o

o

N

o

>

-

P

I <

A

&

e

i

5

i

w W e

T

5

e

o W e

-

A

e

%

v

v

e

o

Y

3

A

>

=%

o

o

¥

L

P

i

o

i

Rt

St

(o

s

o~

A A

!

W

e e

e

e

&

£

>

O

b

e

-

3.

w

~

o %

e

o

b

SOt oA

a

S

e

\Q

%

N e

o 4

#

N s

“

>

P

o

&

s

o

N

A atie

e e et et

e

-

:

i

S

e

vhe

s

G

S

A s

bt

2

%

X,

S

o

i

“

%

e

>

@,

“

(e

W

&

T fiatpe

Py

-

5 ey

v

, o

o

P

*

v

oW

e

o

v

i

&

&

o

¥

e

W

VR

o

A

R

B e

ey

o

AR

e

i

W

i’

=

-

e

i

v

s

ol

o

o

N

et

¥

o

A

e

an

v

&

X

Y

"

(e

s

o

e

e

i

o

el

3

o

o

-

e

S

&

)

o

&

o

™

-

<

w

e

ey

T

A,

XN

s

o

e e

"

o

2

¥

e

Pty

s

-

o

oy

(e

e

s

o

[

N,

e

N

%

o

e

A

o

Y

e

b

o

Mo

%

3

b

=

] e Rtk VA Y

RS

e AL

o

e

o

o

<

p

e

-

b

ks

%

&

3o

>

&

S

oo,

L

s

y T

SO

=

e

M,

-

S

o

b

&5

f

o

ww

o

S

W,

for g

o

o

B

ek

ok

ey

25

-

,m

b

e Sy

5

&

"

g e W

>

.

o

v e

A

¥

&

ke

i

g,

o

%

s

%

o

ot

o

e

e

X

e

, i

.

%

m

.y

¥

W

v

o

T

e

e

wy

Aok

fh

b

e

e

&

c

e

e

s

e

Py

P

o

o

o

i e

St

A

S

&

o

e

“

i e

S

s

&g

b

e

b

b

ook

>

*or

i

o

7

X

s

o

e

e s

@

-

LA

e

5

A

B

i

o

H

g

e

¥

=

-

2

R

'

vt

9t

e

e

>,

e

e G

i

o

S

,

v

o

=

o

&

¥

P

>

%

e

e

At

B

oTe

e

b

S

¥

o

o T

i

b

X

R

%

e

"l

v

¥

¢

&

o

Lo

e

oo

i

o

o

oo

¥

e

o

ey

N

R

N .

A

AR

X

v

.

3

o

®

e

e

o

{

i

o~

e,

¥

»

M

DBty

W

-

i

o

%

o e

v

o

o e

o

o

-

e

et

e

™

&

S

£

<

¥

Pah

b

P

S

e

& o

B e ?

i

e

w

2

£

-

B

Gela

e

o

C

v

>

T

o

i

-

i

o

oo

G

>

A

A

"

v

-

NS

e

b,

5

A

i

e

e

g

e <

25

S

3

.

&Sy

B

e

o

e

4

oy

#

£

®

v

P

W

w

S

G

P

b

o

A

o

S

5

o

o

"

T

S

V.

e

e

Pty

o

e

by

b

s

P

i

e

-

S,

G

e

-

s

b

b

o

i

i

.

o i e

koS

=

i

S,

.

v

™

»

<

v ie

£

B

e

A

e e

S

i

e

B

e

s

S

&

-

5

o

3

e

e oot

-

W

»

7

e

»

H

»m

A

>

o

,u

o

i

&

P

A

o

s

e

o

Sl

A

o

o

.

o

s

S

e e

S

ol

A

Ve,

T e

-

e

ow

r

e

A

w

ey

o

o

'

o

o

v

e

M

3

W

Vir

Nt

&

S

o

&%

e

D

&

T

o S

2 o

P

o

o,

e

b

W

%

gt

W

%,

&

Mt

&y

¥

e

¥

S

e e

e

I

g

i

T

&

B

S

&

5

@

m

v

o

.

.

<

&

ity

A

¥ S v e

o

»

o o P

¢

£

¥

&

.

%

o

.

o

&

P

e

o

S

NS

Ve

S

DRt

it

S

A

ek,

S

>

#

o e ke

B e

ey

>

e

N

e

e

@

S

G

o

i St

Pl

R

(S

R

H

¥l

-

(e

-

oL

o i

3

i

&

A

Pt

Vs

s

PP

i

ghoa

o T

PRl

“r

o

&

g

™

o g

v

i

o e

o

S

AR

I

=t

e

v 4

e

B

o

e

».

R

o

)

&

i

b

».\

-

o

P

i

¥

%

o

g

o

5t

i

re

e

%

N

i e

!

W

b

o e

o

e

b

%

S

SN

%

D

=5

5

;

¥

it

o

iy

o3

o

e

‘.

v

P

PR

e

o~

>

p

b

A

=

"

oL

¥

et

o

3

>

>

o

e

W

"

e

&

ek

v

o

e

o

e

e

i

e g 3

o~

>

et

%

s

¥

/

o

L5

B

"3

R

2

A

e

H\

¥

-

RS

»

P

A

P

>

5

-

v

sy

Ao

i

0

gt

R

&

(S

S

R,

e

g

]

"

ot

o

4

M

v

<

M

'y

e

-

2

o 1

e

g

¥

%

i~

Wi

A

-

ok

Sh e

v

e

&

%

w

b

Y

%

G

"

e B

.

D

e

s e

it

R

e

A

i

e

&

>

&

b

s

e

e

Tt

-

- 3

A

&

P

>

x

Fe

& Y

>

>

=%,

Gy e

R

e

v ke

£

v

¥

r

b

3

e

v

P

e

*

=

e

whet

P

S

v

X A

i

o

@

S

s

T

o

s

-

B, 58

e

-

iy

¥

m

s

P

o

Pt

e

B

o

w

o

B

o

i

»

<

-

O

&

g

N

.

"

i

%

e

N

G e

i

v

SN

o

P

i

o

e

bur

S

A

A

-

:

a,

oo

o B

A

»

s

>

S

i v

£y

P

-

o

e A

e

>

N

o

W

-

s

Ve

e

e

g

e

o

X

R

2%

S

R

o

Gl g

<

&

T

D AN

2

S

s

v

>

A

5

B

W

B

i

Wl

e

e

oo

o

o

o

;s

¥

B

R

-

o

P

s

> ts

>,

st

>

W o

:

sk

PR

o

N

By

<

&

%

S

&

o

5

% 4

e

o

-

e

s

P

P

o

»

A

S

&

i

e

o ey

oy

e

o

-t

D)

=

o

v

%

X

<

%

i~

ok

S

b e

R s

S

o

e

£

-

gt

”

¥

J

5

Tt

o

Ay

5

o

o

i

A

o

3

%

&

o

i~

>

=

T o i

3

=

ity

A

e i

25

e

N G

Ol

O

=

i

A3

o

N

e

ke

W

o

%

R

%

at

7

T

3

¥

=

o

@m

>

¥

T

<

P ey

-

v

g

s

>

7

-

o

o

@

i

.

o e

e

Ny

o

i~

e

e

i

-

A

o,

P

i

e

o

i

A

¥

¥

ot

G

&

5

o

&

@

N

B

9 e

S

et

o

<

s

o e

X,

e

7

Bt

e i

Ry

&

w

-

%

Rt

R

-

Ve

-

&

g

I

e

M

.m

e

S

A

s

0

G

ol

ok

o~

o

i

i

b i

e

i e i

o

S e,

7

o

>

2

o

&

e

W

P

et

T

5

&

e

i

b

7

W

ke

o

=

S e

e

>

@

o

¥

o

¥,

S

&8

<

%

8

Prs et

Py

3

g

L

o

O

s

e

e

e

g

i

'

o

&

o

o

ey

TV i e

W

A

®

o

e

%

Ve

<

.4

v

v

e

&

e

s

WS

2

&

ol

P

For

o

-

\“M

ey

PP

o

o

S

¥

&

Ky

i

Y

(i

"

o o

%

'

e

5

W

o

i

2

o

o

o

e

S

o

s

G

-

W

oy

S

o

e

2

i

e

4

£

b

T

P

.

)

-

.

o

i

o

b

-3

i

s

,

e

o

&

2

W

L

W Ty o

g

R,

¥

o

S

o &

o

pd

.

G

e

>

o

4 b &

S

A

ety

i

i

e

%

e

ot

5

T

3

v

o

T

o

o 3

&

L

w2

A

s

o

5

Ty

Lo

wie

‘r

i

iy

b

S

w5

o

oo,

o

>

£

R

S

Y

R

W

o

e

*

(s

P

.

¥

o

v

s

>

o

o

e

e

#,

¥

&

5

L

¥y

i

”

i

e

i

>

v

v

3%,

>

L

v ¥

e S

s

e

-

o

e

g

o

)

e

=

o

A

e

-

@

e

Py

A

"

W

&

P

G

b

-

L

-

o

e

T

P

v

%

i

(o

e

s

%

P

o

e

S

o

:

o

s

s

3o

>

>

¥

el

4

o

S

i

o

@

w

A

N

e

¥

M

P

s

TS

>

d

¥

v

A

e

o

=

25

e

N2

i

el

-

T

o

-

£

s

N

o

T

S

i

B

-

e v

o

R,

Rneh

v

w

o

e N

e

4

e

3

3

P

e

S

s

o

v

o

&

oty

e

&

i

Lo

e

i

Ty

W

N

o

o

R

0

e

@

i

>

3

s

o/

>

S

>

¥

o

Lol

P

w

e,

S

X

/

o

v

o

o

“

*

e

oy

falll

Vi

i

4

Ot

S

» e

e

o

>

#

.

)

4

-

v

»

ww

e

S

&

i

-

-

£

5

1

Pt o2y

S

o e

e

&

£

St

A

2

it

v

e

@

e

A

w

>

G

e A

>

ol

ot

%

25

s

#

Pl

u

e

e

i e v

v

o

%

Tt

ey

s

5

=

”

o

it

b

o

i

e

o

N

A

%

S

<R

=

A

S0

v

=

-

3

¥y

75

S

-

o

7w

oy

-

s

B

o

e

~

i

>

o

b

=

W

o

.

.

%

e

>

»

oy

P

&

>

7

Tt

Dl

M

s

e

N

3

v

X

%

.

”

%

v

ot

%

i

= g

< e

o

o

i

> e

a0

2

I

ety

gt

S

R~

e

¥

o

P

-

ot

D

K\H\

e

o

=

e

¥

iy

o

o

m

s

A

-

e,

@

W

v

e

)

e

S

T

T

A

N

5

e %

Ve

e G

4

5

W

)

s

o

o

#

P

i e

o

e

S

oar

i

B

TR

iy

*

o

~

S

s

e

o e

L

¢ e

=

v

%

-

o

e

T

o

B

L5

>

e

A

2

w

P

s

v

Sy

wie

o

~

R

o’

w3

R n

o

o

i

!

DU

S

&

o

o

e

e

oo

-

S

s,

A

o

v

PR

e

X

"

o'

3

-

S

-

n

s

A=

‘

Vo o

At

S

Py

iy

L

R

&

Ly

e

2

B

‘o

Pk

Tt

o

A

P

AR

D

e

.,

N

W

B

e

R

A

s

&

-

£

o 5

s i

o

-8

R

e

e

-

v

i

i

o

e

Aoy,

e

o

£

e

o

Vo g

gl

&

Fa

o

A

M

e

P

M

¥

&

94

>

Y

e

O

2

D

5

e

o

o

W

s

B

b

oo

T

R

(O

O

B

o

i

# T

A e

>

o

¥

W

R

N

!

i o o

o

b

S

%

ok

o

%

@

8

o

3

W

>

4

A

-

o

7

-

o

ey

o

¥

Pk

ot

%

Pl

Tt

L

>

W

2N

o

>

v

e

et

PP

o

ey

o

o

b

ol

¥ Ay

-~

o

s

4

r

¥

o

s

2

=

%

-

e

R

e

e

M

oy

Y

A 0

e

.

St e

G

e

o

Pt

s

M

M

7

@i

25

P

&

5

5

oy

i

S,

Ty

!

ed

o e

7

et

o

0.

S

Pegt

e

:

ey

55

P

o

¥

4

Sy

Bt

£ e

2

s

~

R

<

M

e

55

N

e

e

A

o

g

A

e

o

3

s

b

=

o

i

w

o

i

Pl

P

5

S

F e

s

e

ot

-

S

e,

&

ok,

gt

9

o

el

&

R

P

e

s

£

o

- o

&

g

-

e,

e

2

o

Sk

w

%

"

A

[

o

S

e

P

<

Sl SN i R

O

{

TR

e

w

%

¥

w

Y

Pl

U

o

o

s

et

P

b

i

P e

o

oy

-

o

-

o

e

e

<

v

o

&,

M

s

o

>

%

W

¥

v

e

&

ey

APl

s

o

o

S

e

ke

i

.w

b,

oV

e

o

e e

P

e

S

R AVt

e

b

e

<

’

o

o

i

o

o

e

o

\é

Pt

v

v

feaboon

v

S

T

5

ot o

-

w

"

&

5

"y

-

e

e

e

¢

o

ey

a

A

o

S

¥

Tk

w

M

¥

o

L%

ol

P,

.~

5

m

D

”

e

s

A

R

i

v

A

"

X,

w

e

P

5

ol

Concs

e

e

ey

o

ok s

i

o

e

£ o

S

"

W e

A

w

&y

A

bt

e

S

o

oy

v

5

s

o

i

3

e

iy

oy

o

o

o

o

i

o

w

v

o

P

I

*

oA

o

ot

%

,‘,

&

i~

r

£

"

>

b

=

o

& W

%

S

o

Yo

s

"

Pa

s

&

"

o

Pt

a”

v

-

e

.m

w\

Aty

ook

&

o

P

7

w

&

s

M

o

o

5

o

~

R

s

A,

S

e

s

b

RgE

=

e

5

T

A

S

S

K

—

&

o

W

-

o

%

>

>

g

5

e

-

&

o

4

e

>

R,

R

F5r

Ay

o

e

=

X

o

Sy

.

)

20

Al

ot e

A

o

> 5

3,

&

o e

St

e

o

Oy

w

o

W E

=~

"

o

o

o

"

O

o

.

e D

Bk

o

e

v S

e

&x

¢

¥

e

o

.

.

e

L

D

P

ru

o

-

A

¢

i

o

o3

o

5oy

e

We

# o

v

e

o

-

e

=

i

e

B

s

Y

thed

-,

.

&

e

EA

e

Yy

i

"

>

#

=

&

e

P

v

N

e

o

s

e

v

o

r

e

CoLs

o

o

o

e

o

.

Q

P

e

8.

o

%

g

o

‘

v

-

e

-

-

e

.3

s

e

4

22

p

4

o

e

2

”

2

o

>

9

g

S

av

o i

m

¥

m

o

s

i

Pt

-

o

o

o

e

e

-

v

u

v o

AR,

>

A

w

e

9

A

25

o

o

b

SR A

&

¥

%

¢

g

R

&

A

5

o

o

s Ao

o

&

.

i

M,

-

o Vo

o

P

s

i

M

X

e

o~

A,

e

A

S s

o

G

v T

i

S,

4.

e

-

8 N

e

>

g

Foun

o~

s

7

%

»

i

>

s

X

P

i

e

%

Cr

%

A A e

£ 3

P

e

%

Ll

At

v

W e

P

Pt

A

W

S

s

5

s

e 1

M.

i

5

2

Pl

o

g

u

e

’

¥

v

&

s

>

>

=

w

W

&

2

.

o

o vl S

"o

T

5

P

N

b

o e

PR

=

oy

e

o

S

v

h

e

Ay

N

et

%

,,

S

>

-

o

o

-

et

o A e

#iy

i

°

o

Pl

o~

Py

oy

¥

? g

&

75

e

Te

>

e

&5

!

o

R

Ry

o

s

&

T

X

s

N

e

P Sa

o

&

S

A

W

K

RS

o

P

P,

o

e

=

o

v

o

e

e

Y e A

&

S

e

o

o i o T

e

8t

sl

i

s

%

oo

Pl

S

hif

el

W

RIS

el

P

i

0

i

o

i

A

Ay

5

2

o

Bevs

b o

¢

<

et

W

it

e o

@

S

o

*

&

W

XS

B

o

e

W

b

Py

e

W M e A

[

W

B

e

¥

i

&

P

e

#

¥

o

A

o

22

&

L

e

P

2

T

o

b

e

e

o

g

o

N

S

K

v

<

s

.

A

Kt

X

bR

¥

s

s A

o

e

X

¢ i

W

W

&

e

VI N

%

e

A

e

%

e

s e

b

S

ot

&

~

Ty

o o o

o

e

B

s

o

Pl

A

A

i

.

o

i

o

A o

&

o5

s

A

%

NH

o

N

o

M

W

fy

v

>

N

.

o

&

>

Ber Ve

&y

b

A

o

W

S e,

G

S

%

¥

e

Ty

Hoy

P

e

P

i

&

»

v

S

&

Pty

i

e

i

R s

O

%

w

S

e

e

e

%

=

%

S e

A

%

-

'

v

"

e

g

e

i

<

e

w

W

oo

S e

G o S

-

o e

e

A

S e

Y e

s

S0

5,

-

&

P

&%

o

B

2

o

e

Sy

(st

ey

5

G

Ve

e

S g ey

e

LR

%

o 0%

S

o

e i

e

Py

e

e.,

Frir G G

5

X

S

e

e

e Yo

e

A

*

W

w

A

S

-

»

0

%

Ar

T

Sy

Foa

o

<

e

P

(3

o

"~

bl

3

S

o

v

e a4

P

R

o

%

e

o

P

e

G

:

b

O

%

mw

b

v g

s

oy

FR

o

o

s

8

-

o

G e

%

'

A

s,

.

2

P

v

¥

Catr

B

e

S

v

e

Uy

o

o

et

¥

G e 4

G 1

o

whe

P

4

4w,

o

P

o

e

%

o

2o

O

X

o

5

P

v

Sy e

W

XS

e

s

W

e

P

5

>

%

5

e

S

TS

¥

e

o 2

Col

s

‘“

o

o

Sy

!

iy

i

)

A

Vg

£

ot

i

&

s

S

o

e

Nl

Y

b

s

b

S

o,

™

%

e

A

"

i

i

T

s

>

e

w3

g

i

S

B

s

e

S e

W

e

o e e

¥

Wl

oA

P

2

s

s

&

o+

¥

FBNP

T

ek

P

s od

o

PoX

e

o

S

o

&

S

e

o

N e

-

P

&

-2

AL

S

e

S

¥

>

«

.w

=y

-

e

Ny

e

-

e

<

oy

72y

M

e

VL

P s

i

P

P

P

w

w

W

M

B

£5

o

Rt

o

&

%

-

&

L

i

et

2

A

B

@

A

¥

ke

R

£

S

e

-

e

B

%

i

e

oy

s

ot o g

>

o

oy

o

£

=

v

&

P

s

o

o

s

e

v

24

5

-

7

G

2

o

v

Y

&

VA

<

¥

s

A

e

e

nr

e

s

oS s

o

e

w

b

i

s

o

e

B

N

.

s

P

o A

o

A

e e S

o

A

.m

b

A

7

o

>

e

.

Lo

o

v

o

e

P

g

.

e

o

s

o

%

o

5

i

£

i,

A

5

&

Sk

o 5

-

~

>

Sy

A

e

e

s

S

>

m

7

P

£

e

¥

o

a~

P

«

e

R A

s

B

s

)

W

&

el

.

S

el e

w

P

o

N

=

g

e

=

o

s

s

-

-

&

3

e

e

>

i i i

bt

o

oy

o

e

o

s

T

S

5

o

#hs

e

~

A

o

P

S5

-

-

¥

e

,.

P

o

F AR g

P

~

S

Sy

s

e

A

w

e

>

>

e

o

&

i

b

WA SRR

R

e

P

o

*

&

5

v

%

e 7

e

Pk

P

v

%

&

-

ey

5

T

e

o

o

o

St

\.u

&

LR

!

e

-

o

P

J

ok

A

W,

oy

vy

N,

=

e,

-

>

i

o,

&

@

.

e

R

g

S

o

i

e,

A2

o R R

b

-

il

-

+7

# o

S7A

M

o

3

7

s

7

&

i

o

s

>

i

Sy e

0 -

55

o

¥

>

~

e

o

A

N

.

s

&

o

A

5

e

¢

o

w

5

&g

&

o

o

3

o S

- e

b 0,

o

%

¥

S

P

5

£

\s

M "

o

5

D

S

s

P

e

e

e

el dy e

T

o

P

P!

o

i

i

-

)

5

e

e

2

o SN A

e

A

e

v

o

p o

&

e

T

W

v

e e

P

A

e

%

Sa v

hedie

e

i

&

S

T

LA e e

A

e

o

R A

G

iy

PR

apo

w5

B e

S

2

o

i w

2

.

%

o e

D%

St

~

<

T

R

o

e

>

e

&

S

Lo

e

e v

i

i

iy

iRy

o

w,

i

o

N

& o

3

=

2

S

‘m

=

S

o

B

P

RS

Sy

N g

i

o

i

i

i

D

&

A

¥ e W

B

o

R e 4P e

“a

=0

.

o

m

-

e

e

5

ek

oy

A A B

W

5

5

.

ok

e W T

@

¥

s

A

v

e

P

>

e

s

i

2

4

PN

et

-

ey

iy

e

e,

2

o

\

e

i

e

R

o

o

o

%

T

s

i

e

5o

G

Bl I i

T

25

e

e

wr

A

o

L)

oS

e

s

o

o

W

e e

b

-

o

S

P

v

A

=

oo

o

Sy

oo

o

7

e

«M

it

Py

.

¥ 4

e

e

Nale

o

2

i

Pl

A

e

£

m

ey

e

Vo

¥

s

-

b

e

5yt

N

b

A

£

S

2y

%

=

AL

i

%

1

et

i

<

e

i

N R AN

i

M

o

o

&

A

>

o R

A

oo

Ay

s

o

ey

o

5

P

i

iy

oy

S

P

ot

s

s

o

w

'3

e

o

(o

M

P

e A % 3

i

o

wv

‘M

i

v

N

G

N

S

Pt

>

o

e

i~

5

b

Y

v

o

o

ol

A

o

R

i

v

X

O

Co

e

S

o g

N

T

ot

o

.

Pt

o~

o

=,

4

>

w

v

Lo

>

i

£

G

S

5 e i

o

Sy

ol

7

%

e

>y

o

P

{

o

R

£

i

v

R

-

v W

e

o

e

W

o

e o

;

W

Ch

SRR 8

i

¥

e

%,

w

m

b

@

>

v

Pt

Lo

P

it

3

i

v

o

7o

A5

v

#

¥y

R

¥

#

e

o

o

s

S

p

&

e S N

o

W

B,

Y

A

A

&)

o

o

o~

e e e g

o

#

A

0

o

AT e

e

o

ey

e

>

i

o G

¥

o A

e

# 4

;

o

i

et

4

m.

i

g

o

S

~

e

L

o

%

&

£

s

7

52

o

&

Fe

L

1

s

i

s

@

%

R

ol

e

by

o ad

&)

%

o

K

*

o

o~

o

o e

-

O

o g

St

A S N

%

s

okl o i A

S

%

5

"

ol

@

5

s

P

¥

55

~

<

&

vt

b

el

Sl

o

7o

w

o

A

o

M

S

&

N

e

.

g

o

%

e

A

™

>

5

m

P s

<4

eV

o

§ e,

©

s

5

&

o

o

DR

i

o 5 v s

N

%y

e

o

s

S

-

e

%

i~

i

.

\M

P

s

A i

e

7o

IO

S

G

-

W

L

"

v

e

e

¥

‘s

oL

s

o

St e

"

i

7

O

5

o

S

&

N

™

o

v

e

>

Sy

o

v

e

S

o

s

A

o

N

g

R

>

P

e o

Rt

e

o

&

P

o

'

i

w

%

£

g

o

o~

i~

e

e

»

o

e

O

M.

s

T

o

ey

s

S

#

%

&

D

.

v

£

Ea

o

e

o

v

i

A,

e

w

%

o

e

%

s

¥t

P v

Pt

,w

P

b

5

o

s

e

Y

X

O

ot s

P

>

rer

&

0

G

&

v

Sy

YT

X

F

o

e

=

i

v

o

o

e

&

WA

&5

ghan

o

¥

e

5 5

e

i ot

o

o Pk

B

¢ o

e

s

¥

3

s

>

FoF e

S s

(e

S

e

o

o

ar

&

R

m

et s

o

o

3

e

5

S

s

o

o

;w

<,

o

'S

5

~

P

-y

N

g

e

S

o

S

S

5

s

o

5o

&

&

m

e

e

&

o

™

w

-

e, o e ey

& i e

e e

,v

>

&

e

el

4 g o

&

Pl

X

iy

it

i

i

vl

e

Ky

o

>

e

e

L

=

o

oy

o

<

o P

W

3

A

s

s

3

s

-

Bt

4

Sl

.

N

S

o

o

.

A

G

2

o

R

Fod

F

%

¥

e g

A

o~

¥

25

i

5

£

e iy

s

o

«

¥

X

T

B

e

il

T

&

et

oy

O

s

s

-

Place

5

i i

&

o

i

o

s

%

o

FE Y SV

=~

RN G

,\

e

%

o

A,

R o o

>

V5

P

i

R

o

i

s

D e

¥

-

-

R

S

o

o

¥

e

e

o

S

At

A s

>

.

g

br

R

-

e

W

ety

o

Rk

G

o

v

i

T

T

o

¢

Ay

-«

&

o

e

W

s

B

S

o5

A

AN

v

e

o

P

o]

o

2

Dy

b

‘s

#

s

o,

7y

il

-

Vs

o

S

o

T

P

7

o’

Ao

s

s

e

%

&

i

4

e

o

oA

.

”

"

R

o

"

i

xS,

,,

5

5

o

5

o

>

-

2

P

2 g

o

P

A

o

e

% e S AW,

W

e

B

B

P N N

M

oA

s

o

b

-

e

P

P

T

o

2

2

e

5

o

2

Py

g

m

i

o e

i

S

o

SR

v

¥

v

s

e

e

i

4

o

L

e

-

.

G b %,

st

-

e

.

W

S

" o

e

e

&%

e

2

e 2

i

o

m«\

A

7

s

L

o

s

3

!

?

p.

A

o

o D

s

i

-

o

*

%3

o

W

&

Y

w

o

Y

P

"

o

iy

P

S

g

o

Bt

Es

¢

S

e

Ty

7

“w

o

N W A A N

Ut

Ny

o,

=

S

e

P

>

5

bt

£,

e 4

S

4

P

L

&%

o

o

9

%

%

vy

pigd

s

%

w

"

P

Pt

W

&

Di

-

s

e o

AL

¢

PR 4

&

e

o

X

L

o

R

o e

S

ol

o

-

s

s

&,

s

A b

4

s

e

o

o

e

&

vy

50

"

o

%

%

e

-

@

&

b

A

e

4

i

£y

i

¥

S

“

v

s

1

v,

o

g

For

o

S,

g

R

¥

R

P

5

&

o g

.

A

o

K e

N

S5 e

e

e s

S

-

i,

£

P

b,

Y

e

e

P

i

o

v

N

e

>

£

e

e

>

e

e

i

W s

e

o

.

e

G

oA

e

-

&3

Yo

o

4

f

ot

&

PEIRe

£

P

£

s

Vo

L.

A o

s

e

A

e

FG

O

o

SNy

e

e

3

'

7

e

o

e

e

e

o

N

4

N

o

A

-

7

W

s

m

e

S

v

A

o

o

o

w

5

2

é

L

5

m

oLy

&

T

m

S

P

4

oL

B

o

i

>

W

e

e

S

v,

e o

T8 e

W

%

ot

e

R A S b

g

¢

G

g

e

&

A

s

e S

o

<,

e

&

i

ot

e

e

s

e

Tt

">

i

*

o~

w

5

o

5

T

»

A o

®

>

it

v

NS e T A S

e

S

4

%o’

Y

¥

%

Sy

o5

3

&

P

£

o

o

7o

2

«H

%

S ot

C

&

ST

o

NP

i

s

&

he

N A

&

A

¥

e

Sty

.

Booav e

S

o

o

R

e

o

o

s

>

s

i

i

W'

)

¥

s

o

o s

w

o G i

e

R

hot

s

e

Y

w

*

o e

P

if:

Bs oy

-

7

.”

i

i 8

"

¥

e o

W

4

o

e

S

Ay

o

S A

s g

e

WS

e

e

o

G

o

"

o o

&

.,

o

<

F

s

o

oy

2.

i

A

wr

e

9

S

e

o+

S

&

Mgty

e

S

DTATS

-

e L

o

o

e

o

Lt

4

S

wr

iy

"

po o~

e

o

P

5

v

oy

S Ay

%

o

%

S

S

R

&5

.

Pt

S o

e

s

S

54

s

5

P

R iy

w

>

5

o

s

o

e

b2

7

.

o

e

Far

oY

*

o

&

"ty

S

s

o e

-

A

@

Lg

<

e

Al as

g

S

7y

=

>

>

i

N

SRS

Sty

e e s

>

e

,

AT

i

5

i

S

s

o

"

B

e

2

"

PP

e

o

o

g

g

-

a2

o

-

£

5

sy

5

s

o e

$

P,

Sy

o

~

o

e

s

o

&

S

R R

e

AR 1

T

o

)

%

&

i

S

i

FarE

o

e

s

.H

SE P

e

T

Gy

L0

s

&

s

!

i

&

o

i s

o

S

o

R A

A

A

i

o

o T

s

%

e

&

S

>

e

i 4P

o

b

s

e

o

¥

e

T

e

<

g

%

o

wn

o

o

oA

S

o

2

b

e

o

i

%

5

s

e

r g

o

#

v

&

£

o

e

e

"y

W

T

Py

&'

R

o

i

CoR

e

i

K

&

>

v

T

WS

Fe

G

A

y

s

e

b

£

.

=4 e

AR

&

%

e o

™

v

.

o

-

N

S

R

o e

e

-4

*

#

7

o

Pt

e

B

&

L

&

S

Foy

Ry

i~

&)

S

D

G

P

T e

5

R

&

s

SN e

3

e

g

o

LA

BT

&

5

P

A

e

M

v

v

S

"

R

as

W

N

A

e e

R N,

ko,

2

ey

o

LT

e

>

%

5

"

5

P

Tue

53

PP

B0

L

ey

i

e

i,

5

o

Ty

S

e

o

P

Ll

s

J

P

L

R

et

£

&

o

LA

3

2

%

i

r

o

S

R

o

o™

&

P

L

o

M3

s

P

e

i

oo

o

L,

S

&

K

%

¥

W

.M

#

%

e

Sy

N

w0

¥

o

&

ok

£

o

G

el

7

A

e

5

L

ol

R ]

e

.

2

o

PR

b

.

e

o

&

-

o

&

w3

T

s

b

S

W

A

o

»

v

%

R A

e

>

S

e

%

&

i

e

i

5

5

>

b

h\

o

Epg k.

,.

P

Sl

i o i

i

L4

%

o

u

e

L

R

ey

<

4

o

e

o

£

o

s

>

L

e

v

SR

o

N

s

B

S TS

v

v

¥

-

o

e

o A

o

WS

o

o

g

o

BLiced

%

o

w

W

o

Sl

i

ey

-

N

>

o

3

e

#

o

P

R o

Fed

"

=

By

et

ey

3

e

o

S

s

v

~ !

s

L

0

i

w

&

m

H

e

o

o

P!

Ay

e

-

R

&

AR e g0

S

S

i

P

o

byt

S

o

o,

T

et

-

S

3

“ar

Rt

TN

o

- h

N

b

Ay

R

-

b

S

A

>

T

s

¥

¥y

‘\

A

£

P

e

e P F P

5

b

Exe

C

£

,

b

L

s

2

o

2

o

o

£

=

o

@

o

WA

b g

5

O

S

s

S

R

e e ek

5

~

e

o TR A,

X

W

R

£

P

&

o

S

A

~

o

Ve

s

@

e

z

e

[

e

e h

N

&

@,

st

;

7

A

e

A

e

P

D

L

#

o

o

PO

e

P

i

e

e

e

7

ey

7o

B

%

guAa

¥

’

£

R

o

#

o

"

i

e

T

&

k(u #

W

‘o

e

s

s

..

k4

bh ¥

I e

SR AN Dt

o

o

s

%

-

e

o

w o

R

A

&

=

£

is

S

s

o

%,

g

.

P

N

A

e

w

S

"

-

Pt

b

o

ol

i

%

o

s

o

o

&

o

el

O

e

a

e

it

Aty

e

B

P

s

%

vr

g

e

8%

3

2

o7

Ay

e

b

R

s

o N

0

W

e e

e

o

N

s

~/

%5

ok

&

5

el

7

M.

oty

v

&

s

%

/e

&

)

&

A S

o

o

ik

B

g

L5

&

»

i,

St e

)

R

%

o

S

P

¥

7o

s

s

£

o

i

s

S

e

o

e

PR Gy

£

o

2

s\m.ﬂ

3

G

e

oo

.y

S

203

=

e v

R e

oot

.

. o8

e

i

e

A

e

o

A

e

2

o

¢

e

»

e

%

o

e

g A A

%

S

W

e

W

Py

ot

Wi

St

S

o

M

R

o

4

sy

&

o

e g

P

&

o S

e P

e

o

SO

1

s

o

R

*

it

BB

o AL

o

&

e

o

W

s

o S

L

0

o

A

%

i

o

S

e

e

'

o

W

o

!

P B S

P

(T

o R

Sy W e

>

FouE.

!

A

o s

£

e

2

Lo

SR

o

T

AR

WARI I

'

X

P

Tt

W

i

S

iy

S

&

"

S

W

~

Ll

B

A

A

R s

"

o

il

e

o @

oA

W

N g N

s

T s

S

W s s

T

o

S

£

i

L

o

»

2,

e

e

&

e

poalat

s

A s

o

et

S

x

e

G

R e

e

2

R

W

iy

2y

o

ol

£

PRl

g

~

ik

e

*

T

A S T

@

-

&

“

L S

#

o

s

R

S e o

g

<,

e

e

PR

e

o e

ol

A

-~

B,

W

ey

e

5

7

TR

L

v

o

AL

AL g

v

o

S

S e

s

e

R

&

%

el

o

i

e

e o

oF,

ety

e

S

b

g

Al

oo

R i A

S

i

o

e

e

£

e

o

gy

b

:

-

%

oo

Sy

e

!

W

o]

¥

N

55

S

A

o

et

-

e

@

s

el

o

e

N

%

o

ot

Pl

.

e

s

St

£

S

e

2

.

il

&

0%

o

Sy

4

&

S G

o

2,

S

m

i

e

<

s

SN

R

Ny

it

2

-2

W

e A

s

(O

o

o

e

27

o,

e

S g

o

4

o

AL

o

ey

%

o

%

e

R

A

e

Y

i

3!

e

s

R

-~

o

¥

7

¥

S

s

FAs

o

£

P

£z

W%,

o

s

o

Tk

PO

S

e g

e

e

&

£,

S

s

o

For

e

G

SRR

<

7

&

Sy

o

&

G

Sk

P

e A

AN N

s

A

A

e

I

g

W

.

W

.

e

B

S e

s

2

Vil

e

ey o

‘!\

£

A

i

&

P e

S ol

i

e,

o

s

i

S

R

Fe

S

EERTy

o

el

P

o

v

e

i

S 9 e oy

R e

e g

S

S e

e

N ay

5

o

%

o

e

‘s

ot

%

v,

i

3

o

S e e

ik

v

gty

iR

;

&

X

“

v

P

Ol Sl

r

£

w

£s

L

¥s

o

o

PAFLAIO

AP S

et

2

Ly

Syt

e

Ly e

%

£

s

>

)

&

i e

P

e g

7

A R g

o

2

fo

e

S

b

e

o

K el

e

T

e

e

o

sl

o

e

w

e

o

e

w’

S

5

<

4 e

A Mg

A

5

A

s

P

5

&

#

&

>

ol oty

o

P L P

iy P

Rea AR

P

o

S

%

W

Ty

e

SN S S

A

"

e

<

s

i

or

M e

s

o

B

Sy

g

ka4

o

#%

B

3G

o

0%

P R

i

"~

T

o

G

R

T

A

4

R

G

iy

5

2

S

A

s

:

e

P

55

o

£

e

P

i

S

S

)

.

T A T

s

i

st

3

o

7

7

T

A

25

Sl

Sy

o

e

y

oy

'

“

e

;

St

e

R

i

B

e

e

e

i

5

b

A

%

!

s

o

e s e

=

e

e

PRGN

e

4

Vi

P

%

o

s

s

Pl

oy

¥

P

S

e

S

g

e

PRSI SIS

el

ey

<

Dt

g

Fld o o

Yo

s

& g

S

el A

Cols

£,

A,

oS

e

S

e

o

R

%

s

%

g

s

S

2

o

-

M

5

D i

e

G i,

<

e

P

ot

e

P o

ks,

A

R

et 5

S

2

e

P

e e

o

P

.

7o

7

9w

M

£

o

s

T

£

E s

o

7

e

PP

i

2

o

e

e

I S o NP

Sy

iy

3

S5

S

P

P

A

o s

3

4

o i

o G e R

.

e

qw

A

e

SO

o

oy

g

e,

&

&

e

e

SO

s

5

B

o

=

s

s

A

o

<

e

e

o

"4

o

W

s

.

4

Pt St

v

s

= o

i

et

e

S

7

24

k.

e

S

Lo

7

R i

£

R s

¥

U AL A i

-

L

W

e

Rl

A S A

<

o

&

A

L

a

o

o

O

o

T

g P e ol

e

e

o A

s

W

R

s

i b

o

P

7o

s

T

T

Fod

>

S

¥

i

&

A

T

PN

P

e

g

o

>

o

‘Y

25

2:

o

ol

e

Sala

s

73

=

3%

S

oty

%

s

RN

R

o,

>

<

A

%

N

ght

e,

SRR

S

b o

N

o

e

s

&

i

£

R

S

"

o S

AT

i

ok

s

s

e

o)

roF

%

e

G

¥

A

s

%

&

T A

i

E A

Ll

S

v

S

A

E

P

A

ok

i

i

AP

i

e

Sy

2w g

T

ot

o

s

(v\

o

5,

o

S

i

s

ol

AL

o

i e

b

o

s

4

<

=

o

S P 0P D

.

S

R

s

e

o

R KL

o

s

R

A

o

4

=

(¥

A

A

s

o

1

i P g

P

T

&

ool

s

A

2

.

>

£

e

e

i

o

i

.

S

A

s

e

.wﬁ

o

e

£

o

S

e

S

%

e

2

o e

sy

e

ey

e

v

T

4

&S

L

o

o

i

et

X g

o

e

5

ey

O

v

o

T

T

K20

s

e

PR

S

X

R

&

s

&

A o

P g

P

2

e

5

!

M

%

<

>

7o

e

e

R

v

£

P

.

o

e

R

o

S i

R

R

e

%

e

SR s

o

e

3

B e

o

5

Li

A

Sy

SEE A

L

;

s

%

N

e

i

L

P

R

e

e

sy

S

e

o

Yo

n

o

o

e

T

e

Yo

o

e

S

b

e

o

’

T

£

e

Ly

o

A

o

e

A

v

oyt

Tl

o

el

L

b

A5

s

2

&

4

SFNe

-

#

%3

e

£

R

ol

&

o

AP f g

e

=

e e %

R i 4

s

5

e

o

S

CslA

O

P

2

¥

W

A

A

o

O

$or

S

B B o &

&3

*

G

&

St

ww&

s

el

-

)

e

R,

el

¥

S

>

S

oA

P

g

v

s

Lo o

S

K

s

&

"

L5

v

S

s

e

%

A

A

s

o

o

o

S

5

5

o

e

5

0

L

A N

o

%

A

L

i

!

v

Ox!

s,

s

(s

g

7S

e

o

i

K

i

L

R

L

ol

&

4

ol

4s

-

0

.

iy

o5

e

e

w

ol

A

S,

e

A

G

o

ok

W

ey

o

”

s

oy

>

o

A

>

o

o

s

i,”

e

ol o

&4

g

it

Sy

T

R

e b

e

oo

Col s

Mo

¥

e

"

R

B

73

S

S

B S

£

gl v

'

Sy

5

P

¥

p

L

s

s

Ll

g

E

W)

CH0s

W

S

3

s

P

L

A

iy

>

A e

S

e

e

s

W

ot

o

oy,

o o 4

o

=

R

%

e

7

e

9. o

e

e

3

W,

e

e

4

W

E I

i o

W

S

. #

pe 4

g

b5

=

&

£ty

ol

o g

v

A

P

gt

e

. 48

o

Ay

5

N A

e

Ve

Fre

£ g

o

N,

oo

e

P

oy

Y

e

R

i

e

Ty

o

G

,iﬁ%

:

e

AR

R

@

C, R B

o

o

fily

2

bl

e

S

e

ey

oy

v,v

Ex

AN E

Sy

e

o

A

S

i

3

R

b

e

A

e

SR

5

vl

o

>

o

s

<

fe o8

-

!

S

o

i

a4

s

X

o

ke

£l ot

£

LR

Lol

BN

£

o

&

P

e g

S

&

T

T

&

uwam

R

o

23

& ﬁé

i

o

W

s

R

dre

)

S

o

s

.

R e e

Bt

o

£

s

:

o

e

o

£

=

¥

o

i

i

o

s

LTS

=

o

-

.

"

-

.W

i

s

By

™

-

e

oS

s

"

o

o

s

o

5

a0

g

e

=

o

s

i

o

x:

5t

S5

P

=

s

5

2

=

=5

Loty

g

PR

i

i

gl

e

-

S

o s

i

o

e

el

3

S

e

.

<L

s

o

©

o

.

¢

=

i

=

i

e

-

#

4

o

&

-

¥

B

G

SRR

i

o

e

G

GESCH EN(K

(7 ot 44

Ly

N12<519761940 021

R RN Ew

b

&

]

|

A GRAMMAR

OF THE

KANNADA LANGUAGE

IN ENGLISH

COMPRISING THE THREE DIALECTS OF THE LANGUAGE

(ANCIENT, MEDIZVAL AND MODERN)

BY

THE REV. Dr.

F. iR T TEL

AN

Gel’

Al

N

4

\

.

—

':::

uﬁ

'\}N”_’

&

i

X

:

(9!-;

4\f

ree 0

v

MANGALORE

BASEL MISSION BOOK AND TRACT DEPOSITORY

1903

-

(2

Sioy

S

Q

%

S

46

“\99150‘

b,

5

‘é

Ei:l

C

g@r(‘

N

2y,

%,

JARGAINSS

AT

SNARS. 8

4

;’//ﬁ

=

e

£

PREFACE.

et

The present Grammar is chiefly based on Késava’s Sabdamauidarpmm.

The terminology of this his Grammar is simple, and fit for the three

dialects of Kannada.

At the same time it will be interesting to learn

the general way of an ancient native scholar’s teaching Kannada

grammar.

In Késava’s age most of the rules of Kannada grammar were fixed.

That

before him there had been grammarians who had not deserved that name, seems

to follow from his quoting a part of a Kanda verse that is fully quoted in the

Sabdanusisana (under its sttra 469), from which we translate it as follows —

‘Remain, O daughter! Could the unprofitable grammarian (sushkavaiyakarana),

the unprofitable sophist and the rustic have as (their) subject matter the gem of

poetical composition which is the subject matter of the assemblage of very clever

poets ?’

Some specific statements of Késava concerning his predecessors or conte.mpo-

raries are the following—

He considered it a matter of necessity to caution literary writers against using

final ] in several Kannada words, as only rustics would do so (§ 228).

He teaches (§ 252) that if there exist Tadbhavas of two words compounded, both

words ought to be in their Tadbhava form.

In this respect he quotes an instance

from his great predecessor Hamsaraja (of A. D. 941, according to Mr. B. Lewis

Rice), viz. taravél manikyabhandarada putikégalam, which, he says, is a mistake

(tappu), as manikabhandarada would be right (Suddha).

He says that in satisaptami (§ 365) which always refers to two subjects, the

letter & is to be used:; by some (of his predecessors or contemporaries) al has,

without hesitation, been. employed for it; clever people do not agree to that.

Then he quotes two sentences with al, and calls them wrong (abaddha).

He states (very probably in order to counteract a tendency of that kind) that to

form kaniks, téralike, panike of kin, pan, téra] (which formations are frequently

found at least in the medixval dialect) is faulty, as the suffix iké should not be

added to verbs ending in a consonant (see § 243, 4, 5).

iv

PREFACE.

When introducing the suffix tana, he teaches that it is not to be used for

Samskrita words, as e. g. 4rdhakatana would be wrong (abaddha, § 243, 4, 14).

That he certainly has done so for the above-mentioned reason becomes evident by

the fact that the Sabddnusisana (under its stitra, 431) adduces unnatatana and

pannatatana as instances of ancient usage.

He states that to form a causative verb, e. g. khandisisu, to cause to cut,

from khandisu, to cut, a verb derived from a Samskrita noun, is not allowed

(§ 150, remark), which statement probably also opposes a tendency of grammarians

(or poets) towards doing so.

He says that nouns ending in a consonant do not insert in before the & of the

genitive, except pagal and irul; to form e. g. bémarina, manalina, mugalina is a

fault (d6sha, § 121, @ 6). It follows from his opposition to such forms as bémarina

that they had already come or were coming into use.

He states that forms like nodidaparm, mﬁ@idapa{n are not used as declinable

krillingas (§ 194, remark 2); but according to the Sabdénusisana (sttras 447. 448.

544) they were used as such, because its author Bhattikalankadéva adduces

nbdidapanam, kididapanam, madidapangé, irdapana as ancient formations,

He says (see § 240, remark) that some (grammarians or poets) who are fond

of a practice that is connected with grass (satrinAbhyavaharigal), do not consider

that abnormity does not enter in poetical prose, and use a short letter followed by

an initial letter which is a compound with répha, as sithila ; such disgustful persons

(arbéigal) do put it in poetical prose without calling it a blame (tegal). *

The author hopes that the remarkable fact that Kannada and the

other Dravida languages have no relative promoun (§ 174), has been

satisfactorily explained and established by him (§ 330), and that the

origin of the negative form of the verb in Dravida has been made evident

by him (§ 210), two subjects which (he may remark) used to puzzle

European scholars.

See also his explanation of the participles (§§ 169.

185) and of the infinitive (§ 188).

As to the age of Kannada poets Mr. Rice’s Introduction to his edition

of the Sabdanusisana (p. 11 seq.) should be consulted.

* Here the remark may be added that according to the Sabdinusbsana (under its sitra

288) the pronoun nam (which is not mentioned by Késava, § 137) was agreed to by some

of the great poets of the northern way, whereas those of the southern one were siding with

am. According to Nripatunga's Kavirdjamarga (1, 36) of the 9th century the region in

which Kannada was spoken, extended from the Kavéri as far as the Godavari.

" PREFACE.

v

Regarding the comparison of Dravida languages see <A Comparative

Grammar of the Dravidian or South-Indian Family of Languages, by the

Rev. R. Caldwell, 0. p., LL. D, etc., 2nd edition, 1875, London, Triitbner &

Co.’ Dr. Caldwell in his work is inclined to think that Dravida exhibits

close traces of relationship to the languages of the Scythian group.

The Publications consulted for the present grammar are, besides the

Sabdamanidarpana. the following —

1

The Karpataka Sabdinusisana (see p. 4, note).

2. Nudigattu. A Kannada Manual of School-Grammar, by Dhondo Narasimha

2nd edition.

Mulbagal, Kannada Teacher, Training College.

Mangalore, Basel

Mission Press, 1894.

3

Kannada Schoolbooks, by native authors.

Bombay, the Department of

Public Instruction.

Printed at the Basel Mission Press, Mangalore, 1882—1898.

4. An Elementary Grammar of the Kannada Language, by the Rev. Thomas

2nd edition.

Hodson, Wesleyan Missionary.

Bangalore, 1864.

5

2nd

A Practical Key to the Canarese Language, by the Rev. F. Ziegler.

edition.

Mangalore, Basel Mission Press, 1892.

6

Nagavarma’s Karpitaka Bhashabhtishana (of about the beginning of the

12th century), edited by B. Lewis Rice, u. r. . s., etc.

Bangalore, 1884.

(.

A Kannada-English Dictionary, by the Rev. F. Kittel.

Mangalore, Basel

Mission Press, 1894.

8

Very valuable Inscriptions published in the Indian Antiquary and Epigraphia

Indica, by J. F. Fleet, »u. 0., c. 1. E., etc.

9

Elements of South-Indian Paleography, by A. C. Burnell, Ho~. pH. D. of the

University of Strassburg, ete.

Mangalore, Basel Mission Press, 1874.

10. A Sanskrit Grammar for Beginners, by Professor Max Miiller, m. 4.,

London, 1866.

Special thanks are due to the SECRETARY OF STATE For INDIA for his

generous aid by ordering a certain number of copies of the forthcoming

Grammar for the Home Department in Calcutta and by inducing the

Governors of Madras and Bombay and the Governments of Mysore and

of His Highness the Nijam to take a considerable number of copies of

the work in advance whereby the Publishers have been enabled to carry

it through the Press.

VI

PREFACEK.

The author would also gratefully acknowledge the encouragement

he has received from the interest that several gentlemen have taken in

his composing the present Grammar, of whom he may mention Mr. B.

Lewis RICE, . I E., M. R. A, 8., Director of the Archzological Researches

in Mysore; the Rev. G. RicutER, late Inspector of Schools in Coorg;

Dr. E. HurrzscH, Government Epigraphist, Bangalore; Dr. J. F. FLEET,

BO. C. S,, M. R. A. 8., C. L. E., and Professor R. GARBE, PH. D., Tiibingen.

As the author lived in Germany, the printing was carried on in India,

and proof-sheets could not be sent to him for correction, there occurs

an unusual number of misprints; but a corrected list of the errata will

enable the student to set them right before perusing the Grammar.

Finally the author quotes for his work the words of Késava (sttra

and vritti 4) —«<If there are any mistakes (dosha) in this (my) Sabdamani-

darpana, may the learned (first) thoughtfully listen, and (thgn) with

mercy combined with gladness of heart rectify them.”

Tiibingen, 5th February 1905.

IR

S35

O

<

3

— gy

TABLE OF CONTENTS.

Pages.

Introductory observations

-

.

o

1—3

I

On the form of the signs that are us

ed z;s I:ett(;x's (Alphabet, ;tc.).

4—22

29

II1

On roots or verbal themes

.

- —

29

v

29—87

On declinable bases (Declension)

On verbs

.

88—163

VI

On adverbs, ete.

.

164—169

VII

Euphonic junction of letters

170—185

VIII

.

185—198

Particulars of some letters, also in prosody,

IX

On primitive nominal bases

198—200

On

secondary nominal bases

200—207

XI

On

compound bases

207—218

XII

On

verbal declinable bases

218—222

XIII.

On

pronouns

222—242

XIV

On

adjectives

242 —251

XV

On

numerals

251—260

XVI

On

a

.

.

260—300

adverbs (again)

XVII.

On

the repetition of nouns, pronouns, adjectives, numerals, adverbs,

interjections, and imitative sounds

.

.

.

300—311

XVIII.

On

the expression of ‘other’, on the article, and on the expression of

311—31+4

‘only’, ‘alone’

XIX

On

additional tense-forms of the verb

314—330

XX

On

so-called auxiliary verbs .

330—342

XXI

On

either—or ; neither—nor; whether—or; the—the; as—as; for;

namely, as follows; what

is that?; what happened?; in this

manner; as—so; how much—so much, how many—so many;

when ?; who—he, ete.

343 —352

On

XXII

the verbs én and an

352—359

XXIII

On

359—362

illadé, alladeé, altu

XXIV.

On

the repetition of verbs, and on the combination of certain verbs

362—376

XXV

On

comparison

376—380

XXVI

On

syntax

.

380—432

XXVII

On

)

°

432 — 439

words corrupted from Samskrita

XXVIII

On

the doubling of consonants

.

439 —442

On a number of words contained

in various places

of the éab.dénuéﬁsana

442 —456

Index

.

-

.

.

457—478

Corrections and Addit.ioue".

-

479 —483

=

===

=

=~

S

==

=

=

=

=

=4

p—

R

SUNPHRS——

RE——

A

GRAMMAR

OF THE

Kk 2N NADA LANGLUALE

I. Introductory observations

1

The term Kannada (¥3®), the Canarese of European writers, is formed

from Kar-nadda (¥0°-3980), the black cultivated country,-referring to the black

soil, commonly called cotton soil, which characterises the plateau of the Southern

Dekkan (3% ). In the Samskrita language the term appears as Karpata (¥m2r &)

and Karnataka (Fmor &F).

Kannada is the appellation of the Canarese country

and its language. "

2. Kannada is spoken throughout Mysore, the Southern Mahratta country,

in some of the western districts of the Nijam’s territory (as far north as Bidar),

and partly in North Canara on the western coast.

The people that speak the

Kannada language are estimated at about nine millions.

3. The Kannada language belongs to a group of languages which has been

called the Dravidian (i.e. 39& or @3,9@) family by European writers.

The chief

members of this family are Kannada, Télugu (39970), Tami] (3, Malayala

(F000339%), Tulu (30%), Kodagn (F431), and Badaga (W3R, on the Nilagiri).

4, The so-called Dravidian languages have borrowed a great many words

from Satskrita, especially such as express abstract ideas of philosophy, science,

and religion, together with the technical terms of the more elegant arts, ete.

(¢f. § 369); but their non-Samskrita portion is considerable, and once was

sufficient for ordinary conversation.

Chiefly by a comparison of their gram-

matical structure with that of Samskrita the essential independence of the

<4

=

1) The district of Canara (a corrupted Vf:oirm of K‘zrt;mada) on the \Veeterncoastgotthat

name because it was subjected for centuries to the rule of Kannada princes, and the Carnatic

(4. e. Karntaka), the country below the Fastern Ghauts on the Coromandal coast, was (by a

misapplication of terms) called by that name first by the Muhammedans.

LE

Dravidian languages of Samskrita can satisfactorily and conclusively be

established.

5. The earliest written documents of the Kannada language are inseriptions

on walls and pillars of temples, on detached stone-tablets and monumental stones,

and on copper-plates of the Canarese country.

The inscriptions are often dated ;

if they have no date, the form of the letters used and historical references to

dated inseriptions serve to ascertain their age.

6. As regards the forms of the Old and Modern Kannada alphabets, they lare

varieties of the so-called Cave-character, an alphabet which was used for the

inseriptions in the cave hermitages of Buddhists in India (e. g. at Salsette, Kan-

héri, Nasik, Sahyadri, Ajanta), and rests on the Southern Asoka character. This

character was about 250 B. C. employed in the Edicts of the Buddhist king Asoka.

Different forms of the letters used for the Kannada inscriptions appear at differ-

ent periods, the earlier forms differing in the greatest degree from those of the

Modern Kannada alphabet”.

At the time of the composition of the Basavapurana

1369 A. D. the old alphabet had become already out of use, as the author

of that work mentions the letters of Old Kannada (3¢°n3©E9&) as belonging

to the past.

2

The Kannada language in the old inscriptions (of the Kadamba, Ganga,

C‘élukya, Rashtraktta and other kings) of which specimens exist that belong to

about 600 A. D., is not the same as that of the present day; it is what is called

Old Canarese.

This Old Canarese is also the language of the early Kannada

authors or the literary style.

It may be said to have continued in use to the

middle of the 13th century (see § 109), when by degrees the language of the

inseriptions and literary compositions begins to evince a tendency to become

A

Modern Canarese or the popular and colloquial dialect of the present time.

characteristic of the literary or classical style of the early authors is its extra-

The classical authors were Jainas.

ordinary amount of polish and refinement.

One of them was Nripatunga, who wrote the Kavirajamarga (a treatise on

1) The earliest authentic specimens of writing in India are the edictal inscriptions of the

Buddhist king AsOka (also called Dharmisdka and Priyadarsi) who was the grandson of the

Maurya king éandragupta at Pataliputra (the modern Patna), and ruled from the extreme

north-west of India as far as Magadha in the East and Mahishmandala (Mysore) in the

South.

These

are

written

The

inscriptions

in two different alphabets.

alphabet

which is found in the inscription that

is at Kapurdigiri (near Peshawar), is written from

right to left, and is clearly of Phenician

or old Semitic (Aramaic) origin (it has been called

)"l

Khafioshti) ;

the Southern inseriptions

that are found in numerous places from Girnér in

Gujerat to Siddapura in the Chitaldroog district of Mysore (these last ones discovered by Mr.

B. L. Rice), are written from left to right, and the alphabet employed in them is the source

of all other Indian alphabets.

It has been thought by some scholars (Professors Weber,

Biihler and others) that the character of the Southern inscriptions also may be traced back

e ——————

to a Phenician prototype.

alankara) in the 9th century; another was Pampa or Hampa who composed his

Bharata (an itib4sa more or less based on Vyasa’s Mahabharata) in 941 A.D.;

and a third one was Argala who finished his Purana in 1189 A. D.Y

8. The grammatical treatises on Kannada were constructed on the Satskrita

plan.

Their Jaina authors took Panini and others as their guides.

The earliest

grammarian, whose works have come down to us, is Ndgavarma who appears to

belong to the first half of the 12th century.

Késirdja or Késava, the author of a

well-known grammar, lived about one hundred years later, in the 13th century.

The above-named authors treat on the Old Canarese language, illustrating it by

Nagavarma

quotations from the writings of former (or contemporary) poets.

wrote his first grammar, an epitome, in Kanda verses and Old Canarese, and

embodied it in his treatise on the art of poetry, the Kévyavalokana (in Old

Canarese) ; his second grammar, the Karpatakabhashabhtishanpa, is in Samskrita

prose sltras, each accompanied by a vritti or explanatory gloss also in Sataskrita.

Késiraja’s grammar, the Sabdamanidarpana, is composed wholly in Kanda verses

and Old Canarese (each verse having its prose vritti), and is the fullest

systematic exposition of that language o,

9

The ancient Kannada grammarians held the study of grammar in high

esteem, as may be learned from the following words of the author of the Sabda-

manidarpana : -— ¢ Through grammar (correct) words originate, through the

words of that grammar meaning (originates), through meaning the beholding of

truth, through the beholding of truth the desired final beatitude; this (final

beatitude) is the fruit for the learned” (stitra 10 of the Preface).

U The Kavirdjamirga was edited in 1898 by K. B. Pathak, B. A., Assistant to the Direc-

tor of Archaological Researches in Mysore, the Bhérata also in 1898 by Lewis L. Rice>

(o1 T 48

M. R.

A

]

H

Director of

Archeeological

Researches in Mysore.

(Mysore Govern-

ment Central Press, Bangalore.)

2) Nagavarma’s Karnitakabhéshdbhtshana was edited by B. Lewis Rice, M. R. A. 8.,

It contains

Director of Public Instruction (Bangalore, Mysore Government Press, 1884).

10 pariéthédas, viz. sanjnAvidhana, sandhividhana, vibhaktividhéna, kérakavidhana, sabda-

ritividhana,

samasavidhéna,

taddhitavidhéna,

akhyAtanigamavidhéna,

avyayanirtipana-

vidh&na, and nipatanirGpanavidhana, in 280 sttras.

An edition of Késirdja’s Sabdamani-

darpana was printed at Mangalore (Basel Mission Press, 1872). His work has 8 sandhis or

chapters and 322 sitras.

A short summary of its contents is as follows: — I. Sandhi or

euphonic combinations of letters.

1) aksharasanjonéprakarana or the section of the sigms

used as letters.

b) the vowels in particular;

¢) the conso-

@) the letters of the alphabet;

nants in particular,

2) sandhiprakarana or the section of combination of the mentioned

letters.

a) combination of vowels;

b) combination of consonants.

II. NAma or nominal

themes.

a) lingas or declinable bases, aa) krits or bases formed from verbs by means of

suffixes,

bb) taddhita-bases formed from nouns and verbs by means of certain other

suffixes,

cc)

samasas or compound bases,

dd) nAamas or ready nouns (distinguished as

ridha, anvartha and ankita; they include the so-called adjectives, pronouns, numerals, and

¢) the seven cases in the sin-

themes from Samskrita, altered or unaltered);

b) genders;

gular;

d) the two numbers;

¢) the augments of the plural;

f) particularities regarding

lr{

A

4

in ortho

a,cquiret

The

II, On the form of the signs that are used as Letters

1

(akshararfipa, aksharasanjiakara, aksharasanjiariipa, varnasanjie,

akkar, 0

varnanka, cf. §§ 217-241), ete.

13

10. XKésava, the author of the Sabdamanidarpaga, remarks on the origin

fhe first

of articulate sound: — * By the wish of the individual soul, by means of suitable

1

(vital) air, at the root of the navel, like a trumpet, the substance of sound (Sabda-

dravya) originates which is white (svéta, dhavala); its result is (articulate,

18,

aksharatmaka) sound (Sabda)”’; and: — “The body is the musical instrument, the

later dus

i’

hful

tongue is the plectrum, the individual soul is the performer; on account of the

yout

operation of his mind (articulate) sound (Sabda) originates which is of a white

Saiskr

colour (dhavalavarna) and has the form of leiters (aksharartipa).”

also cou

Inarticulate (anaksharatmaka) sounds, as thunder from the clouds or the roar

so-calleg

of the sea, have no representations in grammatical alphabets.

Of t

11.

There is a distinet letter for each sound, and therefore every word

“ sea-gir

is pronounced exactly as it is spelt; thus the ear is a sufficient guide

are pey

declension;

g) uses of the cases;

h) remarks on number, gender, construction, etc.;

¢)

VLV

b

)

III. Samésa or com-

declension of pronouns;

j) change of gender;

k) change of letters.

position of words, compound bases.

1) augment, elision, and substitution.

2) the six

R

classes of Samskrita compounds.

8) the compounds called kriyAsaméasa, gamakasamésa,

1n thi

and vipsAsamisa.

IV. Taddhita-bases formed from nouns and verbs by means of certain

suffixes.

Kannad

N Akhyéta or verbs and their conjugation.

VI. Dhatu or verbal roots (or

themes).

VII. Tadbhava (Apabhramsa) or words corrupted from the Samskrita language.

¢.§2

s

VIII. Avyaya or adverbs, ete.

o (see

\

Besides the Karnatakabhashédbhtishana there is another grammar of the Old Canarese

The

language in Samskrita shtras, etc.,, the KarnAtakasabdinushsana, written by the Jaina

Bhattakalanka, dated A. D. 1604.

It was edited by B. Lewis Rice, c. 1. E., M. R. A. 8.,

vav

Director of Archeological Researches in Mysore,

late Director

of Public Instruction in

letty

Mysore and Coorg (Bangalore, Mysore Government Central Press, 1890).

According to its

Thy

learned editor it treats, in

the order given, of the alphabet; avyayas; sandhi; nipatas;

gender; tadbhavas; case affixes; compound words; uses of personal pronouns; uses of the

P](rht

singular and plural numbers and numerals; taddhitas; verbs and verbal affixes.

lﬂ

The first grammar of the Canarese language which appeared in English, was compiled

(Suddp

by John McKerrell Esq., M. . s., who dedicated his work to the King (George IV), Madras,

November the 16th, 1820.

In his

He calls it “A Grammar of the Carnataka Language”.

dugyay

Preface he states: ¢“In the course of my labours I have derived much information from a

b

()

{

very scarce and accurate treatise upon the ancient dialect, which was compiled, about seven

9

6 A,

W

centuries ago. by an Indian author named Céshava, and by him termed 3%&5385&35-’8@0, or

¢ The mirror of verbal gems’

8-

ve e s e

I feel myself under considerable obligations to

Edward Richard Sullivan, Esq., of the Civil Service, for his kindness in procuring for me

1§,

from His Highness the Rajah of Mysoor, the work of Céshava.”

MeKerrell’s work has

With

211 pages.

pmllOu

—

in orthography.

After the exact sounds of the letters have been once

acquired, every word can be pronounced with perfect accuracy.

I}

The accent falls on the first syllable.

12. The name of a pure, true letter (Suddhakshara) is akshara,

akkara, or varna.

18. Each letter has its own form (akéra) and sound (Sabda); by

gin

hle

the first it becomes visible (Cakshusha), by the other audible (Sravana).

14.

da

Kannada is written from left to right.

te,

15. The Alphabet (called aksharaméilé, akkaramalé in the old and

the

later dialect and also Ondma in the later one), as an instruction for the

the

youthful (balasikshé), consists of 57 letters, in which case the so-called

lite

Samskrita and Prakrita kshala (the vedic letter z of certain schools) is

also counted, though its form and sound are the same as that of the

0ar

so-called Kannada kula.

Of the 57 letters forty-eight (in various forms) are notorious on the

od

«sea-girdled” earth, ¢.e. throughout India, and the order in which they

ide

(pa)

are read (pathakrama) is as follows: — e

A

B w0 v 93 RVR & b

)

el i e iR v Sl -l v o VUl il ol ol o )

com-

)

)

=6

~

o509,

The letter os

¢ §iX

aS @6 aG 55 jﬁs wG 2‘\36 g 56_ Q:'};S 06 @6 sg 36

ndsa

in this list is called kshala in order to distinguish it from the true

tain

Kannada kula.

In Samskrita the kshala is a substitute for the letter ¢

(or

(¢f- § 230); in Kannada it is a substitute for the Samskrita letter

age.

o (see § 31).

rese

The other nine letters are:— o % &% o5 €9 o 3 X oo, Of these

e

2 % & $° ¥ are peculiar to the Kannada country (désiya), and this

o By

niﬂ

letter o< is the kula.

@

0 118

The four letters o

Q

X oo, together with the above-mentioned forty-

atas;

f the

eight, form the Samskrita alphabet of 52 letters.

In true Kannada (acéfagannada) there are 47 indigenous letters

fled

(Suddhagg), viz. (the vowels) © & @ & ov 4B & 0 D % % W; (the

4

his

anusvara) o; (and the consonants) s¢ &3¢ n* P G o o dyr e

ésS 56 Zgé Cgé‘

{ao)

ex6

oJ

P

At

@86

@6 ;56 -&6 &6

p &

35 @6 ms @6 FSG

e R ey O

yen

QQG \6Q€ i

¥

® 4

or

16. The consonants (§ 25) that in the preceding paragraph appear

me

with the top-mark ¢ (3¢, o, etc.) which indicates that they are to be

ha

pronounced without any vowel after them (asvaravidhi, vyanjanavidhi),

e A

6

—

i

are commonly printed with the sign = (a sort of crest, nowadays called

talékattu) added to the top (@, A, etc.), in order to point out that the

short Kannada vowel a (@) is to be sounded after them.

In the case of ten consonants (DB R Bwwoed €9), however,

the crest does not appear on the top, as it is so to say incorporated

with them.

It is supposed that the sign — is a secondary form of the

Kannada vowel a (e, see § 24); but why are certain other vowels (u, 1,

ov, enp, ete.) united with crested consonants? See § 37.

17

The following is a tabular view of the forms of the 57 letters of

the Alphabet as they are written and printed nowadays (¢f. § 6), the

Their sounds

consonants bearing the sign - (the talékattu, see § 16).

are expressed in Roman characters with the aid of some diacritical

marks, and illustrated, as well as possible, by English letters (the

illustrations being given according to English authors of Kannada,

Télugu, Tamil and Malayala grammars): —

0. a.

This letter has the sound of the English initial a in ‘about’, ‘around’,

or of the English final a in ‘era’, ‘Sophia’, ¢ Victoria’, or of the English

i in Sgnn’, teup’s

(There is no letter in Kannada to represent the

sound of the English a in such words as ‘pan’, ‘can’, ‘sat’, ¢hat’).

This letter has the sound of the English a in ¢ half’, ¢ father’,

¢ (299). &

or of the English final a in ‘papa’.

2

1

This letter has the sound of the English i in ‘pin’, ¢in’, ¢ gig’, ‘folio’.

=

1

This letter has the sound of the English i in ‘machine’, ‘ravine’,

‘pique’, or of the English ee in ‘eel’, ¢feel .

Q

e

N

u

This letter has the sound of the English u in ‘full’, ‘pull’, ¢ put’,

or of the Bnglish 00 in ¢book .

enp, 1.

This letter has the sound of the English u in ‘rule’, ¢ crude’, or of

the Fnglish 00 in ¢fool’, ‘root’, ¢ shoot’.

230. Ti.

The sound of this letter can only be learned from the mouth of an

efficient teacher.

(Rustics pronounce it like the English ri in ¢rich’,

or also like the English roo in ‘rook’.)

93000 (33R). ri

The sound of this letter is that of lengthened #.

oy, Iri,

The sound of this letter can only be learned from an educated native.

(Rustics pronounce it like the English loo in ‘look’.)

1

3

. drl,

The sound of this letter is that of lengthened .

(The letter is a

mere invention of grammarians.)

This letter has the sound of the English e in ¢end’, ‘leg’, *beg’, ¢ peg’.

o

This letter has the sound of the English a in ‘ache’, ‘fate’, ‘late’.

7.

&9

al

This letter has the sound of the English ai in ¢aisle’, of the English

ei in ‘height’, or of the English word ‘eye’.

W

0

This letter has the sound of the English o in ¢police’, ¢polite’,

‘romance’, ‘produced’, ‘potential’ ‘located’.

(There is no sound in

Kannada to represent the sound of the English o in such words as ‘on’,

‘hot’, ¢got’, ‘object’. Uneducated Canarese people use to pronounce

this English 0, & (&) making, e. g. lost @372, hot &), top &93.)

éﬂ- 6.

This letter has the sound of the English o in ‘gold’, ‘old’, ‘sold’, ‘ode’.

Z3. au. This letter has the sound of the English ou in ‘ounce’, ‘out’, ¢ mount’.

o. m, This letter, when it is final, has the sound of the English m in

‘botom’, *bartram’.

(When in the middle of a word it is followed by

a consonant, its sound depends on the character of that consonant, as

in the words 80%, 3o, Ron, Rox, word, Vo, Word, ToldF, Tod, wod

’

@W0R, Wom, Fod, Togy, Fom, Foy, R0z, RoJR', Roww, o=, B0,

RoBE 9, BodW, Rows®, BoB03Y, do:&, ROFIV, ROBY; cf.'§8 34. 39. 40.)

00

This aspirate has the sound of the English initial h in ‘hat’, ‘head’,

or ‘hiss’, the aspiration proceeding directly from the chest.

(Rusties,

in reciting the alphabet, use to pronounce it aha the a having the

sound of the Kannada letter ©.)

X. h. This aspirate is used only before the letters ¥ (ka) and & (kha), and

o

then pronounced like the letter

o

()

00 (€9). rh. This aspirate is ased only before the letters ® (pa) and $ (pha),

and then has a sound somewhat similar to that of the letter s (h)

(In

Samskrita it is often represented by the letter =°, sh.)

F. ka

This letter has the sound of the English initial k pronounced with

the Kannada letter ¥ (a) after it.

kha. This letter has the sound of the preceding one, but aspirated, the

aspiration proceeding directly from the chest.

ga

This letter has the sound of the English initial g in ‘gold’, ¢good’

pronounced with the Kannada letter @ (a) after it.

gha

This letter has the sound of the preceding one but aspirated.

Zj

na

This letter has the sound of the English letter n before g in ‘king’,

7

‘ring’, ‘long’, ‘song

with the Kannada letter ¥ (a) after it.

1)

ca

This letter has a sound similar to that of the English ch in ¢ charity’,

‘charm’, ‘chase’, ‘child’, ‘church’, pronounced with the Kannada

letter @ (a) after it.

(¢3). ¢ha

This letter has the sound of the preceding one but aspirated.

€ -&

Ja

This letter has a soand similar to that of the English j in ‘judge’,

“join’, ‘jar’, ¢jackal’, pronounced with the Kannada % (a) after it.

—

8

3. jha.

This letter has the sound of the preceding one but aspirated.

e, ha.

This letter has a sound which is something like that of the English

ni in ‘opinion’, ‘onion’ (the n being nasalised), pronounced with the

Kannada letter @ (a) after it.

&

ta

This letter has the sound of an English letter t that is formed by

curling back the tongue, foreibly striking the under part of it against

the roof of the mouth, and pronouncing the Kannada letter © (a) after

1t

(It differs essentially from the true English t, for which there is no

letter in Kannada. Natives, however, use to represent the English ¢ by &,)

tha

This letter has the sound of the preceding one but aspirated.

da

This letter has the sound of an English letter d that is formed by

curling back the tongue, forcibly striking the under part of it against

the roof of the mouth, and pronouncing the Kannada letter © (a) after

1t

(It differs essentially from the true English d, for which there is

no letter in Kannada.

Natives, however, use to represent the Knglish

d by 3. See also sub-letter S, ra.)

dha

This letter has the sound of the preceding one but aspirated.

na

This letter has the sound of an English n that is formed by curling

back the tongue, forcibly striking the under part of it against the roof

of the mouth, and pronouncing the Kannada letter © (a) after it.

(No

English letter answers to it; see under letter &, na.)

ta

This letter has the sound of an English letter t that is formed by

bringing the tip of the tongue against the very edge of the upper front

teeth, and pronouncing the Kannada letter © (a) after it.

(There is no

corresponding letter in English; see under letter &, ta.)

tha

This letter has the sound of the preceding one but aspirated.

da

This letter has the sound of the English letter d that is formed by

bringing the point of the tongue against the very edge of the upper

front teeth, and pronouncing the Kannada letter @ (a) after it.

(There

is no English letter which answers to it; see under letter @, da.)

dha.

This letter has the sound of the preceding one but aspirated.

na

This letter has the sound of the English letter n that is formed by

A QL

placing the tip of the tongue against the very edge of the upper front

teeth, and pronouncing the Kannada letter ® (a) after it.

(There is no

Natives, however, use to represent the

corresponding English letter.

English n by ¢, na.)

(68

pa

The sound of this letter answers to that of the English initial p pro-

|

nounced with the Kannada letter @ (a) after it.

o

pha

This letter has the sound of the preceding one but aspirated.

|

fRa—

e

Y

2, ba. The sound of this letter is the same as that of the Eﬁglish initial b

pronounced with the Kannada letter © (a) after it.

&3 (33 33). bha. This letter has the sound of the preceding one but as-

pirated.

530, ma.

The sound of this Jetter is like that of the English m pronounced

with the Kannada letter @ (a) after it.

8025 ya.

The sound of this letter is the same as that of the English initial

y in ‘yard’, ‘young’, ‘you’, ‘yonder’ pronounced with the Kannada

letter © (a) after it.

& T,

The sound of this letter nowadays has an indefinite character like

the Samskrita r (which Canarese people occasionally mistook for their

letter ©); in ancient times it was formed by placing the point of the

tongue against the very edge of the upper front teeth, producing a

trilled, delicate sound of the English letter r, and pronouncing the

Kannada letter @ (a) after it.

At present the sound may be said to

resemble that of the English initial letter r in ‘ring’, ‘risk’ with the

Kannada letter © (a) sounded after it.

(English people often used to

represent the Kannada letter @, by their r, as in Canara, Coorg,

Dharwar = 38, FRER, 0703E.)

e

ra

This letter has the sound of a very harsh English letter r pronounced

with the Kannada letter © (a) after it. Nowadays it is not unfrequently

represented by a double Kannada S, 7.e. S, (see § 39).

©. la

This letter has the sound of the English letter 1 that is formed by

bringing the tip of the tongue against the very edge of the upper front

teeth, and pronouncing the Kannada letter ¥ (a) after it. (The Kannada

letter © has neither the same sound as the Samskrita © nor that of the

English 1. The Samskrita letter © is very often represented in Kannada

by the so-called Kshala; see §§ 15. 31.)

oSl 1)

The sound of this letter resembles that of the initial letter = in

‘wife’, ‘woman’, the Kannada letter @ (a) being pronounced after it.

2. Ba,

The sound of this sibilant letter cannot be represented by any English

letter; it is to be learnt by hearing an efficient teacher pronounce it.

(Englishmen, however, have represented it by the s in ‘sure’ and

¢ session ’.)

X. sha.

This letter has the sound of an English initial sh (as in ‘shoe’,

‘shan’) that is formed by placing the tongue near the roof of the

mouth, and pronouncing the Kannada letter @ (a) after it.

A

~

Sa

This letter has nearly the sound of the English initial letter s in

“sat’, ‘sin’, ‘so’, the Kannada letter ¥ (a) being pronounced after it.

2

10

e

QO

N

ha

The sound of this letter is something like that of the English

initial letter h in ¢horse’, ‘husband’, ‘hoop’, the Kannada letter © (a)

being pronounced after it.

&

la

This letter has the sound of the English letter 1 that is formed by

curling back the tongue, forcibly striking the under part of it against

the roof of the mouth, and pronouncing the Kannada letter © (a) after

1t

(It represents two letters, viz. the kshala and kula; see §§ 15.31.)

3. la.

See the preceding letter.

3. la.

The sound of this letter 1 is formed by curling back the tongue and

16

pronouncing the English letter r, e. g. in the word ‘farm ', in a rather

liquid manner (Dr. Caldwell) with the Kannada letter © (a) after it.

he

18

Of the above-mentioned 57 letters sixteen are vowels (svara).

by

19

The initial forms of the vowels are as follows:—

§6

—

Kannada

Present Tami],

Present Malayala

Dévanagar

i

Y

(2

=

@Yo

a

of

&

2

a

&

HT

A

a8

0r

i

i

SNM

i

i

(8

I8

zf:j;\f@

o6

)

82

Tl

rl

111

161

it

&

g8 9 0 o

Tl

f1

&

Ir1

Ir1

3

Iri

JiL

il

o

Iri

Iy

S

I

1

I

o

pa)

e

Wl

E

()

th

é

oy

e

a

Ya

(S

al

an

al

&

al

o)

7

al

)

&

0

th

Tt

(@)

&

0

(SN

au

A

au

ear au

)

aa

0n

——

gk

s

sh

20. Seven of the vowels are short (hrasva), viz. @, @&, ev, 33, @, o,

1

%; and nine are long (dirgha), viz. @, &, oW, $B, «, 2, D, b, 0.

Short vowels have one measure (méatré or prosodical instant) or

by

are ¢ckamatraka;

long vowels have two or are

ubhayamatra or

18t

er

dvimatra. A consonant (%, 2, etc.) is said to last half the time of a

short vowel.

L)

Occasionally a vowel is lengthened to three measures in pronunciation

or becomes trimétraka or protracted (pluta).

See §§ 140, a and 215, 6,

nd

letter k.

T

In prosody a short or light vowel is called laghu, and a long or

heavy vowel guru.

Such a long vowel is long either by nature, or

by position (4.e. being followed by a double or compound consonant;

see § 38).

21

Vowels are again divided into ten monophthongs (samanakshara):—

¥ o, A 8, 90 9w, 3 3R, @ «, of which each pair is of the same class

of letters (savarna) whether its letters be read in regular order (anuldoma)

as & ¢, 2 &, etc., or out of the usual order (viloma) as ¥ », & %, etc.,

or as v, & B9, &, ete; and (in Samskrita) into four diphthongs

O 0 % 3. The vowels o o % T, however, are no

(sandhyakshara):

real diphthongs in true Kannada; in this language the radical forms of

5 are o3, ©®y, and those of T3 are o5y, w3 (see § 217).

Also the vowels o & 2 % are such as belong to one class, or are

savarna.

22. By the way it is observed that, in so far as Sarmskrita is concerned, the

true Samskrita vowels (§ 15), except a and 4, 7. e. 12 of them, are subject to the

peculiar changes called guna and vriddhi (see § 217).

Though the terms are

mentioned by the grammarians Nagavarma and Késava, their use is not stated.

The same is to be said with regard to the term nami which they mention, and

which in Samskrita denotes all the true Samskrita vowels, except a and &, as

changing a dental into a cerebral.

The Upéndravajra verse cited by Naga-

varma and Késava (probably from a Purana), in which the terms guna, vriddhi

and nami oceur together, is in praise of the 12 Adityas.

23. In pure Kannada the vowels 335 33% o o are not indigenous;

they are found only in words borrowed from Samskrita.

24,

If the initial vowels mentioned in § 18,

follow a consonant,

each of them uses a secondary form that is always compounded with

one of the consonant forms (see §§ 36. 37).

2%

—

12

The initial forms of the vowels together with their secondary ones

§€

appear in the subjoined table:—

Initial forms

W

Secondary forms

fi

%)

(See § 16)

)

%

&R

Jo

ns

JVM)

gilal

WAND

QS(“

%

e ———

;ZJ

:§

W

bt 4 G

—“Re ()

Remark.

The form of the long initial vowel ©, and the sign ¢ (see § 37) nowadays

regularly used to mark a long secondary vowel form, are somewhat uncommon

in Kannada manuscripts of the 18th century. Initial ® is written 0% (euphonical

03 4-22) in them, but to be pronounced ¥, e. g. 0T>T, = 953 ; only oceasionally

we find ¢ for ©, Initial ¥ appears as 3% in them (euphonical 35° + © +the

sign ¢). The existence of the sign ¢ at the time that the manuseripts were written,

becomes further certain e. g. by the form of the verb ®%e> (miru), to transgress,

etc. repeatedly used in them, a form which is used also nowadays (29> for Do¢e9),

%, ® and % however in vowelled compound-syllables (see § 36) are generally

not marked as long by the sign ¢ in the manuseripts, e. g. 3#e93 stands for

3RENT, wod for wWesS, 22 for 088, B for T, c?:))é for %)Qé, 2363 for 23ee®, DR

for @wery, ete. Cf. also § 41.

13

—

€8

25

The consonants (vyanjana, bilakkara) of the alphabet are thirty-

seven in number. Bearing the sign which indicates that they are sounded

with the short vowel e (a) after them (see §§ 16. 17. 36), they a‘re the

following: —

di

o=k

o e O

2L 3 9§ 83

oJ

& otock

& a6 g el

o))

o

- a & o g P

N

8

X

|

(%ﬁ, the kshala) & e

The same in present Tamil :—

Z:

]

8

b 601

sia El oy T

w

on

The same 1n

present Malayala: —

o)

oW

6YO)

Qv

51D

3

@0,

;;;

oY1

AL

2

oM

¥

Q)

jon

ol

The same in Dévanagari, as far as they exist therein: —

lly

he

3

T

&

€}

on

E)

98y

N 4]

o B g

)

lly

for

::

AL

Egi

:g:

a4 4 g

a # 4 9 g

——

14

—

26.

It will be observed that 25 consonants are horizontally arranged

e

in sets having five letters (pancaka) in each.

Such a set is called a

the

series or class (varga), and a letter belonging to it a classified letter

(vargikshara, vargiyakshara).

o

Al

27. The five classes (pancavarga), each from their ﬁrst‘letter, are

Wa

distinguished as kavarga (¥=nF), Cavarga (@¥nF), tavarga (83nF),

W

tavarga (8=37iF), and pavarga (£S0F).

00

The remaining 12 (11) consonants are unclassified (avarga, avarglya).

and

28. The letters of the first perpendicular column (called vargapra-

ally

thama or vargaprathaméikshara) are hard, those of the second one

disa

(called vargadvitiya or vargadvitiyakshara) hard and aspirated, those of

It

the third one (called vargatritiya or vargatritiydkshara) soft, those of the

are

fourth one (called vargadaturtha or vargalaturthikshara) soft and aspi-

Bad

rated ; those of the fifth one (called vargapanéama or vargapantamakshara)

are the particular nasals (anunisika) of each class, which are used as

lett(.

such when, in combination, they precede a consonant of their respective

Ief

class; see § 220, and ¢f. §§ 39. 40.

Y

The difference between hard and soft eonsonants is not expressed in words

or §4

in the old Kannada grammars.

By the way it may be remarked that modern

Kannada grammars eall hard ones karkasavarna or parushavarna, and soft ones

we f

to de

mriduvarna or saralavarna.

t0 wg

29. Kannada grammars distinguish between consonants with- slight

breathing or weak aspiration (alpaprana), viz. 3¢ @& &° 8° *° n° ¥° @

World

o o, and consonants with hard breathing or strong aspiration (maha-

Obsgry

prana), viz. &° &° o @ »° P F §° §; but practically alpaprana

t() spe

is an unaspirated letter, and mahiprana an aspirated one (see § 218).

(for

Nowadays some call an aspirated letter gandakkara (male letter) and

(for

Plage

an unaspirated one hénnakkara (female letter).

mﬁ:

30. In pure Kannada the consonants 3 and 8 do not occur; they

Rl

are found only in words borrowed from Samskrita.

freg l g

I e

31

The letter « in paranthesis in § 25 is called kshala (§ 1)

Vagte,

(for &

by the grammarian KéSava.

It is, In fact, i1dentical as to form

0 sy

and pronunciation with the kula, as KéSava terms it, or the true

of 119

0 mg)

Kannada ¢ (§15); and it is, therefore, unnecessary to make it a

separate letter.

It is often used by Kannada people as a substitute for

ik

to g

Samskrita e, the sound of which in the Samskrita language apparently

"ill

——

15

ed

bears a dubious character for them, one that is neither their

(@) 1010

| 4

their ¢3: this ¢ is Késava’s kshala

Cf. §§ 2217. 2928

fer

32. The consonants £9¢ and ¢% have become, at the present period

obsolete (although they are of intrinsic value for Dravidian philology)

are

.36

A

Already the grammarian Késava had to state in which words the

F),

was used according to previous authors (see § 233)

In bygone times £9¢

e

was occasionally changed into o5 (see § 236)

occasionally into ¢

occasionally into the letter which it preceded

in the mediaeval dialect

va)

and nowadays it is as a rule represented by ¢ (see §228), is exception-

1}

ally converted into a fellowing letter (as DG, for WEIY Or WEIF) or

one

disappears also altogether (as wg, for wedy %0 or ucsg'r--ﬁg) ¢

&9,

0 of

in the modern dialect, appears as o or as a double 5 ().

qs and 6—36

the

are up to this time in common use among the Tamil

Malayala and

3

The

Badaga people; €35 occurs still in the present Télugu (see § 3)

14

letter &3¢ appears still in Kannada literature of the 18th century

a8

In the course of this work the ancient original forms have been

f1ve

retained

1) Some historical dates regarding the € (based chiefly on the very valuable inscriptions

ords

or sasanas published by Dr. Fleet in the Indian Antiquary are the following (¢f. § 109)

1

From about 600 to about 900 A. D

the

036

as throughout in use; in that period

dern

we find e. g. €32, a paddy field, 20w 3p,F0%, seven hundred persons,

@ 30, seventy, @€

ones

to destroy, =

to be (could this be the 2D, to stay, to be, of the Dictionary?), T

to wash

joht

We meet also with the strange forms TR (for T¥7%), below,

PreT (for SweT), the

8

world, /¢ (for 3wy ), having gained or overcome

2

From about 900 till about 1200 A.D. a transition of the €*° into F and %%, is

A

observed, as we find @0, pleasure, and IDIP (for TAFLN), seventeen, H¥S (for TeLdS),

P

to speak, in a sdsana of 929 A. D.; $€> and F®

to wash

in one of 951 A. D.; @& F&mowso

(for

(for €@ ®Wowv), it immersed, V&

€0 ), having fallen,

$0 (for HCV), seven, D%

19)

(for C2)

increase

N & (for mi6d2), a paddy field, in one of 1019 A. D.; W% (for W),

and

place, etc., % (for €3

staff, and 72 a paddy field, in one of 1048 A. D.; 87€¥ and

871195, to shine,

? (for we¥), place, etc., TW (for V), to wash, in one of 1075 A. D

al®, to be, and %0 (for NCEV), seven

@ (for «t¥), to destroy, @Vow® (for gVowld), a rent-

hey

free grant, in one of 1076 A. D.; S7€»*

to shine

T o6

N. of a place, €d*®

to be, and

SB FOs (for T ©F), F[pmws (for F[pritde), to praise, SNS F (for I7C2), fame, TIPS (for TICF),

waste, % (for (), to ruin, in one of 1084 A. D.; =»% (for SW3), may he make, iyt

19

(for ©@nCd®),

to dig, @¥ny®

29

(for 7¥), a ditch, SZp7Iws (for [pricd?P), to praise, S¥E (for J7ICH),

é

form

to shine, 811%, (for SME2), fame, Sp% (for HJpM?), praise,

i3, (for 813, fame, in one

true

of 1123 A. D.; &2 1, N. of a place, We, place, ete., B, to speak, S0, to see, TIDEI

to make, and T&EOF (for T ), to wash, @ (for ©€>?), to destroy, Spn%, (for Bp7C3), praise,

R

8n$, (for 81€1)), fame, in one of 1181 A. D.; &pnI%* (for Sp7Ie¥), to praise, S (for SMEH),

to shine, ©%®

) fOL

0% (for CI°

»CV), seven, in one of 1183 A. D

a¥noo (for CPm00), he

will descend, in one of 1187 A. D. Cf. § 228; § 160, 1

enlly

et

S

16

P —

sibil

33

The throat (kantha, koral), the palate or roof of the inouth

nan

(taluka, talugé, galla), the head or skull (Sira, mastaka, miurdhan), the

teeth (danta, pal), the lips (Oshtha, tuti), the nose (nasiké), the chest

(ura, érdé), and the root of the tongue (jihvamftila, naligéya buda) are

(sv:

the eight places (sthina, tana) or organs of the letters.

f

the

The letters pronounced from the throat are guttural (kanthya); they are

{10

o uEe e 8 (X)

Those formed by means of the palate are

palatal (tlavya); they are @ o 0 @ ¢ wdp ¥ & ; (L and o have

been called also kanthya-talavya).

Those coming from the head are

but

cerebral (mirdhanya); they are 33 3% & 3 ® @@ ©@ O €9 |/ &9

)

3

The letters formed by the

(sometimes these letters are called lingual).

=)

clud

aid of the teeth are dental (dantya); they are & & I 3 I F I ©

~

3

Yowe

Those pronounced with the lips are labial (Oshthya); they are en ew

giver

S

-

oY

$ W 2 30 B oo; (sometimes & 3 are called kanthoshthya, and <3

sylly

has been called dantdoshthya).

The letters uttered through the nose

Vowe

are nasal (anundsika, nasikya); they are 2 0 0 3 o

(g has been

orest

called also kanthya-nasikya).

The letters o3o © &3 (called semi-vowels)

are not nasal (anunsika, niranunasika) and, under certain circumstances,

nasal (anundsika, see § 219); there is no mark in Kannada to show the

difference.

The letter pronounced in the chest or pectoral letter (urasya)

is g, That uttered from the root of the tongue or the tongue-root sibilant

(ihvamiliya) is X.

When two consonants are produced in the same place or by the same

organs, they are called ékasthani (see §§ 238. 239).

34

The labial sibilant (or aspirate) oo is called upadhmaniya, . e.

a letter that is to be pronounced with a forcing out of breath; it only

occurs before the consonants z and 3

The nasal o is called anusvara

or after-sound, as it always belongs to a preceding vowel; from its form

are ]

that in Samskrita is a dot, it is called bindu, and from its form in

Kannada where it is represented by a circle or cipher, it 1s called sfnya

or sonné; it is a substitute for a nasal letter, and when it does not stand

8yl

at the end of a word (where it is pronounced like the English m, ¢f.

ey

tllem

§ 215, 8), its sound depends on the following consonant (see under letter

oin § 175 §§ 39. 40).

The sibilant (or aspirate) g is called visarga or

Serje

visarjaniya either from its being pronounced with a full emission of

&fter

breath or from its liability to be rejected; if followed by another letter,

it is frequently changed and occasionally dropped.

The tongue-root

fOll()v

—~—

LY

—

uth

sibilant (or aspirate) jivhdmfliya X can only stand before the conso-

the

nants

=

T

and 2,

host

35

The Sinya (sonné or bindu) o and visarga g are semi-vowels

are

(svaranga) and semi-consonants (vyanjanianga).

They and the upadhma-

niya oo and jihvimiiliya X are so to say semi-letters, and as such form

are

the 4 so-called yogavaha letters, ¢. e. letters always appearing in connec-

are

tion with, or depending on, others.

ave

Visarga, upadhmaniya and jihvAmiliya do not occur in pure Kannada,

are

but are used only in words borrowed from Sarmskrita.

AN

w

36

As has been stated in §§ 16 and 25 the crested consonants (in-

the

cluding 2) % %= %0 & @ W © 69 €9) are always sounded with the short

3 ¥

vowel e (a) after them. When any of the secondary forms of the vowels

) W

given in § 24 is united with the consonants to form vowelled compound-

syllables, the consonants partly retain the shape they have when the

0086

vowel & (a) is sounded after them, but mostly lose their talékattu or

heen

crest.

Here follows a tabular view of them:—

jels)

168,

)

ko)

N

the

&

1)

T;

5

873)

@

lant

.a_ a &

§a

@

@

ame

P ¥

LL

ko

&

B)ed

0% T W)

i

)

Z

06

2L A

<o

& o L ou : 45

©

only

At

When the union has taken place, the vowels, like the short es (a),

form

are pronounced after the consonants to which they are attached.

i} n

37

In the Southern Mahratta country the vowelled compound-

finya

tand

syllables are called ka-gunitakshara, ¢.e. syllables that are multiplied or

increased in number after the manner of ki, this being the first of

} (f

them; and a series of them is called balli.

In writing and reading the

eftel

series of the ki-gunita-syllables it is customary to place the consonant

% 0r

after which the short es (a)is sounded, at the begipning of each series.

p 0!

3tt81

A table exhibiting the union of vowels with consonants is given on the

following two pages:—

100t

18

P —

]

ka

=3 ki

& ki

e ki

=2y kel

IR ki

F, kri

Q

T kt‘

S—

2 kha

59 kha

D khi

De khi

29 khu

2H khit

2y khri

Lo

khri

n

n ga

o g

N gl

ne gi

no gu

nw gl

)

gri

7153 gri

3 gha

3> ghi

gre ghl

50 ghu

>R ghii

2

7o gha

7'.)“‘9) ghri

P ghri

259 Na

20 11

@ ni

22 nu

%P Nl

(2 nri

1

I(;z

150}

¢l

% Gl

o8¢ Ci

23y Cu

2N Cll

aéa ¢ri

- COrl

"

¢

¢h

a

¢hri

T

VD)

& thi

e Chi

¢35 Chu

Vi) ¢hi

ejg) ¢hri

e i <t e T AT e A

ot 8 8

)

=9 ]2

ol

23e ;1

229 Ju

w0 Jl

jri

]

%) jri

T

W

£

3

gyo Jhd

oo Jhi

o9pe jhi

d)‘a_) jhu

Sp e jhit

dyp, jhr

jhri

nri

4

&L na

oo i

gr® 1

&ee i

Py N

corde Nl

el nri

Ly

&3 ta

o th

&

tri

tri

W

tyo ta

4t

e ti

edo tu

)

%

3 tha

oo tha

® thi

®¢ thi

3y thu

3» thi

thri

i

g, thri

d

2 da

zo da

a di

&e di

> du

3de du

@, dri

dri

d

dha

p) dha

& dhi

ge dhi

&> dhu

g» dhi

@

¥

D

dhri

Fp

dhri

;:;

€ Na

&3 ni

£90 U

£o nit

nri

I

/o 1A

g9 ni

O

3 ta

3» ta

3 t1

3e t1

3 tu

30 th

3 tri

i

3@ tri

3 tha

fp) tha

& thi

&e thi

3o thu

3H thi

c;je) thri

3

0

0°

thri

g

g da

oo da

& di

&e di

oo du

gw di

Gy dri

s dH1

2 dha

oo dha

%

& dhi

&e dhi

35 dhu

3R dhit

3 ) dhri

5.5939 dhri

S na

o9 na

Q ni

Q¢ ni

S nu

SR nit

~®

nri

é,) nri

S pa

o9 pa

& pi

»e pl

% pu

e pl

59) \plji

Ty P

S::

D

pha

59 pha

phi

¢ phi

5 phu

P phit

5’.3)@ phri

8.:))5@ phri

2 ba

259 ba

2 bi

e bi

20 bu

2o bl

L bri

EJ

G

¢3 bha

5o bhé

2 bhi

%e bhi

23> bhu

23 bhi

2;9) bhri

By

bhri

2‘"

Ty

=9 ma

359 mi

Dy mi

239 mi

300 mu

=00 mil

aﬁae) mri

;Sogp mri

30

yri

o3 ya

o359 YA

o yi

0O» yi

o300 yu

ooyl

03‘?3} yri

g ra

Go I'a

B ri

De 1l

3 ru

S ri

O 1

:ii

3 rri

&9 ra

£9s9 Id

eo? 1l

6396 ri

G TH

e3» 1l

€2, tri

Oy

Irl

:

o la

o9 la

ol

Se 1

oo lu

oR i

) Ir1

o il

:

Vi

vri

vril

o Va

=t Y

e Vi

%) vu

;gpvﬁ

=)

vl

3 sa

39 S4

3§81

de St

30 Su

30 Si

Srl

STl

i,

0°

sha

=9 sha

&, shi

¢ shi

R shu

R0 shi

)

shri

rméa

shri

)

STl

Sa

=9 S4

~

s1

2@ sl

o su

R sl

g

:3& sri

gl

i he

& hi

%o hu

=H hit

hri

hri

&9 ha

&e bi

)

B

5

la

oo 14

¢ li

Pe I

Sy lu

S0 1

g Ir1

Ir

@ Bl g2l i s LB

Il

e la

e3s9 14

e I

ce i

e lu

cow lu

1ri

&35@ Iri

>

g

l

19

—

1

# klrl

3 ké

Je ké

2, kai

20 ko

Fwe ko

z» kau

3 klri

hn

&3 khd

23¢ khé

9% khai 3% kho

s30¢ kho

o5 khau

2 blyi ;1 khlri

[l

n

glri

n glri

i gé

ne gé

A, gai

RR g0

Rwe go

e gau

hrf

ghlri

5

ghlri

5> ghé

s»e ghé

>0e ghod

gf’yé ghai 3% gho

572 ghau

I

3] nlri

oo nlrl

@3 né

@3¢ 1né

zagé nai =3p» 1o

23R¢ 10

%5 nau

Il

o3 Clri

=

¢lrl

%3 Cé

%3¢ C8

22, Cal

B3H €O

2w@e €O

oF® Cau

¢5® Chau

hrd

oy c¢hlr1 ¢

¢hlri

¢§ ho

eS¢ Ché

63, Chai 3» ¢hd

e3¢ ¢hd

% jlri

2 jlri

23 )6

230 jé

3 jO

BRe jo

e3P jau

%, jai

hri

Cbp«z jhlri &‘sz jhlri

S jhid

Bpe jhe

&, jhai G jh

e Jhod

gy5@jhau

o3 e

3

nai or3n no

cops® nau

1I'1

P nlri s nlri

53¢ 1é

¢ 3,

5

ard3Re 1o

8 1o

e té

&, tai

3w to

Bpe to

&5 tau

I1

Gt 4t

Il

3 thlri 3 thigi

3 the

Be thé

3, thai

30 tho

3»¢ tho

&° thau

1

2 dlri

3 dlri

B dé

®e dé

@, dai

wh do

Bwe do

@ dau

e

q&:ae dh@

hrl

30

bl % dhlrk

% dhé

ge dhe

z‘?g dhai gw» dho

z° dhau

11

& nlri

&0 nlri

0] l}é

e né

L N0

®° hau

Sl

9-7395 nai e 1o

1

3 tlri

2 i

3 té

3e té

3, tail

3n to

Swe to

30 tau

z thlri

i

C;Z thlri

AC,Z

3 thé

e thé

3, thai B3 thd

3¢ tho

o thau

dlri

z dird

3 dé

e dé

&, dai 3w do

Bwe do

5° dau

i

0

22

dhlri 3 dhlri

DL.Q

cﬁ dheé

3¢ dhé

q393 dhai

% dho

B@¢ dhod

z;"a dhau

i

nlri

nlri

11

%

8 neé

v

Re né

393 nai

R 1o

e nod

2 nau

L_]

o

Ir

o)

sv pe

¢ pé

3P po

2pe pd

SO pau

)11

593 pai

SC;

phlri

S

phlri

5 phé

3¢ phé

"1—35 phai

590 pho

pe pho

55° phau

hrl

blri

1ri

@3 bé

230 bo

11

%

3¢ bé

23& bai

Bwe bd

259 bau

o3 bhlri

'Z

hlri

23 bhé

3¢ bhé

¢ bho

e3¢ bho

AL bhau

23, bhai

)hll

ool )] 191 )

o mlri

=0 mé

330¢ mé

3%,) mail

3H» mo

53RQ¢ mod

=32 mau

mIl

os;z ol osg2 Flri

ol yé

o3oe yé

033&‘y&i

o3» yo

o3Le yo

o35° yau

i

3 ré

Je ré

8P 1o

3¢ 1o

o° rau

11

g’q rlri

g«z rlri

89.)) I'a,i

&5 rl

ri

63 phrd

es3 ré

es3e ré

e93m 1o

es3ne 1o

6950 rau

Il

3

6;.‘)3&)) rai

)

1lri

e)o2 lri

S 1é

Se 1é

S 10

Swe 16

5 lau

1

viri

D vé

5O vau

11

;z vird

3¢ vé

Eﬁé Vai

3p v

3pe VO

§lr1

3 &lrd

C

3 s8é

3¢ se

30 S0

3¢ 50

Fo Sau

11

]

shlri

o

?

shlri

= shé

K¢ shé

R0 sho

Rwe sho

=° shau

i

%gz

slri

~ S].I'I

= sé

g“g s}%ai

20 so

=0 sau

Re sé

Né sal

JPe 0

311

= hlri

= hlri

® hé

¢ hé

20 ho

B¢ hd

=? hau

hd

£QS hal

¢ llr1

11ri

3 18

e 1€

lai

S 10

Soe 10

¢ lau

il

s llri

&y Hari

“Q

e3 18

e3¢ lé

3% lai

e3Bn 16

cBmwe 16

eI lau

Jri

—

20

—

At school the mark ° used for the vowel » and the mark = used for

In

the vowel o are called Ro@zy, Mo&=y or ro@o=Ry, the mark o used for

VF

ey 18 called %Jaaﬁgo the mark 3 that descends from a consonant as the

nwv

o

sign for the long vowels ¢g and & (as in 9, ete., and in 5o and Nse)

W&’ [

is called %ee, and the name for the mark ¢ is ezpr.

FH TRC BP RWEe

b

etc. may be written also F) Fe 77) V)¢ ete

208

38

If a consonant is followed immediately by another consonant

4

or by more than one, the two or more consonants are written in one

part

group (samyoga), and thus double or compound consonants (dvitvikshara,

[n e

ottakkara, dadda, daddakkara) are formed (¢f. §§ 20. 240)

o a

When two consonant

are compounded, the latter consonant is

Gy

written

underneath

the former one or is subscribed

when three

Tt

il

consonants are united in one group, the third is written underneath

attach;

the second one; and when four are compounded, the fourth is subscribed

uasal

to the third

In true Kannada a combination

of more than two

consonants does not occur

N 0

In reading, the upper consonant that is crested (including 2 o 2

UO% ka

¢ 0w » 69 ey, § 36) is pronounced like a half consonant, and the

% or ¥

short vowel o9 (a) is sounded with the lower consonant

if three

0r @20

consonants are compounded, the second one too is pronounced like a

4

R

half consonant, and the short vowel e (a)issounded with the lowest one

and so on

and =

111

ta]

39. The subscribed consonants, as a rule, have the uncrested shape

that is used for the union of consonants with vowels (§ 86); but jin the

N 3&

case of seven letters the shape is different, namely @ appearing as

o3 as

. glas

© as

and

3 often takes

DY

s Sas |, &0 as

\’

)

)

also the form of « in wh1ch case it is written after the following

¢4 3

consonant, but sounded before it; the same is to be said concerning 9

remark

The following are some examples of double and compound conso-

£,

nants:—

V1

Sargy

kka, T kkha, ¥ kéa, 3 kéha, T kta, T,; ktya, ¥, ktra, & ¢ ktrya,

taltkag

¥ . ktva, ¥ kna, ¥, knya, ¥ kma, % kya, % kra "v”'ﬁkrva, g kla, ? . kva,

Wayg

¥

o3

¢ kvya, © ksha, T, kshma, %, kshya, T , kshva; & khya;

7 gga

%, ghna;

Y by,

nka

%3

cca

vl

2]

B jja, ¥ jha; P néa; 8 tta, & tna; ® nda,

s ndrya;

tka, S tta, 2 ttha, 2 tna

3, nna;

ppa; %) bba

P; bhya

o)) mpa,

Wag

) mba, =) mma, <, mra, =) mla;

yya

rka, O rta; @ réha;

¥ lpa;

a3

~

Y

Lt

S, vva: 3 sta ;

shta, 36 shtrya

ska, ® sta,

)

stra; ;

stha, ® sma; ® hna.

Soup ds

for

Instead of o, 3, g, ete., &9, &9, etc., the forms Br 3F, @F

b

etc., &3¢

for

30F, etc. may be used

The ‘upper nasals (for the sake of convenience

the

in writing) may take the form of the circlet called sonné (§ 34), so that

8

8,

5)

_a_)

L%

) (%}

Q

S 8, B 3,

39, may appear as o%, o

)

otd,

, 03, 0%, of, of, oR§ 0D, oW o:’)a e. g.in @o¥, Totd, wokl, Mok

03 eﬂocs Wol, BoB, Vo, ToVL, 0V, V053D

See § 220

ant

40

If one of the secondary forms of the vowels (§ 24) is to form a

one

part of a compound consonant, it is attached to the upper consonant

\a,

In reading, it is sounded after the lower consonant, or if more than

two are compounded, after the lowest one, just as the short vowel

e

b1

e of § 38

hree

The following instances may be given, in which also the way of

afl

attaching the vowels appears in case the sonné represents an upper

hed

nasal (§ 39):—

two

©3 akki; © appi

¥ appu; @) or Yo ammd; AT or OB indu;

AT, or BowW imbu

g0, or BRF irmé; W& otti

w8 or o ontd; FBY or

Q?

Fo% kanki

TP

r Fo% kanéi

03 kukshi; 0 or 3902 kunti; F¢¥) kéldu;

38 or 30 tandé; Wed or Wod bandi; A,¢stri; A9,¢3, stdtra; AT sthana; BRI

he

or R0V, hénnu

See § 220

hree

ke a

41

Many Kaunada people pronounce and write the initial vowels

D B Vv MW O D W % ungrammatically, prefixing o3¢ to v FH o D

one

and ¢ t0 o0 B 2 b, thus: oy W ol cde; ) =p 3p 3pe. Regarding

initial o they use also, instead of o3y, o3y e. g. o3y,

030 £o

for 39,

hape

ota )

Initial & may appear as o3, e. ¢. oﬁsau% (—Ne)z%) 033%’

the

(=%, see §125; § 265), also when attached to an mma,l consonant 6. g,

98

TS (=0e), 'SJ@QQB (=330e8). Initial 2 is vulgarly changed into =3

fakos

e. g. s@m for we)ﬁd and 33 into %, e. g. a,;) = for ;3;3 =),

Cf. also

il

remark under 8§ 94,

gu

42. With the exception of jihvimfiliya, upadhmaniya, anusvara and

0080

visarga, all vowels and consonants (the latter compounded with the

talékattu or with any secondary form of the vowels) are named in four

L]

ways

1) by simply using their sounds, e.g. e, &, etc., B, &9, etc

kva,

2) by adding 393, ‘making’, to their sounds, e. g. ¥398, #3598, BFT

Ghn&,

TFO0, NT0, NT0, 39590, 3F90, BuTd0, BTOT, LTO0, YTV, [T0

dryas

€°T93, OF90, RTT;

3) by adding 3 to their sounds, e.g. ¥3, 43

P&

f:aé "v“é 35 65 @3 rea:%

and 4) by adding Zcor, ‘letter

to their

Ipa3

bOllI]dS, e. g eaﬁccr

faaﬁw;'

BSIEEF, IVSEIF, IILDF

) hnd

22

The letter © (o°, F) is generally called ez or Jes3, also when the ¢

A

is a substitute of &9,

NS

43

The system of punctuation in Kannada manuscripts is the same

4t

as the Samskrita one, viz. in prose at the end of a sentence the sign |

s

is used, and at the end of a longer sentence, the sign || ; in poetry the

§

sign | is placed at the end of a half verse, and at the end of a verse,

ias 10

the sign ) . (In certain prose writings, as in Dévarasa’s Sanandacaritra,

abore 1

the sign | is put not only at the end of a sentence, but also after single

4%,

words or a number of words.)

44, The Kannada figures used to express numbers (anké, lékka,

4 4 he

sanikhyé) or the numerical figures are:—

A%

s)i

9

D B

8

&

[«

Rk G

o

1 1 (

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

§ 181, ¢

fort

her

They have been adopted from the Samskrita, wherein they first

appear in the 5th century A.D. The Arabs who borrowed them from

DR

the Hindus, introduced them into KEurope, where they were called

Bu

Arabic figures.

of @

Y

e

VN\)

(oi

III. On roots or verbal themes

2

(0

45

Before introducing the chapter on declinable bases (IV.) the

Ofem

e

|

he exi

author thinks it desirable to treat of the so-called verbal roots (dhatu),

as very many nominal bases are derived from them (§ 100).

&, 3

46.

“A (verbal) root (dhatu)”, the grammarian Késava says ¢«is the

49

basis of a verb’s meaning (kriyarthamfila) and has no suffixes (pratyaya,

vibhakti) ”, or, in other words, a root is the crude form of a verb.

the Eng

the ey

47. Ancient Kannada grammars based on literary writings,' dis-

fo ngt

tinguish between monosyllabic (ékdksharadhitu) and polysyllabic roots

o)

Wi, 8

(anék&ksharadh;itu) g

These roots have been collected by Késava in his

‘root-recital’ (dhatupatha) or list of roots.

(W0 (

D

In this list there appear as monosyllabic roots e. g. &, D, ©T°,

RO%F, FRWF, TR, TR, 3, Te°, 30%°, B¢, TN, AT, KPS ;

i boy

Dotl()[]s

as dissyllabic ones e. g. ©0, D, oA, 0D, B, IB, zo%a%, BP0, %é.i&,

z—‘aéﬂ%, TR, W, T, TWIF, DWOF, TRWIF, 3¢oF, aoeazg, FRWIF,

100f 4,

of £l §

TWIF, VTS, IF0F, TOPTT, ©RY, 3PN, PNy, RPeRy, Berdy; as

Hig e

trisyllabic ones e. g. ©¥@T, @Bord, wCINY, 3TF), 9%, 8B, NOD),

ver y,

i

—

23

the ¢

FARY, WHRY, WOWIF, JIWIF, a:omg;, THL, BIXA, DERY, %Jo%%zéa,

Demory, YWPRy; as quadrisyllabic ones e. g. ‘@@%&Gm, 23?,53@:33, WBBY R,

same

.

S0ee9%Famy; and as quinquesyllabic ones e. g. IBTORy, THSPRY, MOB

igh |

MIRR, IRBORI, MW ADITI, TRHVWINR, WO ToNRRPE.

y the

verse,

48.

It is a striking peculiarity of modern Kannada that it apparently

it

has no roots ending in a consonant without a vowel, so that e. g. the

above mentioned roots Bof, Bo3F, FPWF, TROS, TR, 37°, T, I%°,

single

TR, AT, RPES®, WHTF, 39T TP, by the addition of the vowel e

lekka,

as a help to enunciation, have the forms of %3y, ﬁojooqs, BR300, TR,

%?fa#i), 3Ry, T, 3%, TR, AR, ANELI, BTy, SPT, TP

in it (¢f. § 54; § 61, remark; § 166; the present-future participle in

§ 181, and also the imperative Fo® for FHo3 etc. in § 205, 2 and 3);

further that such monosyllabic roots as &, 93 and e, appear as godoo,

j first

from

Qw3 and 3ecdw in it (§§ 162. 163).

called

But we have, in the modern language, e. g. the past participles BT,

(of @Es%k)’ 3:5% (of 33

2>

Fwodw (of Fweday), Acdy (of Roday, § 155),

ELN (of 30), LSS (of 2280), ¥, (of D), BRI, (of ¥REY), WBeR3,

(of 2exea9, § 160), 33o, (of €9, § 161), B (of Weaso, § 162), PERY

(of evedy), Teoy (of Boe), Bcay (of By, § 164), which forms prove

) the

i),

the existence of roots with originally final consonants in it oo (eg?,

3, Iwor, ete.),

s the

49. When carefully examining Késava’s list of roots, one finds that

the English term ¢root’, in many instances, does not properly express

Lty&ya’ )

the meaning of the term <dhatu’.

The verbs gDy, => and D&, in § 47,

B s

for instance, are formed by means of the suffix @Ry, from =0, and

70018

2R, Boor and ddvedor, by means of the suffix ¢y, from ©oo and

in bis

QTS (see § 149 seq.); %Jas@s:%aéo is composed of %@98% and &R, w3

S, of WAy and =@, Beowind: of BTRow and 33, wOTIoRRNG

%Uga

of wesTe BR%*, and so on.

Such verbs are, according to Kuropean

96

notions, no roots.

Késava’s term ‘dhitu’ may here and there denote a

root ¢. e. the primary element of a verb or primitive verbal theme, but

3,

APy

often stands also for a secondary verbal theme and a compound verb.

i B

His definition of dhitu, therefore, is that it is the crude form of any

verb which is not always a real root.

i)

—

—

24

Al

50.

In further discussing the subject of dhatus let us use the

general term of ¢verbal themes’ for them.

literat

51.

o

There are a good many monosyllabic verbal themes in ancient

Kannada the vowels of which are short, e. g. @os, enm’, 209°, OT°, WO,

il

T3 (or RoKF), R, JeF, WO, WeF, Soee; other monosyllabic verbal

short

themes have long vowels, e. g. &5¢f, To03°, TevS, 300°, HIOF, H[T’,

EN)

T, T[RCKF, Dok, HeSSS, [PETT, PeSF.

being

past

52. Some monosyllabic verbal themes appear with short and long

vowels, e. g. @956 and &%, e and e, e and L, HC and

by a

9%, 8% and oo,

3o and 39TF,

3%¢ and 39%”,

wo* and 2390F,

§ 16:

2005 and 23903, weX¥ and Necy¥, Feof and mpef, It may be supposed

prim

that the short vowels are original, and the long verbal themes secondary.

§

a shy

(About zaof and z390¢ see § 210.)

ey

53. DBecause some monosyllabic verbal themes with a long vowel

the

change, in the past participle, their long vowel into a short one, as &

euph

makes its past participle @3y (§163), zom* %"9@5)5 (§ 164), IR¢ ;3\@5%,

of )

e B3R, D Y (§ 162), and maoxs® =39, (§ 163), it is reasonable to

sylla

think that their primitive vowel has been short (regarding som® ¢f. T&°,

assl)

TR, w9y in the Dictionary). A similar lengthening of a vowel is also

011]

seen. in the verbal themes 3we and o, as they have also the form of

Par

203 and &R,

(See also the remark under § 59.) In such cases too we

refe

may consider the long themes to be secondary.

54, In §48 it has been indicated that nowadays there are no

diss

monosyllabic verbal themes in modern Kannada, the vowel ev, as a help

o

i

to enunciation, being added to make them dissyllabic.

A

similar

atel

tendency to lengthen an originally monosyllabic verbal theme with a

short vowel by the addition of the euphonic vowel = is observed already

(V1

in ancient literary works in which we find e. g. w® for s, v9 for

(hl\

o, Rodo for Rexs, RO for Res, wo for wer, WO for wer, FO for

diss

30e¢, and also v& for T¢s,

1§ ¢

Concerning the lengthening of an originally monosyllabic verbal

i

I

theme with a short vowel by adding the vowel en it may be remarked

Wy

that this practice too, now and then, took place already in ancient

Pt

literature; thus, for instance, Bwer and Iww,, Rers, and R, Boek

als

and =ye0 were used therein,

an

é

25

————

> the

Also monosyllabic themes with a long vowel were in ancient

literature occasionally made dissyllabic by the addition of e, as e. g.

Cient

Fey* was written Fesdh, Seof Sewy, and Jweef Awew (¢f. § 166).

WY

55

There are several seemingly dissyllabic verbal themes, with a

arhal

short vowel in the first syllable, that end in @, as @&y, wR, wury,

Sl

SR, BRI, VWY, RIB.

Were these originally monosyllabic, the final ey

being merely euphonic or a help to enunciation? No doubt, for their

long

past participles eﬁéjgj, raéjgd, W‘“gy j,:jéjgj, gjéj&,' 22)‘@3& and oed, are formed

and

by adding the formative syllable gy (which by assimilation becomes &,

0wy,

§ 164, 4) immediately to e, @rs, wues, etc.,, which thus represent the

0sed

primitive themes.

aty.

56. A small number of seemingly dissyllabic verbal themes having

a short vowel in the first syllable and ending in €99, represents itself in

e, (ED0), BC, NEDY, (), e, 369, J€ and JpEde,

Like

wel

the e of the themes @@y, vy, etc. in § 55 that of ened), ete. too 1s a

5 &

euphonic addition, as their past participles are o3y, 333, 3y, (instead

0,

of pZy), 33y, 33y, (inspead 33y), £y, and Jpdy, ‘the formative

syllable gy having been attached directly to the radical €9-5, which by

i)

assimilation was changed into gs (§ 160, 4 § 161).

They are, therefore,

ls

originally monosyllables, and as such primitive themes.

(For the past

) of

We

participle of &3 and 23¢9y we have as yet no grammatical or other

references.)

59. Also the verbal themes ==, €=, and DFy are not radically

10

elp

dissyllabic, as their past participles are 032,313_ (for @), gjzézi, and

Bedo (for @), the formative syllable 8o having been added immedi-

Jar

ately to the radical zf with the proper euphonic change of consonants

| 4

(§ 164, 9. 10).

dy

58.

We have now to examine another class of verbal themes that

or

(like those in §§ 55. 56. 57) are customarily pronounced as if they were

0r

dissyllables.

They have their first syllable long, and their second syllable

s R.

Three of them are Sweds, Bedo and =5y, and the final ev of

al

these is simply euphonic, as they appear also as RBReCHs,

23023 and

od

2990 (§ 183, 4).

They are, therefore, true monosyllables and as such

ot

primitive themes. (According to the Sabdanuiasana, stitra 85, there are

7

also 30930 of Zopdy, 3L o of Twdy, stitra 514 FeY) of RN,

and slitra 545 SN of ¥Ry, JeeI

0,¢ of Ssezmv.) Of. § 234.

3

]

[

26

and

Others are @, NBE, W@, TR, THRI, JoBY, etc. Although no

direct monosyllabic form of them exists to show the merely euphonic

sylla

I

o B —C— m—

character of their final v (but see the Sabdanusasana’s ©£95,% in §58);

6]

they apparently are monosyllables, because their verbal nouns (bhiva-

introc

valanas) o5&, enwdl, fobl, Totd, TR and mokl are formed exactly like

dN\h

Swedd of Rwerdy, Betd of Bery, and Ikl of Ssez. Cf. § 242.

7

L(a.c

syllab

59. A further number of verbal themes similar to those mentioned

in § 58 are the following:—es&9), e, 2D, TEH, 6N, TN,

n, in

180

F9C20, 3685, . JREN, JREE), TREN, T, [ALD, e, (HEN),

syllab

20, 339, DWW, TG, A,

The difference is that they have

viJ W

d 00

&30 as their second syllable. As a rule their past participle shows the

formative vowel & (Rl etc. § 166), and the €9 remains before the

W

f9

formative syllable 3 of the present-future participle relative (ewtdas,

Lie

ete., § 180, 3); but there are exceptions. Thus we have e3or (wCF+ 39,

(onsor

§ 160, 4), unF (&L 4+ 3, =33, § 183, 2); 5L and Fo%oF (TOCHF + W,

~ARQ

WUWN

§ 166); 2Re0s and 3RIJF (3REF -+, §180 6);

3P0, SREROF

ancier

(3R + o, § 166), 3Rt and SRenF (SHLF 4%, § 183, 2); o

mediz

=, oos3F (Rt 4, § 180, 6) and Fomr (T +%, § 183, 2); L%,

d )

DOBIF (98 + ), § 166), HESI and meIF (HCF 4+, § 180, 6);

partic

EED°, WOWF (WL + 1Y, § 166), 20e2033, and De3F (DS + =, § 180, 6y

62

follow

SR, SPRF ([WEF 4T, § 183,2) and IpF ([WEF+ § 180, 6);

oy

Q3P and JPBF (DI + %3, § 166). At the same time we have the

AN

verbiLl nouns 23 (for H3F of D), oL (for 3L2), S5 (for SE),

and the past participle T30 (for Sodor of matdy, § 159).

It must,

K

b

therefore, be concluded that the final ev of the verbs is nothing but a

Y

help to enunciation, and that they are originally monosyllabic themes.

It may be remarked that the long vowel of Ta€9), ety and FseC

ai\o

is short in the nouns g9, ©E9% and e,

(see ¢

60. As has been stated in the preceding paragraphs (51 seq.) there

)

are many and various monosyllabic verbal themes in Kannada.

U

verbal themes

may be adduced e.g.

As examples of dissyllabic

ano

i

@i, DN, Wi, B, A8, BB, I3, 3B, BB, VB, T, W, B, B8, A,

hag .

;é

©D, B3, WP, B, ¥S B, WA, 39, WP, NCP; but with respect to

0 by

their finals @ and « it is to be said that they are not radical (see § 157;

g

§ 169, letter o, 3.4.5; § 172; § 180, 5; § 243, 16, 18. 21. 23, 84, 25, 26. 27),

j

—

217

—

10

and in the vulgar dialect some of the themes may become mono-

e

syllabic (§ 151, a, ¢

; § 158; § 165, a, 7).

J

61

Another class of verbal themes which in KéSava’s list are

Va

introduced as trisyllabic ones with the final syllable e3o, are really

ke

dissyllables, which by several of them can be proved, e. g. by %N

2009, Rwt9y. 2569 and Bge9y, as these occasionally add the participial

ed

syllables zo and = (see § 59), with elision of the merely euphonic vowel

N

ov, immediately to €% (w¥roF

IQ00F, ete., nwrsr, WBSF, § 166

jj

)s

§ 180, 6), by 9,69 and B389, as they always attach the participial

ve

syllable 3 directly to e3¢ (CO,30F, B%¥,3.F) and by 8369, @RI

e

3o 69 and

¢xe9, as they do the same, changing the € into &

I

(€9 3y,, ¥Ry, etc., § 160, 4)

y

Let it be remarked here that dissyllabic themes with the final

consonants of

@6

o and C9F

such as

eYold

TS

235300°¢

By

3RCIeF. 2CIe%. 3ruys, @it are never written as trisyllables in the

I3

ancient dialect

although they are occasionally trisyllabic in the

N

medizeval dialect, and always so in the modern one (see §§ 48. 166)

An exception is formed by a few ancient themes when they suffix the

particle »®y, for which see § 151, letter a,

;

62. Some instances of verbs that are always trisyllabic

are the

)

following :— @3y, BBy, WHEIFOBY, SoVRY, FIRIONY, JDGEIF, BTow

;

20T sao

FOBY, &Soomc%o TTRY, BRTBY, 3633,

TN

w’

D%, WCIRY,

)

Besxo; and some instances of such as are always quadrisyllabic are:

W

)

WHTAY, iz ORy, R0 &; quinquesyllabic verbs are e. g. FTTRR, @O

N

Pt A M)

Two trisyllabic verbs with final @, viz. ¥n@s and Doy, appear

also as dissyllabic

when

their forms

become 3ncss

and RIS

(see § 183, 4)

More or less of the trisyllabic verbs can be derived from monosyllabic

Of the

above-mentioned terms

WRIF0TY 18

or dissyllabic themes.

another form of 2 oom which has sprung from cect, to live.

BBRFY

has arisen of ez, to ﬁll etc.;

FoRoBo of 0@y, to beat;

Soerty of Zoed,

to bend or be moved out of a straight or standing position; Fogoony of

30R, to bend; aduEor of ddvos, to be stretched; 3gozs of X33, to join

Do0oea0 of Zodoss. to contract; Bory of €, to be mixed

5550 of w(s

4%

—

28

—

to spread ; 30353 of 3ed, to grow cool; T30, of 39, to be mixed; 3%

66

vowels

of the noun g, adjustment, compared with the verbal theme =8, to

partic

be joined, etc.; ee9zy of eese, to learn,to know; 5@&#3 of s;&)gb, to

trust (¢f. § 49).

(§ 16

Of the above-mentioned quadrisyllabic verbs %50=, comes from the

may,

p)

81

noun %x3, gsmg’)gb;jo from @rﬂasﬁog);' ﬁ%bm may be connected with %ﬁ%,

1 the

to dig.

Fom)

Of the above-mentioned quinquesyllabic verbs ema%)ﬁ;j%bdo 1s composed

of eve o and =@y (¢f. § 49); regarding IZBHR> see § 211, remark 2.

) aI

2)

&

E

63. We have scen that the vowels » (§ 54) and ey (§§ 48. 5459,

61) at the end of verbal themes are often simply euphonic, also w and

B T

vy

d)

N

oJ

when they seemingly belong to them (§ 60).

the ver

64. KéSava says that there are no Kannada verbs which end in

O3 2

aspirated consonants (mahaprandkshara), the nasals = and oss, the

pue——

W, #

consonants >°,

o3

s and ¢, and the ‘double consonant o

With regard

l()ﬂg an

to ¢ it is to be observed that his statement was true only for his own

8 a

time, as in a later period many verbal themes with final ¢ (Ry) were

locatire

in use, this letter often taking the place of = (3); see e. g. wePRy,

that of

BALP T, PVENTY, FHITY, TRV, 3oy in the Dictionary.

Cf. § 223.

4,% ar

65

KéSava’s list of verbs (§47) is so arranged that the alpha-

betical order shows itself in the final letters, ¢3¢ and 9 coming after x¢,

~

Of verbs that form a single vowel, he adduces only two, viz. & and b,

and of such as consist of one consonant with a long vowel, twelve, viz.

67

T, ¢, Te, 3¢, 3RE, BN, Tp, 239, We, B¢, e and Doe.

pl‘akriti)

The final consonants and syllables of the verbs in his list are the

Verba]

following :—

but el

B, 0F0; T, oT0; 2y, 00 (AWY); W, owd; &, &

&

; 8, B, B; ®°, 6, B; 3;

68

ol e L TR Y- R AR 5030; modyigios Ola%; 0°5,.0,78: &f, 8. & By 0

kindsy Ui

(3R, &;

U R e ML

(CF. 8§ 149-151,)

The finals often are essential parts of the verbal theme.

That they

1’ [

Verbg by

are not always radical, but sometimes mere formatives, e. g. B, 0BV,

Ry, ony, 2, 0wy, &9, £99, appears to a certain extent from the §§ 62

ity

9

o

(A

Yoy VS

-

and 63.

We add as a peculiarity that what may be called the root of

:

0f

A

)

A4, To

verbs of frequentative action, is seen in the first form of reduplication,

2, by

as in 003 :Soo“‘&iiom (§ 211,6), 3R%¥ 30T 3e%n, B¢ B 3$n

(§ 211, 10).

formed by

ff[)m HOum

29

——

)

66. A peculiarity of some verbal themes 1s that they change their root

{0

vowels.

This, in the ancient dialect, is especially seen in the past

fo

participle, in which @, takes the form of @zég

22y that of 3230

(§ 164, 10), &z that of %*éjg (§ 164, 8), 36D that of T3,

A9y that of

the

139, 363 that of 33y (§ 161) eorto that of 2w

)

o that of Jp7o

%

(§ 164, 12),

oy that of B0

0%y that of 3wtdy, (§ 164, 17)

22PN

in the later dialect

has become

Bt 1 A

BB

FE

FTOTO

sed

BRT,

&)Céo

é\@v&)

S893° 8%y

QUMY W

o@ﬁ& ogfﬁg

and o

&

3=y and 233,

=IeVy

already in Késava’s time

appeared as OES3

59

i as

W, VY aS WS

FPe¢ must originally have been Foes

and

as I (not %?Jae‘))

18

a killer

and JIRD

to take,

TIYE

as

the verbal noun

Observe, further

that

FRYy exists also as Bo

| 1n

UO3s® appears also as wod®, TooIF as FROIF, 3903 as 3RGNE, PO as

the

PB, TOIF a8 T, BAOWIF a8 2B0K0, and that several themes have a

rard

long and short vowel (§§ 52.53)

Observe also the change of « into

own

. o and

and that of ey into enm and %, in §101

that of enes of the

yere

locative into ¢es, and that of o of the instrumental into « in §109

that of o into o

and en, that of ey into o in § 247, d, 9. 10. 13. 17. 18

ag‘),

23

&t 2. and that of . o into w5 in § 251

pho-

o]

IV. On declinable bhases

d b,

(4

67

According to grammar there are words called bases (linga

Such a base is defined as follows

prakriti)

«It does not express

verbal action (kriyé), has no case-terminations (vibhakti, ¢f. § 105 seq.)

the

but embodies meaning (artha),”

v);

68. According to the grammarian KéSava hbases are first of four

d )

kinds, vez

1, verbal bases (krit, krillinga), . e

such as are formed directly from

hey

verbs by the so-called krit-suffixes attached to the relative present and past

0T

participle (krit, see § 102, 8. e; §§ 177. 180. 185. 253, 9, d; 254), e. g. to

¢ 62

BeBOS, TOBOT, PO

TPRRT, BeRW, JET, JNRWRT, THRB, IOR; FORT; PIAAT

it of

BoNAB, CoARR; 2HRIAB. IR

£10

2, bases with other suffixes (taddhita, taddhitalinga), i. e. such as are

Qa"ﬁ)

formed by the so-called taddhita-suffixes (a7, 3¢, 3¢, ©9, &0k, ete., see § 243)

from nouns and verbs, e. g. #zﬁ’m mm BOBIIY, :)o@;j%# &5, #és

—_—

R

30

3, compound hases (samisa, samésalinga), i. e. such as are compounded of

they have

30

7,81

two (or more) words, e, g. SOMWP, YIN P, FoBIDY, JooonR o3 ; PHUIS, &e@qae:ie),

2

<)

DI

8,800, AW (cf. No. 4, b; see § 244 seq.);

Rl

)

dW

4, nominal bases (ndma, namalinga, namaprakriti) or crude nouns (see

ANY, %

§ 242) which include

n

@) words not etymologically derived by the public, but commonly known

1ot been

and used in a conventional sense (rtidhanima, ditandma, niséitanama), e. g. R,

same sha

Y, %, that by their number of syllables (aksharavritti), also without being

0T

4

compounds in the generally accepted meaning (asamésaté), may be monosyllabie,

!

ete., and even quinquesyllabic, as 35, 303, BeIR, FINX, FU LT,

)

Ly

)

) words whose meaning is intelligible in themselves (anvarthanama),

ff

§20

expressing either quality (gunénurtipa) of beings, as @, TKNIT, GIHPINK,

o |

[T, or circumstance and condition (arthanurtpa) of beings, as RePmY, JR

pronouns

SORT (or RWIZRT), TARWIY (¢f. No. 3, so that Késava enlarges the compass

(sattrinant

of nominal bases by including also compound bases, and, we may say, also all

bases in |

the others);

which the

¢) words by which one of a species is pointed out (ankitandma) or proper

Dy

)

\-031

names, as o8, FAZ, InW, 9T, which though occasionally without a clear

il

meaning (sarthakam alladuvu), are current

everywhere in Kannada and

other languages.

see g 86),

but with

Besides these four kinds of declinable bases there are three others,

Y37, 33

k

which will be given in § 90.

dr

~

O o

the first

Remarks.

T,

1, When a verb (kriyé) stands at the end of the description of the character

in§ T0),¢

of a person, it too has been called a krillinga by poets, e. g. (with case-termina-

hases iy |

tion) SFRRYT¥C YTF ©F OF® 9RF0, he who was as Jainas are.

OF 8rg %

2, When a series of words (vhkyam4ls) is considered as a whole, as in

n

attributes, poets have called such a series too a nominal base, e. g. (with case-

{‘J@%a’ [

terminations) ©%0m> JTZow¢ cﬁ;ﬁorﬁom%&dm ﬁaéo;ﬁramﬁcs e5699%30° ; ém%?@\s‘%s

¢ 3 %?ofm%iﬁid Be30; ﬁota%%ée%ﬁﬁ@o; AnTFINFoTo.

deelinab}e

V%03 {

~

69. A word is termed gy or o5 in grammar. &, however, has

6,

two additional meanings, signifying also either a nominal base (§ 68)

i Kallna§

with a case-termination (vibhakti) attached to it (nimapada) or a verbal

s

theme (dbatu, § 50) with a personal termination (vibhakti) attached to

NP FE-

Wy .I)'v‘m’

it (akhyatapada, kriyapada, §§ 144. 192).

deﬁ]inab]e

70. Not only Kannada words do belong to the nominal bases or crude

(t

nouns (linga, nimalinga, namaprakriti), but, as seen in § 68, also words

)

wJ“Q

;

that have been adopted from Samskrita.

These often exhibit the form

——

31

c—

ed of

they have in Sarmskrita dictionaries, in which.case they are called &

139,

ROX

8 terms, €. 9. DY, PO, TNY, FVTIT, B0, T, PISE, PIT,

3

%

Qs

SOR, IR, 23,8, RS, eﬁs%, Ag, ¥, 8, ¥, NO, O, T,

i)

(see

30D, B3, 33, 0%y, R, e, Aedy, Ted, wy, A, TS, eo.

<l

Another series of nominal bases called 33 530 terms which have

nown

not been borrowed from Samskrita, but of which nearly all exist in the

same shape in Kannada as well as in Samiskrita, are 0%, eories, @i,

heing

ahic,

FoT, %”.@Q% (Jpeed or %J@Q'@gj), ﬁe@a, no, ne%, NP, 3%, 3weoe,

w’

W, WO, VO, S8, NB, 00, NS (SPo), 03 (VI), WY

\ma),

(¢f- §252, 8). Also the nominal bases &pd, Fowp @ are tatsamas.

308

72. Samskrita particles (avyaya) as ©80°, w0 IO, or Samskrita

), 88

8, W¢, 3w, oW

, or Samskrita participles ending in ©3°

pronouns (sarvanama) as

D

1pass

(Sattrinanta) as T,008°, 0ms®, 2,3>3%, cannot form by themselves declinable

50 all

bases in Kannada; but compound bases (samasalinga) with a final vowel, of

which they form the first member, are declinable, e. g. O3 Z0Fa), whdorn, s

toper

3, 338.

DT ; 3 3&&55, 5%235, 0308y N ; Eb'jea:ej&oésa, B3R, TS, zg)m

»

clear

%8, The Samskrita numerals (sankhyavagdi) ©F, Q, &, ¥3)0°, Jowd (JowT®,

and

see § 86), ®&°, AT (RYIF), ©F, (VF,F9), I3 (IIF°), ©3 (¥33%) are indeclinables;

but with suffixes (pratyaya) in the form of &30, 830, W3¥, Joudw, =Y, 387,

hets,

©%,F, IIF, 323, and in compounds (samisa), as PTION, YFW, 3,807, 83

BFR, VoWLWS, c"ié&diﬁ\)%", 'n))oé?jﬁﬁ, U%ng%, D2, 6537333688 (of which they form

the first member), they are declinable bases in Kannada.

%4, Samskrita words with final &, e. g. 3993 (which is one of the tatsamas

actor

in § 71), W03, BID, VT, AW, T¢I, change this & into » to become declinable

mind

bases in Kannada, in which case they appear as 398, 398, 238, ¥o®, a8, Gl

or are DTV, terms.

a8 10

75

As an exception to rule 74 the Samskrita words 409, WS, FI®,

AsSe

@5?5,55@, 150?&;5 %9, 2T and others change their final ¥ into © fo become

P

n

%

declinable bases in Kannada, appearing therein as ?%5, WS, ete. or being

©TI0IT, terms.

has

76. 'When the Samskrita words 0,¢532 and

ke

a

are used as declinable bases

Z;

68)

in Kannada, they appear as D83 or 0,¢3, 9T or

uO\'

ethal

77. Some Samskrita words with final ® (93033, terms), viz. G, VPR,

BB, G, 5,3, W and LT (¢f. § T4), change this § into © to become

ed {0

declinable bases in Kannada, and then appear as 3%, 9 93, ete.

78. Samskrita words with final 8 (83903, terms), e.g. 3 ¢ M0¢, AR,

U0

e

oo, ™0t always change their & into @ to become declinable bases in

jord

Kannada, and then appear as @3 , 9, etc.

orm

e

32

]

79

Samskrita polysyllabic words (¥3:¢32F383%) with final 9\ (NRTITF,

terms), e. g. H003)R, TR, DBWAT, FoTR, VVIP, change their ¥W into ¥V to

The g

become declinable bases in Kannada, and then appear as 85032, T80, ete.

(§370) v

80. All Samskrita monosyllabic terms (93T 83Y), e. g. VY, IN, T, e,

did not

N

&

7

e, PR, TR, remain uﬁchanged when used as declinable bases in Kannada.

%0 essenti

81.

As a rule Sarskrita words ending in 930 (%903 terms), e. g. D

9.

733359), ES?_)DQ)./ #C‘%‘F, ﬁ@%, %JM%, 253335350), Ci)gooéé. &5@5@, E‘SD% remain unchanged

declinabl

when used as declinables in Kannada.

ool

328, however, often takes the form of %93, also in P53, and that of P3,

Besid

in 2598, For the 90 in 13 the substitute ©0 (890333¢3) méy be used, so that

3, appears as N0

9, o

82. The declinable base of 3 may become ¥ in Kannada.

words, &

83.

The second class of Samskrita words that are used as nominal bases

§ 20 s

in Kannada are such as end in consonants (J0%T0&, terms); but before they

attributiy

become Kannada declinables, they have to undergo various changes, as will be

34@33 (

M

seen from §§ 84-89.

numerals

84. The Samskrita words ®3°, 2,2, @8300°, S2808°, WIFF, TFYE, JeTITF,

or

<

RT°, BT, RZVT0A, MoryIeE’, HTICWA®, RS B° and others add @ (@a:j) to their

(a

finals, and become 83, 3% (¢f. § 85), ¥2T, ete.

dmﬁ'@’,

85.

The Samskrita words @®°, ¥ 3¢ (T3 &%), 8,938¢ (I,330°), 930T° (90%),

Thug

Qe (BFF), oDWIRT, WS, IS (AIWF), WP, WTS, T (3u°), AITC

A gy

(RDwF), BT (3B°, of. § 84), Qb (BF%), D, W7 (TJI[NC), TT® (F93) and

class, 1

others double their final consonant (or take & %97 3) and add @V, e. g. ©I, T332,

indefinite

£,8388), z):o%’o&, ete.

Regy

86. The Samskrita words Dd%T®, S0LFFT’, PRTF, VBT I0®, FO°, FIFF,

)

W,B 5 and others drop their final (or take ©3, S2¢T), e, g, 0%, TRFF, ete.

that they

But ¢H3° and ¥WwS, & dropping their & become 3 and ¥R,

L0mipg]|

8%. The Samskrita words 0333%°, exma®, Jodae, JoHA®, JoIAC 3¢030m°

)

either drop their final consonant, or double it and attach ¥V, in which case

bases

they appear in Kannada as 038 or 038Ry, 3 or $tmAY, =od or JAY,

dlSs}

lal

B3 or BODRY, [T or S8Ry, 3,803 or 3,0039R0,

e optj

88. The Samskrita word ¥0° remains as it is; neof (AT®) does so too,

& 1ylg

bat appears also as AS.

89.

Lastly, the nominative plural in Samskrita of some Samskrita words,

Hm hkq

after having dropped its visarga, is used as a nominal base, e. g. 33,3 (of Z3°),

0300 (of 03T, @c,s%a’ (of @%aﬁ), Re0203) (of AD), zsaﬁodsao.f) (of zsaﬁoims),

B 0f

{

F1033203 (of#modmﬁ), sscs?joﬁ (of :)%706), %83 (of wafob:gs), 3¢9 (of 303,

%,

mwog (of BRI @6).

ey

33

c——

0,

Remark.

@ty

The grammarian Késava does not class the apabhramsa or tadbhava words

(§ 870) with the words given in §§ 74-79. 81. 82. 84-89, probably because he

did not consider the changes they undergo in order to become declinable bases

naa,

so essential as those of the tadbhavas.

9=

38,

anged

90. In § 68 it has been stated that first there are four classes of

declinable bases (lingas) in Kannada, viz. 59 off, é%é@of\, 398N,

S30000n.

[ @

g

) that

Besides these we have a fifth class called &=3¢ o530, pronouns, e. g.

BEY, B, I, BJYR, HV B, VI, D7, together with the ewd,,

words, o, (&90), Jeo, Jvo (see § 102, 8, letters @ and b; § 137, a, 1,

hases

§ 255 seq.); a sixth class called Rosam®R, mocomad or Howweed,,

they

attributive nouns or adjectives, e. g. 2930, 5093, WABY,

WA, WF 30

9

%)__D

ill be

3093y, (see § 273, seq.); and a seventh class called R0, or 760938{863323,

numerals and appellative nouns of number, e. g. '“533 , 20RY, SIRE, TV,

Rowe,

wasr, (and, with the termination of the nominative plural, aFoe,

) their

SN[, etc., and also To), Foy, TS, Fuwes, see § 278, 4).

Thus there are 7 classes of declinable bases in Kannada.

),

A subdivision of the numerals may perhaps be adduced as an 8th

oy

) and

class, véiz. the four words @230, B3y, ¥R, V3, 2 09 that express

indefinite quantity (nirviséshapavan; see § 273, 8. 4).

%)

Regarding the avyayalingas or adverbial declinable bases see § 281.

OFe,

a1

What has been said regarding verbal themes (§§ 47. 51 seq.)

that they are monosyllabic, dissyllabic, etc., applies also to the Kannada

nominal bases or crude nouns (namalinga) of the ancient dialect.

}ecﬁ)ﬁf

92.

In modern Kannada all monosyllabic true Kannada nominal

(43¢

bases with a final consonant generally appear as dissyllabic, and all

Cj-)"“)a

dissyllabic ones as trisyliabic; in the medieval dialect the two kinds

The lengthening, as

are optionally used as dissyllables and trisyllables.

0 tOO)

a rule, is done by the addition of a euphonic ey to facilitate pronun-

ciation (c¢f. §§ 48. 54 seq.); monosyllabic nominal bases ending in o3

jords

may likewise use the vowel = to become dissyllabic (¢f. the euphonic

=0

)

o of § 54; see § 93), doubling or not doubling their final.

o)

93. Monosyllabic true Kannada nominal bases of the ancient dialect

3)9)>

end in consonants (or are ;;Soma;_sg terms), these consonants being ¢,

)

34

p——

06\

We g

636 ! 0336

06

(

i) )’

¢, w5 and £o¢ (cf. § 61), .9 T

5&9@

e

BPe, B, 2o

APTE, TOISF, 300336, TOO3ISE

J90°

300°

e

6, 89,

(022°)

FTOE

ol

TS

(AL

5

2990%*

3Re%°

259C3¢

2008

é)'

oo

DOE, TR

s

7

7

e

BRLSF, BeCo (23eass)

See some exceptional forms in § 121, a, and ¢f

the remark under § 96

(Obse

In medieeval Kannada the above terms are also dissyllabic, viz

o a8 §

FTO, T

205D

Recy, Jps

B0, R, ALY, TV, 90, [N

v being

[O0T

2e0

23\50

T

T

SN

FSRAIN,

a9) (DN

%) L

WO

WY

T

SR, WH

Do, TPy, 3B, 2398, RPN, 330 (WELN)

Kesa

In modern Kannada they are dissyllabic (as far as they are used

Instance

therein); but see the exceptional forms in § 120, ¢

9, g |

978, 29

94. Dissyllabic true Kannada nominal bases of the ancient dialect

down in

ending in consonants are e. g. eVATS

390°

3300,

N!\‘CG

TS

FREIS

he does

c eV

T3 B¢

3 Tow)d

2 r\\“—\9‘;

plev)l

ROk,

R \Wilive)]

99533

the B

SRTSF, DL

38 ©f

TGS

FIVIYE

300%*

e9CIs

aness

PO,

c.%e)

BiaMAN

OB

BF,CO¢

o0 T

3

239RICIS

See a few exceptional forms in

y

§ 121, a

with

In medieval Kannada the above terms may become trisyllables by

erefo

adding a euphonic ev; in modern Kannada they always are such (as

reseml

far as they are used in it), e. g

AT, 3930, TR

Y

Observe that ancient 23¢Re% becomes 23¢R®, and ancient €65 becomes 9T, &

E

@

in modern Kannada

1§

Q

95. There are a few trisyllabic true Kannada nominal bases with a

final consonant in the ancient dialect, e. g. B&PASS, [YCPWS*, PR &F

%

The last term occurs in the mediseval dialect also as RHAZ3 0 (with the

3

euphonic ev), 4. e. quadrisyllabic; but in the same dialect and in modern

VA

Kannada is trisyllabic too, viz. SR &9

an\)\

NOTY

96. Dissyllabic true Kannada nominal bases ending in vowels ( 5,098,

i

terms) are used in the same shape as well in ancient and medieval as

VALY

The final vowels are

in modern Kannada (as far as they occur in it)

I\

9, &, e and o

With regard to the bases with final eny it is to be

ang

observed that, in this case (see the contrary in § 97), this vowel may

somehow originally have been euphonic, as it is nearly always elided

i

taddy

before a following vowel in sandhi (see § 213 seq

also the optional use

§ 215, 4), and as we have 5929 for zazEy, and Bwecd for Bwery

Qumq

VT, 3§

—

35

eme—

o)

We give the following instances: =un, 3@, o9, FR%, 33, 83, 7,

W )

WO, RO, BPW, P, JPRF, 3REF; 8O, 298P, &, TP, PO, CP, F¢eI,

D)

W

P

TR 308y, O, (DB,), TP, (Bp

30.)

2200/

S5y, TR, [IVRY; 339,

1 of

38, TR, TCHB, (TF,), 08, SoEB, [oeck, XS, A3, oL, Jpesd, BS.

Observe that =533 occurs also as [se, 3¢ as 305y, <IT as ITY),

U

30 as 383, 0% as SwFF), WT as W), % as w¥sy, the unradical

200

erv being suffixed by means of a euphonic ¢,

)

Remark.

Q9

N

Késava in the sitras and vrittis of his éabdamanidarpaua (but not in the

1sed

instances given) occasionally adds a final euphonic @ to the suffixes ¥0° and

®O°, g0 that they appear as ¥3 and ©) (see pages 120. 121. 123. 124. 147.

278. 296 of the Mangalore edition) and treats them acecording to the rule laid

lect

Vo

Jo.og

down in § 215, 4.

Also with regard to the suffixes ®@, @03, B8y, 9, ¥

il

he does so (pages 264. 265).

Compare also the ©¥3> (for ©°°) in § 119, a, 1

the ®oo (for ©o°) in §§ 109, a, 7; 120, a, 7; 121, a, 1; 187, 1; the %% (for

045

Wy

%9%) in § 109, a, 7; see BRI 450 in a verse quoted in § 271.

10

97. There are a number of true Kannada dissyllabic nominal bases"

with final &v in which this vowel is not euphonic but radical, and are,

by

therefore, never elided before a following vowel in sandhi, in this respect

(cla

resembling the final ey of the Samskrita nominal bases 1ogy, ©30, oy,

Such bases are e. g. ¥, T, FEYD, TS, 3, T,

053, Z)?ﬁg@, etc

5;

30890, TEI, TYCI, 0B (see § 128), and their euphonic letter in sandhi

18 ¢ (§ 215, 8% d).

| 4

98. Trisyllabic true Kannada nominal bases which end in the vowels

@, B, v and o, the ev being like that of § 96, are e. g. =oeP R, T

lie

B, zs%id, WLNT; TIB, PHTe, TE P, BRZ,LP, Rpod; BN, INRY,

11

TRV, VU, FBB, BWJRY, BTy, ?.ﬁjae);ﬁogb, SRCINY, RN,

So®, WP (see also 3T ete. in § 96); Foced, IRARDY, WAR, BAW,

5

as

$RS, TS, FI,S (¥3,9).

16

The bases 8% and &J@o are also dissyllabic, appearing as oI

-

he

and e,

)

99

As quadrisyllabic true Kannada nominal bases which are not plain

1

taddhitalinga words (§ 68, 2) may be mentioned WNTH and ST (see also § 95).

56

Quinquesyllabic and sexisyllabic Kannada words, as ¥n&3g, 86?007, T¢adom

2T, 30038T, are plain taddhitalinga terms.

5%

9

6

Taddhitalinga terms will be treated of separately in § 243.

LS

102,

100. As will be seen from the Kannada-English Dictionary very

according |

seren deck

many true Kannada nominal bases (lingas) are identical as to form with

2 & nint

verbal themes (or are @ terms), e. g. eﬁéjﬁs’ pursuing; S©z,

(Remak f

piling; ez@y, cooking; 9_95\0)&, embrace; egef, flower; @3, ground state;

The v

563, wave; ®JoTo, pressing firmly; e93j), hankering after; eﬁsé%, fear;

LM

09033, destruction; ey, coming to pass; ey, motion; gy, putting;

of men, mé

=, swimming; ewnoC, spittle; emzé&gs, making loose; ev@, fragment;

those of s

AR AN)

wﬂ

swelling; end, burning; engor, rising; eveny, crookedness;

4%, s

A

ne, sound ; euC3®, remaining; enpet, outery; ,pag&‘jﬂ waking; 39,

2 39)

female sex

raising; oG93, pouring; &9, rising; weordy, drying;

)

fitness; 2.0,

039

\6’?

y \AMJ7

reading; %éjgj, binding; &, cutting; z¢s theft; o

unripe fruit;

3, T

Fogef, cuckoo; égéjgy blow; ¢, coolness;

TR €0,

o, limping; Feny,

§

belongs 13

crying as a peacock does; 3@, obstacle; 3gor, training, etc.; 3ress,

inanimate

TR, F

blame; 3eny, belching; 39@E3, entanglement; TRy, passing over; g,

walk; Swexo, looking on, etc.; T[p, flowering; sBe3or, increase;

$EI=¢,

dy T

This 13 g

ffear; 03y, seed; WAL, soldering; 3%, crop; :3ueder, fondness; FpTorF,

Pronouns

infatuation; Rwes, saying, word; etc., etc. See § 242.

maseuling

Such nominal bases represent the true 29m=m=@I or P50 terms

GG.Q

)

v

o

134

or verbal nouns, signifying the abstract notion of a verb either as to

state or action.

Regarding bhavavatanas see § 243 and the paragraphs

Itis g

quoted there.

»

18 masey;

Other nominal bases are formed by adding e. g. & or » to the verbal

5 T

theme, as Qe¢ (from Jeys), mow (from zmoer), FHRG (from Fwes), %%

the noypg

(from %’—é}%) these and other formatives will be treated of in § 243.

3 (the

Several nominal bases have a form in the ancient dialect that differs from

B g

e

that which they have in the medizval and modern one, e.g. =, T*, R,

.

Vi

W), (see § 233).

their yopy

101

Kannada nominal bases derived from verbal themes by altering

“]at anima.

their radical vowel (cf. § 66 and sce § 242), are e.g. &x (from rg{d\)),

RRIERY

”ﬁt;

wedy (from w@v), e (from @), Fedo (from 2Ry), 2Ry (from

daiy (

84

53@@33&)&? .\

BRY), 39 (from Bozy), Fwedy (from Fordv).

Others alter that vowel and add a formative vowel to the final con-

od i,

The N

sonant, as

=20

T

3 (from &&9-¢ )

3es3 (from 89=), ‘S (from RoF), 33

iel'ned

0ng

Wl N

Y 3

(from De).

Bomb 1 5ol

3

1

102

(Theoretically) it may be said (the grammarian Késava teaches) that

Very

according to properties and qualities, there are eight genders (lingas) for the

| with

seven declinable bases (lingas, prakritis, §§ 67. 68. 90), and that there is also,

e ta

VT

as a ninth kind, a gender

of particles

(avyayalinga)

Compare § 116

(Remark that the term ¢linga’ thus has two distinet grammatical meanings.)

state

The nine genders are the following :—

fear

1,

The masculine gender (purn, pullinga, purusha)

It is seen in the names

tfing;

of men, male deities and demons, e. g. ¥, :cS;S , 38, ®OR, W, AT, ¥R, and in

ment

those of some animals, e, g. 0%, @Jaeﬁ‘a 650{1 5 B2, AVF, NOIB, FRF, F308),

Iness

S8, wAI.Y

E

2,

The feminine gender (stri, strilinga)

It appears in the names of the

female sex of the human race, of deities and of demons, e. g. $903°, ¥, O

\(rvdd

933, 2902, WeD, MR, INI, TF

frmt;

3,

The neuter gender (nappu, napumsaka, napumsakalinga)

To this

Ufm

belongs everything which is destitute of reason whether animate (¢étana) or

i

Wy

0 0uf

inanimate (a€étana), e. g. ®

01, 30807, P03, Nz (but see Nos. 1 and 5); NB

TR, FIR

A?Cg :9@(3 2)

11 ey

) 4006

JIWT

4,

The masculine-feminine, ¢.e. common or epicene gender (purnstrilinga)

This is seen in the plural of nouns and demonstrative (sece No.

)

remark

RF,

pronouns (¥T0, BFTo, ¥wFo) wherein the sume suffix €T° (4C°) is added to

masculines and feminines without regard to sex, e. g. 9<0° JHTINTT, QIT® A eodd

ferms

06

OJTE 1169 TF

T0F J3 O°

QUSTS L3830

VTTT L3e0INTE

Cr. §8 119. 132

134

s 10

oraphs

It is seen also in the singular, namely in that of 3£, which term by itself

is maseuline and feminine.

Cf. § 243, B, 7

»elbal

5,

The masculine-neuter gender (punnapurmsakalinga)

This is found in

b

the nouns 8 (or ARIF)

QW (or ¥

5), Joonew, WG, W BT 3, 3T,

3R, 0d®D

b7

§

%30 (the nine planets

navagraha),

@ (see § 120), WA, B3,

STOV03IJW:

3

%939 and ~09®, which are used either as masculines or neuters

Al

1§ from

2

1) The Kannada grammar called Nudigattu (p. 122) says that e. g. 3#e$&, S007i3) have

%5

J

their verb in the neuter, e. g. & ®RZ0ND Wy 3WPEFT0 B

FTOOMIRY B®DLY FTARBWI W, but

that animals, if they are introduced as speaking, have their verb in the masculine, as S92,

|terin

&0 288 &, or in the feminine, as WBYS 3, 5 .

9

2) With xeo*ard to masculine and feminine terms the Nudigattu (p. 122) saysthat in dis-

),

N TRAI?

dain (38%3,0) they may be used as neuters, e.g. ®3 72 NFO SPRZ W ?

(ﬁ ol

FoRBoNS

SRR

[TPIFT 0D w3 ?

WY JNPRY, O JITW

In a Bombay schoolbook we

find likewise

S BoAR IRV, BALRY TIHRI B!

The Nudigattu (p. 120) says that such is also done in ignorance (%2 &), ¢.e. if the con-

) col

cerned ones are ignorant

g BVITINTY BRI 53; BOBIN WS

BB [T B, BRI LT

g

BRS IO a0 30030, 300030

ANT [oJIOND wR

TOR0 @3, AT W TS e

In a

;8

Bombay schoolbook we find likewise

AT, WNRFRY &

D, BIBITICO 53 P

M

38

This

Aljout D

6,

The feminine-neuter gender (strinapumsa, strinapumsakalinga).

is used for the nouns 3%°, FF, 0, AR and ©e=3, which are treated either

CJ 80-(

as feminines or neuters.

wase from 1

7,

The masculine-feminine-neuter gender (trilinga).

This is employed e. g.

(masculine)

L)

for the words 0o, ¢, 390 (see No. 8, letter @, cf. § 256), and the nouns 33),

9

(),

DAY, oY, TR, AeY, IR, FI, VTR, 30039, which are either of the

hases, § 68

masculine or feminine or neuter gender.

0) so

8,

The adjective gender (va€yalinga) or the gender that depends on the

0, FaRe

word whieh is to be distinguished or defined (viséshyadhinalinga).

¢ ver

This gender comprises

(of 05,

@)

the words (ukti, sabda) ¥o (I90), dto, 330 (§ 90).

(of 3B, {

Remark,

S

remark 1;

Neither Késava nor Nagavarma (sttra 99) reckon ©o, dto, 830 amoug the

/) ba

pronouns (sarvanama), though Europeans would call the first two the personal

9, BAWY,

In

order to

pronouns, and the last one the reflexive (reciprocal) pronoun.

g)

distinguish them from the pronouns mentioned under letter & let us call the

hefore nouy

three words simply ‘pronouns’ here.

See § 278

viz. VR, BB, YT, VIR, VW,

b)

the pronouns (sarvanama, § 90) Y

9, Th

S8, Jem (neuter) ¥ ; HI° (masculine, feminine, neuter, see §§ 255. 262); 9Jo,

(avikara, ay

Q30, YVT0, IO (ma,scu]ine); TP, |IPC, VTP, DePs (feminine); ©$30, €30,

ning), ¥

¥Ww3o (masculine); ¥F, &F, ¥WF (feminine); cf. also &, T, ¥ in § 264.

adding ‘“&;

Remark.

and neutey

Both Késava and Nagavarma (sttras 42. 49. 66. 102) ecall these terms

TEpresents

sarvanama.

W@, AW, R, I8y, JOR), 2D, VIo, GJ0, T, Jwo, VIS,

(&vyaya, yi

Q5%%, UIYE, Jevs, ¥do, &30, YWIo, YT, &F, YWTF are what Buropeans call

demonstrative pronouns, and ¥IJIR, (930, B39, 0339330, 03IITNY, 03333%30), DT

§344) of i

are what they call interrogative pronouns.

To distinguish these pronouns from

ouly udey

those under letter @ we may term them adjectival pronouns’ in this place.

Neuter, gy

25

s

L

Vatanafriy

o In Samskrlta,‘-‘usj‘r‘aoﬁomeansougmally 73 class of words beginning with RIF (ISF

03

23, ¥uF, ete.)’ under which native grammarians have included also the real pronouns

(¥®o, I, 3,0, thou, X8, he, etc.).

$102 4

2) As seen in the Dictionary under @), the Basavapuréna and Jaiminibhdrata occasion-

ally use the pronoun ®z in combination with masculine terms (see §270). The Nudigattu

>

(p.- 122) says that in disdain (édn?%d) @Y, B0 and their plurals @8y, @) are used for

f@iﬂinine

males and females, e. g. @@ (for VFTY or VLIW) TSR, Wy (for ®TTL) 3R 3.

It (p. 162) further says that in order to express positiveness (3 o3uazr) w®l¢ and ¢

69

are combined with masculine terms and feminine terms, e. g. ¥®e TOIVH 655& eSS *%5@

femal (‘

0d

®ne BICO B I3

D €99,

&SJ

w@e BoriRy BIRETY,P; wWR T SN 0% 0 BRI es; WL

733

g

Qe S Y BRSRED; wBde W[ RS TLIWRY; nne AEde 87 RPodhD; WL AT

)

OFdS

W

54,:06 EJEKS%OGJ’, Brde BonA AR, FOOWHY; PWE VITO eg%do. (In such a case % and &

Vi

might be used instead; thus: e aomc‘%&eie SO ﬁ%&o; G HonAL &83 TR, DI

N

)\J

{

fo

an zz%‘;o:b 3e@I3 €3.)

9

T

P —

—

39

This

About possessive pronouns see § 272, and about indefinite ones § 290

either

%)

so-called Kannada adjectives (gunavaéana, § 90, clearly formed in this

ase from nouns by means of pronominal suffixes, see § 276), such as R¢9%0

ode.g

(masculine), $¢05%° (feminine), 3¢085 or 8¢08y (neuter); BRG30 (m.), ARBIFS (f.)

§ 99)

9@ (n.), and Samskrita adjectives (which partly are used also as nominal

f the

bases, § 68, 4, 8), e. g. TIBY, VF, T, TF), VPIPY, TR, YReA, D

d)

so-called adjective compounds (bahuvrihi, § 249), e. g. DFOIY, TRy

he

230, TRIRCR

€)

verbal bases (krit, krillinga), e. g. 830 (of &, masculine), DRTES

(of T[IBW femlnme), TIRTOTY (of TIRT, neuter), TIBID0 (of TIBYD m.), D[IBIS P

(of TIBOS f.), TIBOJHT (of

233, n.). See §§ 68, 1. 177. 180. 185. 198, 3.

femark 1; 253, 2, ¢c; 254

0 the

)

bases with certain suffixes (taddhita, taddhitalinga, § 68, 2),

g X o)

rsonal

Q, WRAWIY, INSIY, 90310 D, JLOTVY, SILNTOP (see § 243)

der

9

numerals (sankhyé, § 90

11 the

e. g. MONT (FAT, FT), because it is put

before nouuns in the plural whether these are masculines, feminines or neuters

See § 278, 1

ALY

9,

The gender of particles (avyayalinga), although they are unchangeable

20,

(avikara, avikrita)

A

It appears in words like T23,®0 (masculine), FRI%° (femi-

£90,

nine), ¥N35 (neuter), in which from the particle (avyaya) ¥3) (¢f. § 273), by

adding B+ @° + @o, 9+ T + ¥%° and 9+ 2 (see § 276), a masculine, feminine

and neuter term has been formed, so that one may say that ¥ in such a case

terms

represents three genders;—and then in the particles or adverbs themselves

ThLa

(avyaya, nipita, §§ 212. 281) used to modify the sense of a verb, e. g. %#¢0¥3

1§ Ca”

SA8E, TR, A0dyR, F3 3, which so to say are of the gender of the agent (kartri,

):O(V

§ 344) of the verb to which they belon

the agent (whether actually given or

only understood by the verbal termination) being either masculine, feminine or

g from

neuter, and being in any of the three grammatical numbers (vabanatraya,

vaéanatritaya, § 107).

;

7 (R

103. Although the nine genders (Késava continues) mentioned in

nOUDS

§ 102 are occasionally accepted and used (kvacitpraydga), practically

eanlﬂﬂ

there are only three genders (lingatraya) in Kannada, véz. the masculine

d]("Mm

feminine and

neuter

Words denoting males (purushavataka) are of

[ved of

355 O® 099,

T R;

words

denoting

the masculine gender, e. ¢.

PO,

Ehi)

~ O

TEL

females (strivitaka) are of the feminine gender, e. g. ma3F8, SEAT

5

4‘),

RS, 3w, SReded, T, P, TRued,

93

SVOI°:

and all other

-0

o ANV

words, whether Samskrita or Kannada, are of the neuter gender, e. g

83, BT A S

TOV

SpeT, [9T,

N

] ‘md

s

59)'0'

208 Tjess

RPTET

oo

@

B, 3,8, TR

'x@)@ F08 ﬁw 23&1

Cf. §§ 115. 116

e

——

40

The terr

Remark

following :-

If it happens to be necessary to distinguish the sex of any animal, (tree,

) inth

river, ete.), T2, male, and 8%°, (38) T®°, B)). female, are prefixed

}

, No

o8

104. As a special rule it is to be stated that the terms %3, SFI%T, and

(of

WY

),

W

S0¢¥ (in the sense of ‘man

‘men’) are neuter in Kannada, whereas the terms

The 0 0

BOBF

Az S, and ROV are masculine; but AR S, if it denotes a woman of

.U

good family (kulastri), is neuter

Likewise ¥v3,, wife, and ¥33,, child (whether

¥2

&w(o by

male or female) are of the neuter gender

(of w®

{)

In metaphorical diction (rtipaka) a substantive (viséshya) in the neuter may

[ willl

represent a feminine noun, as 39, the earth, may mean F0

the earth

or the

considered as a woman (§ 239); or an attribute (visésha), e. g. ®NZTFO, may

and termin;

be masculine, feminine or neuter according to the gender of the noun to which

In true

it refers (§ 239)

105

prakriti)

employed

For the seven (or eight! declinable bases (linga

(f”\)v) %

adduced above (§§68.90) there are seven (sapta) cases (vibhakti) and

case-terminations (vibhakti, ndmavibhakti, pratyaya)

3, In

106

The names of the seven cases are sy or the English nomina-

AR (

f-jVULJ

tive, @éeo&) or the E. accusative, :%éeoja or the E. instrumental, 233,

In thi

&F or the E. dative, Zowdo or the K. ablative, cm& or the E. genitive,

augment <

and 3

= O or the K. locative

(About the vocative see § 140.)

of @ Josiy

107. Kannada declinable bases have two numbers (vaCana), viz the

0213 s

JJOa

singular (ékavadana, ékaté, ¢katva, ¢kokti) and the plural (bahuvacana

(in the Jate

bahuté, bahutva)

euphoni g

A third number, the dual (dvitva, dviva¢ana), may be thought of with

The §

propriety (uéita, aucitya), that is when two persons forming a pair are

so introduced that the first one is without a case-termination and the

al 1at1\e ¢

T30

dq 1¢e9

second one has a termination of the plural, e.g

DOTITOWIF J0F

4D

©F ,000°, STVITBRESoS; or when objects are mentioned that exist as

or

%

J’i_ |

pairs in nature, e.g. Fro¢®, 3RBNY:, 30e% v° (see § 102, 9)

The (

108. The case-terminations are attached to the end of a declinable

With the

base, and therefore are suffixes.

at or gxe

109, The instances of the case-terminations (or their series, vibhaktimal@)

ictiongy.

are taken from writings of the three periods

if from inscriptions (sasanas),

they are marked by ‘in a sasana

The period of the written ancient dialeet

(of ) )

extends from about 600 to 1250 A. D

that of the mediseval dialect from about

The ¢

1250 to 1600 A. D., and that of the modern one from about 1600 A. D. to the

L

present time

Compa1 e

32 note.

fl

¥ Segp

—

41

———

The terminations for the singular of neuter bases ending in € are the

*(tree,

following : —

@) in the ancient dialect

L,

% and

Nominative o, e. g. 39T0 (of FT), Fvo (of DY), Fvo (of V), WO

(of W), aﬂégjo (of 88, Fowo (of Tov),

) ferms

nan of

The © or 23 when followed by a vowel, becomes °, 35, or 7° (see § 215, 9).

hether

2,

Accusative o, e. g. TCI0 (of FT), Yo (of Pv), JFo (of Jv),

WoFo (of W), or aﬂég;sao (of wé;d), T\'éﬁ_jmo (of ﬁ&i{), 33%:)500 (of ¢

e)),

@.@e{)mo

(of T2, w0 (of WY).

o Mmay

garth

It will be observed that in this kind of accusative either the augment (Agama)

3, Ay

®° or the augment ®° is, for the sake of euphony, inserted between the base

and termination.

which

In true Kannada words it is optional which of the two augments may be

employed; but in Samskrita words the 3% is always required, e. g. TIVT0O

kit

(of TV), B0 (of BY), VTSTI0 (of VIS,

l) and

3, Instrumental o, fa;go, 'a;g, 0, €.g. BOVRO (of FT), SRV (of BVF);

z,sosmx@ O (of 03), iojo@?a o (of ﬁéoso); ?;03363% (of 5039), oaﬁ@;{%b (of OT), mﬁzﬂds@m;

mind

(of mﬁédm)-’ 7,398 (of T,a0), 8038 (of 303, Po3® (of $30d)),

=4

E)

y &

In this case the terminations are annexed to the base by means of the

N1fIVE,

augment 3, that is the secondary termination of the genitive, ¢. v., the final ©

of @ losing its sound when it coalesces with the terminations or in sandhi

§ 218 seq.).

2, the

93 0 and 93 are forms of 9o lengthened by the addition of the suffixes @o

Léﬂ,ﬂa,

(in the later dialect ©) and ®, and stand for 980 and @3, the ©° being simply

euphonic or a help to enunciation.

yith

The first three terminations of the instrumental are often used also for the

r ate

ablative, e. g. 08 FQo, eug Inorio, Wy Vo, SeRLTAT 0, IRLFRR .

See § 352

q the

4 a,l1 seq.

g0

4, Dative T, %’;, e. g. $BT or 3BT, (of 39Y), JVF or IVF, (of JV), VT

st 48

or 5'\9539)5‘;; (of 6‘3}9&)), WITF or Z)Esﬁ;_ (of &)5), FIOT or @JO@_& (Of 63\)&)),

The doubling is optional (see § 371 regarding it).

s° (:TYG, § 117, a, 1)

with the vowel ® (or with the vowels ®©, %, &) conveys the meaning of pointing

nable

at or exciting attention to.

Cf. ©-F, 0.¥n, 8-8, B30, 9-Twe, B-TR¢ in the

Dictionary, and see also in § 265 the ¥ of ¥T, &%, «wd.

male)

5, Ablative 95::3;850, 25;;%_095(‘5@0, @32’35{‘3, e.g. STRZ 3o (of 393), SOI=3 edo

{tﬂﬁs)a

alect

(of 3R); BERZ I 0 (of BY); MW IZBF (of T8,

The suffixes ©3,80, ¥ 8330, WS B3 are the ablative of ¥, that side, mean-

ahout

ing ‘from that side’ (see § 123, a, 5).

They arc attached to the base that has

to the

the secondary @ of the genitive.

o

42

P

“from

In the dialect of the present time @R0033 or TR both meaning

Compa

the side’, are occasionally used to imitate the form of this so-called case

120, 121,

The terminations 9o, 4o, ’8@3 of the instrumental are, as has been stated

% Ac

under No. 3, often employed for the ablative.

¥

,3’%3

ll

S

6,

Genitive 3, ©9, e. g. VB (of J0T), WIB (of WI); ST (in a

\

]

U3,

sasana between 597-608 A. D.), IRFW9, BF®™ (in Shsana of 804 A. D.).

The e

The suffix @ is not the primitive termination of the genitive., It is composed

the termin

of @°, a letter of euphony facilitating pronunciation, and ¥, the real termination

has taken

of the sixth case (see § 120, q, 6).

W is @° 4, i.e. a long form of @.

Gf.

Concer

the lengthening of the genitive in §§ 117, «,6; 119, a, 6; 120, a, 6;

128, a;

on the ace

6; 130, a, 6; 131, a, 6; that of the accusative in 122, a, 2.

About the ®° see

3, In

also § 119, a, 1; and compare also the euphonic 933° in § 130, a, 6

Qfsgo; b

If ¢33’ of the word, in the éabdamanidarpana, page 53, is not a mistake

for ST, the existence of the termination & (. e. euphonic & + @, =3° 4+ €) of the

9 03

medieval and modern period is proved already for the ancient period; ¢/. the

In 'age

the euphoy

S in BROSY under the locative, and SVILER (FVF 4 2803 in § 243, B, 23,

Regarding the augments ° and & compare the angments ®®° and ¥&° in

form of th

§ 122, a, 6

Dictionary

7, Locative ougf) 209, W%, WHNR, VO, B, w9, B, e g. [ITHIDD

4, D

b]

W% (in a sisana of 689-696 A. D.), [PHFSRIRES, IVIJRIPE, MBRIP® (in a

Al

sasana of 707 A.D.); S0RR$S, ILRYE, FRIRAE ; IBBRP, PoIIBRYY (in a

the RM& I

sasana of 1084 A. D.), Be38s%), STo38R¥ (in a SAsana of 1123 A, D.); w3

b, @

BRER ; BFFROS (in a $4sana of 1181 A.D.); woﬁaémdw@o, :’)%Sm?,;antsm (in a

The 3

sisana of 1132 A.D.); 3:0m¥%w), YOOI, X YBW (in a Shsana of 1182

AD.); TR¥IY, WIRY; BLYSY (which form oceurs in a §isana of 1186 A. D.);

7) L(

To0 FeZ® (in a Shsana of 1187 A. D.).

ke

The suffixes V%, .95, %%, %%} mean ‘inside’, ¢ within’, and ®o°, @)

133 A1

(¢f. remark in § 188), ©9 mean ‘place’, ‘in a place’; ¥€ is composed of ¥&°

and the termination 4; the @V of 2% and ®©J is a help to enunciation or eupho-

Wi

nic (c¢f. 92. 96, remark).

The suffixes are added to the base by means of the

For ]

0 i

B (f.e. B+ 9) or B (1. e. 3%+ ) of the genitive.

b) in the medizval dialect

1)

I,

R0), ug

Nom. o, R0, 53, and (the nominal base itself without any termination,

W), (g

i. e.) the crude base, e. g. 3330 (of 337), Tw¥o (of TR¥), w0 (of 3e); JHTIV (of

2

;:(

Jet), SR (of 39), ILWIV (of Vwe), JITBR (of FT), BRI (of Bes), IR (of

300); TAI (of TR), 1MOJ (of noes), SR8 (of 383), VORIBI) (of VORIE), BN

9

U

@E

1D (of TR¥M); BIF, BRI, 708, F3, B, FRPID, (aa;)o)was.

In & and D the © or A28, has been changed into & and o, to which the

ua&)

WY

hw ms

euphoniec ¥V has been added (regarding which see e. g. the locative under letter

gsguosy L1 112,113, 119,121, 128.°1286).

dOub]Ed f

—

43

it

“from

Compare the erude base for the nominative in the ancient dialeet in §§ 110.

e 121,122, 123, 125, 126. 127, 128,

stated

2, Ace. @ 4Ry, ©, @;ag e. g. 30030, dwo; FRIZ0; WellTo, WeeaSo,

(in

TR0, PRSI0, BonFo, PIT0; WPRBITRY, BRIITI; FREI, YFWI; AT, Bet

83, FouI, BRI, R ¢®T; T $IF,.

The euphonic augments 3° =9° and %° are inserted between the base and

nposed

the terminations. ©%0 is ©®o with the euphonic #V; in ¥, the termination STA

nation

/Cj

has taken the form of ®%, and its final has been doubled on account of euphony.

Concerning © compare the @ of the genitive (§ 120, a, 6), and see the remark

28, 4,

on the accusative in the ancient dialect in§ 117, 9,2

o see

3, Instr. 3o, a%o, ra%, "a;g@, fa;g, @, ¢ g. dBBR0; W DI o, FOII

nistake

@%o; éoem@i; aioﬁo@ﬁ@s@, :s#eiaﬁaz{»; @é@@%, ﬁ%oﬁo@%; e:oajaéb, g%adzb, P RITY,

¥ BE,090.

of the

f, the

In 989 (i. e. B0+ & + ©F) the ¥o has been changed into ©=° to which

The 9 is another

B?

the euphonic @ has been added; A% has dropped the 327,

form of the ancient © of the instrumental.

Cf. the note under @ 2 in the

9 1n

Dictionary and see also § 151, &, 2, and the close of § 282.

D))

4. Dat. B, é_&, e. g. ITF, ;:mz?od@; SI0T,, VT .

-y

m a

5, Abl. w3 o, 93 BF0, w8 3

@

Qﬁ:i:’ga;, e.g. BYTZIT, in which

) (ina

the 323, has been dropped.

)?)3

6, Gen. 3, B, e. g JI0R; FRERT, BOTRERT, INGT.

) (in 4

The augment &° like @°, is euphonie.

Compare the & of the genitive in

1182

§§ 109, a; 117, a, b, c.

. D);

T Loe. vt %9, w;ﬁ, B, 89, &9, B, e g. FUTRR P, AT03BRPY;

NRCREPR; ToURLO (in a Shsana of 1509 A.D.), ™OBOTVRY (in a sasana of

i Y)

1533 A. D.); B3RO, Pandd, 33 39; JHTR.

f 97

©¥9 is a curtailed form of ©9.

euphO'

For the augment &° occasionally 3° is used, as in S00S¢.

of the

‘)

in the (later and) modern dialeect

1

Nom. mu, 53), and (most frequently) the crude hase, e. g. SRV (of

= =

S0), WHID (of W), J9TI (of J9T), AR (of NBE);

AT

D (of BRTF), AIIY (of

148

01y

VR), NBI (of N&), JBI) (of 397), aaéod@ (of ﬁsgad), PRI (of TYM); NE, =C.

2,

v

O

and (most frequently) the crude bases, e.g.

i) (of

Ace. 989, ¥R, ¥

b

b

|

Ron=II, BRSI), BRI, BY I0; TINBIIY, m&ssmd, TINTIRY, NBTRY, SOOI

¢

7

303, BHS, JUS; IR, FUIAS, NBEI, JTT, IFI, 3IT; YT, (of YY), TW (of

Tobd), TT (of TB), Pewd (of PW), SLe™ (of Jwe), TWd (of M), B9 (of BY);

AR, &390,

oh the

Jofter

The euphonic augments are ¥° and °; in ©3) the final of ©3 has been

doubled for the sake of euphony; the & is attached to the crude base.

b’i’

44

ad ¥, tf

3,

Tosic. o8, 2. 6. g FORI0T, T3 DoR; W30, T3V, FHWIID, T\ 3.&

0, f’\m

OP.n0), DASH

-MJ‘)\}

4,

Dat. F. 2

e.q Foo

¥ 0%, W8 0F; ;Sodﬁ o@@, TR,

3"

5,

Abl

AR

S0

£@a§

\\

&8

128

S

The augment & is the same as ©°

14

6,

Gen., &, 9, &, ¢ g. S0R; TITI0IWD, FFIF W, FTSF0; FREI, IV

fIve Case-S|

The lengtheuned @ appears frequently in poetr

neater and

DIORO ; WOURY, JRRRRD

7,

Loc. w%n

1)

LI e

g N, 0w ¥N

10“, lett

)

(658

50, #

PR

e

WRD: DIS®

FINo, A YR, I3, S0

mascuhne g

110

In ancient Kannada

no nominal bases receive the

(o) ()i

SN

l

¢ and

terminatior

in. the nominative singular, except masculine, a few feminine (sce § 102, 2)

and neuter bases with final es,

nnes (3 11

originally

Words of which the crude base forms the nominative singular, are e.g

o

A

s

of euphony

¥

i

IR

T

TS

PO

WAY

cSClalovy

~NEevd

%

O

9

f(]r V\)\J q\

Seri=l

o]

RN %76

S)0) 'cro Qe

-('55 0356

DOTE, ARSS, nRTS, Jeos, WeTs

formation ¢

-Jp_c)

(A %6

NBY, TE,

S0C2°,

WE

390, TOB, 88, ¥, 33,

LTI

el

9y

also therenr

o

, B0, $30; 3@, NPL.

Um+aa |

FRS, CB; T, TS, zso@ BeR, Be33, 7 3,

=

D6Yer uges

See some exceptions in § I1and & 109 under b 1.

15 1

111

In the mediseval dialect, as has been stated in §§ 9

and 94

‘le.asx

nominal bases ending in a consonant may receive a final euphounic e,

formed,

in which case their nominative singular shows such an ev, e.g. T,

Which th

F 3]

F00, T, WRY, PYVI, YD, DB, SN

e two |g

VAN

& ¢

Exceptionally this is the case in the ancient dialect too, as we find

in a Sasana of about 778 A. D. also Sorish (for =on$), in one of 1048

¥ 00 Joing

A.D. Sen (for o), in one of 1084 A. D. ernno (for PWTF)

n

one of

lalive gaq

and

el

1123 A. D. Zs@dy (for RedTe), in one of 1182 A. D. Fpews, ABDY

0 P36

tombingg

(fm 3P

Qe

A&ef), and in one of 1187 A. D. 353,8y (for 508 o)

man:—s

112

In modern Kannada, as will be seen from the same paragraphs

Oined g

nominal bases with a final consonant generally receive the euphonic e,

Cagg Slo

often ends in such an epn

and their nominative singular, therefore ver

%I‘ﬂ (

May

113.

A strange peculiarity of modern Kannada writings, especially

W

of school-books, which begins to appear already in medieval works

that also to nominal bases with the final vowels . . =

oS0 S

or g

&0

AR

%

e

T Oj‘ o

3

the pominative singular of which in the ancient dialect has

»J)+:-\‘ 0

no termination at all (see § 110), an en is annexed, at option, as the

(ran

s

termination of the nominative singular

by means of the letters ox¢

(i

\m,

45

—

) 7,30

D)

and ¢, these ¢3¢ and ¢ being merely a help to enunciation, e. g. 3

0390

)

AP0, 3900030, SR, BB, u%oﬁoo, @9@0330, @%oﬁ&&,

o3

QJ

FENFY, NEO), o), TP, FD), BRJ, R, I See

‘

2

£

;

Y

8. 129. 130, and compare letters b and ¢ in § 109.

114. As very many ancient true Kannada pominal bases have no nomina-

, 303,

tive case-sign in the singular (see § 110), as already in the medieval dialect

neuter and masculine bases with final & too occasionally appear without it (see

0

i

W i)

§ 109, letter b and § 117, letter ), and as in later Kannada such neuter,

masculine and feminine bases are most frequently used without it (see § 109,

S

letter ¢ and § 117, letter ¢), the thought arises that the ancient © (sonné), the

termination of the nominative singular of neuters (§ 109), masculines and femi-

102,2)

nines (§ 117) ending in e, of which &, 3%, =¢, & and ® are but other forms,

originally may have been a sign introduced by grammarians, partly for the sake

1€ 6.,

of euphony in sandhi (§ 215, 8) in order to avoid an hiatus (e. g. =98° YRIF

EV{08

for 08 BRIFR, @OAF® o for WOR A Bo) and partly as a help to the

-

0;“!

formation of the oblique cases, especially the accusative and genitive, it forming

2pe3

Wiy

also therein the euphonic letter (e. g. =0+ ° 4 ¥o, [0 1. Q€ - ©; T 4 T° + VO,

0% + &° + ). Let it be added that Tulu, one of the sister-languages of Kannada,

never uses a nominative case-sign for neuter bases ending in ©.

115. Kannada grammarians teach that by the suffix @ (which means

ﬂ]d giﬁ

‘he’, as we learn from § 193) true Kannada masculine nominial bases are

ic oY,

formed. The application of this rule appears e. g. in the following instances, in

700y

which the formative © is annexed to the ¥ of the genitive (§ 109, letter a, 6),

the two letters % being euphonically joined (§ 214, seq.):—

ve ﬁlid

$eA®, a reddish foot, Gen. FeR® (§ 130); TeRR03 + the formative suffix

TN

=2 0=

[ 1048

©, or joined and forming the crude base

€03y, and combined with the nomi-

native case-sign 0 Tt&AR030, a man of or with reddish feet;— @&, charm, Gen.

one 0

9R03 (§ 130); B+, or joined and forming the crude base «aR03Y, and

9, 8

A

)]

combined with the nominative case-sign © @030, a man of charm, a charming

man ;—QORFRS, a flower-like eye, Gen. ®VRFH (§ 120); YONFY +9, or

uaphq,

joined and forming the crude base «@oriF®’, and combined with the nominative

nic

case-sign © YUNFHO, a man of or with flower-like eyes ;—303%, gold, Gen.

TR, (§ 120); BT, +, or BRF, or TRJ0, a man of gold, a very precious

an

man;— 0%, a bow, Gen. VY (§ 120); WY +©, or VY, or VLo, a man of the

»eCIﬂH)

bow, an archer ;—=%3, the east, Gen. =083 (§ 123) ; SRTH + ¥, or IINTEX,

ks, 18

or $8HE0, a man of the east;— F9, the side, Gen. FOX (§ 109); FOT+ ¥, or

A 3$%

F03, or FVT0, a man of or on the side;—=%, youth, Gen. 0¥ (§ 130); ¥

'y

b has

03+ @, or %0, or ¥¥0, a man of youth, a youthful man;—w®, vainness,

gs

16

Gen. WD (§ 128); WD - ¥, or WD, or 2.)63)530, a vain ma,n;—-ﬁgef)o&)), envy,

15 W

Gen. Fe0w (§ 122); TeW+©, or Feow, or I®IWO, a man of envy, an envious

e

—

46

man ;—7&%°, theft, Gen. F% (§ 120); #%Mﬁ, or %, or F‘%j)o, a man of theft,

proftgate,

a thief;—ne) strength, Gen. 7 (§ 122); ©® +©, or ©®, or RO, a man of

pasous, 3

a male pers

strength, a powerful man.

Cf. §§ 224 ; 248, B, remark; 249

Analogously the formation of the true Kannada masculine nominal bases

28, 4 cow

©r, 33, TR, Pew, PIAFY, BOW, ete. may have taken place, although the

¥, who? 1

themes to the genitive of which the formative was attached, are nowadays

4 whore, ¥

out of use.

final conson

116. But the form of true Kannada crude bases with final @, used in books

3%, o fon

and the language of ordinary conversation for the nominative singular, e. g.

(), life,

=08, Po, Jv, vorire, ©e, BAT, does not by itself indicate the gender of them

Lot it

(see also § 102).

Likewise © (the sdnné), the grammatical sign of the nomi-

the gender

native singular of bases ending in ® (§ 114), does not express distinction of

(\ 136),

gender ; thus, for instance, the neuters 080, Zpwo, Jwo, @

&0

&)

t

cannot, by their

listinguish

sonné, be distinguished as to gender from the masculines ®®o0o, 8330, T30,

fac)

0

®#3,0, or from the feminine tadbhavas ©T,0, ¥ 0 (§ 117).

with final

This impossibility of discerning the gender by the sonné appears also in the

three per

oblique cases of neuter bases ending in ®, because they show, with regard to

singular of

their final o or sdnné, frequently the same forms as sueh masculine bases do

)

(see §§ 109. 117), e. g. Nom, 3083° (7. e. 3380 before a following vowel; cf. its

vocative 3308¢ and the vocative TRH¥I in § 140), ¥V (i. e. VB0 before a

N

10

&R0,

) B

following vowel) or also 3883, ©88d; Ace. 39830, ¥ Jo; Fwo, ¥ J0; TRYS,

E AT

®

B

Ve ; Gen, TRER, B F; Abl, F98aF, ©0 a7 ; Loe. FBIY, ¥ 39,

o‘;m

"

Hence it is to be stated as a general rule that all Kannada nominal bases

with final ey are, in the singular, destitute of a particular sign to express

3193, 1

an

9

their gender, except in the nominative when it has the euphonic ¥, in the

‘\Cv

genitive when it is formed by means of the euphonic @° (§ 109), and in the

Ao, &

of 1189 A

dative ending in ¥ or T, (§ 109).

When the grammarian Késava says that there are eight or nine genders

¥330

in the Kannada language (§ 102), he does not found their difference on outward

The au|

signs in the nominal bases, but on their distinguishing properties and qualities,

leltel‘s 0y

It is a fact that in Kannada no nominal crude base in the singular, whether

n 83,

ending in es, 3, & and o, or in a consonant, shows a difference of termination

The oy

expressive of the distinction of male, female and neuter, except in the feminine

pronominal suffixes ©9¢, ©% (§§ 120. 121), in the neuter pronominal suffixes

Whih

y 4§

3, 8 and ® (§§ 122. 169), in the neuter pronouns ¥m), BR, N (§ 122);

Msteaq of

and in the feminine suffixes 8%, 98 and 3 (c. g. FTZRNS, VT FOY, NG, I 3),

ghat m thls

although also these suffixes and words do not bear such terminations as specify

the Teutey

absolutely their gender by themselves.

di&leets ( of

The termination & has above been treated of as to the impossibility of its

expressing by itself a distinetion of gender.

The same absenee of an outward

L'lkewis

n Q&i e

sign of gender is seen in the final vowels 9, ¥V and =, as there are ¢. g. 393, a

that 3, b

P

417

f theft,

profligate, 30N, a younger sister, ¥¥8, a female friend, 338, male or female

man of

persons, 33, a hog, T°, a sheep, Ne?, a feather; TR, a male person, nesy

a male person, Bon&, a female, F0) (B, a female, FLRY, a child, 932, an ox,

| hases

208, a cow, ¥3), the neck; &% a master, 83, a father, ¥, a dumb man,

igh the

¥, who? which ? w&, such a woman as, ¥, that woman, ¢ a damse], 8,

wadays

a whore, ¥%, an elephant, T¢% a tank, 33, a wave, 3¢, the crescent ;—and in

final consonants, as there are e. g. ¥9° (¥%), a person (mase., fem. and neuter),

1 books

o%°, a female, T°, a stone, 3¢0%, a chariot, 3¢, (Bew), a scorpion, oS

(A

(W30)), life.

of them

Let it be added that also in the plural no terminations exist by which

) 10Mi-

the gender is fixed (see §§ 118. 119. 131, 132. 134. 185); also ¥, B, v

tion of

(3 136), the plarals of ©%, ¥, @I, do not show such forms as at once

y their

distinguish them from the singular of the neaters F¥, w9, W), ete.

317,

] ﬁf’%o,

In § 109 the case-terminations for the singular of neuter bases

with final ¢ have been given according to the forms they have in the

) in the

three periods of the language; here follow the case-terminations’ for the

»ga.rd f0

singular of masculine and feminine bases with final es, viz.

ases 0o

a)

in the ancient dialect

', Cf. its

1,

efore @

Nom. o, e. g. T80 (of B28), FAZ0 (of ?:-”:S;S), DE00, SeWIWo, WeTo, =Iw

; #097,

&Bo, e@BoTo, @e)ﬁs‘a‘%o, TeRARO0, BBIIYo, @To, ¥Jo, w?q)rﬁo, é’%do, 399 o,

B30, 30 edH0, WY Bo, BAWIO; @8:;0, iﬁ::‘ogo, w0

@To appears also as U0 (¢f. §§ 119 and 120, letters a; 122, letter a;

1 hases

§ 193, 1 and remarks).

pEpIESS

2,

in the

Ace. ©o, ©R), (39), e. g. ¥VAZ0 (of WTA), IPHIFIo (of BR=F),

in the

SNPRAT0, VRITYT0, VIT0, WIN0; eﬁf%ﬁo, v o, WI0;

BeIII0 (in a Shsana

of 1182 A. D.).

@xT0 appears also as ¥PIo (Sabdanusisana sttra 175).

genders

The augment &° is euphonic like that of neuter bases in the accusative § 109,

utward

letters @ and b).

alities:

ghether

In © the euphonic & has been added to the sonné of o.

ination

The termination © in the parenthesis refers to a quotation in the Sabdamani-

ominine

darpana (page 164), viz. ~VIPe, T° 3, @h@gme (oh, thou killedst me), in

which, as Késava supposes, the =3 (of ®o, I, §187) is the genitive used

sufiixes

§ 122)

instead of the accusative D0,

Késava appears to be wrong; our opinion is

J

)

)

that in this case 2% is the accusative with final © that so frequently occurs in

Sp(—,‘@lf

the neuter, masculine and feminine singular of the medizval and modern

dialects (¢, ™ and 3o@33) in § 122, a, 2; § 352, 1, ).

Likewise when Bhattikalanka in his grammar under stitra 231 thinks that

¥ 0

f it

in o8, Se*Fo (he forgot me) the genitive is used for the accusative, we believe

)utwﬂrd

)

that in this case too =8, is the accusative with final ©.

G

48

3, Inst

Another similar instance of KéSava that belongs to a neuter noun with final

©, is QuI (of S} in the obscene sentence oI Tt (Sabdamanidarpana page

4, Dat

Yourer, &3

75; see § 215, 6, remark 8); it too is the accusative of the mediseval and

modern dialects.

5, Ab

It is reasonable to think that the accusative ending in & existed already in

mental,

tho colloquial dialect of the ancient period, but had not been generally accepted

6, Ger

by classical writers.

T, Lo

FORDY;

3, Instr. Bo, “&%o, "5‘%’ e. g. TISFTRO (of WTF), VIR0 (of 233), SPRERO,

BT, R0, VI

RIRT0; VI, Rees9s .

() it

1, No

The terminations are attached to the genitive, the final © of which disap-

M, o

pears in sandhi (§ 213 seq.).

2, Au

4, Dat. (R), oRt, €. g. (SBR, in a Shsana of 1123 A. D., if the reading be

PR

el

right; ®DOWFSR in the stanza under rtpaka in § 239); ¥YRoR, Fadoon, 29,3,

e

W, 7.1

;‘;

00R, SNAROR, YWEIIFoR, WIOR; @Bf}roﬁ, w%oﬁ.

3, Ins

R is the true termination; the sonné before it is merely euphonic (¢f. § 137,

4', Dal

a,4). T+ has the same meaning as ¥° +« (see § 109); ¢f. e. g. ©-118, 2R

i, Bk

in the Dictionary.

L)

The alg

5, Abl. ©3cdo, w3 dgo, ©Ie3Y, ¢ g IOIFIIdo, VAIIVIIo,

Towels & g

IRAVTS o, 8%5?_53950, IS 830; 6:9#@,_?5%950, @33,38 d0; @%S%S’é’é@o; v%ﬁ%z‘ééﬁ.

for o,

The terminations are added to the genitive the final © of which disappears

9 A

in sandhi (§ 213 seq.); those of the instrumental are optionally used for the

G» Ge

ablative.

See § 352, 4 a, 1 seq.

55\-@50:'53, 3

6, Gen. 5, ¢, e. g. FOFS (of TooF), JTI, INGTT, VBIIIR, VIT; SEAA

Ya LO(

SBRS ;5%):55\, DI, FHVBT?, QY BT, VIT0.

8 1

The augment &° is a letter of euphony facilitating pronunciatibon; cf. the @°

About the lengthening of

and &° of the genitive in § 109, letters a, b and-c.

foal o5, (C

0 1

S see § 109, @, 6

7 e, v (O], ©9, e g PORIRLYE, TRRATINGS, VBVIPING®, VI

1: NO

Bt 3

)

SR ¢f; VT IR, ChRMLA (23RIRERN); BORID dc*s;&)e;

The terminations are added to the genitive according to the rule of sandhi.

NSNS

in the medizeval dialect

% 4

b

n oy,

1

Nom. o, &, and (the nominal base itself without any termination, z. e.)

o the Pluy

the crude base, e. g. ©0R0, WI0, ¥J0; @3':3-0; 2QBRY, BOTIRY, @osbﬁe‘oo, WwBARY,

0 md

T 9,030, CANGRSIAR

50, o, caﬁooﬁgs, [PRTTR, D

~ ,\\\IJ o)

3, SRS, T, U3

E[ther

In =0 the sonné has been changed into & before the euphonic vowel ¥v.

ac%l‘ding

2, Aecc. o, 9RY, G, B, eg. gawso (of FaT); 9T, Fo; VPAT I

é*asana of 1

\

30D, saosoés‘ﬁao, BROPFITY; JoNEIIY; &E IS

U Thg

Casey

In ®39, the & has been euphonically doubled.

) \)n]y [

“hh(‘llgh i

:

.

49

ith final

3, Inmstr. @0, aRo, vy, (88T, BY)", €. g. T 00; BRyRF 0; FoFIRY

A page

4,

val and

Dat. R, on, e.g. Sﬁojbéﬁ, 3R, @R, &3R; zewon, TITFonR, WASOR,

doHren, kon.

)

ready in

5, Abl. (23,280, v33o0

&9_3_39552 ), the terminations of the instru-

mental.

ceepted

6

7

Gen. 9 e.g. TIXT; BN

7, Loc. %%, 29, (w¥R), W9, (9, see § 109, letter ), e. g. ©9RRR ¥,

TR0,

B0TFCINRP; eﬁegaég; @"ﬁéé%.

¢)

in the (later and) modern dialect

h disap-

1,

Nom. v, frequently the crude base, . g. BOBIRTY, BRIII, VI, B

29, 03325330; wﬁm, VFE; VT, 3T, IR F, INSIT, VHRITS, BRI, WS, AT; S

2,

ding be

Ace. ¥R, ¥8Y, B, ¥y, €. g. VBIT, EJT I, BHIIF; BRIAITY,

1, ulbﬂ

YZIRY, YIIZY; WORR, FRAFI, BIDTT, BIEINI, VIT; SN, WINTY,, WT/OIT

ﬁﬁq, z*r;)m S DBOT ; @Biéd.

©

)

o3

o3

§1

31,

8, Instr, "a%, e. g. BBINRT, VI, *ve'éz’é'og, Gﬂ%i(og, e

o, 58

b Dat. A N, N, €. g. HITR, PER, 3FH, Qﬁf‘g)@ﬁ, ¥R; VTR; T

R, o%aai;dﬁ; @3RN, w-z?ojmﬁ,(ad)cs’maﬁ, Sonan, ¥S8R; @;gszoﬁ.

The augments 8 and ? and other forms of the euphonic sonné, to which the

938 %

el

i3

vowels © and B are joined for the sake of euphony, so that 33 and &% stand

9w

A= @

for on.

appears

J

9, Abl. fa;da, e. g. @dﬁdag, @aa;cio;

CL

°

mja.

for the

6,

Gen. ©, & (especially in poetry), e.g. TR, VII; ©T,8; 7w :,

BIBDFIIY, FREIZTII2.

5

?

(2

o/

@, Lioc. w9n, @@m, 99, e. g. YORIRIR; BIRINID,

339 ; ©IVY; VT IO

118. The case-terminations for the plural of neuter nominal bases with

the @

final e. (Cf. §§ 131. 132))

oning of

@)

in the ancient dialect

92

1,

Nom. R%f, oi%s, on®, onPos, e. g. JVAY®, JPpuRe®, TORYS; Jogones,

RPVORYS, FLones; noone®, JoRBonNes, WeJo

nee ﬁﬁdOﬁ% (in a sAsana of 1123 A.

D.); 808F>0030n9TT, m’odédodgéoﬁ%ﬁ.

andbi

n%° is the true termination; in oR%® the sonné is euphonic, likewise the @V

in on%o.

The oneT® ig composed of oni®® and "90° which is another termination

of the plural (see § 119).

b;‘;gﬂ);%

Either 1%° or on%® are added to true Kannada bases.

Samskrita bases

A

N

according to grammar always use to receive OT¥® or onwd® (¢f. 109, a, 2); in a

sasana of 1076 A. D., however, we find 2¢37 38290 and FSoF 394,

U)

REY

93

1) The absence of instances for certain terminations in parenthesis in this and other

cases, only means to say that instances with them have not been met with by the author,

although they do exist; see e. g. '9%353 in § 119, b; ”9% in § 120, b.

7

E

o,

et

50

-y

Ace. es0,¢e. g S8R0, FoBonPo; SWIonwo

B, |

A final 2V, as

The terminations are attached to those of the nominative

6,

in on®y, disappears then in sandhi (§ 213 seq.).

3,

Instr. Qo, '8«(-50 Qgﬁ e. g. SN0, FOONYo; NotonYo.

1

The terminations are added to the genitive, the ® of which disappears in

eplotle |

sandhi (§ 213 seq.)

oceuy 00

4, Dat R, BR, e g. 300 3080ne : BeJonY; FIFneR (in Sasana of

) 1

1076 A. D.)

i

The @ in @R is euphonic

5, Abl. ©3. 030, ©3 0930, 9338, e. g 300198 8o, SoBonw3 do; WeBo

3, 40

e, ¢

30

13 %o

(of T);

AN

The terminations are attached to the genitive

om=

U 1)

6,

Gen. ©, e. ¢ SOONY. =ConY; Redone

Y

0

o

7, Loc. %%, %% (aog;*ﬁ) w58, e. g 38R BH 6. FBonRBHRTS; WeBonLR $°

By, 7

.‘\

AOFORE

WRIONSRTE; AFFNSRP (in a Sasanaof 1076 A D.) 308N, $CoNFY ; weSonyd

The terminations are added to the genitive

680 and

b)

in the mediseval dialect

§a8an4 (

1, Nom. Rg*, 1%, oftss, onid, NLTF, (oRLTF), e. g. SVAS; Fdonv?

O

Fres

FoFNPY, BeIVONNRYY; SIToNPY, YVBTIHONRPY; SIVNYTS

neess 3

92, Acc. 90, 90, 9, e. g. $VONYFo, JOWOWR0ONFo SOORBRY, TIBRTBONE I

BRICNINTRY; SEIBF Y, SAIIoNE

BADe

00t 3

$nRo; TN

3, Tnstr. B0, ’850 &N, =¥ ('3\(-5@) e. g es&on®o,

8,

v

0

nes o; VT Sonds ; m,ﬂ;joﬁ@é

(e §1

4, Dat. R, @R, e g. S00Y, Idonte, Iy ond; MZIFBoNIR, FORONLN,

euphon

R.BoneR, FIFonenR, SZ,0neN wdeaoﬂe?ﬁ #omoﬁ@d

1§ 00111[

5, Abl. ©3 cdo, 93 330, 93 I EE 2'35) the terminations of the

Sonng

instrumental

R

6,

Gen. 93, e.g. IVNY, [yBon¥ JRONY

genitiy

Loc. 2%5, 2%, 29N, eﬂ@ I8

ﬁ BoNSH YL ;

BIONBRYY; ?,3\.43 on

1§ 24

70

SR30, ;Séaan)oﬁ&?fa%?ﬁ 0320noneY, ;S#omf& eﬁ’@oﬁéﬁ%ﬁ@ w@a’oioo"{\ﬁ@ wﬁf i‘aoﬁ

2

!

o1

(nag

c)

in the modern dialect

1, Nom. R%y, e.g. NERS, JVRT FIFNRPY, BREINRYY

Ace

L)

FTONS 0

IRINESRd

ABNRY I

2,

SSISN)

(SAN)

e.g. 3BrEanivo

i

BONFNF R0

JONY, ABNRY, YWIFTIVNY

(§21

3,

Instr

e

¢.q. NBRYR, Frnos

4,

Dat. a3, e.g. NANYR, FIFNon

B

g

o

ABL. @, e.g. AGTIOY, Forney.

W, as

Gen. &, e.yg. ABNRY, TIFNY, dd@ 1.

Z';E

Loc. w¥R, 99, 89, . g. NENLIR; ABNGY, FIONYY; ©IINTO.

119

ars in

The case-terminations for the plural of masculine, feminine and

epicene (§ 102, 4) bases with final ¢, including also some bases that

occur only in the plural.

(Cf. §§ 131. 132. 134. 135. 137.)

04 of

@)

in the ancient dialect

1

Nom. onlg®, B¢, ©0f, 890y, w0°, WO, oWTF, S0, WTFES, VNFES,

%0

Bof, WOTE, NPT, VIFYT’, oDTF, 0DVTF, oDNFYS, e. g. VO, Waxo

nes, &3ories, &Ionee, NRIoNY?, FPFoTNS, INToTNYE; VT oNYe, VIoNee; T, 9°,

(of SoM); @WORTE, FITT T, JITFO®, INRRO®, VI, FIERTOF, Jewos, WITF, JIT?,

QURTT, w? BT, DoYR0T, 0T, QICITE, HOITT, [oe3MPEITe, QWFTE, TTS,

FOTS, DV TF, RWOT; VIR, SO TAY (both in a Shsana of 1123 A. D.), 3Ny,

ig%f,

ReTBY, RBPROFB), IdJRTY (the four terms in a Sasana of 1182 A, D.), SORNTI,

169

RRoFSRTY (both in a Shsana of 1187 A.D.); 93 WwFT° (in a Shsana between

680 and 696 A.D.), BRRFPFT® (in a Shsana of 866 A.D.), SATIFAOINT® (in a

Sasana of 916 A. D.); QWFTS, ©AW05, QIWTE, HAWTF, FOWTF, FLWT'; JUI) TS,

\ﬁ%";;

.

%v;ﬁgécs

)

DO [0S, |IFOS, TOATTE, IRIFTS, TATFTL, JUTTE; WRTFFS, BB

FEYS,

YOIRTF 9,

3T $F,

TR ITF 9T,

TIBONRF C,

VINE P, JINF PC,

eI

z

nEes; wsgcs; 369,00°, 89 00, YGeROTS, ng:«;acf, 3¢070TE; @ioﬁe{?cﬁ; WPTFYTE

eﬁsgagcs, wa:j%oﬂ ma;ﬁggac*?, @oﬁoﬁ@ace, 'aas’egacé', VIR, TE, em;ﬁ:g)c*f; e:a#%g%cf; ;Somae%

Wb}

oT?; fa;jgcxbﬂr%ﬁ.

@3 is ©T° and a euphonic ¥V (¢f. § 96 remark); %0° is another form of ©T°

{ef. 5117, letier a).

Tu 20°, oWT® gnd =0° the letters ¢, 0W° and J° are

{9R,

euphonic augments; ©TF 9, ORF° are composed of ¥O° and F¥° and T¥°; ©OT°

is composed of ©° and 0%, and WTFYO® of VT, T¥ and BO°; in 0BT the

the

sonné is euphonic; o80T® is olT® and Q0°; OR&)T“F%’G is composed of o®T® and

ne°; Q0° is composed of a euphonic ©° and B0° (cf. the euphonic & of the

genitive in § 109, q, 6; that of &9° in §§ 132, a. 134, a; that of ¥9 o, ete.

jort

in § 243, B, remark; that of 9,30 in § 276).

2,

jof

Ace. &0, R, e.g. e:)a‘ga@oﬁ%*o; 30%;%30; @ioﬂ%ﬁo, ©8RT0, ete.; SJPUTRY

(in a sasana of 1182 A. D.).

©3 is 0 (3°) and a euphonic V.

3, Imstr."50, 'aggo, "3\;2, é.g. @Pg’eoﬁ@o; ﬁoi@o; @%o?’\@o; DeBd0; PETTFL0; ote.

3

The terminations are added to the genitive according to the rule of sandhi

!

(§ 213 seq.).

5 Dat: 3, 7{?\, aB, B, e g. ©RoNY; DEY; vFond; ISR or BeIRF,

WIRRF or uozﬁrj‘r, wa%sﬁs or waajpmir, QBIRF or 03831'3\?, ete.; B¢30R (in a

7(

.'l

52

Anoth

sasana of 1123 A. D.), Y308, 133, 208 (both in a sasana of 1181 A. D.); BeFF

p]‘OHOUUS

(in a sasana between 597 and 608 A. D.).

1} oceurs optionally after the répha; such a doubling of a consonant after it

#4030

is very frequent.

Cf. 88§ 132, a; 155; 240, under 5; 248, under a; § 871, 1,

gl

0o

The 2 before 1 is a euphonic prefix.

\

(§13)

5, Abl. »3,edo, ©3 330, ©3,e33; the terminations of the instrumental,

3, I

e. g. ¥ on¥3 8o, ete.

6,

Gen. e,

09

-/ 3

LD

e. g. a—asg@omf; ;Sob’-%%f; @%;oﬁ%*; a?&c%od; ete.; 3633%0506@ (in

a Sasana between 680 and 696 A. D.), %3305 (in a Shsana of 804 A. D.).

The €

¥ is simply a euphonically lengthened ©.

See § 109, a, 6

5 A

1, Loc goes, (agsiﬁ), @%, e. g. @gg@om?fwﬁ; aa#*om?wﬁ; ®eSVRYE, TATF

6, G

BH P, TIRIVRYS; ete.

A ———

he'h

b)

in the mediseval dialect

é

10,

L

Nom. the same case-terminations as in the ancient dialect; further

nes, &L, ondy, TP, THRYE, WDy, oWTY, VIINY®, VIING, BINRST,

(HInd of

0

oy

il

BT, DT, 0BTy, e.g. HBNT; BeINSy; BowIonwy; wﬁor’\@cs; s.)a;%; swﬁeﬁoﬁvﬁ;

0

WI0; BeTT, PFB, ST, IPVITY, NRGSE), FUTY; FOWDY; %@;ﬁgoda; BT BoTI ¥,

ST BOTPT, 3003BINY’, FRBIVoN®; PTINY), WIVONYY; RAEINYTT; VIAOL,

R

£

5

6:953@60; 3;3%3{30 )0

NS, ¢

The terminations show a free use of the euphonic @ and an occasional

omission of the euphonic sonné.

ef; 206

9

H,

‘Ace. @90, o9, e. g. 2000328NF0; FoRIT0; @oﬁqsﬁey’, WJVING, Swend, T,

i

S, Tmstr. rg{o, ra;go, "SKFZ)D, fg;g@, e. g. ;ﬁaéﬁgoﬁao; :m%o-,séé), 'aaﬁazi);

%

‘c\\v

wefngdma?:&@.

4, Dat. B, @R, BoR, e g. PEARF, BIDAF, SORF; @oﬁ)qsoﬁ«?ﬁ, 2%303)0R,

ujv"

:s

98 ROR, m?aeﬁ, T,3050R, S0R0w0R, SRITON, ©IdR, o8, SJBRITOR, JTBONR,

Shib

BT Bonen, %ﬁédm@ﬁ, WINFOR; ©I[oon.

The

The @ and o are euphonical prefixes.

lakes )

5, Abl. ©3cdo, v 330, ©3,238; the terminations of the instru-

Kes

mental,

(o) wj

6, Genitive @, e.g. @ojoﬁmi, BeITFY, VINFY, BRBITONY, JINTT, JUG,

(ahadd

a0

ws%d

el

to

7, Loc. %%%, %@, w¥R, ¥, (¥9), ¢ g. FWHDNIR; I0THN; O

an

{ g

BRPR, VSBRPR, ITBHR, eicsﬁdom?mﬁﬁ, BIV.

Deople)

c)

in the modern dialect

Ppear

L,

Nom. 1%, T, TLTY,

08, 2TV, $T, odéo, oD, e.g. VTN,

327

m#_&eﬁo; ;Sof}@do; RIBINT, o—”oe%do, ¥TBY, BTT), BYBY; BOWD, faagbdo; BT,

the oy

FOID, FowT0); WaNT BY; SF9,R B, W T, %s%:%do.

3,

FYR is FH (= F¥%) and A3 (= BT°).

ARy

—

o

53

o

o

ur

Another plural is formed by adding ¥39), the nominative plural of the

pronouns ¥3 or ¥F, to the nominative singular, e. g. ©I,IT (¥Fo or VI

fter it

T 4 9[0), BFIIT, VBLTIW, or to the nominative plural, e. g. DT WTTT,

371, 1

Cf. § 131, ¢, 1, and see § 258.

2

=9

Ace, 8380, ¥R, B, 9, ¥, eg. #%{)déo, &9 33; BIRINTRY; 039903,

ental,

(§ 135); 03, 0 (§ 135);

23,09,

) el

3, Instr. fa;g, e.g. BOBOTIOF.

(i

dy Dat.. o, AR, e, 'a‘z.godﬁ; 233008, BIRONOn.

The © and B before © are euphonic additions.

g

AT

5, Abl fa;g, e.g. BOBINO.

6, Gen. @ &, e. g. BIBNT, JNRIT, BOIT, WY T; VIV, 22,09, 0*89%03-

T, Loe. 291, 09, (v99), e.g. {T0AeH; BoERdY.

rther

120. The case-terminations for the singular of neuter and feminine bases

(and of one that is either masculine or neuter in the ancient language,

90,

e

viz. 8%, § 102, 5) ending in consonants.

e

a)

in the ancient dialect

300,

L

Nom. the crude base, e.g. FoF, D, T, Twe, Foise, FTF, DY,

FREOE, FI0I9E, @NT, IR, 30T, JHRTE, [INT; IWE, I0°; VIPE, YIS,

QURPE, WIPS, JwP®, YA, TOR30PE, u%dw, WRFYE, WWFPS; B9, IROF, JPpn

jonal

WF; BORCIVIST, TS (see § 187, 1).

v

0o

@39 appears also as SR (Sabdanusisana sttra 175).

0

2, Ace. ©c, o, the crude ba;se, €. g. %JQQ,,O1 w%?,o7 500%01 @OQSO, EDGC, TIWO,

BREWo, TI0I0, 230300, TVBIBo, WMo, SwRT0, WSPo, BTV, Yo, ¥ZFo; FU 0,

1

WP 0; WWF (in Ve TH ), TR (in TR TIY), NPT (in YW 9RY).

300,

@F¥o appears also as ¥P¥o (Sabdanusisana sttra 175).

e,

The doubling of the consonant of monosyllabic bases with a short vowel

takes place on account of euphony (¢cf. § 215, 7, d).

t-

Késava (page 297) gives the following quotation (see § 365); W00 T30 A8

RO® QADY @B 0B BBonve, and remarks that the ©O° in K¥F® is wrong

(abaddha), as it ought to be =¥ or 2¥RSRE0 or ~YRASLEIR, because a new

o0,

agent or subject is introduced, viz. 83N, @3330?\‘@6, therefore, is the crude base

¥

and

stands for the acecusative.

A translation is:—‘When (they, certain

people) desired the purple sunshine of the evening, the trees of the hermitage

appeared’.

Cf. the anecient accusatives ® in § 125, SoRBS° in § 126, ¥ in

§ 127, 0¥ in §130, a, 2, especially also the Kriyasamasa (§ 253, 1, @) in which

&)

the erude base represents the accusative, a,nd.§ 352, 65 &

10,

3, Instr. %o, 'a;go’ 'aé, e.g. ¥Q0, FZ0, FYY, T30, FneSo, 3edo,

¥BBO, JWIROT .

54

The terminations are attached to the genitive according to the rule of sandhi

he?. 78,

re in union

§ 213 seq.).

Cf. the <o in the Dictionary, Additions, p. 1711.

aoh, ),

&> Dat. %,y ‘eligh oY, Swd, 520, T, T ; #e;j\,‘;j»a;‘, m;\, S0¢,

(of 0%

@o’f%, T, ém%‘a‘{\, Aee , T, W3R BI85 03¢, 9N

0 T

5, Abl. 3 cdo, eﬁ_%e%% o, eﬁéos%% , the terminations of the instrumental

(and of th

e. g. TY 3 edo, éo&oézieéo, 203 do.

ialect) e

/

6 Gen. B ‘= ien T, VY, #e{), ir"’o.’»qs, TIY, TRLO, éfaeeé,‘ [0, AL,

FIT 3, :35;% 3203); VI, VTP, NIP, ¥IP, wIFrP; @P; LWOY (in a Sasana

auclent bas

of about 750 A. D.).

bases appe

but there :

Here we have the primitive form of the genitive, v¢z. ©. About the doubling

see the Accusative.

I its datt

7, Loc. suwf, 209, (2¥1), ©ef, o, 89, e yg. &oni$2%° (in a Sasana of

(for 3°),

707 A. D.); 998, (of 29°), Fo3n, 9%, 334,95, 5288, 380 °, ROWPHY*; TBy®

Ao, Of

(in a $4sana of 971 A. D.); 3RtvW (in a Sdsana of 1187 A. D.); 336?@92,, SN

@) o

The terminations are added to the genitive according to rule.

1, No

b)

in the medieval dialect

A D), o

1, Nom. the crude hase, e.g. TO°, ToO; BH°; @3.96, ~a5e;6, BT, WUFTS,

(in one of |

WRFPE;, HRNYE.

4.D), 20

2, Acc. @o, @, the crude base, e. g. FLo, Towo; Forivo; B ; FY, JY,

4 D

BOV; GWY® (in YWY QRY), B0 (in BT wwe), BeP’ (in W' INR), F90%°

Aatoon i

(in 30 \3336?3 ra#%).

of 1123 A

3, Instr. @o, (faaé)o'), f‘ai, (f*a\%;;)), a%’ e. g. FVY0, &edo, TR,

The gl

%\o‘.’)oﬁa;, @@d%‘?%.

O, e

4, Dat. 3, R, e. g. 3NY; BCRAY, ¥nd, ©od) &;; ewirF, wacky, TS,

their dat;

bt ihey h

5, Abl. ©g o, eﬁgsig o, 291'%995&; , the terminations of the instrumental.

1), ang

6, Gen. 9, e.g. T, #oﬁoﬁ, 308, BOY, YT, Food; 30 (or 330536); 939,

VIP, BIY, WwWFY; Y.

Srammat

Moder 3

7, Loe. 2%, %@, w¥R, v, 9, ¥, ¥, ¢ g. TV, e,

tative (g

TSR PT; BHPY, WINBHRPY; WRBRYR, TRTBRER, WISHIR; @oﬁoﬁw; a@oda?sez,

§TEF g

2RV ; #z;a@@, FYO, T, VY, FHTPY, $ITY, JLITY, Beemed; FO .

lialegt )

In @9 the auxiliary augment B3° of § 121 appears to have been

mutilated.

the anej

in the modern dialect

%)

o)

i

In §§ 92. 93 and 112 it has been stated that, in general, all ancient nomi-

T (seq §

nal bases with a final consonant appear with a euphonic final v or @ in modern

b, (

Kannada; but there are exceptions, that is especially when such bases are

immediately connected with another moun or verb, e.g. F°-Bwed, Fo7.ToD),

The

Stampg

FO . RBHRJY, TV -FII R, To°-IB, FWI-TLR, %ojaf‘-mc‘&@, So08r .08, B203°.30e8,

DU} 1

P —

—

55

f sandh

WO FR, T 3R, TS FTRE), TI° i?uaeég), 30036 w3y, or also when they

are in union with case-terminations, e, g. T203; WIONF, BT ; Fady, P08y ;

Y

239039 ; 3)33@5%38, 3903898, See also TNV and WIS

g,moi,

39039, TIR; ;3303)2392

(of 239033°) in § 121, and Fo%°, 239035 in a proverb under FR) in the Dictionary.

1mental

121

The case-terminations for the singular of neuter and feminine hases

(and of the base e3¢y that is masculine-feminine-neuter in the modern

, Aa,

dialect) ending in v, this vowel being merely euphonically suffixed to

$asana

Such

ancient bases ending in consonants (see §§ 92. 93. 94. 96 remark).

bases appear nowadays chiefly in the medieeval and modern dialects;

yubling

but there are proofs of their existence also in the ancient one, namely

in its dative and genitive, and in the words Zon% (for Zorig) 0N

sana of

(for 3°), Fpewy, ARV, FZ,To, VPEHOY (BLFWw), TRV, R0ET

6’“03)7305

2eN.

0 51801

@)

In the ancient dialect

1,

Nom. v, %.e. the crude base, e. g. JN¥ (in a s4sana of about 778

A. D.), T (in one of 1048 A. D.), P, 3B (in one of 1182 A. D.), 3083

WFe

(in one of 1187 A. D.), ®903>0) (in one of 1076 A. D.), 9% AYY (in one of 1123

A.D.), 203 AW (in one of 1182 A. D.).

Y

4,

Dat. @oR, B, e. g. ¥noon, snior; ¥wdoR (in a Shsana of 1084 A.D.),

b

RABOOR (in a S4sana of 1123 A.D.); pr¥ed (for &PrRwWF), IRWF (in one

of 1123 A. D.).

00,0

Al

The grammatical bases of the terms @ni9on, &noR, vwdon, ALEdN, JpNRE

WT, YNWT gre VNS, H|NYE, NWT°, FRBTE, JPRYSS, YRS,

According to rule

their dative ought to be ¥1i¢, &n&, vir, AeERF, PRIY, und, (see § 120);

ental

but they have been treated as if they were ¥T®o, 3¢, ¥dy, FRTETy, FPprivwy,

1o, analogously to the ancient ¥7@> and &1&> (§ 122), for which GoR is the

A

grammatical termination of the dative, and somewhat analogously e. g. to the

modern S»Bw and BRenoY, for which 8% is the grammatical termination of the

T

dative (see under letter ¢).

Thus the forms $9N%°, KNE°, NNT®, ARRET®, PNPS°,

W)

)

©neo® have existed with the euphonic suffix v of the medieeval and modern

dialect already in ancient times, and have been used like the bases with final

@ in § 122.

Observe that ©¢° and 2, seven, appear in these two forms in

heen

the anecient dialect.

<90R consists of the euphonic augment 90 and the termination of the dative

R (see § 120).

The @ before ¥ is simply euphonic.

ot

6,

Gen. ¥R, e.g. QO

3, INO

b

3, BRI, YN, HKNYR.

detn

410

The bases of these terms are Q3 %%, JIRSS, ARWS, ©Ne’, SN, and the

0,

grammatical forms of the genitive would be 98%¥, Inw, Aew, ¥N¥, SHNY (see §

120).

Késava remarks that 93093 and SNOS are optionally used for 89% and

b<6a

56

o110, which goes to show that 992% and SR, forms with the euphonic ¥V, were

4! Da

;

together with AR, ¥R¥y, &NR%), in common use at his time and in the time

(see§ 370

preceding. Késava adds that it is wrong (ddsha) to use such forms as @308,

e, 307

SO, IWNOI, ete.

He evidently opposes the too free use of forms of ordinary

5, Al

conversation, which presuppose the existence of many bases with the euphonie

mii ,

final @0 (§ 122), in the present case of B¥m90), S99V and JWNY,

9% is 9, the termination of the genitive, and the euphonic augment @0 (83,

6, Ge

aR; @

b)

in the mediseval dialect

V|

Yivy

[

v

1, Nom. &y .e. the crude base, e. g. 99, T, Ty, LAl T, T,

i

B

DRFV, AR, BonYy, IRAT), ARTTY, RFWW; VIP, VI, (YITPY), WIFHY, %, 903

KNP, BN, BRWY; &P,

E

=6

, T

2,

Acc. @0, ¢35, the crude base, e. g. 20n%o; Wvo, VFPo; FY, HNT, F0tY;

T, L

Y ; JO0IP,

0¢

MYV, QIR

It is impossible to settle whether 20m¥o, Wodrwo, WIPo, Ty, IR, J0tY, Y¥

3030, @

are the accusative of bases with final consonants (§ 120, letter &) or of bases

SR0RS

with the eaphonic V.

Consonants

3, Instr. o, (faaéo, "aa;, “3;653), "ag);:’,a, £, g, T 0, YN0, ete.; FOTIAR

In 9t

It is possible that in such forms as ¥ o, ¥Wd0; ete. the bases are FO°, LT,

12

etc. (see § 120, letter ).

neuter hag

2Q% is 93 attached to B3 of the genitive.

4,

RortRy,

Dat. eaoﬁ’ r\aﬁ’ (ag’ e.g. ?sgoﬁ, B on, YRR, peoon, TIVoR, Nedon,

Boedon, BRwooR, Bovon, Brdon; YwoR, WBeoR, AreeR, FRIVR, FIR; RNV,

always en

Like the %o the % that precedes the terminations ? and %, is a eaphonic

(see §§ 9

augment.

-

Concey

.

Abl. (3 edo, ete.), the terminations of the instrumental.

%&‘.’ﬁ), 1o

6,

boeq §89

Gen. &, AR, e. g. V%), Y, YT, THV, TRIY, WYY; VI¥, YIY, (YIY),

b

hase-tér\m

WIFE, W& ¥¥; VI 3, ©IORF, 3ATNOR, BBHPa.

y 123,

2, I8, ete. may be referred also to V9%, I3, ete. (see § 120, letter 4).

(89

N &

‘) 3)

7, Loc. Bdw%*, "&682’, e. g. Tee3309%; BIOTL.

in the modern dialect

169), 11‘1 €|

¢)

fomatiop

1, Nom. en, 4. e. the crude base, e.g. 29, T, YW, FHT), INBW,

;J@,- 5\)3(;

B0 ¢TIV, BREE; %ea{ga; TP, BT, INY., u&b)oeéa; YY), HR; &Y.

and i the

2, Ace. 9%, ®Ry, ®, o, the crude base, e. g. BN, FLVII), AT,

3)’ :’gi

599 Sy, TFYRY, BAT Y, BeBRY, TRAVI); ¥VIPIY, AILIY; $8RY; BY, YWG, IV,

Dl‘imitive 5

TR, 3¢, INT, JNY, WINY; @a’fq@a, wzgaesa, R8,09; Ty, 3.

It is impossible to decide whether ®2, ¥W3, ete., also in this case, are formed

Wien th

w)(

from VY, YWD, ete. or from TO?, YWTF, ete. (see § 120, letter c).

o,

Hung) g

3, Instr. 9, VAT, €. g. FOF; TYRY, ae0F, BOF.

g Mgt :

33.)&@8(33 may come from 2398 or =3939°.

h o

[PR—

57

N, were

4, Dat. "‘3\%, fa%_&, f*g\ﬁ, 8. g INRBOF or 3'552)593%_, BRENBOF or o%@@ﬁ@ﬁ‘;

the time

(see § 370, 4); BB X, AR, w3eR; wor; FOR, wR, BBR, BT, s, 60,

R0,

23960218, SRR, SWADR.

-~

rdinary

R

uphonie

Abl. ra;g, ’83’&;, e. g. YO, 3nIF; YRORT | F0¢DRT, TREORT .

w07 , 3¢OF may, also in this case, come from SRBY or GWRTE, SV or BILSF.

o

#)

6, Gen. o, 33, e 9. E:-JESG)@, Fo, VY, T, BIY, FRTY, IVNY; VIY, FIY,

o33=Y; *’sgas; #z:éazs, TO R, W3, &s{é@é, 3:03, R0, WNAT, BV, 0T, TR,

), T,

SNVAOT; IR,

D]

o

, etc. may, also in this case, come from Ty, FO), ete. or from

mgﬁ),

839%, F

THE, TOF, ete.

3, 309,

i Loe, ¥Ry, 99, 299, 29, 989, 99, 9, e g snde$i; T,

QSD:»

b

)

K

\V,

)

[

v

44

RECY, BIVY, VALY, IRRTY; GR¢Y, VIFY; 109, 00; GORY, T IY, 7O

1

32039, BV, FRE*IY ; #s?gasei; ?ei@, 00, WIONY, BRYY; BRIF, Ty .

f hases

NRSRYR, FYO

7

etc. may, also in this case, be referred to bases with final

consonants.

TR

W

In © the @€ or 2 has been mutilated (¢/. § 130, letter ¢).

5, 0,

122.

The case-terminations for the singular of dissyllabic and trisyllabie

neuter bases, (of the masculine basgs m? Ry, newy, of the feminine base

BonAY,

and of the masculine-feminine-neuter bases TRy, FWAD)

0o,

always ending in the euphonic «v in the ancient, medieval and modern dialect

(see §§ 96. 98). See wiy, By, VOFY, HTY in § 127.

:I]phOl]ic

Concerning the terminations 3o, 39, and Jo in w93, w33, B, LS

@), 0B, ete. (which are classed with the so-called adjectives, § 102, s,

b.c; §§ 273. 276) the grammarian KéSava teaches only that they are their

(ﬁOﬂ

base-terminations. They are pronominal forms; 30 we find again in D8 90

(§§ 123, a; 272), in @3>F (§§ 135. 270. 272 under 2), in 8, RN, 3,

rb)

(§ 272, 2), in 93> (§ 125), in ®v, (§ 212), in past participles (3§ 166. 168.

169), in 908 (§ 194), in a personal termination (§§ 193. 198. 199), in the

formation of the pronouns 3> (§ 138, 4, 8) and ¥3, ete. (§§ 138, d, 3; 265), in

SRRV

Y, BN, (§ 243, 4, remark &), and B in past participles (§§ 166. 168. 169)

and in the modern 32¢2@), SRR, ete. (§ 254, 1, a and remark 3).

aL0;

35, 33 (euphonically doubled) and &> represent the letters S°, 8, &, the

)j’ )

primitive signs which point to an object in a general way, with a euphonic V.

When the vowels @, @, @0 (other forms of &, &, W, see § 264) are prefixed to

fyrmed

R (¥R, BB, ¥R which are the commonly used demonstrative neuter pro-

nouns) the direction becomes distinet ; ©3), ¥3, (which are substitutes for ©OR)

are met with in combination with o8 (of me), ete. as V&3), 2T, ete. (S 135

a, 6; § 272, 2), ©30, 93, 9B, (=98 as personal terminations (§ 193), B

8

58

w3 is t

(=) in combination with 39, (of us), ete. as 2%9,3), ete. (§ 272, 2, and

eniive; i

W), as a participial termination, § 173).

Compare also § 124, &5, 4; § 265.

augments ¢

Regarding the neuter plural of 9,39, ete., 3@, ete., W, ete. see § 136.

The case-terminations are

i LO_I

b

a)

in the ancient dialect

0‘ {/' \':,

1

Shoana of 1

Nom. e, ¢. e. the crude hase, e. g. 23, 20, F), FHR), T, IR,

—

and 696 A

:«a’oesmog), BRB), FRIY, IKNR), YR, RRY, Awomy, WM™, FENRY, Jeny, &ﬁg,

Ww

“n

o

29

mmgo, DIy, [NV, [pwry, WD, 23'%:%0, W, 89, zﬁéﬁ%é_)), w930, R, VWY, T,

D)

Iil n

BIR), VD), VWD), TR, GARY, uéo@, TR,

1, No

©E) appears also as %W (in a $asana between 594 and 608 A. D.; cf.

My

§ 117, letter a).

g,

6wy

A

2. -Ace, e8¢, (eﬁ), o, e. g. w¥o, BNJ o, JJo, JBo, INI0, BBRT0, Feworno,

1650, ¥

©230, u%éo, ¥30, ¥IR0, 0, 230, VB30, ©03) o, 20¢T0; (G, S0839); QWO

it

WV,

ry

..ji"

(in a sasana between 680 and 696 A. D., in one of somewhat after 732 A. D.,

and in one of 750 A. D.).

ikl

We take ®& to be the

CSVERY)

000w

The © in parenthesis refers to % and )03).

W v |

accusative in the sentence quoted by Késava (page 164) in Sov®a Sow’odrd

< =

N

DE)0 JoFo WFFH (could it ever come to (my) mind to forget the southern

country ?).

He, however, supposes that o= is the genitive used for the accusa-

4 1

tive.

25330, stands (according to a Mdb. Ms.) in the passage qnoted by Késava

0

A

i

in page 288 :— W00 HPFYOF® QWROAWP) BB (they scratched the (i. e. his

:

2

©

or her or its or their) navel and clawed the hair-knot).

(f. the note under the

NG

Pl

ancient accusative in § 117, and see § 352, 1, &.

Regarding the lengthening cf.

Bon

§'109, a;.6

uphonic

3, Instr. Bo, BQo, "9@:» raga;i, ©8P0, €. g- BP0, TRIV0; INIJ0, FRID

of

597

Q0; WY 2392352, dJa?oFSQ; ﬁaoﬁ&?\"&; ORE0, YJHRr0, %E(SbeﬂSo, N0RE’0, [IRWE’0,

formg. of

29 Q36°0, DRBEPLO, JILVITEO.

for e

4, Dat. v0oR, eﬂsﬁ, @B e.g. SRR, Staon, Sadod, FeaoR, @nr@cH,

iaw%;,

&nRon, SIRAON; ﬁoem'v;\, ﬁ?%#ﬂe‘?“\, &Sooi\é&;, &%5’/5\, &ziﬁ;\, mﬁﬁe“{%\; VRFF, |RTF,

BIRTF, TSBRTF, u%%sy VTVBEF, ooegﬁr, N3 TF, SRBTF, VABFF, JQBHF, aﬁé?éé@s—,

SICITHF.

Ry 2

N

The terminations are ® and &; 9o, ¥®° and ¥«° are euphonical augments.

'\«'\'"

Wi

ey

5, Abl. ©33, o, aéésﬁ%o, “&5%95%, ®e30, »298 30, the termina-

Nt

tions of the instrumental, e. g. <2238 do; Joenedo, F¥nedo, 3203 edo, 23 o,

The

SHendo, wenedo; I3 do; ANEEIN é@mm&i.

b

6,

Gen

¥, BT, WO, LY, e.g. &, DHITY; 23, AT, SN, LN,

0% o

\¢

ANT, BRTAT, WO E, I8 T, ¥nRS, HNRT, TROIT; FEn,, S, BT 19,

RS

&

:-2

, DT, Pones, wenn; WK, ARe, TR,

SREETY, wI®, ToYe, eﬁoﬂg}w,

<

0

AR

e, P23, VJB®

N

AN

) :‘1 mll]

43 is the euphounic augment B30 (93°) and ©, the true termination of the

63

and in ©® it is @&k

genitive; in ©® the augment is ©%°

Compare the

136

augments &° and 3 in § 109, letter a, and see § 141, remark under Dative.

7, Loc. vdwsf, aldnd, 2RR9R, ag9, ©liyf, weBias, vl

e. g. INZRYY, IRIWNPE, INVINEE, TASLYE, FTIFINTT; ISNRBRP (in a

, )

Sasana of 1123 A. D.); w8 3a9R; 39032 ; &30 3ed¥° (in a $hsana between 680

~

2

and 696 A. D.); 28R, LIRePRYE, TReAD YT,

059,833

e

12

¢85, BRSPS, B3

;%

PR F°, NRBLPR ; VReY, e:)od%esQ.

b)

in the mediseval dialeet

Dt of

1, Nom. ev, ¢. e. the crude hase, e.g. ©33, w3, W), oI, Teun,

8%, AW, B B, 29,3, WYI), %5%'5'), FEPT, z,d%, NTBBY, DED, eﬁﬁ%, DRI, JILIT.

)

()

gorio,

oy

Acc. es0, @, the .crude hase, e. g. 280, TIRo, INSo, w0, YO,

S TANe)

%esscso, ©ZBo, VWO, NVRO; YVTF, 3?-0—’&), .52.2%3, TOENT, TB, 83, %o%, ©8, 9%, u%; B D)

FERY, BER, DORY,

A D,

3, Instr. @0, ©Ro, VAo, By, B o, fa%@, BT, 9830, BEPT |

¢ the

@wgﬁé@’ 95@-39% e. g. F&odo, TR0; FRARO, BRI, RO; %?Je'd@;o%o; %zim?n,

S 0;

o)

553%&%; PAIONICS)

u@%&&ﬁ@@; %zz&c%, zm:aﬁ@, %r“%f;’mc’o, ;Soo:béég; BRE0; @cﬂcssa;;

hern

@Cﬁ%ﬁsg@; @&36&)’%.

Hibig

4, " Dat. a0}, BB, BT, ”a‘v_”é\_, Do®¥, &3 oI, «9F e g. SHOR,

$av0

R on; SRR, =207, Seant, 338, Roan, BaR, VAR, FFMF; FVT,; WEWNIOT;

, his

&

V0]

zuagoér, WRBEF; @‘('\)é?%, DAY, oodcé%, IR

&7

N

% a@é%, u%é@%, a\nﬁmﬁﬁ,

3

the

%o%% B0e0T ; ¥RF, ARF, WAST; :Sooa;%?, &3 F, ez,

I

Qon, an, |o¥F, |, B

%9 are ﬁa T

k)

?

&

<

,» the terminations of the dative, and the

euphonic augments 9c and .

In 9T, %‘9%3033%7, WP N0F the final letter 1O

i

of ¥¥10 and %% has been changed into 3.

©3, ©F generally are mutilated

DEVT. DV

B0,

forms of 3.

bl

.6.7

mm@% S03E, 23T, &3 %, either stand

for Soc08, 03B, WFR (see letter @), or for ScwFr, JINITF, &3 T,

o

306@%&\7, ete.

i

5, Abl. ('353950, etc.), the terminations of the instrumental.

i

6,

Gen. & AT, W, 99, e g. BT, BT, VTR, JewB; YT, WOT, 31T,

VYR, WS, TONI, WINF, WOAR, JedI; FEN,, [oenes, mo%m, %ogea,

Jpone, Bewns, LN, R0 M, [oew; VT, OF 6, 'a;ﬁ;@’ oRe, u%ee, 0Tes,

&3

Jopeses, TOV,E, u%ées, VT, cﬁfa&;%riw, ?,Sé\e?d:ées.

14

The Basavapurana, exceptionally, has 505@9955; see § 123, letter ¢, 4. 5. 6.

7, Loc. adwef, aRR, (ARRFN), asY, a9, stPre’, wtBRW,

P

BEBRER, ¥e9Y, BeYo, e.g. % B0 ¥, %zgca'm%vs, BeAIN P, FEAIHYE, TOR

IR, FPAIB P, WIDBR P, LTARRYS; #%3@%, DS INP); %Y, WY, T

RIY, VAT, TOATY, c%fafi@_/asez; wd T, %zié@, FoeIO, BIINTY; GRZSD 9,

wy

a’ae%ess.fa%vs; DR P ; u%es%a@ﬁ; WOFOY, JReed | WITHO, VTS, em%éese?ﬂ,

8¥

e

60

]

)

n

d@%é@@“, 23%5&)‘%; EHELIA 39%@3@, RERCL eﬂoi%eae“}, Toud, J860, ®3 @0, WY

3®O

N

¢)

in the modern dialect

1, Nom. en, @.e. the crude base, e. g. 23, BTy, T0A, FIA, BIM,

%

il

WO, BT, AR, ud%, eﬁx%, %osgo.

(i

2, Ace: B8, @m%, Vg, eaajv oo es @C‘f)s\&, the crude base, e. g. ¥

j

m

S, AT, [N, VI, BRI, WD), PYIY; BonADY, NYHRIY, T@I,

No

WBRY, BB, 0BRITIY, VIR, Wi I,

[, D)

% QI

5’0%5&; OR; ’@da;; ‘VJ%, TR,

Da

33, IN, TN, BBIW; MTIF; BEHIY, WBPTTOIY, W BIY, B BDY; TR0, TR

In 8%

About ©3, ete. see e. g. § 109, letters b, ¢; § 117, 4, c.

In the vulgar

hecome a

w®3) the ¥3) is attached to the ©® of the genitive.

.

1§ 109),

e. g. RRIAIA]

@’

L33, Sewd; By

o}

3, Instr. b3, 'ad;], ’a@a;, LR

hase with |

aa@@&zﬂa, %ao@g)g, ?Ja:%aaé, WODRT, 2 ’T ; O '3, R e

9(-5.

()

9,

), Al

4, Dat. an, 93, ¥T, e g. 3004}

~

é;ﬁ, PR3 R, AR, TR, WOIR, B¢

J

I

s |

z

For &

AR, mé@ﬁ, e Ak, ToNAR, JRLR; @dai,

e o’

00T, BYT, IenT,, LT, I

= =2

ative, an

3 %, mw%‘;, OB,

ol

&%%, B0 T, ?302\?03?, BeVTF, TERTF, wLIT.

TIORT comes from THMY, and w¥eF (for 2900F) from W¥™ (see letter ).

-

The ba

9,

Abl. the terminations of the instrumental, e.g. »¥N3, Hewnd,

b, G

i?%ﬁﬁxé; mﬂﬁa;g, o%@wh&%, B0 RF ;5 B @I

6,

o

[eL Ta'm)

d

N

, 8¢n, 8,

(SR);

Regar

Gen. ¥, o8, B,

Y, @9 e.g. TI), 3

75 L(

SRED; ﬁ%d, FRAB, T, F, $oN3, 33,8, FIAF, VYN, J0ers, FIAT, wEAT, Be

BN, S033, 2 T; TONER, [0, WP, VRN, B0F e, oFm, RZw; Jene,

The

o3I ¢ o0y, A8e, O

8,09, o

&3

N, wI O, L.

e

fing] % (§

©¢ is another form of ©.

14,

3§ 122 4

7, Loc. 9, (v9), vdR¥R, v, w9, ¥eBH¥A, VLD, ©LIY,

of the ply

e. g. WY, Fwed; FaZLIR, ?z;o&agfﬁ; W RY, TIRIY, FRATY ; FEIO, TN,

SR NY; ¥BSPRER, eﬁa;esamﬁﬁ; TR &Y, em&‘dweg, BT 00, JRODY, INBH ; %3 09,

o

123. Kight neuter nominal bases with final es (words denoting direction.

1: iH

digvacaka, digvaci), which, in the ancient and medieval dialect, and

Qa‘;a (4 ai\‘

9

23)

I

partly also in the modern one, are declined like some bases with the final

31 i]

euphonic of ey § 122.

(Their lengthened form appears in § 126).

a)

in the anecient dialect

(:;“\1 %53) }

Nom. ¢, i.e. the crude base, viz. ¥3, 438, W3, 23, 0¥, IFF, VAN,

é‘:‘)! ;‘m},

AN céj

of ﬁ-’&gd; |

4,

b

W gng {]

Dat. @9‘53\., e.g. O3 8, 938, 30T

:’)6505553’\, wcéﬁe*{:z, dodacés";\.

9,

9098

ia ii

Abl. €30, @S’:ﬁ%o,

29008 t30, €. g. 9o, ©Z83o, ©II;

Pronoyjy,

3 80, éo%’séo, WRENES0, SORBL50; SR B3 do.

6,

Gen. @09, ©Ks, . ¢. V8o, 98 £, 300, IRITM, WRNL, SoRTD.

i‘mﬁd el‘l]]

))1

The simple ®%° appears in 083, that stands for the full form 3% (see

[

Doy

10ng

S

272 under No. 2).

N

N

61

80 %9

b)

in the mediseval dialect

Nom. ¢, ¢. e. the crude base, e. g. ©¥38, B3, 3.

4,

Dat. (&ﬁ ).

o,

Abl. em%g, (Qsz%ggo), @9’3%, eggg;g €. g. SoRBBo; 2033 ; ©I BT .

6,

Gen. ©c0, 5%, e. g. Q8 0, 23 0, 30T, IRIFH, WAEND, FMED; I8,¥

i B

in the modern dialect

78

¢)

:

1

Nom. ¢9, 4. e. the crude hase, e. g. ©8, 93,

%

43

4,

o

3

Dat. 959@'-0‘2 or @9@-‘3-3_&’ @ or ﬁ%’ €. g. 20T DT or éo??@% WENF or &)?3?'(@6_

In 20T0%, 20¥®T, the augment ¥%° has received an @, and as ©® has

vuloar

become a part of the base, which is declined like a neuter base with final ©

b

B

(§ 109). In WRENT, WERT, no augment appears, and WAET is treated as a neuter

b

base with final .

23

, 423

=iy

i, 49

5, Abl. aez%:g, WD, BR, 6. . 30T ; DouR0Y;

For 330@5?&@% the base ®02%Z% has been formed like that of 30%F of the

3

dative, and has been declined like a neuter base ending

in © (§ 109); ¢f. the

)

%o?v'@?ad in § 122 under letter b.

with final @v, § 122).

HENR

The bases for ©8,3, 923 seem to be €33, 93, (¥E, 9,

6,

Gen. 2329, 993, e. g. 30T, RIS, SIRTH,

Regarding @37 see the ablative and locative.

(68

RE))

Loe.

TN

S ed

o

7,

g9, 89, e.yg. IRTHIO ; NI

7 ®

o)

¥,

The bases are ®@IIM and W&EN, that are declined like nguter bases with

final © (§ 109).

124, Remarks on the employment of the augments &% and % of

§§ 122 and 123.

(See also the declension of the pronoun ¥%° in § 125 and that

599

of the plural of ©®, ete. in § 136).

o)

i)

0996 is used

b

;ﬂ

L,

{10

in numerals (sankhys), e. g. w8, ~0B, JoHw, FpVY, VoI, G, VN,

Y, mfﬁi, BB (BB, BREN;

and

2,

in pronouns (sarvanima), e. g. ¥R, AR, YR, FIR), OIIF, B&B0;

p fiml

3,

in terms denoting quantity (praméanavi¢i, pavan), their finals 33, 33

(%, &3) being pronominal forms (see § 122), e. y. DRI, V2B, MY, VA, VA,

BR), VRY, i, BhED, v, 2R, 9, omgd; (the ¥R is probably another form

at

of ©¥83d; W& one of YRY; WX, one of ¥AIB), the 3> having taken the form of

W and the ¥ having become short);

4,

in the so-called

adjectives (gunavafana), their finals 89, 33, T heing

300

pronominal forms, and

the pronoun ¥R, e.g. w9, w3, IL,

AR,

(modern) @wad @, B3,

Z&f&d\);

in verbal bases

9,

(krit), their end-syllables V&> or @B heing neuter

pronouns, e. g. IPRBIW,

) (see

TRREIR, IR R, FHBIYR), IRARBR, (SNRXY), [RBY

SR;

—

62

—

6, in the term S9¢20%, it being composed of 33¢&° and the neuter profons

0) int

ital)

Nor

The Sabdanusisana under its stitra 269 states that VY (D2 0), which is one

At

of the words which express indefinite quantity (§ 90), exceptionally receives

Ing

the augment ©&* in the neuter forms 2 &, DV BF, DO, DV et0 ¥, The dative

Da

@%i appears in the Sabdamanidarpana, and 2QT, obvﬁ in the medieval and

Ab

modern dialect, in which forms the répha has disappeared.

See the neuter

b,

(i

plural of 29 in § 136, its epicene plural in § 119; ¢f. § 266.

Lo

e985° 1s used

in nominal bases denoting direction (digvadaka, digvagi), e.g. 30em, TEM,

"

=

v,

WEM.

Fpon, ¥, 93, 3o

Compare the terms IB), FB, I8, VO, BY, WY, VO,

§12310

in § 139.

they may

10 the ab

125. Declension of the interrogative pronoun ¢ (Do, ¢f. §§ 262. 269.

301), the augment being 595

This is not directly attached to o or

and local

its crude form, but to 30, 4. e. £ and the pronominal form 3y (§ 122),

15 the fol

literally meaning ¢ what-it .

G) 1

a)

in the ancient dialect

[

Hisang of

Nom. o, the crude bhase, ¢. e. ©0; .

In thi

Acc. o, the crude base, ¢. e. OF0; .

Instr. e589%

7. e. d3ero.

arises ]

Dat. 56358

sB, B, i. 6. DITF; HIF; 2T,

(see the

_&_)

For ek

»3F is a mutilated form of H3FF; compare the mutilated forms of the dative

tstablish

of the medizval and modern dialect in § 122 and in this paragraph. Such

9

)

forms, therefore, must have existed in ancient times.

In ®% the termination &

Here

has been suffixed directly to ®. See also § 124 w0 F, 20T for VQTF, DY TF.

A0cUsat

b Abl @wggg%o, 3. e. ©33 odo.

ly

b,

Gen. €3, ¢. e. 3w

In

1,

Loec. e5€380%5, 4. e. D3P0 ¥S.

been g

b)

in the medizeval dialect

base &

1

‘)

Nom. o, &9, the crude base, ¢. e. ®0; DdIV; D, (0359).

l

HIJ is MO (9% and the euphonic ¥v. 0333 is another form of ® (see § 41).

9

Ace. 50, ¢, the crude base, 7. e. OFT0; HIJ; O

I

Instr. ©65%0, 4. e. ¥Sero, (WK3e’0).

9

‘)

Dat. e&%&, wB, B, 0. e O3, or V3T, WNIT, or SF; OF, T

9

Abl. (5893 230), the termination of the instrumental.

b)

Gen. eI, . e. VG, oS3R8 e.

b

?

Loc. ®&30¢¢, ¥CBR, SLRRYA, 6tiQ, &LIY, e. g. P30S,

63

¥ Pronouy

%)

in the modern dialect

Nom. =, the crude base, i. e. ®30; 0.

ich i ope

5

iy

Ace. R, @Ry, », the crude hase, 7. e. ©30; PII; V3.

| IeCeIVes

3,

Che dative

Instr. e§°-"‘9(2, 7.1 05393&)9(\2}.

4,

T O330F

ieval and

Dat. @%t}, 9F B . e 0393, or 0393

)

18 nefer

Abl. @@9%, i. e. O3S,

6,

Gen. €9, 7. e. 033>3e.

1

Loe. ¢330 1, VL9, (£L9Y), e. g. 3w,

Ty, B9

126. Concerning the eight nominal bases with final ¢s mentioned in

0o, 39

§ 123 it is to be stated that in the nominative, accusative, and locative

they may receive the termination ey or WeU; WO Or WO appears also

62, 269,

in the ablative of the mediseval dialect, and eyoy in the ablative, genitive,

0 o O

and locative of the modern one. The declension of the ieng'thened bases

"

§ 122)

is the following.

@)

in the ancient dialect

1

Nom. the crude base, oV, e.g. SIPBLF, IRIJF, ¥ &¢; WIRW (in a

sasana of 1123 A. D.).

In this case the ©©° means ¢ place’ (see § 109, letter a, Locative). The question

arises whether e. g. RES* may not be FRE, the genitive of J0HA), the east

(see the genitive with © in §§ 120. 122), and ©9°, 4. e. the place of the east.

o dative

For ©80°, 93 0%, ®w3 &*, w3 o, however, no base ending in @V has as yet been

established; but see the curious modern ablative ©33, 433 in § 123, letter c.

Such

2,

Ace. the crude base, e. g. S0RTL°, IBITO®, @3 o°.

jation 3

Here we have an accusative represented by the crude base; ¢f. the ancient

|gg§£

accusative in §§ 120, 125, 127.

by

Loc. the crude base, e. g. SIRBY°, BRITT, ©F oF.

In this case ©©° means “in the place’.

It is not impossible that ®©° has

been suffixed to the genitive of So»® and SRD; but, as remarked above, a

base ending in @V for ©8 &° ete, is still to be established.

b)

in the medieval dialect

1

Nom. the crude base, e, e. g. S0LTST, LA

YREB Y, "a:i@o,

(il

9,

Abl

B, e.'g. ©8O0,

7,

Loc. the crude base, o, €. g. SVRTBST; &,

in the modern dialect

¢)

1,

Nom. e, ¢. e. the crude hbase, e. g. 3oFw), WBRwy, SERSM

5

Abl a8, e g. d\i@:&, fazi@%

6,

Gen. e, e. g. WAV, ®3 0.

(B

Loc Y, e.yg. REVY, JIFTY, WERWY.

64

127. Declension of four nominal hases always ending in the euphonic ev

WIED (w

knows,

(see § 122) that express time (kalavalaka, kalavaci), viz. ©g), B8,

MR, IR, the nominative, accusative, and locative of which have the

H3)),

The ¢

same form, though the locative may receive also the terminations ©R8R%°,

{0 one fo

=Y

(Cf. the declension of ga%, etc. ?11 § 139.)

Q) ir

/

a)

in the ancient dialect

l

N

Nom. the crude hase, ¢. e. ¥, B, WI), VT

"Bl

Vm-)‘

Acc. the crude base, ¢. e. ¥R, 9T, WS, HTY.

S; W

W

Instr. 8o, €. g. ©30, B30.

g, A

Dat

BoR, €. g. ¥yon, [ on.

=5 2

Abl

o

833,830, e g. ©@33do, By o,

%if;)}

Gen

A0;

ag, € g. VAT, AT,

Loe

DR 3

§

7,

the crude base, BRRT, BRY, e g. VI, W, 3D,

T

b A

@%ﬁmg wegée?w,

in the mediseval dialect

mental,

b)

b ¢

1, Nom. the crude base, i.e. ©3), B, 2.

3R 0R;

An instance for @& has not been found by the author.

Acc. the crude base, ¢.e. O, AT, WFY.

Tl

i &, 1t

Instr. the terminations of the ablative.

Dat

BoR, AR, €. g. Ao, Koi; 231,

) i

Abl

a0, VAN, BF, € . TGO DR AT DT

A&,

Gen

B8, 4 e VT, AT, Q.

)

%

Loe

the crude base, 7. e. O, BIY, I,

R

¢)

in the modern dialect

|

Nom. the crude base, é. e. @8, B3, I8

4 ]

Acec. the crude base, @. e. ¥, A3, DT -

Instr. the termination of the ablative.

%

b

Dat. B8R, ¢ €. ©31, B3R, 237

LAY

Qu

Abl fags%, e. 9. ORI, A T

Gen. ¥R, €. g. ¥R, 9.

T

%

W) 8

A

Loc. the crude base, 939, e. 4. ¥8, B[R, VT ; VIR,

A

fa

ih|

198. The case-terminations for the singular of nominal bases with a

radical final ew (see § 97), whether masculine, feminine, or neuter

(see § 139 regarding IRv)-

}2

The bases comprise Kannada and Sarskrita words. They can easily

wJ

wj"aa

be distinguished from those in §§ 121, 122, and 127, as their final en

The

never unites with a following vowel without the euphonic augment ¢

(

ramm

being inserted. For instance, we say Tamad)e (DB BRBY), B3,

Bouy

—

65

o e

e gy

03y ([, YNy), but we cannot say, as every intelligent teacher

3%,

knows, s0o003), 0w, but must say FoBoTeIBy (ToTa-F-

ve the

FGOR), FIBITOIBY (Bora-53°-yW ).

See § 215, 3, d.

R0,

The case-terminations are suffixed by means of a euphonic ¢, except

in one form of the dative.

@)

in the ancient dialect

1,

Nom. e, . e. the crude base, e. g. ¥R, B, YO, F3), Fed, T, T3,

TID), 3690, B, Bow), IW, Je, Y, e, zs’édgs, FB); 1B, 3RV, [TB), T3, PIXY,

0, I

2,

Ace. &0, €. g. TIBOTo (FB0-T-290), DT (Te-7-20); MBITo (M-

ss-eﬁo).

3, Imstr. B0, o, '&‘cgo, 'a‘éb%o, rag)%, 6. g, JorINo, VWINO, 1OBINO,

SORON0; FIBIVRO, NIBINRO, TIVIVRO; mdm%m ﬁocﬁoaaa’mo; mqb:bé‘)%.

RN

4,

Dat. R, @oR, €. g. BN, BN, 3308; SoBIROR, ROBINOR,

5 Abl. 'asiz%o,‘,[aaigségo, "aaigs%;g, the terminations of the instru-

mental, e.g. FBIITI o,

6,

Gen. ¢, &, BF, 6. g. DT, F,Z, MOIT, IPT; SIFIT; FIBINT, 1B

DV, IDR.

7

.

TOELR

1, Loe. 25, (ég), BERY, AFY, 6. g. MWOIR, RTrpes

SR 95, TIBINRL ¥ ; FBIVTY.

b)

in the mediseval dialect

1, Nom. wv 4. e the crude base, ev, e. g. NS, o, ™, IB; T,

NBYY, 30I (see § 113, and cf. § 130, letter b).

2,

Ace. ®o, (¥R), ¥

)

e. g. WRTo, TewJo, TN To, B0,

330,30

w

IR,

DT, 55’053%;5, S8, WD, 333,

o)

Instr. a0, @0, €. g. VBR0; BZoRo.

7

Dat. &, @R, (o), e g. smgpﬁ, aR0R; mogaanr, 3309R.

?

Abl. (a88,ed0, ete.), the terminations of the instrumental.

%

7

Gen. (2); AR, e.g. BIINT, WRIDT, TN, @oﬁ»@;’m, TOBIDR, BWINT,

BRI DS,

¥

7, Loc. (%%%), 28R%, BR8%), alR9R, 959, Br9, €. g. IR,

B NBL P ; VROIIRP, IRAZRFY; ZJ0ABLER; %?053%3359;1, %v'é?)r:me‘;h; BRIDIO

308D IO,

th &

€)

in the modern dialect

eut&l

1

Nom. e . e. the crude base, ou (see § 113), e. g. TBY; MBI, BRI

2, Acc. ®8), ¥, B8, BRI, the crude base, e. g. ROBODRY, TAIIRY, ;

asll)

BROT; MIVIVT; TOBIDRIY; BAD.

| 0

The strange forms MBI, MOBILRIY, are given in his ‘Outlines of Kanarese

b

Grammar’, page 17, by Venkat Rango Katti, Kanarese Translator, E. D.,

Bombay, 1886.

W

9

p——

——s

66

Forms of the modern dialect like Rom3233), (of Bo83)) and BW3BLIIY (of

0)

(M

®»)) in which the final ¥V is wrongly treated as if it were radical, are modern

Y

{

licenses in literature.

’?

)

Instr. f&%, fa‘{a%, e. g. T3 ; mdmag.

QS)Q, %0

kl

Dat. @R, e. g. OB, FeIT, RogoaR, BRIIR,

The ¢

-

Abl ra-(?;, rao@-%, e. g. MBIV, BRI ; NSRS BRIV

Y

AT

Il

?f

-

Gen. ¢, B, 6 g BRT; MIBIVT, BRIV

I

%

)

Loo. ¥9, BRY, €. g. BRFY; DDFY, MY, BRIDFO.

Fdono, 1

129. There are some nominal bases ending in enn, 935, 83, &, and 22

3@03)%;

which in the singular are declined like those in § 128, e.g. Tp, B,

Nripatung

28y, B, WA, FW, Awe, M2

gl

@)

in the ancient dialect

b A

1

éﬁ%ﬂ)i?@(

Xy

Nom. the crude base, e. g. &, 28, ¥»,

L]

b 6

2,

Ace. o, €. g. P, ¥ZTo, RAtFo, M Jo.

In Sabdamanidarpana p. 67 there is 938280 or the crade base. Cf. letter c.

Rdilad,

3109, g,

8, Instr. ®o, B, ¥T0, Ao, € ¢ PRo, 2ID0; PIY; PRFo; P

0, &)50)5) Q0.

8

4.+ Daty R, 'aoﬁ, ey, PR, paoR, Reedon.

(in a $sa

Fadoay

5,

Abl. 238 3o, e. g. PRV o.

Mk

6,

Gen. 9, B, e. g. MRS, MT; PRI, TFIF, YT, BHIT, BRI,

LN

n’?n;m

(in a shs

7

Loc. %%, ARRS, €. g. [ees; PdJae:, T3 ragaes, RADIA.

(in ong o

in the medizeval dialect

b)

D i

Nom. the crude base, eu, €. g. IP; PRI

Hed

Ace. ©o, e.g. @PTo.

5503)) %{f;

6,

Gen. 43, €. g. PIT, BADR.

The

in the modern dialect

d he]p fi

Nom. the crude base, o, €. g. 38, {Re; BLHI, RAD

§128 4

Ace. ©3y, the crude base, e. g. BRITY; Tb.

)

bl G

Dat. anR, e g. @R,

é

Gen. @R, €. g. BRIT.

3,

130. The case-terminations for the singular of mascaline, feminine and

ONNQ ?1}

"0

neuter bases ending in @, 8 and o.

(Regarding some exceptions see

§ 139.)

oy

The terminations are suffixed by means of a eaphonic c3s¢, except

by, 2

in the dative (¢f. the & in § 109, q, 6).

e

67

e

33 ([)f

@)

in the ancient dialeect

modern

1,

Nom. 0, &, o, 4.e. the crude base, e.g. 39O, FI&, W, T, 3663

EX

et 1R |

¢ Y, BB, KT, YNT, 63

\’;_\)3

Ace. 90, (the crude hase), e.g¢ DO03o, MIPO3N0, W00, TR0, AA

0390, 80280330, L9T20300, 38030300

£0300: TIZ030. B33, T30, RF30, Aedodvo

The crude base is seen, e. g. in the following instance of Késava:—n? aw¢

ST’

See § 120, @

3,

Instr. Bo, B8 0, BR, , €.g. TV, BITS o, WFIOWO FRTO 00

TR0, N0

QIR 020

OF TS00; IDWT 0, TJROJIFROVIT 0; JARFO W

and

see

SR ; @werodd (in a sasana of 929 A. D.; Pampa Bharata 1, 140

)

Nripatunga’s Kavirdjamérga, edited by K. B. Pathak, . a., introduction p. 2)

4

9

Dat. 7, e. g. 3R, 3084, FaB, VAR

3R, FAR. SR

2R, TN

5, Abl. ©3do, ©3 %o,

@3 33,

e. g. ARNI0E ed0, Bomavcdrg o,

Fe’0308 80, IR £30,

0:35,0303, 2'30 : vesaofné 833 o; #es%sos 33, 13900328, &8s «

6,

Gen. &, &5 e. . M9, A9 foamojg SF 203y, Tanody, FBG %es-’:os)

[efter ¢

FORIBO, &I

T3, T

O 033, 02033, Ne3,0339, TonRodID

See under

o; W

§ 109, a, 6, about the lengthening

$ITBID3IN Y

(B

Loe. enuy®, wof

W

W

IS8

(SLDN]

40).. €. g

(in a Sasana of 707 A. D.), %90®A30%° (in a Sisana of 866 A. D.); IDCR®*

FHRHBONDL &

PR BIABN ¥

QBRXR $°

T30 ¥

fajelostoloid

23030 ¥

3. B03% )

ReeR

no@ne*oln®y (both in a Sasana of 1076 A. D.), $02,030%) (in a §4sana of 1123

DonR®30320

A. D.); 20&3¥R, 033L¥R; VIPO® (in a Ssana of 1186 A. D.);

(in a shsana of 1076 A. D.), Rw & 03 (in a sasana of 1123 A.D.), dwgoden

360

U@OS)@D

~2303.)ef)

(in one of 1182 A. D.);

b)

in the medizeval dialeet

L,

Nom. 3, &, o, ¢. e. the crude hase, the augment e (see § 113),e. g

ZDOV), TeO; A ¢; S0 ; P3N, W3 030, L3y, dBa3N

The augment @V, like that of § 128 and § 129, is in reality not euphonic or

Like that of

a help to enunciation, and is so to say,

superfluous addition

§ 128 and § 129 it disappears in sandhi (§ 213 seq.)

)

-

2,

Ace. 090, Ry, 5, e. g. 3,030, TIIdo, ©:F,030;

EY)

)

%o:b

o

b efé 03RY,

’

@B0303030; F20eD303), [AC, F 8030, 3 03, F08ad), N a3

SReR No; Taed

3,

Instr. o, ©wQ0

(o =

e.g T ON0, .88N0

OB 0, PO.Q AT O, BSOWS 0; VRN, VT O

doNoE, JSoS . I .I3eS ot

ne 1ﬂd

TOI0 0N . I, 0N

2330, 81 00T

4,

Dat. i3, e. g. 3R 30001, BE R, DRSFAR, 33 R, BTR, AR, SN

5, Abl. (»g 3o, ete.), 9333, the terminations of the instrumental

e\Celt

e.g. 3DWIY; BN

6,

Gen. es, €. g. 3,03, 30n0), ¥Z0d), BB, 33 3, YFD), ST

9*

68

e

for the

7, Loc. %%¥, W, ¥R, vy, B9, ¥, e g. § 23RV, VDALY, ad

vowel

030 9°, m’ies@@o.%fws; 9T 03RP), FIBRRPY, PRIBRPY, FTBEHRPY, SFeB3RPY; T

BePR, BIRBRYR, PEABHER, T S3H ¥R, FRRRIR, INPRRRIN; BRVLY; L&

(§130

039, z?zgf?wag; ﬁfaeé’&oo&@, BFRHFOV0Y, T00Y, PT S, 38039, assiosm,

wherel

a3, "rj?gq)ﬁ(ﬁ)@, AR 0308, Re30300.

the ple

0)

in the modern dialect

The

1,

Nom. @, &, ), ¢. e. the crude base, the augment erv (see § 113), e. g.

()

3on, T, TH; A8 %‘Ri, aSsi, NP3, BRI, [T 03K, 2,608, $,050032, miéoéoo.

I

ST O3,

ﬁs?g\ ¢,

2, Acc. ¥, ¥R, ¥, ¥, lengthening of the final vowel, the crude

mg\ ¢

base, e. g. B003r89, 31OBI, wo%osmo, Re303r0; 20803339, TR0V, 239,03339,

?.‘Df'u')t 13

©erS3038Y; BRI, I, JNR0I, ao?e%éow, 3803, TerTad), Te8FR03); Iones,

s,

BIVR I, BIBINES, ©3 ¢S, ANAT; Wone, @Ja%e, mQe, FAE, 3IRE, WINE, WRTE, TG

e, oy

FHBRe, 37 8¢, 38, Swrrie, Bode, ToF ¢, Avee; T, RO, &I, HR.

T

A

1§

93 is ¥R with a final ¥, and 30, ¥ 3, ete. stand for BoNR, ©3 33,

=)

etc. The forms ©one, ete., VAT, ete., stand for BoNa, ete., VETW, ete.

3,

3, Tustr, fag, e. g. SN, ﬁo@o&od@, éioﬁog, ;S-)ccﬁo;’)oﬁ@.

0n

Vi

Dat.

Y0,

4,

R, €. g. SR, &R, kR, TR, AW, VI, ﬁ@ﬁﬁ, éiﬁ, &R,

J0IN, &IA.

5,

Abl.

The

raa;, e qg: mmoﬁ)o% 53@60‘:)0%, é@oﬁo;\;.

6,

Gen.

e, ¢, lengthening of the final vowel, e. g. S0103), T,

A 03, ééoﬁo,

AR, =T, KT, 3803, FRNASH; wé;dos:a, TIROIR; BV,

lenta],

TI00R, MPe, IV ¢, BYe, ToWUW, 2039, ¢, Ue, ToRTe, Fefy, Tk, B,

b

waere, Jweett, SoRe, TBe.

9, my

T

32009, ete., 33 % ete. stand for SICVICD, ete., BS 03, ete.

7, Loe. %878, &9 99, &9, 0O, O, e.g. PREI5IR, Fdeer, S’

l

RRIN;

BORGRY. FFHY; B0, FR0O, AP, [T030; WA,

!

BR O, TIND; 'azéueei’), RO, 23¢9, FoFe0; Fe0O, I, IO, WY, Fond,

18

o

o)f)ia@.

M%), 3%

WD, ete., B3O, ete. stand for IV, ete., B 30, ete.; and FedI,

In ;

ete. are corrupted forms of T009, ete. (¢f. § 121, letter ¢).

th& 10

131,

The case-terminations of the plural of neuter bases with final e

oA

are given in § 118, and those of the plural of masculine and feminine

0

(and epicene) bases with final ¢ in § 119.

E)é.)

in it

Here follow the case-terminations for the plural of neuter hases, (the

3

feminine bases 3»03s¢, S, and the masculine-neuter base &%) ending

I

in

consonants

(§ 120), in the vowel ev that, occasionally also in the

Foy

ancient dialect, is euphonically suffixed (§ 121), and in the euphonical

vowel ev that in each dialect is always suffixed (§ 122), and further those

il

—

69

% 1

for the plural of masculine, feminine and neuter bases ending in the radical

0; 0

vowel e (§ 128), in e, 23y, 93%, % and ¥ (§129), and in = and o

v o

(§ 130), the case-terminations nowhere indicating the gender (see § 132

ﬁicj)&

wherein the gender, to some extent, appears from the terminations of

the plural).

The case-terminations are

),

6.1

@)

in the ancient dialect

<1

W

1, Nom. fi%f, %, 1w, €. g. TH, T e, YWNres, o e°, TP,

crude

ﬁesg‘%?ﬁ. éu@e%f\w, @ﬁgg\%ﬁ, waﬁocg\@s, mmoqg\w, #odoqg\@ﬁ, FINFYS, BINFSS, ejef\%’ﬁ.

303y ¥°, Ty 9°; Fwoee ¥°, T2 9°; FOI NS (in a Shsana of 1187 A, D.); ©0=onee,

{)*\

T TIST, eaos%mvs, SREINYS, FJYFNes, FRIJFRYE, XYY N9S; Nodone’, Boennes,

30N,

3VINPE, DRI ; JPNST, &%mvs, zgg):-s)ﬂvs; TORYS, TINYE, WIATIYT, TIJNFE, Y

, it

1S, QU3 Ne°, FAMeT; 3z§3ﬁs’6, W3 NY°, YIN®, VNS, SRABRYS, BANYS, JOINSS,

FOTIBNRS; TOBINRS, [,NPS (both in a shsana of 1182 A. D.).

i M3,

H,

Ade, @0 . ¢. 4, 'v"ae%%?o, YWRFPo; Bn¥o; FednNPo; e InFo.

3, Instr. w0, ((3-(?;0, raé)), e. g. TI0I 90, TeY 1o, 39NFRo; BFENYo, we

NP0, YVTIBIBNYO0.

, VT

I

f,

4, Dat. B, i3, e.g. YWRF Y ; 3INY; B3),N¥A (in a Shsana of 1187 A.D.).

The @V in @R is merely euphonie.

-

9,

)OO,

Abl. (6380, ©3,0d80, ©3,ed), the terminations of the instru-

33

mental, e. g. ??JNC%%?O; 505@030%71@%.

o

0%y

W\

ot

6,

Gefi. ©, &, ¢ 9. #sg\e?, a"ooj%%f, afodo%j\%f; TOOIRY, BoINnY; JPNY; WI o

1%, FNT; 1IBTPa.

6 Loe. w%F, (@e?o), e. g. %’99\93@96; WINTISR ¥°; R AL S,

)

VW

<y

b)

in the mediseval dialect

J)o)\‘/i

iy Nomi. ‘Mo, Reb, e'yg. &Ss%e;ﬁ, @’59‘96; PN ; SPVIN P, o N e, u%ﬁw,

Ol\ge’y

ﬁm%r{%’s, éa‘g’ar{%ﬁ, rfs‘im’s; 3903) &, T &; ST, JMOBINPY; NS MPy; Fend

N%), SRIJINFY; BINRPY, FoRIBNL.

Y

In SRJINP) the termination TP has been appended to the euphonic ¥V of

the nominative singular (see § 128, letter ).

2,

nal

Ace. ©0, ®R, ©, e.g. %ae;\%fo; wBWNYo, BPINFo; WITNPo, FeNSo;

3,01%0, INANPo; ISMER0, JBINSIo; T NP, TLeINY, RTPINY, ININY,

e

Fody e, TR T, HONY, eI 1Y, 29N, Ny ne.

(the

3, Instr. ao, '”5‘%0, 'aéj raéo, 3, e. g. 3)en9o, A INY0; cg&m@z\jbo; @os.)%

r\@z}b, w@m%, R*Jaéﬁ%;; @oﬁoo@ﬂ@%, mm%, Deﬁﬂ@%; S303NY.

pding

For the %@ in IR0 see § 109, letters & and c.

] the

4, Dat. 8, 2R, €. g. 2PTNY; TYIR 39RYR, WTRRIR, TITINER, . Ve

gniﬁal

those

noR, ©aneR, $INIR, e IR, JN e

e

70

P

Aadndsy

5, Abl (&9_:?’9950, ete.), the terminations of the instrumental, e. g.

SOINY0.

REHE%

6, Gen., @, e.g. %aeg\eé; BTRINY, 2B NY, FB1Y; BeI0NRP, IBonY; JNT;

The |

SrNY.

Of mnee an

and ¥

7, Loc. w%f, (%%), w¥ih, 89, ¥9, e g. ey N80 es; T HERER,

SARSRER; T203) $O 5 BNV, JINRTY, BRF Y, JInFY, FPneD, BN,

and

%,

0)

in the modern dialect

(¢f. § 119

9

1, Nom. #%, €. g. TN, S0VYNG, By 1ie), TING), BAVND, Y&

L

!

gl

NP5 MBI TP, FTRAING), INIINPY; MITIN, IR NP, BRINGY; PING), RPENS,

#%meo; F2O0ITIFY, TN, TN, BINP), TIWNG; I 1Py, RHRTNPY, 30

6T

1Y, SwIndo.

or gl

Another plural is formed by adding the plural of the pronouns ¥ or 939,

bl

viz. ©30), to the nominative plural, e. g. ®RVNLITTY, 3,NEID, or to the nominative

o5

singular, e. g. ¥ TSF 0T,

Cf. § 119, ¢, 1

%

!

E

2,

Ace. 9950

Q

e e 1, #@gﬂ@di, o“oeag@ﬁeédgl, FOINERY, YLNETY; W3,

) i

¥Ry, INBINEIY, ms%ne;sqi; TOBINERY, IR NBRY; SNJNFRY, QONYRIY, THOW

Lo}

NERY, SATIOWNLTY; 33 NE¥RY, VSRS ; FRRONY, MOTINY, FNANY.

ohé, 3p

3,

Instr. v s

)

e. g. TN, NN ; BNV, FRRMYT 5 MBI ;

), B

Snaned, Fanes, denes; desney, RoMes.

4,

[RNAYR; MOTINIR,

8 N,id;

Dat. @R, e.g. WNNMIR; 39 19N, FTRRNDA,

FEONON; &%rﬁ@ﬁ; SNINR, asg)eérie?ﬁ; 3, nen, SUrRNIn.

Tami]' (by

B¢

5,

Abl. the termination of the instrumental.

e

6,

Gen. e, e. g. TS, BeBINY; FRRING, 236-’%71%3; NBINY, FeONY; &ée)ﬁ%‘f;

BNY, TN, BONY; SF N, RReRNY,

0) 1

1%

7, Loc. %%n, 95@;)), @O, e g. FTNSRTR, DHRMSRER, FHENSLER; TR

n¥Y, MBI, IRNPY, TN, THAWNSD , WBINGL, BoorN¥Y ; ANF.

Wiy, W‘

132.

As has been remarked in § 131 there are such plural case-

~

13

terminations for nominal bases as indicate their gender, but only to

luralige

a certain extent; for these terminations are of an epicene character (cf.

kind (jat‘

§ 102, 4), and besides in poetical diction are appended even to neuter

2, 0eute,

objects.

(Cf. the terminations in §§ 118. 119. 134.)

cmr;; 3

The terminations that are affixed to bases ending in B, &, (¥, e. g.in

bstraot

o), 9, o, (033, in SOHY), (O, e. g. in IVAL®), are the following:—

in the ancient dialect

. 134,

a)

10 the

1,

Nom. ©0f, B0f, NPT, BOTE, VT, BTFFYC’, DO, DFFF, 9T,

Y an

DBTS, TFYS, INFeF, e. g. :9‘3‘2)03966, @3 0300°, wWeNo3TT, 4,003)0°, rj%éosocg,

2

o3 0300°, R $300%; 06 T (of 3w); AMIDEo BRINYTE; We03ddTS, @eoﬁa@cs,

0) j

éa‘éoﬁo#mﬁ, 3 GDTFF, TINJRBITF S, ieoiaa-’r%;ﬁ; BeONTFYTS ; éa;ibacs, 3@0:’)%06,

L )

ms,

30NQT, WE BT°, ReADTY; éia%’wﬁ? W3 BTF®; 3T JT°, IOYTT, 4,3 DTF, 8 QTF,

) wiz

e

—

11

) &g

ARANTE, YBIT, HKFN0°; B3I HATT; -é;i:s#ws, W3 NTFYS, HFITEY; O JF YL,

GTINFPE, HTBINFFS.

| e

190¢ consists

The 03 in 33 030%, ete. is eaphonic or a help to enunciation.

of T¥° and B0°, ©OT® of WU and A0S, WFFY® of WOF and TY°, VFFYV® of WO°

néad

and T9° and 0%, QFFYS of AT and TP, DOTS of VT and WO, IFFYE of LT

!

v

and T, JINFES of AT® and N7,

In &0° and 20° the ©° and ¥° are euphonie

(¢ § 119, ).

g, 49

9

“y

Aecec. &0, €. g.

2 e03y30.

=

Raee,

3, Instr. B0, ('&%o, '3%), e. g. TIDI QAT F 0.

), 308

4

s Dat. 3, z?\, e. g. ODNF or IR F, T ARF or IR F, A» Fadoke

-

or ~

R eo?oigzi £

See § 119, @, 4 as to the doubling.

08 9&5%,

7

Abl. (@éeﬁo, etc., the terminations of the instrumental).

minative

Gen. e, e. g. 3 333,

Loc. (%%°, ©9).

)

b)

in the mediseval dialect

‘;, FON

1

Nom. @06, racs', ﬁ@oG’ &56\), @UG’ e.. g 33@0&)06, @@@O&)UG, 35359)@

0300°, 303 0° (of 303)); 30 T® (of 303)); JRANYTT, RITSNPTS, @%ﬁ@os; ?@3}8

oeR;

03280, BWe33030T0, ©BAC30TY, VVIARIITY, wa’:j ¢0); #o@zi & 03390° ,

et

©33,¢00 stands for ©3,0308). The ¥0° in 330@&1639033906 has been adopted from

Tami), (by the Basavapurana).

6,

Gen. @, e. g. "0 FT.

7

Loec. (&)%?6), WHY, (eﬁe(z), e. g. R&0dBR.

1 d)

3

%)

in the modern dialect

1

Nom. 30, o3, . J. BoA0TY, BRIV, @eoﬁxﬂ), ARA0NT), I

fi; WA

4

&)

03380, ©T,[ISeTY; LAY T, WRNETY; :3@?3@063.

‘émf)ﬁ%@d.), WANRED stand for ‘5.98ﬁ%>03.)50, WARE3IT.

al Cast

133. Let it be remarked here that many declinable bases are optionally

ooly 10

pluralised in Kannada,

1, neuters expressing the idea of genus, species or

cter (0

kind (jati), as @8, ToRB, O, ToF, AeR, TR, 3o, 8%, IJG;

) neute!

2, neuters of numerical character (sankhyéya, sankhyAnavastu), as ©%, Swc¥,

o301 ;

3, numerals (sankhyé, sankhyana), as So23, ©03%, &8w0; and 4,

abstract neuters (bhava), as FHIJF, B¢y, TIF.

See § 354, I.

134. The case-terminations of the plural of feminines of which the singular

in the ancient dialect ends in e9¢¢ in the medieval dialect in esg$ or

w0

e9¢y, and in the modern dialect in esgdy, (Regarding their singular see

g

é/\

(355’

§§ 120, 121, and regarding the plural of their masculine bases, § 119.)

in the ancient dialeet

hoc®;

@)

;;:

1,

Nom. &o°, (and with the elision of ©¥°) ©gs, T¢¢ e g. OFT2T° (of ¥

a0

¥8), QFLT° (of WHY®), WIPT® (of WI’), YIY L, a%ce%cs, T003)9 07, WPedP TF,

) -

C‘ao}

——

2

—

U&wa,

coeﬁo:h%cs, 503303)%56, adcﬁﬁoﬁo%oﬂ 3)@@3033%05, a:“gpéoj)e?acﬁ, ;Soﬁegacf; ¥J08,

(of ®F9), ASTT® (of BIYF), WSV (of WI¥), YT° (of YN¥), Tt (of Jwee),

;

§122

QR3T® (of BRBYE), FORBT® (of FOII¥F); ;59#&96 (of Son®F).

plural §

)

©0° stands for ¥ST° (see § 135).

The case-terminations for the oblique

1 i,

cases are identical with those of the plural of the masculine bases.

3. 88

\

b)

in the mediseval dialect

00y, W9

v)

1,

Nom. e3gf, ©3), e.g- ©Z0%, |ITC, WWFT®, WIFOS, PO®; WTTY, BI0Y

3

In%

c)

in the modern dialect

i, 09

maseuline

L

Nom. B8y, 6.4, @5(53, “&550, 292,.1)‘)53, 03330.

w(§ 121

135

In the preceding paragraph we have met with the forms eo°,

hase ©4,

gy and oi5»dy as the nominative plural of feminines with final ese*

Regardin

and 9%,

It is to be added here that the same forms of the plural are

4

also those of the masculine interrogative pronouns ©So, (©330), 0HRY,

[

1

1

93no, their singular being declined like that of masculine bases with

final e (§ 117).

Gf. § 210.

]

a)

in the ancient dialect

Nom. ©¥T°

5

L

i

[

0% is a contraction of ¥JT° (see § 265).

2,

Acec.

e$30.

4,

Dat. @niir.

TheI

6,

Gen. 3:5’(3, 08,

©@0f oceurs only in @3)F for &83) or ¥R, of whom it? whose (is) it?

(§ 270).

j

E

b)

in the medieval dialect

Nom. &0T°.

2,

Ace. &T00.

E

4,

Dat. (¥13F), &OR, doR.

)

1

6,

Gen. ¥0C.

9

in the modern dialect

!

W Jne

]7

Nom. (¥8v), 03398, wTI.

In®,

2,

Acc. 03338y, WY ; 03323, 033TJ,

{0 b@, o

)

Dat. 033201, m0N.

~y

6,

Gen

oj'sad_, 0.

i)

136

The plural of the neuter pronouns Qs 2, VT,

SR,

5098y, B (§ 102, 8, b. ¢), oBO=Fy, w35y, and of the neuter

‘é

pronominal bhases (so-called adjectives, § 102, 8, ¢) with final 8o, 3y, and

|

oo (¢f. §§ 116. 122. 276), such as m%éo, ?»%3_39, 209 2, ;30@2)339,

9

I

3

(S2a)

30, WARY, BRI, DR,

d%éa, 233.93399 5%59, 3%3_)9, 30030, Red3y,,

(see§ i@

PRs—

Y,

TR,

PO, LRy, VYR, TOI,

Regarding their singular see

f 5%%“5),

§§ 122. 124, and regarding their masculine and feminine or epicine,

plural §§ 119. 134).

in the ancient dialect

oblique

a)

1, Nom. ¥3, 93, 9w, ¥IY, VeI, VVJ; vYRY, YT, WY, 39

9

DR, 3RORY), FORY; VR, WAKD), [INT, 2000, TR, BRI, T

), 0%

oY), VPN, TOI.

In ¥33 NF is attached to the base &3 (§ 117), and in oI, KD ¥ to

8, 295 in 29 B, ete. (of 93, ete.) the YOI is joined to a euphonic T° (¢f. the

masculine bases 29,8, 09T, 39,7, ete. in § 117) ;5 in @B, ete. the pronominal

% (§ 122) has been dropped and ®3 (for ¥v3) been suffixed to the original

s §0,

1l ogt

base ©&, etc. by means of a euphonic 333, or to their genitive (see § 276).

Regarding the 3 compare the plural signs 3% and @ in §§ 137, 193, remarks.

ml are

2

, Acc. ©30, ¥T0, W0, (¥JISo, JwIo, u%cﬁo:ﬁo, ¥ 303)30), DY Fo, HVF0.

woan

Instr. @3w0, ATwo, NV Jeo, (Jeveso, WYTT’0, VAHTH*0).

sog with

Dat

OIFF, AIVF, 29 DTF, SuIFF, (WWITF, BAQIFF).

Abl

. (%8 fdo, wIewo),

Gen

VT, e, JHTe, N T, (u%dom, 29 303039).

g

Loc

.

VIR, TR Y0, TuTLPRYC, v TP P°

?

©TNO, [T,

b)

in the medizeval dialect

1,

Nom. ¥3, 93, ¥II, VL.

The plurals S, w9, etc. have not been found by the author.

7

Ace. ¥F0, BTo; DY Fo0, WV I,

?

Instr. (@30

) (1‘;] lt)

%

)

Dat

@3%_& or ¥IF, '335%1 or 93T

Abl

. (VT3 8o, BT o).

Gen

VT, Y.

?73

9

Loe

@aeaea o)&r)nmaé};.

¢)

in the modern dialect

L,

Nom. ©3,

a4,

WBRTF), WII, MVJ; OINL,

BINP,

BRSNS,

DY ITF.

In IR, ete. the termination T¥Y (see it e. g. in § 131) has been added

to ¥, ete.

2

Ace. ¥I), 93T, VITY, ATRY; VINEIY, YINETY,.

Instr. ¥INLT, QINR .

Dat

@&Sgd or ¥IT, r&lﬁ'@i;_ or =T, @o@ﬂ'@ﬁ, eJnen.

o

3%

Abl

@@”@‘—‘:’Da AIND 5@

Gen

VING, JINS,

b neuter

-~ o Ot = W

Loc. ®J3NSeen, aIndesn; VINCY, GINSD .

i

5, and

137. Declension of the personal pronouns and of the reflexive

pronoun

<10) 9%

oAl

(see § 102, 1, 8, a).

10

74

y

a)

in the ancient dialeet

Singular.

b

1,

Nom. o (3 before vowels), viz. ¥o (¥3°), (I, &Ms'); REO (REF); B0

(337°).

I,

According to some ancient poets also % (39%%) is used (Sabdanu$isana

(™)

stitra 288; see the plural.

2

The long vowel of the crude form of the above terms, as will be seen,

In

presents itself as short in the oblique cases of the singular as well as of the

freated

plural.

2,

Ace. ®o, viz. V80, {0, BF0; (I30); (I3, see § 352, 1d).

4

The & is an augment; its doubling is euphonic (see ¢. g. § 109, & and c).

3, Insir. ©o, B o, ra;(‘s’n, Viz. 20, dYO, 3R0; MRIFo, dQTO, 3] 0;

23, A, 3R ; (80, ete.).

4,

Dat. of}, viz. 288, ds8, 330; (IN).

The forms are irregular, as after the euphonic augment ©° (0) the letter €

has been inserted ; ~37, ete. stand for 208, ete. (cf. e. g. letter ¢ and § 117, a).

5, Abl. @3 o, ete., e.g. 933,680, 37 3do, 373 o; (373,80, ete.).

6,

Gen. &, viz. I8, T, 335 IF, I, 3J; (I, *°, 3F°); (T, ete.).

The not doubling of the augment & appears when the pronouns ©3), ©3)

;%

(substitutes for ¥®, see § 122) are added to the genitive, e. g. 283, (I83v),

The

DR, (IF3Y)-

Exceptionally the pronominal form 2> (see § 122) is suffixed to

often-ug

DT®, AT®, IIF, e.g. AT, (see § 272, 2).

and 81

7, Loc. 2% (959(2), Viz. WRR,95, 23R ¥¢, 330, ¥¢; (I38,9%, I ).

Plural.

1,

Nom. o (3% before vowels), 3, oni¢®, viz. ¥o (¥I¥F), o (D),

s

330 (B9x3%°); (T0); I (in a Shsana of 1181 A, D.), 3 (in a shsana of 1123

0)

A. D,); JOTIPE, JROTIPE, SIOTI&E.

The change of the sdnuné into 3% and D (see also the medieval and modern

forms) reminds one of the &° as a sign of the plural in ®3, ete. (§ 136) and of

that of the plural of the personal terminations (§ 193).

Cf. § 265

o

g

2,

Aco. 90, Viz. oo;Soéo &;Soéo, -@*méo; (SaSoéO).

3,

Instr. o, ete., e g DRNY0, AV, 3

%

03 (5&)0&0, 5&)%%, SJJJ&%O).

4,

Dat. oR, viz. 238, a3, 33R; (IR,

TSR T s

In

Regarding the form see the remark under the dative singular.

In the often-

Uceasign;

used form of reduplication 33> 8308 the 83 is an abbreviation of 331

-

9,

a)

Abl. (e&itﬁ’)o, ete., e. g. obdoét?’:r?f)o, etc.); (535%3%950, ﬁﬁ.)é?:o&%?;, ﬁﬁ)@%&%%m.

RS 2 TR R

6,

Gen. @, viz. O3, 33, 3305 VT, DY, 379; (IVY,)-

i

The not doubling of the augment 35° appears when the pronouns ©3), ©3)

ahbTEVia

are added to the genitive, e. g. T, 2303,

In the often-used form of

33

|y

reduplication 335° 33 the 33 is an abbreviation of 33 or 33,

Cf. § 250,

N

15

0 Lioe, 2,05, (©9), viz. 988 9%, AR ¢, 330,97; (I30,9°, IJD)

b)

in the medizval dialeet

¥); 30

Singular.

L

023403

Nom. o, 30, the crude base, viz. ¥o (¥5°), dto (JLFF), o (IFF); To

(59TF); ¥R, (RERD)), BRV; T, dE, I,

2,

Acc. @0, viz. 230, dF0, 3F0; VYT, dJYFo, 3IYJo.

06 Seen,

s of the

In 239,70, ete. a euphonic ¥V has been added to »&°, ete. which has been

treated as if it were radical (see § 128).

.

3,

)

00 383,

Instr. (20), raao, faﬁa, ra;é, e. g. (VR39), dR 30

Dat. oRR, viz. 238, d38, 331

and ¢).

30

Abl. (Qﬁit%o, ete.).

40

Gen. @, viz. O3, &, 3.

X

i;

Loc. 2.9¢, 2%, w98, (89), e. g. 33,9 a3a9), 330,9; 330,91

Plural.

lotter ©

117, 0)

Nom. (o or 3%), ), Viz. (¥, ete.); R, I, D), .

te.)

Ace. ©o, viz. W0, (5;30@0), 8330, éméo; DT,TO, [T Fo, 839y To.

gIc

)

Instr. (®0), fasmo, (ra;g), e. g. oo:)oé:&o, ;S::)oé:&o.

;

3)

g

9

%

Dat. oR, viz. 23008, 231, IR, SR, 3Z0, 3IR.

In the

('é

7

éa],

The %° in »3% and 83N is an optional substitute for I9°; see § 225.

often-used 330 33 and 83 3R the 330 and 33 are abbreviations of 3301

ffixed fo

and 330,

Abl. (93 3o, ete.),

Gen. @, e. g. 33%; D3, (mjoé), S 35%

(—Z

(?;2;5*)7

Loc. (w%°), %%, ete., e. g. 359,90

in the modern dialect

of 1123

¢)

Singular.

| modern

1,

Nom. 0, the crude base, viz. I89, deR), Fd3); T, R, 3.

S

) and of

2,

Ace. &Ry, @Ry, ©, viz. IFI, ¥, IZFo; IFI,

R

% 3R

?

3, o3, 3%

3, Instr. v, viz. 303, a3, 3R ; I]T, AT, 333

0

4,

Dat. oR, @R, viz. Soi, doR, 3ok; 23R, IIN, WK, 33%; IR, 2ar, San.

DIN is

" In 328, ete. the euphonic B of § 117, letter ¢, has been inserted.

occasionally used in proverbs.

he often

!

5,

Abl. the termination of the instrumental.

Py

6,

Gen. ©, viz. 33, ?3, 33; I, Y, ;5 (I°, ¥, =F°).

it

8

83 in S, 83 R, 2 in AR/, d3I, and 33° in 83) (1. e. 7 ¥B) are

abbreviations of 83, 8%, 38 (see § 272, 2).

43), 9%

b

.

7, Loc. (&J%gﬁ)’ @e;)’), Qﬂ@, Vez. dﬁe?,,v aﬁe?,,a 55&27 55‘,{@2,, g)é;‘e?,g éél@m

form of

33¢, 239, 339; 379, ARE, IR L.

. § 280

10%

e

16

e

Plural.

() Th

i

?

In the

Nom. ), viz. Y, JD, 3.

2,

long vowel

Ace. @Ry, ¥R

-

bl

@, viz. IFRY, A, 3B F0; IFYRY, ALY, 3By

employed i

Sy BDY, DY, X,

3,

Instr. B, viz. ST, T, 30T ; IV

o

9

IS

%

3, 39

()

Kanna(

4, ‘Dat. on, am’z. I31, aZoR, 3Ton.

sionally In

and followi

For 830 3308, which is often used, see under letter &.

-

Dy

Abl. the termination of the instrumental.

and dative)

the first pe

6, Gen. &, viz. I3, dDY, 33Y; a’mé, &mé 330,

Kannad

839 in éo—joé,ﬁ’ 550&5%'9;0’ Z\J)&joéis, AT in 3)350@85“, and 335 in 5&3:)33506 are

abbreviations of 830, 3, 33v.

Télugu ¢

M)

33

’

.

R83Y, AY, 8Z0Y ;

Tami]: % 4

7, Loc. (%%R), 29, &0, viz. 838, &%

e’

Qe, 2

5:5%@, moé@, :a’mé@; DY, ATO, 3ZD,

second pers

The fo

138. As it is possible to trace the origin of the personal pronouns and

the reflexive pronoun almost with

the following etymological

the third D

certainty,

remarks on them may not be out of place.

[1) P

T}

@) Forms of their nominative singular in the five chief Dravida languages.

Kannada &o (¥5f), T90 (J98%), S99, I9;

The v

Malayala &993°;

The exee)

considerati

Tami], 0333°, Jo°;

9 and o

Tulu ©339%;

Télugu 90, e, o, I

The s

forms of

Kannada &¢o (2¢3%), ¢9, ¢

(ifferepce

Malyala &¢;

Which

Tami] &¢;

of the fiyg

Tulu %5;

Télugu ¥, 3.

ang 00cag)

Which

Kannada 3% (323%), 939, &9;

possible ;

Malayala 335°;

¥ T,

Tami] 333°;

o g ;‘ia Q,

Tula 335%;

Télugu 39, 3.

If ye

fOrmation

b)

1ts erude forms.

ot

el o1

The finals o, 3% &9, J are not radical, as is learned from the forms &9, ¢,

Ued i 06

®; d S5 395 they are signs of the nominative singular.

Gr. §114.

('31’ &):) th

Without them the bases are ©, 3, 99, 0333, », J¢; &, do; I

(Cf. also

But

the interrogative ® in § 265.)

MY infy

———

R

{L

¢)

The forms used for the oblique cases.

In the oblique eases the long vowels are, as a rule, short.

If we accept the

§JVU é;Saé

long vowels to be primitive, the shortening rests on nothing else but euphonism

employed in attaching the case-terminations (¢f. P9 =YI0, 94D in § 265).

Kannada & appears as », ™ as o, Malayala ¥ as « and 9@ (this occa-

sionally in the dative), Tami] 0335, © appear as «, Tulu 033 appears as 0%

and following a consonant as », Télugu ®, 3¢ appear as 2 (in the genitive

and dative) and as 3 (in the accusative).

The forms of the oblique cases for

the first person are, therefore, o, @, ©, 9.

3 are

Kannada and Malayala &t appear as & Tualu 8 appears likewise as d,

Telugu &¢ appears as ® (in the accusative) and as ¢ (in the genitive and dative),

Tami]- ®¢ appears as &, 89, ®v. Thus the forms for the oblique cases of the

second person are ¢, Q, T, V.

The form for the'oblique cases of 33, the reflexive pronoun (the pronoun of

s and

the third person), is 3 in Kannada, Malayala, Tamil, Tulu, and Télugu.

ological

d) Probable origin of the three pronouns.

i)

k)

That of the first person.

08285,

The vowels used in the formation of this person are ), &, 3, ©, 9,

The exceptional @ of the dative of MalayAla may be dismissed from further

consideration, as the regular vowel of its dative too is »; it may be added that

9 and » frequently interchange in Kannada (see e.g. § 66; § 109, 4, 3).

The short ©® and » of the oblique cases have been taken to be the shortened

forms of ¥ and ® (above letter c¢); if the reverse be accepted, no material

difference will proceed from it.

Let the radical vowels be & and .

Which of the two vowels has been leading in the formation of the pronoun

of the first person? We may say the one or the other, because they are related

and occasionally interchanged, e. g. Kannada ¢, 9, 0! (see § 140); &, ©, what?

which ?

&0, ©0°%, a pair of oxen yoked to the plough; &ef, oo

to be

possible; @0, A¢T®, to be or become near; Tami], Télugu &, 9, o;

Tamil

e, Teélugu 28, a river.

)]

(Regarding the interchange of short ¥ and o cf.

€. g. =

» 9 0! (see§ 140); ©° =% to say; TN, F0°, the hand; 3%, 33

the head; ¥TF, %7, swallow-wort).

If we take & (or ©) as the leading vowel, the idea which underlies the

formation of the pronoun of the first person, is that of calling the attention of

another or others to one’s self or the ¢‘I’, the particle ® (or ») being commonly

used in ecalling

‘o iy}

or calling to, a person near or at a distance (see § 140).

bele}

; 8

(or ¥0o) thus is the person that desires to be taken notice of, ¢ the-o-here’!

But what about the initial consonants o3¢, 9° and 2

Do they in any

( 3180

way influence the meaning of 0 (¥0) or in other words are they essential?

R

e

18

substitute

The answer must be in the negative already on account of their not appearing

D (=

in Kannada @o, Télugu 939, 9, and, as a rule, in the oblique cases.

9

=

i

In order to explain this we add that the letter o35 (like the Samskrita 033%)

The v0

is a semi-vowel in Kannada, and especially Kannada and Télugu people very

That t

often use it euphonically as a help to pronouncing the initial vowels B, &, o, ®

its absenc

(§ 415 ¢f. also the euphonic 053¢, ¢. g. in §§ 113. 130. 132); only exceptionally

oblique ca

it has disappeared in the tadbhavas ®=09¢ (=03)30¢) and ¥OR (=03007); in the

The I

tadbhavas ©3 (=0332), 23, (=), V3 (=) theinitial <, when not preceded

Also

EXpressing

by a consonant or a consonant with a euphonic @V, is pronounced 05

original m

before & the 035° is euphonically sounded, e. g. ¥, 33, what? which?, ©o°

as short e,

o3330°, who ?, Tami] &0, 63390°, who ?, &, 03333y, an elephant, Télugu OF, 033

[n the

wild, which is likewise done when an initial ® appears as 03, e. g. OO,

as o, a st

o503, eardamoms, V3, 08I, a picotta, ¥, 03, what ? which?, »F, 039%, why ?

the presen

(or when an initial short « appears as o, e. g. &, 0B, oil, N, 3D, a

direetly f

female buffalo, Télugu ~38), 03230, who?).

Thus the initial 3¢ of the

‘right opy

nominative singular of the pronoun of the first person must be declared to be

a0

unessential or simply euphonic, when at the same time one considers that

The v

occasionally it has no place there, that ¥>® and ° are used in its stead, and

the first ¢

that it is not found in the oblique cases.

the obliqu

0= is never initial in a true Kannada and Télugu word; but is found as

S ——

mean ‘tha

the initial of some Tami], Malayala and Tulu terms.

The form ¥335° of the

3 W6 hay

first pronoun is Malayala.

@ is another form of °; thus Tami] G300,

Y ang

0308 are Kannada S¢R&°, the sun; Tami] 59w, 3w are Kannada (S©9°),

§1

29

e

), a1

3¢, to be suspended ; Tami] F309, 323 are Kannada 399°, Télugu I3, 8309,

of sandh;

339, a peacock.

Besides, as apparently in the first person of the pronoun, it

fot

he 4g6

makes its appearance as a vowel (* or ) also in other words, as does likewise

Wby 8000

its co-ordinate and substitute °.

For instance for Tami] &9, TP and

[ARS

Vap

Kannada 3¢®°, to be suspended, there is the ancient Kannada 2©o° (Télugu

le-it-he

Bew)) ; Télugu 393, a peacock, appears also as »9; Tami] F), F0Y, 39, a

erab, are & in Kannada and obé*g in Télugu (in Kannada there is also the

I[ Se

primitive form w&&, a crab) ; Kannada 3%, Tami), 8%, Malayila 9, to-morrow,

Pronopg

are 29 in Télugu and ©3, in Tulu.

There is, therefore, no reason for consider-

f

16 verh

ing the °° to be an essential part of the nominative of the pronoun of the first

mparg

person, as it bears the same character as the semi-vowel od®; it is used to

the W, o)

facilitate pronuneciation by a small seetion of the Dravida people.

By

= bears no character in the pronoun different from that of its substitutes

:

e

W

% and 0%°, the last occurring in Tami) side by side with 3°; it too is simply

Sitong I

euphonie (¢cf. the of the second person), although it has been, and still is,

U the ;

often used in the nominative of the pronoun and its oblique cases by a large

0 thy

number of the Dravidas.- By the bye, in a few tadbhavas &° appears as a direct

193

)

ppeating

substitute of 0%, ¢. g. in Kannada 3%7 (=030T), a yoke, and in Tami] <,

P (._—.05);50), Yama.

o

ria )

iy

That of the second person.

The vowels used in the formation of the second person are &, 9, and ev.

ple very

That the initial consonant ¢ is not essential, but euphonic, follows from

- R

its absence in Tulu &, Télugu &3 in the nominative, and Tami] @ in the

ptionally

fin the

oblique cases (cf. the 3° of the first person).

The leading vowel is &, this, the proximate demonstrative particle,

preceded

expressing that a person (or any object) is situated in front of another; the

)

Also

original meaning of the pronoun is ‘next (to me) one’!

This = appears also

h?, ol

)R, R

as short e. g. in B, 4.

In the oblique cases of the Tami] pronoun the leading vowel presents itself

g, &')“Ju{

as oy, a short form of ¥W, the intermediate demonstrative pronoun, denoting, in

7% why

the present case, a person who is intermediate between the left and right and

cﬁ):bs, 4

5 of the

directly faces the speaker in being addressed, the primitive meaning being

‘right opposite (to me) one’!

This W is also short e. g. in VB, Y.

red to be

3,

That of the pronoun of the third person or of the reflexive pronoun.

ors that

The vowels employed for the formation of this pronoun are & and ),

gad, and

the first appearing in the crude base 33, the second in 3, the base used for

& is shortened into ©, both demonstrative particles which

the oblique cases.

found a8

mean ‘that’ (§ 264), i. e. he, she, it, being used for all the three genders; ©,

f of the

as we have seen in § 115, has got also the specific meaning of ‘he’.

0 (),

& and @ are attached to the pronominal syllable 3> (3°+ euphonic 9V,

, (#6%)

§ 122), another form of ¥ or ®¥®, the demonstrative neuter pronoun, by means

)é) ?33)53,

of sandhi (§ 213 seq.), the @v disappearing. The 2o in this case points back

nout i

to the agent or subject, and 3 (30 + &), 3 (3> + ¥) originally mean ‘that-that’,

Jikewise

i. e., according to circumstances, ‘that-he’, ‘that-she’, ‘that-it’.

(The same

500 and

80+ @ appears also in @S, &3, WS, ‘that-it-he’, ‘this-it-he’, ‘this-intermedi-

(Télugu

ate-it-he’; see § 265.)

Remark.

| i), 8

also the

It seems proper here to refer to the connection that exists between the

morow

pronouns of the first, second and third person and the personal terminations of

onsider

the verb.

Regarding the vowels ©, &, «, & of the pronoun of the first person

the first

compare the ©, @o, & of the first person plural of the imperative in § 205 and

the », ~0, and 230 of the first person singular and its 20, O in the plural in

§ 193 ; regarding the vowels @, & of the pronoun of the second person compare

the B, » and ®03° of the second person singular in § 193, the B0°, Q0 of the

stiutes

g simpl)’

second person plural in § 193, and the %, <o, 0 of the second person plural

of the imperative in § 205; and regarding the

¥ and ¥ of the pronoun

| stl” i8,

of the third person compare the ©, ©@o, ®% of the third person singular in

4 Jarg®

§ 193.

3 direCt

.

80

—

189. Peculiarities(in the declension of some nominal bases are still to

Tn the

be adduced.

In § 122 there are some terms of direction with final

140

euphonic ev, and in § 123 some such terms with final ¢ of which the

sidered ¢

genitive singular, etc

are formed by the help of the augment o

only sev

(see § 124).

This augment is used likewise in the ancient declension of

(&ma.ntra:

the following words when they express direction:— g@o, TB, 2.

of reason

sy, a term of direction with radical en (§ 128); instrumental and

(évaprat

a term of

ablative I@.30do, dative IFom, genitive F@oIes.

23,

and one's

The

direction with final « (§ 130); 1nstr. and abl. 3Bcoedo, dat. %a@oﬁas"’é\,

gen. TWO30eD,

%, a term of direction with final o (§ 130); gen. %

(!

1l

oJ0e%.

If the three words are not used as terms of direction, their

declension follows that of §§ 128. 130, e. 9. RBIJR, TR, LB,

Tod

The use of the same augment is seen also in the genitive singular

m;ﬁm

of ©9, 29, wd and 2@, terms of direction with final = (§ 130),

oo

Ao

chiefly in the ancient dialect, viz. w9 asaee, DD, Mo, oY

This

O30€9

2

The common declension, however, of OB rae_:)o, and w9, 18

If

Bm !

a) in the ancient dialect e. g. dative SO R, Q:)e;)oﬁ, ablative ®9o, @%%,

)

©9Zo, genitive ®Hly; b) in the medieval dialect e. g. dat. @947,

This

of gl

¥9 off, faeaﬁ, 297, abl. Qﬁﬁg(‘g, ¢OF, gen. v, B 030, O 0

118 V0

3 ]

¢) in the modern dialect dat. ese?nﬁ, fae;)nﬁ, @e?oﬁ, abl ese;)o;g, @@2%,

10 bases

DO, gen. wPok, 0O, 29, VI,

23 and e3, terms of direction with final ., are generally declined

ending i

N (Of ‘

like terms ending in o (§ 130), e. g. genitive 23030 (in the mediseval

f g

and modern dialect); but in the modern dialect we find also e. g.

] :a;)a)

SR (for &237) and & (for seIod).

i

P

W

Further, in the same manner as the nominal bases always ending

|

of oz

The ¢

in a euphonic ev in § 127 which express time, F»¥, ¥ and SR8,

terms with final > which relate to time, are declined, viz.

@) in the

by ]

ancient dialect e. g. nom. (the crude base) Fo%, dat. TePorR, gen.

Tarticla

e

[o98; /R g‘);)a‘oﬁ, RAT; m@{, ﬁ@@doﬁ, SRR b) in the medieval

dialect e.g. 79%, S, T9RY; ¢) in the modern dialect e. g. T,

[OER, a‘a%’&(’q, ;3@%?@5@, [OPR; IR QR 3@3‘*, 3\@;)&5.

I.Cﬁ

Besides, two terms with final ¢ that relate to time, are declined like

o

3 and R,

In the

bases with final euphonic ev (§ 122), wiz

by

W]

medieval dialect we have e.g. »ng, and in the modern one eNg,

WY %

o

sNdn, «@NS; OB, SNAT, SR, The medieval form B0QYR may

be referred to ;jooazv also a term ending in es,

4

-

.

81

still to

In the ancient dialect the genitive of the term =08 is =03 .

th final

ch the

140. The vocative (sambddhana, sambuddhi, &mantrana) is not con-

sidered as one of the cases by Kannada grammarians, who enumerate

I 8%

only seven (§ 106).

It is used in addressing, calling or calling to

1sion of

(3mantrana, abhimukhikarana) objects that are inanimate or destitute

3, o,

of reason (jadavastu, as posts, pots, flowers, trees, bees, etc.), idols

al and

(dévapratimé), persons which are different from one’s self (lf)kﬁunt\ara),

ferm of

)R A4

(3

)

and one’s own self (Atmiyaditta).

A

%

The forms of the vocative are as follows:

GIEN

@)

in the ancient dialect

their

Singular.

M

W

1,

The first form of

the vocative is the crude base, e. g. ®es3! ®TR !

ingular

FIRITRBNG! INGI! 1T !

R3er 31 ﬁ%aa%! :Jmﬁzsif)sﬁérz RS ST et !

130

BoomPRA! B2y 1 SPHIY! IR ! d'ﬁio! 38pe3 B! FRNS!

j

WY

This form is called short emphatical speech (hrasvakaku).

W9, !

2,

In its second form the vowel of the base is lengthened, e. g. @ead!

90, !

23&“@;%)! PIRIBROWI! FoVIT3L! WPTIT

(S

80

This form is called long emphatical speech (dirghakaku). A pluta form

of this vocative is e. g. Td=»¢ (§§ 20. 215, 6, letter k).

S}

Wy

3,

In its third form the vocative particle o is suffixed either immediately

U,

to bases with a final consonant, or by the help of a euphonic letter to bases

sclined

ending in a vowel, e. g. SV ¥ (of 3L %) ! WARLS (of YweIVF)! 39T (of S9T)!

dizeval

SR3 (of SNJ) ! FERI (of FER) ! TRII (of TRY) ! 235@3 (of 235@)1 SMART M

(of RDWITOV) 1 RS (of BeS)! @ORS (of @TR)! BRI (of BB ! 3200

) 6§

(of 3300)! TRA (of THRY)! VPRI (of BPIZY)! IFF (of I ! [oDF

(of [oRY) !

39:3803) (of 39:T) !

awsfoie:?oﬁo

(of 2eTIT S)!

BORAWBIVF03

onding

(of BoR03TR) !

c\.)vg‘ !‘: y

The euphonic augments, as will be observed, are ©°, 3%,

33367 S8

4,

in the

In its fourth form, instead of the > and in the same manner, the vocative

particle & is attached, e.g. efumﬁeﬂez IS¢ ! éﬁ%eﬁez So0Re ! WeIRe! TRAL!

gen,

FR0[e ! FReNSoDe! AewFIT Sodae ! BoRodsatodoe !

Jival

Plural.

a“ﬂ/

1

The first form simply is the nominative plural, e. g. ¥vMd,0Ne* ! 1T

nes 1 ¥eIof !

2,

In its second form the vocative particle ¢ is added to the nominative,

i the

e.g. SVAYLT! 93 Sones! ;ie%cdz 808! 20508 keS0T ! BencddT! WIRFFT!

ehg,

BeITFET! BedodTFEYS! 0INYS! BANYS! INIR 03! W3 ROT!

] m]\

3,

In its third form the vocative particle e is added to the nominative,

e. g. WeS001 BeN0d0TI! WeIFFYT!

1i1

82

4,

In its fourth form the vocative particle o is added to the nominative,

121,051

e g zjééjé! Re3B! BeSTEd! Mdond! INTQ B!

125, 0,0

5,

In its fifth form the vocative particle « is added to the nominative,

¢ suffixe

e. g. We3Be! BeSTrSe!

D, ¢; 117

o

fs

b)

in the medieval dialect

fo 9 1

Singular.

130, ¢;

L

ReS! O ©I! @i! 2030331 ! 2FT! ?f)éos' 3oA! B! FTION!

122, a);

0! éi@! ;333:«3’9;‘53! 53! WBong! STY!

by the in

=

@eo! TIW! T SHI! V! B!

Insr,

3,

303! BNZM[! FoVBVUTR! T0NIO3! T33! mo%ﬁ!

Il

b

4,

@3 odoe! TI Ie! 23803)3e! 330d_e! noBISe!

13

), (

1]}

Plural.

4, 0

3

S0M93! VI NYS! BT oReT! TANIT! ®)33$03!

128, ¢, ¢

@Zﬁ&&ﬁ@@a! RRIINYOI! méﬁééds@)ca! [IBTO0I!

®eT!

QeI!

genitive

or by %0

§4)

we3de!

ROBINNBe!

(4,]}; 12

¢)

in the modern dialect

its geniti

Singular.

The ¢

VI JoFow! FYI! PRRE! 13!

©D! @Dy IR domd! AMAP! JoNt! TIPH! FJL! rodse!

Dat

g

23! AIer3 P! BoBRI! NEI! B30301: = B! ;geofio! o33!

R

128, g, |

B!

BnSe!

Sonee!

SonJe!

BIBINIE!

ndiﬁ’e!‘ 90 Q03)¢!

,396030@!

4,

euphonic

OBV e

¥ which

Plural.

euphonie

3e3Td!

o master'

by a eu

;’omﬁ@rﬁ@ca! mﬁée?ca!

6 137,

RVIBINT!

COBRITNY !

b 19

é

SoonBe!

TOBIN et

T90303¢! BOBINBeE!

3 121

141, Here follows an enumeration of the terminations and augments

N

of the seven cases.

Pft‘csd'e

’d

1

Singular.

I

Prece

Nom. 1, the crude base (§§ 109,D, ¢; 117, b,¢; 120; 121; 122; 1233

143,

2, o or the sonnd (§§

125 1261290 488 129 1308 F87:b, 3 13Y) ;

4 Vilggy

109. 117);

3, a euphonic @ added to the sonnd, in which case it appears as

<),

)

¥

o or & (§§109,0,¢; 117, b, o)

4, a euphonic ®v added, by means of an

enunciative 033 or ¥°, to the vowels %, 8, ¥V, 4w, (K, %0, &, ¥) and 2 (§§ 128,

That

by ex 429,60, c; 180:0,:0).

Ace. 1, the erude base with or without a vowel (§§ 109, ¢; 120

9

LRl

2

b,es

di‘ﬁl(%(}t it

1)

8, 0i.a;

&: pec

122, b, c;

125,

)

1265 127128, ¢; 129,¢; 130,.0);

.9

260

1

7,

b, e);

by 0

121, b, ¢; 122); 3, @ preceded by a euphonic & (§§ 109, D, L}

g §

or 0% (§ 130, b,¢), or & (§§ 109, b,c; 128, b, 0);

4, Bo 8§

{;;

0,a,b

W Dy

e

—

83

=

ninaive,

01,0 1220, b);

9,

©o preceded by a euphonic (§§ 109, a, b; 117, @, b;

125, a, b), or.o3° (§ 130, @, ), or =° (§§ 128, a, b; 129, a,b); 6, a euphonic

linative,

v suffixed to ©0, the sonud of ¥o becoming & or 37, (3. e. ¥, &Y, §§ 109,

g0 117 121165 122,05 125, ¢; 128,05 189,65 180, 0,00 7. 2 added

fo 0, its sonné becoming ° or I, (¢. e. V3, ¥, §§ 109, b; 117, ¢; 122, ¢;

£50, ¢

8, @ (§§109,¢; 121, ¢; 122, O3

9, ¥o (§§ 120, a;

! !

k80 0} 3

122, a);

10, the euphonic @V of No. 6 added to o and suffixed to the base

by the insertion of the augment @&° (4. e. ©®3), a quite vulgar form, § 122, ¢).

B 1 9 (§.109,.°0, o

2, 2188 109, @ 130, a);

3, @0 (§§ 109,

29

-l.d,

@, 0120, @

128, a,.05 129, @

B 117, a, b; 120, q, Bt b he ol

50, a,0: 137, a);

4, 9o extended in length either by the final augments

8, Bo, B, B (4. e. A, ete., §§ 109; 117; 120, @, b; 121,65 1225 127, 0y

128, @, ¢; 129, a; 130; 137), or by B3, 930, 9%, by means of a8, the

genitive of 90 or A% (i. e. BT, ete., §§ 121, b, e 122 127, 6,0 128000

%

or by 0 through %, the genitive of 40 (i. ¢. A0, §§ 12

gy

@ b; 127, 5: A g

a, b; 129, a); 5, @0, 93, @30, 98 preceded by the augment ¥ through

its genitive ©¥® (i. e. ¥&0, ete., §§ 122 5 125).

The terminations and their augments presuppose the genitive.

Dat

1, ¥ (§§109; 120; 121, a; 123, ¢; 125);

2, R (§§117; 120;

198, a0, 05 129, a; 130);

3, %, (§§ 109; 123, ¢);

4, ® preceded by a

A

!

5, 1 preceded by a euphonic

4

euphonic sénné (i.e. o8, § 117, @, b; cf. § 137);

S which is to represent the somnd (i.e. S0, § 117, ¢);

6, § preceded by a

euphonic ® which is to represent the sonné (i. e. a8, § 117, ¢);

7, ® preceded

by a euphonic @ (i. e. %, §§ 121, b, ¢; 122,b,¢; 127,b,¢; 128, b, ¢; 129,

6> 137, 0

8, ® preceded by a euphonic 9o (i. e. B8, §§ 121, a, b; 122, a;

o 127 0,0, 128,a0; 129, g);

9, © preceded by a euphonic @ (i.e. BT,

§§ 121, b, ¢; 122, b);

10, %, preceded by a euphonic @ (. e. 9%, §§ 121, ¢,

22, 0);

11, ¥ preceded by a euphonic @0 (i.e. 0%, § 122, b);

12, ®

onts

preceded by the euphonic augment & (i. e. ¢, §§ 122, a, b; 125, a);

13,

R preceded by the euphonic augment ©®° (i.e. ©8, §§ 122, a; 128, a),

123;

14, % or ¥, preceded by the euphonic augment ©® (i, e, ¥0F, ¥®F, which is

e

NN

\\

a vulgar form, § 123, ¢);

15, ©%, i.e. a mutilated form of &% (§§ 122, 0, ¢;

885, 0, ¢) ;

16, ©%, i, e. a mutilated form of @«3 (§§ 122, 0, ¢; 125).

eats 89

g o1 4D

Remark.

That the letter ®° is another form of ®° becomes a fact when the Tulu

§128

dialect is compared (see Kannada Dictionary p. XVI, note 1, sub 7); further,

HM

®° appears as ® in Tulu (see the same note, sub 5), and #° as 3° in Télugu

(e. g. Télugu ¥, T3y =Kannada T, T, T, the eye; cf. also § 222).

, B¢

) 6)

Hence it may be concluded that the letters ®°, ©°, ®° and S° are closely related

in Dravida and change places in the dialect.

The augments @ and &° of the

11%

[OS——

84

PRET—

The te

genitive (§§ 109; 117), 035° of the genitive (§ 130; e¢f. 243, B, remark), &°

and ® of the dative and genitive, and to some extent the sonné o (&) are,

Nom,

therefore, ultimately the same euphonie letters (¢f. @°, &% and ®° in § 176; see

The vowel @ sounded before &° and ®° (i, e, ©-&°, ©-&°)

ase this 1

also the @d in § 265).

apparently is a help to enunciation.

lengthene

131,6; 1

lengthene

Abl

1, the terminations of the instrumental except =;

2, %0, B, B0,

augment

93 preceded by the augment ©%° through its genitive ¥® (i e. wedo, ete.,

1% with

8§ 122, a; 123);

3, a8 preceded by the augment ©® through its genitive ®&0a

with the a

(i.e. WOOQR, § 123, ¢);

4, 9o, B3, 30, AP, A3 preceded by ¥, the

genitive of ¥3 (§ 128, i. e. ¥8 030, ete., §§ 109, a, b; 117, a; 120, a; 123,

by a e

12, 1%

a);

5, o preceded by ¥e, the genitive of the augment ©®°, and ©®38 (i e.

13, ioe

wegso, ete., §§ 122, a; 125, a);

6, @0, a3, B3 preceded by B3, the

14, €0

genitive of A%, and ®8® (4. ¢. 93 Vo, ete., § 122, a).

o (e,

The terminations and their augments presuppose the genitive.

the addit

Gen. 1,-9 (§§120,a,b; 121,b,¢; 122; 126,¢; 137);

2, ®@ preceded

by ‘the :

by the euphonic augment &° (l.e. @, §109);

3, © preceded by the euphonic

lengthen

4, © preceded by the euphonic augment

augment 3° (i.e. 3, §§109. 117);

ol by th

AT (i e BS, §§ 121. 122. 127);

5

® preceded by the euphonic augment

the add

OB (1. e. V9, §§ 122, 123);

6, © preceded by the euphonic augment ©%°,

addition

this being another form of ©®° (i. e. ¥¥, §§ 122, ¢; 123, b);

7, © preceded

B00?, § §

by the euphonic augment 90T (i, e. ©6%, which is a vulgar form, § 123, ¢);

Nos, 29;

9, ©

8, © preceded by the euphonic augment ®&° (i, . ©®, §§ 122. 125);

0 184,

preceded by the euphonic augment 033° (i.e. 03, § 130);

10, @ preceded by

niné

AP P A 5

%0 lon

the euphonic augment &° (. e. 3, §§ 128; 129, a);

11, @83 (9 + 9, i e

125 5%

lengthen

No. 4) preceded by the euphonic augment &° (7. e. I8, §§ 128. 129);

by a ey

preceded by the euphonic ©33° and forming with the final @ and « of the base

(1. e, of

a long syllable (i.e. & or ®, §130,0);

13, ¢ preceded by the euphonic

augments ®°, 3%, 033° and & (i. e. W, ®, Bwand F, §§ 109, a, ¢; 117, a, ¢;

éUphonie

aldition

128, a; 130, a, ¢);

14, © (88 120, a; 122,0).

(1. e, 3

Loc. 1, @v®° (§§ 109, a; 120, a;

122

A-i—i,

a; 130, a);

D)

e

, w9 (§§ 109, a,

3132, ¢

b 117, a,b;

120, 0. b:

1219

§22. 0, 0;

186 0, b

127, a; 128; 0,08

36, aof

129, @ 18000, 057180, a, D) ;

3,090 (8§ 109.a, b; 117, b5 120,96 128

[eced

a, b; 125, b; 128, b; 130, a, b; 137, b);

4, 298 (§§109; 117, ¢; 120,05

EUphop

124, ¢:

122, a, ¢;

425, 0. ¢

1285:0;: 130: (187, b);

5, ®o* (§§ 109, a;

120, a; 130, a);

B, /2920 (§§.109,¢,05 120,90, b; 130, a,h);

\ PO

§

b

19

h

109 110 A20::121,0,c; 122 428,02 128, b,.¢; 126, 125 @b 1 TE

£, s

180: 13875:C);

8, ©® (§§ 109, b, ¢; 117;¢; 120, by 121, ¢; 122, by 125, b;

Aeg

128,105 180,:5,.¢;:1387,.6);

9, a0 (§§ 120, b; 121, ¢; 122, 0);

10, 9 (§§

a,{,; 1

121,85 71380,0);

11, 3 (§109);

12, the crude base (§§ 126. 127).

g

o

pE—

85

atk), &

The terminations are suffixed to the genitive with and without its augments.

Y are,

2. Plural.

65 se

Nom. 1, o (=%, § 137, a);

2, a euphonic ¥V added to the sonné, in which

f 6.5)

/

case this is changed into &° (i.e. ¥, § 137; cf. § 136);

3, D (@ e. No, 2)

lengthened by the addition of T%0 (7, e. T, § 136, ¢);

4, T (§§ 119, a;

131, a; 134, a);

5, 59 with a euphonic @V (i. e. T9, §119, 0, ¢);

6, T

0

%

lengthened by the addition of ©%% (i, e. TSN, § 119, b);

7, ¥%° with the

)

4

e OA

augment 90 (7. e. T90, § 119, ¢);

8, ne° (§§118,a,b; 131, a,b);

9,

0, etc.,

e OO

n¥° with a euphonic @V (i.e. 1¥, §§118,8,¢; 119,b,¢; 131);

10, ngs

with the augment 0% (¢, e, 190°, §§ 118, b;

132, a, b);

11, 1% preceded

3, the

15 123,

by a euphonic sdnné (i. e. OR¥F,

§§118, a, b;

119, a, b;

13%, a);

9 (e

12, 1% preceded by a euphonic sénnd (i.e. on%, §§ 118, @, b; 119, b);

13, 190° preceded by a euphonic sonnd (i. e. oT¥0% §§ 118, a; 119, a, b);

93, the

14, ©0° (§§ 119, a, b; 132, a, b; 134, a, b);

15, ¥0° with a euphonic

0 (¢ e.

182, b, ¢; 1384, 0,¢); 16, ©0° lengthened by

the addition of T¥° (i, e. ©TF9%, §§ 119, a; 132, a);

17, ©0° lengthened

raceded

by the addition of T9° (. e. ®FF90%, §§ 119, a; 132, a);

18, " oy

>uph0nic

lengthened by the addition of ©%° (7, e. ®¥TF9%, § 119, a);

19, @30 lengthen-

wgment

ed by the addition of 1% (i, e. ©3OR%S, § 119, b);

20, ©0> lengthened by

mgment

the addition of T (7. e. WOINY, § 119, b);

21, ©3 lengthened by the

ot 6%,

addition of NM9T° (7. e. WIINYTE, § 119, b);

22, ©®0° lengthened by BT° (i. e.

receded

F Y 58 119, 0; 132, 0);

28, 900 (88 119 a3 1382, 0. 0);

24, A (see

123, 0

Nos. 29. 30);

25, 90° preceded by a euphonic @° (1. e. 0%, §§ 119, 03 132,

Bt

a; 134, a);

26, a°° preceded by a euphonic o%° (7. e. 0®T°, § 119, a);

21,

oded by

oR0® lengthened by the addition of @ (i. e. 0®0D°, § 119, a);

28, oR0o°

806

lengthened by the addition of T¥° (i. e. 0QNF®®, § 119, a);

29, 0 preceded

12, ¢

by a euphonic @ (i.e. 3, § 119, b);

30, 90 preceded by a euphonic ow®

he hase

B o0, 8§ 119, b, ¢; 182, ¢);

31, @3 (i. e. No. 15) preceded by a

upbonic

euphonic o%° (i. e. 0T, § 119, ¢);

32, & (. e. No. 25) lengthened by the

7,d70;

addition of T9° (i. e. BFFYS, § 132, a);

33, @C° preceded by the euphonic &°

34, J0° lengthened by the addition of @°° (i. e. 20T,

(2. e. d°°, § 132, a);

§ 132, a);

35, 20° lengthened by the addition of F%° (i. e. JFF¥, § 132, a);

109 by

0,

36, ¥0° lengthened by the addition of T%® (. e. JNFP®, 132, a);

s o

preceded by a euphonic 2° (i. e. WT°, § 119, a);

38, ©¥T° preceded by a

122

euphonic 0%° (i. e. 0T, § 119, a);

39, ¥T° preceded by a euphonic =° (.. e.

1207])’

09, 6

S0%, §119, a);

40, @8 (i, e. No. 15) preceded by a euphonic %° (i. e, W0,

N

B 19, b, 0);

41, @8 preceded by a euphonic 0%° (. e. oW, § 119, b);

D)

Ny

1285

42, ©0 preceded by a euphonic &° (i. e. S0, § 119, ¢);

43, ©o° (§ 132, b).

120¢b’

Ace. 1, © (§§ 118, b, ¢; 119, b, ¢; 131, b,¢c; 135,0);

2, ®@o (§§ 118,

N

B 119.a,b; 1381,0,¢5 135, ¢);

3, a euphonic @V attached to ©o, the

bb)

sonnd becoming I or T (i, e. VI, ¥, §§ 118, b,g; £19, @.0: 131, 0,:¢;

e

P

36

a) 18

135, ¢);

4, © added to ©o, the sonné becoming &%, (i. e. @3, § 119, ¢; 135, ¢);

or neuter

5, & (§ 119, o).

ancient dia

Regarding the augments see the nominative.

are formed

fnstr. L, 9{s131,0);

2, B0 (88'118,a, b; 119, a; 181, a, b} 132,05

euphonic

137, a);

3, 9o lengthened by the final augments &, Bo, B, & (i. e. B, ete.,

e, 8

§§ 118; 119; 131,0,¢; 137, b, 0);

4, 30 preceded by the augment ©&°

their phure

(¢, e. ©0, § 136, a).

b) e

Dat @ D68 1180, 0: 10830, b: 131,90, 0 152-a; 1856, 4l

2,

R

one 1.

(§§ 119, a; 132, a);

3, § preceded by a euphonic sonng (i. e. of%, § 137);

4, R preceded by a euphonic @ (i. e. @8, §§ 118; 119; 131,0,¢; 1385, b, ¢;

always (v

medizval

136, ¢);

5, % preceded by a euphonic @0 (i.e. @R, §§ 119,0; 135, 0);

T, W

6, © preceded by a euphonic @ (i. e. @08, § 131, a);

7, ® preceded by a

euphonic & (1. e. ¥R, § 119, ¢);

g8 8 1Y d);

9, ¥ preceded by the

Hod, &

also &),

euphonic augment ¥&° (5, ¢, ¥, § 136, a);

10, ©%, a mutilated form of

R, G

@eﬂf& (§ 136, b, 0);

11, ©%¥, a mutilated form of ®e2 (§ 1886, b, ).

x‘?aéi cAl

Abl. 1, B0, @30, 43 preceded by the genitive of ¥3, (i. e. ¥, ete.,

§§118 a; 119, a);

2, the terminations of the instrumental.

r

pA

Gen. 1, © (§§ 118; 119 131; 132, a, b; 1353 136, ¢);

2, © preceded

0)

by the euphonic augment ®&° (i. e. ®®, § 136, a, b);

3, ¥ (§§119, a,c;

m:és,ls

g

il o).

plural 1

lige. | e (BeRl8, o By 109 a, b 131, a4, b 138 uis

2. W%

h

€108, 0, b; 119, b; 132, B 137, b);

3, BIN(§ 118, 0, c: 1100 ¥4

8l 0 0:

156, ¢);

4, 99 (§§ 118;

119;

181; 8, ¢

136, ¢);

9,

(S

&0,

plural §

118 6.0 481, C: 137, 0);

6, %9 and ¥9 preceded by the augment

b

Ver (i, e. VPR and ¥w9, § 136, a, ).

%,

142. Looking back on the declension of bases (§§ 109. 117-137. 139)

W

T

one observes twelve more or less distinet modes of declension.

WL

j

1

The first mode comprises neuter bases with final ©, e. g. NG, FG, 3,

T

?’3%’ TRB, Tu¥, IHV.

Their singular appears in § 109, their plural in § 118.

tv:i

9

2,

The second comprises masculine and feminine bases ending in ©, e. g.

8,

9

"6

28, TIAT, P, BT, ¥R ; INAB, BRIT ; O, |, WS, 8, &3, YW, ¥,

)

03393 @?ﬁ, @;Soé, SER

Their singular is given in § 117, their plurals appear in

y

§8 119. 185.

Yo, ¢4

3,

The third comprises neuter and feminine bases ending in consonants

1

(and one that is used either as masculine or neuter in the ancient dialect, vez.

&9%), e. g, TH, TOF, VO, JNGE, WTE, TIOS, FOS, TRHT: SH0NF, JH°; ©IYS,

Prong

YITE, TP, WWFYE, WIFF, PIPS, JwP’, FOaHYE WPPT; &S

Their

IO

singular is given in § 120, their plurals appear in §§ 131. 134.

Regardingﬂ

IS, SHNe see § 121.

ang |

;

4,

The fourth comprises two kinds of bases

WY

—

87

——

135, 6)

/1

)

@) neuter and feminine bases (and one fhat is either masculine, feminine,

or neuter in the modern dialect, viz. ¥%d) which, occasionally also in the

ancient dialect, optionally in the medieval one, and always in the modern one

3

are formed from bases with finkl consonants (see No. 3) by the addition of a

i

[

euphonic @, e. g. 03%3%,), %‘z‘aﬁg@, Ty, T, WD), T, FRTPY, 01y ; WIYY,

i

ol

v

BIPY, BIVITP), WIFPY, ?”?'23%; BNGy; .

Their singular appears in § 121

their plurals are given in §§ 131. 134.

ch

b)

neuter bases (and two masculine ones wiz. MRV, 1), one feminine

-li

3)

one viz. ®on&), and two masculine-feminine-neuter ones viz. WBRY, TWRY)

¢

always (with option only in two numerals) ending in a euphonic %V in the ancient,

medieval and modern dialect, e. g. 90, 23, e, P, VRS, 37y, Bom,

5, 0)

T, IB, Fe@, WENY; ®R), R, W), [, HV B, BIHR), WITRY; W

9.3,

)

by a

7 the

B9 30, BAR, WA, TFOR, TWR); w3, DTBE), FINW), TVY, VBN, B, VN, (or

m of

also 06°), 280, BB, 30 (or also IRE); VB, QD) VRSB, VRBY, YR, HKAY,

DR, :

DRV, BIY, AR,

e)j’

WY, 2Py, Beeny, é’od%, 2Ry, [N, FEMY, By,

ee,

ﬁoé_;ﬁ.

Their singular is given in § 122 (¢f. 124), their plurals appear in

§§ 131. 136.

5,

The fifth comprises

eded

@) masculine, feminine, and neuter bases ending in a radical @V, e. g. ¥,

1, C;

PURY, T, &), IR, NI, I, JI).

Their singular appears in § 128, their

W9

plural in § 131.

b) masculine, feminine, and neuter bases ending in ¥w, 9, %W, % and &,

b

e. g. B, DO, I, SR, %K., Rwe, M.

Their singular appears in § 129, their

9

Y

plural in § 131.

B

6,

The sixth comprises masculine, feminine and neuter bases ending in 8,

&, o, e.g. T, 3:, 3oh, T, 99, TeW; ag 83, @3, w3, 9, T, KT,

J)

T, I, U

Their singular is given in § 130, their plurals appear in

$§ 181. 132,

o,

7

The seventh comprises eight neater bases of direction with final ©, e. g,

=

@?n’ (\a%’ o

T.

Their declension is given in § 123.

J

8,

The eighth comprises the bases of the seventh mode when the suffix

o

BO® or YO is attached, e. g. V8 O, WS, SIRBLE, [IRB.

See § 126.

i

9,

The ninth comprises four bases expressing time that end in the ¥V of

See § 127.

No. 4, letter 0, viz. ©F), 9D, Y, VI

10,

The tenth is formed by the pronoun o (J3°), HI0.

See § 125.

s

i1

The eleventh is formed by the singular and plural of the personal

pronouns and of the reflexive pronoun, viz. &0, o, dto, 390, EFI, TFI, AR,

3.

See § 137.

12,

The twelfth mode comprises a number of terms that express direction

and time, viz. SR, TQ, 08, ¥ Y, WY, ¥B, &3, WP, Y, I3, ¥n, BN,

B0F,, (S08).

See § 139.

—

88

——

,()du&k al

V. On verbs (sce §§ 313—315)

03 % O

143

In chapter III (§ 45 seq.) verbal roots or themes (dhatu) have

If oeca

We have seen that Késava calls the crude

0 Iﬁwwd\)ﬁ

been already treated of

form (prakritisvartipa, dhatusvartipa) of any verb its root, whether it be

meant that

the primary element (primitive theme) or a secondary theme

The ¢o

He gives the rule (siitra 216) that the crude form or theme is found

48

by dropping the pronominal termination (vibhakti)

o of the negative

to isting

(see § 209, text and note 2)

This rule, however, is (to say the least)

such a d

insufficient, as it does not enable a student to make a distinction

sfitra aho

between themes ending in ey (which alone are contained in Késava’s

he term

instances, (as TWRY, IAReB), 3¢wy) and themes ending in consonants

(a8 OF° Ro3F, BROXE, 39%°, 25aCY¥, Apewf), and as it does not take

Abog

notice of the doubling of final consonants in the negative (§ 215, 7, f),

(sutra 44

and intr;

of the euphonic o3¢ of themes ending in & and o (§§ 170. 209), and

of themes that lengthen their vowel (§ 209), thus presupposing the

Voices

grammarian’s list of dhatus (§ 47)

Nagavary

144. Ancient Kannada grammarians call a verb 303y or SRR

Which g

its action, or the general idea expressed by any

erb, they term

Writers, g

& o3y too

149

Kannada

They do not distinguish between mocd (mode) and tense

15 chuga]

has so to say only one mood, the indicative, for which, however, it uses

a(ldmg

no particular word. Cf. § 314

\5:3) (N

Tense they call To©

A conjugated verb, ¢. e. one ending in a personal termination, is called 3%

tause (g

peak (i

5833, 333 or 3,033983 (§§ 69. 189. 192)

o=

he hg (

145

The name of the present tense is Z3FrTsexg or gPs3ss, or

e

L0

500 or DEFs

8_ 9

PRFOY, O ISFS Fow, or 830, 3; that of the past tense

Perwn)

is 2303, or PRIBTow, Or PRIHS, Or [P Tow; that of the future tense

(meSn

BRI, ©, Or

WHT TO®, Or 2598

The

18 PON.3¢, or H“@S@

0 cange

comprehensive term for the three times or tenses 18 Fa®3

0 appea

146

The action of the imperative, or the imperative, is called 28

The b

009, Or DO, or SRGF

The negative form of the verb, or the negative,

1s termed

95

N

@o&@d

S(]ﬂ]e hHh

0r »

147

A person of the verb is called PO

The name of the first

97

person (4. e. the third person in European grammars) is & @30 or 8,870

ik e

)com, or also Vg ©R.5309N; that of the second is 5 0530 or ’Socﬁgwo

mﬂl\e, and

\Wm}'\x)

e

—

89

PHTBox; and that of the third (i.e. the first in European grammars) is

g 3 or eud FoPYdoR. Cf. § 192.

1) have

If occasionally the term 0% is added to JFD), JF and LI B, or to

o crnde

B, PSYOOR, SOFHOYDE and WS SOYTOR, it is to say that no other persons are

er 1t he

meant than those who regulate the action of a verb in grammar.

The comprehensive term for the three persons is PTIRE 03v,

s found

148

The grammarians Nigavarma and KéSava do not use a word

egative

to distinguish a transitive from an intransitive verb; they mentally saw

6 least)

/

tinction

such a distinction themselves, and expected others to do the same.

The

65ara's

stitra about the so-called passive voice in the Sabdamar}idarpana wherein

sonants

the term Z¥zor®, transitive, occurs, is an interpolation (eﬁéoi;&@%}.

of take

About 400 years afterwards Bhattakalanka in his SabdanuSasana

5) 71/)?

(sitra 443) introduced by name transitive verbal themes, R¥=or3codh,

9), and

and intransitive verbal themes, eﬁ%aﬁo.f%’cpaéo.

ng the

Voices, i.e. active and passive (see § 315), are not mentioned by

Nagavarma and Késava, and the terms parasmaipada and atmanépada

which have been introduced from Samskrita into Kannada by modern

Tt

y term

writers, are not used by them.

149. Causation is called ®¢3y. A verb that expresses causation or

aunadd

is causal (%e30%), is formed from an intransitive or transitive one by

it uses

adding the particle @gy (or also, as we shall see in § 151, R, 239, AW,

VRY), e g. ISNRy, to cause (somebody) to laugh (from |SmY), w&xy, to

cause (somebody) to cook (from @), FoMoRy, to cause (a person) to

Jled 98

speak (from SaB), [RWRY, to cause (a person) to put (something) into

pom

the hair (from 30,8), RB®IRY, to cause (a person) to churn (from T3Q),

0F ww

SRy, to cause (a person) to give (from &), ey, to cause (a

)

sf tense

person) to grind (from 8¢), SPeRuRy, to cause (a person) to feel pain

ro tense

(from 3w¢), [oecdaxy, to cause (cattle) to eat grass (from 3300), ¥R,

) The

to cause (a flower) to Open\(f'rom BOT), %9635y, to cause (something)

to appear (from 5@@6),"

led 0

The agent (¢f. § 344) that causes another to do something or causes

eo‘ame

something to be done or happen, is called %eéﬁé‘@r, VT T, BOTIF,

or 2‘;)50{559)?‘.

SR

S

the first

Y It may be remarked tha.t”a. causative verb may also be formed by the verb =), to

[ Ndﬂ

make, and an infinitive ending in ® (§ 187, 2), e.g. BTTTY W& SWRY, make him read

(i= ‘2.9&)7\“0).

A0

o

12

R

90

pa—.

150. But if a verb is formed by means of »=o (etc., § 149) that 1s

3

used in the sense of doing that which the word expresses, the agent is

ancient,

k)

A

termed RWTFYF, BTG, Or 3 03083 . Such verbs may be intransitive

or transitive, e.g. g)éé g9, to look, to stare ; 53%& =y, to decrease in power;

9

(‘(;

89 =0, to become greater in bulk; o¢ =y, to move about, to float;

¢

zon

AV

23)D0Ry, to roam or wander about;— 263 %o,

to break, to crush; (or

exceptio

effecting a useful object, = c3REWRIRY) wg=, to draw (sketches,

it

figures, pictures); B8R, to affix a seal to (see § 151, remark); TpoNz,,

especiall

to extend, to widen; X Ry, to slacken (v.t.). Cf. §215, 1, 3.

means of

Remark.

303,

It is not allowed to form causative verbs from such verbs, e. g. to form

REohm)

263 23> from 283 B> would be wrong.

o,

151

The suffix w<> appears also as 2, @, ©e3y, and BFy; compare

Regay

some of the finals mentioned in § 65.

It is more than probable that

§§ 6051

the = in =%y and =3, and the e in @y are euphonic (¢f. the =

3, B

of §§ 63. 168).

it 18 atts

‘It has been supposed that R and 93 are the same as B, A, to

R, §

permit, ete.;

but that is wrong, as B, &> are formed from 3, to give, ete.,

to R

n the

by means of & which is another form of 8%; see letter 4, 3 in this paragraph

) 1

and § 316, 14.

1

We further state

fi

a)

that =0 is suffixed

TR) (IT

lefter (,

1, to verbal themes which originally are monosyllabic, and end in

T

consonants if they have not received a euphonic wu (see § 54), e. g-

60, uex

BDRY, BUEIRY, HRFY, HEPRY, TIWRY, ToOWAY, FEIR, TN, TRPAY,

:‘)5 n;

30Ry, 3JR0, 300RY, TNV, WPEORI, WORY, 23CP°AY, ﬂ@e‘%:ﬁo, JReOR,

v

%

)

A

7

=

\

RReOR.

See exceptions under letter b, 1, letter ¢, 1, and letter e.

E

9, to verbal themes that originally are dissyllabic and end in

consonants, but are made trisyllabic by the addition of a euphonic e,

i

ii

e. g. ONOR), BODRY, ©LIORY, UDDRY, TIPRY, TLIORY, IRUFAY,

:‘j‘)v d?:\j\

3RBORY,

A0,

Ines° =y

PR, WEIORY, RROR), ToMLIRY,

a‘:4alld(

BRIV,

To this class belong also the ancient 2wZ@DRY, ©WRLPRL

o

3NCRY, BPNCPRD.

See the common ancient forms under letter ¢, 2;

Aboys

and exceptions under letter d.

ab()ut i

¢

a1n

In o8R), 397, a8 and 29 (§ 150) no verbal or nominal theme

0

nowadays appears to which 8= is added.

208370, BY Ry, IZYOA), and similar

3

o

terms are derived from nouns by means of A=>.

i

) (op

91

that 1

3,

to themes that appear as dissyllables and trisyllables in the

et is

ancient, medieeval and modern dialect and end in ev, e. g. BNR, BB,

nsitive

202 A, WRAY, WRRY, FTIARY, %oééﬁo, TRRRI, TRAR, 8 R, B0 A,

DOWEL;

-r)('\%

OJCGC

han

xR

D3R, T[PRohA), TPEHR), HTITRY;

float

aaszé; R, BAHTR), SRERRY,

; (or

BWBRoNRY, gma&)g)m, ;?J;aegwg:so, WRITRY, [OVONFY, TVBIFRY, See an

exception under letter e.

efches,

4

oA,

b

to themes that are dissyllabic and end in « and o, to which,

especially in the ancient and medieval dialect, @z is attached by

means of a euphonic o3, e. 9. WFRRY (BPWRIRY), VPR, HEI3WAY,

TROWA, FORAY, SRR, BRFMIR), FREWRY (FBRIRY), FIRNR,

o form

REINRY (RESBRY), RPRMIBY ([PpERY), BFNRY (WSWRY), [0

oR0RY.

See exceptions under letter b, 2 and ¢, s.

mpare

Regarding the dropping of the final vowel of some themes cf. letter b, 2;

o that

§§ 60; 157; 165, letter a, 3. 4. 5; 165, b, 2; 172; 180, 5

the %

5

b

to monosyllabic themes that are a vowel or end in one, to which

it is attached by means of a euphonic o3¥, e.g. SRR, SRR, 3P

&), 10

DR, SPEMIRY, 3eMVRY, DIVOWRY, 30eRVRV.

The forms occur also

6, efe

in the modern dialect.

See exceptions under letter 0, s.

ragraph

b) that o is suffixed

1,

to themes that end in the consonants o3 and of, e.g. TRy,

¢f.

moxo (in the three dialects), %Jae)ro\) (only in the medieval one).

letter a, 1.

end 10

2,

to dissyllabic themes ending in % and », in the three dialects,

L)* el

e. . ¥BR, VIR (BFRY, BIR, WHRY), WCPR), VPR, evdRY (W3

SO,

5, BVBIRY), HUCPRY (PVEIRY, BuCIAY), D3Ry (2E9RY, DENRY), HEBRD

000R

FORY, DAY, 3BRY (IBRY), 89R0, PRy (90K, BoWARY), JoLIPRY,

/

3nAy (337, 3NR), 3RFR (BRER), IBRY (also in a Sasana of 1076

A.D., S8R, ARY), BB, BpRRY, VW1, VTR (VAY), BERo (V¥

0k

A

)

J

o, BERY), BoBAY (DB, SR (FEPRY), DO, BIR. See letter

a, 4 and ¢, 3.

R

$eIRy, BeIRy are derived from nouns by means of =

PR

About the dropping of the final vowel of some themes see letter a, 4,

tet 0y 5

about the change of « into « § 109, 5,3 (¢f. §66), and about that of

@ into ev §§ 165, a, 5; 247, d, 13, 14,

[}

I themé

9,

to monosyllabic themes that are a vowel or end in one, e. g.

J simile!

&y (or Ry, of @ §316, 145 ¢f. its past participle 230, FHeR,

12%

———

et

92

300X, 2eRy, LR, BDuexv.

The forms are common to the three

In the

dialects.

Cf. letter a, 5.

LodRy, ¢

letter d.

¢) that 3 is suffixed

1, to monosyllabic long themes ending in the consonant s, e.g.

152

3ERIF, FOWIF, RPOWIF.

Cf. letter a, 1.

intrangit

Themes

10 frequ

o) is derived from a noun with a long vowel by means of 3.

like D2oF, WBoF, 30008 are derived from nouns with short vowels which they

turoed 1

retain.

action 15

2, to dissyllabic themes ending in.the consonants ¢, ¢, ¥ and eS8,

theme,

in the ancient and medieeval dialect, e.g. e350230F, WOWIF, YVARBIF,

dvibpray

WBWIF, BYWIF, éd%i\;, 3RTBREIF, 'gsmzéor, RNWIF, TPLaEIr, DOWIF ;

Regardin

153

eﬁﬁe)ﬂ;, BLIVY, %Cﬁe);, weILy, RBWY ; mdae{i, %’dsﬁd_, ma, ;fgade;é;

but also

By, a”r‘iw{;, ;Somwé. Cf. letter a, 2 and letter d.

3, to dissyllabic themes ending in = and o, e g. ez, 09C°%,

]iliga), 6,

DEIW, TAWY, TP, TRTWREY, [IBA.

The forms appear more or less

50%3@&:

louns op

in the three dialects.

Cf. letter a, 4« and b, 2.

About the dropping of the final vowel of some themes see also letter a, 4

?»a%;cﬁ, i1

of pume

and b, 2.

Whep

d)

that occasionally %235 is suffixed to the themes mentioned under

called by

letter a, 2, e. 9. 00TuPIY, WEORY, FTLBY, 3393, in the medizval dialect,

grammay

€)

that occasionally esx> is suffixed to the themes mentioned under

The 4

letter @, 1 and s, e.g. IR, WTRY, HFK, in the modern dialect.

C0njugateg

Remarks.

of noung,

As will be seen from § 150 9% is also used to form verbs from Samskrita

134

nouns, e. g. @.)9:25;7-50, WA, FOR, R, VU, TPFAY, BT R, PRI, FINRY, TINR

been call

30028R), IR, IR, zfﬂ):)oﬁo, BRI, TR, WA, LonRo, .Such verbs ocecur

The

in the three dialects.

Cf. § 215, 1, letter .

Plrvaks)

Sometimes, in the ancient and mediwxval dialect, also a euphonic ©3° is used

Terhy] I

in suffixing the 4%, e. g. zﬁo«:éoao:do, SI0O0RY, ROFONR), TPTOWR, F9¢HB MNVIRY,

See § 36,

DERISAL MR TR ER d:)oo:)oﬁo,' NA0IA, BJWA, (LR Cf. § 215, 2,

letter c.

155

Occasionally, chiefly in the ancient and medizval dialect, the @ of @A) is

syllable {

dropped, and we get such forms as 33033, &3032); in &oAR the 1 is changed

(y adjan;

into 03, and %033 is produced.

Also in Kannada words that dropping takes

Withoy

p]ace’ so that TRTDOIR appears as %33’8505390 (or @&n@é#o), @Q‘)“O&)'f-ﬁ) as ﬁeﬁ)ﬂojog

(or 3¢ 4RY), STOWRY as SR (or 3¢3;R0), dé«zjot)-mo as déédosog, RBRFOWR as AR

saiq

R

F03)), DICOWA ag TIT?Y, T IR as BRY 03 (BAY,7), see § 217).

), b

s

$h . =

> three

In the medizeval dialect the euphonic 935° in 9%) changes also into =°, e. g.

LodR), BFFRR, VIR, TPEIRY, JeFAR), RRVIRY, TIVIR.

Cr. § 215, s,

letter a.

fy 8.4

- 102,

In § 148 it has been stated that verbs are transitive and

intransitive, and in § 149 that there are causal verbs too.

There are

Themes

no frequentative verbs in Kannada; no verbal theme (dhatu) can be

ch they

turned into a frequentative one.

But though frequentative or iterative

action is never contained in a particular shape of a Kannada verbal

AV W

nd

00§

Wy

theme, it is expressed either by simple repetition (yugalottarana,

WORF,

dvihprayoga) or triple repetition (triprayoga); see § 165, 211, and 339.

(WA

Regarding a sort of reflexive verh see § 341.

Sk

158. In Kannada not only verbal themes (dhatu) are conjugated,

but also declinable bases (linga, §§ 68. 90), that is to say nouns (nima-

linga), e. g. ircaaé, ©5°%3, compound bases (samésalinga), e. g. FDELI,

950 oQQJJ

]

or less

0D TOWIF RIS, 'v“@a*“séé, pronouns (sarvanama), e. g. 29, attributive

nouns or adjectives (gunavadana) whether Kannada or Samskrita, e. g.

tor (l, 4

w9, 008, e0d, VAW, O, N33, ;Se)%, and appellative nouns

of number (sankhyg), e.g. wsir.

See § 197.

When bases like the mentioned ones are conjugated they have been

] under

called, by Europeans, appellative verbs or conjugated appellatives. Kannada

dialect,

grammarians use no name for them.

| under

The author of the present grammar has not met with any instance of such a

b

conjugated base in the medieval dialect; in the modern dialect no conjugation

of nouns, ete. is in use.

154

There are two different forms of the Kannada verb that have

Mskrita

o

been called verbal participles or gerunds by Europeans.

bs oceu?

The first is the preterit or past verbal participle (bhitakalakriyé,

plirvakalakriyé, ptirvakriyé, §§ 155—171); the second is the present

15 used

verbal participle (vartamanakalakriyé, vartaméanakriyé, §§ 172. 173).

3&%560359‘

See § 361.

155

§215)‘1,

The first kind of the past participle is formed by suffixing the

syllable @3> to verbal themes (dhatu, prakriti) ending in consonants

! A 15

(vyanjananta), in the vowel = (ikAranta), and in the vowel o (ékaraﬁta)

changed

without altering the themes, e. g. SN (of F[peess), having admitted,

0g takes

;35@2@% (of 535995, having ceased, 9535% (of &g, the later Qﬁﬁ%{), having

3 é&()ﬂ Cj‘)gj

2 48 i

said, SLAY (of og*, the later %Y, ), having said, &8y (of &x¢, the later

939, having eaten, %Jaoﬁo% (of FR03¥, the later %@os\nﬁs), having cut,

—ne

94

JE—

ﬁoﬁoo (of Ro3s,

the later ﬁodoo

¢f. § 48), having tilled, 03 (of

The

-'-1.30356) having jumped, Hegor (of 2eof), having sucked, ﬂ@em? (of

partly ¢

modern

Nweof), having dropped, Aol having gained, ooy, having chewed,

iem having swung, -'.-5’6;13

having stolen,

ENLAY having become angry,

See § 1

187

%e%ﬁa having heard, m)ee;a B3y, WA, e.awocSaF WRBIFE, SPBRIF, P

zédo%‘

WBoToF, BNy, i:"-*e)a

ro&e)a

:«sm 9,

~TalWUAE

QBT (of 28),

and seco

BOBGEY, BIRR, SR, BEPDY, wOR, DAB, ¥R, BCPR; IBERY

he altere

modern

(of Nz%) PRy 230, B0, WeGY, WREABED. LS5

Regarding

N |

the etymological explanation and original meaning see § 169

Themes ending in ©s optionally double the z¢ of @, e. g. LedoF

(in a8

RREBIF, VNBIF, WRRIF, BRBRF, PBBIF (see § 371

of. § 119

\. D)

1 the n

a, 4)

The same formation of the past participle by means of z3o takes

16

place also when verbal themes consist of one consonant with a long

(Gf:§

vowel, e. g. a0 (of w9), Fecsy (of F¢), Fwery (of Fwe), 3030, 3RET

158

20T, 0T, PR

ﬁn& Yow

Remark

consonant

The grammarian KéSava states that the syllable @ consists of the vowel ¥V

[

w

Mg

(ukara) added to the augment (Agama) 3. About @ see §§ 175. 189

o) (

156

In the formation of the second kind of the past participle the

W

(:

only difference is that in several themes 35 is substituted for 0, e. ¢

o)

=

, QO ), WY, N

LU

AP

:-):‘z:

R0 (Of Qﬁa‘) TR, FP3F, T

(BAchy

9C

UpVVON

3FCN

¥ nu3ofF 23;5&30? Foe

@8ty (of wee?), T

|

(.

§

165

3o, 30330, OB, VO, WL 523y (of @&33) 229330, 0EB33y: %3

The j

(of %), e (of &¢), TP, wWody, WeB

e\Cept 9

A list of themes that form their past participle by means of 3 is

hich, ¢

given in sfitra 507 of the SabdanuSasana, viz. BZef, PR, W, TS

dlclent

P’

SO

pSIdON

0

IO

FROS

FRT,

NO

FRRTE,

3PS

159

NPT

g a M exd

W300°

eCo¢

VeI

(VY

PROLS

€529, P

FE9°

UOHSOnant

to which 1t

WO, TC, T, WE, w, BTRT®

e

AT, UFF, RRe, BI°

eal‘lv W]

adds 2,893, 693 in sfitra 508, Jos in sttra 509, and [ee¢ in slitra 510

i

remarking that one may use Sewo, or

eoy : under siitra 553 it has also

w3y

f

&3 (of &)

‘53@6)

In some instances the use of 3> and & is optional, e.g. Sewy

9

e 3

t

230 030¢

RB0Br: [, Swndds: et

0589232

303030

32330

Dl (

TERTE

Soe8330

WO, WO

IADIAN

WS

Oth

—

95

P

The use of suffixing @y or 3 to themes with & final consonant has

153% (of

VF (of

partly disappeared in the medieval dialect, and still more so in the

hewed,

modern one, on account of a euphonic ev being added to the themes.

gy,

See § 166.

OF, 2

157. The third kind of the past participle differs in so far from the first

and second one, as in themes ending in a vowel this vowel (. or 1) may

f aB),

gy

be altered or dropped before &> and 3.

In the ancient,

medieval and

garding

modern dialect the vowel > may be converted into the

vowel €, e.g.

DCITY (=633, AT (= BEF0), wBBY, WIRY,

TSR,

SBRY

(in a S4sana between 750 and 814 A. D.), S5z (in a

sasana of 929

o

)

?

%

A. D.), gpdn. (in a Sasana of 804 A. D.), B3¢5, BRFSR, B3T3, FRCIZ;

in the modern dialect the vowel 2 too may be changed into the vowel

) b

ake»

9, ¢. g. FRX (=TARY), RRBX, KTR, ABRY, ROVRY, RVITEY, TILID.

3 lon

(Gf. §8§ 60; 151, a, 4; 151, b, 2; 151, ¢, 8; 165, a, 8. 4. 5; 172; 180, 5.)

sﬁm

158, The fourth kind of the past participle is formed by eliding the

final vowel (.5 or ) of the theme, producing a theme ending in a half

consonant, and then suffixing o or o, e g. ¥3oF (=wCPI of ¥t¥),

vowel

NBF (=ovdB of ud), IR, (=HRD of 2F),

209 (=%BRY),

WY (=wRBY), TR, (=FAR), %odg (=39037), TRRY, (:%J@ﬂcﬁa),

mw me

DAY, (=RATB), Jpd) (=B, WA, (=WABY), FoRy, (FR),

m,6d

DY, (=N07Y), AT (=RBRY), AR, (=RAW), BE) (=BOR), TR,

R

(BA), BRI, (=BRAW), BRE) (=BRRR), VRRY, (=TBRAD).

N) 70

Cf. § 165, letter a, 7

3

b

The mentioned past participles occur only in the modern dialect

except 2pz3y which is found likewise in the medi@val one, and Dy3y,

of

Hi

which, according to the Sabdanusasana siitra 482, is met with in the

ancient one.

o, 3

§ d?Jﬂ

159

The fifth kind of the past participle is formed by eliding the final

s FIW

PN

consonant of themes before the termination 3o or 3.

This formation is

nearly wholly restricted to the modern dialect.

We have

hich it

1, the elision of &, e.g. ¥ (=), T3 O I (= 6853)1

fra 510

RRE3Y (=RPERY,), A3y (= AeRy,), for which there is the instance &

has 90

(of ®g*) in the ancient dialect (¢f. the &3y of & in § 156);

]

=3

, the elision of od¥ e.g. @ (= B0393),

8RR (= ;S:@oﬁo%),

'y

£

R (=908 5 ¢f Rerdy (=Rx);

)?

|

3, the elision of €%¢, e. g. T30 (of FEF);

s 9.6 s

0, th

4, the elision of ef e g. 2R (=BVAY), BRB (=THVY)

medieval

803y (=Rewy), ®IB (=AYY), AN (=A#ewy, used also in the

10,

mediceval dialect), Re3d (=RewY), BHEB) (= DREW,);

Nl W

W

5,

the elision of o of the ancient theme o905, 2. €. IV (=TIPRIF);

11

6, the elision of O¥ together with the preceding vowel = of the ancient

%@U{%‘J, |

theme F.9cf, 4.e. To%y, (=3v9RoF), a form usedin the mediseval dialect;

medieval

7, the elision of 0¥ of FRo, a theme formed from the ancient Fo9TF,

o, t

i. 6. TR (= TIPTOF).

medizval

160. The sixth kind of the past participle is formed by changing or

This

13 ¢

converting the final consonant into another one hefore &30 and So.

ancient

5

changing takes place in the ancient, medieval, and modern dialect.

06 3

¢

We find

16

1, the conversion of e3¢ into 0f before B, e.g. ATF (=0N),

only the

WOF (=0 in the ancient dialect, and ez (=9L3), DRIF

its fnitia]

(=) in the medieval one (¢f. § 236);

To th

2

)

the conversion of €3¢ into 3 before 3o, e. g. ¥3o, (= W), Y,

oy (&

(= 90C,), 3, (=3CI,) In the mediseval and modern dialect;

initial vo

3, the conversion of &% into I before 3 in o3y, (of Zood) of the

ancient and medieval dialect;

%, 11

4

33

“

%

\

4, the conversion of €3¢ (or €3¢ with the euphonic ev, i.e. €)

howevey,

into 3¢ before 3o, €. g. @03o, (= w03oF, of @B or ¥OE), I3, (of

162

0 CI¢ or @C’i@ﬁo), SR8y, 3T Y, X3, Py, WeRD, of the ancient

shorteniy

and medieeval dialect, and &=53, 03?559_9, 33,30, BeR,, B, BRI,

Mermings

of the medizval and modern dialect; 33, (of 2€95°=3t9)) occurs in

The |

the Jaimini Bharata; exceptions to this rule in the ancient dialect are e. g.

U, 2

9E3Y, WEIBY, BIIF, BRoF, LI, EF, d#&éw;

3

Modery

5, the conversion of e into @ before 35 in 23y, (=Jwy,) of the

i § 4

modern dialect;

163

6, the conversion of o the subsitute of €3¢ (see No. 1), into @*

Yortey;,

before %o, e. g. V) (= %03y, VTF), DT (=830, DEIF), WEY (=W,

the tel‘m:

z‘t)dor) in the medieval dialect, and 0363% (= 0363%, DTOF), 22)(53) (= z;‘)@i)g),

The

®GoF) in the modern one;

ing

NJ‘sfgb

7, the conversion of an original o° into @ before Zo in B

e, thy

(=®&eF) in the medizval and modern dialect;

8, the conversion of ef into ¢ before o in ﬁr,j% (-_-ﬁe)%) of the

The f(

medizeval and modern dialect, and in ;3353% (= a”g@%) of the modern one;

iy Ky

—————

i

P

vy

9, the conversion of ¢¢ into ¢ before o in *’d% (= %%3%) of the

n the

medieeval and modern dialect;

10, the conversion of of into ¢ before @y in 350% (of 3of, 80v)

and W (of 2o¢, 20Ty) of the ancient, medizval and modern dialect;

90F);

ancient

11, the conversion of ¢ into ¢ before Zy in ﬁ'v@ég (of 3pe°

dialect;

FRw), QT (of QoF, do2), and o) (of B, Ko of the ancient,

WY

o]

medizeval and modern dialect;

12, the conversion of ef into @€ before g5 in ARy, (=Qwy,) of the

medieval and modern dialect;

nging of

13, the conversion of the ¢$ of oy, a mutilated form of the

y, This

dialect

ancient 3o9g¢ (see § 159, No. 6), into @° before 2, in TORY, (=T

2. e. %ge?mr) of the modern dialect.

161

The seventh kind of the past participle is formed by changing not

)

N3

only the final consonant of the theme before the termination 8o, but also

its initial vowel.

)

To this kind belong only the three themes 2695 (3C), NEF (NE),

)

8% (&%) of the ancient and medizval dialect, which convert their

initial vowel o into o and their ¢3¢ into 3%, so that their participles are

) of the

B3y, N9, 33, (see § 66).

83y, occurs likewise in the modern dialect wherein its theme,

e B)

however, appears as 3¢9, which is found also in the medieeval one.

94) (0{

162. The eighth kind of the past participle is formed by changing, ¢. e.

ancient

shortening, the vowel of the theme and inserting a euphonic ¢ before the

o)

\termination 0.

oours 18

The themes which do so, are 3¢, Dso, Rwe; their participles are

aree.J

23;5%, :;)\)ﬁ%, SPQ0 1n the ancient and medieval dialect, and also in the

modern one, though their themes herein are @3¢a3o, Dsecsey and FJwewdwn

) of e

(see § 48).

163. The ninth kind of the past participle is formed by changing, ¢. e.

it @

009

shortening, the vowel of the theme and inserting a euphonic ¢ before

wJJJ,

the termination 3o,

cb j‘))

The themes are & and =9 (Fo03), and their participles are 0.3,

(s

and X3y, in the ancient and medieval dialect, and also in the modern

one, though the themes herein appear as g3 and zacdoo.

i ”355%

Remark.

of the

The form of @ is in sttras 477. 566 of the Sabdé‘mu%&sana; it is not given

ieﬂ] 0ne;

in the Karnatakabhishabhtshana which adduces only the past participle 833 ;—

13

—

98

——

The ¢

the Sabdamanidarpana under sitra 48 clearly gives the form of #9033°; under

sfitra 240 it has @R, which may be either ®3033° & or ®> &; it has neither

medizval

@3033° nor A in its dhatupatha.

The present-future participle generally is

# ﬁ%, 3

a3, instead of @03, in the ancient and medieval dialect (§ 180, 1, remark).

§

v

o

2!

chanéing

164. From § 155 up to § 163 the syllables o and 3o underwent

past part

no changes when they were used as suffixes for the past participle; in

In it

the present paragraph instances of the tenth kind of the past participle

remaing ¥

will be adduced, that is to say instances of the participle in the formation

9

Y

P

of which the suffixes 30 and 3> are changed. Namely

comeé )

1, o is converted into 3 after the theme ervsss (mi’as%), the past

10,

participle of which is YVER in the ancient, medieeval and modern dialect;

m%) and

2

o)

Zo is converted into o after the theme zose (To), 1ts vowel

forms o

being shortened, so that its past participle is %9@% in the ancient,

In the

medieval and modern dialect;

remain ¢

3, T is couverted into @) after the theme Fne* (%J@%ﬁ@), the final

11

¢¢ being changed into ¢, and %Jase% becomes the participle for the

three dialects;

an, éab

modery ¢

4,

30 is converted into &3 after the themes z@s, w@y, R, [BY,

taking 1}

TR, VR, S0k, B and VRUR, their final @, being changed into &,

become ;

so that e_eéjé, B, eméjgy ‘5&3& ?déjod, 2,‘3&3&, ;dgéj& are the participles for

12

)

the three dialects, and ;50%,333, @méjgfg those for the ancient one.

In the ancient dialeet 23#0@5%& is written also ¥R, a form that is common

ancient ¢

1

in the mediseval one.

into 4,

The original forms of the past participles of the modern dialect W& (of

becone ,

DAIE = YRBY) and SR8 (of BLBY) must have been z&médas (FW + 8d) and

The {

Bopwkd), (Teed + @) ; ¢f. No. 6;

dialeet,

5

the past participle Rpe3¢)o, mentioned under No. 4, is, by

contraction, vulgarly changed into Z»eoy;

is o'glei-’gt :

6

1

)

0

)

the past participle 3Teso, is identical in form with the theme,

the fopy

@ e. BT (Sabdamauidarpana siitra 241); the participle’s original

form must have been 3Teay, 4. e. 3Tead with the termination 3y which

In§ 15

was converted into &30;

165

‘3

3o 1s converted into &30 after the ancient and medizval themes

Foso and 30®y, these changing their initial vowel e into 2, and taking

8 fope,

the ey,

the forms S0 and $o&*¢ so that the past participles become %J@:eﬁ%

ot i

and 3% éjis'

b the .

99

——

. under

The themes 3B and 308) ocecasionally appear as FRRY and 3HBY in the

neither

medizval dialect, and always so in the modern one; the participles remain

rally is

FR é&gp 30 é&gd,

matk),

8,

3y is converted into &35 after the ancient theme 3z, this

lerwent

changing its initial vowel = into o> and taking the form $€¢, 50 that the

past participle becomes %éjgd.

iple; In

In the medieeval and modern dialect the theme is ¥®; the participle

articiple

remains T8 ;

mation

9,

3o is converted into 235, after the ancient theme

-

oI A

> which be-

comes 23%, so that the past participle is ;jaézgx,

he past

10,

3o is converted into e3> after the ancient (and medizval) themes

ialect;

w&0 and =y, these changing the initial vowel @ into o> and taking the

s vowel

forms o>¢3% and 2323¢, so that the participles become gzéé and 2523?3

ancient,

In the medieval dialect the themes generally are ©®, $375; the participles

remain 032333, 232330 3

he final

for the

11,

3, is converted into @ after the themes gry, Dono (and ancient

3no, Sabdamanidarpana under sfitra 241) of the ancient, medieval and

modern dialect, and &ry of the medieval and modern one, the themes

),

3

taking the forms ¢, Qow¢, (35°), HBS, so that the past participles

into &,

become I3, ;)o%%, (389), ATY; ¢f. § 165, letter, a, 7;

ples for

12

)

3o is converted into @ after the themes evio and zHrd of the

ancient and medieval dialect, the themes changing their initial vowel ev

Gonon

into % and taking the forms 2.5 and 5p®*, so that the past participles

become 2.3y, and FpT

%

98_.

ymth (of

The themes V7> and IO appear also as %7 and P in the medieval

+ ) and

dialeet, the participles remaining W, @#g&. In the modern dialect &#70 has

taken the form of @»70 which oceurs also in the medizeval one; the past participle

g, by

is é@#%; cf. § 165, letter a, 7;

13,

3. is converted into ) after the ancient theme 333, this taking

o il

hene,

the form Sx¢, so that the past participle becomes 3@@; see an instance

riginal

in § 165 under 0, 1.

X which

165

From § 155 to § 164 we have seen how the Kannada past participle

| th 165

ol

is formed in various ways when the syllables o and 3 are suffixed to

the theme; now its eleventh kind follows, a short form which appears with-

Ry

out 3> and 3o, is often identical as to shape with the verbal theme (which

T

at the same time often is a verbal noun), and may be considered to be a

13%

5

s

100

.

oy, W

"

f

verbal noun (see § 100 compared with § 60; § 169).

Compare the short

past participle with final ~5 in § 168.

%J@%?S. A

This short participle occurs only when a verb directly follows it which

5o

shows that the sense of the past participle is meant, as it does not bear

nto eV |

the characteristic mark of a participle itself.

modern d

See, however, § 198, s,

where the third person neuter singular is directly formed from it.

It is used in the ancient, mediseval and modern dialect.

W;g

W

It includes two classes, it being put either before a verb that differs

W B4

from that from which it has been formed, or before a verb that is identical ;

3¢, 3

in the second case it is repetition (§§ 152. 211).

6, |

a) The short participle used before verbs that are not the same as that

are 503

from which it has been formed, chiefly before Fwe* (%@@gj, ¢f. § 341) and

30° (édo) :

lialect),

1

Instances with regard to unaltered verbal themes with a final

:.jl'i) (:':5

Here

consonant, are e. g. 0¥ IT° (=303 ITF), TIWF ' (=T o),

Uf 383

HIOW 30° (=m0 ITF), WEF o (=W Io°), FPT' Bof (=AIBOF

[

I

207), Ae* FRT (= ALYy FREI), BROI® TRF (=BRWY FRF).

thelr fine

2,

Instances with regard to unaltered themes with a final vowel, are e.g.

bgfore {l

i

BC> B (=BePR0 o), won BT (=83 3T°), Wi 3T° (= wniBy 3oF),

.

y U

T8 30° (=T0R0 3F), TEB Bof, TN IoF, ToA WELF, 3 3¢, 80 SF,

;

-2

(

A

3°

0,

3D TRY, 3N 30°, BRT BRT, KRB Io°, DX TPORF, IO IcF,

[

ilegt

QB BT, 1B TB, JB I, Y ‘306, DR Zof, VO I, Kd Zof, BO

3c°, d& 3.

)

3,

Instances with regard to themes that have changed their final vowel

froml Wﬁ

» into e (which often are verbal nouns and occasionally appear in the

medi@val dialect and frequently in the modern one), are e. g. 389 FRps

e

i e

(= SCBD FRF), LI BRF (= 0BR) TRYF), I 3T° (= 20B3 3T),

0 ;

X0

WR TR, W0 FRPS, T3 IR, T3 3of, TEI 3¢, 3P BRTE, B3 IR,

)y

2y 4

TREI FRYE, 3B TR, 3N 3o¢, 3L TRY', SRR TN, 3RF TRY, BT

VA

TR, IR TR, WRB TR, WS TR, JNB TN,

CF. '§ 157

X

R

4,

Instances with regard to themes that have changed their final vowel

Wi

LAY

2 into e9 (which often are verbal nouns and not unfrequently occur in

L

W

the modern dialect), are e. 9. a@ FPY (=BRD FWY), B IR

3

(=BEPT TRY), NI TRY (= NEPRY TRYF), TR TN, TR DR,

I

TR FRPS, LI TRT, ¥ TR, B08) IRYS, T TR, BB TR, 3%

Ver) i

P —

101

—

) short

TR, WCI FRP, VB TR, 2B FRYS, TL) BN, IT BN, eI

TRFF, AV TR, BEI TR, HB B0, B 305, VR TR,

Gf. § 157.

which

5

9

Instances with regard to themes that have changed their final

t bear

into ey (which partly are verbal nouns and occasionally occur in the

98, s,

modern dialect), are e. g. 2@y TR (=BRF FRF), VLN BRT (=0

By TRF), MR TRF (= NPTy TRY), T TRY (=TIR TNY),

BB TR, 3% TRFE, B TR, BoBO FRYF, 80 TR, WA BRYS,

differs

WEDH BRPE, VT FRFE, JBY TR, SN BRF, TN B3R, &R

tical;

FRYS, DRV FRGF,

Cf. § 151, letter b, .

s that

6, Instances with regard to themes that have dropped their final syllable,

are o3y (=0 of ©odon) 8¢ (used in the ancient and medieval

) and

dialect), Zpe (= Bpen of P[pens) So¢ (used in the ancient dialect), and

final

200 (=ooh of 73 ©nv) FRg (used in the modern dialect). Cf. letter b, s.

Here may be adduced the vulgar V@ 30&R> (=WRA 3RRRAY; see § 166).

&),

AR

Cf. 3 IR under 5, 4.

)

9

Instances with regard to themes that have dropped the vowel of

their final A, ~> or A and converted the remaining consonant ~¢ into &€

00,

before the verbs 3nzEs and Iwgs (B0#y), are e. g. T (=unT) of wn)

)

TR, w3 (of W) TRR, wE (of wil) Twes, 33¢ (of 3R) BRer, 3T°

(of 8rd) Bwes, wss (of wif) Bwes, wse (of W) FR¥s, e (of JAn)

i

TR, Azd (of Any) ReF.

The instances occur only in the modern

dialect.

C). § 158; § 164,11, 12,

b) The short participle used before verbs that are identical with that

from which it has been formed, 7. e. in repetition (§ 211):—

owel

§

he

1,

Instances with regard to themes that, in an unaltered form, precede

Ay

an identical verb, are e. g. 38 T& (=TAR TR), T T (=TIWX) TD),

TIO* THOIF (=T20hY ToGIF), T3 T (=3T3 TY), FEB FEB (= T3

v),

)

LN

FERB), B B (=DAB TB), Ted Fom, TP T, wB =R, BN B,

Al

3P >, 39 39, 3D 3D, 3P 8P, 3R 2R, 3 |, *O 39, IR AR,

SR 88, TO RD, AB 1B, TPR WPR, N VN, VA VR, DD VY, & [,

;wel

B S99, Q0B 0B, Swe® SweP, Sen 388, 3088 3885, A0 A8, Fe

r i

REP, DO O, REP AP, I8 BT, B B, Hd %Y, XN AR, aé@c%

b

2R3

d

It is to be observed that the instances always presuppose the second

2

NN

verb to be in the form of the past participle ending in @o (§ 155) or also

10

9

i

In the past tense, as & FABY, TO FIRY, ete. (see § 211, 4).

They are

(of

(D

by

found in the three dialects. In Abhinavapampa 13, 53 there is 35 éa%)J

7

P 1

BoJPowss . .

2

)

Instances with regard to themes that have lost their final vowel

GEOR

?

before an identical verb (which are found in the medizval and modern

)

dialect), are e.g. 3% (4. e. 930 of ¥9) ¥3, 3N (=34c. of 31) A, A

ol

M‘

3R, BF B8, Sen B8R, I8 XY, DAB DAV, BRI BHR, BRT VAT

(see

199

§6e

176

Cf. § 151, letter a, ¢ and b, .

Remark.

Theme

In such an instance the short participle may be doubled, e. g. W8 W& W&,

of the vor

also when another verb follows, ¢. g. W3 W3 TH¥°.

See § 211, 8.

and 1n so

3,

Instances with regard to themes that have dropped their Iast

or 3 (§§

syllable before an identical verb, are e.g. 38 (of 38ny) 3Try, 30

(of

RETF, o

3ony) 80my, 33y 3Tory, 3R Ry, 38Y RYN, D DT, 3B

.3,

B9y, ot Foedry, SeR Senz, e Seear, LR RANRL.

into g (s

Cf. letter a, 6. The instances belong to the three dialects.

See § 211, 1.

In th

Remarks.

C0nsonant

In such an instance the short participle may be doubled, e. g. 38¢¥ 3a¢¥ 3¢

vowel g

m, IB I3 SR (or SB), B¢ ®¥ BIMY (used in the ancient dialect, see

§ 211, 10

See also § 339, 8.

[eouh

Also in the repetition of nouns the last syllable has been dropped, as in

3970, ¢

gon gomn¥y, 8T SNBS* (see § 303, 1, a. b. c. d).

thiS, a8 9

4

167

]

An instance in which the vowel of the penultima too has been lost

before an identical verb, 1s £&9 2928y (=TEPA 2eP R, of the medizeval

ADpear,

dialect).

Cf. @y 3R&=y under a, 6.

§llahle

166

Hitherto the formation of the past participle of verbal themes

in the a

tngs.

ending in consonants and the vowels o and .y has been treated of; 1t

still remains to be introduced the formation of the twelfth kind of the past

L. é\r

participle.

It concerns the themes which end in the vowel ev in the three

st

Y Dr;,

dialects.

i sogs l

W

Their past participle is formed by suffixing the vowel =, in the ancient,

medieval and modern dialect.

The final en is treated as a euphonic

HE “l‘itea

L

letter, disappearing before the m according to the rule of sandhi (§ 213,

seq.).

ﬁ“ﬂg il

16 |

EXOEp[iOD 0

Instances are Qﬁ%?_& (of eﬁg,*%}_), having feared, i (of uﬁ%), having met

Mfsore i

together, sz:i (of ;323;), having trusted, ;50?55 (of ajozé;), having liked,

éi

Wl

04

103

.‘hey are

B0l (of oEy), B, wa, W, 0, Ing, JpdF, vh, BN, Jpen,

3 3

WO, T, BB, TR, T, [P, WL, LY, TN, YRA, WHEEP,

o

BREP, AR, BREP, INA, ToAA, WwdA, BOWF, BOWF, DDA, LADA

1 vowel

FTEIPA.

modern

e, gpeny, ®Peny form also the irregular past participles eso3sé,

3 i

oPees, Rwecss, used for the third person neuter singular of the past tense

d 248,

(see § 199, and ¢f. § 176).

30356 appears also as e3¢, regarding which

see §176, and compare ey (=) in the Dictionary V.

Themes with final ¢35 generally form their past participle by means

WA 0,

of the vowel m; but if the €9y is changed into €35, which occasionally

and in some instances always is done (§§ 59. 61. 160, 4), they suffix o

oir last

or 35 (§§ 155. 156), e. g. soror (0f T =TILN), BWERF, TIWVF,

30 (of

WERIF, DIBF, WHBF, TRWF, VIBF, BRRoF; ¥30F, G3oF, &

e3,3oF,

<4

3

3, WY

3

23%?&597, and before the syllable 3y their final €3¢ is sometimes converted

AR

into 3¢ (03@35333, etc., § 160, 4).

e

In the medieval dialect a theme that in the ancient one ends in a

consonant, is not unfrequently made to end in ey, in which case the

109 349

vowel = is used to form its past participle, e. g. RRe® (= ?,?,Jae@%), g

ect, 960

(=ws)), TP (=TFeH), 0%, [P, TRLY, VP, BRO, VR,

~P 99

BRFD, B0, D, vnY, FIY, 3RO, WCIV, IR, W, wun

VAT

3d, as 0

this, as a rule, is done in the modern dialect.

Cf. §§ 48. 181,1. 198, 4. 5.

167. The thirteenth kind of the past participle which, as it would

gen Losb

appear, occurs only in the medieval dialect, is formed by means of the

edizeval

syllable =z,

This is, instead of o (§ 155), suffixed to themes that

in the ancient dialect, without exception, end in consonants, but in later

t,hemt?s

times have optionally received a euphonic ev (¢f. the close of § 166),

| of; %

e. g. Fe9ny (of Jedy, =3eH), IRFD (of B, = 3R¥), F20W

Je post

1) Dr. I. F. Fleet draws the author’s attention to some copper-plate grants in which 0356

e three

and ©033° have been used directly for ®A and @A in the forms SVHBOIE, ToweB03H, JoF

oA, Bow3033%, ete. (for SHABA, TopBIA, JoFN, J039A, etc., to the east, to the south, ete.).

w(}ienta

He writes: “ With one exception, noted further on, I have found these forms in only some of

the spurious copper-plate grants of the Western Ganga series, from Mysore.

uphouic

These grants

claim to be of various dates from A. D. 248 upwards.

But there are strong reasons for

(Q 913,

fixing the eleventh century as the period when most of them were fabricated.”

The one

exception occurs in a stone inscription at Bauntr in the Tiruma-Ktdlu-narasipura taluka,

g mek

Mysore district, which appears to include the word SmOT03® (or JRsIP03:5?), and may

belong to about A. D. 920. Cf. § 281.

We remark that @A appears as @00 in Télugu.

f hl\ed

[r—

104

———

(of meT), =meBoF), AePRy (of Aewy, =Ae), RPTUEds (of

RTI

In pass

forms 3R

=RRTF), BROWY

\

(

of Bwedy, =RweRor), BRELFm (of BPELO

WE.0, WS

__‘%Jae&%) WCIDT (Of WYY, =WLIVI), SoTLRY (Of F0TF, = 2THY)

gavoid al

In a Sésana of A. D. 1123 we find Reuddd (fm ﬁe)o) in which a euphonic

MR, S0G

ey 18 used for

he @

Towards the end of the medieeval period (e. g. in the Kannada

Nagava

Ramayana) here and there we meet with forms in which the =z> has

that thi

1§

been used to form the past participle even of verbal themes that end

fermination

in gv in the three dialects (§ 166), e. g. ezoe8%0 (of 3

, =2 W)

§193,

Also

308,30 (of Bedy, =a Boedy), Awedny (of Fwemy, =a JRe@Y)

el

the curious past participle 22 Qo (==, of Jey) occurs in the

Kannag

Ramayana

1131

The vowel @ in @m0 in this case is, of course, nothing else but a

hose witt

euphonic letter employed before the real termination

themes ]

168. The question naturally arises how the vowel g of § 166 came

themselyes

to represent the suffix for the past participle of verbal themes ending in

A T18ing, |

eny 1n the three dialects

D‘w us)m

It appears to be certain that < originally was

a euphonic or enunciative augment put before @y (§ 155 seq.) in order

QO‘\

&0

JJ,

to avoid forms like DRy (of HIW), having sung (actually used in the

-pUV\./ TR

Jaimini Bharata 21, 51), Sw@) (of Se@o), having made (used in the

If we thos

Dharmaparikshé, edited by the Rev. G. Wiirth in his SDERE _56045'@:)"0')

hefore <2

vacana 1 301)

B éﬁo

SN

0% ,

etc

Such forms,

certamly, are

4 Il (

clumsy and cacophonous and led people to use the enunciative augment

Certann )

o between the theme and o, as they actually did in the forms Fegzp,

o) 'g-f\g;e

3WeY, etec. and then in the forms 3380

3083 20

5«0\&63

which

bring 5

probably as a remnant of by-gone times, we find in § 167

This is

Wel

corroborated by the fact that in the so-called relative past participle

N0upg, |

(§ 175, e. g. TRT, SRAB, T8 B, S0, =B’ T 3028 ), In the ancient

(§ 199

and medizeval present tense (§ 194, e. 9. TIBTZDo, SPRIBIJo, %oe& B0,

hag }

3 Degoyy

1 CSNO) and in the imperfect tense (§198, e.g. &30, %sej Qo, ;Szc ?30)

¥

A §gl

the %39, in the form of 7 (§178), is always used.

(In the contmgent

lafing.jt

present-future tense the participle with = is generally added directly to

¥

)

RV, etc.)

?

§ 188, of

:)

We are, therefore, compelled to think that the past participle with

lmp[ﬂ&tu,

final = is another particular kind of the short participles treated of in

g $Peciy

§ 165

About its representing verbal nouns see § 169

I h&\ g

RO

et

105

mm,

In passing it may be observed that in the future tense (§ 200) the trisyllabic

3

forms IR@Fo, J0eRIFB0, when they are to become dissyllabic, do not appear as

W

AL,

SRBo, 39eB0, but as IR o, 9’0, the ©®° in combination with S being used

;iod%*%).

to avoid a hardness of the pronunciation, which is avoided in the past participles

uphonic

2@, 9B by the insertion of an enunciative % before %> and finally dropping

the Ro.

2

Remark.

{annada

Nagavarma and Késava call the 8 an augment (Agama), and Késava states

9% has

that this @ and the ¥V in ® are vowels which are substitutes for the personal

that end

terminations (kriyAvibhaktyadésasvara).

See the personal terminations in

V)

§193.

) Also

169

Is it possible to find out the original meaning of the past participle

i the

in Kannada?

In § 165 it has been stated that the short past participles, namely

56 hut 8

those without @o and 2o, are often identical as to shape with their verbal

themes which at the same time are verbal nouns, so that the participles

66 came

themselves appear as verbal nouns and finally must be such, e. g. €,

nding 1n

a Tising, Ho03F, a running, Aee¢, a splitting, RBRoF, a striking; aL,

2209

ally WS

T, TN, 35, 89,

oL,

&89, 3R, BR3, 3B, T, T, W@, Y, VR,

in order

0, 0, &8; HLY,

WB®, WO, B9, TP, 38, 309, 3B, BT, BRA; VLI,

od in the

0CI, BR, IT; B, YOI, TRy, B, BRI, WA, WBI, BNRY, HTBY; TPE.

of in the

If we thus consider the short participles to be verbal nouns, their meaning

oJp oY

Y

#

before R and 3os is as follows: — BRoxs BReF, to take (4. e. to apply)

are

ly

a blow (or blows, to one’s self); €3 3of, to bring a standing up (to a

angment

certain place, . e. to come); 03¢ 30°, to give a running (¢. e. to run);

18 36%,

3 TR, to take (4. e. to apply) a stabbing'(to one’s self); IB o, to

bring a walking (. e. to come); etc

:

. Whichs

This 18

We believe that analogously the past participles ending in 3o and > are

purticpt®

nouns, namely verbal nouns augmented by the pronominal suffixes 8> and &30

¢ ancient

(§ 122; ¢f. §§ 178 and 298, 3).

Thus, for instance, 562, a descending,

has become 203y, a descending-it; &, a walking, IBx, a walking-it;

5085307

)

DO, a selling, 0O, a selling-it; Se

b

a germinating, SHp$3, a germi-

0 5’2”.&)

nating-it (¢f. our explanation of e in § 171, of ev3o0, ete. in § 173, of

3011ti5gellt

iretly ¥

wg in §§ 178. 179, of 5y, 53 and R in §§ 185. 186, of the infinitive in

§ 188, of 710 and = in § 204, and of the second and third person of the

imperative in § 205).

The suffixes ©y and 3y are so to say redundant.

}

eiple Wi?

The special idea of the past (‘a having descended-it’, ¢‘a having walked-it’,

tod of

or having descended, having walked, etc.) has, only by usage, been attached

14

—

——a

106

to the forms with @ and 3 (¢f. & in § 273).

A similar indefinite

shesd,

889

character as to time has been actually preserved in the verbal forms

(f

N

produced by suffixing the syllables g0 and Ryo (see § 203), in the negative

If e

participle and conjugated negative (see §§ 170. 171. 209. 210), and in

guphonie

the verbal forms (participles) produced by the syllables &, w, =, and

e

XIS,

W Wb

® (see §§ 180-185). Further the use of the past participle %) in

&

combination with 2z or 3 (@;&%&%, @%8), e.g.in §§ 322-329 and that

of )

of )

of the infinitive with final o, (¥ef) in combination with me (§ 316, 2)

will assist to elucidate such an original indefiniteness as to time. (f. also

i(

of

[

4n

0)

§ 313, ¢« about the combination of the past participle and verbal nouns

negatire

in the past.

Mono

short i

In § 168 the short past participles with a final enunciative 2 which

remained after the dropping of o, have been introduced. With their

their fing

%o they are obvious verbal nouns, and they are therefore to be considered

e 3

{

{

as verbal nouns also without 3o, This is established by the fact that they

in combination with e are used identically with other verbal nouns

anclent

in combination with fae:): in § 916, 2 (e. g. TRAY, SNY = SRR0Y,

&), 1

eﬁciomcg’).

monosy|

170. The fourteenth kind of the past participle is the so-called negative

the uegy

one (pratishédhakriyé, vilomakriyé, abhavakriyé). It is formed by putting

(of ﬁ@% |

e9z$ to the short form of the so-called infinitive (kriyartha, see § 187), <. e.

The

to the form of the verb that is conventionally used to denote object,

forming 1

design, purpose, or future of intention of action (before another verb),

edigyg)

expressing the idea of the English infinitive preceded by ‘to’, ‘for to’,

(6§81

“about to’, ‘ready to’, ‘yet to’ (see § 188). This short form of the infinitive

In Tel

ends in the vowel e, e. g. 03 (of wT, @), to be or stay, about to be

drops the

or stay, going to be or stay, yet to be or stay. When 3@ is put to o3,

In

the form of the participle becomes either g ©@, or, with the application

of sandhi (§ 214), =338, ‘not actually being or staying’ or ¢not having

P&rticiph

actually been or stayed’.

The idea of the past is secondary, depending

Iegation,

Uce hay

on circumstances (see § 209, and ¢f. § 169).

Both forms, 33 e9z3 and

203, were used in the ancient dialect; in the medieval and modern

0 of pg

one only »od is in use. Other instances are gse%zf‘; (of wef), not being

(6. the I

With N

fit or not having been fit, fae%zﬁ (of aef), not being preseat or not

having been present (§ 338), @owd (of wowy), not fearing or not having

feared, %éﬁd (of Ty, not tying or not having tied, @3 (of wum@v),

the ﬁl'st |

—

$BG (of 33y, und, 3edd, BedB, [PBL, JIWCIB, BAAB, T4,

o Saygy

to f (

——r

107

—

efinite

| formg

2eCIB, wrRwB, wunrotdrd, 3Ne¥s, WRNEE, WRBA, msgbzsc%, LOBORT.

negative

Cf. §§ 208. 209, 210. (212, 7).

If verbal themes end in =, o, €3, 8, , or &, the infinitive inserts a

and 1n

euphonic 035¢ hbetween the theme and e when e9z8 is attached, e. g.

7 and

L

BePodd (of wed), wePod (of weP), Tdwd (of k), 39033

nd

hat

(of 32),

SBd (of 88), BRWB (of B@), wchd (of i), ToKT

316, 2)

E

(Of T9),

Hodd (of &), wechd (of we), Feadd (of F¢), SReC3T

C

also

The theme % exceptionally inserts a euphonic z¢, and the

(of a’@e)

1

nouns

negative participle becomes $,3%.

Monosyllabic themes ending in &, @, 03¢, ©f and ¥ and having a

which

short initial vowel or cozsonant, form the negative participle by doubling

th their

their final consonant before the ¢ of the infinitive and suffixing «&, e. g.

onsidered

wd (of we'), 273 (of 25, wod (of wer), FHYD (of 3R%°),

hat they

zoof)&%zg (of 203f). As an exception there is F$D (of F¢¥) in the

ancient dialect.

] nouns

In the medizval one we find exceptionally evest3 (of

‘wdj@?)

), nod (of Awf); as the modern one uses to double the finals of

monosyllabic themes already before a euphonic e (§ 48), its forms of

the negative participle are e. g. emz;%zﬁ (of U ), 2538 (of comd\),’ R s

negative

(of Ren). Cf. § 215, 1, 1.

i puttmg

87), 1.

The themes 3o and 2y0¢ generally appear as sooé and 2590 In

forming their negative participle, which is z305% and ;5a38; only in the

) 6})j€0t:

o verb),

medieval and modern dialect also 38 and wdXd occasionally occur.

tfor 10y

(Cf. §§ 184. 210.)

infnitive

In repetition (see § 165, letter b, and cf. §§ 209. 211) the first verb

drops the suffix g3, e. 9. W@ WRA. (Cf. §§ 211, 4 339.)

out to 18

f t0

AV

171

It becomes evident from the formation of the so-called negative

plicatio?

(¢

participle given in § 170 that its primitive meaning was not that of direct

)t havip

negation, but that of futurity, ¢.e. the state of being yet to come or of

i

gpendy

once having been yet to come, or, in other words, the state of not being

ous 4

d

or of not having been.

978 is @iy, the remote demonstrative pronoun

| modery

(¢f. the @ and 3o of § 169, and the eng, etc. of § 173), in combination

The form

with o, the particle of emphasis (¢f. § 215, 6, remark I).

under consideration, therefore, is so to say a pronominal noun, and

¢

of BTt

PAL

the first meaning of the above-mentioned w5 @ or vod is ‘yet to be

o)

of

or stay-even-it’, ‘not yet being or staying-even-it’, or ¢the state or condi-

/%}

Wy

tion of not actually being or staying’, ¢not actually being or staying’,

)

14%

e

e

108

Jdmd

or, according to circumstances, ‘not having actually been or stayed’.

RV

(of

Thus also e. 9. 50383, ‘yet to make-even-it’, ‘having been yet to make-

F00I3

/3l })

even-it’: ¢not actually making’, ‘not actually having made’.

Before

172

In § 154 it has been stated that the second form of the Kannada

b . REY

)

J@?Jv

Noy=Sid

verb that has been called a verbal participle or gerund by Europeans,

(0]

et

Tnsta

is the present verbal participle (vartamanakriys, vartamanakalakriyé; see

From

§ 362).

in the mod

It is formed by adding to the verbal theme one of the following ten

Furthe

suffixes: — e300 (in the ancient and medizval dialect), evd (in the

O, used,

ancient and medizval one), ewd o (in the ancient one), ewnd, (in the

words and

ancient one), evsgo (in the medizval one), ewd (in the medieval and

1

from the ]

modern one)., evd o (in the medieval and, occasionally, ancient one),

the rustie

ev8, (in the medieval and modern one), evgo, evsd, (in the modern

one).

explanatio

the place

The final ey of a theme disappears (according to the rule of sandhi,

IR O

§ 213 seq.) when any of the terminations is annexed; if a theme ends in

B, o, €3, B, O, or &, a euphonic 03¢, or occasionally (in the mediseval

remark 1.

I repg

dialect) &%, is put between the vowel and termination; after &, to love,

the insertion of 3¢ is always required.

M

aduced i

Instances are «C33vo (of @e3¥), weeping, Ro32Zy,0 0r RT3y 0

0 be anot)

(of Rox’; ¢f. § 215, 7, ¢), doing, FoBo0 (of OF°), saying, sno0 (of 8rv),

laughing, S0e@o300 (0of JWeRy), seeing, wLPWIs0 (of 6L, descending,

(Salemayli

gously. ¢

330300850 (of ¥3), calling, zacwdic (of w9), guarding, &adwio (of &),

may be fo

giving, Becseagoo (of e3¢), burning;— ==d (of @Ry), throwing, g8

(of o), saying, weIwo3d (of weIwf), becoming weary;— 53280

Thege

Yerhal ny

(of TR), fighting, 0300300 (of wR), threatening ;— $35 3, (of %539),

tiO[] Qf th

quivering ;— oF0Zo (of 27°), FRFZo (of FN$);— w53 (of gys or

B90), OF3 (of 27°), 808 (of W), IWREZ (of TeRd), [HBN3

oung (§-

Pronoyy g

(of SoB);— wvead o (of evEt)

b

g0 (of wT¥), T8 0 (of Tom*);—

Which wil)

6308, (of wess or &), O3, (of F), ¥Ry 3, (of WRY,), S@g, (of

fOT 10§

uan

SRREY), @303, (of 83), WeaSwg, (of zﬁe), Rweosng, (of R0¢) ;— TR,

18 lll

ldeg

(of Fe%), %@%5@_0 (of %J@%ﬁg)), Xeerazy, (of Beeny), BweBodwss, (of

Tt

RRR);— FOY3 (of FT), JBJY3 (of 5@), ﬁooig:% (of Booxf); &3, (of

e g

&), w3, (of &); Soo¥IZo (of S00¥), RIJYZo (0of BR); 00303 (of 20035,

=~ QO

T

Wjunt;,

2838 (of 28), R0J3 (of Bd), FIYS (of 3),

333 (of €23,

it

3333 (of F3), &JI3 (of B); WIZ,0 (of w¥); #ooﬁo%go (of Roo3s¥),

andlno }

]

109

e

stayed,

SiY3, (of 8a8), WS, (of ws).

(The Basavapurana has once, 22, 29,

0 make-

TR, treating the final e as radical).

Before the euphonic ¢ the vowel .y of the theme may be dropped,

e. 9. SBJZo (of 3B), woP3o (of wd); FBJYS (of 38), 3nY3 (of 3R),

(annada

ropeans,

D003 (of FB), BRFYS (of BRY).

Cf. § 151, letters a, ¢« and b, 2;

ete

Instances regarding the present verbal participle see in § 362.

1y8; see

From 3% exceptionally Bne3, a contraction of 30R%03, is formed

g fen

in the modern dialect.

(in th

1 the

Further, in the modern dialect there are the puzzling forms esgd, and

(10

he

23, used, like the past participles 9_95% and 93533 (§ 155), to introduce

words and sentences (see § 332). They are likely to be forms corrupted

oval and

from the present participles z038 or ©303, B8 Or IRF,, saying (¢f.

b o0ne),

- modern

the rustic form of the present tense in § 196, remark 3, and also the

e

[

-

9, and o, which may take

explanation of &g, ibid., remark 4).

the place of wwx and o3, would be equal to wzose or w3y, and

[ sandhi,

QRS Or osa’oéjg

Another explanation will be offered in § 198, 7,

¢ ends in

remark 1.

nedizral

to love,

In repetition the evgs, of the first verb may be dropped (see § 339, 6).

178

Considering the origin of the suffixes of the present participle

adduced in §172 we take evso to be their primitive form. e3> is known

Wi

Vo

3

)

to be another form of ez, the intermediate demonstrative pronoun neuter

(Oi mm),

(Sabdmanidarpana siitra 148 § 122; § 272, 2), from which evy, analo-

scending,

gously to the formation of e3y, from @ and w3y from KX, eV,

may be formed.

14 N

- These pronominal suffixes evsd and evsy, we believe to be attached to

MR

verbal nouns to form the present participle correspondingly to the forma-

o 33

tion of the past one which suffixes the pronouns %o and 3, to verbal

fg¢ 0

nouns (§ 169) and to the present-past negative one which suffixes the

&0

S

<

?

o

pronoun &% (7. e. @l 4-the emphatic ) to the short infinitive (§ 171)

(L

3}

S

which will finally prove to be also a verbal noun (§ 188). Let us take,

3

Lo

o

=,

=l

for instance, the verbal noun &3>, reading; when to this ev3s or eudy

o

o

a8

<

(Y

s

1s added, it would have the form of %%@o3y or %zo3y, and mean ‘a

i

%

(ot

reading-this’.

(Cf. the bhavavadanas or verbal nouns of §§ 198. 200).

It 1s the

7

;

i)

(of

The final ewo in w80, eudy o is still to be explained.

pers

)

conjunction ewo, further, denoting progression or continuity, which

o WO

w)

conveys the specific idea of the present participle, as 83350 or %B939,0,

(ot %

)0

Wil

standing before a conjugated verb, e. g. before ‘he was’ (aBFo, literally

)

e

110

e

¢a reading-this-further’ he was), expresses that the reading was a

3, by

info 9, €. |

progressing or continuing action.

The final conjunction ev9o has the

g

Y

same meaning.

i

The final o in w03, wo3d, (put to ewdy and ovdy like the o of &7

M’JQ

W

o,

in § 171) is emphatical, the idea of the evo or o disappearing (of.

Regardi

§ 196, remark 3)". Inthe final e of «v3, w03, the sonnd bas been dropped,

176.1 T

or perhaps o stands for o (¢f. e. g. the past participles before the

&

P

Ml

§

I

Zo or 3, of which the o of the verbal themes becomes s, § 157), and

il Sl

<>

X

S

S

Pl

in evze, wvsy, the © has then been changed into es for the sake of

A

&

rlv

Y

b (§

euphony.

1>

=

—

sl

The use of the intermediate pronouns (evg), wvdy) may denote that

=1

=

Pe

o3

S o

=

the action is neither past nor future.

being used

174, There are two forms of the Kannada verb that bave been called

relative participles.

This name has been given to them by Iuropeanss

dative sing

explanatior

because they regarded them as including the relative pronouns within

themselves.

But the Kannada language bas

no relative pronouns

o, appe

forms gy

whatever; its pronouns &3 (09e=), FIYRY (CPVIVWY), Yo (WIRTY),

sill in gy

95350 (0309RH), D (V) are not relative, but interrogative (§ 102, 8,

dialect e

letter b, remark), and the relative pronouns’ place is somehow supplied

Nenter sing

by the so-called relative participles.

(Cf. §267 regarding the interro-

gatives.)

Dreterite ¢

The first is the preterite or past relative participle (bhiitavatikrit,

3 (§ 193)

o (=

§§ 175-179), the second comprises the present and future relative participles

(bhavishyantikrit, §§ 180-186) which have the same form.

§)\\ 183, f |

175

The past relative participle (bhiitavatikrit) is formed

Ll

1,

by removing the final ev of the past participle (§§ 155-164) or

tmbingti

LO\)

changing it into &, e.g. pey (of

Q

), % (of &), BeSBF or OZGF

an )

(of BRToF, BTBIF), WATF OF WAG F (of 2RTBoF, wREIF), RLEHF or

thingss efe

ﬂ@e%%- (of RAwewor, 7-3@@53%%—‘), 393 (of 39c)), To, (of To), ol

o, 3

(of B03o3), S0¥3 (of ZI), s, (of ¥y, Rew, (of Fewy,), V3 (of

mt‘amd;,

SEBR), TRT (of FRR), wg (of wiy), 88, 33, Re, w0EY, FeY, BWeY,

w&éu\:j

y N

Purthg, i

[

SR %Jaégj, z'cégj, BaF or ag, 8%, 2wT,; ¢f. § 189;

185, 193,

2,

by adding 3 to the short past participle ending in . (§§ 166-168),

Either the

e.g. 99,0 (of ©9)), wh o (of &), BB, BT, %oégjcﬁ, 3390%63355, w3,

The to

ToBT, SPAR, BeFd, WIDAR, 0aNAE; ¢f. § 189

e

by,

29

1) The o might, however, in this case, be merely formative like the » in IZ3, A®3, Fes,

v g

iy

g

=08 and other nouns.

——

—

111

was 4

3,

by changing the final > of the negative participle (§§ 170. 171)

has the

into e, e. g. 93% (of w8d), wws (of vyd), vur (of WY 3), Woud,

B3, wds, 333, s, 3d6, 3edd, SPAG, LARYEE, VPG,

UN:T

eGP O30T, TORIE, ws;%zs, DR, ITT.

g (¢f,

\

Regarding the meaning see § 179 and regarding the use § 363.

dropped,

fore the

176. The formation of the past relative participle of emy, Fperiy,

157), and

owen is irregular, for, instead of sAR, Jpens, JReNT, they have &g,

wpes, wes, formed from the irregular past participles esosss, $3peoss,

o sake of

Bpeo3* (§ 166) by means of syncope, the original forms being SIS

note that

RPEO3) , BRI,

5 occasionally takes also the forms oz (§ 292),

or &3co or o (§293, Tamil = &3, Télugu ©odwg, the consonants ¢, =°

on called

being used for ¢, ¢f. the remark concerning ¢, s¢ and o in § 141 under

LrOpeans

dative singular) and probably also that of &g too (sée § 278, 2, the

explanation of ©3; ¢f. § 212, remark 2).

The original form of e, viz.

1 withio

603%, appears still as 503, and, by syncope, as ez, in the old rustic

pronouns

forms eﬁo:b‘ga", etc. and ez, etc., used for the third person present

W?ﬁéJ)a

still in the modern dialect (§ 196, ¢f. ©dexy, § 195).

In the same

(§ 102, 8,

dialect there is also the old rustic form 03y, used for the third person

supplied

neuter singular of the present tense (as to form originally of the past or

o interto-

preterite tense) which is eso3ss (the irregular past participle, § 166) and

3o (§ 193) in combination with the o of emphasis.

Regarding the form

qvatikety

0933 1N

¥y (= ury) see also the @R in § 212, remark 2, the vz oz

b}

participles

§§ 183, 7, remark; § 184, the &350 in § 203, and the Qﬂ-‘é’% in § 205.

3

177. The grammarian KéSava calls the past relative participle in

5-104)

o4) or

combination with any one of the terminations eo (%), he, e%¢ she, sz,

)L gwt’j;

it, and their plurals egos, they (men or women), v, they (children,

N

) norgF 01

things, etc., see e. g. § 254) a $RIBITyz® or Ty ont (§ 68, 1), also a5d

)\

aéﬁ@oﬁ, &’)5e§a§@e§®or§ (§ 102, 8, e), €. 9. &0 (of DRT), TORTYS.

b

TIRRT, [IRTBT®, HolRBIR, the genitive singular, for instance, becoming

02373 0

DIRDR, TORTY, HIRGGLY, and the genitive plural TBET, TRTUTEI.

Jm Ty

Further instances are ¥ o (of v ), 2.9 Bo, yue3 Go. (Cf. e.g. §§ 180.

185. 193. 198 under 3. 254.) [Observe that bhutavatikrit may mean

either the past relative participle or the noun formed from it.]

3

wBd

The terminations o and e¢° appear also as 2o and %¥$; we find

,,ﬁ )

e.g. AR 0 (in a S4sana of 707 A. D.), #8300 (in a Sasana of 866 A. D.

Nﬁ,

and in one of 887 A. D.), and Qg\@jg‘%%ﬁ, @@8@@5 (in a Sasana of about

—

—

112

of the havr

718 A. D.). For ey there occurs also 2,0, as there is e. g. twice

been’, Gl

03/, 3 (in a Sdsana between 597 and 608 A. D.); for the plural o

we have also g,o‘ according to § 185, q. v.

3&50 ((

Instead of the above-mentioned terminations which, except the pronouns

who has sung

-

ouz3s and ey, are pronominal forms, also demonstrative pronouns

sang’y i ¢ A

themselves are very frequently used in the mediseval dialect; in the

g child of

modern one only pronouns are in use.

Two additional pronominal forms

88 T,

of the medizval dialect are e9gs and @ (for o),

has played 0

smeared witt

The demonstrative pronouns used for krillingas in the medieval

or smeared

dialect are @50, ¥SF, ©3, 9o, W3R, ¥, VI, ¥IH, VT, NWEY,

being proper

©3Ry, WRTF, B30y, sy, &y, and those in the modern one &=y, ¥,

man of the

3%, 53, ¥R, ¥B, ¥y, B, wY (see §§ 117. 119. 121. 1322, 134.

136).

=30 and 52 are met with as suffixes for krillingas also in the

M %o (zmg

ancient dialect.

aten’, i, o,

See § 254.

3 field of {

But not only pronominal forms and pronouns are suffixed to the

cultivate, or

past relative participles, but nearly every declinable hase (see § 67 seq.)

nobody culti

is used after them, e. 9. w&E Fpo, TpAB FRTNA, ToL, SR 3083

i 6. an affa

Yo', T, T9B, ?éyao;ig WP, & JIY, SRR TOHRF, VO T TIOWF, TRB

Regardi

See § 282 regarding declinable and other adverbs

aﬁi, SNRG THONE.

télative pag

used after them, and § 363 the translation of the above instances.

Further instances see in § 254.

Késava terms the instances in which a relative past participle is followed

In the ¢

by a declinable base (noan), consecutive compounds (gamakasamésa see § 253,

§ 181, note.

having eqgk

2, d and cf. § 185).

0, e, 30

178. The author of the present grammar considers the past relative

them WhO giv

participle to be the genitive singular of the so-called past participle

formed by means of the pronominal suffixes &0 and 25 (§ 169), in which

180, 1

case es, the primitive termination of the genitive (§ 141), would have

that are i

been employed without the usual augment € (§ 124).

fron the ¢

With regard to ez8 (§ 171) it is to be remarked that o, the particle

Regarding

of emphasis, was removed in order to form the genitive ending in es, viz.

lnstape

]! (@c’;o+&5).

o

Compare the explanation of the relative present-future participle in § 185

L s

179

Now turning back to § 175 seq. we translate e. g. Tpe

bl 35

(Fpe3 + ©) ¢of the having promised’, °3§> <of the having said’, ®=ogF

e gy 0

<of the having closely united’, ze%?_&cj ‘of the having feared’, 2pew

NiwW

) QR

i

|

———

113

i

fwice

.

‘of the having gone’

)

2o ‘of the not being’ or ¢of the not having

|

been’, 5023 ¢of the not fearing’ or ¢of the not having feared’.

DoRTBo (FIRE+ wo) means ‘a man of the having sung’, 4. e. 2 man

0uns

who has sung or sang; mPR3%* (JeRE+©%°), ‘a woman of the having

Dnouns

sung’, 4. e. a woman who has sung or sang; [eRBIR (3[BT + ),

0 the

“a child of the having sung’, ¢. e. a child which has sung or sang;

forms

$RT Bpwo, ‘a place of the having played’, 7. e. a place where (somebody)

has played or played; ©pA% gx,oamo, ‘a colour of ashes of the having

lieval

smeared with’, ¢. e. a colour of ashes with which (somebody) has smeared

N,

or smeared (e. g. the body); VO To (VY B+©o), ‘A man of the not

09

W 0y

being proper’, 4. e. a man who is not proper; B B0 (DY T+ ¥o), ‘2

man of the (something) not being’, 4. e. a man who lacks (something) ;

n the

msgecso (&me;a@mr o), ‘a man of the not eating’ or ¢of the not having

eaten’, 4. e. a man who does not eat or has not eaten; IBZ Fox,

0 the

¢a field of the not cultivating’, ¢. e. a field which (anybody) does not

b

cultivate, or has not cultivated, or did not cultivate, 7. e. a field which

nobody cultivates, etc.; #nd so0dero ‘an affair of the not being possible’,

0!

;

¢. e. an affair which is impossible.

%

(]

o

Regarding the use of the present time in translating the so-called

verhs

1Ces

relative past participle see §§ 169. 170.

Note.

owed

In the modern dialect a change of ®3 into % is occasionally met with (c¢/.

§ 181, note a), e. g. ©BR stands for VU T (VY + TP, ‘a woman of the

993,

having cooked’, i. e. a woman who has eooked ; T0B2 R (i. e, T J0R) Twiln ¢

0.8

of (i. e. FRYTN) Focl DIPII

W =’

they say ¢there (is) much more gain for

ative

them who give than for them who take .

ciple

ek

180. The p;esent and future relative participles (bhavishyantikrit, § 174)

NE

that are identical as to shape and receive their respective meaning only

from the context, are formed by means of the suffixes &3, 20, g and &.

ticle

Regarding their meaning see §§ 185. 186.

See § 364.

U

Instances of the present-future relative participle formed by means

of 53

H]

L

such as regard verbal themes ending in consonants in which the

j

',,M

144

suffix is added directly to the theme, in the ancient and medizval dialect,

g

W

are &% (of ww), woed, (of wued), S (of wwe), %@%, 23983, 68,

N

0

B« noye, fee, Aofvesal@lisae), Hl

15

—

114

PENE

81, In§

mmg, g3 (of o), FISF, VEIF. Cf. § 183, 2. 4. 10; about themes

with final ¢%¢ see § 183, s.

pa.rticiple wit

Themes ending in ¢ optionally double the = by ¢

)

e.g. eﬁe)zfj?,

ialect; et U

AL &msj, 3@%%‘, \%;’)oisjr, ?.'3;@5@%? See § 371, 3.

1, That

Remark.

themes with

About ® for @3, see § 163, remark.

formation Wt

Tnstances

2

9

such as regard monosyllabic verbal themes that end in a vowel or

953 (of enr

are a vowel, in which the suffix is added directly to the theme, in the

AReRis, W

ancient and medizval dialect, are 5953 (of T9), DI, 23053, 53005, RWE,

Instance

&3, b,

0N, B

[ngtance

%3 ocears only in the medieval dialect, the ancient form being %3 (see

183, 6); instead of T the medieval dialect has also IPF.

i 01 )

d\ =

3,

such as regard verbal themes that also in the ancient dialect end in

gm0 &

=

e, in which the suffix is added directly to the theme, in the three dialects,

g, The

are RS (of Yu@y), FOBT (of ToRy), VBT, 28,3, BN, 3RS,

themes to

has heen a

TRRIS, P93, 50022{3:;3, DRI, SPERIT, SR, WeRIT, SR,

forth)’ L)

30069053, IICNT, [N, VEEWT, IPENT, VeRIT, VRIRS, PORI.

PN

See No. 6 and § 183, 2. 4. 7. 8.

WV (of

4,

such as regard verbal themes ending in @ or » in which the suffix

is added directly to the theme, in the ancient and medieval dialect, are

3, T

of of ag

otPS (of L), BEP, BePs, IAD, 398, JBT, VOT; HBI (of

)

282), RS, TR, RB, B, A

(of o)

WY

(of

9,

such as regard verbal themes with final » which drop this vowel

before the suffix, in the mediwval dialect and occasionally also in the

0 |

ancient one, are ©@3 (of »@), @33 (of ©3), w3 (of ©¥), T, I,

and the g

WS, IRS, TEIS, SRYS, BES, BRIS, BRIZ; 33 (of I3, 1n a

T (

ﬂm% 3.

Sasana of 1019 A. D.). Cf.§ 157.

firs pors,

6,

such as regard verbal themes that may change their final €95 into

b |

e=¢ before the suffix, in the medizeval dialect, are R3¢ (of NeC = nestdo)

/

the vy,

BRIF, WO, BRIF, TIRF, Do, VeSF, SwsF. Cf. No.s and § 183, 2.

=

)Y (

Remark.

Pers, ply

W3 gy

The present participle of the verb 0¥° is anomalously formed, it being not

0

@¥, but &u¥ in the three dialects. Cf. § 243, B, 205 § 194, remark 1.

inasg

e

115

i

themes

181

In § 180 we have found only one form of the present-future

participle with 3 in the modern dialect, viz. that of No. 8, in which the

suffix is added directly to themes that end in ev also in the ancient

Y

-}gj

dialect; let us now give the other forms:—

L

That of No. 1 in § 180 it forms by attaching a euphonic ev to the

themes with final consonants (¢f. §§ 48. 166) and then suffixing the 3, a

formation which occasionally occurs also in the medieval dialect.

Instances belonging to both dialects are ¢33 (of 8% =o%¢), wono

vel or

9053 (of ool = eurlelF), VTR, VENT, TN, FEHT, LRI,

) the

RPERIS, WL, ALHIT, ReCIT, SHLIVIT, JNTIT.

9

0=

XY

Instances belonging to the medieval one alone are @¥oTE, BT,

FRIT, BRFID, DECAT, BIIT, VPNCII.

(see

Instances belonging to the modern one alone are wToz, evea 3,

DTIT OF IRYT, TV, FROTNT Or TRWode S, TP 3, %@%s, 3003,

d in

3R or 3Ry, wBIE, VLT, FPWNT, TRHWod 3. (Cf. § 182))

601,

2,

That of No. 2 in § 180 it forms from originally monosyllabic

03,

themes to which a euphonic ey (by means of o35¢ as a help to enunciation)

%y

has been added, suffixing the & to the e, e.g. 03053 (of 803w, to bring

i

forth), samx (of F9030), Recdws (of Readw), Recdnz (of Jeasw),

SPec (of Bwecdn), Weadws (of Wecdw), DT (of D), Boe

fiix

00033 (of Bogazw).

3,

Mo

That of No. 4 in § 180 it forms by adding a euphonic ev (by means

of o3¢ as a help to enunciation) and then suffixing the =3, e. g. ©€2°030053

(of

(of ee2°), 39030053 (of 39), RoARNT, DT ; FBWNS (of @), TR

030033 (of 3E22), FBWN, VBT,

rel

Notes.

he

a)

In the medizeval and modern dialect the final @V of the verbal theme

)

and the suffix = are pretty often changed into 2 or %, €. g. YRR (= VB),

NWRER (= BTIPT), WwACR, 3890, JPrie'e (BHRN) ; YRRE (= BTOT), NRBWE,

Fo0h0¢, FeodRt, BN, Verne, WRONE, JBolwe. (CF. §§ 179, note; 202, 205, 3,

first pers. plural.)

0

b)

In the medi@val and oceasionally in the modern dialect the final @V of

the verbal theme and the suffix 3 may be changed into enp, e. g. BOR (= BOY),

DBRR (= NBMIT), TIVR (= VIWT), W3R, (= WBT). (Cf. §§ 202. 205, 3, first

pers. plural.) = @3> BRI m%ido (that is found in the modern dialect) may be

W3HR BRENVI s—oa%édo.

©)

Some vulgar forms in which the participle ends in es, that are found

in a South-Mahratta school-book, e. g. F¢¥ (in T¥ID), INB (in IPBI)

15%

116

gzF 18

and 8XF, (in ST ID), are to be explained by the change of the % of No. @

Ul

medieval on

into ®, so that #¢¥, 393 and 5303%’_3& stand for TeBdR, SNBR and .;ioo%ra% (FeBRT,

ete.).

(¢f. the remark in § 187, under 2). Cf. § 211, 5.

b, ¢

in the med

182, The second suffix for the present-future participle is 2y, which

e

is added to four of the monosyllabic themes that end in m* (nanta) and

are

Svi‘\w‘v'u

9 Ao\~

€9

to four of them that end in & (nanta), wviz. voeg, (of evsF), T

2)

2t

(of zow’), SPRED, (of Fpw), TV (of Ssowf); S0 (of 23, 88, TR,

239,

Gf. § 183, s.

oy, 3

0 appea

enue. becomes also euso

in the medieval dialect, and always so in

themes with

the modern one; 389, becomes w30, in the modern one; oz, and 38

appear also as O3, and 33y, in the ancient dialect, and always so in

4 Int

¢ ((lakira)

the medizeval and modern one; the ancient 233823 gets also the form

e

09

W

)

v

of wasﬁé.

(of

dialéct. 3

The present-future participle of the themes Zwgs and [exs the

author of the present grammar has not yet met with.

Regarding the

(f

B

\ 4

3

other modern form of the participle of euvm®, Fom’, ox° and 3g°

R

e

e

see § 181, 1.

Ay

®

b

The present-future participle of 3% (Fwy, %5’.@%330)) which in the

1

fl

ancient dialect is S¥0¥ (180, 1) appears therein also as %’J@sﬁgb, 18

'@N (0

frequently 3wo, in the mediseval dialect, and occurs in this form also

61 I[]

in the modern one. Its other modern form is %J,)e;\%);j (181 0,

183

It

In

The third suffix for the present-future participle is g.

18 nsed ;-

i, o,

1, In some themes ending in o¢ (vépha), viz. azmF (of wof), 3=F

(ot b@@ﬁf\d)

(of 38v°), waF (of wof), BRwF (of Twos), AwexrF (of Rweos), and Sexr

Wil ( t

p—

Participia]

(of Recf) of the ancient dialect (¢f. No. 10 of this paragraph). The

oJ

00C8 gpg;

may be doubled by a ¢ after the of, e.g. 0, 3?{5\)?, Cf. No. 10,

doubleg,

and see § 371, s.

ALl the

In the medieval dialect azr, dxF, wxr and TwIF generally

Uz, 5

appear as @z, ¥, W, and 3R (for TRT). Cf.§184. Regarding the

modern dialect see § 181, 1.

2,

In some themes ending in &9 (rakdra) with a preceding long

vowel, viz. wF (of ©€%), 3eexr (of 30e29¢), Tewmr (of maceF), and

or ¥R (S§

(stitrag 49"

Sz (of S339C39) of the ancient dialect.

ene and 3wezF are found

also 1n the mediseval one.

The

-

o2

Gan S“bsta

may be doubled, e. g. OTF, QT

faleg,

(see § 371, 3).

Thll‘d pers(

—

117

—

f No

e

oJ

is esz in the modern dialect, and not unfrequently also in the

@”M

mediseval one

5359095, Tt%, etc. occasionally form their participle by means of &3

When

which

in the medieval dialect, e. g. To=F, JO=F (see § 180, 6)

3J\QvJ

Slew e b Ewyl

etc. are used with the final oy, their participles

) and

are 3WeENT, TGN, =N, ete. in the three dialects (see § 180, 3)

E

¥

3

In themes ending in % (lakara

according to Késava), wviz

Ni

@ﬁw 308, of the ancient dialect.

The present-future participle of

§0 10

%ew€ appears twice as %o@u in the Sabdanusisana.

The use of & 10

d

VN,

)

themes with final ¢35 was perha,ps to some extent optional

See § 180, 1

4,

§0 10

In themes ending in c9s (lakira) when it is a substitute (3désa) of

form

¢ (dakara), viz. gwety (of Rwery), WRLY, (of WREY), WRLY, (of Bn@y)

m@@& (Of Jatéa) of the ancient

Beed, (of Berdy), Sy, (of Sweav),

' the

dialect

ﬁmw e3¢ °eI, and S5ed occur also in the medieval one.

y the

Cf. § 234.

oy

O ey

SRR, VWRIRY, ete. form their participle also by means of 3, viz

BRI, VRVBY, ete. in the three dialects

S 1800

) the

5, In four themes ending in 3¢ (nakara, ¢f. § 182), vie. 83 (of @)

1§

\

B (of &%), "R, AR of the ancient dialect

also

6,

In the themes & and &p, viz. Wz (¢f. § 180, 2), TpT

-

{

5

In themes with final 7> (ganta), in which case the 71> suffers elision

It

(10pa, ¢f. § 165, b, 35 211, 7.10), viz. zax (of zary), 30 (of 3wn), Tpes

(of Jperty), 3wz (of 3evdrmy), Bn

(of WHMY), QoRoT (of QUTITY),

g

SEDTD (Of DLIMS), DRT (Of DaRonY) of the ancient dialect

These

07F

1Y

participial forms are occasionally found likewise in the mediseval one

b &

£

oJ

of the themes with a short initial may be

once weD for Bpexd. The

10

doubled, e. 9. 3R¥T

5. (see § 371, 3)

Cf. sx9.of in the remark

All themes ending in 7o form their participle also by means of 3, e. g

ally

BN, SonusS, 3R¥NL, ete. in the three dialects (¢f. § 180, 3)

the

Remark

BN

The present-future participle of @10 (i. e. ¥TWT) often appears as &

9

g

or ¥ (§§ 176. 184) in the ancient and medieval dialect

The Sabdanusasana

nd

(satras 496. 502) teaches that its participle becomes also @ (or &T); we

nd

can substantiate its statement only by one instance which belongs to the ancient

¢

dialect, v2z. by ¥ 0° (for ¥R T, in a Sasana between 680 and 696 A. D.), the

)

third person plural of the future of @7 (see § 201, 1)

The occasionally used

—

118

PR

&% in § 184 might be adduced also in support of the Sabdinushsana’s 3.

of. the tem

&3 (of ®®¢) appears in the paragraph under No. 1.

about thems

8,

In themes that have been formed by means of the suffixes @=)

185, Th

or = (sinta) whether they be causative, transitive or intransitive (§§ 148,

so-called pre

151), in which case the final <o suffers elision,

Kanpada instances are

nouns, an €.

the so-calle

BodFs (of wnRidFRY), @7}\@33 (of eﬁrfi\e‘.’)xo), won (of ¥z, 20T

(of 52R0), wND (of PN, 2T, VPR, VW, T (of FRY), FJT,

There ate n

09

303, 300TA, més SBWT

b

R T,

o VA

oJ

, 008, SRR, R

and oy

instances of themes formed from Samskrita are ©ofez0 (of @ohemm),

the genitive

The circams

VITPOD, Qj?aoé\s BWOT, NBWT, NEADD, NI, 0

)

W35 ES@F&J),

< O

The

future part

2O,

TODOT

o)

Teem, B3R (of BER),

OT ov

o

o

HomtiEy s

instances are found in the ancient and mediseval dialect.

The

-

o

10 valid ohi

may be

A num}

.

doubled, e. g. o33, 303, WO, ADILSY

)

BT, YR (see § 371, 3).

ﬁﬂal 8 W0

All themes with final a5y and s form their participle also by means

(knowing, ¢

of I (§ 180, 3), e. 9. VORI, VEPRT, IR0, VRAST, SI0R03, in the

(stabbing)

three dialects.

DY

=00

TWh

9,

In the themes eo53) and 3g3), these changing their final e into

before 3, viz. ¥dT, 3D (Sabdanuéasana, sitras 473. 480. 513). This

¥, 208,

rule is not in the Sabdamanidarpana, in which the verb e does not

m‘@r Wou

What t

occur at all.

wdT, 3% would, according to No. s, be regular forms of

participle

BT, SOV,

10,

fmd Vﬁé}z&]i

Optionally in eleven of the themes ending in ©f (¢f. No. 1 of this

base (see

§

paragraph), viz. v@zr (of vdof), wans (of vdof), NWOTF, PVADF,

)

-

T oY

£, BRBIF,

oV A oy

F, PEDF, VOTF, BEDF, enr (Sabdinusisana

Datticiple |

klji“iflga (t

stitra 511) in the ancient dialect. wZz+ appears in the Jaimini bharata.

\

The Pro

The o may be doubled after the of, e. g. ¥Bz 7, wwds F (§ 371, 3).

Their usual forms with I are @BSF or ¥BES.F

are he gy

9

WRFF or @a;é'r—,

base iy ygq

'

DSE or m@%g etc. (§ 180, 1; § 371, 3).

1 formeg

18

x

184. The fourth suffix of the present-future participle

iverh g

Originally it may have had the form of & too, as it first appears as a

The i

substitute of & in ST (of &), BT, (ofwfaoe), 85 (of 8o), wx, (of

thug We f

wTf, see § 183, 1.7, remark). ez (or vz, see § 189) optionally appears

as e In the ancient and medieval dialect (¢f. § 223). @3 (for 2%),

778 A‘ D.“

338 (for ), VT (for 2055 occur only in the medizval one, in which

(g §35a1]

there are likewise eSe&® (for Beey,) and ope® (for Zpew, BReR).

18 1

The medizeval dialect occasionally shows the forms es&® (for o3, @,

. § 17

—

|

P—

s o3,

¢f. the remark about &z in § 183, 7) and e® (for w3 or a wezr;

about theme 2390° see §§ 52. 170. 210).

§ AR

an

185

The simplest and, as it would appear, true explanation of the

\ 148

so-called present-future participle is to take it to be the genitive of verbal

65 are

nouns, an explanation which is analogous to that given in § 178 regarding

the so-called past participle (see also § 169) and well suits to its use.

i

There are numerous verbal nouns in Kannada formed by suffixing ), 53

o —

%

and o to verbal themes (see § 243); such nouns allow the formation of

the genitive singular by means of its primitive termination ¢ (§ 141, 1).

@Zd)

Z

&0

The circumstance that many of the verbal nouns used to form the present-

future participle do not exist nowadays apart from that use, constitutes

1

h

no valid objection to the offered explanation.

3 be

A number of verbal nouns ending in 3) of which the genitive with

11,3)

final e would exactly form the present-future participle, are 5e5°:)

means

(knowing, genitive Wl ), VP (perishing, genitive VP D), B’

1 the

(stabbing), eveoJ) (remaining), 23y (begging), wosy (being pleased),

%5'23;@, EQ&Q@ éef?;?), é@‘f}@, 593;\3)7 ;3@0@7 Fgﬁﬁ\), ;36@) }3.@@@, 555\)@, e

nt0 B

This

), B[, [V, 30¢), Ao, BB, BAR); SRFT, LN, SReYF,

moozgys would be such as end in ). See § 243, 4, 18 a. 24.

5 108

What the grammarian KéSava states regarding the past relative

ms Of

participle that in combination with suffixes it forms a krit or krillinga

and vacyalinga or viséshyadbinalinga, in other words a declinable verbal

f this

base (see § 177. 200), he does state likewise regarding the present-future

)0

Fl

participle in combination with suffixes, it forming the bhavishyantikrit or

Heand

krillinga (¢f. § 174 and see § 177).

rata,

The pronominal forms and pronouns mentioned in § 177 (¢f. 193. 200)

are the suffixes also for this participle, and besides nearly every declinable

Baf,

base is used after it. If it is followed by a noun, a consecutive compound

18 formed (¢f. § 177 and see § 253, 2, d).

About its combination with

adverbs see § 282.

See further §§ 254. 282. 298, 5. 316, 1. (330). 364,

5 ®

48 4

The suffixes ©o and ©¢5 appear, as in § 177, also as 2o and 2¥*;

(of

thus we find 263°3p0, TSR 0, 38R, 0 (in a Sdsana between 680 and 696

pears

A. D)), d&Jpo (in a Sasana of 707 A. D.), and @&%ef (in one of about

778 A. D.). The plural esg¢ has also the form of 2,0¢ in 9_9;33'3306, eme,?.%ot?

’3%)»

phich

(in a Sasana between 750 and 814 A. D.).

186. The primitive meaning of the so-called present-future participle

1)

9

(¢f. § 179), if derived from the genitive singular of verbal nouns, will

e

P—

120

.

08, B

appear from the following instances, viz. &°s30 (d&ﬁ95+ 90), he or a

man of knowing (either now or in future), ¢. e. he who knows or will

e (0

know; eCPPef (882°S 4 wee), she or a woman of knowi

ng. 7. e. she who

to}]

When

knows or will know; e€®Jny ($€2°=4 evrd), it or a child, etc. of

98 10 3 ¢

knowing, ¢.e. it which knows or will know; ©€2°Zof (we2°ss 4+ eof), they

§ 215,5, I

or people (male or female) of knowing, é. e. they who know or will know;

in the thre

WEPIY (BCPT + wvay), they or children, ete. of knowing, é. e. they which

e (Of 5

know or will know; ¥33=n® ©29°3o, he of knowing Kannada, i.e. he

(or one) who knows Kannada; ez shof, grass of eating, ¢. e. grass

Infinitiy

which (an animal) eats or will eat; 395 Jewf, water of clearing, <. e.

1n 4 vowel,

water that becomes clear or will become clear; 38¥s ¥8FTo, an ear-

(of Sae),

ornament of shining, ¢.e. an ear-ornament which shines or will shine;

(. § 215

3wemr ww,0o, a letter of appearing, ¢.e. a letter which appears or will

Some 1

<)

appear.

kalpa) the

In the above instances actually existing nouns appear the genitive

O

of which presents the participle; in the now following instances nouus

four theme

before it,

are to be assumed to exist: — m%o (of an ev$,53), he of being (or having);

ema;e;s, she of being (or having); emgﬁi)cm, it of being (or having); FISs*

theme &

w0% o, riches of being he, 4. e. he who has riches; %0 T, (of an 9_95\33

(. § 215

) =30, an animal of being young, . e. an animal which is young; 9

Nagav:

b (of & HIBITY) 335333, a black bee of humming, 4. e. a black bee which

g gy

hums or will hum; 2xF (of a wHF) sowo, time of coming, ¢. e. time

(f.§ 210,

which comes; S@ox3 (of a 3BITY) 903Fo, a business of making, 4. e.

In the

a business which (somebody) makes or will make; @ex0s3 (of a 0eRIY))

!

e § 315

w3930 To, a chowrie of waving, ¢. e. a chowrie which (somebody) waves or

0, 4 forg

will wave; 5009 o° (of a ADVVARR they of making, 4. e. they who make or

ST

@UQK@J) f

will make; ZweryZ=Ty (of & BRERTY), he of going, ¢. e. he who goes or

will go; ZweroS=H, she of going, ¢. e. she who goes or will go; Bwenos

I the Jog

v a g

@, it of going, ¢. e. it which goes or will go.

D).

187. What Europeans call the infinitive of a‘ verb Kannada gram-

In the

marians call 3 o3sgF, <. e. the meaning of a verb, and then the object,

inﬁllitive W

purpose or scope of (a verb’s) action, 85033@?50%@@%3?5. Regarding the

explanation of the infinitive see § 188.

There are four kinds of the infinitive, viz.

th‘e inﬁnin‘,

1,

The first infinitive is formed by suffixing ¢9e5¢ to the verbal theme,

I 1@@1} ( 8@

\

in which case, by euphonic junction (§ 213 seq.), a theme’s final en

h} e |

5 f«j’-}mﬁrg

disappears, e.g. ®3e* (of B0f), vweaes (of wom), TP (of %), TRV,

D'&t.),

—

PSSR

121

16 0L 3

FRFF, Ruer, 3TeF, SRF, BECITF, [owr, JpNCIeF, Berdes (of Bery),

r will

SPB* (of IRy, g ef (of F03y,), VG oReF (of VI DA).

16 Who

otey of

When the theme ends in = or o, @ may be suffixed immediately,

, bhey

as in ¥3 ©es (a form that was occasionally used in the ancient dialect,

§ 215, 5, letter @), but generally an enunciative o3s¢ is used between, in

know;

which

in the three dialects, e. g. ©e*oef (of ©e2?), LPWef, NIRRT, HES

e, he

Bowf (of 3E53), Bdodoer, StsBcdoer. (f. § 215, 2, letters f. 7.

grass

Infinitives with ese of monosyllabic themes that are a vowel or end

(8

o}l

in a vowel, are &o30wf (of &), T00* (of T9), Ze030e¥ (of é’e), 3R e030e*

0 ¢ar-

(of 3R¢), Swecdver (of 3we), BecSoer (of Be), JeWowF (of D).

shine;

Cf. § 215, 2, letters d. g. k. m.

7 il

Some monosyllabic themes ending in o3s¢ optionally double (dvitvavi-

kalpa) the o3s¢ before ¢ e.g. Jposies or 33;@,0336936 (of Rpo3s?), BP0

nitive

©f Or FRWyos (of FRwF), RS or Redye* (of Ro3se); the odos of the

nouns

four themes ernvc3s, o, 03¢ and ooy is always doubled (nityadvitva)

Ting)

before it, viz. en03o.ef, BB eF, WRIef and K03 oS,

The dissyllabic

J e

theme gk optionally doubles its o3, viz. wTohe® or GTRy e,

| 9%)

£ §.215, 7, ¢

)}

) Q0

Nagavarma (stitra 234) suffixes @wes to the lengthened theme of 3¢

which

and of, viz. se0wf, wadef (¢f. o8 under No. 4 of this paragraph).

1me

Gf. § 210.

)

p i 0

In the modern dialect ee¢ is used only in the so-called passive

b

)

(see § 315); in all other cases it uses eew, 4. e. ©ef with a euphonic

e OF

ev, & form that is not unfrequently found in the mediseval one too, e. g.

ke or

BIR®Y, BTWY, NV, 30WI, TIVAIWY, 2‘5:33\%@)3, and occasionally also

63 0L

in the later ancient one, e. g. ®¥9oy, diﬁw, PONILY, BN, BTV

)

(in a sasana of 1123 A. D.), D0eF AL, B (in a Sasana of 1182

5. D).

Cf. § 96, remark; see § 121, a.

ram

In the ancient and medieval dialect a dative is formed from the

bj b

£0

infinitive with e9e* by means of & (see § 120, letters a. b), e. g. &nd,,

y the

RS, DeCIS,

[IRONS

8_7

sﬁoi‘fﬁoﬁo%, ?éfmweﬁ_&, @2856&. The dative of

the infinitive with e9ex is formed by means of & or @, in the modern

dialect (see § 121, letter ¢), e. g. 3g 0% or 38,99, WBOF or WO T,.

10es

In the later ancient dialect we meet with the curious forms Pprdws?

|

¥

n

(;?.3;9716393% , BNes (= Ejﬁ@%, in a S4sana of 1123 A. D.; see § 121, q,

OV

‘[)a.t.).

16

——

122

P

About ®¥&f § 208 is to be compared.

4, The

b The way of

2,

The second infinitive ends in the vowel es. The grammarian

sef and o,

Késava states that this e has originated by the elision (lopa) of the

final o¢ of eyeye.

This statement is only in so far of value, as it makes

the same a

ialect; oce

any rule about the way of suffixing the ¢ unnecessary, because it is

remark ).

identical with that of esess,

This infinitive is used in the three dialects.

Instances are &R03) or

Tnstance

FR®WI, NG or ﬁojo%, 80, WO, @, [WE, TRER, AN, TBRENR,

B0k, G

FROI, B0, B3, 0, To03, Se.

6?033; pVE]

§ 215, 1.,

In the infinitive formed by ¢ from themes with final » and o a

sort of lengthening is allowed in the modern dialect, in which the e

The Bas

disappears (cf. the accusative and genitive under letter ¢ in § 130), e. g.

has g3 (1

5e¢ may be used for meod, wde for 3.

The gra

An abnormal infinitive of Fnef (FRHy) is Fwe, often used in the

it not unfr

modern dialect.

Cf. 3pe3 in § 172; Hwe in § 206.

setl see {§

Remark.

188, M

by the folloy

The author once entertained the opinion (see Dictionary under © 4) that the

infinitive (or verbal noun, see § 188) ending in ©® had a dative in the South-

f to eat;

Mahratta country, e. g. 3RB% or SRET,, WIF or WOT,, and with the lengthening

it the timg

of ©, J9@F (for I0@T), 2INT (for 850,F, Nudigattu, page 36).

Such

neke; 3

dative forms are in common use there; but, instead from the infinitive (or verbal

(Somebody

noun) with final ®, we now derive them from a verbal noun formed by means

30h, % 4

of the suffix = (for &, see § 243, 4, 20. 27), ¢. e. in the present instances from

SRBIS (= SNRBIT), WD, IR B, \%3\)2)\)5, the ¥0S being changed into % and %,

lov; o

viz. INVH, W3R, INLRRE, 35@)@, and then again into ® and &, viz, SN, WS,

WO, whil

short fufiy

SRe@d, 839, (cf. § 181, note ¢, and see &7 in Dictionary; concerning the change

of @ into % see § 117, a, Nom. and Ace.; §§ 177. 185. 193).

An instance

But. e

with % is: JI93) @3@‘3% SRE 9K, Bwees @UE“S{Q@G@ SRE @8, a word (or words)

Yomehoy f,

is (or are) made for saying, boiled rice is made for eating.

ey oftep

—

3, The third infinitive is represented by the verbal theme itself, and

169, 173,

is occasionally found in the three dialects.

It always immediately

That g

i g Verhy]

precedes a verb, ©es° DR (:@6&9030 zbc%o), BeP TR, (=B

\grie\'ing1 |

©903, ), BEPRY RO (=9ePR BWoTv), T8 FIR (=TFB-), I

Tty

BR0T (=TBW-), TR WA (= TROK-), 89 KL (= 3SFW0-), SRM TIT

thl‘agh, etC.

(=30r-), 37 B (=33c%0-), IR e (=330%-), SI1R (=xTH

td ¢t

38), R IRy (=TT0N-), A3 W (=3BR-).

e (s

RSN

—

123

The fourth infinitive consists of the theme with the suffix .

4,

marian

The way of annexing the « to verbal themes is identical with that of

of the

ey and es,

This infinitive of which the meaning and use is nearly

) makes

the same as that of No. 1, belongs to the ancient and medieval

s 1t 1

dialect; occasionally it is found also in modern poetry (§§ 365. 366,

remark a).

nnt

WJO

Instances are oF, 3RS, TNV, M, 38, w3, JoG, Beesd; FLod or

AT

%Jaoioqs, opOdy or 33;@0336; @008y or ©308y; emo&)é, 230308, zooSaQS, K903 ;

H03; SoR0D, TBROD; T[IB, WRWF, peR; VRS, WD, Wress.

¢f.

§ 215, 1, e.

1

o b

th

eGﬂ

The Basavapurana suffixes the o> once to the long base of Zo#, as it

0), .4

has 398 (12, 43; ¢f. Nagavarma’s soces under No. 1; see § 210).

The grammarian KéSava calls the infinitive with o, from a meaning

in the

it not unfrequently has, the locative state or condition (satisaptami or

sati, see §§ 188, remark; 286. 365).

188. The force of the so-called infinitive in Kannada may be expressed

by the following particles: — to, in its prepositional meaning, as ready to go,

that the

, South-

fit to eat; to, denoting purpose, end, and futurity; so as to, so that;

thening

at the time that, when, while, e. g. 3oef, 28, to bring; JIPBeF, I, to

Such

make; IBSoef, IR, to walk; IBeFf, F&, so as to perish, so that

: verbal

(somebody or something) perishes or perished; IBcSoef, FIB0, IA,

f means

F©03y, so as to fall down, so that (somebody or something) falls or fell

os from

down; ma@, mo®es, when (somebody or something) sings or sang; w3,

) aﬂd é"!

wow¢, while (something or somebody) comes or came.

Cf. the use of the

23, wj'

change

short infinitive with s in §§ 170. 171. 210.

nstance

But these special significations are not primitive; they are derived

somehow from the verbal noun which the infinitive originally was and

r ords)

very often still is.

Cf. the verbal noun in § 100, and its use in §§ 165.

169. 173. 205, and also in the so-called passive (§ 315).

i

and

That the infinitive ending in @e* (¥, expressing ‘being’, ¢condition’)

Jiately

is a verbal noun, is an indisputable fact, because e.g. ©C3o¢ means

9o

‘grieving’ and ‘to grieve, etc.’, evede®, ¢ ploughing’ and ¢ to plough, ete.’,

e

)

swRer, ‘swelling’

and ¢to swell, etc.’, %% ¢, ‘thrashing’ and ¢to

) o’oDf

thrash, etc.’, 3p@os, ¢joining’ and ¢to join, etc.’, LBef, ¢lying down’

AL, 4

250N

and ‘to lie down, etc.’, and because this infinitive is declinable, as it has

a dative (see § 187, 1).

16%

o—

124

———

The character of being originally a verbal noun can also be attributed

(yhen the k

the genitir

to the second infinitive, viz. that with final €9, as e.g. @9z means ‘cooking’

Let us

and ‘to cook, etc.’, ©@w, ‘compressing’ and ¢to compress, etc.’, o3,

«lifting up’ and ¢to lift up, etc.’, e, ‘gaining’ and ‘to gain, etc.’, 3¢,

infinitive w

‘ending’ and ‘to end, etc.’, 3wz, ‘putting on’ and ¢to put on, etc.’,

own peculi

servant’s W

W, ‘coming’ and ‘to come, etc.’, JWew, ¢losing’ and ‘to lose, etc.’.

Cf. § 205, 1, b, singular.— Verbal nouns, however, corresponding to the

female serv:

J. e, he orde

infinitive formed by e and the insertion of o3¢ between it and themes

i.. he kill

ending in & and (as to form e. g. TR, 553’030), are nowadays

scarcely met with in Kannada, although a few nouns end in o, e. g.

(1t) so that

-‘:?Jas‘f%odo, w3, BHG o, TG 03, WP, BRG W, - We think that ol

i, ¢ he wen

There are numerous

he pushed s

has been superseded by & or 33 in verbal nouns.

. ¢ when |

verbal nouns that end in & (see § 243, 4, 27) and some that end in =3

(see § 243, 4, 20), and, besides, of the above nouns, 23m& ol appears

coming’, 7

also as BHAS I, and BRB as BHS .

Remember that in the

‘the sun g

Regardi

present verbal participle (§ 172) ¢ is not unfrequently used instead of

o3¢

At the same time we may conjecture that for verbal nouns,

instead of themes with the formative o3y, the simple theme ending in

The Spe1

e and

oJ

n

N

was preferred (¢f. §§ 100. 187, 3).

¢an $0 to g

The third infinitive, being nothing else but the verbal theme itself

which is very often used as a noun, requires no special remark.

and b, locai;

MMWM§

Some verbal nouns which are equal in form to the fourth infinitive 7. e.

t. 9. that th

that with final », are eru@ﬁi, ‘loving’ and ¢‘to love, etc., '?r’ég)j, ‘a

structure’ and <to construct, etc.’, ¥z, ¢‘throwing down’ and ¢to throw

189, T

down, etc.’, ¥3, ¢a chip’ and ¢to chip, etc.’, 309, ‘killing’ and ¢to kill,

thanges g

etc.’, =R, ‘laughing’ and <to laugh, etc.’, $3pd, ¢joining’ and ‘to join,

“the thyee

etc.’, RPEIB (or BwEDB), <a load for the head’ and *to carry on the head,

0 fengeg”

ete.’, 239033, ‘cultivating’ and ¢to cultivate, etc.”. — Verbal nouns which

The th]‘a

correspond to the infinitive with o suffixed by means of the euphonic

are calloq

03 (e g. IR, Fo@d, IB03), we have not found in Kannada; it

The

may be that in such nouns o3s¢ was, for the sake of euphony, changed

—

e

98 0

into n¢ (¢f. SRR, V1R, S008, I0EPR) or I (¢f. 3EII, FLI).

it thg e

That the infinitive with 5 was considered to be a verbal noun in

It wi)

ancient times seems to be corroborated by the following two sentences

pal‘ti(ﬁiple |

quoted by KéSava (under stitra 134, from Sujanottamsa Hampa raja?):—

(Present.) i

gwéo%oi’)oo 8y=8 Seed, and %8, 330 W4 RPoB, literally < an ordering of

d;ja CS;

the king without fear’ and ¢a touching of the pudendum muliebre’, . e.

—

Dast Wl&th

[ES—

125

—

iy

fed

«when the king ordered fearlessly’, and ¢ when the p. m. touched’, in which

ooking’

the genitive stands before that infinitive as before a noun. Cf. 352, 1a.

y O3

Let us show by some further instances how the meaning of the

8

¢

infinitive was attached to the verbal noun by Kannada people in their

(

?

own peculiar way: — 353y, Ro8Z0 R03% O VRVTRo, literally ‘a female

t

servant’s work a doing he became ready’, 4. e. he became ready to do a

0 the

female servant’s work; Q¢do gT3e o, lit. *he ordered a bringing water’,

themes

4. e. he ordered to bring water; 3go° %@5@0, lit. < an eating he killed’,

wadays

i. e. he killed to eat; 39 meed, lit. ‘an understanding tell!’, 7. e. tell

), g

(it) so that (I) understand!; SR Bpexo, lit. ‘a making he went’,

A

hat

W

i. e. he went to make; ¥8 IWodRo, lit. ‘a falling down he pushed’, . e.

merous

he pushed so that (it) fell down; ;3§D 2pness, lit. <the bard a praising’,

dm 3

i. e. when the bard praises or praised; eg w3, lit. ‘the elephant a

1,ppears

coming’, 7. e. when the elephant comes or came; Rexe¥ Sowrdes, lit.

n the

‘the sun a rising’, ¢. e. when the sun rises or rose.

Regarding instances etc. see § 365.

tead of

Remark.

noun.s,

ing 1o

The specific meaning of ‘at the time that’, ¢ when’, ¢while’ of the suffix

¥ or ¥, which, like the suffix © (§ 187, 4), it often has in the infinitive,

can so to say be accounted for by the meaning of ©©°, @ in § 109, letters a

g itself

and &, locative.

The suffix «, expressing 8283 2, reminds one of the 9 of the

locative in § 109, letters a, b, ¢, as a final 9@ is occasionally used for «; compare

76 0 0

e. g. that the ancient form of the instrumental is @in § 109, letters 6 and c.

4

[

) throw

189

The grammarian KéSava observes ‘‘the verbal action (kriy8)

to kil

changes according to the three times or tenses (kalatrayaparinami), and

‘““the three (forms of) the conjugated verb (kriyapada) tell the three times

toJ 1

01

or tenses’.

o head

hich

The three tenses (§§ 144. 145) are formed by suffixes (Agama) which

are called «the indicators of the three tenses (kdlatrayastiaka)”.

!

phone

ada;

The names of the suffixes are 3, ; TT, 3D, 3B, 3T, H®; 8 W'D,

5, ®. Of these &, 3 are used for the past tense, 33, &%), 3, 37, BB

—

ﬁ

for the present tense, and &, @,

o

B, & for the future one.

)

1

It will be observed that © and g are the forms of the past relative

oul

participle (see § 175, 1. 2; § 176), and &, 2, =, o and & those of the

(present-) future one (§§ 180-184).

pl

e, o3,

~

33

2

. and z®, the tense-suffixes of the present, are the

¢, !

r

past relative participle with final © and 8 to which w3 BT and oz

b/

are annexed.

oz, and o= we have met with as substitutes of ez,

the present-future relative participle of 31y (see § 183, 7, remark; § 184);

Isf pers.

ez 18 another form of asi-’.a,\) and ez,

Ind pes.

[

a3% is found only in the mediseval dialect wherein = very frequently

takes the place of 3,

nd pers,

masc,

08

190, Of the tense-suffixes mentioned in § 189 the modern dialect uses

e and @ for the past tense, and & (exceptionally also 2y and &, see

§ 182 and § 195 seq.) for the present-future one. Its suffixes for indicating

fom

[

the present tense are, as a rule, peculiar, being ev3 and evs,, 4. e. two of

the terminations of the present verbal participle (see § 172).

nent,

Nl

191

It is necessary to remark that z and 3 are but two represen-

tatives of the finals of the variously formed past relative participle; they

Abou ¢

are to indicate that all the forms of the past relative participle as

The pe

based on the past participle (see §§ 155-164; §§ 175, 1. 2, and 176)

are meant.

are also th

The rules given regarding the formation of the (present-) future

temark |,

relative participle (§ 180 seq.) hold good also when it is used as the

2, The

theme of the future tense.

medival i

192. In conjugation (dkhyitamarga) personal terminations (vibhakti,

pratyaya, akhyatavibhakti, kriyavibhakti) are used. They are suffixed

Istpers,

to the participial forms that indicate the tenses (§§ 189-191). When

nd s, M

a verb ends in such a termination, it is a conjugated verb (pada, akhyata-

3rd pers,

pada, kriyApada; see §§ 69. 144).

mase, g

By means of the personal terminations the three persons (purusha,

fem. ( g

§ 147) in the singular and plural are formed.

neut, g

It is the custom of Kannada grammarians to speak of only six (€9

An ogegg

personal terminations (though there are actually ten), adducing those

Perhaps g gy

for the first person (prathamapurusha) feminine singular (and plural)

and those for the third person (uttamapurusha) neuter singular and

-

37 The

Rotery g

plural separately; we shall exhibit them all at one view in the next

paragraph.

198. In presenting the personal terminations let us use the European

way of placing and naming the persons, viz. first person (uttamapurusha),

second person (madhyamapurusha), and third person (prathamapurusha).

1, The following are the personmal terminations of the present, past

and future tense in the ancient dialect:

127

oz,

Singular.

Plural.

§ 184);

st pers.

o, (before vowels) Og°

o (if not followed by a vowel); )

(¢f. § 137, a, nominative plural).

2nd pers

B .

20°

uently

3rd pers

masc

50, (before vowels) e5a¢;

9% wof (§ 198, 3, remark; § 200, 1);

305 1868

WO

o (§ 198, 8, remark; § 201, 1);

55) 8¢

3o (198, 3, remark).

dicating

fem

e g bt (8 198,39,

VT (0°).

o of

remark).

neut.

PORY; BB, BEY; ¥3y;

ovagy); exceptionally @5 (§ 194,

!

presel-

39

remark 1; § 198, 1).

o they

About @z and ¢33) of the negative see §§ 209. 210.

iple a8

4 176

The personal terminations o, %o, ¥, w%*, wuds, ©o°, and YO

are also the suffixes for the krillingas in §§ 177. 179. 185. 186. 198,

remark 1. 253.

future

98 the

2

)

The following are the corresponding personal terminations of the

medieval dialect:

Singular.

Plural.

ibhakt

N

suffxed

1st pers.

0, (before vowels) g% O89;

od

353

od

-,

When

2nd pers.

(aof); al.

khyate-

3rd pers.

mase. ©o, (before vowels) ©9g; ¥ Y; ©

(©0°); wo.

fem. (©ef); 9%,

(®0F); V3o,

)U,FllSha’»

neut. B BB, BIY; B3y 3,

V)

00

An occasional ®%> for @vR in MSS. for the third person singular neuter is

: (G\jwi:’

)

perhaps a mistake of the copyist.

g those

| plul’&”

3, The following are the corresponding personal termina.tions' of the

modern dialect:

Jar 80l

Singular.

Plural.

he nest

1st pers.

SHEHES

DY)y BN

a0

uropes?

2nd pers.

e R

pumSha)?

3rd pers.

masc.

2930

09

o

(SloN

3)

fem

9%

509

o,

neut.

WTe; Bo; 3.

V)

e

128

P —

Remarks.

2o, Meat

From a comparison of the forms of the terminations in the three dialects it

of the hein

tense 1s tl

follows that the sdnné in <0, the sénné in 0, and the S (i.e. the sonné and a

euphonic V) in ©®% and 23 are not radical.

that 1ts

The sonnd or its substitute D in the first person plural reminds one of the

manner, 1

attention o0

plural of the neuter pronouns (§ 136) and of the sonné and its substitutes 39°

and D of that of the personal ones (§ 137).

or futare

@Ry, wuiy, 9B (for AR, ®IY (for ¥Ry, 3 (for ¥R or BW or YVB,

reply 1s, |

¢f. §§ 116. 122. 1388, d, 8. 173. 265), are the demonstrative neuter pronouns

remark b,

singular ©%, QVm, BB (§§ 90. 102, 8, letter &) and the corresponding pro-

The pr

nominal forms; 9=, 20 are the plural of ¥R, Y& (§ 136).

©o, ¥=0 and (the crude form) © mean ‘he’ (see § 115; § 138, d, 3 and

18 as follos

remark; § 177), ©9° and ©%) (i, e. ©¥¥° with a euphonic @), ‘she’ (c/. §§ 177.

P~

In %0 and %% © has taken the form of % (¢f. § 117, a).

The &

It pess,

185. 186).

in ¥9° is either simply euphonically lengthened, or ©%° stands for the pronoun

9 Ps.

©0¢ and ©00 (7. e. ¥0° with a euphonic ®V) are the plural of ¥o, ®%, ©,

©¢° and @9 (¢f. §§ 119, a; 134, 177).

In %0°, @ has taken the form of 2.

2nd pers,

The & in &T° is either euphonically lengthened or stands for the pronoun ®ST°.

9, and ©®03° are connected with the %, 3 of the pronoun of the second

person (§ 1388); their plural %" has taken the plural sign 0° (for ¥T° ete.;

31d pers,

¢f. §119); 90 is 90° and an honorific ¥ B0 often being an honorific plural

mase,

(ef- § 205, 2. 3, plural).

The @ in », 20, AJ), and D is connected with the 2 of

the pronoun of the first person (§ 138).

By the way it may be stated that from ©o, ©3), ®, ©¥%°, ¥& the remote,

fom

intermediate and proximate demonstrative pronouns are formed by prefixing %,

@0 and B by means of a euphonic °, viz. ®S0 (¥4 & o), lit. ‘that-he’,

@FR), ¥F; WI9, lit. that-she’, ¥I9); 200, lit. ‘this intermediate-he’; YVI¥°;

ngug,

@30, lit. ‘this-he’, BT, B|F; AT, 9P, ¥, ¥ and A being other forms of

%, ¥ and 3 (see § 265).

Cf. § 122 about ¢, &, °.

194

The personal terminations of the preceding paragraph are, as

remarked (§ 192), suffixed to the participial forms that indicate the

Otllel ]

tenses which in the case of the present tense are ©4 vz, O+ 9%, S+

NOj Op

]

gy B4 L in the ancient dialect, and generally ©4 »® in the

304.L )

O

medizeval one.

¥

%

¥

Let us take as an illustration the verb Fe¥¢ to hear, the relative past

%

L

83y

participle of which is %e% (F¢%° + ), meaning ‘of the having heard’

(see § 179); to this e. g. ez, meaning ‘of the being’ (§§ 186. 201), is

T@;+J@

added, and then e. g. the personal termination of the first person singular

LA VR 5}0) (

.

$29

JR——

2o, meaning ¢ 1°

So the literal translation would be ¢of the having heard-

alects it

of the being-I’, 4. e. I who is one who has heard, or I hear

The present

18 and a

tense is therefore a sort of compound tense (see § 31

T'o comprehend

that its meaning can be expressed by Kannada people in the above

e of the

manner, it is necessary to know that they, in order to show their ready

fos &

attention or obedience, not unfrequently use the past tense for the present

or future one

For

1mstance

if you

ay to some one

Come !

the

) C'i)

reply is, I came, ¢.e. my coming is an accomplished fact

See § 366

)ronouas

remark b

ing pto

The present tense in the ancient dialect of the verb @ees accordingly

3 and

is as follows

Singular.

Plural.

gl

1st pers

‘@Q%ﬁ o (F¢9 4 ¥ | 20) or

@eeﬁ

Do (Fe¥ + 9T 4 20) or %%ﬁ

The ¥

%e%ﬁ

o (¥ + 9D 40),

(E?\Qj R +0), and B %30\){5) (%eg)

p[’OIlOlHl

I hear

+9B40) or TP 3 53) (TP 493 -

0

Vv

Y, Yy

1

2%Y), we hear

2nd pers.

TeS

Fed 19T1-29035¢)

Fe

&34

20° (B¢¥ +921-a0%) or TP . TS

I Of

n v

;'D

(z‘?%" O3

(

%8

ZG%

¥ +9% 490%), you hear

o second

JRH O G)

;\);é

hou hearest.

5%, et

3rd pers

o D 1l

masc

%e%ﬁ

o (¥ %3+@w+u0) or

T3 T (@Q%f _}_@w_{_@Os) or Te%

ho 0

%e%ﬁ

X (Ee%ﬁ 4 I 1 ©0),

(T 193 1 90%), they hear

he hear%

\ 1em0t

fem

FeP Do (Fe¥ 1 OV 09°)

Fe

e§ o°

(v

Ao

e L OTLVT?) or FTeF T T

Q

fixing ¥

or FeF D ¢F (TP 40T 4

Fe¥ 0P 10T, they hear

that-he

©¢%), she hears

§v

neut

FeP R0 (T LT L9R)

DB Y (TS + O34 ) or Fed

forms 0F

or ¥ ) T (TP 9D

3 53 (38 498+ 9I), they hear

Q) it hears

418 a

th

Other instances in the first person singular are Fo83To (FoBB 4+ VT +

oo

¢

20) OF BIRTD o (RBTR+ ¥, + o, of T8, to drink), aae% 520 (aas%cs

?

;J

th

WT 4 20) OI gasfc’) ww o (gafé R @N 29, of ga?’ao to become abashed)

’5

T Do (ve)+aaw+oso) or o, N 0 (vo+aw+ 80, Of Fof, to learn), é’;sow

ive P

(§§+ 9%+ cQO) or 5

5,0 (5’§+ @54_@0 of 3of, to bring), %J@“'ﬂo (%Jaes

" heald

+ BT 4 00) Or ﬁﬂ’ﬁﬁ o (%fw+ 9T + o, of ToRy, to give), ©3 330 (a3+

i

1\) 18

BT+ o20) OF BB D0 (B4 8T + 20, of &, to give)

Se(, § 366

sigul¥

17

e

130

e

The present tense of Fep or Fewo (see § 166), in the medieval dialect,

femining A1

in which &, <of the being’, is nearly constantly used instead of &z or

About bhi

&9%, 1s as follows:

9 T

Plural.

the 3nd pe

Singular.

1st pers. %Q%gaéo (occasionally ¢¥ 20), %egém,

%e%aﬁ%@.

&g pAler

g, or Fe9n®o (occasionally

relative pa

see §§ 171

Fe9330), FeLTBRY,

TOPRT

2nd pers. ‘@eg% (or TERT).

'-ée%goaob.

19, |

3rd pers.

(Be$ Bos), Beg B0,

presens e

mase. F¢g Do, Fe¥f TR (Or 2e93 Do, etc.).

cal struct

fem. (%Q%&%ﬁ‘), @Q%&“ﬂés

(0r FEPRTYF,

(Bes ©o), Feg BT,

changed t

etc.) .

the perso

neut. ‘-@Q%{i’c‘éodo (Or TERTRB/OW).

%ega@.

to the ten

Other instances in the first person singular are azrXo (of BT, to

Its fon

be), wgFo (of o7, to say), FDFBo (of ¥, to rush upon), FRET0 Or

3RBTo (of #a, to fall down), TR To (of Fomds or SR, to give), TR

Ko (of SR, totake), X3 Bo (of mao3r, todie), wrdo (of &ns, to become),

Ist pers,

BReBBo (of Bweny, to go), BeePITo (or BeLPTRo, of Becdy, to tell).

Regarding eado, etc. see § 201, 2.

2nd pers,

Remarks.

3rd pers,

1mase,

1, . There is one irregularly formed present in the ancient language, namely

that of eroes, to be, which changes its vowel e into 2o in that tense (except in

the 3rd person singular neuter, ¢f. also § 180, remark after 6) and receives 1o

fom,

participial form to indicate the tense. As %9°is alsoa verbal noun, the personal

terminations (§ 193) appear to have been attached to the genitive of this %%,

ngut, |

i. e. ¥, WO (W¥ 4 0), e. g. meaning ‘of the being-I’, i.e. T am. A peculiarity

is that it uses the suffix ¥® (for X)) in the 3rd person plural neuter.

Its

paradigm is:

Singular.

Plural

1st pers.

%o,

WS

WHOIE .

WP ot

The

2nd pers.

3rd pers.

Which b,

masc.

W&o,

WS O°

A fo

fem

WEE,

WHROE

8 tompg

neut.

AEDD

&3

Wy

L

QU originally @V (i, e. V¥ 13, § 122), is a verbal noun (bhavavacana)

0easiops

meaning literally ‘a being-it’, and as sach is used for the 3rd person masculine,

thg

of

E—

131

[ —

lialgt,

feminine and neuter, singular and plural in the medieval and modern dialect.

4% 0L

About bhavavaéanas see the paragraphs quoted in § 243.

2,

The author of the Sabddnusisana, against Késava's sfitra 73, makes

the 3rd person singular of the present tense a krit or krillinga and declines it,

e. g 3RLABITo, IRABIOR, in his shtras 447, 448 ; Késava calls only the past

relative participle and the present-future relative participle a declinable krit;

see §§ 177. 185.

195,

In § 190 it has been stated that modern Kannada has a peculiar

0,

present tense.

It has, however, not abandoned the use of the grammati-

)W

cal structure of the present tense as it appears in § 194, but bas

changed the form of the tense-suffix e®, ¢of the being’, combined with

the personal terminations (see § 201, 2), and given a different meaning

to the tense.

f, 10

Its forms of €938 combined with the personal terminations are as follows

f:g or

Singular.

Plural.

for @I

),

Ist pers

2ER0 (D)

Besy (0F) for Y (9B + ).

(2T + IR)).

ell).

2nd pers

. &g (&) for ©& (¥3 4 ).

&eD (8:0) for ©&0 (DF + 99).

3rd pers

masc

. O (TR) for B (¥

ToTy (¥TY) for ©BB (VR 4 &)

mely

+ V).

pt in

fem. HaF (Y%) for 2% (93

&30 (380) for ©TVI (VT 4 ).

onal

+ %),

(3%

neut. %030 (E1V) for an @30

HoY (w) for ¥IY (¥ 4 EIJ).

ity

(@3 + 33, which must

JIE

have been another form

of @&)cfm).

The initial &¢ of the forms of Regy, &e, TR, TP, %ey, etc.,

which have been formed by metathesis and lengthening the vowels (see

the frequently used 52z for esxozy in § 201, 2, and compare the noun

SPe for evgowo, and the adverbs &eR, won for a®A, ¥xA in § 212, 4),

is commonly left out, so that the forms in parenthesis gy, 8, © 9, Y9,

Sy, ete. are in general use, whereas those with z¢ are at present only

13)

occasionally still employed for the verb =gy (©6.0%), to be, especially when

16y

the o) of emphasis is added (see § 196).

iLirfe

L)

S

Let us give a paradigm of the present tense of @3y (acf), the

wntingent J

be' ar ¢ o

past relative participle of which is fa% (=RF

b

see §§ 160, 7; 175, 1),

1 = ey7

‘of the having been’.

(0me ", ede

Singular.

Plural.

In the o

1st pers. Q;w(?%ea’g (8B - Be), or racge\:s.g (a3 +

283, or 23,

stance of th

©3), literally ¢of the having been-of

which howey

the being-1’ (see § 194).

w03 (in |

2nd pers.

[

"a%e, or age.

20, or @Heo.

The 1des

3rd pers.

masc.

attached to

'acsz%m, or razs‘%ﬁo.

'8.83%50, or 5739 3.

fem

of the presg

’aaé%, Or 2. .

B B, OF BTy To.

About 11

neut,

fa%ééo, or 2 e,

'aa-a(;@, or 2z ).

196,

Other instances of the first person singular are ua;egio (originally

present ten

&)%Qm, of 23y, to come), Fo&BeIy (orig. Ro&3eRy, of 7oy, to speak),

its own,

SR (orig. &gdemy, of &y, to become, to be). For esgdexsy the rustic

I, For

dialect occasionally uses e3¢z in the sense of '3%650 (»% being used

emphasis to

for &z, see §§ 176. 196).

(§195)

/

A peculiarity is that in the formation of the present tense under

the presen

consideration the suffix &3 is not added to the & of the past participle of

8 1t Was,

themes ending in ev in the three dialects (see §§ 166. 168), oy, &,

s1bl

Dgular

For the

&%, ete. being annexed directly to o, in which case « occasionally

disappears before them (see § 215).

Thus =50ks, to make, forms this

. g

tense in the following manner:

ind for th

Singular.

Plural.

%3((90

st pers. a‘imz%qsggsg (SR 4+ 3 for

aﬁsacgqse&j), Or 5900,

o

TRRBL-IFI), OF 352BORY

2nd pers. Ssode (INE - 8 for IPRA

‘hape (

kr

IR0,

Even theg

+ ).

The Vo)

3rd pers.

5350 R 035930,

the relai

mase. m@m@&, Or 350 BO3IDR.

5\)’@@@(8 0o, or

uJ(\

w1

DOB03I5DTV.

fem. S59zac%,0r S5&0E

;jsacsaé oo, or

i

neut. [PV,

;Ssaaaqs ), or

SADIEles vl

The

phagg

There can be no doubt whatever that we have here the ancient present

tense in a somewhat altered form, although the meaning has undergone

Iy pers,

an essential change; for this form of the present tense is nowadays used

to convey the idea of uncertainty or possibility, and may he called the

¢ "l o ;?

=

—

133

—

L

\0°

) the

contingent present-future tense, as e.g. *azz ey or nacé) egy means ‘I may

175

d 1

be’ or ¢I shall perhaps be’; uﬁmegéo, ‘1 may come’ or ‘I shall perhaps

come’; 355@3395650, ‘I may make’ or ¢I shall perhaps make’.

In the medieeval dialect the author has met with only one clear in-

{

stance of this present, viz. 3Bwary (see under &38Ww, in the Dictionary,

which however stands for IZRBZo without the meaffing of contingency.

u%eéa (in Basavapurana 16, 28) may be a mistake for WR 2.

The idea of uncertainty or possibility was, as it would appear, not

D

q

attached to the present tense of this paragraph before the introduction

of the present tense of § 196 into the modern Kannada dialect.

) W

About instances see § 366, remark a.

REY

Q 7

196. The modern dialect having given a different meaning to the

iginally

present tense of the ancient and medieval one, formed a present tense of

its own.

speak)

¢ rustic

1

9

For this purpose, in the first instance, it suffixed the letter . of

ng used

emphasis to the personal terminations ending in eny combined with &5

(§ 195) in order to express the idea of certainty or to distinctly denote

the present, leaving however the second person singular and plural

o under

ciple of

as it was, but allowing to shorten the §0€ or & of the second person

:‘FJ"}; éﬂ’

singular.

sonally

For the third person singular neuter it introduced the forms eso3),

ns {his

(4. €. 030, +, see § 199), B (i.e. @B+ o) and BB (4. & BB+ );

and for the third person plural neuter it introduced, as optional forms,

O3 (¢ e ¥FY+ o) and A3 (4. €. BF+ ).

©0, a8, %3, B probably are the demonstrative pronouns of that

shape (§§ 102, 8, 5; 122. 186)+», <even that’, ¢even this’, ¢even those’,

¢even these’.

The verbs concerned here are two, véiz. iy, to be (to become), of which

the relative past participles are eﬁoj%, o3 (see §§ 166. 176. 199; ¢f

©nexy in § 195), and 48 (aTf), to be.

The personal terminations combined with e to which.the o of

emphasis is suffixed, and the additional forms are the following:

Singular.

Plural.

resent

1st pers. R, DR (for eIy, NI

333, D3 (for BeD, V).

orgone

of § 195).

5 used

200, 0.

o

2nd pers.. o€ 8 Or &),

134

Plural.

9, But |

3rd pers.

Singular.

mase. Hox, ¥ (for TV, &I

%90, &3 (for

BT, HITY).

and ’&dv, f()f

of § 195).

(see § 173),

fem

dialect attach

08, 8 (for B3P, ¥

%00, &3 (for

&30, &TY).

The pres

of § 195).

neut. @03y, «B, (ad).

T, 553 (for TI), BIJ), 833, ('3&3),

is ag follows:

ar

AV

Compare the forms of the Perfect zbés%g?, TP 33 in § 313, 4.

1t pers.

((‘

The verb esrso, to be, is conjugated in this present tense as follows:

f

Singulanr.

Plural.

Il

(<]

5

Ind pers.

@

1st pers.

203 el (9o + oF) or ede’ (¥4

s

o33 ¢33, 0573033,

3rd pers,

®3), literally ‘of the having been-of

the being-I-indeed’, ¢. e. I am indeed,

1asce,

el

fom

I am.

A\

neut,

Q

2nd pers.

802y, VB, 0T LR, O,

®OR D, BED.

3rd pers.

masc.

O3 R, VTR,

eﬁom%é, 09739 0.

fem

eﬁoa‘s'%%?, VIOY.

29035'%8, 9759 0.

Other 1

1l

neut.

w03y, Or ©T; BB,

&9033%5, B33, OF 8333

(of

o, o

s

3R or g

he

)

[a)

1),

QW

The verb g (avf), to be, a paradigm of the contingent present

01

RICIWNES

tense of which has been given in § 195, is conjugated in this present

tense as follows:

I, @

Singular.

Plural

by themg)y

f

1st pers. '&%93 (8% + Bed), literally ‘of the

a8 63

Dlural of ¢

)

having been-of the being-I-indeed’,

TN

}&

]

¥

¢. e. I am indeed, T am.

adeo

2nd pers.

2HE, OF BY.

Inf

YR), ¢

3rd pers.

0 Saz

masc.

Yok

fazsga".

fem

@agﬁ,

259 B

neut.

29030

2

or %3; BB.

fazséﬁ, or e953; }ad.

In the Southern Mahratta country there exist also the forms q;\céei,

8¢, etc., the initial &¢ of &es, e, etc. being omitted.

P —

135

i

.

2

?

But this way of conjugation is restricted to the present of ey

and @3y; for, as stated in § 190, evd and evd,, two pronominal forms

(see § 173), are the tense-suffixes to which, in all other cases, the modern

dialect attaches 93, 8 or =, €33, etc.

The present tense of m©d, to be, formed according to this method,

90), (

an

H\J

is as follows:

Singular.

Plural.

1st pers. @TIZER (834 W3+ D3I) or VIS N

2808033 Or 008,633

follows:

(a8d 4 208 1 »J), literally ‘a being-

this-I am indeed’, 7. e¢. being I am

indeed, I am.

2nd pers.

2030 Or ATLEL, VTS or BTV,

23030 Or BT eV

3rd pers.

masc.

B TOTIN OF BTISY,R.

B TI393 Or BTV3

i

®

(D)

:

fem.

B To39% or BTV, P

BT3B Or VTS

R

o

neut.

Sl

B00803, @3y, or |TLZ 03y,

280893,

2333, Oor

80038, 3.

BT, AT,

Other instances in the first person singular are 23.8ed or wTLZ e

3 ored

(of w30, to come, literally ¢a coming-this-I am indeed’, I come), Bwen

geR or Bweenad.en (of Rwery, to go), Feshded or Feshd eR (of Tewy, to

hear), ©090208e8 or vePwwg e’ (of we®, to descend), I3coZeR

present

or g3 e’ (of 38, to walk).

g present

Remarks.

1,

g, (¥3), 98, 93 are employed also in the medieval dialect, either

by themselves or in union with 908, ¥v8, to form the third person singular and

plural of the present tense, e.g. 3B 3F Vu J20%03 NARWD; FF(0) ACTIAI

TER QR; TIIIR; SoRBYW; Bed

2,

In the rustic modern dialect the present tense of the verb wgs (¥,

©3Y), to say, is as follows:

Singular.

Plural.

Lst pers. ©3.¢3 (for VSR, VIV ).

@ie;&

2nd pers.

@@JQ or @g

€9 €D

3rd pers.

3, 89

masc.

W I

@asgé

fem.

@ag@

@536

5 @%Qﬁv

neut.

@rio&lp or @iﬁ

VI E, ¥ 3.

—

136

——

or 250,

3,

In the modern dialect there is a form used for the third person singular

neuter of the present tense which in reality is nothing but the present participle

feo0oe or

(with the emphatical or perhaps formative ») bearing its original meaning, véz.

In the

that of a verbal noun (see § 173), e.g. &3, it becomes, that literally means

plural the

“a becoming-this-indeed’, if the « be emphatical.

Other instances are @338, it

declinable b

is, MR, it experiences, W33, it comes.

Cf. No. 4.

Paradig

4, Again in the modern dialect the form @5’39 of the verb ©3° (¥, @),

to say, expresses ‘it (rumour) says’, ‘they say’, ‘on dit’ (see § 336).

It is

possible that this ©¥8, is corrupted from ©303 or ®3, the present participle of

©%€, used in its primitive sense of ‘a saying-this-indeed’, if the © be emphati-

It pers.

)

cal

Another possibility see in § 198, 7, remark 2.

Ind pers

199.

In § 153 appellative verbs or conjugated appellatives have been

3nd pers

mentioned.

They have a present tense for words of the masculine and

W

feminine gender singular and plural, but, as it would appear, without

Ist pers.

Ind pers

%

a third person singular feminine.

The personal terminations are those

of the ancient dialect (§ 193).

3rd pors

When they are suffixed to form the first person singular of Kannada

nouns, Samskrita compound bases and Samskrita adjectives ending in

Ist pers,

¢, the sonné (o, the sign of the nominative singular, § 117, ¢f. § 114) is

Ind pers

put between, e. g. 3oR%¢ =onRo, I (am) the son of the daughter, &3

3I‘d pers

21 2L

R0, FoY FFRRIR0, TITEISo, TUPRR I3[0, T\ SVUT HOBTIVNO,

m%ééo, © 33 000R0; this seems to be the rule also, if a Kannada

18t pers,

attributive noun ends in 030 (4. e. euphonic o3¢ +e9+ 9, § 115), as the

nd perg

only instances given by the grammarian KéSava are o030, I (am)

Bid pers

a weak person, 2003030,

(although he adduces for the plural both

Other Kannada attributive nouns and Kannada

200833 and 2003:33).

An exe

appellative nouns of number (§ 90) ending in < wmay insert the sonné or

198, 1

may not, e. g. w% Vo or wP B0, I (am) a good person, wBro Or wHF

R0

3

fOrmed by g

The adverb SNER forms o

\J:O,

I (am) a bewildered person.

Bast pari

Kannada nouns and Saihskrita compound bases ending in « add

oo preceded by a euphonic o3¢ for the first person singular, e. g.

The 0

22 30320, I (am) a or the wife, FedooFDdv0.

arg chieﬁ)

tiona) ¢

For the formation of the first and second person plural Samskrita

ot gy

words suffix wgps (the sign of the nominative plural, §§ 119. 132) before

lialegy it

the personal terminations, e. g. m%éﬁ@, RSO3 DTERY); N 80T, 5,0 0o,

i

—

Bt parti

&3, 00°, ¥3wwdos; with regard to all Kannada words the insertion of

es0f is optional, e. g. 00303 or 1VBITTY), ?»%3(3;@ or u%dﬁ@, CY v

b e

y &)

e

—

137

——

) singular

or £LIBF), WwRFRY) Or WwIFIsY; %% 00° 0F mz}csacé, TRODT or THOTROTF,

panticiple

2009

oA

0T or Fe0ROT,

of OF HEIDVTF, HIFTF O WTHFOOF,

ning, viz.

lly means

In the second person singular and the third person singular and

g ewe, |

)3

f

plural the personal terminations are attached immediately to the

® 00, W

et

declinable bases, e. g. emcépéomg, m%éo, emc%éc*?; &%630356, %

¢

%

R, 8))

/)

Paradigms given in KéSava's grammar are:

6), tis

Plural.

Singular.

rticiple of

b of em%é.

emphati-

1st pers.

em:gpsag.

emccﬂpéﬁq I (am) an elate person.

2nd pers

em?péo&sg.

engbéoos.

ave heen

3rd pers.

emagpé’o.

em:é)éos.

aline and

2. af u%d.

. without

1st pers.

29,30 or w9,TI0, T (am) a good person

&%&36{5) or &%da@.

2nd pers

u%doﬁs‘f.

zqe::basﬁ or u%mcﬂ

are those

3rd pers

u%do.

u%dcﬁ‘ A

360 268

Kannada

nding 1

1st pers.

2e’ or S»30, I (am) a stranger.

&%) or JWOJ).

f

311418

2nd pers

Ses 0336

BT or JSdTE.

Jeo.

JeTE.

O‘ﬁ

20

é\J

3rd pers

Baes)

nNO

45 fok i eeet

K

annad

1st pers.

W30 or '203%‘50, I (am) a single person.

L35 or WIFII.

e

2035 033°9.

WAFT® or WwFOTC.

2nd pers

o

am)

3rd pers

WwaIF 0.

iz

aral bath

Jann (a

An exceptional form is 5980 (for gy Ro).

g 0!

198. The past or preterite tense (imperfect, perfect, aorist) is generally

00 b

-jr

formed by suffixing the personal terminations (§ 193) to any form of the relative

i

past participle (§§ 175. 176).

10

P add

The exceptions relate only to the third person neuter singular, and

[13,1 0 q

are chiefly the following:— in the ancient and medieeval dialect it is

optional to suffix the two terminations 3o and a3, directly to the

skt

short past participle ending in o (§§ 166. 168); and in the modern

ore

dialect it is necessary to suffix the termination o8> not only directly to

) bef

700

that participle, but also by means of a euphonic o35 to the short participle

561 0

ol

ending in w and o (§ 165, @, 2; § 165, b, 1) which is identical with the

)

"“‘No)

Vv

theme, and then to all the relative forms of the past participle formed

18

—

(ther

by the removal of its final en (§ 175, 1) which are treated of in §§ 158-164

(as far as they concern the modern dialect).

i, b

1,

end), 4

A paradigm of the past tense of @ew®, to hear, in the ancient

dialect, is:

Plural.

TROAZY

Singular.

, 0F8

1st pers. i-?eego (i. e. Te¥ 4 w0), literally ¢of the

%Qego or %e%i@.

under No.

having heard-I’ (see §§ 169. 179.

The th

194), I have heard, I heard.

2nd pers. %e%ojsﬂ

‘v"e%c‘.

53y and

T

h; third

3rd pers.

mase. %e%éo or %Q%?Jéc))o.

%Q%C‘ or %”693%0“.

Xpressing

fem.

'-@Q%é%?‘ or %’e%?u%%vé,

%Qeécjs or %Q%?chs. :

254, em

neut. '@e%ﬁgdo or %e%égg.

%Q%%&j).

which is',

’

If the relative past participle is formed by g, the termination 3y | it

(s . g,

would seem, is avoided; thus we find Zoora$o, 230, but not Sored 3y, ; 39

W0

{

SoFrcd, but not 393r3y; X3y, @y, but not FZ By, Boorg L, PRIy,

are allowable forms. In 2369%@ (§ 164, 6), the third person neuter plural

n on ;f :

A Dt

of ?,3699&, to scratch, we have exceptionally e953) instead of eng).

2,

A paradigm of the past tense of Fo&, to speak, in the ancient

in shtras 1

Purthe

dialect, 1s:

Singular.

Plural.

0 ong e

Lst pers. F&Bo (i. e. SEB420), literally *of

[RBo or AR,

of 887 A,

the having spoken-I’, T have spoken,

In the

I spoke.

2nd pers. ROBTOIF.

[VRQTL.

i\séim, 0

3rd pers.

mase. FURT0 Or RABBRo.

SRTo¢ or

RRBPTE.

4 A

diale i

fem

RBYE OF FRBRYE.

[RJO or

RBRRTE,

3 166),

neut. [VRBIR OF VORTIBY,.

BRI

3, A paradigm of the past tense of o0, tosing, in the ancient dialect,

18

Plural.

Ist pors,

Singular.

1st pers.

ToRR0 (i. e. FIRT 4 20).

Ta8B0 O TIRR).

2nd pers.

SIRTBONE.

TRATS.

3rd pers.

masc.

T9RTo or JadBWo,

TORTT Or TIRBPTE.

ot perg,

fem

TIRTE® Or TIBRVRS,

ToRTTE Or THRTPTE,

%

3l’d Dets,

neut.

DIRT Y.

UG

TIRRIB, O FHRHR,,0r TR

(i. e. DR 4+ 93), or J[@IY, (. e

DB 4 B9B),

PRGNS

139

1

28-164

Other instances of the third person neuter in its four forms are .8

Bomd, WOBR, LA, Wady (of Wi, to read); B¥nsmy, BENRD,

ancient

W¥PN3Bo, BPNZy, (of ¥Ry, to shine); RRDARBIT), TRDARDY,, TROAIBY,

£ROABy, (of BROR, to spread).

That of =gf (or @3y, to be) is wdor

80, BABFI, In the ancient dialect, and B3, in the modern one (see

under No. 7). See instances in § 366.

The third person singular and plural, excepting its forms with @3

23, and 93y, is used also as a declinable krillinga (§ 102, s, e; § 177).

The third person neuter singular ending in envgo is a bhavavaana

expressing the action or state of the verb in the past (¢f. 200, 1; see

§ 254, remark 2). =@ory means either ¢that which has been’ and ¢that

which is’, or ¢a having been’, ¢the having been’ and ‘a being’, ‘the being’

3

N,

(see e. g. § 313, under 4).

;J

Remarks,

A

W82,0 is found in a Shsana of 866 A.D., D&ARL0 in one of 916 A.D., wIBe0

lural

in one of 929 A. D.; 43%,0° in one of about 750 A. D., $4E8,0° in one of 929

A. D.;—the termination %0 occurs also in the éabdamanidarpax}a; %%° is found

in sfitras 179 and 183 of the Sabdanusisana.

1C1

enb

Further, 30839 occurs in a $isana of about 778 A. D.; F0d 0 is found

in one between 680 and 696 A.D., 'v"’@émd@s is in one of 707 A. D. and in one

of 887 A. D., ®&3,5° in one of 807 A. D., and SB®%° in one of about 750 A. D.

In the later ancient dialect we meet with ?»3%50 in a ssana of 1123 A. D.,

TW0 8,00, DTy, 93,30 in one of 1182 A. D., and SPERD in one of 1187 A. D.

\OQ

4, A paradigm of the past tense of Fe$ to hear, in the medizval

0

dialect in which it optionally takes the final e, 7. e. becomes Be%o (see

§ 166), is:

Singular.

Plural.

Ject,

Ist pers. e¢¥o (T€¥ + 20), or ved

%@%@ or FePR).

&, or Fed ; FePRo (3¢

9T+ 0), or FEFWRY, or

093,

A TS

2nd pers. ?}’eegi or R,

%’e%@ or FeLDO.

oy

3rd pers.

mase. %e%{io or FeYTo0, %Qim

(%eﬁgc‘ or) %Q%g)do, or @Q%‘?ddo.'

or TePTRY, @Q%é or ¥¢

3,

18%

140

Plural.

i

Singular.

3rd pers.

contr

fem. (Fe¥ & or) Few &, or e

(Teg of or) B¢ o, or FePTT.

0oy

TP,

oy;

Q0

neut. ‘¢ 30 or FeTTT, Te

%eﬁg@ or TP,

per

g'égg or FePRY,; TY

30 (. e. Te9+33), or Fe

past |

930, (i. . F¢9 4 330).

3,

A paradigm of the past tense of #¢%0, to hear, in the modern dialect

in which it always has the final e (see § 166), is:

Singular.

Plural.

1st pers.

%Q?dﬁg (@Q@Cﬁ + ARV) or %Q

F0e90T) or FePA.

PT.

2nd pers

eV Or Fed.

FeoR0.

3rd pers

masc

In

LT Or FePn.

FeLB 3.

fem

FeL TP,

TR0

Y

)

neut

BP0 (T 4 B).

FePTJ).

e, ig

are,

Other verbal themes with final e are e. g. Ae%y, ®eC, WX, IR,

TOTR.

v

(er+

6,

A paradigm of the past tense of the theme &&, to seize, (the

B

short past participle of which is identical with the theme), in the modern

dialect, is:

of the

Singular.

Plural.

o)

3

Ist pers.

HBBI or LB,

LRBY or LR,

diaTect.

2nd pers.

W& or &LAD.

LARQD.

Th

my

N

3rd pers.

masc.

HRT[ or LAT.

HRTD.

Hlvays

fem

HBTH.

RT3,

Ing

neut.

SHBOBY (1. e. B, the short past

LRED).

g gy

participle that is identical with the

9 s;)

theme, 4 033° 4- 83Y).

ﬁﬂd. 9

Other verbal themes with final ® are e.g. eve®, Fo&, W, S[ooN

)

and 92,

Themes with final o, e. 9. 38, 3@ and Xp%, form the past

g

tense in the same way, the third person neuter singular being FZo3y,

DB, RRBIVV.

b tongj

I gl

141

——

In the third person neuter singular of themes with final « a

(ol

|

contraction of vowels often takes place in the modern dialect, when, e. g

N P30

RNV EN

WEBN3

SwoAo3dy and I

o030 appear as

enuCI2030

[WEED

WRESY

, second

Soonedy and x=eResy (¢f. § 205

pers. plural

§ 130, ¢)

7, A paradigm of the past tense of ey (), to say, the relative

1:

past participle of which is e3 . in the modern dialect, is

Singular

Plural

1st pers. ©R g5 or ¥

R 5 or WY D

1 dialect

2nd pers. ©8 or @R

© D

3rd pers

masc

IR R0 or ¥

B T

fem

EINE=S)

200

neut

©9 3 (. e. U3 + B3

8R Y

In the same

manner the past tense of the relative past participles

0983, VD, Y3

3, ¥0, T, 33, 3

B, OB Tae., Hee Doel . s

ete. is formed in the modern dialect

Also in the mediseval dialect there

are, as occasional forms of the third person mneuter singular,

oo d

), S

Q30 (B, + )

WR3 (W +2a3), BB (AR +2aR), and QB

(RS + a3y )

i, (the

From the full forms eQ3), 23

RS

3 3,

&)@ 3y and "’23 30

e modern

of the third person neuter singular, by means of synCOpe

9.,

obaio

330

ER)

wao and 3y are often formed and used in the modern

dialect.

HA0)

The third person neuter singular of facﬁ Sy (of @dy), I was, is always

93y in the modern dialect, and that of udﬁo (of weesw), I fell,

always 93,

Instead of 2323 39 (of 3¢, to burn) the form 23eod03y (23+ m‘+"aéo)

and instead of 3&@@@6 (of Bo¢, to graze) the form 35002080 (8304 030° 4

In the medieval one we

53y) may be used in the modern dialect.

find, as an occasional form, 3e0203y, (= Be3)

Remarks

@ —Qaﬂ

1

In § 172 it has been said that an explanation of ®¥g and o different

, the P&b

from that given there, would be offered here

For this purpose it is required

)zgw

to consider the third person neuter singular of the past tense to be a krillinga

or declinable base (§ 102, 8, letter ¢; § 177), as it in reality is; for like the

et

—

142

krillingas 2833 (23 + 0B, of the ancient and fnediaéval dialect) and co%do or

It pers.

VI B (8 4 VW or VT 4 ¥F, of the modern one) ¥ 3 and 2 8 are krillingas

composed of the relative past participle ©% or =8 and @S> (another form of 9%,

§ 193, remarks), literally meaning ‘of the having said-this’, ‘a having said-this’,

from which ©@89 and 239 are formed by syncope.

The final ©® in ¥3 and 23,

would be the sign of the accusative of bases with final @V (see § 121, letters &

Ind pers,

and ¢; § 122, letters & and c) governed by a following 3¢ or ¥ (¥:Y), V&

(033); see §§ 381. 332, and some instances in § 286.

¥ and 239, would be

ord pers.

lengthened forms of the accusative (see § 121, letter ¢; 122, letter c).

1asc,

2,

In remark 4 of § 196 the opinion has been expressed that it is mnot

Another

fem,

impossible that @8 | ‘on dit’, is a form of the present participle.

explanation is that it is the krillinga ©3 (i.e. ©23), by syncope) with the « of

neut,

emphasis, originally meaning ‘of the having said-this-indeed’, ‘a having said-

i;

this-indeed .

(In Télugu ©3, appears as ©¥8, or ©&, probably other forms of

The

008, ‘a saying’, the verbal noun of ©, to say).

(5185

‘of givin

199

In § 166 there are adduced the irregular past participles

(here its

90308, Fpeods, BREE of @y, Jpeny, Bwery, which stand instead of

§ 100;

the regular on, P¥pen, Joep, and in § 176 appear the irregular relative

nstances

past participles sz, Zpen, Bwer, which stand for sAT, IpeNT, BRENT,

saying

or &0, PEO3Y, 63@605% . From these irregular past and relative past

ialects,

participles the third person neuter singular is formed, viz. in the ancient

Othey

the ﬂnci@

dialect either &zozy and 8x3y, XpemoRy and FperRdy, or GOy, 3¢

030,5 in the medizeval one either eszomy and ©33), Jpedomy and Fped

%@@'5), '|

3

b

or 3030y, Sy, TR, PO

TPEO3N,, VHEOIBY, TVREO

( of @‘\;@64

39

‘)

and in the modern one only e03)9,

023, BRI, TBRERVS.

(of

£V E‘:

In § 166 it will be seen that there

exists also the irregular past

(of g

participle e903o$ (for 30%°), used i1n the

formation of the third person

(9]

!

neuter singular 03y, (§ 196, regarding the past meaning of which used

Ingt

A Ceg

for the present see § 194), and in § 176 that the irregular relative past

Bop

tL

participles are also ©0%) and eszs, used in @03%63, etc. and es3¢g, etc.

W ang

(§ 196; ¢f. eBemo in § 195).

JLQ"\C (

200. The future tense is formed by suffixing the personal terminations

2 4

formed

relative

i

(§ 193) to the variously

(present-) future

participles

Jm)), to

(§§ 180-184. 191).

(Remember the contingent present-future tense of

§ 195.)

ers

1,

A paradigm of the future tense of Fowo, to give, in the ancient

dialect, is as follows:

W pey

143

W g

Singular.

Plural.

JT

ingas

1st pers.

TR0 (i e. TORIB + o),

TIWI30 Or ToTWosdsy), We shall give

f

literally

¢of

giving-1

&

his

(see §§185.186), Ishall

o

1d O3

give (see § 316, 3).

f

ors 0

=

2nd pers.

FOBITO3¢, thou wilt give

FoRIDT®, you will give.

) AW

(see § 3186, 12).

ald be

3rd pefs.

masc.

FOWIT0 or FoBIZpo, he

TORIRT® or ToROPT, they will

15 not

will give (see § 316, 12).

give.

nother

fem.

TOBITE® or TORIPSE.

BOBITT (or TIRIIPTF).

e o of

neut. FIRoJR0.

BB ).

- said-

s of

The whole third person (singular and plural) is a declinable krillinga

(§ 185. 186).

Its neuter singular, in the present case To@RoHYay, lit.

‘of giving-it’, is also used to express the notion (bhiva) of the verb

(here its action) in the present, and is therefore a bhavavadana (cf.

ciples

ad of

§ 100; the §§ quoted in 243 ; § 254, remark 1) meaning ¢giving’.

Other

lative

instances are &Yoo, giving, FRYrny, loving, e, being, Qﬁ‘éma

U\

Al

hd]

saying, 355@633):55, making. Such bhévavatanas are used in the three

) oSt

dialects.

Their use in the imperative appears in § 205.

jcient

Other instances of the first person singular of the future tense in

fJG

the ancient dialect are: eﬁ%o (of &%), ?ﬁewio (of FEees), %’@%o (of

)

e

TROF), FpraysSo (of ey, ), BEFPBo (of 8P), B30 (of 8&), ov

£3,0

N

B

(of o), éﬁwo (of &%°), 3Zro or éffc (of o), 3wesdro or éme%ro

e

(of é’u’ae&ﬁs), £@e&ﬁio or Jwe@dBo (of S0ewy), ;S'Javéi)o or [PBIS0

(of SRy), ¥ o, wdo or wyte (of &Ry), Jpesdo or TpensSo (of

; past

See

)er3011

Qpenv), addo or faaio (of 2DRy), 2JTo or 2R 0 (of DRR).

used

instances in § 366.

o past

For the third person masculine singular ®@*3%0 is found in a $isana between

3, ofC.

597 and 608 A. D., and for the third person masculine plural ¥390° (of 3QRY),

AOPT® (of BORY) oceur in a Shsana of about'750 A. D.

2

)

A paradigm of the future tense of $oz> (or occasionally also

ations

TR), to give, in the medimval dialect, is:

;ieiple%

Singular.

Plural.

1st pers. BRBI[o (FART + o),

BRBIS).

FRRBINRY, BRBII.

mcieﬂt

2nd pers. FLTI.

%u@ C:Z)u) s34

144

Singular.

Plural.

3rd pers.

Isf i

mase. BRBITo, TRBITRY, TRRIS.

(BRRIVTF), TRREIZT.

fem

(BRABITPS), TRBIZH.

(BRBITTF), FLBIZTo.

neut. FRBIFYRY, (TRBIRTY).

BFRBITR).

Avother instance of the first person singular in the medieval dialect

ol |

ard p

is wQC@io, £Qw§;§o, 566&2, or $eC30, B[ELITRY, VeCS, or BeLdJo,

1l

By, Bec:3 (of Beess, Becd, 220, to say).

3, A paradigm of the future tense of R0, to g'iire, in the modern

fo

dialect, 1s:

Singular.

Plural.

I

1st pers. FRBINRO (TRBIT 4 I3,

BRBII.

FRRS.

| SN}

FRBIDD.

2nd pers. TRBI, TRTWID.

3rd pers.

masc. TRRIDRY, TRBI.

FRBIZTY

Ist ik

fem

BRTBITF

TRRBID T

neut.

BFRBOTZHS

BRABISTY

()lld p1

3nd

Other instances of the first person singular in the modern dialect

it

are ®ReCIINRY, 2eCS (of Betdy, to say), [HBWN[, SoR030033 (of

fa

S8, to speak), SBBNRRY, [BRa0s3 (of s, to Walk), The forms S»

1g

BoS Y, BELNTHY, FVRBWTRY, SBWBI are bhavavatanas; see under

Noi1: 6209, .8

0

201

In § 184 there appears & as a substitute of g in the relative

In the

present-future participle, viz. in @& of the ancient and medizval dialect,

¥l

and in 2®, IV, W, SR, wom, Wem, HpeF of the medieval one.

(¢ §

In § 183, 7, remark, we have Sk and in §§ 189. 194 we find &z, v

ialeg

and «® as constituents of the present tense.

In § 195 we have the

Presg

conjugated form of wx wviz. ¥®Bsy, etc. changed, by metathesis and

lengthening of the vowels, into Reso, ete.

Here follow the paradigms

of the conjugation of ez or oo, (ej%), »®, 2%, and some other

conjugated forms.

1St pe.

1, A paradigm of the conjugation of eo% or @3, (&) in the

grammatical ancient dialect, is:

Qnd I

145

Plural.

Singular.

st pers.

W

©30 (see § 194) or &3 o,

950 Or ¥, 0, 5335y) Or @azaj)

literally ¢ of the becoming

J

J0)

or being-I’ (see § 186),

I shall become, I shall

be, (I am).

lect

60

2nd pers

T3¢ or 0‘9;:‘50356

¥UT Or @33\)56,

3rd pers

oV,

masc

o OF VT o, YIPo OF

V0 Or VT T, BPO® Or @"@10‘,

2933{:@\10.

@@”%)JUG.

odern

fem

VTG OF OF ¢F, VP

VLT Or B TF, (VTRTF Or eazﬁjoadv),

or @%@6.

emggo‘.

neut

WTHBY or ees%cﬁo.

BYY or ¥PH ).

2

3

A paradigm of the conjugation of es&®, in the mediwval dialect, is:

Singular.

Plural.

1st pers.

B0

BIRD).

P

wHZy, @®, literally ‘of the

becoming or being-I’, I shall become,

T shall be.

0530,

Zlccte)

2nd pers.

3rd pers.

alech

masc.

WBo, VBT, (V®).

(¥®TF), ST,

(OI

fem

(Bx%), VTN,

(8B, @B,

88

neut.

LIPITIV.

BT).

nder

Of the above forms we have met with @xo, @¥x%* and @mizy also

in the ancient dialect.

at

af1ve

9oy in the form of &®zo has remained in the modern dialect

&lecti

(¢f- § 195); Bewy, ete. and Lo, etc., other forms of ©® o, ete. in this

one

dialect, appear, as has been stated, in its conjugation of the contingent

Bl

present-future tense (§ 195); compare the modern present in § 196.

o the

ﬂl}d

8, A paradigm of the conjugation of %a, in the me(?.iaeval dialect, is:

dlo'mb

Plural.

other

Singular.

1st pers. @®o, BRI, VX, literally of the

BT

being-1’, I shall be, (I am).

y the

=Yool

2nd pers. BX®,

19

146

Singular.

Plural.

Tr 0

3rd pers.

PO

oo

mase. BTo, VBV, (BB).

(BaBT*), AT

1%

fem

(BTE*), BT,

(BRT*), 3T

neut. BB,

0 Bag)e

sasal

Other instances of the first person singular of the future tense formed

V

from relative participles with final & in the medizval dialect are 8o,

o,

‘of the bringing-I’, I shall bring, &0, ‘of the coming-I’, I shall come,

A3

29&®o, ‘¢ of the coming-1’, I shall come.

(of 3

The only form of these left in the modern dialect is the third person

o,

neuter singular of waxbo, viz. w&@Iw0, it will come, it comes.

202. According to note @ of § 181 the third person singular and the

diale

third person masculine and feminine plural of the future tense occur also

with 2, and %, in the medieval and modern dialect, e. g. 83Rw .y (for

douh

8TMISRY), &oRweh (for 8onexdh), &d’way (for 3omiyde or 8omy

DL

B0); BRERWERY (for BwensYdy or BwerRay), Hwenwedy (for Bwe

ally

Ros3dy); —and according to note b of the same paragraph the third

I

person neuter singular of the future tense occurs also with enp in those

18 101

two dialects, e. 9. ARG (for SPRIFYZs or IPRIVFY).

‘\

%

PN

203. A particular third person is formed by the terminations mdo, Bo,

5

A

®5,0, and &>, >, It is used for the present, future and past tense (¢f.

§ 169) without regard to number and gender.

U3

oo 1s suffixed to most verbal themes ending in consonants and

4D

vowels, e. 9. w0, Royo, wogo, F9o0, SETIFo,

?.fgaew;)\ o, B[N0,

GJ‘

Raeda o, RBENIFo, BRoreFo, RO, SR o,

sjo:o’o%*ro\o, £ri&°);)\o,

R, o

'&3}0?’16&%0, O, FBTYo, RBNV0, TBNVO, BRIV,

16

D@0, FHey oo,

WERIMV0, JwRINV0, AEINVMV0, JPNRINV0, BPBRoNI0, TaNRaNRI0, RPW

Sonvo. According to the Sabdanusésana also enonve, Bperindoe, (see

NI

remark), 3penoro (for 2weesonio, and dwewsro, see Bvo), 3R o (for

W

{\3

FRBN0), 3\!@@&3;)\0 (for Jwezonoo), HREI2 0 (for ZowRoriyo) are in

ln

use

¥do, according to instances from the gabdamanidarpana, is suffixed

A

A

OD_QG

to 23eCd¢ (of Bery), Sweds (of Sww@y), 38

, B0f, 30f, {ef and wor,

(ﬁééry

ang ¥

and the forms are 23¢C9),o0, FPEOYo, 3ReTIF0, BBIF0, FTIFO, SEDE

and e3oro; according to the Sabdanusasana it is optional to use Zwe

W o

R

——

147

-

BoFo OF 3RENIFo, JVY,0 OF V0, RPETLO OF PRIV 0, 239CI

)0 Or 239

3

L0, TIVE,0 OF VI 0, [5OCI

2,0 OF 359N 0, BRBoFo or VBBRMoFo

<)

3

BRETIF0 Or ARENIFo

From Jpeno Spedoo is formed, and from esny ©zvo (this form in a

sasana between 597 and 608 A. D.), generally @va

(¢f. § 176).

med

Verbs formed by means of the suffix @z (see § 149 seq.) may use

%0,

Joo, in which case they drop their final %, e. g. 22T00 (0f 2RV, THIO

I,

&30 (of PYToRAY), VPRLPTI0, IPBTI0 SI0E3T0, BJTo; FeYBo

(of Fe®Ro, to play), TOROT0, HOPTI0, TPWTVo, PINTV0, T3 Foo, Tod

1500

FV0, DONTO0, ARWTV0

The forms with oo and Zvo are used in the ancient and medizval

] the

dialect

al80

. 0. in the ancient dialect, is an optional termination for Fyo, the

(for

doubling of the consonant being euphonic, e. g. KHTORBY,0, VPNRLEIPT,0

s

DT, 0, TPWTF

3.0, 6% %o 0, JoRTY,0.

o ¥

It is beautiful (mandhara) especi-

i)

ally in verbs that come from Samskrlta

hird

If a form is produced that is disagreeable to the ear (asravya), o0

hose

is not used in Kannada verbs, so that it is improper to use e. g. ¥&39,0

DRTY

RS #oa_ (%Uld FETV0. DBTo0. IRD Tuo O FTERINV0, DBRINV0

_&)

#0,

AR Jonvo would be right)

(f

B> (i. e. Too without the sdnné) of the ancient dialect is formed in

@B, (in a Sasana of 1084 A. D.) and J‘e)r’\oi’)o%g (in a Sasana of 1123

and

A. D.); in the medieval dialect it is in common use and we meet therein

)

14

LY

e. g. with %0

3RETOF, WeeN

In the modern dialect two forms with

a9y

2. found also in the medizval one, have remained, viz. 23¢%o (for 23eC,,

JﬁJOf

§ 316, 4) and mewy (for mawY)

730 (i. e. Roo without the sénné) is a medieval suffix which we see e. g

At

in AJRONY, IRNY, WBNRY, BRTFNY, AN, [N, SSFROMY, S FRINY

g

§6v

SEON)

TOMOF, r\)@ no.

o (for

Instances see in § 366.

e 10

Remark

According to sttra 464 of the Sabdanusasana (¢f. §§ 472. 498) some savants

fised

(A8Aryas) have employed an additional 7o after the regular terminations oo

| )0

and 00, dropping their final s0nns, e. g. ¥HoMIMO (for &0, L.3on0mv0, Foed

"JJO

nooo, AV 1Yo, SwsBnonvo, 3@&53 00, TBINITIO0, FPETIMITV0, LI 1Yo, BBROFTV0,

SRR mmo BP0 oo, cahfoommo AR EMOFNV0; e:aafo 7o, @m#omo, SRERTN0,

, 400

194

——n

P —

148

ARETOFNO0, ete.

It will be observed that these savants knew the forms 70 and

%9 without the sénnd, to which they suffixed their mo.

R04. With regard to the terminations of § 203 the question arises,

which of them are radical, oo, Byo or Ry, 3o ?

From etymological reasons we are inclined to consider =5 and )

to be original, as they appear to be nominal suffixes R (=n) occurring

e. 9. in eugorto (of ewd) and AEIRy (of 3e3¢=a ¢5e%, see 3 and FEs2

in Dictionary), and 3 (=%) e. g. in 9ue0F (of uEN), wBB (of wad),

228y (of e?).

According to this our opinion that the verbal forms

with 7> and %o are nouns (bhivavacanas), e. g. x> would originally

mean ‘a shining’, 23ry, ‘an uttering’, £Q@3;)\, ‘a saying’, @3y, ‘a

becoming’, 3Redor, ‘an appearing’, [$eCd,, ‘a requiring’.

This explanation at once makes it clear, why the forms by themselves

have no reference whatever to tense, number and gender.

Compare in

this respect the verbal nouns (bhavavalanas) enead in § 194, remark 1,

and BoRoYay in § 200, 1, those ending in enzo and ey in § 205, and

those ending in R and < in the same paragraph.

But why have ancient grammarians added the sénné? If we take the

forms with o and 3y to be nouns, we most probably have to regard the

sonné as a conventional sign of the nominative singular (¢f. § 114).

Thus 39,0, etc. would be the nominative with the suffix o.

3

205

The forms of the imperative (vidhi, etc., § 146) are based partly

on the relative present-future participle, partly on verbal nouns, as will be

seen from the paradigms.

1,

Paradigm of the forms of the imperative in the ancient dialect:

Singular.

Plural.

1st pers. (The first person singular of the

e9o (a short form of <o, we;

3I’d pe

future tense ending in 0, see

see §§ 137. 138) suffixed to

§ 200, 1, according to the Sabdé-

the

relative present-future

nusasana’s stitra 491, 7. e. SN0

participle’ e.g. 3AINVJ0 (5371)?5

or IRRI0, I shall do, :. e. let me

+990) or

3RO

(39 4 ©0),

do! ®pBRIS0, let me worship!—

literally ‘of attacking-we!’,

This rule is not in the Sabda-

let us attack! %xFo! ﬁcﬁ%o!

manidarpana.)

SRBIZ0 or $339¢) 0!

2nd pers.

@) 2o (another form of Jeo or

@) the verbal theme, which in this

case is a verbal noun (bhava-

S0, you; see §§ 137. 138),

JRS—

149

]

and

Singular.

Plural.

vaéana, see § 100) used with

suffixed to the verbal theme

emphasis or the sense of a sign

considered as a verbal noun,

565,

of exclamation, e.g. 8™, (thy)

BED. &3 00 or ‘3:5’(503060 (@50336

becoming (is required or request-

+ 90y, literally ‘ searching-ye!’

800!

ROO or

()

ed)! ¢. e. become (thou)! 2@,

search ye!

rng

(thy) blowing (is required or re-

fodyo! 30R0! Pno! Feero! B

—Mj

quested)! blow (thou)! Sw@d!

20! JINGO! ﬁ:ﬁo#éﬁjo!

NG

;‘s’oédgsz VR ! IB ! wBono! uﬁn:ﬁo!

)\

TPRAV!

FTees !

R o6 !

QO !

g0°

OIm§

or §oV!

ally

b) the theme with final e9 (P332

©3.0), most probably a verbal

noun (see § 188), e. g. TG, (thy)

giving (is required or requested)!

31»'?3

g 10

i.e. give (thou)! T¥! |31 Rodd

k1,

or ﬁoﬂoﬁz JReB! INB! ¥T03 or

and

efdojoﬁ! 293! (for W3, see §§ 206.

210).

the

¢) the third person neuter singular

b) the third person neuter singu-

| the

of the present-future tense with

lar of the present-future tense

114)

V3D, it being a verbal noun

with e, e.g. SR, (your)

(krillinga and bhavavaéana, see

giving (is required or request-

rtly

§ 200, 1), e. g. DD, (thy) giving

ed)! ¢.e. give (ye)! may (you)

give!

[1 be

(is required or requested)! ¢.e.

give (thou)! mayest (thou) give!

BRROFIRY ! INRRIJB or FRe) B!

BIFOPY®! TT HRo!

e

3rd pers.

ol

a) R, & or &, the forms being

a) R, & or optionally @8_, suffixed in

the same as those of the

uure

the very same manner as the

13

terminations ™o, o, FY0, ete.

singular, e.g. 803, (their) do-

LWV

(see $§ 203. 204. The forms

ing (is required or request-

ed)! 7.e. (they) shall do! let

Wet.a

thus produced are

in reality

verbal nouns like V@, o6,

(them) do! may (they) do!

ﬁ;j%a!

TR, sjpwi, ete.; %ae'%, a’de%, )

F, BGT, ete.; see § 243, 4, 10. 12),

e.g. ﬁ03~>“<ﬁ0336+ﬁ), (his, her, its)

\QO 0

130)

doing (is required or requested)!

JU—

150

e

Singular.

Plural.

i. e. (he, she, it) shall do! let

(him, her, it) do! may (he, she,

ity do! B! e (or wWAER)!

ORARF! éﬁwf\z 3RERF!

mmeﬁf‘!

2! ARR! IRR! LB FoRon!

3rd per

&sogaﬁ! SPRBMN! HABR! SREIN!

(

e5230RIN ! pee RO ! 3 AN!; —. 9TF!

3BF! SneTr! AneFF (or ARF)!

20967

(or

?Y, (or 2Y)! WTr!

T

ZSJDCD?\) !;—Q*)"v';! PET!; DR (of

JWrRY)! INRT (of INRRY)! IO

VB!

PRF!

dé%!;-ﬁ%&?"%!

sgm?};! dé@ﬁz

b) the third person neuter singular

b) the third person neuter singu-

of the present-future tense with

lar of the present-future tense

eVT, €. g. B, (his, her or

with ez, e. g. I, (their)

its) giving (is required or request-

giving (is required or request-

ed)!

i. e. (they) shall give!

ed)! 7. e. (he, she or it) shall give!

let (him, her or it) give! may

let (them) give! may (they)

(he, she, it) give!

give !

Further instances see in § 367.

1t por

(

2

9

Paradigm of the forms of the imperative in the medimval dialect:

Singular.

Plural.

1st pers. (The first person singular of the

(e90), @ (i. e. ®o without the

future tense ending in o, NI

euphonic sonné, see §§ 137.

and ), see § 200, 2, e. g. TWBIZ0,

138), e. g. @RWS, let us

utter!

TR REINTY, TRRID.)

2nd pers.

@) the verbal theme, e. g. 9%° or

@) (@o), R (i. e. 80 without the

0, rise (thou)! So@! Bp3! [o°

euphoniec sonné, see §§ 137.

q0° 4+ the

or 90! &Mo! d@;ﬁo!, in which

138),

B0 e

case also themes like T200, guard

honorific @, see § 193, re-

(thou)! (for ¥3) appear (see 3,

marks), e.g. @5, be ye! !

2nd person in this paragraph).

D! FeP! @Ja%! 3@«%!_%%6!

3noNd! Berd! Bpend!

b) the theme with final e, e.g. Bt

speak (thou)! 253!

—

51

—

Singutar.

Plural.

¢) the third person neuter singular

b) the third person neuter singu-

of the present-future tense with

lar of the present-future tense

VT, e.g. BRBIDIY, see (thou) !

with evmo, e g. B m,

solicit (ye)!

3rd pers.

a) R, F, e.g. 3N, let (him, her or it)

@) R, ¥ (as in the singular), e. g.

DORR, let (them) guard!

give! wcé)@:’mﬁ!._ =3¢} ! (In medi-

@val-modern works, e.g. in the

the Ramayana, we find also forms

like 0o, Ram. 1, 6, for 8.

b) the third person neuter singular

b) the third person neuter singu-

of the present-future tense with

lar of the present-future tense

ingu-

VT, e. g. YFNT, let (him, her

with evmd, e. g. SEID, let

or it) eat!

tense

(them) walk !

ther)

¢) @9, for which see § 207, 2, a.

¢) &Y (§207,2 a),

quest-

give !

(they)

3, Paradigm of the forms of the imperative in the modern dialect:

Singular.

Plural.

1st pers.

@) (The first person singular of the

@) ¢, €3, (i.e.¥o without the

plect

future tense ending in » and

euphonic sonné, see §§ 137.

DRI, e, g, SNBII, INFE[I); IR

138), 2930 (¢. e. ¥0 with a eu-

it the

3003, BIRGNRR.)

phonic @v), 93 (7. e. VI ¥),

13T,

€9e9 (a form in which the

of U5

dental & has been changed

into the cerebral %°),

e

g

%?Q%”QS, let us hear! BRRVS!

SRBBNT 1 -390 ! IR eEITH !

b the

DRBITV! FIRNVTV! —SREH V!

! 137,

XRMBIB! (see § 202)—3Bs¢

§ ,the

MII!

SRBRI !

BHREMHBI ! —

3, ¢

BRERITIH! BRRHED! 93He!

| o

Lintemr Sndween! (see § 181,

7

90!

note a; § 202).

(The forms

BRMRe, ete. are used also

as verbal nouns; see § 315,

D

2, /5§ 316, 10)

—

152

s

Singular.

Plural.

b) e9®, for which see § 207, 2, 0.

b) & (§ 207, 2,0).

2nd pers.

@) the verbal theme, e. g. 303, see

a) 2, 20, ©d (vulgarly for 49),

(thou)! Feo! vy 1 SoB! IR, in

e.g. @9, be ye! INR! —JRRO!

which case also the lengthened

SNARO! BHREAD! FRMO! IR MO

or TEONO! BREMD or BT

themes T00! (for ¥9), W00X! (for

2 030%), B! (for T 035°), FDOI!

030! or, by contraction, F@eo!

(for m03F), BRAV! (for 0 0kF)

J@e0! BRrD! (¢f. §198,6)—

appear (c¢f. $§ 48. 54. 92. 93).

FeF0! JReREO! mfoz

-

b) the theme with final eo (see

Nudigattu page 78 seq.), e. g.

W

?

JNEB, see (thou)! wae! IRB! J

&odd! F3030!

>

¢) the third person neuter singular

b) the third person neuter singu-

of the present-future tense with

lar of the present-future tense

-

9530, e. g. DRBITWY, see (thou) !

with €930, e. g, SRWWTR,

23903N0SF! FIRBNIR!

see (ye)!

<>

3rd pers.

@) the third person neuter singular

@) the third person neuter singu-

of the present-future tense with

lar of the present-future tense

9530, . g. BRISW, let (him,

with ez, e. g. IB3IR,

her or it) go!

let (them) walk!

b) ¢, for which see § 207, 2, b.

b) e, (§ 207, 2, b).

PA

206. An alphabetical list of irregﬁlar forms of the imperative is as

2

follows :

adduC

a0, (for 20 of 93y, the doubling of the T° being euphonic), be ye!, in the

ey

modern dialect.

TR (for TR or T0¥), take (thou)!, in the medizval and modern dialect

(stty

SUlry

(¢f. the Bw¢in § 187 under 2).

@ (for #wew)), swing (thou)!, in the modern dialect (Nudigattu, page 86).

§

abdj

8Q, (i.e. 33°49, =280, ¢. v.), bring ye!, in the medieval and modern dialect.

actop

32,0 (i. e. 38740, for 800 of S0°, the ©° having arisen of the past participle

tlle 1

83) and being euphonically doubled), bring ye! (not in the text of the

Puryg]

éabdamagidarpar_la, but) according to the Sabdanusisana (sttras 492,

(%6,

520 and Candraprabhapurana 3, 46) in the ancient dialect.

£e

:4@%6 (i.e. 33°+90), bring ye!, in the (medizval and) modern dialect (¢f. ¥&09).

4oy

3\5) (for 30 of 39), the doubling of the ©° being ecuphonic), bring ye!, in

the modern dialect.

39 (for 28 of 8T° or 23), bring (thou) !, in the medieval and modern

dialect, and, according to the Sabdanusisana (satras 519. 520), also

f

in the ancient one.

130!

390°%, 390y (for 30° or 83)), bring (thou)!, in the mediseval and modern

3000

o

QW

dialect.

(It is, however, probable that the instances require 33 for

Tw@'

3I0° or BIVY; cf. WAT°.)

390 (for 83 of 80° or 23Y), bring (thou)!, in the medieval and modern

f)—

dialect.

WY, (le. V4B, =W, ¢.v.), come ye!, in the medieval and modern

dialect.

wo (e WS+ 90, the &° having arisen of the past participle @3 and

being euphonically doubled), come ye!, in the ancient dialeet according

to the Sabdanusisana (sitras 470. 492).

ingt-

'“QL@ (4. e. W 4-90), come ye!, in the medieeval and modern dialect.

tense

20, (for WO of W3, the doubling of the ©° being euphonic), come ye!, in

AN

the modern dialect.

239 (for W3 of WU° or W), come (thou)!, in the medieval and modern

dialect, and, according to an instance in NAgavarma’s Karnataka-

bhashabhtishana (under sttra 27) and according to the Sabdanusisana

ingl-

(stitras 41. 385. 400. 519. 520), also in the ancient one.

fense

D):ﬁﬂ

2090, 25200 (for WO or W3Y), come (thou)!, in the medieeval and modern

dialect.

(It is, however, probable that the instances require 233 for

WIT® and WaBY; ¢f. BTL,)

2590 (for W8 of WT°), come (thou)!, in the ancient, medizval (and modern)

dialect.

is 08

207. There are three forms connected with the imperative still to be

adduced. They are produced by means of the suffixes e9¢)o, ¢ and

in the

g9 )¢

1

9

According to one translation of a rulein Késava's Sabdamanidarpana

dialect

(stitra 284, praydga) which has been adopted by the author of the

Sabdanuiasana (see further on under No. 1), e&o is used ‘when (the

g 86)

action of) the second person of the negative (see § 209) gets the sense of

lialect:

the imperative” (madhyamapurushapratishédhada vidhiydl or madhyama-

ficiplo

purushapratishédhada kriyé vidhyartham Aadalli).

The

Mo 1n &80

of the

(¥<° + @0) indicates that the second person plural is to be understood

490

(see § 205, 1, plural, a).

Let us take e. g. the verbal theme =a0°, to

approach. Of this the second person plural of the negative is ma0T*,

120

i

)

20

154

——

you do not approach, and zs89o would mean ¢you shall not or must not

00ca

approach!’ (Cf. the use of ees under No. 3 of this paragraph.)

Kesar

allow

But when considering the meaning of ¢® under No. 2, ¢ and b, the

aud |

medieeval and modern form of e®o, it might appear as if Késava’s rule

faet

required another translation, viz. ©@®o is used «when a prohibition (prati-

109

shédha, given) concerning (the action of) the second person (plural, e.g.

3,

Qeo T Wew, you must not approach!) becomes an order or permission

your

(vidhi)” in an indirect form, so that 9390 means ¢ they may approach!’

(4,

“let them approach!’, the o of the second person plural in zedes (the

meaning of which see in § 208, 2) being retained in an honorific sense

(Bhar

(¢f" the honorific German ¢Sie’, they, used for English ¢you?) in order to

the su

0w

show that now kind feelings prevail where previously more or less

aversion had obtained; compare with regard to w0 the free use made of

used

the honorific 0 of the modern dialect (see the Dictionary).

In order

army |

to make KéSava’s rule in this form fully correspond to No. 2, ¢ and b, we

omtm

must, by implication, take for granted that not only the second person

(Naci

of the plural is to be understood, but also that of the singular, and that

Y

g0 1n this case too is honorific, so that mo®o signifies also <he, she or

In the

it may approach’.

dko 1

Késava’s instances, as they are taken and adduced by him out of the

Wi

fe!

context, mostly allow the meaning of both translations; they are (sitra

let 1t |

234 of the gabdamanidarpana)—— RIBO0 | — maT90 ! w%@:ﬁgoﬁaw 0381%23

Write!

T, — 5900 - P06 ﬁoﬁo(g@ﬁs“ &BRes aﬁwé?‘!—@domgdoo =90

ﬁU%%@

Do! — o LIRS ey, WRCOZF @ne! (page 258); but his instance

g?u’)

¢

WBRe, BT8O0 BEITEI B398, gFovo! (page 68, which occurs in the

WE 97

Sabdanusisana under its siitra 44 that treats of nipatas, as LRLe,

303

e

2090 HEITEI 55@5@3@30!) seems to show clearly the meaning of the

second translation, 4.e. ‘“oho, may also the greatness of other things

remain!?”

.E%

¢

5J§

§

dl

The Sabdanusisana (sitra 529), however, plainly and exclusively

loyy

teaches the meaning of the first tramslation; it says ieédo SENOLY

bl []gf‘

means «“you must not trust women!” «“do not you (in any way) trust

women (sarvatrapi striyd ma Sraddhata)!”, and esscdorzie SEO0!

sha)

all |

‘“you must not commit an improper act!” «do not commit an improper

act (akiryam mé kurudhvam)!”

n

lt he |

2, a) In the medieval (and medizval-modern) dialect the form of

ithey

w90 is @& (4. e. wo 49, see § 205, 2 and 3, 2nd pers. plural, a), or

Ste

e

155

S,

b 10t

occasionally esede, and is used only in the meaning of the second translation of

Késava’s rule (or in the imperative, § 205, 2. 3), expressing request, permission,

allowance, concession, and wish regarding a third person or thing, singular

the

rule

and plural, e. 9. 2@BCLOT, JTULAENY® 270 VBB RLBD ! sir

may your

ratl

feet continually preserve me! (Basavapurina 27, 72); — egd3eg® ®om0

289! he is a vile person; (but what is that to us?) let him be!

6d

88100

(39, 47);— JdDY, H00IRonte® &Yy SRS BTOe! ISonNSe8FE? let

your excellencies always be among you! why should they concern us?

\ch

(46, 15); — BdAT IR «n®! let Yudhishthira become

king

(the

8ense

(Bharata 1, 8, 5); —

D) ;’)d@wa%:d.@om?as w;ﬁ Do RBoNHeSe® ! may

er 10

the sun of Pampa’s Vlrupaksha give us joy! (Cannabasavapurana 1,2);—

[ess

DOWLDTI Wont BRBEO! o

BRETTY IR0 AoBIIB), & War-cry

de of

used by elephant-drivers with the object ‘may it discomfit the hostile

order

army !’ (Nagirajiya); — $o0dys BRFO! Ry, IR regn, (a pill or) an

b, we

ointment made with the object ¢ (people) may smear the body (with it)!’

£r300

(Nadirajiya)

| that

b) In the modern dialect 9o has the same forms and meaning as

he or

in the mediseval one, with the only difference that e, e9de are used

also interrogatively for the first person, e. g. @3 2380309 ! let him

he

9390 2080309 ! let her write! gy wdo®

write! (or he may write)

kautta

let it (the child) write

300 Wi ! let them (the men or women)

Q)(\JJ W

write! 53 23030©! let them (the children) write!

B 9NN RS

oeQ O ! let the calf suck (its) mother’s breast! Bezag=cy &

) (‘a:)d

? 3D mﬁ@t

fance

420 %3@' let those who want (them) take these ripe fruits! c%eaﬁdo QDY

n the

T %?ﬁ FO0 =oa® ! may God grant welfare to your children! &

3030 835 @o®! let (him, her, it or them) hold this word in mind!

L \y

HRoF S8 wv®! let only (thy, your or their) courage remain! bBwe

of the

thin,

0

25

w3 SR,3, 2eeIO? o, how shall I (or we) tell how great the beauty is?

VIT DWed

YRR, 0099? how shall I (or we) tell how great his

&

annoyance i18? Q[o), &8 BRFT, 2O IoO? whence shall I (or we)

&

1817 el

d\ Ojo

bring four annas? SR& oy, 38y, BTN HewOe? shall I (or we) bring

the bread and give (it) to the cow? o BRENAGY (6 6. BRCND + &) ?

| frust

shall I g0? 4Rz, o< SerRO? shall (or may) I do this?

JEAUY

gri®! means ‘let (him, her, it or them) become!’, and then also ¢let

prope!

it be, be it!’, and when repeated it gets the meaning of the English

¢either — or’

(see §

317).

See § 316, 14

i)y O

20%

156

e —

Note.

)

The Sabdénusisana (sitras 524. 525. 526. 527, 529) teaches another use

)

2

07

of the ancient 9o, saying that it may stand for the ©° and ¥ of the infinitive

i

(see § 187) before B¢B or B¢&o, it is not requested, it must not, ete. (see § 209,

3

210)

note 1).

Its instances (under stitra 529) show that it wants to express the

L

second person plural by the %o in @90, for it translates 3 To 3B Do He@ or

appi

Beddo IF)Vo We®o, “you must not (in any way) trust women’” (sarvatripi

striyé ma sraddhata).

has 1

The |

3,

Instead of the w@®o of No. 1 of this paragraph Késava’s sttra

6. )

and vritti (234) have the form of esesf, that of ©®o appearing only and

alone in the praydga, ¢.e. in his first instances, quoted under No. 1.

He, no doubt, accepted 5e to be the leading form to which ©o was to

a)

Infing

be suffixed.

But as to the second instances in the prayboga under his

with

vritti he introduces eef again, saying «when there does not occur the

appe

sense of permission (vidhyartha) in the action of the negative (prati-

shédhakriyé)”, ¢. e. when a prohibition is not changed into a permission

or when there is a direct prohibition or interdiction, * eseys is used”

18 11§

(vidhyartham allada pratishédhakriyéyol al akkum).

His two instances

18 (a1

\

enter)

with e9eys are:——iwé’\@%zss ¥o WA ! AB, IR RT3 WBelIsvo

230693, do not (thou) consider any other thing! verily, thy good disposition

P/

is different, (and so) am I different, (but the good disposition of both

Iy su

/

of us is beyond doubt). wIRO PYReF Yol 3, Resy RWeNd, the male

(See §

cuckoo which said (or says) ¢do not enter, do not enter the woodl’. A

v

the ¢

similar instance is in the Candraprabhapurana (2, after 93), wviz.

Sty

A

é@ﬁ@raﬁa&ﬁ@@@d%r, aﬁoa@ﬁ;éfb@@ég 33}0%‘;63 PP BT

3

8, -Egajroﬁ

Negat

Pie Yo'l 23300 ’fddoﬁoﬁé rieoy Anendeds Bariss, the sounds of

phur)

the male cuckoo which was in the branches with young leaves, said ¢if

he as before enters to-day, it will be improper’, and cried out to

Singy|

b()t]l (

Kandarpa as it were ¢do not enter, do not enter (the wood)!’ (¢f. the

use made of @®o according to the first translation of KéSava’s rule

W

n the

under No. 1)

Presgy

The Sabdanuiisana (sutra 528) has the following instances: —

lu

e3F B wRmvo PRl do not enter this wood! (yliyam étad vanam

ma pravisata).

AT SH BoRcSvo Swemer ! do not look at this house!

lengt}

(yiyam étad griham ma paSyata).

o33N, Qe

oJd

—

I\

5 Bonws @é&%& e !

devotees, do not you engage in Angaja’s sport! (bhd yatayd bhavantd

aCCOY(

madanakriydyam ma pravartadhvam),

G

B

——

157

208. How are we to explain the possibility of the use made in

56

§ 207 of 9o, 9O and eses?

litive

It rests on the meaning of the infinitive (see §§ 170. 171. 187. 188.

209

3 the

210) which in the present case ends in ey,

B or

1, In the instance za389o (R20eF + B0), you shall not or must not

fripi

approach!, z9der means <to approach, yet to approach’, 7. e. approaching

has not yet taken place (and shall not do so), and o means ¢you’.

The primitive sense of zaT8o, therefore, is ¢you are yet to approach’,

jutra

and

4. e. you have not approached yet (and shall not do so0).

\0, |

2, When =890 (F98% + Bo) Or Xl (mo0of 4+ ) means ‘they

may approach!’ <¢<let him, her or it approach!’ the meaning of the

as o

r his

infinitive zooes is that of a verbal noun, wiz. approaching, combined

with the sense of a sign of exclamation and with the honorific o or

(g}

A

r the

‘approaching!’ ¢ (his, her, its, or their) approach may take place!’

praf

3,

When the infinitive with eses¢, without the honorific @0 and g,

5100

sed”

is used prohibitively, as in Ynes, do not enter!, the primitive meaning

1068

is (analogously to that of maTef4 w0 under No. 1) ¢yet to enter’, 7. e.

70

entering has not yet happened (and shall not do so).

sifion

209. The conjugated negative (pratishédha, § 146) of the verb is formed

oth

by suffixing the personal terminations of § 193 to the infinitive ending in €

male

(see §§ 170. 187, 2, and note 2 of this paragraph), with the exception of

i

the terminations «3s, w3y, ¥3,, 3.

(4

A difference, however, regarding those terminations in the conjugated

ﬁroﬁ

negative is that, instead of evzo and ens3) of the neuter singular and

ids of

plural of the ancient dialect, eszs> and eag3) are used; enzmy, the neuter

id ¢if

singular in the medieval dialect, becomes eoz30; (in the modern dialect

ut 0

both e9z0 and essy) remain).

f the

What has been stated in § 170 about the doubling of final consonants

; rule

in the formation of the negative participle remains in effect also in the

present case.

Cf. 215, 1, f.

g5~

In the three dialects the themes 8o, to bring, and 200%, to come, always

gﬂ,llﬁm

lengthen their s, changing it into e, in the conjugated negative.

10use |

The conjugated negative is used for the present, past, and future tense,

1

)8

according to circumstances (¢f. § 170).

yantl

Concerning its original meaning see § 210.

p—

158

—

1,

Paradigms of the negative in the ancient dialect:

9

one of JLeRy, to see.

diale

Singular.

Plural.

Lst pers. RPewo (i. . IRE 4 0), T do not see, I did

RRERBJ)

Istp

not see, I have not seen), I shall not see.

2nd pers. RLEEOISF.

RReRTE

fnd |

3rd pers.

drd p

mase. SOeEO0.

SReBO°

fem. SPeBEYS.

RPeED°

fe

neut. JLCRTV.

SREBY

1

one of evC®, to remain.

Singular.

Plural.

st pers. euCPO300 (i. . QU0 4 »0), I do not remain,

eESP 03053

o

Vi

I did not remain, (I have not remained), I

shall not remain.

g

(v

2nd pers

eI O30 03¢ .

eGP R T*

3rd pers

liale

masc

e300,

e 03008

fem.

enCI2030%¢ .

L O30 0°

Ist D

neut.

N C O30T,

e 03053

one of Qe to stand.

2nd D

Singular.

Plural.

1st pers.

23920 (i.e. d2 for dV420), I do not stand,

23 .

3rdp

I did not stand, (I have not stood), I shall

not stand.

2nd pers

QO of

fo

83&30033‘.

il

3rd pers

masc

20 T°

fem

Qe .

AV T°

neut

SR

W (

@ec)odo.

one of 3v¢, to hring.

1]

Plural

Singular.

igleg

1st pers.

3980 (390 for 33+ 20), I do not bring, I did

3903

88con

not bring, (I have not brought), I shall not

fol »

bring.

Sm()‘u

2nd pers

39003,

3900°

3rd pers

13>

masc

3900,

3200°

Verhy

fem

S90%F.

3200°

neut.

etc.z

39030,

Bleby)

Sug N

oo

159

e

2

L)

A paradigm of the negative of Jseecdd, to see, in the medizval

dialect :

Singular.

Plural.

1st pers.

SReBo, BREBRY, e, I do no§ see, RPOB).

ete., ete.

2nd pers.

SReR.

SRRV (4. €. RPLE+ AD).

3rd pers.

mase.

RPET0, BRCRRY, (806R).

(RPETRTF), NPCBRT,

fem

(RReRY), BwerRyo.

(RPeRT*), SWeRT.

neut.

SRR,

NPT ).

Other instances in the first person singular are e. g. 932030, euC®

0oy, wuerads (of ewer); Fdodo, TR, TAN (of FR); ASo,

RS, 3G or Ao, ASRY, AS (of Ref); wedo, wadwY, 2wad (of woF).

3

9

A paradigm of the negative of Jeew>, to see, in the modern

dialect:

Singular.

Plural.

Ist pers. SReRF9, Swew, I do not

RPEBT).

see, ete., ete.

2nd pers. W0,

RREBEO (i. e RReR + 90, see Nudi-

gattn page 78).

3rd pers.

mase. SRCERY, NRCR.

PR T0.

fem

NPT H,

SPERTV.

neut. RLEBIV.

RPCTB).

Other instances in the first persoﬁ singular are e. g. #0030, ©C°

o3y (of wee); "By, IR (of 8R); 98wy, 393 (of ).

The conjugated negative is somewhat seldom used in the modern colloquial

dialect (except in proverbs and in the verb cef, see § 316, 12), and its

second person plural 3we¢zRd is anomalous, its termination @9 standing

for 20,

The same dialect generally uses the third person neuter

singular of the (present-)future tense which is a bhavavaana (§ 200,

1. 3), and the infinitive with ey (®ef) which too is a bhivavatana or

verbal noun (§ 188), followed by = (see note 1), e. g. FRB[OY, TR

@9, the first form for the present. and future (I, etc. do not give, I,

ete. shall not give), and the second one for the past (I, etc. did not give).

Bee 88 D08 8. 209, 1.'2; 816,'1.2; 368.

—

—

160

[}

d\

When in the ancient dialect repetition of the conjugated negative

dialec

(§ 211, 6) is used, the first verb may drop its personal termination and

o,

the ¢ of the infinitive, e. g. 2590, 25980 (for 25980 25930, Sabdanusisana

’

the |

stitra 39 8).

Cf. ©3 ©EYB in § 170.

they

Notes.

L

It is a peculiarity of the only two defective verbs 2, to be fit, and 8&°

perso

198

(another form of @%°), to be, that in the three dialects they have the forms v

DELS0)

and Qe for all persons in the singular and plural of the conjugated negative.

third

The formation is the following: the infinitives are ®® and @Y, to which ¥ is

added with the regular doubling of the final ©° of the theme, this © represent-

) 2

%

ing all the personal terminations (¢f. the suffix @Y in § 243, and see their use

§2

in §§ 298; 316, 1. 9).

The meaning. of ®® and ¥, depends on their nomina-

appea

tive or subject which is either expressly put or is to be supplied (see § 210).

as we

Occasionally a euphonic sdnné may be added to ¥¥ and @2, so that we get

80 |

©Q o, B o (see ¢.g. Sabdanu3isana sttra 523 ; § 298, 4; § 300), which (s0nné)

may change into <% or

o

=6

when it meets with a following vowel.

The same

nd p

Negat

holds good with regard to 23ea3 of ¢@), to be required, and, with the sonng,

Sed@o (see e. g. Sabdanushsana stira 524 seg.; $§ 207, note; 316, 5). In the

I\

modern dialeet & of R (§ 316, 15), to be proper, is another instance of

hased

this kind. The Sabdinusisana (sitras 19. 584) introduces also €873 or 3779,

83

for @nw.

170

p

The grammarian Késava calls 99 a particle (avyaya) that partakes of the

of tin

nature of a verb (kriydtmaka); see § 212, 7; 298.

g

i

2,

When the author has stated at the beginning of this paragraph that in

yeb £

the conjugation of the negative the personal terminations are attached to the

infinitive with ¢, he seems to be at variance with what Ké&Sava in and under

1y g

his stitra 216 writes, véz. that a verb’s theme (dhatu, according to his instances

10!

b g

a theme ending in 9V) appears when one removes the termination (vibhakti) ®o

ATy

of the conjugated negative (pratishédhakriy®), so that e. g. the themes 89,

‘T she

SRBY, TR®E are formed from B8RO, SIPBo, TLBO; but because his ruale is

1t o

superficial (see § 143) and therefore seems to give only a certain practical hint

the

to students, we must not lay too much stress on its wording, and not conclude

Supph

that SRR+ o, INWI 4 Wo, FRRI4 0 showed the exact final rule for the

tO be

formation of the negative; we have to take the infinitive with final ® and the

termination ©0, i. ¢. 8%¢B . ¥0, INE - ¥, FHE + 0 in order to get BRWO, INF0,

§ 209

¥»&0, and find the theme by removing the termination and by adding ¢V in

01‘ wi

the instances given by Késava.

Propg

EXlgf)

210.

In examining the origin of the conjugzated negative we have to

(wil

reject the thought, as if the change of the suffixes evz@o and evsg) into

ot

161

ive

o and 3 could help us to find -it, for already in the ancient

and

dialect we have, side by side with evzy, @3> (that is another form of

yang

30, §193 under remarks) as a termination of the past tense, and

the positive forms %53, they are (§ 194, remark 1) and 236%@

they scratched (§ 198, 1); then in the medieval one e53) in the third

kL

person neuter plural of the present, past and future tense (§§ 194;

)

198, 4; 200, 2; 201, 2. 3), and in the modern one ezo in the third

person neuter singular of the future tense (§200,3) and w5 in the

1tivé:

1

third person neuter plural of the past and future tense (§§ 198,

360t~

55 200, 3).

Also the change of the vowel e into & in 3gf and wos

[ Use

(§ 209) cannot assist us to do so, as some other monosyllabic verbs

ning-

appear in their positive forms with long and short vowels (see §§ 52. 53),

10),

as we have the positive forms sadef, 2900 for 8def, wder (§ 187, 1),

6 gof

3938 for 33 (§ 187, 4), 393, 2393, 39, wo for 33, wg, 3o¢, wos (§§ 205, 1,

png)

2nd pers., b; 205, 2, 2nd pers., b; 2006), 250 for wm (§ 184), and the

Same

negative forms 333, w3V for 3937, wo3a (§ 170),

onn,

n the

There can be no doubt that the origin of the conjugated negative is

ee of

based, as has been stated in § 209, on the so-called infinitive ending in

1o,

es (§ 187) in the same manner as that of the negative participle is (see

§ 170).

That infinitive originally was a verbal noun and only in course

of the

of time came to get its specific meanings (§ 188). Thus e. g. SweR at first

‘to see’, ‘about to see’,

meant ¢seeing’, ‘a seeing’, and thereupon

ot 10

‘yet to see’. RRedo (RWER+ o), therefore, signifies ¢a yet to see-I’, 7. e.

0 1he

my seeing (is or was) yet to be or (will be) yet be, or my seeing (is)

ander

41065

not actually existing, (was) not so, or (will) not be so, whence we

arrive at the meaning ‘I do not see’, «I did not see’, ¢ (I have not seen)’,

) 9

| é.),

] shall not see’.—Regarding the meaning of BO ey 3o and R

e 18

it has been stated in note 1 of § 209 that their meaning depends on

mf

their nominative or subject which is either expressly put or is to be

I

clde

supplied. Originally they denote ¢a yet to be fit—’, ‘a yet to be—’, ‘a yet

r the

to be required—’, ‘a yet to be proper—’, (the dashes denoting the & of

d the

§ 209, note 1), . e. fitting (is, was or will be) yet to be, being (is, was

R0

or will be) yet to be, requiring (is, was or will be) yet to be, being

W

proper (is, was or will be) yet to be, or being fit (is or was) not really

existing or (will) not be so, being (is or was) not really existing or

(will) not be so, requiring (is or was) not really existing or (will)

(4 0

not be so, etc. Now if for instance 3o (¥33), he, becomes the

| info

21

P —

162

——

subject, the translation is ¢he is not fit, he was not fit, he will not

)y

‘he is not, he was not, he will not be

latl

e fit"

‘he is not required, he

was not required, he will not be required’, etc. (f. the prohibitive forms

0né

of the infinitive with ese 1n § 208

5 w\f

That ego and e:3) are suffixed for engo and evs) is very probably

6

done to show off the use of the infinitive with es in the formation of

of th

the tense

NDJol

211

In § 152 (¢f. § 165, b, 13

170) there is the statement that

frequentative or iterative action of the verb is expressed by simple or triple

first

repetition

Without respect to the various meanings created by that

oh)

process (see § 339) we give here a number of instances as they occur

this

in the three dialects:—

1, regarding doubling the verb without any alteration (in the

parti

present, future, past, imperative, infinitive, participle, and conjugated

her

negative) PUED LD, (20e9Y, BVERY); "309) Cﬁo@ (! (Qﬂog) ML) do) BRETYF R

J

BREHYF T, ogjaewo opeso, eﬁ% (e.s%’a eﬁvo), TOTY HOTY, VTWIBTIRY

of th

(BT VTOBY), TR H°WY; @dmadodo (dCSoCSJ SHITY), FEYo T o,

PeTo BPeRo, zos 035° &)co 68T &m m@w - (2»3) 2 W :Sa) '@Joofns FR OIS,

two

959 039, DVSEY ‘B

20, B8 BB, 1B 1B, IO JTF, TBECA BELN, TRE

16

3%¢, ©nwen® (UnO snY); sAd TRR, BN IR, wiRd (for wd wi)

&S1039, N3, (eimaa Eﬁm@a) BRWIE (YR BR), I8 I8, ¥ 3y,

of th

(283, ¥3y), YOERY EDY (WVEDY YVERY), m§o u;ﬁo S8 G5, 2~§ uaﬁ 23930

afte

w5900, WeB WeR;

2

9

regarding tripling the verb without any alteration (in the

imperative, past, and past participle) &z%mc&@ =) (W@ zozéo W), Wiy

hefo,

Wa);

P3O ﬁJaoi)No (2020 R &m 0 B b No) %ozéo %gcéo BOR, 3@@650 &@ezéo

SRR

209 239 239 zoaio NN Ee) uﬁo

BROEDV £90 £ (emeao QVEDD YVED ) ;

;-

a9

Il.),

9y

regarding doubling the verb, dropping ees (or also @I+

(Wl

i. e. »3) of the first one (in the infinitive) Rpen RLeNw, WO WIWO

TRR TRBS

4, regarding doubling the verb, dropping the termination of the

qu )

past participle of the first one, e. g. TR FRRY, TOB TR, FTCF* FTOWIN

¢ 230 (see § 165, b, 1), and also its vowel, e. g. 3% I, 31 3330

g

(see § 165, b, 2), to which class may likewise be referred the doubled

\45)

negative participle dropping its e, viz. 33 3.3, dv VB, VB VBB

Y

§ 170)

Wou

—

163

—

not

5, regarding doubling the verb, dropping the termination of the

, he

relative present participle or that of the present participle of the first

ity

one, e.g. BReB FRERT, SR SRN;Y BT BT, WwT WG, Rwen

BRERS, ;

ably

6, regarding doubling the verb, dropping the personal termination

0 of

of the first one, e. g. P[pexw Jpedo, B[pes Tpedo, W WF 03F, 39T

235980 (for 25980 25930 or 2393 wodo, see § 209);

that

7, regarding doubling the verb, dropping the final syllable of the

riple

first one, e. g. 38 &3y, 3R® 3PN, B[ICI [Ny, B[R SBHNRY,

that

d

300 BenEe (see § 165, b, 3, and ¢f. § 183, 7 and remark 1 and 2 of

00U

I

this paragraph; ¢f. also § 253, 3; § 243, 4, 16);

the

8, regarding tripling the verb, dropping the termination of the past

ated

participle of the two first ones, e. g. W& W& B3 (§ 165, b, 2, remark,

where 2@ wi@d Swys is adduced as a peculiar form);

FI

9, regarding tripling the verb, dropping the personal termination

N

e

g

of the two first ones, e. g. &

e

o (w3, ¥T, ¥l0), W W W o

10, regarding tripling the verb, dropping the last syllable of the

oiF,

two first ones, €. g. 30% 30% 3w, BF BF Vo (see § 165, b, 3,

AN

=N

remark).

Cf. also 33 83 I@onv.

A

11, Observe also the curious repetition of verbs wherein the initial

e

of the second one is changed, e. g. 3wREy NBYRy, 338 NFT. Cf. § 303, 1

530

after e. Observe also the colloquial expression e 3 9 (for 33 29).

Remarks.

the

1

Also by setting a sort of adverb whieh is of the same root as the verb,

before the verb and occasionally doubling it repetition is expressed, e. g. 3

¥D0RY; 3B IRM, 3B IBINY; DOV JVBITY; MBI IBITI; NI QIQRY, AT I

¢

e

0

7Y, — 29806 2883° 28¢e; z&égj z%égj?‘é 23ee0; IR IB VRONY; 38 IBS IBONY; 33 T[oed 30

)i

ﬁo;

08 BB TOEOTY; TV TV SVEINY; N MBI VBTV, B MBI NBITY;

)

o)

DD DM D00W; DB B NOW.

j@«,

It is possible that some of the instances are connected with No. 7 above.

2,

Of double nouns not seldom verbs are formed by means of 8% (§ 149

the

seq.) which may be regarded as frequentative ones, e. g. @& SOV (of w8 Jod),

R WARY, BB RBRY, TR TOR, TS FOR, F¢ TR, TE IR, To TR, 1B VAR,

W,

[AY)

AR MR, fo ROR, MR TRRY, TR TARY, T Roray, 37 WaRY, 3¢ S9AY, 3¢

PIONR), 3¢ BYRY, BF BYRY, FIN JONRY, T ZE*RY, X3 BORY.

led

il

A7

) 10

1) R[pez and So@ might however be Swed® and JPBL (see § 181, note ¢) s0 that there

would be no dropping.

21%

—_—

164

0td

VI. On adverbs, etc.

(See’§ 281 seq.)

1gss;

212.

In the present paragraph a class of words is introduced which

the m

are called indeclinables (avyaya) by Kannada grammarians; some of the

o

words they term also particles (nipata, see remark 1). Many of the words

would be called adverbs by Europeans.

f;‘,ir‘io

long ¢

The expression of ‘indeclinables’ is not quite exact, as some admit

(); ¢

of being declined, to which the letter d (declinable) in parenthesis will

that t

be added in the alphabetical lists given below.

this £

These alphabetical lists are composed of the adverbs, etc. found in

M=

L IEWY,

the Sabdamal}.idarpana and Sabdanu$isana. The adverbs, etc. contained

med

in these two works belong to the ancient dialect and are left unmarked ;

i

if they occur also in the medieval one, they are marked with med.

.zg

P

§

(medizeval) in parenthesis; and if they are used also in the modern

fime

one, with mod. (modern) in the same parenthesis; the additional words

day

in brackets have not been met with in the ancient one.

Slight differences

f0-mo

of form in the three dialects have not been regarded. A few words and

2ol

peculiar meanings rest on the Sabdanuiisana.

“}f 1B

Numeral adverbs

T

1,

(exceptionally arranged according to their natural order).

DR

beforg

w3OF, once (med.); 9IF, twice; I0OBF, thrice; FOIF, sometimes; SONF,

ayhy

several times; @AJF, a thousand times.

[%3, once, B3, twice, PRy,

{his

thrice, are other forms in the medieeval dialect; %) oceurs also in the mod.

one.] See § 279.

1 {he

and |

2,

Adverbs of place.

1,

©8, ©8¢°, that direction; in that direction (d; med., mod.) ; ©S &, after,

afterwards; ©9, there (d; med., mod.); 938, 93 &%, this direction ; in this direction

(d; med., mod.); AWT°, the front; in the front (d; med., mod.; mod. also 283,

(The

2B ; 99, here (d; med., mod.); VS, @v3 F, in this intermediate direction;

©

@9, in this intermediate place; ©3, 23 &°, what direction ? (d; med., mod.); 29,

aby

I

where? (d; med., mod.) ; &3, together with (med., mod.) ; %908, in, within, into

€S

(med., mod.) ; 38, together (med., mod.); %R, below (med., mod.); S0, BoFeF,

Slm;

la

the south; in the south (4; med., mod.); 883, in the middle (med., mod.)

?

IR,

EXcey

S@TY, the west; in the west (d ; med., mod.) ; 3, behind (mod.) ; S&f, behind ;

meg

Zpen, outside (med., mod. Bwer); WAR, WIRS, the north ; in the north (d; med.,

VW0

mod.); @&, dee? B¢, separately, apart (med., med.); 78, in front; forward

ll]gl\~

(med., mod.) ; ST, JoRBEF, the east; in the east (d; med., mod.); 39¢°, above

G §

(d; med., mod.); 39¢5, above (med., mod.); R8Y, around; that surrounds (d;

med., mod.).

(meg

[%, that side; on that side (d), 8 this side; on this side (d),

(8

X

Ll

165

SRR

5900%3, in advanee, first, oceur in the med. and mod. dialeet ;—®&3, ©& 3, near-

ness; near, close by (d) belong to the med. one, and appear as ®33, T3, in

hich

the mod. one.]

the

3,

Adverbs of time.

ords

©8Y, that time ; then (d; med., mod.) ; ®80, at the time that, when; (so that);

¥R no=wgo (see § 365 ; until, in med.); ¥IF%o, WIISNo, until that time, so

Imit

long as; @SRB0, ¥SNBI=VF0 (§ 365; VSRBES, med.); 1B, that time; then

(d); ©¥N%, that time; then (d; med.); ¥JINo, continually (med.); o, ¥3°, from

yill

that time, afterwards (med.); ¥S0=v30 (§ 365); WSno=vI0 (§ 365); B,

1 m

this time; to-day (4; med., mod.); 8370, up to this time (in med.); a3 Co,

9], &8N0, until this day ; S1AE), this moment ; now (d.) ; HN%C, this time ; now (d;

ined

med.) ; &I, a little while ago (d); ¥VS), at this intermediate time; #v3,ITo,

hed

Q3 =8T0, up to this intermediate time; ©%), when? (4; med., mod.); ~§ o,

med

23,380, 3, 7870, till what time?; &3, forthwith (med.); S©09203%, subsequent

lern

time ; subsequently, afterwards (d; med., mod.); 398v°, at dawn; RR, the

ords

398

?

day after to-morrow; on the day after to-morrow (d; med., mod.);

16es

to-morrow (d; med., mod.); 8, yesterday (d; med., mod.); pw B (Jpwe?,

and

pee, P e®, PBe?), daybreak; at dawn (d); W& (d), WWTo, WXT, WPT,0,

2063’61, w030, afterwards (W, W*F, med., mod.; WFo, &)6393;, 2«00395;0, med.);

2BMoe?, again (med.); S328°, that is before; before (4; med., mod.)

SRR3R,

SRIORD, some time ago (d); S8, the day before yesterday; on the day

before yesterday (d; med., mod.); RS¥H, at daybreak; I3%%, daybreak; at

F,

daybreak (d).

[¢7, that time; then (d); &7, this time; now (d); &, after

0 7‘3\)\,

this, afterwards, are med. and mod.; %% % appears as 303 8 and B, (d)

mod

in the med. dialect, and as ®032&° (d) in the mod. one; FW&ES, forthwith,

and @93, at dawn, are mod. words; BB, S, BHZH, (i ¢. BRI, BOWE

8 ¥), at daybreak, early (mod.); regarding %=y, still, ete. see Dictionary.]

fter

Adverbs of circumstance and manner.

otion

4,

(The meanings given are to be somewhat modified according to circumstances.)

)@531

o8 &, abundantly, exceedingly; 0, soever: whatsoever; ©0ddo,

Ho;

abundantly, exceedingly; ©3, ¥R TP, VRTIRW® =V, ete. ¥, VI

29,

nto

(3% Sabdanusisana), 98, ©8 Ip0°, ©3 e, in that manner, in like manner; like ;

similar to ; in the manner in which (¥8), ©3, med., mod.; ©334 med.)

©od)

i)

)%

excessively, exceedingly (med.); ©383), ©3, &3 ever, g little, to some extent (¥

mda

med.) ; ©Q 3e°, causelessly; ©BR = 9, ete. (med.); €00, soever: whatsover;

@0, further; @338, ©dy3, vehemently, quickly; ¥2FSo, excessively, exceed-

wd 1

ingly ; a3y, a8, (98,0 Sabdanusisana), 93, in this manner (932, med., mod. ;

ard

)07

32,8, med., also 9L ; 9333, in a proper manner; BN, in this manner

(med.) ; 20 I3, greatly, much; ¥0SY, @03, in this intermediate manner; how

;

(%0 Sabdanusasana); *0s &, how ? (¥%0 Sabdanusisana); “vd, silently (38& o

@

—

P —

166

in th

Sabdanusisana); eUIFIo, excessively, exceedingly ATO, WATR, silently

N

[k

(202TR, med.);

T

by degrees, slowly, irresolutely; N spamously, extensively;

w32, O3, how? (9%, med., mod.); 232>, how? (FFo Sabdanusisana; med.);

23R, how? (med.); ©7o, most certainly; @0, certainly (dF 3FFO SabdAnush-

]

sana); w33, clearly, evidently; ¥®, excessively ; swiftly (med.); I8, TR,

()

fragrantly, deliciously (med., mod.); T30, excessively, greatly (med), ?035

mod

suddenly; 3&3) (0. r. $er®), closely, densely; T¥3, redly (med., mod.); §§O

the

excessively, exceedingly

803, Worvl, WS, in a shrill, piercing, rough

one|

manuer; 1@, [, certainly (13, med., 3> is used in emotion and command); 1@

e, quickly (med.; T9¥1%, mod.); AR, A S, spinningly, round and round (med.);

§

RoeIROSYR, inactively, silently ; D@3, quickly ; 88,3, quickly (med.) BB YB

quickly (see & 307, a); ¥, quickly; 3¢ 0o, quickly ; 2% 5o, manifestly, clearly,

conj

3OR, 3B

certainly ; S¥Ws, with embarrassment (in speakin

med., mod.)

this

coolly, refreshingly (med., mod.); 3¥=0¥0, decisively (REOF 0329 Sabdanusasana);

3¥8¥, 3686 ghttermg]y (med.); éé&z’ qé&

8esﬁ 29 ®, whirlingly, round and

he

round (2273, med.); (38,3, see

§ 307, a); ‘§ 5 thmly (med., mod.); $¢30, not

firmly, irresolutely (¥ GEF®Fo Sabdanuba%ana), 3ed3¢t0, by degrees, siowly,

§10

irresolutely ; $»8R, 8»83, vehemently (med.) (3933, see § 307, a); TR

at th

wearisomely (med

mod.)

nod

certainly (med.);

Nod, with consternation

mod

(med., mod.) ; 3%, excessively, greatly, further (med.); 2%, Jo, certainly ; dRFT°

(med

2RF00, causelessly; @), @0, extensively, excessively; S0@T, 0T, softly

S6¢ e

(med., mod.); S2¥%, much, exceedingly; &7, SWR, clearly, distinctly, nicely

wher

(med., mod.) ; 3WR, BUT, vehemently (&drcﬁdr o Sabdanmana) : 8¢°, exceedingly ;

Wher

much (med.); (Kmv 3, see § 307, a); oo?ﬁ 95,3, suddenly (med., mod.); w?ﬁﬁ

par

greenly (med.); 3338, quickly; 20w, 96’300 extenswely, greatly, further (med 551

inter

exo, profusely, much, further

IR, IR (ISR, IDR), suddenly; WRYS

(meg

quickly ; '8, in vain (med., mod.); wd®o, much, further; WK, VI, silently,

\rwﬁ

inactively; @337, W3R, silently; ¥, firmly, tightly; 03?35 hotly, warmly

AN

(med., mod.); w‘23 3o, quickly; % 0o, c]early (%39,5F0 Sabdanusasana}, B3¢ ®o,

hat

&8¢ @o, timidly, trembhrmly7 ?umuéw swiftly, quickly (med.); #%¢0¥e*, swiftly,

107¢

quickly, without restraint; @®¢33, swiftly, quickly ; 3983, other, different; 21

¢

excessively, much (med.); 3291, 3¢ 3, slowly (med., mod.); 8o, FV0, JL 0, H&0,

of

A8, perpetually, constantly (med.);

most certainly; clearly; (33,8, see § 307, a); ®

2033, sweetly; BomoR, ROTYF, silently, inactively (med., mod.); Anedo, AR®o

till ¢

3

wDC‘éO, much, more, further fomcgo wd@0, causelessly; 30, how? TI3 (BHR),

WA T

suddenly (med., mod.)

[@%ﬁ Q3N appear also as oan, BIOR, %o, %ton in the

Uf, It

med. dialect, and always so in the mod. one; 2®R is also B, o, N in the

AN}

med. dialect, and always ©313, B30 in the modern one.] Regarding DBR TN

BoN—JN, o’oDﬁ o‘SDﬁ o)ﬁ\) _*Qﬁﬁ see S X200 (&3\65 a tadbhava of =3033F, may be

adduced hele §00, ¢. g. S 3963 or B FOR, in this manner, thus; OFT BF B0

Wwhig

33638, according to his command. Samskrita 5,590 is similarly used, e. g. 8 $,533

Ong

a——

167

ntly

in this manner; ®%e 530, according to that; V9T I,TICOF, in various ways.

ely;

Likewise ¥,5), 80, 0t2, 33 are used.

C’f also 3%3)530536, 3&@5)@,)

d

)

9

Conjunctions.

(:;

W)

®o, ®o, and (med.); w3, again, further, and; We*, again, further; =030,

03

.

a

~57

again, further, and (med.; 393, mod.

)

also the form =989 is used in the

i\

mod. dialect); 39¢%°, farther, and, or (med.).

[@vo appears also as @V, YW in

the medieval dialect, and generally as ¥Ww, exceptionally as @ in the modern

]‘[c')’

one.]

See §§ 284 seq.; 297.

()

6,

Postpositions.

=

W

Several of the above-mentioned adverbs of place and time and of the

tly

conjunctions are used also as postpositions; they are adduced under

o3,

this heading again, but without their meaning.

1a);

Postpositions, 4.e. words and letters (particles) placed after, or at

and

the end of, nouns, pronouns, participles, etc. (see § 282), are:

100

¥, a particle of emphasis; a vocative particle; ¥o; @3 (¥38o, ete., see

iy,

" =<

§ 109, a, 5); ©3,0°; ©33; VY TIOT; B3 ; VI IPO°; VI ; W 0; VI To; WO, in; to;

ol

at the time that, when, whilst (med., mod.; see §§ 109, a, 5. 187, 1); ¥ (med.,

ion

mod.; see §§ 109. 117 seq.); ¥=0; &, a particle of emphasis; a vocative particle

fily

(med., mod.); %, there (med., mod.); %o, from that place or time; thence (med.;

see e. g. §§ 109. 120, a, 3); AQT°; 40; BIM0; YV; YVO; YVBO, at the time that,

oly

when (§ 286); ¥\¥; », by means of, from (see § 109, a, 3); », at the time that,

Iy

38,

when; so that (med.; see § 187, 4); », &, particles of emphasis; vocative particles;

particles of interrogation (med., mod.); %, &, vocative particles; particles of

d.

interrogation (med., mod.); %®&, together with, along with (med., mod.); 3, if

)0

(med.); 29, (0¥°), in, within; into (med.; see e.g. § 109); w¥8; 398; 28 ;

iy

nly

Ppwr; WPFo, VT, WPT0, wers,, werodo; S8, as far as; till (med., mod.)

3

=008 5 39185 FT0, VMo, until; FPe®, IPew?, like; as; in the manner in which; so

20,

that (med.; see § 242).

[©&, if, another form of %%, appears in a SAsana of

1y,

/Jﬁ

1076 A. D. (99 %), in one of 1123 A. D. (23 %, ¥3%), in one of 1181 A.D.

(39,8 =Be @), and in one of 1182 A. D. (3¥3B); 23 occasionally has the form

#0

W)

of ©@ and ©3 in the med. dialect, and always that of ©3 in the med. one;—VIT,

J)

till (med., mod.); &7, at the time that, when (med., mod.); ©3 (see sub @),

wed; ¥ WK, together with (mod.); &Rom, LAXS, &85, on account of (med.;

o)

%38 also mod.); 83%, till, until; as far as (med., mod.); 3989%, for, on account

hie

of, in order to (mod.); WA, Wik, on account of ; concerning; for, in order to (mod.);

he

#3023, previously, before ; 3203 ; B} ; BRSF, except (mod.). |

Dﬁ'

he

7,

Some verbal forms, ete.

o

which are classed under the avyayas by the éabdénuéasana, but of which only

oM

one, Viz. AY, (see § 209, note 1), is called an avyaya b’y the Sabdamanidarpana.

P

168

et

T

They are:

the s

W) (=an YR30 § 122 or VYRR, of ¥&°, § 209, note 1), a bhavavaéana

of kb

or verbal noun, (literally ‘a yet to be fit-it’, ‘a not actually being fit-it’, used

soun(

for all persons singular and plural, expressly put or not, in the three tenses, viz.)

clang

I am not fit or meant, thou art not fit or mednt, he, she or it is not fit or meant ;

(in th

we, you or they are not fit or meant; I was not fit or meant, ete., ete. (see

(inb

88 301. 338); @3, (i. e. ¥V, 4+ ) am I not fit or meant? ete.; I am indeed not

jhum

fit or meant, ete. (§§ 301. 338); ©O (or ¥Y0; see § 209, note 1; § 210; med.,

with

mod. ; § 300); ©28, except (see §§ 170. 171 ; med., mod.; §§ 301, 338); Y30

falatg

— ¥00, either —or, § 293; AL, (or 9Y,0; see §209, note 1; § 2105 med., mod.;

mod)

mod. also QJ; see § 298, 1-4; § 316, 1.2); @YE, in absence of, without

mod)

/

(see §§ 170. 171; med., mod.; § 338); 20, wholly (§ 301); ¥m0, what shall

dm,@z

I do? (med.; §301); ©8° what? how? why? (med., mod.; §301); 3o,

mod)

l

what shall T do? (§ 301); @& (or ¥eBo; see § 209, note 1; § 210; med,

nglk

mod.; §§ 301. 318, 5).

mod)

patte

8,

Interjections.

of fl

©3 ah! (in admiration); alas! (in affliction or grief); T Y, ©T Wy, alas! (in

Strea

affliction or grief, med., mod.); ah! (in wonder or surprise, med.); [©39, ha! ah!,

sou

in surprise and in grief, med., mod.]; ©o3a;¢, alas! (in affliction or grief, med.,

(in ¢

mod.) ; ah! (in pity, med., mod.); ©®B, alas! (in grief); aha! ah! (in surprise,

med., mod.) ; ®®B0, oh! alas! (in pain); ®BR¢, oh! (in pain); ho! stop!; ¥, alas!

(in affliction or grief); &% ah! (in surprise, med., mod.); alas! (in affliction or

grief, med., mod.); 93, fie! (med., mod.); @V, fie!; @v¢, ah! ha! (in pleasure);

A

fie!; alas! (in pain or sorrow); ¥, fie!; ¥\, alas! (in pain or sorrow); 23, well,

all right! certainly!; 203, 20R0¢, 28, 088, 2S¢, ah! oh! (in recollection); let us

l\%’\ ‘

see! (in deliberation or investigation); ho! halloo! (in ecalling, med., mod.);

Kam

8.32¢, ho! stop! (med.); o! alas! (in pain); 233, fie! (med., mod.); ¢ fiel;

Visi

®33, oh! woe to me!; Bre, Beg B2¢ ho!stop! (med., mod.); o! alas! (in

&

9

pain, med.). Cf. § 308.

Unfe

9,

Imitative sounds.

ﬁ\m‘g;

M

(both

Imitative sounds (anukarana, anukaranapada, anukriti), 4. e. sounds

used in imitation of the effects of the operations of nature (as the rolling

ano]

Unfg

of thunder, agitations of water, pattering of hail-stones, voices of birds,

10 &;

bodily functions, falling, breaking and the like) are very frequent in

bdox

Kannada and essential parts of the language; in fact there is scarcely

[

Such sounds are

L

any sound in nature that has not been imitated in it.

Cong

often idiomatical and therefore strange to the ear of foreigners.

For

ity

the vast number of imitative sounds the Dictionary is to be consulted.

169

Those mentioned in the Sabdamanidarpana and Sabdinusisana are FITs,

Cana

the sound of kavakava (a particular sound of the cuckoo) ; 2*¥8 with the sound

of khalil (in speaking) ; T®NI0, the sound of gahagaham (in laughing) ; TN, the

used

sound of galagala (in running water); ™0V ©° the sound of gulgul (e.g. in the

liz)

ant;

clanging of bracelets); TMOPono®y, noenoe, the sound of gulugulu or gulugulu

(in the gurgling of water, etc., med., mod.); @¥e&o, the sound of Shatadhatam

(see

(in breaking); ¢*od, with the sound of &halil; TN, with the sound of

| not

seee

ned.,

jhum (in oozing); Gf&%ﬁ, with the sound of darr (in belching, med., mod.); @I,

with the sound of dhamm (in banging, mod.); 3¥3%, 303w, 30, the sound of

430

talatala or talatala or taltala (in boiling with a briskly bubbling noise, med.,

nod.;

mod.); BoBIZR, with the sound of dudhumm (in plumping or plunging into water,

hout

mod.); d&‘)ﬁd,j, with the sound of dhalamm (e. g. of a kettle-drum when beaten, med.);

shall

#9338, with the sound of dhumm (in jumping down suddenly from above, med.,

R0,

mod.); VR, with the sound of nélil (in breaking); S¢3, with the sound of

ned.,

nélk (in breaking); %093, with the sound of pathill (in banging or slapping,

mod.) ; SOIO, IO\@S, with the sound of palapala or palpala (e. g. in the

pattering of hail-stones, mod.); $on&°, the sound of bhugil (e.g. in the blazing

of flames, med., mod.); ¥»«w®; the sound of bhdr (e.¢. in the running of

! (in

streams, med., mod.); AT®, with the sound of sigg (in splitting) ; ®© 3, with the

ah!

sound of surr (e.g. in flowing or showering); %3, with the sound of hill

ned.,

(in eracking).

GF. § 309.

)rise,

alas

Remarks.

n or

1, The Sabdamanidarpana expressly calls only ©33), ©8, o, &8, 03¢, 9,

11e)

%, & and %3®n¢ nipatas, to which the Sabdinudisana adds ©, ¥s, @869, Wdas,

well,

@98 que?, 93 ¥, VBB, ¥, W3, G, YW, NI, T, I, WO, TR, NEI (MB 4 Y),

¢t 08

oy (MNP &), ¥, W¥es, I, AR, Be?, B, J03, Bpe, B TR,

Nagavarma’s

0d);

Karpatakabhashabhtshana has the following nipatas: -—®o (used in bhéda and

fie!

vismaya), ©s, eﬁo?uaﬁ, 8:903»@%6’ @0, ©8, 98, ¥R, J, I8, ¢, », LI

9

| (in

oy

Regarding the formation of adverbs, ete. it may be stated that not

unfrequently ©R or ®@% appears at their end, e.g. TR, WA, VIR, BJR;

338, 38R, WIF, DTS,

R} may be the same as &8, ‘so that it becomes’

(both ®7> and &R0 appearing as Kannada verbal themes, § 176); ©3 may be

unda

another form of @R (§ 176), or belong (especially in anukaranas which not

Jing

unfrequently are written either with final ®3 or 98, e.g. @O or Grdd)

ird.se

to ©¥° and ~3°, to say, and mean ‘so that it says’.

Cf. § 2755 § 281 note

p 1

below the text.

ely

3,

Some of the adverbs of circumstance and some imitative sounds exhibit

Wil

consonants with strong aspiration or aspirates (mahiprana,

§ 29), e. g. QWR,

(s

PROY, PatoTF, BNIR, YR, BT (see § 218).

Fos

4, There are no prepositions in true Kannada.

{

22

P

170

e

euph

VII. Euphonic junction of letters.

ana

plac

213

Euphonic junction of letters (sandhi, samhité) has not unfre-

It occurs in the

quently been referred to in the preceding paragraphs.

ancient, medizval and modern dialect, especially in poetry. The collo-

of

d

We in the

quial dialect and modern prose writings often disregard it.

Tac

{

main follow the Sabdamanidarpana in describing it.

elisi

Generally speaking it takes place when a consonant with a final vowel

Yo

(svarayuktavyanjana) is followed by a vowel, e. g. 3R30F &0 becomes

%

TReFSo, WY, WO DF TR0, BNF, BLPHo SAMMEVEEY and when a

&

consonant without a final vowel (svararahitavyanjana) is followed by a

(6]

vowel or consonant, e. g. ©Eom° uERy, becomes 239200890, TITNY® TWoTFY

03y, B9 do%a&o%a 0392,

0r |

It would, therefore, be wrong to use e. g. Aoy 232 (for WARRESR),

Wor

QRINT 8o (for QoRurIsEI0), 2’3@5@ eﬁ&gﬂéo (for pF3 Fo).

ne

214, According to the place where euphonic junction of letters takes

D

place, it is stated to be of two kinds, viz.

@)

the junction in the middle of words (padamadhyasandhi), <. e.

elis

either the junction of a declinable word and a case-termination (ndma-

O

vibhakti), or that of a verbal theme and a personal termination (kriya-

(419

vibhakti), e. . 35930+ @0 becomes [»3o, 3930+ Bo SIWS0, I3+ BN

¢

330R, W30+ BN [W3RE, SRS+ ¥Z B0 IWIRY o, TPST+ W

AN

=

S508R8we* (see § 122); Ro@% 4 o becomes BoRTo, RIBT4 BT° VR,

)

RIBT+ W03 RTOF, AT+ BT FVRDTS, RIAT+ 20 VBV, RBE+

AV

O RV (see § 198, 2);

b)

the junction at the end of words (padantyasandhi), ¢. e. either

(

the junction of a declinable word (ndmapada) and another declinable

word, or that of a conjugated verb (kriyapada) and a declinable word,

(§

el

e. 9. ©33 ©¥,Fo becomes ¥TFaY, o, TR VRS 3@3535%%&3; RRTTE

W

©30° becomes RoBRTRT?, BRABY wHo WRABZPY o.

215

Euphonic junction takes place by elision (16pa), the insertion

of o356 and g¢, the permutation of consonants (uditiksharigama), and

the doubling of final consonants.

Y

Sometimes it is optional whether elision happens or o3 and ¢ are

8

inserted, sometimes euphonic junction itself is optional, sometimes also

fo

171

euphonic junction is forbidden, sometimes the permutation of consonants

and sometimes their doubling arc necessary, and sometimes do not take

fre

place

1

9

Euphonic junction by elision

{f

@) When the final vowel of a case-termination (vibhaktisvara), either

lo

Jlt

he

of a Samskrita declinable base (samskritaprakriti) or of a Kannada (or

is followed by a vowel, it suffers

Tadbhava) one (karnitakaprakriti),

elision, e. g. T 3083 BN becomes § Foma0W), DT, oR} 2o BT oﬁé

el

595330, ﬁ@ojoé c%ﬁ BePBo NOGE, 95~ e to, 1) az%cﬁ@ BTFo RyBIY C5F'o

nes

4

69565 W) éeeﬁ d'?\rae)@ 3@63:3 90Eg 0 becomes 3@)@§o"ao Sedon

¥

2B 0300 e‘)’er\)oﬁv@z%ouoo 300883, 95;3 '3&59650 0883, m wcso z:-?e)zﬁ 5680

B, JPURY ABFo ogje)e)ci@f) BFo, POV I,

S 0 c@feeﬂg@ﬂ ﬁo

o

b) The same happens when a case-termination, or a conJug&tetl verb

43

or the formative ==y (§§ 150. 151, remarks) is suffixed to a Samskrita

)

word ending in the vowel &3, e. g. 233 + 5 becomes IR, VT S+ BTF

emzﬁ 2o°;

Q03 SO c%e;%:,so o°

oo+ 23 tNA, Bon+ BaRY Wohmw

]\Eb

a;aw+ DR PODAY (cf 2y €)1

¢) Likewise a final @, %, o, or a euphonic ov (§§ 96. 98) suffers

elision when it is followed by a vowel, e. g, ©0X % becomes 5TzDF*

It

0903 SN RIOR

030 T30 20D 0, WRWE HHEo WRWEIRO

N'@ij

')(L

boONo TORRR. ON0, JRCRT+ Vo RLLRR0, IPRR 4 Vo [WRTo, TRRET

0l

Lo BRBBo;— matP wlo matdP o0, R

B0 B o, IZB B0

¥

s388o (¢f 4);— AR B

T 3o RNEATT0,

S08N B zSo aSao@‘r\%cSo

0

3

3. V0o 3. o

zﬁooﬁ BEPBo BNRLPFo (cf' % f i.) ;— ROy, ‘a@

3

L

R0BR, 03, B, 69, B3, ) , B8R Do SeR o, KRS WY N@sz%@m

(¢ 1)

Gf. §§ 218. 214

161

hle

d) Also when the final vowel is that of a personal termination

(§ 198) or of the participial suffixes @, 3 and @y (§§ 155. 156. 166),

rd

elision happens, e. g. SRBBY 2% o becomes IPRVIpE 0; TPB ATFo

Db

%&)@Cﬁr o

FRBF RS0 TR3EFT0

B30 o

-9

oJd Vv

09€9 0

2,

Euphonic junction by the insertion of 03¢

ol

@) 1If the & of the genitive is followed by the o of emphasis, o3

nd

generally comes between (¢f: 6,4.), €. g B3+ becomes &30S, VTF+

52030, WEEI+ o« BEEIo3, when, as the Sabdanusasana states (sutra 495)

L

for 33,03, 28,03 and 2,03 38,03, dF,0% and 73 may be put

50

S)2>F

——

172

s

by If the final ¢ of imitative sounds (§ 212,9) is followed by a

)

vowel, o35 is generally put between, e. g. 2C3Ze9 28y becomes TeITES

o)

030

NEINLY Ry NEINCIRY (¢f: 5, d)

m

¢) If to a class of Samskrita and Kannada themes with final ¢ the

(if:3

formative wzy is suffixed (¢f. 1,6 and 3,a), o3¢ comes between, e.g.

%9

5063-;— %0 becomes 5ozﬁ QURY, 39T+ BRI FoCREY, TPT+ DR TIPTONR,

0‘3%‘4\.

i’me%ﬁr b £oe%§o€>a~o

800+ BaY 3eT0NRY, 304+ Ry 30 RY

RPN

=] NJ N@ﬁo&)m\)

Cf. § 151, remarks

d) If the letter ¢ is followed by a vowel, o3ss is often inserted

0

ment

(¢f. 3,band 6, k), e.9. & warF 3596383, becomes =ZE 59093

& 2R

betwe

BRTT), & B 03B, T+ v’ Focews (§ 187, 1) WO+ WF* WIBRY*

rema

e) If the letter w of a declinable base is followed by a cases termi-

)

nation beginning with a vowel, o3¢ always comes between (§ 130), e. g

he

WO 4 Yo becomes 09030, AD+ 093 233 NDOZ LI

foll)

\

J) If the letter = of a declinable base is followed by a vowel that

y

1s not the initial of a case-termination (¢f. 1, ¢), or if a verb with final

(0me

o is followed by a vowel, o33 is generally put between, e. g. T &0°

ﬁrvﬂ

becomes TOOIIDT, ‘{sc,aa 20 BHF QAT,:0003093TF¢, 300 S3Bo T0eANRIZo

&

80 W0 5&)033@0 3% 39 o635 d&o&aq Boe3R0, BOE BT BESPDTY

0\)

[

28,0 3N 0; JIB @ﬁo 5&@033;50 e

wof ¥LP0es (§ 187, 1)

by a

g) If the letter & is followed by a vowel, ¢3¢ is mostly inserted

(T,

(¢f. 3, ¢), e.g. 8¢ B becomes 5 e030m, 34 o 300300, A_C4 50 A G300

(§ 130)

P 2. A oS

Wﬁuj

QDI+ BAY LAY (§ 151, @ 5), &4 B9eF

&o3eF (§ 187, 1)

N

Ry 1If the letter . of a declinable base is followed by a case-termi-

nation beginning with a vowel, o35 is always put between (§ 130), e. g

becg

BRESR 4 o becomes 303300, FEB 400 BE33030

¢) If the letter o of a declinable base is followed by a vowel that

1s not the initial of a case-termination (¢f: 1, ¢), or if a verb with final

e’/

=) 1s followed by a vowel, ¢3¢ is mostly put between, e.g. 28 2.5 becomes

51

TROTY

BN R SROILTY

FRIB BB,0 BIBVS0TY.0

3

_5, b

DA BRFo

§

TANTFo; BB am) SBORTY, BB+ vk Soe3ceer (§ 187, 1)

‘cﬂa

W

k) If the letter & is followed by a vowel, o3¢ comes between, e g

‘)N,

3¢+ vRy becomes Beozo

300+ aRY SoecRy (§ 151 a, b)

9]

[N

ad

NO3IRY

MFPC 2T 05Pe030T0, Be4 e’ Zeodows (§ 187, 1)

)

N+

o

R

173

7) If the letter % is followed by a vowel, o3 is inserted, e.g. Sé

W

Wiy, becomes 308RBNIY,, Ty o BO3IT o, By D Fo 2,‘393033;3335&:.

‘m) If the letter 2, is followed by a vowel, o3 is often put between

the

(¢f. 3, 9; 6, a-d), e. g. SR+ BR> becomes JLeRVRy (§ 151, a, 5), 3we+

v

)

v 3weodoes (§ 187,1), ke 035% aﬁfaeoﬁazs%, BAPRE DRSS VPR

o

14

3,

Euphonic junction by the insertion of 3¢,

a) If to the class of Samskrita and Kannada themes with final e

e

d

)

mentioned under 2, ¢, the formative =y is suffixed, ¢ comes frequently

D

See § 151,

between, e. . 398I%, FHTIR, VFDRI, BoeFIRY, TITIR.

remarks.

]

by If ¢ is followed by a vowel, 5 does not unfrequently come

J

between (¢f. 2, d; 6, h), e. g. & suBTo becomes &[XTo, & ewElo Bptlo,

% NRO® BPTT, & S FiPS, ¥ LS BJped,

ab

¢) 1f &, which stands for 23> and %), is followed by a vowel, &

al

comes between (cf. 2, 9), e. g. & NVTIDS O becomes HJYmasSo, B B

[

1)

RS0 &B BiSo, & B B8 ofie* &Y \?Sxaom,vs, in which case the

r2 hlay be shorténed, e.g. & fa‘zf,o may become'raado.

)

d) 1If a radical ev (see §§ 97. 128) or radically used ev is followed

)

by a vowel, ¢ always comes between, e. g. Dt Q¥TTg0 becomes 363y

od

BeTITTEo, VF B PV, DY YT DFVY B, IR T D Q%

J0

SR INLI B9 DFoVFBRF, RIBARI+ > RITAT I, 10T+ B THTIDR,

DO+ AR ORIV, TR BY %odo&)‘%, 207 B3 ROBIAT, [oBI+ Do

SNBIDC ; TOBI+ VT TOBI) 0.

)i

e) If e is followed by a vowel, 53¢ is always inserted, e. g. &R, 2

J

becomes 230 D3, Fp+ 2R Fp2 (§ 129).

S) If 23 and 3» are followed by a vowel, ¢ is always put between,

o

e. . %39);- 30 becomes %:ée)rssacso, 58\.@@5{))+03 %Jaeé@'ﬁ, 0339)-{— Q0 33:%&)0

al

08

(§ 129); 93w QDFQ;O 3)3@:")?-%0, BR B30 BVPRIZ 0, WP+ A WRIF (§ 129).

g) 1If the final & of a declinable base is followed by a vowel, ¢

always comes between, e.g. R®e+ ©o becomes RwesSo

AReL R NRe

D, AL+ '&Féo ﬁ@e@%o (§ 129).

|

—

hy If %3 is followed by a vowel

y OJ

s always comes between, e. g.

4]

7+ o becomes 330, 772 + @o M2 S0, M2 + A% WRDF (§ 129)-

[—

174

p—

)

4, Cases wherein euphonic elision is optional.

euphe

If Kannada words end in (@), «, or a euphonically used eny, elision

is sometimes optional (¢f. 1, ¢), é. e. in its stead o3 or may be

inserted, e. g. w3, Btlo may become 2 8,E0 or 23 000, 3NN TP B

SNSJP G or INB030TP B, BWB Yo Sw3o or IPIBY o, RPIBY

2»5% ﬁ@aﬁz&@&g or ﬂ@ﬁdc@aa’% (¢f. § 97 and remark thereon), (52304 o)

B

its ot

@RS Or BB, (VB + ) BHRIB OF BB, (VR + 2B SB[, OF BT

)

¢)

9

Jases in which euphonic junction itself is optional.

optidr

@) If eer is added to 33 (§187,1) and o to =g (§170), euphonic

o;

junction is optional, viz. 3 wWes or FHORN*, BT VW OF BT,

ga 9

b) At the end of a half (kanda) verse (padyardha) euphonic

junction is optional, e. g.

either

lo) wodoe‘?;jsjgoesrzi@

FS 0300530 eSJa%)zé’osmisz%:Soom#%o |

()

oagagacsmfo PO

folloy

39 102o2pTR YR PeBIVTY0 || in the sense ‘there is this’

there occur everywhere the words V%, 2,803, ‘Si (§ 243, B, 20. 23, 36); where

WOl

comparison in any way takes place among excellent persons, W8, IPO° are used;

N

or

~ng

W |

WIBRPR Jpen PR P

/

DS RwodusT, 3N éﬁ@s’g:o S

emph

QA3N 5% 23eno

4

R,R0308 B, 3pPBFY "D 3R OnIJR0 |

when the female

64

friend said “Sister, I will go into the garden and bring thee a bunch of nice

flowers; (go) thou a little quick (and) remain in the dormitory of thy beloved

one’’, and went away.

¢) In a quotation from Samskrita (v@?cyavésbtana) euphonic junction

is optional, e. g.

either

T3 FPLF TRt BOB, HRBIZIRBIFI0 FFRO ﬁ@waﬁméédo,

Wou

or

guuff

T3 TSR B¢ BOB3 DOBITIQBITI0 FRIF WO (-'\’)Jaesaﬁu'a%, “who? why

SCaxg

a petitioner? who? a poor man’’: how much soever, Dharmaja gave (it) all away;

(1&110

either

Aad

NWU(

IHIF V0 zsg)asés’é@e NSAERDN JB o,

or

)

SBF IO 239585'3@6 78IS oo;ji) SB¥R0

0

p—

175

e—

d) If a Kannada imitative sound (§ 212, 9) is followed by a vowel,

euphonic junction is occasionally optional (¢f. 2, 0), e. g.

li;ion

either

7 he

#sgys 3 'o.)eB eV W YRS JInos w\%’%zgsé m% Fw eAS03)00;

V)

A3

or

AN

e‘jédegéﬁs\;), P03, GIFYF,.

T

But if the imitative sound is from Samskrita, it has always to retain

ALY

its original form, e. g. i never becomes FRFrR=ss before a vowel.

€)

If 93> is preceded by a sonné or a vowel, euphonic junction is

optional, e. g.

Jonic

either

DA™ 930130, T8

‘?\@ﬁoﬁoso%faﬁ%dr zﬁo&'%ﬁéo; FO3IRT 2W3; R, ¢ 23030309 ;

10010

ii-’)éo a:bédz:ﬁr;

or

#ad;’omo)m:sedﬁas% sdoeéosoﬁdar-i’@io.

6,

Cases in which euphonic junction is forbidden.

@)

If the nipatas ending in 3, 9, % and % (§ 212, remark 1) are

followed by a vowel, they do not form junction with it, e. g. ©»33) ®ge

this”

here

wodowa S8NT; ©3 Nt T2, 3T 9NWT £90°; 93 DBRRT; S SIS IS

used;

Q8¢ BRY, 5&80@%95@@:30339071:@5071?6? 2o®P (Or LWRPE) BTDo eI

i ﬁS@o*aaééqgo! Cf. remark 1.

b)

If the vowels o, &, @ and %% are used as nipatas, o, o expressing

emphasis (avadhirana) or doubt (visanke, or also simple question) and

2, %, doubt, and are followed by a vowel, there is no euphonic junction,

malé

' pice

e. g. ra%gsaéﬁ nBReR, 3T0dR @;Sog}i@edco!;

PRGN TIJHYTRE TF

JOved

NREOT uaﬁ;}é&gjd%% INEIHTRe |

ction

TORTR B F 030 B3 00w

DRBT 35 o HonwwaEaosdodss || did he say he

would certainly protect? Let not thy courage fail on account of Yama’s

gruffness! Did he say

he would certainly give? That seems to be

But

A

scarcely possible.

will what he said fail to occur, o best of the

Gangas?; 8138¢ SJo;

0

TRDFRE BT 0; PISIe @%o;——"&@ojoa’ 23&0)0&‘%

ROVREST w8 1VRETVFy, To IIIT 2¥e vZ¥o ZZco0; MTIDY FLOFAY

MM PO ;’)orﬁbe(% 03‘53053 od ;{a‘(’bosoo TTWTV0wTo; eﬁ‘é\%}a"se SR — SFO3R

2,038 7; du&@ae & 03we ?; D2, 03 2 BRBE orieS0e?

e e

176

e

¢) If % is used in approval (mécéu) or abuse (dkshépa) and followed

L

happe

by a vowel, there is no euphonic junction, e. g. LI IR e Ve %“a&)i.r;;%

39,0080 ! DReRRE WAB RO SeRo!;— AREPTIRE ¥IT IPIVT,TTo SRR

avoide

BoBT,0; 3008, BRRE faa"a %J&)Q"m; ZReo.

may b

d) If eodk.e and e3tyo express ‘sorrow, grief’ (khéda) and are

(07§

followed by a vowel, there 1s no euphonic junction, e. g. e&o&%e eﬁ%%ésa

AR o BRATINS?

of cor

c0

e) If O30 (§ 212, 8) is used in the sense of ¢certainly, well’

their

(angikara; ¢f. another 330 in 137, @, plural) and followed by a vowel,

no euphonic junction takes place, e. g. 3301

()

F, 39 eﬁggﬁ?ﬁﬁ.ﬁ%‘aatﬁooo 300320l

3

hecon

%oﬁﬁa%‘?&a’)o 290230 !

3

(€]

J) If e is used in the sense of <indeed’ (gada; § 212, 4. 6) and

PAIR

followed by a vowel, there is no euphonic junction, e. 9. ToOD WITIF

eln

DD NED ! ; B BAZFR35 gdwo&méoﬁa aﬁrﬁ:d%&g&oﬁogaa!

g) If the e of the genitive or its lengthened form ¢ is followed by

e

the vowel of a nipita, the Sabdanusisana says (stitra 45), there is

4t

08

exceptionally no euphonic junction (¢f. 2, a), e. g. B3R o SRLTRRBNSS;

o

TR, S &8 %ugb;’)ec)ogseéo 5008 Bo; 2T YV TIRHVo.

Q:Cﬁ&o

Iy If e is followed by e and e, there is not unfrequently no

euphonic junction (¢f. 2, d; 3, b), and if followed by % and %3, there is

i

always none, the Sabdanusisana says (slitra 43), e. 9. & ©TRo, & WA,

TBYBTO BREFRY, FI0PD VXY Fo;—Y @%oﬁoro, ¥ PO, 8 W0,

gfa

P

W

e TWro.

Qhape

7)) If Jpea, v, e, ©eo and ¥ are followed by a vowel, there

NYT

™

is no euphonic junction, e.g. TP &, w% SIVCH PR BRTF, T YN,

a\vu

¢ w0k, Cf. §246,b; § 247,d, s.

(’M

k) 1If a protracted vowel (pluta, § 20) is followed by a vowel, no

euphonic junction takes place, e.g. 3o Tp BFRe 2Ry, TRLF TRN?,

.

o)

R ; @0 TN aFY, A3 et RLS,FF; e vmae, BE, wWa!

b

3%&?

)

=33 25!

Remarks.

o g

L,

With regard to 6, @« and & it is to be observed that when the » of

WY

emphasis loses its exact meaning, e. g. in ¥98 (§§ 170. 171), or when the

(TS

nipata ©3 (§ 212, 4; 212, remark 1) gets the meaning of ¢ half a thing’, there

Y

is euphonic junction, e. g. SRFOIYLE VY, becomes SPFTIY DY, SaANNF T

ot

uE 9y BN I VRV IY (see § 338 under VY B); — FIBOBI30 &)ai{ga

U

Be@Ro FBadadodo.

(of.

10

Owed

2,

If two répbas come together or in any other way cacophony (Srutikashta)

LYl ei@

G

happens, it is wrong to form sandhi, e.g. W3 Tor a0 ; BeIor g Aor; — QY ¢0dT°.

3

3,

If a bad notion (dushpratiti) is likely to be produced, sandhi is to be

avoided, as e. g. FPHIFRZ IS¢ (does he not tell to bring a bodice with flowers ?)

may be read o3 Te 9T TIWI¢; PR 390300 PR 0¥, G930, iazétoaé’osg Sowd) 8oe3 .

| ar

((f. § 241))

T

AR

7, Euphonic junction of consonants: their permutation in the formation

ell

of compounds (samésa, see §§ 244. 246. 247. 248. 249. 251. 252) and in

el

their doubling when final.

@) As a general rule it may be stated that the hard letters =z, 8, =

fl

become the soft ones i, ©, 2 (see § 28), e. g. I T @0 becomes eI

R0, Te? B0 RePneRy, B Ty =Rl

&

J

1

sC9 O IO, e

and

=2 p03

Varig

ToO Qgon®; T 3633

T L,

S0 30BN ioe@%aéoﬁ, NG SRS

NRBATF, WP 38 RS, w¥ @ WIRRY; TH' TR TR, IF°

o by

PP e LreF, T WPV TR ©0; B0 Fa3o), AL=T A TSI LT T o

re 1§

BReT0 VOBWBEFTER0; HIMIF T DTy 0RF; BT 3Wones®

e

@;’)o%?J(aDoﬂef; D30 TR DB 0NRES; 3RNV0 é@ééjef 3®m£~%€§3®6;

S0 WPVO eﬁcéo;&%e)o; AB®RNo 33 ?\:@omo;ée%,

See § 243, B, 2.

10

Exceptions are e. g. ELEAN FRBRES, wITRF, VBT, WRD LE,

3

rg 18

Further specific exceptions are that after wo® (2r), one, and 5of

0

(aF), two, after a répha (7) that is a substitute (ddésa) of &5, and after

47’

%0

a €9 that is a substitute of ¢ or ¢¢ the letters &, 3, = retain their

shape, e. g. u%mﬁo%, WBIFZY, WAFR; BBRFR, BIFS; TWIRNFTS

th

pre

N

&3,

ss@%g%ﬁ, Se3FS, Benrry, DDFEN; gdw%zsaé, FoLY 23?3, FHECI

3

3

JUIV,

Oq\)

Céoﬁos%, aa@%ﬁdwo, aa@ﬁggdo; %wg%zg, 8—635_’3_653 (see under letter b).

:

(Vagl

234

], 0

23 an

;T] ¢3 always remain as they are, e. g. BN, %%3%0’ 2%?&‘&3\@6

f

&,

wnio; %Céoéﬁ?%_, RPRBRYA, ?%@3%9@0

7

b) After vowels and radical consonants (sahajavyanjana) =, 2 and

w0 are generally changed into &3, e.g.” %

Py e We)

o\

3 becomes HP[EB, BB

Rpo WeIpwo, TR BPy %Céoaﬁ%ﬁ&, T0T F0Ed FTIN, DY VB VUDH';

]

o of

Re0° PRO® AeBpFROS, Wokd Deoo welHeae; ek wRo Fo0dy o, Resss

p the

ghere

w0 Aecovn o8, Uv wd, 99d, dnees we, :%Jae%eﬁé, 3e0s WORY eRF

ol

0RY; H0f S 530@%30; ceiclafox W 33;@71'5?%; DRt e @}3%@@9

E

(of. SoRTBy, BENTSs,, ete. see § 278, 1; SoRI®, ete. in § 280).

23

178

—

This rule holds good also in sentences (vakya, i.e. cases of nouns or

0

the infinitive of verbs to which a relative participle or a conjugated verb

Y

is suffixed), e. g. 332BRRFFpexs (- TpeR) FowwpoNRWct; DFHO :C?E')Ffﬁi}

pol

18

SF (-wTF) BemoonoNTt; ﬁoﬁ:ﬁa;o (- W 0); RSnST o (-wgo); ST

nor 1

vowel

336&20 (— i@&g 0).

Exceptions are e. g. To3,658, Jpiheason, T, %%Qéﬁo, ROBIWOTY;

WFRE, TS, ¥, 000, WRIBNG, WBLYNeF.

¥, 7

Further specific exceptions are that after wgs, two, the substitute of

suffix

2

oJ

2 and =0

D0RY, and after &cos the substitute of B9rs, the letters

3

%c

remain unchanged, e. g. 8237 s*; QRIFR; '&ujgﬁo)zg (see sub letter a).

7

ot

g

After final consonants the letter

o

‘)

~

generally becomes 3 and 23,

d

oubl

and when the numeral za%30 is concerned, ¢, e. g. Sum° ITo becomes

i

o

W o, A’ ATo MotdTo; WpT* RodA Jpewrdn, [T RAT BR0WATS,

01}

007 AJory FovetdeIony, Bwf RRRTT ZoRNBTF; Vo HPATo BEIFATo

nan,

(§ 278, 1), R meATo SweyarAdo (§ 278, 1), RO mdATo VOB

Ao (see § 218); further remark T+ o+ =0n %éjgjoug‘cﬁ, SRR+ 0+ AR

B¢ BRNICLRTITS.

doubi

termy

Exceptions are T 000, B¥D, FYD.

)

~

v

Further specific exceptions are that after o3¢ and &f the letter

retains its shape, e. g. 25903y D, Soodmwny, F033078; wdaes, TSEE,

[

agoer)vdo.

fn‘ th

Another rule is that z after a short vowel sometimes becomes double

1 )

@ (¢ e. 2&) or 23, €. g. $330 X0 becomes ;Soozéc%, SMEEOIOY aﬂmwg@ﬁ, 5399

N

0 |

A

VW

~

RIB dooa&;ﬁ@, [0 AREd aﬁooz@@e’eﬁo; B0 ARBT BIBIWRBOS.

NN

3

£ ZonEp AT in § 278, 1.

d) When the vowel of monosyllabic declinable bases ending in

¢, ®°, o, o%f and ¢ is short, and such bases are followed by a vowel,

their final consonant is doubled, e. g. DBIZNE B335 ¢ ?.i%?‘ﬂ becomes 2@y

\

B0 BT X, Yo+ 2o BpR0, Ve + W FpRG TR, T+ W

o

b 3

ﬁﬁu@dw\), TR + Yo %8{’%0, 2+ ©o 35?@0, 2 + Yo 5’{%0, P + Vo

sg)f%eo; T 4 & TY, TS 4290 %Q}qe{%o, PO+ ovo Yo, RO 4 N5

'-é\\o@

R©)0; 003+ Yo 39080, TOIF+ Vo FOg0; BT+ Vo

QI T

0, RS

¥

8oy

gelo %)%?%éﬁoj WS - HGS WY, P+ B0 IF)0 (Cf. §§ 120, a; 247, d, 11.)

W

But if their vowel is long, that doubling does not take place, e.g.

dng

D33 H9NBAFRR DN eTaN 300 3a8Y 0,

wWIRIG o,

DRI, ;

AY A

WY,

—

e —

159

1§ OF

2I9£90, [ILP0, DEDILHN

Feo0, Fewo, FREVO, [PV0; JBPRTFYS, WO

verh

SEYE; SPReP, 3reyatio, z:a%?Jao?:)o; nor if the declinable base is

VAT

4w

polysyllabic (anékdkshara), e. g. S8moof, RoSwo, émd%ﬁo%, 313395&(%;

),vv

nor if the final consonant of a monosyllabic avyaya having a short

vowel meets with a vowel, e. g. 39 BZDTo (see § 212, 4).

R,

€)

When to monosyllabic verbal themes with a short vowel ending in

—

&,

&,

of and ¢ the formatives wef, SRR (9.9@6+zozéo) and o are

fe of

suffixed (¢f. § 187, 1 and 4), there is no doubling, e.g. éa’e?@z%soo, QD

d

o

SN BowdR edo, %@@%ﬁzﬁo, TRYORFo, THAR,RTo; e SR Bo,

1)

I

FYSRBo; W, FRS, evs; when such verbal themes end in ogs¢, the

omes

doubling is optional, e, g. Ypcdhwoo (TPOIF 4 BF + evo) OF POy Vo,

)006’

R0 Or FRGywdo, Awso or Rodyeso; — the verbal themes

AUV

VO3, o3¢, Rood and 2003, however, always double their final conso-

;553

nant, e. g. emojqﬁe)go, 505‘):8@‘)“

:

A

R

8035, which has a long initial and is dissyllabic, may or may not

double the final consonant before ese¥, ©330&o0, », and before a personal

termination, e.g. ©¥3ciwvo Or T wI0; GOy Or STy 000 Or

o N

8603»){80.

i

In the negative form of the verb, either the conjugation (§ 209)

365,

or the participle (§ 170), monosyllabic themes with a short vowel ending

in g5, ®°, ©, o and ¢ always double their final, e. g.

0)§ o]

)

; O

uble

=i

Vv

enugg o, ems:%os; emodoqso, 81'0030606; 303060’ £o§o§c°"; 0-308(%0356, 33256;

e

Ro0395 035, R0V T w03 &, w0dx; %Ja%g‘, %@%@; WO3% B9, W03

1%

Cb

DR, 33T, emqac%, WY B, WD, 6.@@:3

g 10

The only exception forms %’2;6? e.g. YW wgo.

el

Remark.

el

When, in samasa, %° is followed by °, this o may take the form of ®°, e. g.

Ry

e e

F5ab

3%° S0o° may become 3 W,

Re0® Ted 0f, T Jwello FHY cble. (OF. § 222.

LoV

o

vy

8,

Rules concerning the final sénné (o) are the following:—If the

AGQ+

sonné precedes a consonant, it may change into zs (in the singular), into

i)

35¢ (in the plural) or retain its form, e. g. & TPD or Bo Tod, AT

3023 Or Qo 3028, 395 AWRo O Io RIWR0; VDS o&faeﬁ%o& or o

f

/i

o

c3perof, B35 Rodnie or Co RDe’, IS Ress0f or 3wo Rew ;-

23%

———

180

P—

concerning the IRFTowso see § 220;—when the sdnné of the nominative

singular of Kannada neuter nouns ending in e (§ 109) meets with a

vowel, it often changes into &¢, e. g. F9To QRoFREy becomes FToTIFZorRY

Roo PR SVABY, TPVo BRI MWOIRY, Swo W3

SOIRY D

but

may also become 3

e. g. [T

RODIT

SPVAITY

ﬁ@ﬁu@%&) 3

in Samskrita and Tadbhava nouns (which are

neuter in Kannada) it

uses to change into 355 or o€, e. g 359)%’ QT

DT I

RSN LAY

NTITEIVNTIT

BRERVDITY

SANTFIB 0:;—when

the sonné of the nomi-

native singular of masculines and feminines ending in e (§ 117) is

followed by a vowel, it becomes ¢, €. 9. IAe80, BRINRY Bo, BTRTOP

BT, TP, VI 23@%;6 :—when the sonné of the pronouns &0, J¢o and zao

(§ 137) is followed by a vowel, it becomes g¢ in the singular, e. g.

S3

e30, DERTRo,

oﬁ%éo and J5° in the plural, e. g. 93082°3pREe, 603,

393309 B0 ;—when the sonné of the accusative singular and plural is

followed by a vowel, it changes into %, e. 9. 39T 3RAR, ITSRTRN

3.0°,

DBEPRTRES,

BIRINBIRWTR0 R o, ﬁoﬁoﬁo DBINPRBRRA

9MoDTo;—when the s6nné of the third person singular meets with a

vowel, it becomes &, e. 9. R dRTF

DIFFo, NV T D ;—when Roo

and o (§ 203) precede a vowel, their sdnné becomes =¥, e. ¢. WBIFI

(WFIF o+ ), APNRINIS, SPeTITVSY* ;— when the o and wdHo of

the imperative (§§ 205. 207), the adverbs of time and postpositions

WCPTo, WLPT,0, WLPRvo, the postpositions gz o, ®3R0, wFo, Bdn0

28,00, koo, etc., the copulative conjunctions o, evo, and the 2zo

in @3R®ro are followed by a vowel, their sonné becomes =53¢, e. g. 333

RTV0 TIWRBDoTON TITSTWRER .0f, RO oNSE

WCE, D930

30

B BTF BPTRAR0, HSFNDEF0, wone TIIRISRSACIFIR IpT

é)zz%oSJ@%fme) 3CIRRPo, BNRFIQTo, DY TIDP TEIFTR, B WaNies,

Oma00mwg3, MoP WeRBSRBS #ﬁw@, ﬁo@;ﬁsasﬁi)aésﬁﬂcésﬁaea’o

DS B G o. — GelgdtISomy may become GBS, (see § 215, 5, d)

216

In §§ 213-215 Kannada euphonic junction of letters has been

introduced

Now as many Samskrita compounds, joined together according to

the rules of Samskrita grammar, have been borrowed by Kannada scholars and

used in their writings, it becomes necessary to point out also some of the

principal ways of Samskrita euphonic junction of letters

Because there are

no Samskrita rules of sandhi in the Sabdamanidarpana, ete

we make the

following alphabetical selection ourselves

181

it

176

1,

Junetion of vowels (svarasandhi))

th a

4 = ¢3,

g

D8 4 IReTF = I PReF

0

My

&4 & =63,

e

B¢ + 9003 = WBeTVR

8L g=—0,

TR, + B, = T3, LN

hut

évg

e | 38

ga 9

N+ K3 =nwed

5

Ot ==%

A

BROE + B3 = RRBW eF T

1) 1

é

e+ e = &,

I + RBF3 = NOBRLRFIS

3

5N

0!

Bl D — e,

3¢S 4+ DA = BeIANF

(i;

&4 o=,

29, + DTFTS0F =

ﬁ%’;ﬁor

O+ V=

) 18

%

B0 - mﬁ o3E — caa"oés o3F

9+ S =B,

NN NNV

L anE émi_ RIPF

é:ﬁo

(The @+§» in ©88+ L3,

?.33& -+ ému and

90

m@ v+ %35 may become eltber % or B )

VN

9 83

L fced g?,

@ﬁ + B33 =aa7 o&d

)

&+

:Qj’,

EDCSB + O Ndé)mwan)

5

D

DD

-

DB, + 2003) = VT, V3.

al 18

&S 4 &

¥+ 9

:33’

[T + 9, = JoIe

J!‘Joﬁ

B4 HR=9

Qo + &3 = 9B8e3

%

&3 - e

==ibs,

[0 -+ U3 = FOBRE3 V

th a

g + W

&,

T + GBI = F0BH T

o

&+ &0

= P

VT 4 KA = JOBAF

)P

(G o)

=33,

3, B3R + VFIWI =3I cﬁa"aﬁﬁzﬁ

)0 Of

19

=§0,

OB + :w 030F = ;Soéés odiF.

&4 S =8,

[0 + m—s = SOZVF®

t008

er L 85 =0,

BT+ W33, = BRI, 3

ol

99 -+ ¥ = ©3

+

= o,

Wlz0

g+ & = 0339,

9+ 93 =03

3.3

)

, d

Q-+ B|= &K,

T4+ 93 = T¢I

30

Q-+ HK= &,

2N+ K30 = S003¢3,8

8+ v

o3

©§+em5m_.eﬁa’oé~o

0

éﬁ'

g+ 4w

= 030w,

98 + NP F_@m qS o

Ve,

QG -+ O = 08

DSk o

wéeﬁ

)

QNJ

59O -+ LB = B, TS

8= GhRe

g+ 8 = ods?

fon b Bryodr —a0aY

(plevhl

B

xR+ 9= K

Hor-L a8 = o

heen

Do

R = 30%e3

R+ K= 8

mﬂ’ tO

o 9=3

080 -+ 9OF 8= NIIFTF 8

[‘aﬂd

P 4 & = I

TR + FAS = S0P, A

f the

MW+ =

P -+ BRI = P,

0] are

& + YU = NN

R + T = RLF

p the

¢V 4 R = YN

Eg

Q%QQQQQ&:%«;%QQ%Q%QQQ%Q%QQ%Q%Q%%%

AR + NNRJEF = ATB D

P

182

——

f el

R 4 0=,

b

MABY == §921039F = msés-a o3f

N,

A + YV = YW

o

B0 + U3 [ = BRI I

NS85 —F)

O3, + 9R’F3 = H3 RF 3

g

) + & = To,

g

3393, + PR3 = IR IR0

N - RS = xR €. g

O3, + WM = H3.0

& he

al

2,

Junction of consonants (vyanjanasandhi)

303F T = 3030FW°,

3,36 =

3° arises from 23° and 2°

e. g RPOTE = PVW°

38.%3°

DT = FI¢

DT = A

and re-

& he

mains unaltered when no special rule is

given

& be

B° before a vowel becomes T°

g 2030F 36 1 KT = 303FNT, 3,35 + WoTIT =

3.10F98, o9

+ &3 = DNeS, 1T + AP =

ang

3% before the econsonants T,

3, B,

QF

W, B,

(),

mm«ﬁu——&mm

-5

o3, B, ©, = beecomes M, e. g- 90T + MY = 230N

3,

&

33 FTE +

f—j:

?é

ojorm

, DTS + zsoi) —

2

an od, éojor

LR — 9033Fﬁ 3, A58 +

¥

6o =

an R,

CQ...O

8030FT® 4 70 = 3cFMAT

(2T + Dot = M), BT + WO an.o,

¥

BT® 4 P30 = AN, 3089, (BF® + P V=

Y

#

K0T + 0DWIFE = KON, WOR®

arfs*a@)

FTC + BRER = TR, B, DT® -+ TP = AN

B, BT + 3B = POR,eB, 0T -+ APS =

33, BT + oI = AN, R0

8

& |

g® before the consonants

and 30 becomes also 5, e g 303FTE 4+ TR = J03F V), A

(or S03)F T )

+ o = dud R (or BM 71)

TS -

e‘h

TR V=08V (or aﬁsee)) b

50095

v

[ 030 (or F071,0)

after

the vowels @, 9

and 0 becomes

&0

R, 1B+ 98 =13

&g

WA

%nﬁzwﬁdﬁs

e

36@’+@35=5€

zig, 3B + 33

43,30+ 9 =

%;)

..‘ r;jl

B0+ PR = 350

%3 83

o=

%

aoio

W)

30+ @3

WY + 8565

2

BB T, WD+ ¢

o*éozs 3, SR+

\~°\

P8, =

™6

&= mqﬂozé 6 I°.

B

8% arises from &° in

[N = &S

v

and remains unaltexed when

no special

iﬁ]

rule is given

[N

23030 = /B, 3

%° before a vowel becomes T, e, g. M&F 4 Wort = dor, R&F

e

183

&6

before the consonants T, &

8,0, 9 0

3 becomes &

g

I8¢ - Mos = IR 0, &°

g,

\AESF(\)’:ng 3

& =i

;

:‘;

@,

e =

o

mﬂ

M\JS—J d

N =

:i@;ﬂ

i%:

S =

=

B

&t

before the consonants

o~

and X0 becomes

%

)

g

<8 4 I3

=R 38 (] becoming ), & +

SN = W)

16

3%

WRBE + 9. = BWNRRII,, W, BS°

e3000,F = 2). B

before a vowel becomes &°

g

le1s

©Y069.F, WNRS® + &3

noes

)

before the consonants 7, &

fij=

3, W, 8§, 63, T, I becomes &

BN3° 4+ ROTY + BNRBY B

BS -t RGN = 2N

BT, RNAS® 4 3, = BN 3, BNSC +

200 = RBNB W, BWNSE + 2390 = WRW.C, WNSE

4 0308 = WNWR LR, WIS + TP = WD

B, B, VAT 4 IBI = SFjalk

1\&

)

before 23 becomes 2B°

P yated 4—23#0 6 = BN T

0336 + 33 =

)=

D033 3, Ra6 + B3O8 = "B 03

4

=

36

before

& becomes

235'

BB 4 223 = W €D, W 56”1‘3%5&

(S

1

R B, A0S + VU= ROBW ©

)

36

before

® becomes

&

3836 + BF980 = BEE =[98

W

)=

)

before

S and = becomes °

RWNRS + P = BRI, B, TP + [0 YT = B0

A

30 38, W3 L Z90d) = By od

EMet =

m

00 = =iw o

B33 L S = e

=

336 + INNF = BIJ),NF

3¢

before

© becomes 9°

2). B3 4 0l = 0. BV T, IR, + V=

AR,V 3

A

56‘

before

3 becomes 8F°

g

SE AL s = %3?%-3_‘9 (3 becoming &), SR s’

i

D) = ;Soa&iz%, R36 + dew = AW ¢V

n

before

the consonants ¥

il

o,

35f + TV = 8TV, IV + TV = AV, ©

v

& becomes °

35° + 2BPF = 33 ¢RF, 3W° + I = 383

T

?

30 + BV = 3830, 3 + A =

8 39

3

{

DIRE -+ FINO = IVSAINO

/<

aﬁ'

before

@ becomes %W°

3% + WIBIE = 3w B0030F

o

before

% becomes «°

+

[

@J‘:’

3BRF + WO = WO, W + B = 5%

383 e

before

& becomes

30¢ + 83

wE

before

S and 3 becomes °

356 + 93 = 333 3, 30F + =N, = 3T 3

ial

@ before

2 becomes W

@ v 9 w9

306 + dew= :éz&ee) (3 becoming &), 3@ +

DA =

-

<

2

W X .

_)

=9

W

pe

“Bamend = Gn + grend ‘shmops =%

|

4 EopG ‘ea3cuUeR® = 30U + JORH ‘O3

o = O + s ‘oposcceE s = cpocee

%)

i mz@m@,% ‘R0 IUZRRMR = POSCIUR + g0 b2 ‘4o s0U029q 0 feo fey Soon

m_@

pon ﬁww «3 .n

aﬁ nwu hw&

\Ja)

‘g SJUBUOSUOD Y} OI0JOq

(¢ ‘w ‘@ £q pepeosad) ,

~

L

1

Ropsogn = Yoy + o (B

o

pege 10)

Py

= ger 4 Mo ,mnmn

2

8ee

e

{4

o

WH\I

oy + e ‘reRsta

Mm.

:

ras

peQ

n

IS

~

s =mag + e (Teepom

1o

w

818

CRE?

10) TRegspe

e

e

®

©

sepeg {odgee 10)

L

e R

Bl

QIQEEE = (G + o

M

g ‘migeccpo

1

d

[}

ity

M

80

000D ‘Ptsre =0

o+

e

hpare =

P

cRE 4 suee hre Cag = he + o2

b

3

(4

o

¢

o)

¢

gep% = Sace 4 sopdh ‘@Y 23

e

o

g =g

m..m%

.wa.w

9

o

i

P

ce *h 2 g soW009q p ‘@

-~

P

©

@ﬁ

o

‘e SJUBUOSUOD O} 010§0(

S

09

pRITE

0 = 0@ + EECE

‘apaierpee = Qe

+ SEE0C ‘0EoRISPOE = 0000 + R0 ‘ho

dergor = ho + sEcr ‘e TR = Udeo

‘eoch

+ Eere ‘gaemderge = @308 + 420¢

yopee =gk +roce ‘eritle =ar + wre

‘ogrper = 2R + mEcx ‘adverog = o

+ vog ‘stnee =pf + ee CGpieRe

— G + oo ‘myepee =0 + e Py

YOO = B U + R0 ‘QICUI e = 630U + Jome "0 9 ‘g 80009 o ‘e ‘n ‘o

hﬂﬂo an)n h%«W 53 ﬁn »n an 38

L2

)

JC SJueuosuod @Qa 910J9(q 4

.

o5

ST el T

‘fe

2 @mm”&@ + ¥og .Bomanv oo = Bomona

4 sepce ‘peoomienpos = QeREE + HRRON

‘UERIROE = UCRE + sH R0 ‘heddieges =

herdm 1 HRee ‘amienpe = e + 8ote

o

‘cadzondefte = ceReRE 4 e

(15

RTQ

Aute

=)

&

o + soe ‘Sreos = e + con b0

ey SOW009( @ [PMOA 01} 910J0( o

‘neacacRt

=

—pean+ aepd ‘oo BeBap = o

e +

o %o ‘vooelem =uot + maler ‘peo

‘0 SOW009( [9MOA B 940§09q

o =0ee + em ‘Uopmn = uoe + wen b2

i

N

a pue g Kq pepeosead)

9=

a——

L—

781

e

185

e

BT + 308 = FRFFT, FRAE + W= FI

=%

WFY, W 4 Poant = WoPIFN, FIOA® +

,..J )

*o;fs?s = zf)mmr@%, BT° + 098 = F

W<

0loF A, WA + v = BWOFY | Y

0300FS 4 SeB = PAIFFR, FIVAE + DR =

BROIBFR, BREA° + 53995: ﬁ@edr%, RPeR?

=

+ WO = BRLWFV.

973

WUW,

»JQ(.

ol

%€ before 23 and & becomes %°, e. g. 335° + 3% = 3 Jids‘a, B030F° + 23030 = T

i:)

I

RNj]

3 o3, GVTA® + G9n = emd%cs, d3=° + e3¢

=6 1

as%m

BA

=6

(preceded by < and V)

before the consonants

4

b

Ny

)

30 often becomes 6, e, g. WA + T3 = whF, 3, FFA° + T3 T = RO

ﬁ%sé(ﬁ, BOSAL + TR = E:FOS‘JJ?&D&;SJ, 3

N

L=

B0A° + TRt = BN, ¢t (or BRsTW ),

BR07° 4 B8 = IR, Y (or BITY), B A

BAFF L 3o = Radw

3::?

+ 39 = BTN 3,

Hé

26t

ﬁéss, RI0AE + 393 = z{)ém’éaﬁ‘.

30

VIII. Particulars of some letters, also in prosody.

Y}

217. That the vowels O, &, % and % are no real diphthongs, . e.

compound vowels, in true Kannada has been stated in § 21. Kannada

does never arise of « preceded by es, nor its % of eu preceded by e,

)

;

i. e. they are never formed by Samskrita guna (§22); likewise its @

;

does never arise of «, & and o, nor its T of wv, ew and &, e

z

VA

they are never formed by Samskrita vriddhi (§ 22).

D, 9, b, W are

A

)

innate (sahaja) in Kannada or exist therein by nature (svabhava). Késava

(o

states that an esodss or eody may optionally be written 2, e.g. Fo3s9,To

)d

may be written F)7oTo, BREeTNAT0 %@Q%ﬁvdo, 3¢T AT BeBATo,

3

7

30 Ao 3G 1 AT0, TPY WATo BpS W30 (see § 151, under remarks);

and an @) B, e. 9. FYerty may be written Foony, FJoTulHF T0TILIH

oYodTo Bodlo, vy Beay, IIYP 7%, 3Jovef FoBes, It is

also customary to write ez for T, as 380 for &0, I3 for FP

(see § 21).

218. In § 29 letters with strong aspiration or aspirates have been

:ﬂ

mentioned, in § 212, remark 3 it has been stated that some Kannada

adverbs of circumstance and some imitative sounds exhibit aspirates;

f

24

R

186

E——

and in § 215, 7, ¢ the aspirate e has been introduced, for which there

they

an a

1s the instance TOR

53, ATo 93-@6350

d&u wa:%qseﬁ oNPIFATo TS0

BRNTLIABFE B, w)é?r‘%?é

mesamoom Speoot3, SRTRISRDo

the v

3

Aspirates, however, are rare in pure Kannada

The grammarian Késava

adduces the following probably for the greatest part uncommon Tadbhava

terms (regarding the form of which MSS. disagree

¢f. § 370) in which

aspirates are used — &Sﬁa

(0 i '3@5@&)), C‘S’@saw (0.Ts CBdJU%?) N@ﬂ%ﬁ

(§370), v ey (0. 1. eﬁmzé) BRT S O, a5oes, ssabﬁ (§370), go (0. r. e;CD)

i

%J?JF‘NQ (0 /19" e;ioo NJ)

i

€39

i

oSo (0. 1. OF asaodo)

o), ©IED, O

&8

k)

mnay

oD

(0. r. 8% 1 RY), TOMRY, G,

[OPF¥IG)

0

(9 70)’ N‘)a)

5 (0. I8, Noéffaoﬁoo euém)

Wit

il

—J

e

e

aﬁoésﬂe&ﬁ( ), BHI03 (0. T.

TG

%033), »

%30303@&*) N%?v@ﬂ 2% (probably

RO

$t9), e (0. 1. o, 90d), PLPW, FALPA (0. 1. IOR), HRLFA

ﬁwd{

oM V]

(§370), 53R¢e7, 5794 (0. I. §FoA), §F9AT,

0

(§370), Bp¥T (0. r. TPLIT

§ 370), po ey (§370), dye9xo

mo

the §

O (7)), TRFDR (0.1, TREIDAD)

BNO, To0B, BROTR, BoBR. BRTF.0. B

bl

)

0T, FIF, WEIY () 330T3000

[

%ol

369, Ga% (§370), GR% (2, §370

30 (?7), 338 (F=@), B (§370),

nan

mode

gonT8, $ma B, OF0IF, PS030, §a3; TsIo, OF Tao, 2393 Or 2594 (§ 370)

N

leavi

The true place of aspirates is in some Kannada adverbs of circumstance

Onee

(§ 212, + and remark s, that originally were imitative sounds), e.g

BOR, VPV, WIS, Lo, DAVS, BREoT, BweoTer, BRETR;

and

and in some imitative sounds (§ 212, 9), e. 9. GBS0, TPIZR, FFR

(31t

BIaRR, BLITR, Gos,8, TP SToR (0. 1. PULNIRR), SePeR, FEPVR

v

T

Neua? NS, BReoF, Sowd, eﬁﬁo;ﬁ 6329"505 zﬁooae)owa" d).wi Vg

wa" 3RT 8, AT R, YT (the fm m of a few of which is doubtfu])

Iifya

219

In § 33 it has been stated that the letters o, e, & are not

3o

nasal and sometimes nasal

Such is the case in some Kannada and

1'egy,

Tadbhava (§370) words

According to Késava o3y is not nasal in

2¢

WONT, VOB, VoY, BT, mONR, T3, woes, and nasal in

8

5306000AT0, BREMRVAT0, 003069, B39, Ssade; © is not nasal in IOR

he(

BOAR, IR, SoFw, and nasal in FRo IR, WO RR. I, VO 3

(asag

1s not nasal in B33, B3P, 339, 338, and nasal in Be3, Res3, S

Vi)

WIS, DIV, DIVDD,, BROTLD, TS, RSN, NP

220

In § 39 it has been shown how the upper nasals without a

ang

vowel may take the form of the circlet called sonng, and in § 40 how

R

—

187

]

there

they also in connection with a vowel may take that form. We give here

a0

an ancient Kanda verse quoted by Késava in which not the sdnné, but

the vargapancéama letters (§ 28) themselves have been used:

220,539 B

3503 030

cSava

ol

h

ava

’ém%}%ﬁaﬁooo 3000 AT BrFFPDTW0 |

which

~

i)

7)

J-J?,C?%

uems% 0BT

Bk

:%’2;3&99 mﬁ?ofmmzﬁe;jg,jzcg.%%‘mm@@e? I

His further instances refer to final ¢ or s6nné (see § 215, 8) which

1

[

may likewise take the form of the vargapanéama letters without and

J o)

ui"‘],

within compounds, e. g. ¥$o FRoRO may be written 935,301, ©®To

hably

BWOTID 83&’)‘82;@;38@, T0o0 %0 %59%%8_0; ToRPT* %%%?UG, Fonom

3

9, £2

ot

%"955\)&90 %u@oua‘{%o 2R

[N

0, TPOTIDSS 33;95%63@5

Wiy

221

There are several words that in the ancient dialect always have

_),

the sonné or bindu (§ 34) or are nityabindugal, e. g. RB@ony, FBomM,

Pl

O,

L&w),

WROM), SRRFoW (SPB:3

(N

), ERBoB, INRcS (TWARY), ete. (see Sabda-

manidarpana p. 48:; Sabdanusisana p. 69).

In the medieval and

i0)

310)

modern dialect this rule is not found; there is rather the tendency of

leaving out the so6nné, especially in the modern one wherein scarcely

tance

once the sonné is employed.

6.J

Other words of the ancient dialect optionally appear with the bindu

(O

and without it or are sabinduka and abinduka words, e. 9. FIRow

3,

(%csmfb), FRY; TNRBoT, INBTF; BCN0H (BLNDY)), BENT; PTowy,

i)

P Tee0.

o

Others of the same dialect appear always with double letters or are

1)

nityadvitvangal, e. g. 5‘@&%, 22)%9’235, 33@@6, ur{i\, ;3\@7?\6, TRWIF, TCI3

o 10t

300, etc

This rule holds good also in the other dialects and

and

regarding the same words as far as they occur in them.

] n

222.

It has been remarked in § 215 (7, remark after f) that in

| 0

samasas or compounds ¢ preceded by £° may become &,

Such is also

:)O\Jﬁi

the case in the ancient dialect when there is no composition of words

)

(asamasa, bhinnapada), e. g. T&° 5@;{533\3)530 may become %5%@);22@:33,

70 ;31

YH SOPIPLBIHRY @@%@@aed@m, WOH JVBPHRI zsaea{iﬁcss@ddo.

223. The change of the letter 5 into & has been referred to in §§ 64

and 184. Késava teaches that in Kannada and Tadbhava words an initial

it &

o)

oJ

may optionally be changed into =, e. g. 5;206 may become 5;206,

[ow

24%

;j

—

a———

188

&

DQ B

PO T, TR BUA

DR BOAY (see §

370), and says that

e

2L +

this change is (especially) beautiful (sundara, ¢élvu) in a provincial or

o3

A - A

v ol

native dialect (dési)

Q

> §

<

But the change is bad (dushkara) and as a rule does not occur, if

52 -

© 1s not initial and is a double letter (dvitva), e. g

D 0o

FH) To

—s.

&

%9@0 3, VD90, [N, DN D, ARD, B

the g

Howbeit, as we have learned already from § 184 (¢f. § 194), the

Wome

present-future participle ¢35 exceptionally hbecomes eoa, also when it

o (W

stands at the end of es:30

raﬁx

NAVISN)

Sh)

V2. 89R[ D

being such

as th&t '3;3

being such as this

eSS ®, being such as this intermedi-

ate one, O @, being like what?, which forms occur as well in the

Fonl

medieval dialect (except &g ) as in the ancient one

PSDISS

Besides, the medizeval dialect has changed BB, VR, B and O3

IR

into es;é 2 and D, and, with a euphonic ¢ into eaaa adY and Sp

which foxms exist also in the modern one;

at the same time the moderu

ac0us

one has also the mutilated forms o5 . vs

10864,

O, AR DN

-—0

See § 224

224, Késava says that g &, 98 ®, wi. &, 8.3 (§ 223) 1n the

ancient dialect become eo3g, A3, vy, I, (¢f: § 275), and, with the

addition of e, he, and o, the sign of the nominative (§ 115), @g o, such

a man as that, g0, such a man as this, evg o, such a man as this

intermediate one, g0, what kind of man?

and

He gives the following instances in which the genitive precedes g o

ete

a8

Narasimha is a

01 Ji

@e)ﬁc{o moﬁzmo o@c%daio@#s‘a o@e [9CA0T0 |

man like a

thunder—bolt one like a hon one like the flaming eye of Siva.

2‘

SORAEIS ;)ﬁ RT0Ea3, 03087 5?3@?5?0:{0@ @5%63@@5 o | what kind of

ey

person Kama is, such a one is this man; what kind of being the beloved

Optio

son of Aruna (Jatdyu) is, such a one is this man

what kind of being

8

the sun is, such a one is this man.

%9 ¢

The feminine of ©g 0 is P ¥ (B7+ 9%, she § 193 under remarks),

also

€. g. DRRRPF, such a woman as (is agreeable to) the heart, a dear

21

woman, which takes also the form of @3

e. . aﬁmda"

t

iy

The neuter is 9,30 (99'* -

i

BW), such a child, etc as that.

lgn

With reference to the terms @5 E) and g, etc. in § 223 it is to

Worq

be stated that the masculine toxms are 3;95 5309 (@ES 06, 4B \5§ + TR,

¥

&

&

p——

PR

189

that

a§+d;jo), such a man as that, ras 80 (B8 <o), such a man as this,

1

Q)g s Foh) (,g(ﬁ 30), what kind of man‘? the feminine e.eaﬁ PRL=N) (eﬁﬁog%;*’)

@;SSS%?& (@5:’)%;6) and the neutex ones ejgﬁcjg

%\5 $90 (faé =5%9),

r, if

sm @’3’ 3o

) 00

If ST m ‘iﬁ&; 3%, w3ty are added to another word, this is put in

the 0'enltlve, B, 3@,

S8, Such a man as thou, 506\%0&@ 3%0, such a

the

woman as a mother, ,\)% do.;os o, such a thing as sugar, (01 also QF,; §')

7l

i

such

S350, aaOSJ’ﬁJESﬁS% »J% OOSJESD B, ¢f. § 223).

&

edi

235. |The leute1 330 appears also as 3, as for 393038 there 1is likewise

5938, for zesoR.0 mes33 0, for 32vos 3dos, for 3pof 33of, and for

the

T9d) FOe

See the datives plural »zoR and o=R, 3ZoR and 3R

in § 137, b; § 304

)@5

226

Regarding the lengthening of the letter

[

into es in the

a@%

ler

accusative and genitive singular (see § 141) KéSava quotes the following

1instances

0

?

D3, 3 5300353 363 6359

the

PRA,BoNY wenvo TT30359, |

the

®3. 3.0 IFIRRG* SReWTo

31101

3830, WU IBRS, Femanvo. || (see § 303, 2, a)

this

S8 YOS IJpeOTBFE |

and adds that such a lengthening occurs optionally within some words,

0,

as one may use aR0¥ or v3Res¥ (Tadbhava of %3wew), ©dwNATo

Or SBRENAT0, MNP0 O IFWRPeL0, NeSIoNno O REO3IDoN0o

5 &

I\E!

227

In §§ 15. 17 (under ) and 31 the so-called ¥ ¥ (a grammatical

d of

invention) has been introduced. A few instances showing how it may be

optionally used for Samskrita o, are the following

RE Or W, 3% Of

yved

==

3L, PF Or PO, WY Or WO, D% Or VO,

T o

¥ Or T, TP Or Joo

lng

9P or 9

AP O RO, [o¥ Or O

S0P OF [OTOV

Cf. § 281

also §§ 239. 370

ks),

Jeal

228. The so-called ®>¥ or the Kannada ¢ (that in fact is not

different in form and sound from the so-called ¥ of § 227) has been

7:\\/

mentioned in §§ 15. 17 (under %) and 31.

N CSAY

a adduces a few of the

words in which it has to occur, viz. ALTLR

VYT

DRBY, WP

5 10

Jd

%”)%‘gpﬁ\), N%'!Qf)d

SENTIP, WP, TP

S9N, 3998, 39N, P

)Wy

.

190

Nt

wIR, wHAR, 309, B9AT, BePAT, Fe9, whTEY, VIS, FYSY, Boa3ed,

JOE, R, YR, BN,

and t

ol

Rustics use ¢ erroneously (according to KéSava) in the Kannada

words @WoeF, AT, Wi, BRTeF, RTeF, BT, BTV, FTeF, FTF,

dw%

;

0

pronouncing them 3dy* (3T%), DTF (2TH), 2T (WTH), TRIYF,

RO%e, 0%, RTP, F00%¢, I0%°. T often stands for T3,

0 K

Dov

%9 or

Occasionally & is also represented by 3, e. 7. »9S or @S,

%69, FTRE or BReo, IRERy or IRy, Nond or Rowed, A Or AP,

o

080 99

YW

TR, %

SRF or R, ¥ or Sueeef, RY (the ancient neds) or nes,

(the ancient %@i@:ﬁ) or %,@_3_995, 5’%%} (the ancient é%w) or 5%89’

R¥Ry or Feemo. Cf. § 235.

4%

i

54\) E?/

¢ is frequently employed for the ancient €9 in the medieval and

modern dialect (see §82) in which e. g. ©C3* appears as ©g¢ (¥),

=10

WP as @Y, VLS a5 VY, VeI as eush, TCP as TP, J[pLR. as Vs

21

or ®e%, which peculiarity partly dates back about as far as 900 A. D.

tha

(see § 32, note).

As stated in the same paragraph, the letter ¢o has

¢ or

has been retained in the present grammar.

e

About the change of & into & see § 229, and about that of & into &

oy

§ 230.

For words in which ¢ or ¢9 may occur see § 232.

w\

;

229. Letter & is changed into & in the following words when they

)

z:

0

Ne

are in the apabhramsa state or are tadbhavas 4. e. words corrupted from

Salhskrita—%@iﬁ, 2P, 0T, o8F, Jookl, TP, h‘%;éj, ﬁJaopGé}%,

first,

o 4, in which case their forms are 597, Se9R, JeonR, MR, Ty,

¥

3nd, Y, BDRYR, SO

Rae% and ot may once appear as

:6

y

Beecsd and oo, See § 370,

Glgs

230. When the words mo@s, 3om9fl, m8, M@, TONd, DRof,

0Ay =

Vo)

and O®EE are in the apabhramsa state or are tadbhavas 4. e. words

N

P s

corrupted from Saiskrita, their 3 is usually converted into &, and they

M

Qg

appear as PR, WRAY, 1, M, SpRd (wnd), Ddon, and ¥,

See § 370.

(The change of @ into ¢ takes place also in Samskrita

X0y

itself; ¢f. § 15.)

T

0

1) As there evidently are a few Tadbhavas (regarding which see § 370) among the words,

T

\40‘

it seems as if, at least in this case, such words on account of their ¥® (that was taken for

the ¥o%¥) were considered to have become true Kannada words, losing their Tadbhava

neon

character.

myeq

VVJJ

PR

i

10

o4

231.

In the apabhramsa or tadbhava state the letters &3, &, 3, o

and the 3¢ (see § 227) of the words &R, Pwedl?, Tod,

oo, @t

PONT, TPNCIVTRG, ToTYE, =00F weéﬁ L8mR

ESRCESDIANN %&@ g,

o

&

A8

o5

Y,

TP, s9¢¥ (39v), P (VIR), 95 J(ﬁ@m) BNFe (enFo), FoR9g?

¥

(sﬁoa'%@ 0. T. 33979s¥), and &%?ﬁaucﬁ (&9@%@&)5) become €9 according

to Késava, in which case the words appeal as 7163971 nReCPR, mIt,

@90

©9CIRRN, NEeCITadoe, BRECI?, TSR, e, TePRI . Dese

0r

w@@ﬁ TR

o 6%

3oCS*

0@)6\59@6

70033,

1oC3°

w»)fd €92

and

g,

i)

B5CPRIT

See § 370

E

)9,

The Sabdanusasana (under its sftra 140) adds

Jw?\,j o 9] 63

ESFER 864 RN 2 eeo, ArYofe}

SOCIL, TR =T

eﬁ%o\)au-—- 05.C

sS'acs

and

wamé mwm (see § 370), o= 2wonots?,

Jor¥3€3~ Wonld, Worads

4)

= 'Boﬂuj wDﬁ'@(S

0&366

232, There are twelve words regarding which it is to be remarked

that it is somewhat doubtful whether they ought to be written with

has

¥ or 9; they are Tp®s or TpeIz (§ 370), BPPHRL or TPLFJR, Bwo

@ or Bwonaee®, %i@&“)oo

or BRI oJJQ &R

EPTI0F Or HLITCI, BRI

0§

or 335009, ¥R or TE Qﬂ (§ 370, uﬁo@ Or wWRILP, worley or 2207962,

393

4

P or Hhg e (§ 370), Rwe® or Rwec?

9

B9 or B (0. .

6% or

hey

2eC?

)

§ 370)

Cf. Rnetiw and oS0 & in § 229

rom

233

’(J%

Késava saw the following words with ¢9 in the works of tl

first great poets:—

Y

wness,

NG,

I

e

T (01 °n’§rﬁd°€) BRHLSOS, VIRLP R, ¥A

39

5P 06

N/

Se,

el

9~

°d,

0503 53 dvﬁ g

on@jz’; ;

k.w,v

/309

.J:jd

(2C9%),

e3¢

%)

&35’

&>

b

BT,

3

2L, o %, (emw«)

e CF (0. T

Sof‘,

00D, Sl eut®, eulIPF, et n, wut®sY, euldony (0. . lPmo),

ords

enuee3

zx.)fvp 6

0)9 Rs‘

DCIBE, DCOY, 2CB

89 &8

10)

o\)bq

QP 09

NJ ) vjé

they

T

W8I

2

2CI

FWLI°

FLITC

FCITILI,

FTEOY

S

ﬁ TS

JY

15

f

=20 o3

B0

& 390890 6.8°

Vo

(I lt

T, (FCLN), TR

LA ), TEI S,

T,

FCD

3009

U»)Cu ch

(BL3)), BRCI, TP (0. r. FLID), TLP

yol‘d57

TROTIIF (0. I' TYPoTY), FNg P, TRCILS, TRLHB, aldef, nRLoned

0GRy, MLy, Mot

i fOr

feancos, fcoz. redodexy (see 3FCIPOIRY) ness3

phaté

oG, e

LI

ARy, TCI2030, LI20T0RY (0. 1 RE° RIRY)

192

P, 3CI0, zé%?&@ja, 2390, P, Ry, WeBRFLID, Buld, I

f

1

369, eo8LIR, SLief, BL¥, 3L, éw&osg% , 89, 20989, 30, 333% eos

=)

N

=30

Q)]

Cor, (503503636), BoCP, BCPTS, 292658 éﬁ@:;‘, 36C., 36CIF,

3RCY

=297

3RCLP, TECPA, TLI, BLIMLY (0. T. BEIFLY), ALY,

G

e90, FoLI, MOLITORA, (RLN), Are, Aresk, A, Aerer, #I,

Mmedls

zeon

TEIT), TCITCIN, TEIFY, TCINR, (TCIR), TIB, S, TN,

heeom

I 0

UNGe]

W‘_‘&_,

TP, TOILOS, WL, oL, HPLP, VLN, Yoo, LI, IS,

Ro

oW

2eF, PRLY, ek, (PoLr or Pav), P, WL,

JpeCIF, RpeLoos, PLPeF, WOF, WP,

Y

Bpeoes, TPCBE, TPELB, BPE

3

309

WEPTo, WCPH, WL

3

o, u@ﬁ‘v‘%&, 220300, WP SF (0. I. WEISF), WP [P

Y

A

ﬂ

[4)

(0. T. CTE), WAL 0TI, WAL, 2W5ACIT, WIRICIS, 259

e

3 e

z:»co‘ﬂ%,

i

00

N-/VC

DL, DVELPSF (0. IS. WEPLF, VEITF), VB L RBedef, BRECS, ¥R,

=\ AR

BRCIZT, VRSB, (Foratsr), [oelP, [l SOCOBICPE, - S

[WVVOIY

S0033, DL, (DAY, (FNTHLP), (F90ery), [383, 32009, 18, SoRC,

I

BXISfS

S30LI, SREITICF, [REINY, TLFR (0. T. WLFR), ReP, RRCX, RSP

)

@99

WA

o700, ALY 3, (ARSN L), T

N

. o*oawéﬁmaw, 320,

To these are to be added the tadbhava words of § 231, as far as they are

:

gl

not repeated here, and under circumstances the words of § 232. In § 32,

note 1 there are in the 3asanas also ®&° (to be), TR, mﬁ‘g

H ﬁw% : &’cgo of, ¢*R¢F (for

P, S0eF). See also § 234; Késava’s Dhatapatha (Sabdamanidarpana

p

p. 330. 331); and regarding the meaning of the terms with @ the Dictionary.

and

Concerning the anukarana words that have no aspirate (§§ 29. 218) at the

fing)

¢

beginning, Késava observes that they may appear either with @ or

appee

The Sabdanusisana (under sitra 140) adduces nearly the same terms in

which © has to be used, as the Sabdamanidarpana.

Besides, it adds a small

e

namber of others ; but as their meaning is not given (the work does not give the

%

meaning of any term with © there) and thas the possibility of explaining them

Tépha

becomes difficult, as the reading of at least a few may be doubtful, and as the

AN

use of © in a few of them was seemingly wrong at Késava’s time, we mention

them with diffidence.

They are the following :—

F

@i (the act of weeping?), e’ (the act of diving?), T O° (?), NPT (?),

01l

QUERR) (), PVEY, (= WVFY ?), WO (= PR ?), 2, (the act of rising?), 6 (?), WO,

I

(= 2%, 9), T (= THY), T, (9), Te) (7), TR (=T?), T (=TSP, TW®

Comy

(= BEE ?), TRV (P), NE® (=N ?), RIPTSE (), RAOR (=TRRDAI?), BT 00 (=WVJ,2 ),

Pecy]

Bew (=8P ?), BeB(?), BRWR (= BRI ?), 3B (?), 3O (=38¥7?), 3T06° (= 336°),

3R00TS’ (= 3A0OTO ?), 3Re® (=389 7, AW’ (= 3nees ?), B, (P), THO® (),

8

SZoeF (2), IOU(?), VLD (=8R8 ?), IREF (?), IO (=¥ ?), £ (? not in

Wop(

—t—

193

—

:aj

Mr. Rice’s Index), 09D (=3p¥D?), W& (the act of living?), WO S (=W S?),

W,

N, (7), Wy (=VPN; the Index has BwR), Ve? (

38 ?2), o (?)

ORI

4%

(= S30T%F), [ (=INY, the state of being irritated ?), Jo* (=3097?), 306

(=30 $?), TAPT (?), AOI (= API?P), AVAY (= APA ?)

234

3

It is a rule of the ancient dialect (and to some extent of the

medieval one too, but which uses o5 instead of c%) that a final @

)

becomes 3¢ when it euphonically joins a following consonant (see § 215, 7,

W

;

under a), e. g. TEITBY becomes T2, TPWITYT ToLI)T, TOBIBIEN

J

0

TG

Fo)BY %e%ﬁo &30 _&Q%ﬁo %’Jaecéu mda %’Jae 299, éjo BRHEBY

$,

OISR NONVER R mxéo%z% SOV aazéoéacéomsé TS ozéomsa [OBY

s;ﬁ

3RS FRR,S, TIRITNATN 9l 109, VBITORY aew DR,

SBOBY

0ad

ﬁmo 909 mi’,‘? sao

DORY TRGE mw&@ £, VERITOLD WECIZD, 89, RRBY TR

I

~63 céo Ndcéo%’@ @duﬁ& DTBIST QJC €3, 3, D OBRIND3Y DTS Jaévo NYofeM

&30@@0 DEEIRE

C’f§58

'y

oY)

npod

In the formation of the present-future participle a similar rule

AVY

exists, e. g. SB35 may become [EI,, RPEFT JPELI,, BRI eI

VRBIS VR, WA wWney, (§§ 38 183 1).

A similar change of @ into €3¢ we find also in 3@ T30 =3CS

S, 0399

7 a1e

&

32y

AeTRFT = QT

SRTo=golP B, HRAA (dative of HRB)=IRC?

7 (for

9235. The middle

in the Kannada words ugef, @cef (¢f. § 228)

pals

nary

and OTef may become o, viz. Svwed, Boos, soof, in which case the

[

b

the

final &% may be changed into of

V2. o O0°

VOT?, (DVT?)

appears also as =oeaef, and in the medieeval and modern dialect as

s 1l

DG or [P

small

he

236. Words in which it was customary at KéSava’s time to use a half

them

répha (F), are e. g. OB, DJoF, NAF (=NCE, ¢f. § 32 and § 233), etc

S the

SoRoF (RE), BMF (=383N), BNF (=883), TaF (=3T0R), ete

yf100

RQF, DIYF, DRI, ete.;. BrFo, FaRFo, DPEEFo, ete.; LAnFF, TeNF e’

i

Qdenres, ete

) 0\“

It will be observed that in some words

s had been given up in the

)

‘%

which

common lancuage of that time and

= had taken

its place

397

peculiarity we found also in the participles o@or, wioF, v (§ 160

);cof)

see also § 32, note; § 239 regarding a kind of prasa)

The remaining

f ()

words (faw

etc.) present no irregularities

of n

25

—

194

—

28 ol

R37. It is a peculiarity of the modern dialect that it changes a middle

O before a ¢ into ¥%, e.g. 3% may become @#g), TS e&‘%, TP

TRTHY TRB

0P, N0TogL em%;’g), WOH aoeég), TR %eﬁg), FOTOH %a%ig),

ea),

Furt

gV oL m%, $0o50 89, RTBY Ry, Sadosh By, T @, BRTHY

%Ja%?g).

238.

In § 33 it has been stated that when two consonants are

produced in (about) the same place or by (about) the same organs, they

as 4

are called ékasthani in grammar. The ékasthani letters are o and &9,

@ and €9, © and ¢ (see § 239).

239

Grammars of the Kannada language are based chiefly on poetical

standard works, because almost every thing of its literature was composed

in verse in the three periods; it is, therefore, to be expected that they

£, e

contain some terms connected with prosody (¢handas) and the way of

poetical composition (kdvyaméarga).

Such terms employed by Késava are z» =z

(called also Qao3sasse or

)

and

2003 by him), Imers 8, 330, and SwT.

©o,&8 in Kannada is an alliteration in which the second letter

(generally a consonant with or without a vowel) of the first line of a

stanza is set in the same place in every other line.

ang

SEELLEK R is an additional alliteration in which the prisa letter or

a cognate one is set also 1n other places in the course of a stanza.

odx0T is the repeating or setting in opposition alliteratively in the

half

same stanza of words or syllables different in meaning but similar in

sound (paronomasia).

appe

8R3%F is metaphorical diction.

W

Késava, when introducing the first three terms, does so in order to

0

show the proper use of the ékasthani letters and €3, © and ¢, g and

|

he

€9 (§ 238) in them, presupposing that @ and @, €9 and €3, © and o,

¢ and ¢, S and g, €9 and &9 form regular prisas, etc.

He states that =, and iaﬁ (§§ 227. 228) form a right présa, e. g.

“he

39652 Rooontys, Hedra

be

WEBIFoNy® neonys |

Chn

but that e and ﬁﬁj cannot form a right one, e. g.

LONBRBRDF I3ZT

K

na@%aé@aados%doq@@ 8@ To |

bes

——

195

P—

ldle

as also © and Fo¥ cannot do, e. g.

)Y

Seodey IR YR Fedcd Fp

d)

SR Y '&3;-)%3_%3@9350 e

3¢

f

Further g and &9 are wrong in prasa, e. g.

PoBVRE TEP TIOR3

Al

3&9@5&@@@950 ]

as also @ and €9 are wrong, e. g.

W

%@ecéﬁs&@%;?yoad

(&)

DOFCPPN3RS DeTTt |

Sed

Regarding varnavritti Késava says that it is-properly formed by o and

ey

8. 4.

of

ROBNEPTBREINT WBITETB

TOHo TRLEFRESR) FoBIPTIE, B0 BARG* |

or

and by @ and co, e. g.

ter

2e°S3 FuBRCIS wh A,

g

PLPOR TBARY, BRB FTHWo |

and also by e and ¥ (the kula), e. g.

0r

RINYBRITIFRY ; ¥

&5

o

~

OB, WOBRY, FYRor Dpeowz, i | . (This

he

half Kanda verse bears various shapes in the MSS.; its purpose, however,

n

appears clearly in the present reading.)

Concerning the vamaka KéSava says that the employment of @& and

¢9, » and ¢ (the kula), and g and 9 as letters of alliteration is wrong

t0

in it (as in the prisa), and in order to show this brings forward only

nd

the following anomalous instance:

Y,

B803%0 88T0, 3030

remarking

FE530390 @g;@@zﬁég RoNTTNVVRT* | ,

“herein the application of words is spoiled, and if for 3&330300 T30 ¢

be read, no meaning is brought about; therefore there is not the

characteristic_ (lakshana) of the yamaka”.

With regard to the prasa with ¢9 it is to be added (according to

Késava) that a double consonant formed by means of a half répha may

be substituted for €3 (¢f. § 236), e. g.

2/b

P —

196

————

20890 By ¥ o, 3698

DTV E TR0, 386N

O\U\%

W

QT DITOIVIPD2TE |

N

and

loub)

RRIWET Jpees WAVHD &

&

08 T3 BETR, PR MR |

o

R0

and

Gl VA

P o

WIIE RSN,

M)

SFead U@ ol S0tPR derndo te |

AN

S

[TEBNR z%ojw $50C° 8‘?

Cs(' 0

d

eI, DRB, T zﬁ@dﬁ BRecBo3BRETe?

¥

o]

The Sabdanusasana remarks that also ¢3 and ¢ may be used as

letters of alliteration in the prasa

A

\

Ripaka has been mentioned in § 104 with regard to nouns, e. g. S

U8e ¢

which are of neuter gender, but receive another gender when they are

3

used metaphorically

There is the following quotation concerning Feo

short

in the Sabdamanidarpana.

64

B OITDRR eaﬁa’géem@éoaom 39,3 _&Q@w@\)?is

&

Ne

39, B030 TQF3TE doﬁ%;ﬁdaa 02T UDT[VOWS? |

(.

S

R 030300 mHA FWNoN JvJo R FLDT 0 Y

9,0

zc%'csﬁ@o wo'ja"évcaaﬁodoaowoﬂ'v’

3

BEINFTY30e? ||

cﬁ;

and concerning wig SFes there are the instances eﬁéo WG TFe0

&

heloy

DH RWAB DE0 QﬂCSo PTate

&0

240. Double consonants (§§ 20. 38) in prosody are sometimes “slack”

tha

(Sithila), 7. e. they have not the power of lengthening a preceding

o

syllable

Such double consonants appear

Y

1

9

in the nominative plural and dative singular of nouns ending in

(S

R

g

%, ¥, o, and £, e g. ©NCI$, HuICI &

(\/\3%’5

'Qﬁ %35

enes3

Y/

emm(iud

..),;0

9530%

*’rﬁw%

@m%ﬁ%’g DRV G, YNOB ¥, TooNE &°

undg;

N

o@ﬁo%? mor‘b% _eﬁe)ﬁm"

Ve atal=]

URINFEYE, JONFSS

PN

nre*

wﬁm-%?‘

FR

&ﬁr‘r?g

taYatal=l

S atated

FoANFYS

TOSNF S

§

atat >

RBRONE s

(Nl

BENFY, IDINFSE

33onFe’

et~

wmﬁ?%?’

Whig)

nees

allo“

3BNFSS; VORF, ete; —IBNFY (WBLIYF), FANFE (FTRCI ¥°)

DENFEYS. WANESS

leng

BANFY . ORAF, etc

4660)

U

197

—

Exceptions are formed by words with a long initial, e. g. 239%00%,

Aa%o%w 3P30,03¢, and by some words with final ¢5 e. g. B380%%, §Y3Tos*,

TITO%E.

Foonrys, though its initial is long, generally has a slack

double consonant.

2,

in the conjugation of verbs ending in %, f, of, and €3¢, e. g.

Bue 0, WL o, BMOLY o, aTLY o, 8n¢Y o, é’ﬁ@%o, BomoLg 0; W) To

zsm@%o; éri@@i, a"ﬁ@&i, @ﬁwf\; uﬁa@&%o, §ﬂ&§%o, £r<@e%o, ?.ijariwfo\o;._

Bamo¥ o, BoRIF o, B%¥ 0; FoRIE To; so:so%o; mmg\, oA, sjo:soﬁ;

RORIH o, gjaxo%*{a\o;weﬁacﬁm, BPTBF0, DTFo, JANRFo, VOBFo; A

BFEo; AADFo; VAAF, SRBAF; WZMIFo, JVIMNIF0;— SBTFO (NBEY o),

¥PRFo; JBNAF, BIRF.

| as

Exceptions are formed by verbs with a long intial, e. g. eos, Seof,

RAwect; and by some verbs with final ¢¢ e g. 35%°, 3pcye, in which the

oY,

use of slackness is optional.

are

35

in words ending in of and ¢ the first syllable of which i1s

=0

Ny

short and which form the first member of a compound (samésa),

e. 9. VIRFS0,

B RBReFTo0, zbazﬁréi, zfyariaSFéi, BITFR, ¥

RAFDY 0, TORAFRp; Dwrien o3, ©Z¥Rone?, m%ﬁ, SESLRE

Cf. § 246, a.

4,

in some words in which it is inherent (sahaja).

They are

BRTFY, WIOWF, HWF, ARFMY, WAFoo.

(@@5\)&?—% seems to

belong to No. 3.)

5,

optionally in the dative plural of Samskrita and Kannada terms

9

ok

~ €

that are masculine or feminine, e. g. wa%sﬁ%‘, WIRNF; TP, B0NF,

fin

RBRF; IBINRF; FRBGIINF.

‘When, however, in their dative plural no ““slackness’ (sithilatva) is to occur,

gl

it is customarily indicated by doubling the © of the dative in the ancient dialect,

|

3

vz, waépwrﬁ\r, WA F; T3 0} F, &,0303 F; SBSR F; BRI F (see § 119, a,

W)

under dative).

Cr. § 31, 1.

A

Remark.

jvo N

Some people have thought that in the elaborate prose composition called Ti%

which belongs to prosody (¢handas) and frequently is found in poetry, it is

00

allowed to treat a double letter with répha, e. g. &, 8, &, as “slack 7’ . e. as not

¢

lengthening a preceding short syllable; but this their thought is quite wrong

according to Késava.

Cf. § 241.

—

198

—

241

In writing stanzas (pada) it is bad to leave no space between

rema

the different words unless they fall under the rules of sandhi (§ 213 seq.).

e

Thus one has to write:

1t wa

ik

WR,03 3By cé%&ﬁ R0

In 1¢

%\@?%Lo:io 33 témdmé& FOONRDTIFE |

In tl

23@0(‘\03& 380 mamN

whicl

53‘@?508 BoBIIBNA %’%560 ®OTOAD |

U

and not u;)otoﬁoédodé =03 etc., in this case especially also because the

Keésa

obscene word 3doz®y might be thought of in four places (¢f. § 215, s,

A

remark 3).

euph

Likewise one has to write:

K

WOA gz‘sasdo )

gfe

&

¥

DA ,00FIZOTIBFWIe JER Few |

@)dmm;— g’))eﬁo [B0

éd@qéﬁomzsacﬁaaéa‘ ;

I

and not WOAT, TORToTIF 6?\)3\3)033 etc., as the prosodical length of the

short-vowelled syllables &, ¥ and o3v results at once from the following

double letters

B

and ,ng' (see § 20) to an observing eye. Some use

to write

=)

oJ,

(9]

9

which is unnecessary. Cf. § 240, remark.

"?’)

;{3)

(p’

IX, On primitive nominal bases.

242. Nominal bases (nidmalingas) or crude nouns in general have

been mentioned in § 68, 4.

As slightly indicated there under No. b

by Késava’s introducing the compounds (samisas) Zowed, BCLENO,

etc., they finally include also all the other true declinable bases, wiz.

taddhita, samésa, sarvanima, gunavacana, sankhyé and krit, which in

fact are nothing but nominal bases or nouns in their crude state.

In § 100 a number of crude nouns has been given that are identical

with verbal themes (nijadhatu).

Such are, therefore, primitive nominal

W

\\

bases without any suffixes (taddhitas or taddhitapratyayas) and also the

i\

ju

simplest bhavavacanas or verbal nouns (¢f. § 243).

\Je\/

Another primitive nominal hase, that is a mere verbal theme, is still

to be adduced, viz. the ancient Xpee®, which has also the forms S[pes,

In the medieval dialect its

§ 9

Beeer, dwos, ‘likeness’, cequivalence’.

0

¢

forms are [Jpeer, [Jper, Spoy, Lef, wef, woy; in the modern one it has

i

JI‘

—

199

R

661

remained as %o,

‘equivalence’:

¢bail’,

ete

Its original form was

)

Lpee* (BRewF, Bweww); the change of =

into 33 or w was done, because

it was originally mostly used as the second member of a compound (see

§ 215, 7, a. b); for the omission of 33 see Dictionary under 2 1 and % 1

In rendering it into English its meaning often becomes ¢like’, <as

t

In the ancient dialect [pee or P[pes is frequently preceded by es

which is nearly identical in meaning, so that the forms become = Spees

the

¥R FJpe*

«without the fault of tautology” (punarukti) according to

Késava, its meaning remaining the same, viz. <as’, ‘like

tc

WBRees

b

6,

RBRes are used only in compounds, when they are always preceded by a

euphonic sonné

Késava quotes the following instances to elucidate the use of [pees

etc

ROINO 3pee NYeTo

&3

\a‘a

ue)débcw P BTN,

)

> |

TOONDIJPES® AR, S0

the

WO, FPORTEIR TORIRRBET0 ||

ing

188

ONRIEIR, PEVDTHIR, [TDT N AoNTBR. 9peS*

& $00Q03,0o J98,TRB TR wpeOBFo |

Qw3ewo VF FIFN © 3P T |

£\ N)owaee;*? 22353030080

PAL

z§§ 023Rees TR, TR ao&ééoziraeo‘ |

0. 0

N@N S OTPeIr 3w

Y,

wex o3P’

RESYL T [TFIG0 ||

V12

| 10

The Sabdanusdsana has the following additional instances

BOZPS, RVOSPEO; NBZJpeS, NOSpeS’; JFopo’ Qcﬁoaﬁbee}‘ 23

G -4

ol

Fpees,

NE@)

PO BPBoNT Fpewr; oD BpEST;

3,8 3pCes;

PDFB

inal

PO ; — 369 0234'@6@36

RRESV0BRees; _.fa:d 3 ;3@@36 fazs ) 'Speﬁ ﬁaoﬁv

he

Speer, aé@oﬁo SPOF; DI BIPESF, TS ;3f0€ 23 waﬁpeos oaég)a’s P,

5““

Other bhavavatanas or verbal nouns formed, without taddhita suffixes

(§ 243), by a mere change in the verbal theme are et modl, "WeE

v

3eed, TP, WBedd, Sk, ete. (of @

230, ete

see § 58), &HBy, WERY

its

see § 101)

has

RRB (of uRo, etc

see § 101), Fecdy, =Y (of 3Ry, etc

—

200

i

FRery, 3Lery (of ok, etc.; see § 101). These may perhaps be classed

and

with the primitive nominal bases; but others are apparently not found

in Kannada.

0

z

X. On secondary nominal hases.

seeim

243, Taddhitalingas or taddhitas have been referred to in § 68, 2;

from

99. 100. 102, s, /. They are secondary nominal bases or nouns, as they

Slitra

the

are formed by means of suffixes (taddhita, taddhitapratyaya) from nouns

and verbs.

adde

[

When neuters and derived from verbs, they express the abstract

u

Y

notion (bhava) of a verb either as to state or action, 4. e. are bhavavacanas

or verbal nouns; when neuters and formed from nouns, they have a

(of

similar character. [About bhivavacanas in general see §§ 100 (@éjiﬂ’

#9008

etc.); 188 (wCief, weowo, ete.); 194, remark (2v899); 198 (WBzem,

A

3

etc.); 200 1.8 (TR, RELNTGRY, ete.); 203. 204 (w¥30, wWew

-

v

etc.); 205, 1, ¢ (&K, ete.); 205, 1, d (f{o&[)\, etc.); 242; 254, remarks

W

1and 2 (SC3 B, SRR, efc.); 298, 3 (vRudY, BTITHY, etc.);

Wy

¢f. 316, 2.]

A. The chief suffixes for forming neuters are:

This

L

W, e. g. Y, R, de¥, A, ALV (of the verbs ¥, ete.; see § 100).

2,

D, 6. g. T8, T0S, 38 (of the verbs T, Tw o, IM; see § 100), and

(by altering the vowel of the theme) F&?®, 3e% I3, B3 (of the verbs &°, ete.;

(()f E

see § 101).

5953

3,

@;30, e. g. eac%;b, 2¢830 (of the verbs e, $€0F).

4,

&), e. g. WOF, WO, TII, RV, dVY), WOI, WI, FVFH (of the verbs

goe, W, TS5, ete.).

Nror

5,

fa'f?, e; . Q‘J’Oi)@%?, Qﬂ)%gﬁ, 55\2{%%‘ &)9{2\92@, SRIAT (of the nouns 038,

Sab

etc.). The Sabdanusisana has ©OT, BB, BR0F, BB, wedd (of BV, ete.),

efe )

T, LETF, Foromed, WIM'S (of YV, ete.).

In another place it

10Vm

adduces Q*)o&@, ?»%?, ?%%, Eﬁ@ag, c@g%g (of the verbs ®ow, ete.), WIRT, WO,

TRRT, TIRT, SBET, 30:0F, ;30('%%"? ?3@8%@7 RSRT (of the verbs ®IJIB, ete.),

of

URT, WIRT, 3BIRT, PBIRT, WaTF (of the verbs BT, etc.).

he 1

Késava says that T963% (of verb Tom°), RpBT (of RpE°), 09 (of 8¥°) in

which 9% has been suffixed to verbs ending in consonants, are wrong (ddsha;

%

i

see under ¥); consequently the Sabdanusisana’s $OF (of Fo°, under stitra 568)

Y

would also be wrong according to him.

iy

Instead of 4% also fa%”& occurs, e. g. in W 2T,, QT 3T,

——

201

sed

6,

an, e g. W, TR, Be@R, SeeR, &R (of the verbs 39, ete.),

Ind

and BRER (of the verb 2Po%). This is only in Sabdanusbsana, sttra 565.

7,

@R, €. g. WBR, 2875 (of the verbs ¥V&°, ete.; Sabdinusisana, sitra

578).

8

The Sabdanusisana’s sitra 572

0033y, e. g. 3793 (of the nmoun 3%).

seems to refer to this saffix when it teaches that 385730 and WFOF3 are derived

o))

from the verbs 80° and Wo° by means of @035 and the insertion of .

This

hey

sitra might have taken mnotice of 3%>F, WFOF, verbal nouns which are used for

s

the third person (§§ 203. 204), to which the suffix @3> would have been

added.

ach

9,

B, €. g. AT (of the verb wwR), SBoF (from the verb SRR, the final

128

70 having been dropped; cf. No. 16).

6 &

10,

B, e, g. TF, PB, S0Fr, I8, (of the verbs %7, ete.), SAF, IaF

N

I

(of the verbs &, @&). The Sabdinusisana has no S06¥F, B, but adds &3y,

o)

Qﬁ’do&% (()f the verbs Q:?Qﬂl!s, ete.), 853*, #J@E‘S&, 0'5‘)63%, ?.335;, %Qﬁ; (Of 36, ete.), Z'SQQ%’

a*."gaee%, Awed, fr”ﬁe%, S0BS, (of e, ete.), VATF, JPpoFr, VATF, FTFF (of VAT,

)0,

ete.), emﬁv, a’s—%”}, mae“%’%_ (of QV®*, ete.), 3T (of de0 = B&f), 3T (of 20 = 3&°)>

ks

PIT (of S‘fﬁe.‘).)z(?e’@ws), 6%, emcoi (of &6, etc.), ] mgﬁ; (of ¥9%, ete.), LD

3

o

G

306 (of WIer, ete.).

Compare the termination ¥ of the imperative in § 205.

L1

Ro%s, e. g. P3N ¥° (beating, of the verb pods) 200300 97 (of W),

This suffix is given only in the SabdAnusisana.

12,

and

R, e. g. RN, Seageﬁ, 8318, I8, DR (of the verbs 9@, ete.), S

(of &%), to which the Sabddnusisana adds @R, IR (for W), @R,

4.

52901, 3281, BINR, WA, SRR (of BB, ete.), ¥, Bed, AS (of D, ete.).

Compare the termination @ of the imperative in § 205.

13,

=

3

Ll V®o3, W03 TRS (of the verbs @2, etc.), N3F (Of 8P = ),

ohs

SRIE (of @65)6:;3@%3)), 03 (= D3 of D), 350 (:éod&?% of é«ad\)), to which the

$)2,

Sabdinusasana adds &8, &3, T0d), T3y, R0, 3wod), T, R0, (of B, &F,

ete.), ¥N8, T3, Foed3, 303, WNS, JB8, JIWN3, Jeed, A8, L3 (the act of

£0.)

loving, of &, which is different from Késava's &3).

;

i

14,

3, €. g. 998 (of the verb or noun ¥¥%), 27 33, FOIT, IS, FET

(of the nouns =7, ete.). The Sabdinusésana adduces BT, B,37, WY 3 (of

the nouns ¥903, ete.), 18238, RR¥3T (of the tadbhavas 182, ete.). Késava adds

that 38 is not suffixed to Samskrita nouns, and e. g. $¥32BF3R is wrong (PWR);

the Sabdinusisana (sttras 430 seq.), however, expressly teaches how to form

I

|

)0

8

YOI, NedSR, BATIT, Q0T 38R, 93,8388, R,

15,

~

3

, €. g. ON?, N’ , FPprie, I (of the verbs &k, etc.), ¥orid3,

BoZ, B (of V1, ete.), (223, of the verb Re9?).

26

—

202

e,

16, =, e g. 338, 303, 3033, 34T, Ien3, 3, 8L, P, I3, 3833,

B,

9383, woT, w33 (of the verbs 38, ete.), TOBS, VI, 393 (of the verbs FB, ete.),

pupe}

o

2n¥3 (of the verb S#¢).

This suffix and the instances (except @3 which is

a9

that

ha

used also in the Sabdamanidarpana) are mentioned only in the Sabdanusisana.

See §

We adduce still (from the Dictionary) 233, &3 (of w3, w®*) in which the final

» of the verbal theme has been dropped (cf.§ 60 and the S293 above),

and 393 (of 3¥MI=23w¥My), 233 (of &0 in which the final 7™ is dropped

2

(bse

(cf. § 211, 7; see under No. 18, a).

60

Compare the suffix @

17

9

e. g. T, 392 (of the verbs T°, 30°).

o,

184,

5, ¢ g. B8D (of the verb 3%), Sa¢Ir, INJF (of the verbs 3w ews,

(of {]

Sne®), 8D (of the verb 88), ¥ (of the noun TRo), 30, DY, WYY, Fow,

verh:

(of the nouns 3%, ete.), ¥, T, (of the nouns ¢, FIF), FHJ7, ST (of the

nouns FHF, B¢F), 28, 39, (of the nouns w¥°, 39°), V¥, (of the noun W == B¥¥°),

(bse

3R0TF (of the verb IRXT®), VAT (of the noun WAY), LD, 5T, 30D (of the

The SabdanuShsana adds that

verbs %, ete.).

839, comes from the noun 0.

29D is to be derived from the verb &p¥n0; likewise there are 399D, w3 (of

the verbs 32%mMy, 2003, see under No. 16).

Cf. § 185.

Could R23% be a

é

formation of 8RWNY, the 1™ being dropped ?

Compare the suffix .

18,

(539, ¢. g PO, of the verb 03).

i8¢,

sty

(8, e. g. 983, of a verb ©x° ?; 939, of the noun A=),

19, R, e g. w8, 38, w3 (of the verbs 2, etc.), FRIF (of the verb

1ot ¢

BR0%), S30F (of the noun ), FB:B, 3033, (of the nouns FB, ete.), @28 (of the

i

OB

noun ),

breg,

Compare the use of this suffix for the numerals in § 279.

The cuarious form ©®°0330 is found e. g. in Candraprabha 4, 2; Abhinava-

pampa 7, after 11; 8, 455 11, 54.

It is quite possible that its meaning is ‘ the

The

Thej

not knowing’, ‘absence of knowledge’. If thus, it would have been formed from

©e203), yet to know, 7. ¢. not to know (see e. g. §§ 170. 171) and 39, so that it

a-»x;

would be a negative noun.

Of. the noun 823 under No. 25.

The meaning

louy

given to ©°03030 in the Dictionary is possibly wrong.

(.

20, (33, e g. BT, BT, BORT; of the verbs ?TY, etc.; of. I).

21, (IR, e. g. Ju3B3%, Sabdamanidarpana pp. 219. 387, AR

medieval and modern dialect, of the verbs 3¢° and S

Regarding the

et

dropping of the = see under . Cf. IBN and ©BN under B).

22, =9, ¢ g. ALY (of the verb ALF), IBIP, &I (of 83, ete.).

ey

23, D e g. 3663, WYY (of the verbs 38, W¢), V¥D. Observe that in

3ned, WY the final » of the verbal theme is dropped; ¢f. § 60

e satr

203

:

2

bl

2

[«

4, T, e g. SR, TR, WY, Y, I, VA, XY, RO (of the verbs

gfc

W, ete.); — I8, T, 30, 0, Fo), AP (of the verbs 3, ete.); — FEJ (?),

leh 15

I (or BI? sce § 233); — ), IR, A (of the verbs 3¢, ete.).

Observe

Sana

that in 083, F&, ete. the of the verbal theme has been dropped; cf. § 60.

final

See § 185.

ove),

A few nouns ending either in & or ® are given in § 96.

pped

25,

3, e. g. 303, Jou3 (of the verbs €&, ete.), I¥S (?), V%3 (? 0. r. 2B=).

Observe that in 23, See3 the final ® of the verbal theme has been dropped; cf.

8 60.

9¥3, the state of being not, may be compared with @033 under No. 19.

e,

26,

B9, 6. g. SNRRY, IN9A (of the verbs S0, ete.); TR, WERY; Jpord

?me

(of the noun R%).

Observe that in €¥3> (of the verb @%) the final » of the

f the

verbal theme has been dropped; ¢f. § 60.

27, ® (¢f. D), e. g. INB, YFL D, IEF, WOD (of the verbs I3, 93, 38, ).

wy )1

f the

Observe that in 883, 20X the » of the verbal theme has been dropped; cf. § 60.

that

Compare the suffix .

28,

B, €. g. TIB, WD), 3@ (of the verbs I, etc.).

3 (of

he a

Compare the suffix ©

These and others are the suffixes for forming neuter nouns (Késava says).

Remarks.

a)

Késava states that some taddhitalingas end also in e, and gives the

instances emﬁg\, AT oom;\, IRy, Fow, mu%,

Their suffixes (taddhitas) are

verb

not adduced by him.

@ may belong to the primitive nominal bases (§ 242);

A1) may be connected with A&, perplexity; =7y seems to be another form of

f the

281, the quality of a simpleton; ¥3® may be 32 and W (=NE), ‘ear-

breakage’; F023 is o and @ (= #o); ﬁoas% is N’ (= %—”0&3)) and .

1874

b) Other taddhita nouns are »3 (JI°+) or %3 and Sfmﬁga (DN 4-T).

They optionally take the form of 239, (234 39) and 303, ([T 43, see § 122).

i ‘the

from

Their final ¥0 may become =, in which case they appear as &3 (28), S0, 3,

OO

jat it

The same change of final ¥V into « may take place also in the taddhita

g

nouns WHM (WHL M), FEMY (FS4M), Sor (Befn), Jpuno (FPonv), [

(33¢4+ 1), in which case they become 298, T¥R, Juri, Jpeark, JoeR.

5,

B. The chief suffixes for forming masculines, feminines, (epicenes and

neuters) are

; the

1

7

w8n (984 an, a player, a man who busies himself with, one who is

oceupied with), e. g. TRQ VM, DeIWN, IRIWM.

2,

WA (B4, = V8N, ¢, g, BeS&M, TISBN (0. r. BIIRT), PI&M,

at 0

3,

esedr} (Wt 1T, = VAT), e. g. 03BN, YPTBT.

26%

04

At

4,

WONY (=POY), ¢, g. PRWWY, T¥ WY, 3B, This is only in the

Sabdanusisana.

See PRIV in Dictionary.

Samsk

5,

@os_gm e. g. @ﬁgﬁ@aoﬁi, F@omd) Fon o, do,o%fmgoodgn, Reeod, It

13

LD

oceurs also as ¥033, ¥03; see Dictionary. The Sabdanushsana adds BPNSSI),

13

©J"0008), and says that the suffix means ‘superintendent’, ¢ controller’ (adhikrita).

and N

6,

SR (=LWY), e. g, BB WY, 802390000, PW DY, YMdF Y (o. T.

Y cow), Beardddw,

It has also the form of 03> (see Dictionary), and is used

1 1

for Kannada and Samskrita nouns. In the Sabdamanidarpana p. 30 PRt

neu

el

0® appears as tadbhava of HR¢&THTZ.

I

7

&% (another form of ©&, ¢that moves, plays, performs’, ete.; see

Sabd

Dictionary), e.g. 9099, 2099, FEP, RREV, IVDIY, (0. r. IBIIV), [P,

i

PRARIERE Rm%@.

It forms epicene nouns which occasicnally are used also as

The §

neuters, e. g. &W? 9T, LW VTYE, LwIP AB.

BT

8,

5 (a feminine suffix added to 27, ete.), e. g. 3%oA (3IN),

03A,

1 !

WRBIN, ¥eBon, IRBN (¢f. Nos. 16, 17, 28); g)-césmoa;, ABIFTO, RTOFoNIBIY; TOID,

nd)

WS, TRT; BRIV, YIRTION,; ¥IA;-— (a masculine and neuter suffix) e. g.

MY, YIMY, YOO, TIMS (see No. 26 b); — (an epicene suffix) e. g, TRMR,

B

TRIWIIN, BOIW, ARITINRA,

AW

9,

0B, e. g. VAT, FOF, BAT (0. r. 0AF), 0¥, The Sabdinushsana has

TOAF, AT, WIOF.

It refers TOF to suffix ¥, teaching that it is formed of FoR>

(&)

)

(!

which drops its final syllable; see No. 24.

10,

an, e g. TOT, é"faes%zdﬁ, ROIR M, Aoron, Bk FON, FoF) oM, WrAT;—

atter

no T, BRAT, 3809 ON; —wEAN, W07, #dﬁ%ﬁ (0. r. FSBEM); . VIUR, Ieon

gy

(0. r. SROT), JAM; —BPEDAN, ST, PO — BT, BoNn; — Reroon, w#%arf,

Késa

qsaz?a&ﬁ; — W M — RO,

m

The Sabdanusasana has the following series:—332) Or, B3aT, Bear, FHOWR,

Ssﬁ@ﬁ;_—mc’%@ﬁ, GEELI WedR, MIdR, Fedn;—BERWR, ©&IWN, JYAR, wITaAR,

ROBIROT, 3,871; —2RRe0AT, TR, &mgpgﬁ, 33,1, 93,7, wamiséﬂ;_m%ﬁ, 306931,

D O ; W8T,

TSN, WEIAN, éz%rf, w’asdfbﬁ;_%fmérf, ?o;’a%ﬁ, @%i@rf, FIRIIEN;

Sabd

RO0BM, WIAOM,

it

%3,0M, %) OT; — TV O, FoTIRN, w$8,0M, 19T, :)égdeéﬁ, FR,&M.

11

a%,

e. g. w00B, PO, The Sabdanushsana has FI&B. In. some

instances a preceding vowel is shortened, e. g. TIV0W (for ToVWOW),

The

5%

Sabdanusasana adduces also %%3%)523 (for %%5%523), 3003023 (for Sdetwwdud), Wl

Seo

(for 25@&25), T3 (for "39@’?3), FToBR3 (for @d&aéa&).

12,

2& (a feminine suffix added to A7, ete.), e. g. WITOAL, SoBoN3,

i

¥3BNY, #ai@ﬁé, ReAN?, SeTIVNY, [oWN, 3O AL, WD N, ui@hé, RO 8.

Wl

o3ah

The éa,bdé,nugé,sa,na has also ™3N8, WRANS, TROTMBAS, RIOFNY gﬁﬁ%ﬂé, TR

ne, SPRSIBNY, ,ﬂds%ﬁé, Ségdme‘mé, nRNg;—BPoNns, DTN, F032) 9N®;—TP3B)

i

W

A8, WR3BNE, TTONS, WBeTONY, FIFINS (FWNE);—00wWN .

Occasionally % is suffixed to simple Kannada nouns, . g. %% 98, 5"';‘83353:303,

s

3000N8, TINFY, or to tadbhavas, e. g (’:95%}’33@3, 90RY, VRN, 3¥I0, VR,

foll

205

e

| the

B80S, or to secondary forms of tadbhavas, e.g. TS0, To3)@%8, or also to

N

e

Samskrita nouns, e. g. T & 008

H,

WDEER wg)ssésﬁé.

I

13 a,

B, €. g. ;Sa?coaw, FEMY (?), TBWY, ™IV, TIV. (Cf. Yo

D)

&5 00O ?),

g

135,

2o (a negative form of BT°), e.g. WAFo.

Cr. § 209, note 1,

0, 1

and No. 14,

used

14,

2© (a negative form of BY°, used for masculines, feminines and

\W

neuters), e. g. N0V, T3 O, TR0, TedS, WINL.

15,

NT, e.g. eﬂeagdé, #édgﬁ, TV, 3@333#, @sagj, z&am@#, w’mg@#. The

§6e

Sabdanusasana has also BT, ST, AT (=R F).

9,

16,

N, e. g. RBOR, TN (Ta%aT), TIBOT, Recdor, edon, meagazf, %saeo@ﬂ.

) 45

The Sabdanusisana has also SO @?sgueéoﬁ, 3PN (3T), [OPON, T[IVOA,

P37, Aeewn. Cf. No. 8.

Mj

17, eovh (a feminine Svuﬂix)’ e. g. SVON (JN), TJTOA, WLRIIN, Weddn,

700

JR30A0.

This is only in the Sabdanusasana. (7. No. 8.

e f

18,

el (of verb @v®°, a masculine, feminine and neuter suffix), e. g.

i

oA

W TOWIFES, #%95, 3.830198. The Sabdinusisana adds ©8e08d, ©oBs, 200,

DVTIES, FZ 63, TS, WY £3.

ha

508

19, 09R (=ouwn), e. g. B9, 391, The Sabdanusisana has also

VRIMIVN, FWHET, WV, TOTOYN.

20,

evsd, which is the present participle of e¢v¥° (see § 180, remark

=

after 6; § 215, 5, ), and by adding the suffixes ©o, V%%, YWI, (VID), VI, VW)

pin

may be used to form masculines, feminines and neuters (see §§ 185. 186).

Aill8

Késava's instances are all of the maseuline gender, viz. 8BV 0 (F& o4 YV¥)0),

IR0, ms‘amo%o, L3¢, éeumae{)o.

See § 273.

o

21,

f

QUESN (= QU9R; ¢f. YW in Dietionary?), e. g. Beso .

29,

QM’

> (a feminine suffix;ecf. § T4), e. g. WRB, #ned, =28, 238. The

Sabdanusasana adds obri, ¥, T3, 335&5@, 3¢, z.)iji, 23%2), 23@9%, a’oos'i, 30023, e)e’a;,

3o,

ai

o%%;_ﬁ@coaoii, WHRTI), ;— ToWI0W, FIBRW; —VoRTdN, R B3dR; A0S, TIETT.

ome

23,

w03y (a noun of the masculine gender preceded by the genitive), e. g.

BRBRE, RRBRBD, WBHBD, JVReBI (Mdb., IVIRRERIY), S30F030 Bodd.

The

Seo § 215, 5, b. Its feminine is % &2.

i

24, B, c.g. VT, wOT, IRIT, TRYF (BHOT?), IRIT, BT, WAETF, WT,

B90F (0. r. ¥W¥F). The Sabdanudisana has FOF (see under 9F), FGF, 3£¢0F, WOT.

i

9

25, BoLI, e. g. B3 T, %oﬁo%%aes, Re3zse, ST, TETIN, WRTH, WY T,

N

9

The Sabdanusasana has

¢

23eddToe, eBoTow, W) BT, IRNTVTI (0. r. SNRRTIW).

Cf. No. 29.

2%

@iz, INTH, JVRTE, 39269) T, 3R eRTI.

26a, TN, e. g. TOUVD, Fud T, QeTOFEN, FooT8n. The Sabdanu-

i)

v

$hsana makes it TOBR (according to the sandhi rule in § 215, 7,a) in the

Ja?/y

following words:—-—§053%é3rf, 11630831, w0moedT.

P —

P

206

260,

309, It is used with the application of the sandhi rule in § 215, 7, a.

See No. 8.

Ac

27,

To® (=19, a masculine, feminine and neuter suffix; probably of

formec

nomin

TP = B0V, to seize, etc.), e. g. HBITOY, 0309, SeoToP, JREFOFY, [IITIY.

WUR0 |

The Sabdinusisana has also ©BIT9, B9, SRWY (see § 58), MVLY.

el

See

28,

R, e. g. 230, FI 0, SIAT, VAR, Wedn, BaIN, Indn, BT

8.0,

under No. 8.

The Sabdanusasana adduces also YWHR, RABWOM, IJe3n, [IBM,

9+0),

301, 02310,

Tt

29,

vo%9 (= T, with the application of the sandhi rule in § 215, 7, a),

of the

e. g. weBMme, ﬁ&imes, WML, BI3MIE, JRSMI,

and &

When ™® is preceded by @V, a euphonic sonné is put after the ¥V, e. g.

Foh;

BRI, HHIOMRE, BRBIOMRH, TIWIOMY, or the ¥V may be dropped, e. g. Toud

& (for Tfozéonam) 4

suffixg

¥3), and T3 drop the T of Mo, so that they become Fad.®, Fomy e

4 1an

30,

Ro® (=799, with the applieation of the sandhi rule in § 215, 7, a,

what ;

preceded by a euphonic sdnng), e. g. @MY, T8 oMY (0. r. FIBY,0MY), JL0rI?,

©oora?, @wond¥. The Sabdinusisana has also T9030 9, D)9,

31,

& (a feminine suffix), ¢. g. VB, V3, 1Y, IV, FPv2 (with the elision

of final ») ; 33&*%@, 7639, TISFS, ﬁégjé; é;ﬁo@wé, #o;ﬁgowé (see under No. 29); IO

MATIIF, INTISF, IVRTISF, WRTdF, BedTdF (of YT, ete., with the elision

of final ¥); we’NIBF, FoWMISF, WIVTISF, BHRIMDIF, WEMSF, Jodmrer, SRSMSF,

89

s8¢

RoBMaSF (of we&To®, ete., with the elision of final ¥); ©@EIIY, PV, IBIY,

H

ST, A I9, (of ©BITY, ete., with the elision of final ¥).

moder

32,

(B, =2 e.g. T9B, BB, with the dropping of final »).

)

VYV[

t

33,

S8R, e g. NOSWN, NAIWE, 2eIFT.

This suffix is only in the

trude’

Sabdanusisana. (Regarding OS8R it says — 1S 88 WoHT HBens | 38 RA3NT 8 ||

6} the

OFT T 98 Fmra? B, SRIFWTVT 3,098t 833 NBeNs | 3T, ABNTR, ¢

10migy

™ 1))

tpho

34, AN, e. g. Foow¥3eT, YYS&R. The Sabdanusisana has FowoIaT,

i

SRSIRN.

10mip

35,

SeIR, e. g. DRQHN, NUBEM, VoSN, FOBN.

T

36, =, ¢ g. WIS (0. r. WOHTY), A0S, BEFIT, (0. r. PAII).

See § 215, 5, &.

37,

39, ¢. 9. ©BITY, ORIVY, TBIY, PATY, IPRAIY, AL I, (ARBTY).

38, se(gb) (= ;S%?), e. g- @dﬁo—j%{’, 8:953\);5%;), ete.

A

102,

These and others are the suffixes for forming masculine, feminine (and

neuter) nouns (Késava says).

for 4

The taddhita nouns mentioned under letters 4 and B are more or less used

153‘(\

in the three dialeets.

l\exd\

207

v——

4,([

Remark,

According to § 115 (¢f. § 249) masculine nominal bases are frequently

y of

formed by the addition of the suffixes %, he, and o, the grammatical sign of the

V39,

nominative, to the genitive. Késava addaces the following additional instances:—

WVBO (WUBHY40), a man of the right, 0F0 (30Fe0 - 1.0), a man of the south,

Se

WAERL0, BBITWO, Joeriteo, FETE0, SBITMWO, w¥M0, Fpenieo, WS 03890 (VO 369 -

A,

©t0, see § 139), QY 030890, N 0380, TR0 (see § 139, 3223 £90 (;imiea;l_

©1.0), dT 00, WS 90, Q3 £90.

The feminine forms in the ancient dialect are S0F0%° (30T - ©%%), a woman

1, 0)

of the south, WBNHY?, SBITee, Ficdreave.

In the modern dialect ¥ (¥I0)

and ©3% are added to the genitive, e. g. 3059 ($080337), a man of the south,

od

7o

U

?’Cng.)ﬁ, %%ﬁﬂﬁs, 503%53, @92’03)&5; 5@03.)33%50, a woman of the side’ ete.

A strange form, however, appears, when in the ancient dialect &3 and o are

suffixed to ¥Q, 49, W, and ~O, viz. ¥ORo, a man of that place, BT,

a man of this place, ¥© 30, a man of this intermediate place, ¥ %o, a man of

T, 0y

what place, e. g.

Qo

%,

3 38R PFTe3 Ao | .

[

%?e)dﬁe?ﬁd&e‘ad&m 931)%50 08 B3R

@)

DR E

[ision

B8 3L BSY TWo R WATINTINO T &z:i o‘baé‘aeﬁ

79

@ddﬁdrms&eﬁgdfoﬁ@ndﬁm VOBONTV PO ? |

1

I

Jision

A @ and o are found in the attributive nouns 9,30, Fd,Fo, TWOFo, 3930,

mer,

30030, R3¢0t0, W B0, B Eo, 309 Bo (§§ 273. 274. 276).

330

How is the B0 in ®9 @0, ete. to be explained ? Let us take the corresponding

modern form ©9 03I, a man of that place, as our guide.

It is composed of

©9 | that place, %, a euphonic letter to connect the @ of the genitive with the

crude base of the noun (§§ 109 under genitive; 130; 141, remark under dative),

) the

T o

=29

I

®, the termination of the genitive, ¥, he, and 39, the grammatical sign of the

It is evident that the ®° in @9 To is a substitute for the

)76,

nominative (§ 114).

euphonic 03° in ©@9 03330, which connects the @ of the genitive with ¥, so that

093 (for ©O o) is obtained, to which ©, he, and o, the grammatical sign of the

e,

nominative, are suffixed.

(See under w970 in § 276.)

The feminine forms of @9 o, ete. are WO B¢, VOB, YO BT, IO T,

o 3R)

§ -

XI. On compound bases.

244. Compound bases (samisalingas) have been mentioned in § 68, 3;

102. s, d; 215, 7, @ seq. « When (two or more) nominal bases (etc.) seek

> (a.nd

for a meaning (directly, without intermediate augments and terminations)

as a calf does for the close union of its mother, a compound is produced”,

: used

Késava says.

In such a case intervening augments (dgamas) and termi-

—

208

—

h

nations (vibhaktis) are elided, e. g. 3w253a3 (2. €. SRERL 0 4+ )

By becomes 3REBRZ9Y, 3RBX BF, 3ABRR, LB VE OBINEG

geLc0n

homog

PIPSER WO Vo TIPWL To

SREILY TR, [RTI, (§ 278, 1), 30T

Zwﬁ

e

£F%o BoFITo (¢f. § 215, 7, b), and also substitutes (AdéSas) are

introduced, e. g. D09 s& becomes v s (§ 247, 1), IINT =~"Ja-<oo

N

T3 m (§ 246, b), PR ¥R Tz & (g 247, 13), awo SRBSE aoaﬂm-

g

7

w

o (5 248 1), 0B 39035

B330F 03 (§ 248, 2)

or 3o

Compounds are used more or less in the three dialects; about the

[

extent of their use in each dialect the Dictionary is to be consulted

7

0

The rules about euphonic junction (sandhi) in § 215, 7,a seq. are

RO

"

to be remembered

3

04

245

Vv

First there are six compounds in Kannada which are also in

(ZB

Samskrita, viz. 530 TR, FROFHOTS, am FAYSATS) eao cfm & and @;5%0&@

5593, About three other Kannada compounds see § 253

N\j ﬁ\;

246, The first Kannada compound is 33080

It is called so

R,

N, §

because the leading instance of this class in Samskrita is tatpurusha

<the servant of him

governs

indicating that the last word ¢<purusha

Ob

the preceding one ¢tat’, requiring in this case (and in Kannada, it may

a4 Yoy

be said, generally) the genitive

Cf. § 253, 2

@) Instances in which the first member of the compound is unaltered

u

“wher

are: —3REPRI[wy, & mango of a river (¢.e. a mango grown near a river),

(ki

QB39Q, a word of inferiority, Ssos3080, a tree of the mango, 0O AR

SeedTRs.,

FPNIFP, X%

he 0

@@zﬁr% "563(735'8‘ FRIEIoNY, NBIRSS

RESS

@Q)C%JE)Q‘F&JO

eae)z%@e;-deao, 3PRREF TR0

VABFE, PR

e f

Pecul;

WBIDFR, BeBRF 3.0, %“N;Soroz’. SeRTOF 390, WBeARIFR, é&ﬁf)rs‘io,

Teang

*Soom%ﬁ o%°, omeéﬁ; eﬁm%ﬁ’n oﬁe;6 BN, "c:?’é eT*, %’m@ e&lo, NESBNRWRY,

)

?J\J@Cs)u@ﬁ@c, TEBedd

T@H o, 38T, B ’5’?@(’@‘ %”E'a\)o BORRFones

2)

BEIpwo, BoTTS, IPeTprISs

M)

388, 30083, 2PNE, TPFTYLDTI

Qéﬁo

3P0WIDNR, FTHBR Cwo

FEONR, 2390 0B, 39038 WM

20300 R

Icg (r

Opengg

T D, T¥9 tlo, SReYatio, WIBRD 0

on)

Lo

In such compounds a double letter may appear after a répha (r)

f

TN FO°

See

W%’f

e. g. QN F

(for

eNFEEY), YWREFD, VT FSK

A\Qgy

§ 371, 4

oo

Also where there is no compound such a doubling happens

e. g

b

wen FEPRIRY

300 FORND)

N3 FRTRIT

Fed,rrgony (¢f §119,a

arg

dative). See § 371, 4

Wgs

E—

209

P

b) Instancesin which the first member loses its last syllable, or a homo-

)

geneous letter (uéitdkshara) together

with elision is introduced, or a

go?%

homogeneous letter without elision comes in, are—&%‘%@@% (=w¥ry or

are

wHNReD %@e%), WHTONE, wPTowo, z‘éja,J%Jae% (=037 or Jptinee—),

(‘4‘)‘3\

TpLOTE, wdBeetlo, ReRwy® (=Rex® or wesd—), Bone?® (=3o0F or

,m?

80T0 —), BTSN (= VTR 0r WTAT—) ;— 853, 0T (4. e. 304 W+ VT = S0T

or 30Te0 IOTF), TIOMIA (=T

J, OF 39

ed

28 ToR), [POMIGK® (=[P

f the

Or BRIT TaRF), BoRIM (=8 or BIT TWIN), TSeNB (=T30),

or TN TH), %&33\@%'33% (=79 or F¥new—), '8‘533_&&5636, 3¢

)

3

5, 3

9,83

T

. are

%C’%zéef, QT (=39 or TIAee—), T V0;—2IPRONPNH (4. e 2R’

+Wo=waQR—), Z)Jaémgs@ja (2. & DRV +Bo=DPRT HED), ’1‘7’2?@?3%@@@

50 11

T

(¢ e. %%‘-}-9.90:%’55)@53 3RCI9), ®

F o

[°}

Q

WSIO) (z’.e i

3

-+ O::?ﬁ?.&d 5&)&3@) 3

aﬁé?dﬁ\majo%b (¢ e. ﬁééfr c;}-%da;jagy which finally is = B0 %Jam%)), éée‘c;

d 0

3R, ;Ségaia, é%sus‘, ﬁ'wi}?’éé (=ToRy Or T2RR %25&), a'aw&zg, T,

uﬁ&

€, T2, o, oG9y, Bortoed, 599 NTevo (see § 234).

VoINS

Observe that there is no sandhi when %% and D[ped are followed by

b Ay

a vowel, e. g. w¥ ©tlo, LY vQ; see § 215, 6, 4.

247. The second compound is ¥OFgadod. Késava says that

I

red

“when the (two members of a) tatpurusha are in the same relationship

Wel)l

(ékasraya), it is a karmadhiraya .

That is to say, in a karmadharaya

Y

Yy

Ay

the component words stand in the same case (as two nouns in apposition),

é

the first word being but the predicate of the second one or expressing a

b

|

kojj

peculiar quality of it.

Késava elucidates this by saying that weoriFm*

R0

means eoTy, D I, an eye that is like a flower. Cf. § 253, 2.

(W

A0

;\4

a) Instances in which the first word remains unaltered, are:—=o@)

o

@Y, a burning-wild (a wild where corpses are burnt), »zorwe, boiling-

"5’55*)1

rice (rice that has been boiled), ®@orizms, an opening-eye (an eye that is

jJ) @ﬁ‘

opened), DBOTE, WRITNIY,, WRITOF, fadmaé{; , SUBINRESS, S5

TR, BOBIRPRTE, LINRC3, BB, VYONRF®

&

SCERRAST, oM

FrEITO

] (‘)-

To%*, BRonw) TIYF, HTIF,

,&7

TRINYY,, ﬁeﬁgojjs’ ge,,:)%jgdeoo,

See

RS, IANT*, 9B 0, RRBILIDBL.

b) Instances in which a euphonic sonné is inserted after the first word,

6

19 (hy

are :— 3, 0NRee*, T3y, 0Ne°, JPI, oNWLIRY, @éﬁg&ommc@o, ROBIF 0T

0%, BFonY o, aRBITIoNI 0, FRITOFE, WVTIFEL LS, 3RMIRR & e

27

——

210

p—

13

IRIRR S, BRMIRN G, 08y,By 0300, WBYTALY, esé&gjas&‘o, ERIH Vo,

the fin

DoBITNCI, BWFR TFF, SHENBAB, TENZE, SRRVUATT,

14

Q‘)éie)dowﬁ%*o, %M&o&o@ﬁ, %’éﬂgdo“cgﬁegﬁo, K)&ﬁoo&:%ﬁo, 8&3&&%&33 (here:

5898)

a hill-like load), CS%’J%Q S, ST 0P, WT [ e, %%oﬁzée')’, 3Bon ¢

(.18

et

¢) Instances in which an en is put before that soénng, are: k@oﬁw% 3

D

(A& + ov+0—), faw%iaoa‘b’%wi,. Of. 23&"323);3‘30%33

under d, No. 2s.

19

d) Instances in which substitutes (¢f. §§ 273. 277) are used.

In them

%4

L

ey becomes I or JF0, e, g. BRI or

BRoN e, I3RS or 36525@&3

domes

(¢f. § 251);

16

2,

2% retains its form or becomes VU3 (c¢f. § 266), €. g. WV TI0FO Or VT

d@%

TIFO, WY TZ0 or NUYBE0, VVFIO or WTYFRFO, N YOORT® or DO YOIRT?,

17

D TR 0390° or DG Eai 03008 ;

18

3,

B becomes SB, e, g. INUEF0, JRTIY, INWIR, INIPCFO, SRFIS 0,

LEAND

FRVTINY, IRT;

19

4, w3 becomes VB, ¢. g. WBIBY; BRI VT, ¢, g. VIRcw°SF, a kingly Eugenia

20

Jambolana tree (cf. § 246 under b about YTIR) ;

5,

YO appears as PY, IR a5 I, PRI a5 P, VPR as VY, e. g. PY,

;

2

Serio, FONI, B0, PRI, H¥3e®; (if PR, 30 and ¥ are followed by a vowel, there

eI

is no sandhi; see § 215, 6, ¢);

2%

&

6,

w830 appears as Wi, DL as DY (¢f. No. 21), B3> as B

ed?

e g.

Y

W

wEBed, S8R, @

8.3

&

@

A%

it

1

é’%é) appears as 395, w93) as w9, 209.230 as WL, 3.)@23& as IO, e, g.

bemg

YTy, 3R, w¥FJFo, wHYAR, WM, 3RS, Yto, Jwyd, FVB

(cr. No. Al

18 cal

sankh

8,

weg’);éo appears as W 58§a§.) as 3%°%, B30 g5 B, [IBY as 9°

Mmey

(A%, ete.), e. g. a&z‘a"@‘ﬁ, ViR e, é’sag)cosw?, :«a’z‘%@udce, 88 B, :\Sasggdo, RSN

faairaé@ QonBS®, Qoo (¢f. No. 10, 11) ;

[SV)

"

9

208, before consonants, appears as 307, VIR as B9° (¢f. Nos. 10. 11),

fu

e. g. 83078, 397 Co, IIRFy, B onie?, BN, B0, B 0der, ©§Y0;

allciey

10

?

28R, before vowels, appears as 0%, e, g. 3¢033, JeBRD, VST, O,

Re38, JWwEO®; (regarding a3° of 9WY, see No. 8, it is to be remarked that

Wiy

before consonants it may appear also as 3%, e. g. S0wTo, Y, HoNEF,

tm%

é@ﬁ%é\?);

2

i

e, W, 3®°, (39°, see No. 23), 0B, W, B¥¢°, FoO° (see Nos. 7. 8.9)

Q’cgé 3;,

and ¥¥°, %° take dvirbhiva, i. e. double their final before a vowel, e. g. @383,

Barg,

W, 9, 2»%5*5;3

¥

), 38 007, 301 00, WP @rcdro, BeB, o B, VY w), T &;

0r ag

12,

F&R), before vowels, appears as F&°, QR as &%, IR as I, the

under <

final &° being doubled, . g. ¥

8,9

e 3’

#é&%oﬁbo, Efés%egé‘, &"&3&&)0&?6, %”éjgdz&;jo, &%Cg.}@s,

3

)

2803, &%@r, 2B R YT, ségdc;:s, S8y, ¢o, F¥Te°;

Mady

—

211

P —

XL

e

13, %@, before vowels, appears as 33° and 303 (¢f. § 151, b, 2; No. 14),

the final 3° being doubled, e. g. 38 8, 33 ¢, 33 Ro°, T3 @, T3 R¥E, B0 J0;

oo,

1616

14,

TRWY, before consonants, appears as F&, BW as ¥R, B as RV,

6980 ag 30 and Toe), e, g. TRMOBOT, FRMY, ARIRBA LY, RWIT30:0, RBINEO

19

o3

(0. r. SBITRF0), IBIRWoT, IBINRRY, IBIR, FLIIRT®, IewTS, TLIT23E, FoNBE,

ARRRe ST,

38

TR0, #oesm;io, ?QGSQT{C&%’ TSR 03T; BW appears also as &, e. g.

QR ONF

Pl

o~

©

15, 333, TS, B appear as To, Fo, Ho (¢f. § 251), e. g.

RS IOM

()

iy

them

ES]

e

D, A

7

338,

3 90, Foneo, Tone®, Fomok, Fonwd, FoRla, @g%s, a?;j%égs, F

W

365@ d

Bone®, B 0°;

16, @‘bif) appears also as 230, e. g. t3oneBN e, W¥oRWRTS, ?365%&3, aSa;om,

o)

90

?33&0‘3%@6, B39, ¢30, 18307 ;

R0,

17,

333, before vowels, appears as TR (F¢T), e, g. FRY,, FRAQ, TR,

18,

"0‘3%23::3, 232%33 appear also as %7-30’ ‘&3?30’ e g. %ﬁoﬁeﬁﬁe:ﬁ, ITRINSS, '3"&307'{@326,

3380,

FROIJPTE, TAIR0Y, WAINATT, VRIZ 0%, WAIRLO®, WRoMY;

19

3% 3, before vowels, appears also as B3 (82 ), e. g. T34 €9, B3 BT, B

1

20,

e

8¢ $ appears also as 82 followed by a euphonic sdnnd, e. g. BRoT?;

21,

W8,32 (see No. 6) appears also as X&), e, g, WP, WITHE, VeTY;

,f’é

22,

F00F0 appears as FOBY, ¢, g. RIIF, FoBMRee’, FoRdIe?, Fodowad,

FORINV023Y;

there

23,

@39°, 39° (see No. 11) may be followed by a euphonic ¥Vo, e. g. X%

64

%é{%’ éeéoe)s%ﬁms i

948, The third compound is &0, é. e. (worth) two cows, this word

J’eg

being in Sarmskrita an example after which this whole class of compounds

b@%@

is called. Késava says that «when (the last word of) a tatpurusha is

sankhyaptrvaka, ¢. e. preceded by a numeral, it becomes a dvigu”.

The

, o

numeral is the predicate of the noun which follows.

Also Fos) and

&m?;?v

Lo are reckoned among the numerals (¢f. § 90; § 278, 4).

Substitutive forms are often employed in dvigus, especially in the

0, 11)

ancient dialect :—

£U’01

1, w32 often appears as %0°, e, g. BRIFA (for w3 &), w3FS (for 23 39),

{ that

WHFRO, WIRFROE, WHFER, ?»3.)?'59&, and as %0° before vowels, e. g. $.00m e,

%00 dgp.

See § 278, 1 and Dictionary under »3° 1

g

2

203 often appears as ~0&° (cf. §§ 215, 7, a; 234), e. g. VVORWT, ST

)

cccaéso, DT &

206, &, 2T, T, o)dfb’DéCSO, or as @0° e. g. AV, 9373, fa%?réigd,

;

)

93IFR, FTRFR, 9IFS, BIOFodS, QIFYS, YIIFR, BEPF B0, BVFLI 07, GBI,

|

‘:{

or as &0 before vowels, e. g. 8003, &0w3,. See § 278, 1 and Dictionary

under AT°,

7, the

3

B0 often appears as =00, e, g. FORTROTY, FIRTFR), FIVTREY, SO Lo,

J%gj‘;,

S0 BRETo, FRTS, TR PF, FNBTR, SIWREE, SoRMYFo, FwwRWwee), TR,

20

212

or sometimes as = after which the consonants s°, n¢, &°, =°, 35° are doubled,

79

e. g. BOTLR, [0TW,3, a’mﬁ%cgﬁ, TNYEDT, BB TS, FNFPO, [TRE, or

ol

sometimes before & which then becomes %° and is doubled, e. g. 323235 cbd,

G

30003 3@, 3023 B, [oes) ©°, or before vowels, when it gets an o3¢ between which

nR

is doubled, ¢. g. 0T, FNIRA, [cdye, FOINA.

See § 278, 1 and

Dictionary under 3%, and c¢f. 323,38 in § 278.

o

4,

S0y often appears as T, e, g, WYY, YR, IST,

See § 278, 1

il

and Dictionary under 2,

EN

5

Q.*DOSSJ?D often appears as ’930336, e.g. @Oﬁ;)j@, 603%99%710, 3:905390&50, @0'33%02’)36.

In

See § 278, 1 and Dictionary under ®035° 5,

forme

6,

©®) often appears as ©), e, g. @w)ﬁégﬁ, TR, PEIILW), WeIIROTSE.

suffix

See § 278, 1 and Dictionary under ©e> 3.

7, D often appears as V’, e, g. &’)ngéx_)&, 805%_63936, &)@3@1?@@3, 33@5@)5, &')G;D&O.

EJJJ%S

See § 278, 1 and Dictionary under 2&° 4,

BSlD)

8, =% often appears as %%, e. g, 09,32, MW Ao, 2B See § 278, 1

)

0

and Dictionary under &5 2

9, I3 appears as 38IF° before 33, wviz. o3, and as 2339, oo

whic|

before 30 and AT (FI0IIT, NT), viz. zus%osafa&es), u;ﬁgooispo:-bdo. See § 278, 1

and Dictionary under %=°.

the

10,

T3, appears as SOOI before AAZ, viz. JoWOIAT0, ag BF° (I, B,

ferm;

®3%) before w& and ~0@), viz. 38,8, BZTE, as IV (BR) before F00®) and

N

J

VY, vig. JDJVR®), Stbaw%, and as IF° (IRI) before V3N, EEI, DM,

C\S’

J

J

0f

viz. 5@5030%, BRI, BRI e, ﬁ@a‘s’m%. See § 278, 1.

il

Seed and ®AC appear also as IR®° (IRF) and A0S, ¢, g, IVIFA,

SRINFS), IRGIFATO, MITIFR, TABF G0N0, FARWFFo, FIATFT®. See § 278, 1.

|

12,

ToD and SO appear also as TV and IV, . g, FOUSRo, VB0,

sylla

[ONTE, VOITTHE.

0f

3

249. The fourth compound is VI, 0. It is a predicate referring

to some subject or other, or serves to qualify or define another word,

The word

com D

sometimes being so to say an adjective (see § 102, s, d).

Word

bahuvrihi, ¢possessing much rice’ is, in Samskrita, the instance after

which this class of compounds has been named.

alwa.:

4 su

Bahuvrihi compounds terminate in e (®o) and .

C()ll]p

Instances are: (©30) JZooR, (VTF) IDIOFG, (BRY) VBB,

a gt

(830) TARNTVO, (WIFF) TVARRTY, (Vo) BEBNIVo, (BTFF) B3

oo, FBNFN, BOTID, ;30@?3;5‘*95, FRIREB, TRoRLA, ARISPNRe, IR

of

Jv‘

ZoeN, @zsmsg)a, QBINTO, RBVIFomIB® (¢f. § 243, B, 8), 38590300,

6, 0

ﬁo%ﬁgp@o, BEPZ S0, BONFe o ué&é@éoﬁoo, FeRAW0, TRIVY o,

“

Wy

e

s

213

lad,

S8R e¥0, JRIMTIFo, JBIDTHO0

we Sadvo,

©NR e 8Go

eRBB3NRRwo

OF

%QS 3radvo,

DORBFOV0,

RoBR @e3vo (¢f. § 115; § 243, B, remark),

{ j&,

%aﬁ%eméo TCITRR0, VPN,

hich

PAWID, u@omﬂ Ne')eD (anow) uNOO

and

(r’ido) TR (Fa@onwees), BINS (), aaeae‘) (“"—6 cf- § 243, B e,

DWer®, ©eAM® (¢f. § 243, B, 8), to which the Sabdanusisana adds

§,1

SR, 20RO, ToIyne®. Feminines with ¢ are e. g. 28 SHSBoys

QBRIBRBOVGE, BEBIB30G*

YWV

dy

In mutually fichting with swords, fists, etc. a kind of bahuvrihi is

VY

formed in which the same word occurs twice, the final one taking the

)

suffix i and the preceding one taking the suffix &, e. 9. as9moa59&, Saotse

]

0

S8, Bop RY, HtArAL?, B dD (01 B BD), FFwIDOD (0- T-

d—aafm) oyésuwoe& 203 3. "‘he Sabdanusasana has FU T, TRCOD

78, ]

BREO, wamvmz%

250

It unites two or more words

ol

The fifth compound is 3,3

which, if uncompounded, would be in the same case and connected by

§,1

the conjunction evo (ww) ‘and’ the last word frequently taking the

038N 0N e, 38 39030 &F, T

5’\1,

terminations of the plural, e. g. 9OAPRY*

and

DNTINSS, TIZOOT ,£9T°

STNRBIVP, HSR 60

Lo aterat=d

el TRITR

3

o

eorie*, but being also in the singular, e. g. So8ARY, T93WR To, WHNP

TSR, T

See § 354, 1I, 4

)F

Wy

When 83y, and gz3y are joined, the first 83, may drop its last

1

e

Yy

Syllable e. q quQ cus)é O@?LQSO

330,53, VPR3, B[99, W0, 339,39, AD

Cf. § 137, a, genitive plural; § 304, a. b

1§

251

The sixth compound is e9s3, 09025953

In Samskrita this

ord,

compound is formed by joining an indeclinable particle with another

ord

word, the resulting compound, in which the indeclinable particle forms

fter

always the first element, is again indeclinable

In Kannada the first 1s

a substituted form of a noun, which form by itself is indeclinable; but the

compound is declinable, and may be said to be identical in quality with

)9,

a tatpurusha (¢f. Késava’s dc33n =0, ete. in § 246)

3

(s

The substituted form of & is o

of Svery Soeo, of

B1 0

200

W

)

DR Do, of FFR 36, of 269y 1o, of VAL Vo (¢f. § 247, d, 15 18)

e. §. ©oNR03F, orDSF, 500 03®

S3000TTDEF, 3000NI03F, Svonoer

5080

300,

WRT, S[owoBIono

AN A Lo

SMNERAD! n,

oY’ (0.1

&omo®)

@l‘

P —

214

———

DINB, DI, 3L, 8—65?%&33, %633%53, 0Q,F, WRRS, Woraes,

d@ﬁ%

0o

WD N Cf. also the substitute 23 or £@o of Feary in § 247, d, 1.

5 0))

AN

UT,

*

U

Fmel

252, After the six compounds that occur in Kannada as well as in

Samskrita, have been treated of, it remains to draw attention towards

ﬁﬁdmc

the rules which exist in Kannada as to choosing words for them which

bj

are congruous.

4 T&(i

B

1

The general rule is that Kannada words may form compounds with

bl

Kannada words, as will appear from §§ 240-251.

2,

Another general rule is that Samasamskrita words (§ 70) are not to be

compounded with Kannada words (see the few exceptions under No. 11, a).

It

b g.1

WG

is therefore wrong to say ¥6,m0vo, $03TB, and to use such compounds as

NAN

e\

appear in the following part of a verse:

eIBRITISNCI 970303

drvo,

DI

édﬁ@ﬂsié’@ 30eR, TERRI0e30 |

Jon33IN oﬁo%dro.

(Regarding ©08R0FISR30 see under No. 7.)

comh

In such cases there occurs what is called an arisamésa or viruddhasamasa,

3

¢. e. unsuitable, incongruous compound (¢f. No. 11).

3,

The Tatsamas mentioned in § 71 may be compounded with Tatsama,

oughi

Samasamskrita, Tadbhava (No. 4), and Kannada words, e.g. ©0¥se3, ©oTH93,

mean

#éﬁso#o, JReoF0, FYMoF0, FNI0F0; —BoNNFVWI0, VoI, Woneets, 7 30

%0, camorfs@o;_@égdﬁsef, VY[R, @%&aﬁo;_ﬂo%ﬁoa’mo, TIBNoTF R0, IR,

know

FoT0, %oea%ﬁo#sao;_.éoosﬁuaee"g, zs.rae?ﬁfaee'g, oaobﬁxaes’ad, B3 RReB, %csﬁﬁmﬁé,_

WRo

a Tag

neg n3Fo, 7 NS, Tieg Moevo, mgaﬁegof, neg $0w, ﬁagsfodai; — T NAY, YO,

R IWM 0, MY R o, 3% 9o; — W@EMe¥o, Memeo, Ry mado; —Beonned, ReESTD

Y30, Shwered; —FdBYo, FZ¥o, B3¢0, I¥Bo, IBe3wo; — ToOR I DO,

(’g £

39 R ¢F 3690, midmdeao, BTTEacTe00; — WPk o, aads%o, 5%11530?:’?, s%ﬁﬁwa,

SYDobd, SYIB, IYIGFrI0, U300, IY RS, mTY0; — Wy TBWO, WY IR

N,

"\NJQ@,

(z.):o@:s@do ma%zscmq)ﬁmo), WO R TIWO; — &¥,00, GUFO, :Sqaeeojjoo, Su3wo, IIFVo

(or JWFOO), FOBWWWO, PHWWO, INPIFVO (or INWFVO); —JWVFwo, WITTo, NOTS

7?\0;_—’—@0&355&0230, 3anBv00, T Foowdo, A80080; — WRRY, FoZB, ISR,

No, )

FoTolR8, IR, B008; — Sy M¥o, FYVBNTIT Fo, BY Td; — @%édd:ae%, 5-’99@;5596,

52;3@3596, PINS, INSRHLTE, IIZINSG; — APV, ITVI, VIIR, véd%,_a’w#ﬂmaﬁmo,

Yo, 2

RS Re3 0, ANINT B, RWIRRR,WoR.

1]

4, Two Tadbhavas (§ 370) may be compounded, e. g. ©OTIRATH, W&

oy

:

B9, ©FFRYR, VIBRIVo, VWRSIT o, WT, 390, 0TI, 3—’#&%%&, #%dmado,

%,

#s%xdo, F3,J00, TIY TNOER, FomIA, %aﬁﬁm‘g, TR R0, sfdaséas.&o, #Jac%m@, %o

B9, 0, Foebydo, WT I, 2383 oeso, 1839, Mado, W) ﬁwﬁu, zs‘-aafe% 0, WM, WIRT,0,

i

q

8 3%

@e3tlo, ®WMNZY, WIIIT0, ump:s%%?, E5Y0)

aQ

&

BRenToIn, RN, aamwégdo,

9

:

330, 838, 39, 2WTo, &R0, &ToTIS Fo, BRATO, Q8 Vo, do;ﬁégjﬁ, BoRTo, BITI 0,

e0mp

——

215

—

A o”

cSJa;SéBﬁ mmo Nc%amo BeraIIN, Dactﬂa%éo $9030323930, uea;j)do we 30, WY

;Sméo 0¢3RO, ;Ssaﬁrmwo :madreméﬁ IRV, IRVTI, smasao d# RoTFS,

d# AZNTed0, dﬁﬁ;ﬁo@ Gﬁséoﬁ Taodoni e ¢S, 30#6560 S0F w30, SO#wado

R0F0

§1

303330 NOﬁC§3§ £90, N('Sﬁédmo N&)Q)%"JEQO eo&) ~a§9ao Ndodﬁ&ﬂ?o Nd&f(ﬁo 230

s

,m £90, Naéeao N@Oi)ddo Naosomado N@O.)).J‘wado mozsdsj%

hich

5,

The first word may be a Samasamskrita (§ 70) and the second one

a Tadbhava, e. g. @S 3WReRo, FIWFIG, RPeBITo, WIRTS, BexTOIR0, TowRTo

mith

TTLR Y, 0, BCJA0, TIRTT,, TR0, DIRROTS, IR Y, FVONSIIB0, FIoNTaTL,

D0NRLR, RITBR

6,

0 be

The first word may be a Tadbhava and the second one a Samasamskrita,

It

e. g. ¥8 8o, WIRIMIMO, a# &3o, #mwuo MASYRo, ﬁoudw& B33 ;5)(30 WIBR30,

5 a5

W3, IV 0, 3noeso, aogcasﬁo, gse; Bonaeso, C‘)Jaaéro cSroueD cSN;S:J 2031,

ESPAEER a&rameao INTIP, IRBVITO, JPWIR, INRT0 ;S:awaééo SR PYTIT0, JITPF

RR0, Sen0IN0, RonBwIPo, Be8TaT0, B30 9930, RTTTM0, FGTID, MBS0, TISIFLBFO

TR, ADTINI0, BN PTIS

7,

A Samasamskrita term of which a Tadbhava exists should not be

1480

combined with a Tadbhava term, e. g. the poet Hariraja’s 303¢® Zned¥, 3w 03

DBFNYo should be 3T’ TRBTeIHd 8z JYBBRS0

©0RIT0=RTo (under No. 2)

AL

ought to be LIBRINIST0

3999

Remark by the author of the present grammar:—It seems that KéSava

means a generally known and as such used Tadbhava, not one which is less

m0i

known and seldom used, as %303, for he himself (under No. 5) uses TIVTT, T3

f?ﬁ/

J9R0, and PIRROFS instead of HI03TF, TI0VFB0, and DJINBIROTS (903> being

a Tadbhava of T3%)

h

(35

8,

It is allowed to compound a Tadbhava and a Kannada (d

€81

A YA

ya) term,

0690,

e.g. ¥ONY, YOI, JOTAR0, PRI I $o, A8 I3, RonS3es NRDCSJDQE%O

68,

9,

It is allowed to add a Kannada term to a Tadbhava compound, e. g

2

RWIVDR FRRONSE, BRI S,NM 95, 5900eARIPTY

0

10

It is allowed to add a Kannada term to a Tatsama compound (see

WUR

No. 3), e. g. TE,053 00, FPIPSBIBITY, RWENI, 93>

ol

11

Of old a number of incongruous compounds (arisaméisas, see under

30,

No. 2) were in use and may still be used, viz

2,80,

@)

eight compoands of Kannada and Samasamskrita words: — @e*F03%Fo,

¢

@erE3o (0. r, BORI0), THEF 0, FRIBIFO (0. r. FRIZT0), FHTR, MwFdd, 3007

B0, Jonese®; and

Jaoof

b)

titles (birudu) or a string of titles (biradavali), e. g. FOSeB Moeso, N

iéd

NRTW), NINHT I N30, NeWoTBR B 00, ROSNAFIP0, RFNVINDINS,0, INASSZ

80

0

BIZ0BeBo, FVBRETFRV 090, ete

In such titles or string of titles incongruous

compounds may be used at pleasure (352 38)

480,

216

In the compounds under numbers 3. 4. 5. 6, 8. 9. 10 and 11 a change of

an initial consonant of a compound member may occur according to § 215, 7, a. &.

253. As stated in § 245, there are three other samésas in Kannada,

viz. % oeRBPRN, NZFABPReNT, and JemyIZeRens®. They

y

are found more or less in the three dialects.

€g>

1

The kriyasamasa or verbal compound is formed ¢“when as the

XY

A

compound’s first member a noun that has a certain relation to the verb

W3 9

(karaka, § 344) and a verb are placed together (sannida), ¢. e. compounded,

so as to give a distinct meaning (arthavyakti).

is pr

In forming such verbal

compounds a sonné must be added to

attrit

Samskrita nouns ending in ¢ whereas concerning such Kannada (or

(.

tadbhava) nouns this is optional; Kannada and Samskrita nouns ending

may

in ey optionally insert a sdnné; in some cases the final syllable of the

heca

first member is elided.

See the sandhi rules in § 215, 7, a. b.

outiy

@) Instances wherein the Kannada (or tadbhava) noun (ending either in «,

and

%, consonants, ©, or @V) has the meaning of the accusative, are e. g. W¥BRY 0

whicl

(i. e. WB0 :3@%0), %ﬁﬁ@%o (i. e. T¥00 @@%0), 3ePd80 (i. e, 3Pdr0 230),

{l

;Soesaﬁjaaio (7. e. Soe*cdr0 cﬁ;ar‘r;o), a’e‘)”wam%do, DBFRRPANI0; —ROARMY) ¥¢, BOFB 15—

REMOFBR0 (4. e, Do Fod®o), I kWo, TOaEI0, FH o, TH«’do, I 0o,

gojsg

WD 8,0;—HITTIMBI 0 (7, e, FIBI0 TR 0), JIONRBO, WPIIRRo, JIVIRBO, FTWO

may ]

ﬁJaE%o or '@dﬁ@i‘%o, Fo3» ©oNIBo or @o&%emado, Sdoﬁ@%o or s"odﬁ@éﬁdo, Seno

the ¢

0BT or SLNRRRBO, 23,%33)&@630 or 23ISR, So8083 0 or maﬁﬁgo;m@dooﬁwﬁ

2enity

AR0 or JYRINRLIRO, SEéoomégdo or a‘méomé@%cﬁo, %ac&oom%o or %acéme%o, A®Y0

are)

n&®o or ABINRRO, wezso;%%go or wedoéﬁﬁéo, @#ooﬁ@%o or @f—doﬁ@%o, :Jdoom%o

Seq $

or dFNEY 0; HOReF0 (HOW HT0) is an instance in which the initial of the verb is

b

a vowel (in which case the accusative is generally used ; see § 346).

65)

If, however, distinctness of meaning (arthavyakti) is injured, the insertion of

(833

the sonné after nouns with final @ is requisite (Késava says), e. g. 80300235, ¢do,

&

Vg

;‘m’dsgocgdo, n@onem o, Wa3ronad) o, #@ﬁﬁ%%o, %fdﬁ;‘s’@ogo.

Words

As remarked above, Samskrita nouns with final © always require the

y

insertion of the sonué, e. s meaoﬁJaE‘%o, 3:))0300230@&50, ﬁﬁﬁ%ﬁ?ﬁo, Goﬁa"@wﬁﬁo, thlevale)

B9y

RR9az0, B3F,0R1% 6 0, J2,010E 0, B N B0, TeY OB 0.

they

b)

Instances in which the noun has the meaning of the instrumental, are

{0 be

e. g. BHF o, Ty o, T ReSH 033 0, IR 0, %‘*mw%ééddodo, Benwg o, )

liveg

Jo&Ro; an instance in which the noun has the meaning of the dative, is

d\

Yo, Ho (= Yo DBpewo); and an instance in which the noun has the

meaning of the locative, is 308202 0 or FOBIVE o

g

z

a3

In the kriyAsamasa, as the instances show, an arisamasa (§ 252) is faultless

¥

i

R

(nirddsha).

Késava’s special instance is:

10t

e

217

o of

[J0 WPTJoRR Y, T

(b

99;33 zw@\eé’, WONBREY FR0RR ¢, WD |

ada

330D ¥Fofn g, T

ey

S0 NRRR Y, JROTFMIZ0 dY,0? || (see § 271).

¢) Instances in which the final syllable of the first word is elided, are

the

e.q. oi’xpe:é?go (for Jpento 35@0), '@Ojii‘;o (for @oﬂoga 3:&0), TYHBFO (for FENY TBFO),

FE¥R Bo (for F¥I0 R08 ©o), D3¢

L)

pa3

3

verh

DN s

o (for ®I0 or I 5%&20), mgo (for ¥3TF

w:jao); PIPeR0 (for D3

Tr

Y

"

RRTO).

ed,

2

“When a noun with the notion of a case (kiraka, ¢.e. the kartri)

is preceded by a numeral (sankhyd), or a pronoun (sarvanima), or an

| {0

attributive noun (so-called adjectives, gunavacana), or a krit (§§ 68; 177

or

seq.; 185. 186), a gamakasamésa is formed ”, KéSava says. Gamakasamisa

ding

may be translated ¢consecutive compound’, having this name probably

the

because its members succeed one another

without alteration.

Conse-

cutive compounds <“may be”, KéSava says, “a class of karmadharayas,

n o

and occasionally may be tatpurushas’;

he does, however, not state

)J’o‘wv

which belong to which.

o),

w-),—

a) Instances regarding numerals (c¢f. §§ 244. 248. 278, 1) are: — B3¢

DNV,

$,03), BAWWTI), JAIIw) (VABy, I, UM being the karaka nouns).

We

Pt

TR0

may perhaps say that such instances are tatpurushas, the first word expressing

the connection which it has with the second one, ¢. e. the connection of the

Jano

genitive (§ 246), e. g. AVFS 0N (AYS), + B0N), of (i. e. above) twenty (there

oad

30

are) five, ¢. e. twenty-five.

(Would such compounds not be rather dvandvas?

il

3T 0

See § 250.)

arh 19

b)

Instances regarding pronouns viz. ¥, (BPI), ¥, K, N (see §§ 264.

85 3 SIWMPS

265) are: — YITNI) ITIRF0, YITIR .

Eonbvitcion

P PTINNYE

o0 Of

(U UAN), I (YT ©¥°) WY ITTVHFSL AT, iﬂ%&ﬁ@%’s? HWIFSC

Here, we may say, the two

)

Y

HWITI® RRFIF T 8, g0, WPRec3) T WSTE.

words are in the same relationship (ékasraya) and form karmadharayas (§ 247).

)

‘)

Instances regarding artributive nouns are: — ©®A0DIR, TAHWD o0,

3080

WP0TIF, aRBITIDAR, LO0HToro. If we consider these instances to be compounds,

they are karmadharayas; but they are in reality no compounds, and ought net

to be written as such (¢/. § 241).

They are genitives combined with nomina-

1, are

o)

tives, e. g. @30 is the genitive of VA (¢f. § 273).

7ty 18

d) Instances regarding verbal declinable bases (krillingas) are:—JBITBIN,

- the

FRBAIZres, ILMITILITE, a3, Boe, e RITWIFITo, PRSI0, JPT3N S0,

DRITDY, @m%5@5>ru@oﬁ%’6 (see & 364); SRRIPVO, WARWPY, NBRBWITO,

FEIRY (see § 363); YNETIFO, IREFFH° (see § 179). If we consider these

RAGLE

instances of compounds, they are karmadhérayas; but, as stated by us in §§ 178.

28

]

218

——

179. 185. 186, their first words are very probably genitives of the so-called

present-future and past participles combined with nominatives

See §

254.

given

As will be learned from the instances, an arisamasa is faultless in consecutwc

compounds

Remark

)

somet

Such instances as are adduced under number 2 letters &4, ¢, and d are

she t]

commonly, and we think quite justly, not considered to be compounds

Jener

3,

The

has

various

hroug

vipsasamasa Or

repetition-compound (which

meanings, vide §§ 303. 307. 308. 309) is formed by repeating adverbs,

will 1

ﬂj»\

o

interjections, imitative sounds, and nouns, the final syllable of the first

did e

word being often dropped or also changed, e. g. 33 FHR (=TS 7

2,8,

JRGER

B30 i’f&i&d (——Uﬁo v&’)%ﬁ) 39@ 3’)9@3 3&8) wu@) s, NN r\)o.) 8, RPD ;3‘@""03”

Mod_)

= 90 2

(1), 2

53, S0) o,

3333 23%*&—)6;;3 St %’éjvej _z%oasz%ow,—ﬁéjaﬁz%

b

(=38 38), ISR (=83 IBY), 398,38 (=300 D), SR, BATL*

afflict

(=RRBSF JIRBF); —TIFIR (=TI FIN),

330033001, DRBIPTS

he wh

alive

(=RRBe* SRTe), CEvRCLe SO (= CERO ESN 5. Regarding the repetition

wealt]

of verbs see §§ 211 3%9

belong

fi.eh

XII. On verbal declinable bases (. §§363. 364)

gold)

0rac

254. Verhal declinable bases (krits, krillingas

3§ 6

1; 102, 8, e), as

they

we have seen

are formed from the so-called past relative participle

lost }

positive and negative (bhiitavatikrit, §§ 175-179) and from the so-called

which

present-future relative participle (bhavishyantikrit, §§ 180-186) by

0)

%ufﬁxmg the pronominal forms and pronouns @o, wo, (¥To), &30, VY

o

formg

(@od%’s

8T, OB, WRY, BT,

w

s, ooy (¢f. § 193) in the ancient

askeq

dmlect or gy, ©, ¥Zo, VST, BT, B30, WIRY, €I, VI, BIL, 8T,

eats |

NI

VT,

BS0T°

(0N

b

1t

953 in the medizeval one, or #8333

b

kmdb

198

3o

¥3, $38, ¥3, ¥SP, IF, ¥R, B30, ¥y in the modern one (see §§

under 3: 200, 1.

267

273; 316, 1: 330)

ha

Similarly any nouns (§§ 253, 2, d; 363; 364) and certain adverbs

he ¢}

dlqcer

(postpositions) are suffixed to both kinds of participles.

Instances are: —J&To, IZN 0, WNRWIBo, TIERRYS,

TR 3:@ &,

AR DT, TIRRIBY,

he ths

or ig

B30 B, INRRO?, FTwEH,TT

DTILRIY; 30, D)

VY,

emm 30,

st 39, em;g

FOD,ROJTVB0, YVPI B), YVPIL3F), HPTIIZ, BRI’

R’ 3P, um ? o.)og) ). am%# Cﬁo

r])

(= QPYRY), HY,FTE, WRFTITIT, TRAIPF, BRIBI; FOR01TF0, 2ITRIRY ;Soﬁocod;wo

Went

¢S 33, TS 30?; 0B FR0: WIFIY, BREE S0

S04 o

e

—

219

lled

An explanation of the structure of verbal declinable bases has been

given in §§ 178. 179. 185. 186.

Itive

1

If the participles are combined with pronominal forms or pronouns,

@)

the declinable bases may stand by themselves without reference to

are

something or somebody, e. g. ¥&R0, he that played, ¥&%0, he that sang, YRT¥C,

she that sang, Y&BD, it that played, TIRDDB, it that sang; IJLWRRD (or

generally 8:0e53), see remark 3), it that saw, 333 (or generally 333)), it that

10U

brought ; #8J0, he that nourishes or will nourish, Zp3I0°, they that nourish or

s,

will nourish, ev¥)@, that which is; ®930, he that does not or did not stand,

VoRBI¥Y, she who is not or was not afraid, @®°03:3030, that which does not or

firs

)

did not perish, 238w, they that do not or did not come, SPBBR> (or generally

) N

SREEY , see remark 3), that which does not or did not make, 923w (or generally

2

my

¥ ™), that which does not or did not exist;

)

;

b)

they may be preceded by a nominative, e. g. T8 35 280230, he whose

':’:)

affliction was removed, 1 3> #3395, she whose hasband died, Re3I® 2O,

Wy

o6

he whom God was or is pleased with; =0 €5 32IITH, she whose children are

tion

alive, Cﬁaéwbﬁ% %ornoFIF, he whose firm mind fails, BI3° w0, he to whom

wealth belongs (i. e. he who possesses wealth), &30 %0, he to whom neatness

belongs (i. e. he who is neat), W SIS, he to whom nakedness belongs

(z. e. he who is naked), 0=, %30, he to whom gold belongs (i. e. he who possesses

gold) ; T99° 99 B30, he to whom feet do not belong (i. e. he who is without feet

or a cripple), B%,3° ©VBT0, he that is not or was not a devotee, IZ D BIETI,

)

they to whom a son is not or was not born, S9F,% WIOWRIPY, she who loses or

ipl

lost ber children by death, 3,933 (or generally O3, 2, see remark 3), it for

|

le

d

which there is no refuge;

¢)

they may govern the accusative, as the verbs do from which they are

ok

ﬁ:

formed, e. g. ¥380 wWR@B0, he who intended two things, WedF00 Be@Wo, he that

yl!

asked a boon, 33),T¥R> TN I, he that killed enemies; TWOI® S, he that

¢

3

eats boiled rice, SP0AI I T, he that eats flesh, ¥ Jo 33230, he that eats all

kinds of food, &R8c303° 9©73, he who mounts an elephant, 38X Wazc30 FANYA

A

3930, he that patiently endures the pain of austerities, N9 AReTNY?, females

19

%30,

that scare away parrots, NoF3T° we{)s, he that possesses pride, SALROY

)

he that possesses neatness, ﬁuaﬁewo%oiossﬁ ¥ T8, he that possesses acute

,elb‘

discernment (regarding the accusative see § 316, 1); H3,IPAFSTT L& BRI,

he that does notor did not know devotedness, @%F 303y, ReCWS, he that does not

or did not join bad men;

‘;::)"j)s

d)

they may be joined also to other cases just asthe verbs from which they

3

are formed, e. g. FORBYRFO, he that was in the field, BN BB@ID, they that

:;i{

3

g

went to the hamlet, $3J0R or SoxVosw ¢s Do, he that sprang from a lotus,

308 on YB3, he that was born of a female servant, P05 FHONBIY, he that

28*

is emaciated by sickness, 331 3938 B2t JW, that which grows by its own force

a oup

a calf

(é. e. spontancously), YWIZ WS I, he that came from the village, AF0333 o

Do, he that sprang from a good family; 3903y Fotd Hed INBITII), he that

i)

loves (his) mother; To9NTL IS FomowRI8d, they that do not or did not recede

FOF

from a fight, 908%,0xBIT, they that are not afraid of death, FVAT, WIVIIY,

siner

he that is not serviceable.

made

¢)

they may be preceded by an infinitive, e. g. PR WIBRR, that which

il

WV

NG

o -

cannot be gone to (or reached), ©e°03> W3 W, that which came to one’s knowledge.

d,

2,

If the participles are combined with nouns, the rules regarding the thus

follow

formed declinable bases are similar to those of number 1, a. 4.

g

o)

ol F0we’, rice that was or is boiled, & S3%), penance that was or

Conce

is bad, 2¢68 a0, wind that blew ; (32830 ) 933 2392, a well that is (in the

garden), 399,mo%R0, a chair on which ono sits, @03 3%&", a stream that runs,

BHBS M9, wind that is violent; A¢0F 718 35, a husband that is not or was not in

Iy

harmony (with his wife).

Observe also d9II> (for WPI) W;@B2, a room in which

(kyillif

(one) bathes, and S@32, in the place where (one) walks (or in walking), ZpeDR

also

59, in the place where (one) compares (or in comparing), DB R, to the place

vacan;

where (one) has fallen, ¥¢,9R, to the place where (one) falls (or to his falling).

or il

Regarding the ‘one’ in parenthesis see § 358.

makin

Re

by T 30083, an ox whose horns were or are broken, @ BT TBy,

a jungle in which wild fire broke out, 33 23 %, a house to which the father

&

M)L\

came, or a house from which the father came, 3% 28 0370, the business for

subjec

which he came, ®330 BRE T33%, the reason for which he went; 3303° IO

i, ¢

¥#®, a child which the mother brings up, $82)9,%, a place where there is mud;

body |

FoeneS FHNE 3wedl, a garden in which the cuckoo does not or did not ery,

deceiy

e

®Bea) 19aNER0, a village in which ripe fruits do not grow, §93980 Boreraddd IF o,

AN )

a case in which the conventional meaning of a word is not or was not damaged,

VOwe(

BRTONY B Wonado, gold that is not of use (. e. is valueless), BFTY BANT TN,

take 5

a jungle which people do not or did not enter, %3, O0 300, a village in which

Qi)

il

there are no tenants.

0

It is to be remarked that if a nominative (a subject) does not precede the

T

krillinga and the verb used in its formation is transitive, the subject is somehow

Contmy

to be supplied mentally (¢f. § 315, 2, k), e. g. T8I 30ed, the young bull that

See Y0

(people) tied, Rpod) e, the place that (somebody) struck, ZpBR ¢3¢0, the kettle-

i

1 fy,

drum that (warriors) struck, $203) S0, the foot that (somebody) cut off, B3, I3,

(the t;

he

the room in which (a woman) has given birth to (a child); FoRI%, a place

%

where (somebody) gives; S»EB T3¢, a piece of land that (people) do not or did

not cultivate.

Aciey

See § 358.

formy

¢)

Fom803)3° 0B 0930, a horseman that mounted a horse; ©@DONY

diﬂle(ﬂ

Br®3 A8 Y, a whip with which (people) beat horses ete., BRI TORT Wi,

Usgq {

P —

221

—

force

a cup from which (people) drink spirituous liquor; $303) Wer0dIF® V0B Fe),

5%?53

a calf that does not or did not leave (its) mother’s place.

that

yoede

d) 33@’ wdSE O, an affair that does not suit to one’s wish, ST

<

D7, a black colour that (people) apply to grey hair, ITFRO DVeews =2, a

VW,

sinner that falls into hell, S0B8%® "R WoFIB, a decorated seat that was

made of wood, WIoN9o WHARLNF %S, villages that are surrounded by gardens,

vhich

VYB3 euBoY, TV N¥F, stones that roll down from a mountain.

elge.

3,

Regarding krillingas formed by suffixing declinable postpositions the

thas

following instances may be adduced : —02%3> WAV (TIWFY WAFR ¥3), 3§ 2o

B0¢S (33 WI HWOI BF), ¥ITI WSHE [ooowd (VIF WITH Fwows AIod).

48 0

Concerning the general use of postpositions after krits see § 282, 1.

n the

Remarks.

DS,

10t 10

1

As seen from the remark in § 200 under 1 the verbal declinable base

vhich

(krillinga) formed from the so-called present-future relative participle is used

o)

also as the third person singular neuter of the future tense and as a bhava-

vacana (§ 243).

Thus =%6) 8, SREJRY, =PFIST means ‘that which makes

place

ling).

or will make’; ‘it will make’; and ‘a making’, ‘the making’, ‘the act of

making ’, ‘to make’.

)

W

)

!

Regarding its use as a bhavavaéana we adduce the following instances:—

SeRd F300) B, the making or to make beautiful, 330 SRBJIB, the act of making

ather

58 101

subjeet, &R0 20W INBIIRY, to make large what is small, @230 FPpE INE

DAty

®®), to honour a guest, 33 TAMES B0tSRd0 T, INFTR, to embellish the

body by means of sandal ete., 3%, SRBIZR), to sleep, SRR INFITI) VIR, to

mud;

deceive is injustice, HIB FearoR ABBO, giving (was) an innate quality of Karna,

o)

70,

9,30 ACHR FroR wIF,30, to grant the wish (of another) was Karna’s

vowed observance from birth, 28 Fwi) wg FATNW, to give one thing and

1309d

Kw

N

%)

take another thing (in its stead), 3 WHFHY, to eome after (i. e. to follow), TF

teR)

o

¥F0y 2W3RRY, their eoming,

which

BREMISTRY, our going, M) TREISRY, your givin

VAR YRBISR, to play incessantly, YowW BAITW, to be fearless.

The bhavavagana may be declined, e. g. 3cho dY BIFYTFYTIITI0 TINRO,

o the

contrive ye a means to stop the boat, 39,33 3RDITE W B¢, T am come to

ehow

| the

ha

see you, ©¥=0) IR A INBISTer3 TOR AWM S, because they assist me,

the business advances, 3 WIIT L ¥R BERWBIATY, let dinner be ready within

coftle

(the time of) my coming.

) 30,

2,

Likewise the third person neuter singular of the past tense in the

plaeﬂ

ancient and medieval dialect ending in v@> (see § 198 under 3), the krillingas

o did

formed from the relative past participle by means of the suffix ®@> in the modern

dialect, and the krillingas formed from the relative negative participle when

01

) Q))

used for the past (§ 209) by means of the suffix 9@ in the ancient and medi®val

g

e e

222

R

269)

dialect and @3 in the modern one, have been used as bhavavacanas expressing

the action or state of the verb in the past

E. g. w0008 30, lit. a liberal person

TONY

a having given-it (i. e. a liberal person’s gift), 0onBY BRWD, lit. the king a

nitial

QD) W3 WD

having gone-it (¢. e. the king’s departure),

your having come (i. e

00=<e

v

)

your arrival), 330% 83, the mother’s having died (i. e. the mother’s death),

moder

A 305035089 B0, the child’s having drunk milk, ©T0) SRR, their having

ls01

seen; ©D0° TIHRIW, their having not seen, WFTTY WITIRY, their having not come,

&30 IPBBRY, their having not done

See &% ¢HABR in the portion of a verse

il

in § 258

0, ¢

Also this kind of bhavavaéana is declined, e. g. 3200 RTers TR VI

himsel

T8ATDOIBY, because (their) mother died, the children grieved very much 33

0r1g10

03832 SRAT By B BT, FoMFY N 3, because the father gave (him) two ripe

0 2 AL

In

mangoes, (his) little boy rejoiced; BOBoNBo 85y T8 FTOBIED

IPARBIY, because the boys had not learned or did not learn their lesson, the

the ye

schoolmaster became angry; &%

TR 30¢S 02 DZ B I FHY 9030, 8330 IIN

Kesav:

A8, IRAT, the schoolmaster saw the having fallen of ink (. e. that ink bad

[ ah 0

fallen) on my book and became angry with me

knoy

3,

It is a peculiarity of the modern dialect to double, almost generally,

LY Nloliy

the ©o in ¢35y, when it is the suffix of a bhAvavadana of the past, ¢. g. WI W

(for w8 Ci)) TR TR (for o*"’omdcﬁo), 3 D

Ve B

28, ©93®0; if such a

W

gnem

bhavavaéana is formed from verbal themes with final 9v (§§ 166. 175, 2) or

W

from the so-called negative (§ 175, 3), the suffix esz30 almost generally becomes

30 (¢f+ § 122), e. g. SNRTY (for INATR), B@AT), VWP, INFD) (for IPFTRY),

g

%

wadm aﬂo@oﬂodo also forms like g@m (for é@dm or é@cﬂda) ;scsm (for SRAR),

. th

Qj’CS») (for ﬁ:?dﬁo)’ %ue%ﬁo (for é\!aﬁddd) a,le used.

This peculiarity ho]ds good, of

course, also with reﬂ'atd to the similarly formed krillingas, e. ¢. in No. 1, a. b

The

10up

It may be remarked here too that in adding ©® to the genitive of neuter

Yo

nouns ending in ®, its initial ¥ is generally elided, e. g. TVRRY (for FURRAY),

DIOBY, TBD

s)r\‘“ 0

VWY

Hw

T o

XIII. On pronouns.

m‘ 3

255

The pronouns are declinable bases (§ 90). o, &30, T20, FIRY

by

9, Qeo, ReRy, e are called (by KEuropeans) personal pronouns, and seo

Nodgy,

3989, 3o 1s called (by them) the reflexive (reciprocal) pronoun (see § 102, s, @)

&4

B39, BT, udy (see § 122

93

0939

3y §272), £E93, TG

e\pl [

D T

30, BF0, YUTo, VTR, BRRY, 93, BN, CJ0; WIFE, AIE

gy

IS

WRFY, BN, DEIPS

330, T30, NW3o, S3R), IR, &3, &3

A}SO I

(§ 260); &%, &F, vwe are demounstrative pronouns; and eIy (§§ 265

NC\JJ‘ ~

—————e

223

—

sing

269), 035050y, ISRy ; @0, ©5, 0VNRY, B[INIV; YN, IIRNY,

1S0n

GoSPY; O, D0 are interrogative pronouns (see § 102, 8, b).

The

0% &

initials o3o and z» are dialectical forms of later time; =38y, BH,

(ive

@sjsﬁo, BRL, &30, B3R, CWODRY, TONRY, OVINEY, TSP, WY are

ath),

wing

modern forms with a euphonic final e (§ 112); e85, wgP appear

also in the medizeval dialect.

ome,

YCrse

256

The declension of the personal pronouns &o, w0, TRV, 9, L,

¥

¢

Qeo, RV, e, thou, and of the reflexive pronoun zvo, 3930, 39, he, he

3

himself, she, she herself, it, it itself, is given in § 137, and their prob@ble

origin appears in § 138.

) ripe

hw)

In § 138, remark, their connection with the personal terminations of

They express,

) thz

the verb is alluded to (¢f. § 193 and remarks thereon).

3R

Késava says, the meaning of the three persons of the verb (§ 193), e. g.

( bad

=i~y

0925230,

URs’ WLPPETS WATVBYTE I 118, though we

know, we cannot tell the state of the king.—Zco@ 2345'2’3 Qe (Or QeRF)

1ally,

20002853035, thou wentst before me to the battle.

Qoo (Or QXK

AW

]

38&%66.—3@&6 ob%io @zﬁ;ﬁo%dbaaaogsoﬁoo, he threw arrows at the

ich 4

enemy’s army (or river) which was no river. o (0r IonF) AT AW

3 o

030% 3RRDFEPoS, they met even Arjuna, (but) did not pierce.—

S0MES

e3s @Q%go, S0 %ei@; DTS FEY 0¥, Q¢ %egcﬁ; 390° BBFo, 3RS BRFTS

fad),

i

W)

(¢f. the remarks on the final sénné in § 215, 8).

()d, of

Their gender is shown in § 102, 7.8 to be depending on that of the

noun to which they refer, ¢. e. viSéshyadhina, e. g. &o (Or &g¥) 3330,

jeuter

Yo 7?0, Yo TR ; Vo (OF JET) T, Jto TS, o NY; 39Q° ®To,

)

R BIP, TIT® VR, F9F® Ve BWRITo, Fan® VNP BWRIT, Fox' VI

203y (see § 357, 3); wo (or ¥SF) TonYI T, Ao EDITTF, IO 2053

Fof: Yo RPEINTT, Vo :-32’;7\%;6, 590 239B000°; BDF USRS, Veo TRB

Nes, 3955° VONS,

AR

257

d0:3 (the plural) is generally used for T (the singular) in

| 390

modern Kannada when people of some standing speak of themselves,

8

f)

€. 9. TRVY T DR B3RO, what will you do without me? This way of

expression occasionally appears also in the medieval dialect, e. g

zuL‘jJ,

g

RPISREe) 3533,5?% 230533, I will send this one to the world of mortals.

0047 9

Also in the oblique cases this holds good in the modern dialect, e. g.

]

853y, $o8AR w, come to my house!, and in the mediseval one wherein

Q%D

B

e. g. a girl says: HDoZBRRY 20BN, and: BRI (¢ e &

lura

BSRE TRLBVTR) IR BRRITTY o003 38 ZoRNREY RN

In

and: 3R (253, ©SD, lit. <of us they

i. e. our people, my parents)

oy

(J\(W

S aaﬁ%? DY RBBRITo TSI,

In the last three sentences the girl

plura

1ntends to honour her master and parents by using the plural of the

verh

pronoun (Z. e. 33, for g) before them, a practice that obtains also in

the modern d1a1ect €. g- 83y IW0TY FeH, ask my mother! (Is

of Loy

§ 354, II, 1 to be compared?).

B

to sa

In the Southern Mahratta country =038y (839, 957300, = 2539,5309

expec

our people, he that is mine) is often used by native women when speak-

sister

ing of their husbands, while the husband when speaking of his wife says

~SEMAD) % (839, 3, of us she, she that is mine).

) th

to an

258

In the ancient dialect Qeo, thou, is used, without the least savour

such

of disrespect, in addressing a person

of respectability, e. g. ¢

&0()

NORTA; [T Sones?

AIIBR dom (op)

3,05

D

honor

QRSN B éd =38 S JePR3NH,;

the o

QL BR zsom 23 5@ Qs

the §

2R BBV 39 » mfa‘i IS08IRWI? || (See translation in § 360)

and

W

0r on

FRHIF NI S0 F

®3 JIF0 AFY OY SesIdro |

NJ\

m.raa:‘s’os' WOII

ﬁoéns,

GO

OS[F 306°S3 033

233 oo BRANRD 0

(I the king having seen

W\“O@

that Muni and said “ A venerable man (?) thou art, nothing else!”, lovingly

\\)n-/

moved three times round (him) with the right side turned towards (him), praised

GV

(him), bowed several times, and worshipped (him) with devotion

bag

Regarding @deo, thou, such is often the case also in the medieval

dialect, e. g

they

TR Tews !

R, wae;ﬁe%a

odod;ﬁdo

L,

JB, /T eéb:b:ﬁc?;jo 3 £9) TR P

Sentey

OB, AOTIRI® FHPAW

and

Sy

RV

WARTALI !

3,909

Ngd

RER Bn) B

and

TABIHI, 3, TH I !

1113“

Ay

BR), ¢ ITIION!

i

.

225

o

) &

But the medieval dialect, in accosting a single person, uses also the

WV

plural

e, €. g. 3 Weodoona3sw, even thou having gone

ont )

In the modern colloquial dialect the following distinction is made between

203y and ew): — when addressing a person of some respectability, the

it

the

plural ey (also in its oblique cases) is always used, followed by a

30 11

verb in the plural (¢f. zos3 in § 261); and when addressing a person

of low rank, or a child. the singular

L (ls

30 1s always used

Further, in the modern dialect of conversation it is considered uncivil

204,

to say even to a little child e. g. 335 Q‘)?{, T, ¥y, R, B3 and 1t 1s

eak

expected to say ;3;’» T, QT 8

s @u\) @m)

et

beuause the elder

§ays

sister, the father, the mother, etc. require to be honomed by the pronoun

in the plural; it becomes particularly uncivil, even abusive, if one says

It is not unfrequent 1in

Avour

to another {7, ®e9 &, instead of {3y Hows.

such polite languave to add 533 to the words esg | o3, 90, ¥,

e

uUNO

3o

etc.

(see §§ 119, ¢, 1;

131, ¢, 1), e. g. ¥R, &, ;s‘ﬁcﬁo Q3 31033

0330y, ete. (Plurals that are formed with @gm are in themsdves

honorific, €. g. ©03.8=380. Similar plural forms are met with also in

the ancient dialect, e. g. ©&¢293cs, he of the spear, literally ¢they of

the spear’.)

2 360)

Qe

e

When addressing a deity (or God) in prayer, the singular 2¢o

or one of its oblique cases is always used in the three dialects, e. g.

R3eF3, ¥, Mo BREN! — 08, SoTeReTY, [WF V. DIV,

—

Foodows w3 (Vishnu), de Boms o) !

— 3030 A3 e IR A

&){5 5500

g eel

RR09Wd!

The pronoun may also be omitted, e. g. 3, Wex

(o

vingly

w&ﬁ(ﬁ.ﬂ\)@o RSOy A doﬁeég{ss

B9T0TD!

Cf. 8t

9

, where & dda

raised

bas its verb in the smgulax

259

In the three dialects s90. 3980, 39, he, he himself, etc., and

diva

their plural so0 (3935), 39, they, they themselves, are used

1,

when they, in the nominative, refer to the subject mentioned in a

sentence, €. 9. S[IRVT0 Sonvo N2F OZT° AAVE NVTOHDE 0, of Udayaditya

it is said “« Manu and he (are) virtuous people”. — ?»E:)‘FO B3ToErTo I3

IR [90Wwo 3RV éw@%edgjfau $30 3BonNHEedeyInrA. — w9 T

DT &io‘\’ou STV, DRV ?

9

i-J,

when they, in the nominative, refer to a noun that is not mentioned

in a sentence, but understood to be the subject, e. g. 39T %W o.— I

&) m) NJDW\)'}JOJN") —

)

ﬁdos‘) cw\)p@j (d?@(\) ) 033 ooJe)QDGO 80('\1 Uﬂ'&vrsgja N

K)(,

—

—

226

il

0ne

FRRTY NIART BFpRy 2B, — T FF BT

dbﬁ ESOJJ — QO

WOT

39 WO CJ:FSNO

202, ONPL, . CRo0TORIBV0. — I3

BE°. — 395y

Wy 9

fo su

RBITE NYSFD IPRBET. — T3 DIRDI RFOFTNHmISER K03

20300

GO

3

oug!

9

when they, in the nominative, accompany the subject of a sentence

hestow

and may occasionally be translated ¢indeed’, ‘in fact’, ete., e. 9. WBo03 033

"*:4 BRY ToR )8, 39 v, for Samskrita (words used in Kannada)

%

DALLIC

thew is with regard to (the euphonic insertion of) o3 and & in fact

part

the me

no muchness (é. e- o3 and ¢ are always inserted, sog® referring to

EY

3o’

& 3980

(3o

In

VRO 3) —~r:aw6w:mm§m;6 e)%%aﬁ

ruler

referring to VT, 50)- — ZSQQD%FESU- 30 39Q° BIARTOo. — N:‘S{SNJG D00 F90. —

3

M)

&

Q0Jo RTJ)o

. 9B LT3 "533@* 3 S, g SReRTEE wEho.

’~_ 3T 00 3953

"

7

ZSFC 33 2 SReRS

we!

4

%

Instances by which the use of 390, etec. is shown when these are in

iy

oblique cases, are:— ¢

) 3R, ¥TYR), BRBOIWSY &, he beats his cow.—

In

|

2T NP0 33, NRBINERY, Teb

birds build their nests. — 3g

SRR

SRETEZ AW, 3

read

R B¢ Seevs Fx, his own joy (is) the world’s joy,

his own trouble (is) the world’s trouble. — Feo

BYLE SINRY DTN

NONG

brothe

BRI & DBDFRBRYE

that ruler became famous on earth

when that

Derge]

true speech of Karna became his (3zR) property. — 38N 3=z STOReRD

%’J\é:a 9,

who has nothlng himself, what should he give to others? —

§ay f]

Ndbﬁ FeR) DB BN FeRo Ted FRPI, to cause evil to others and

& 3

Own

to cause welfare to himself. —3=), FomE 39y 03T, TIT TURT

(om)

A

[

SREI 03y, Ty, for their own quarrel (there are) they five, for the quarrel

of others (there are) one hundred and five. — 33, BF9, 3x0 ToEI TR

{0

h

18

BB R 3003 BRI e, he broke his tooth himself, and blamed another

how

person (for it).— 38, wBw BLTTe3:0, he who nourishes (only) his ow

(}'Ou ]

belly.— 38, Soni® 2, one’s daughter’s husband. — 33,035

oo n 9ed

Oc

play at which one’s own wife is not present.— 3z & ¢, one’s own wife. —

3 0

3;5 fa?:@ one’s own will, — :ég 223 599, he who follows his own likings. —

&

it

3;3 d@, one’s state. — égs ;S

of one’s own accord. '—3@(\) HOCFY, 2

\«.Q/Qj

(sister) older than omne’s self -—-55 ;36* Se 33R Gf\)s«aa Russ 22)@3 fear that

they |

arises 1n himself (3=1) even from hlS very own peOpl(, —-—%’5 B [

Th

0O 393, wof D) 35 ;’)Jaezmg eI A %J&)S@d mowde, is 16 not enoug,h

&0

if one learns (the way to beatltude) in the Kannada language, and

[

1

5 1l

(thereby) acquires his beatitude in himself?

38, 3¢ P33 R

SN

—

P

221

D)

if one knows himself, he (is) 2 wise person.—3g, 3980 %33 svTow

2

89, 8, 3980 FCIBE 3Ry XRemary, if one knows himself, he is likely

AW

Y

to succeed; if one forgets himself, he is likely to go (without gain).

f

0% 30N 03 [PRET pioﬁomaﬁ 0esdy 8x8R &% [wrosas, (he

ce

ought to know that) if he bestows benefits on others, God will certainly

4\

bestow benefits on him.

WY

J

ada)

260. To 5o, o0, FIRY, R0, VR, 9o, 3oge and their plural the

fact

particles o or & (§ 212, 6) are often added in order to give them either

2 t0

the meaning of emphasis or also to express the ‘self’ quite distinctly (¢f. § 282).

Instances of the first kind are e.g. enndwBs T, I (am) the

G20

ruler of the town!— eS¢ 8389, verily, thou (art) Siva! — & 207 Jede

)0,—

3&, it is thou who hast done this business! — 338 SReTRH$S @ai\

)

03%o, he (is) a distinguished teacher in the world!— o3¢ v.3 B¢, it is

16 10

we!— 30TTR ease, thou (art) Sar’lkara!——:%;g 39020030 Qe ! zoé% AL

1Y es!

Wi

Instances of the second kind are e. g. gose £ RER,RE ¢8R, I shall

)2)a3¢

3 TOR

read the letter myself.

SR Sadsy, I made (it) myself.

]

01,

n

SoRe Rweryd ed, 1 shall see to this business myself. 8w, 2030 SReTRY,

Y

brother, see thou thyself. 38, BEN FTRRS e emgcase;o, she ate (it)

lﬂct

10

herself without giving (anything) to her children. zo8 ﬁgeéﬁo&m, to

n

say that one’s self (is) superior (to others).

s

28, RLIOR Fod TRJ3,

S

g3, I° »e030, he (the mad elephant) being angry himself at his

3 AN

(own) shadow, (and) not knowing himself (any longer). g, F9ONR IIRC

Vb

RO B3Pk ROA TR on, (it is) as if one himself gave protection

aLre

to his own feet and blessed himself (this ‘himself’ being expressed some-

LN,

how by the verb Twes, see § 341). eaoj/o\%é’e, e.sod{o\%?e, %Oﬁg)@;ﬁo’g e3¢

jothet

(you yourself) w3833 &7 .

g OWD

Occasionally so® or soe denotes also ‘of itself’, ‘spontaneously’, and

009,

953 or zasde, ¢ of themselves’, ¢spontaneously’, e. g. 03095 LEAGF THIW

ife.~

gade ¢y, no thing whatsoever comes of itself into existence.

PoSIN

ngs:—

WORNBRRBE 3o TR z‘sa;\ﬁgomﬁ, plants which die of themselves after

),

they have had fruit and have become ripe (2.RYN%Y).

b th t

Hl

The same meaning is not unfrequently expressed e. g. by 38, 398, 33n

g v

3%, QYT IR, 3R, 053¢, 5‘50&5\&% zos3¢, as shown by the follow-

00 100,

, and

ing instances: — 3g IR I3, FoR BRT TR To STV T B30

Vv,

DI

éﬁﬁ%sﬁo BRBRRY S, TR, saying: «of those (ten) sons one who

D90

—

228

—

T

has of himself (i. e. accidentally) been found, a genuine son (1s) this one

to me (351)», he lifted (him) up with joy.

331 IR %oé&o@m that

pronc

B BN

fem

which grows of itself.

%%

2,8, Fone BRB Y, this creamon is not

something that has come into existence of 1tseli

g 38 0%

VRO

femin

TN é’éboﬁ F9530 WHR, those eggs having opened of thcmselves (z e.

galiv

SoSBRER 3D

|

having been h atched) by the heat of the sun.

g DJ\)

SIS TR0 WRSNEY POERY;

29'3@ 3§)o§ 3953¢ @(\'303@@7 in )Our

(5. s

house there are cooking Vessels, stools and other things; have they all

a dul

i

come into existence of themselves? BoZodRwo 3’53@@ 395¢ QAT

st

the horses will stop of themselves.

which

Further, by suffixing esA (§ 166), ‘having become

to Sop¢

CORM

Slngu

3953), they express ‘of one’s own accord’, ‘of their own accord’, ‘spontaneously’,

(§27

e. 9. soxon (of his own accord) W B, —FFN WE V3B — 398 ZOQ9N

In

RBRBR mdod%mojaas Ws o %@u&@v&% when he hlmself of his own

accord at onue gave a feo to (his) guru. —FRRY

035908 OR W

233 sooen (of itself, spontaneously) 38030053 Oﬁou $8,. —sogan (of her

own accord) %@ BREBF. —39TD VLN D0TF, FRBOC T TON.—

u3n% zamen (of their own accord) o3PdRR MNWIBT TRBISDY .—

4eCo1

-So;iméda S350

), 53903 NHos.0 3FY FRY, 239030

A tray

Many

261

In the modern dialect, when speaking to a superior

$953) and

and by

its oblique cases are often used as a term of great respect (¢f. ResY in

Uda

§ 258) being equivalent to ¢your honour’, ¢your lordship’, etc., e.g. e50359

RSN EN

%

305y VT wm%’&)omio

N') QJ®, Iy HaT APIEN)

39

203D

proxy

o3l B0l SRR (2. e. “when did your honour come?).

BN TR FePS TSR B3 BB 3AYR

3.8 BRI 23@'60

Na 239,

man

L6

She |

OB TR 3N

3O Be& BRedy, BREE 300 %@eﬁaéeaﬁ 3 39, %fé;a

she: _

B3 WRIBTBER. 953 BReND! 597 33N, 0!

.sf)

9262. The declension of the singular of the masculine demonstrative

Wfepy

Ten ¢

pronouns ending in « appears ‘in § 117, and that of their plaral in

§ 119

The declension of the singular of the feminine demonstrative

t} 8sp

pronouns ending in e and ¥y appears in §§ 120. 121, and that of

!

their plural in § 134

the singular of &%, &% owd is declined in

I\

§ 130, and their plural in

§ 131

132

The declension of the singulax

lia]

of the neuter demonstrative pronouns is given in § 122, and that of

be

their plural in § 136

tS\

PSS,

229

PE——

one

The declension of the singular of the masculine

interrogative

that

pronouns with final e is given in § 117, that of the singular of their

108

feminines in §§ 120, 121, and that of the plural of both masculines and

103

feminines in § 135; the declension of the singular of the neuter interro-

(.0

gative pronouns appears in' § 122, and that of their plural in § 136.

e

F° (DY) is declined in § 125. [Regarding o the Sabdamanidarpana

your

(s. stitra 112) says that its nominative is also ;:)éﬁjﬁ (sicl), and gives

v all

a dubious instance.]

The gender of the demonstrative and interrogative pronouns is

(:jb.)})

viséshyadhina (§ 102, 8) with the exception of ©z¢ when it is not declined,

),

which in that case is added to masculines, feminines and neuters in the

Bsly’,

singular and plural, e. g. ©o3Rens, VTV, VRO, 83, D moweTonTen®

(§ 271).

®

Yol

In the following verse

own

W,

D 03;5;5 5:3% ! FIRJo

39300 B3 0B0F, WJIVFORTI0 F9IV0 |

f her

DANSS, 35@ e300

N—

32390 TIVRTT® RVI® wdoﬁa@éﬁo, I

v, —

o)

according to Késava ©3° means O3 BINFY® (IF), WB WINF¥°), what persons!

A translation, therefore, would be: —A greatness which speaks of what persons!

Manu and he (are) virtous men, the celestial tree and he (are) donors, the ocean

and he (are) deep.

(Thus) Udayaditya causes himself to be called (i. e. such is

| and

@ il

Udayaditya’s fame).

‘Oﬁuc,

2638. The demonstrative pronouns are remote, intermediate, and

3o

proximate, viz. @30 (830, ©3), that man, he; envsSo, this intermediate

0572,

man, he; w30 (BI, B), this man, he; — 3¢ (©3349)), that woman,

%

she; ou3%s, this intermediate woman, she; @=¢¢ (@s39y), this woman,

D)

she; — w30 (@3, ©3), that man, he; ew3o, this intermediate man, he;

3o (B3, &), this man, he; -3, that woman, she; ewd, this

intermediate woman, she; &%, this woman, she; —eZo¢ (¥3D), those

ative

men or women; evs3of, these intermediate men or women; a3t (B530Y),

gl 10

these men or women; — the neuters esg3o, that, it; evzgo, this intermediate;

rafive

@Ry, this;—and their plurals &g, «vs), BJ).

Of. § 262.

i of

The interrﬁediate forms have mostly disappeared in the medizval

dialect except evzo for the third person singular of the verb (see § 193);

]glll?br

the modern one has abandoned them altogether, if one does not consider

b of

its 573y, which stands for exzo (§ 201).

230

e

Remark.

AL

Regarding the occasional forms ©30, ©¥8y, 85, 8y, @), ¥v3d ete. see §§ 122.

Fan)]

272, 2, remark.

WY

Case

264. When oo, w3, soy become demonstrative adjective pronouns,

(see

their forms (without the final o and with the demonstrative vowels

W

lengthened) are &, &, enn (this in the ancient dialect).

Such adjective

N

vowel-pronouns are used before masculine, feminine and neuter nouns

Z

in the singular and plural. The following are some instances:—es 3%,

far

8 23, vw 37, v TWIRo; U BoneF, B TN, v I’ 303208,

(a5

8 PS, ¥ wo, B wWRo, AW WFo; ¥ WPLIOBT, & FINTS, & ﬁ)%oﬁ%",

havi

8 FOanR, B BRean®, 8 Bon&DY (see § 253, 2, ).

i

265.

may

Késava says that the demostrative pronouns @0, @50, @00,

has

VNP, BN, VT, WITS, VS0, MRS, ¥30, 30, Yw3o, YT, &I,

and

epd (see § 263) and the interrogative pronouns &zZo (933), ST,

!

9o (¢f. §§ 270. 271) come from wzEo, AR, YRy, SJHTo.

(om

This statement is rather unsa,tisfé,ctory. Let it be said that the

it W

pronominal forms evo, he, es, she, o, they, which especially in the

a4 8

ancient dialect were used in krillingas (§§ 177. 185. 254) and only in

F3hJa

course of time were superseded by the demonstrative pronouns (wso,

(A

7

etc.) and which appear as the personal terminations of the verb (§ 193),

i

are, together with the demonstrative vowels @ < ev and their lengthened

forms e &, enn, the elements of the remote, proximate and intermediate

odj

pronouns.

Thus e330 is 94 euphonic 4 Bo, BTPS 94 o+ B, VS0

it

D4 T4 Vo, BTY B+ 4+ W, VT PV T 4 Vo, VTS YU+ T + VP,

AP

930 G4 T°1 08, AT0F B 4 5L B0, DTS Y04 50 4 vrt,

Wy

9730 18 4z (the primitive sign which in a general way points to

9

v

an object, see § 122) + euphonic e, BB B4+ 0, NBY SV 4 ¥V,

AN

©5y) @4 4o (see § 137, @ under nominative plural), @) @+ = + o,

0 &0+ 5+ e,

e

VW

&30 18 &4 3y (or zF4+ euphonic )4 wo (see § 122; § 138, d, 3),

)

830 B4 30+ Wo, NBZo YW+ 30+ Bo.

Regarding &%, &%, «wd so much may be stated tha they are e,

lig (

&, enn either with the suffix @ mentioned in § 109, a, 4, or perhaps with

=g

Ny

the suffix

it

[®)

T,

in § 243, 4, No. 10

it g

[

231

.

The interrogative pronouns 3o (O\J\SBM(\)J TOSRY), UNF (09N,

29

TOBEY), BBy (0IRHTL

TRERY), YT¢ (5D, Galh), WYY (CRNRDTY

[SN

9:353) rest on the interrogative

o

that becomes o3so in the oblique

cases of the mediseval and modern dialect

which is another form of

11§,

(see §§ 41. 125. 138. 269)

Thus 350 is H4 euphonic 3¢ 4+ %o, oI

els

210 e TR AT o Ta i e TR B, JEBE |5

0ITDRDEY D4 F

S0,

PRI QR

1v6

N30

GIREY DL o

09739

0° D 806

03500 Q4 85

0o, B33 DLt

i

)

gUY), OVDDEY) O+ 5+ WY

The modern forms with initial 3 are in so

Iy

far interesting as they show that initial o3® may become ¢ in Kannada

0%,

(as in Tulu, wherein o3sez0 occurs as e, and also as ¢39], initial o3s°

¥,

having become 3¢; ¢f. e. g. the Kannada tadbhava terms ©=Z3=cos33

BeeN=0odren, and see § 141

, remark under dative)

Fhe remark

[SN

may be made that in o®

vhere? which comes from Q4 o9, the

oJ

;

3

has become short (¢f. § 138, ¢); 29 appears also as &:3© in the ancient

f

and medizeval dialect

)?’,

The forms &3, o353, wmos3 which appear in the so-called gamaka

compounds (§ 253, 2, b, only before consonants in the ancient dialect, as

the

it would seem according to the instances given there), are nothing but

the

—-J

a substitute of & (§ 269)

Some additional instances are:—

oJ

w300

m

TOOROE PeT0I ?

g weg 3D90Y ! Do B, oot

S D

w0,

WBFNYo (see § 203, remark)? Qo) [ee® Bendo!

035953 TO® 3 BITP

3),

FOOSNE TOY 3T BV. — A 03993 NROISZT?

03393 YWORR WA D?

ned

ate

AT 03593 NPT ?

BT 00T (VPTD IF) TOTeD)

0359 RoBan

200

3037

AR BOO3) B3 009 BRTY TR SIPRIZ,B7 — I, 0395953 937

37

RPLTITT). — 03593 oS8R BRee ? BI,BZoSR. — oo Ae?

3

BR3?

&3 RV 7 — 23900F 3L, T R ? ¥R 8 TP R Bes!

WS TN — (AIYNFY) 0T THT BSReRo?

(’&&’)di’)) D3I

A @

10

N

=08 0?7 Regarding the meaning see § 271

)

266

In §§ 102, 8, b; 255 it has been stated that

Nvu 033 wﬁﬁ \9\)

22980 and o o are classed with the (demonstmtlve) p1onouns by the

3),

grammarians KéSava and Nagavarma

2890 is £ (the being on the outer side or foreign) -+ eo, another

¢

he or another man

N9 W04 s

another she or another woman

¥y

8980 £+ w3y (see remark under § 263) or 2T BEI+ VT another

ith

it or another thing, £¢9cs B9 4+ eos, other men or women, LI TSI+

PN

P

232

)

w3y, other things, e. g. FI[9 B0 I vYedn® ©nGelIyo, he who is

W

called Arjuna, is no stranger; he (lit. this man) must become (the

2;:)

W

leader?). 3o ﬁ&ﬁ%&@\eéo, that man (is) one who is attached to a

foreign (or another) woman.

Oh!

P8R ToaRBdToerTY,0, £6ﬁﬁ?%’c%£o,

it (the victory?) will be Rama’s who has no equal in the world; will it

W\

be other persons’? £233¢5 FRorondsd T o By, having mannerly

3[6]

introduced even laws of other things.— 3290 (with an initial gf) 1s

30

ancient; the same form and ®e90 occur in the medieval dialect; éﬁﬁ;

is the only modern form.

E

g

SISYa8 (which is classed also with the nouns that express indefinite

quantity, §§ 90. 278, 3.4) is o e, it all, DO ¥ e ok, they all

1

(men or women), DOT DY+ B, all the things, etc.

In o)e(gjﬁzf

rels

(=29 70) of the ancient dialect the &3¢ is euphonic like the o3¢ in

thes

Occ

Jowr, ete. (see § 278, 4). Hoo (nominative of o) is used also

whi

adverbially (see § 212, 7).

3 |

SR all (here without suffixes, see it with suffixes at the close of the

N

nig|

present paragraph when it stands at the end of nouns), is used in

karmadharaya compounds wherein it may take also the form

l(a(

QDQTQ)

a

(§247, d, 9)V, €. 9. DY TIWIFO; VVPYURT'; DV FIR,000, I oNISF

(f- e 0o oy, in all ways) oo ZRBFo HGRERTHF 20 ILI

BDRFo FoBRINRT!

Exp

SRS SO SR Isvtdarisn., DY TIBINE.

hec

BeINE. — 23 FoONFo. O FIF BFS PR, I TFoo SRS

dia

oSo;joecho. DY SeBHTE LOTIB. DOY DReS B B9 TOZIT. LU

(Y

Wy DA JoNBn duy RN Fewrs wwrEy. —The modern dialect

ele

uses also @@?Ocjo and @e:gdo for o:ie%ds and f,aeo)odo.

B

In the modern dialect DO by itself is used for the nominative and

LW

accusative, and then, at least often, conveys an emphatical meaning,

eneg

e.g. o9 (¢ e. the whole earth) ZBex=lc wrORR3 36%@ (=20 )

Vo

RESO?. Qo D&y won FY,. wop (the whole body) RRE B, WU

033

Wh4

535@% L2022 3. aéew%gesg) ]0. faaﬁeszgq Fo¢ w’%dz@ E‘iﬁdﬁ@g, AR, I8 —

DO D, as accusative of 2O, 0CCULs also in that dialect.

A

Concerning the use of DY, DU, etc. at the end of nouns observe

lo

the following instances: — 33535¢ 2 0. ?@aﬁoﬁuv Q})?;So. csaﬁi%as

s

S SR

1) The compound-rule 1*eg;11;ding DY ha;]d eo&?gnhas l)eéh regained onlym Kéa‘t\ak

the

instances.

—

233

—

018

abe) To.

wddeéﬁ%?ﬁe) one33R.

VIS’ SULH

FOENWOINRW o FEPRITS

(the

ai@éi)oﬁe:v &)?.J(\.ae eﬁdwaﬂ-——ws@@ddo "’8'

2ednSe R TR Jon

) &

303

Qﬁwoio;ﬁﬁ@oﬁ (see § 124 after No. 6). D3 [e

T59930,0 BN

e

N\

)

O T30 TIWBT 0. — DI RPIFRF DO TS e3.To0

aﬁosjwoﬁ@@ o}

P303

~

Il

DBy (3,) FTNS

PRI TS 3R

[IT0w 0 WR FoTP Nqssjo;ie

erly

DRBTS

SRR T

RFoNS® T

XL T

NREBI

) 1§

38w9. The Nudigattu has

230w, BRIZ,©, VWIOI

aﬁ@ﬁu 5 23(\35

© 3, BIVO TR, BRI OR, wIJ® ON

nife

267

In § 174 it has been stated that there are no relative pronouns

all

in Kannada

and their place is somehow supplied by the so-called

b

from the translation of the instances concerning

relative participles

1

these in §§ 179, 186 and 254 this peculiarity has already become evident

also

Occasionally, however

there occur sentences in the three dialects

which might suggest the thought as if the interrogative pronouns were used

as reiative omes, e. ¢

B WOT YA S® YD

the

¢350 who (is) a very

righteous man, he indeed (is) venerable

But this translation 1s mis-

11

Wp)

leading; the correct literal translation is ¢<who (is) a very righteous

man? he indeed is venerable’

0N

That the meaning of the above and similar sentences is thus to be

g

"

explained by the interrogative pronoun followed by a demonstrative one

WY

becomes plainer in instances taken from the modern dialect, in which

-JJM

dialect the vowel % of questioning (§ 212, 6) is often used, e

3R 03

)99

BT esTRe?

w5y BR,PIN,

what (is) the fore-part of an

lec

elepha,nt(’s head)? it (is) the dantabhaga.

035935V (¢- e 03593 &9

)

%ﬁoﬁo;ﬁ»ﬁo Roo = CSET Node wRFToN BREIBIFY, BR6?

(\) ;5§J '353)‘28

and

N8, 5, who does often mar(,h out with the very object of vanqmshmg an

enemy? such a one (is) an abbyamitrya.

OISR TOA

SRBIZRRE?

lnga

MJ)

953890 ST 389, who does work? he shall have a dinner.

NHM 2553 @%

AP

3500 3T SSSJ«JQ‘? @N SO qﬁd eooéo@ﬁ es0Ry, who (are) the p60p10

whom thou canst trust‘? such pe0ple choose for thy friends!

é OJJéﬁx)

e

DOBROTTY 03993 @eéo&@ SR ﬁmﬁ ueﬁfso 839, WDeF BT3B BRe?

BT 03D 39 TRRWIFTRY FRA —’mf @%- &,\ﬁ) in what manner

'O

do they WlSh that other people should tleat them‘? in that very manner

tﬁ’

they should treat other people

Of. § 271 (053 HDWRY ete.)

v

In §

0 this paragraph will be adverted to again

30

e

234

e

268

VL

In the present dialect of the Southern Mahratta country the singular

of R, ASI), VP, @Y is not used in speaking of grown up persons

Do

whom one considers respectable; the plural of the pronouns (@30, @zd

vall

with the verb in the plural) or the singular of 3z, &3, ©¥F, &T

20

being used instead (¢f. § 354, II, and about ems § 258)

In writing

wif

about such persons this custom is generally observed only (as it would

NE]

appear), if they are still alive at the writer's time (see e. g Bombay

e

Fourth Book, Mangalore, Basel Mission Press, 1884, lessons 2. 4. 36. 38.105)

In the modern dialect of the Mysore country (according to the Rev. Th

Hodson’s Grammar § 209) «“the singular 33 93¢y is used when

Y

speaking of an equal or an inferior

The plural esz3co is used as an

Kés

honorific singular when speaking of a superior

533, BB, 530, ST

fat

are used of an equal or superior when respect is intended”

In the ancient dialect the use of the singular of the pronouns 3o

by

w30, YuIo0

Sef. wRes. susy’ was apparently not connected in any

way with disrespect, e. g. ¥Zo DFowR, B0 LOWo, VT WY,

93P’ DVOTY, TP

zzéﬁﬁ‘ 5355 B350; LmePdTo, BeRT 'asﬁo

2P ONTYE, BDY* r%;ﬁd 3L,

Regarding a rather disrespectful

use of ¢330 observe the sentence TR0 WRTIZRV0 ITIRRE® B w@ﬁeo

ﬁ)(\) O:SQO?

o)

The medieval dialect does not seem to differ in this respect from the

dey

ancient one (see e. g. the use of 530 in Basavapurana 47, 33 and that

pre

of 3% in Jaimini 80, 1); @30, &30 may be used therein also with a

aug

certain degree of disrespect, e. g. D98 ToBoTIZ0. NARITIZIV. BT

18 t

2RY BRTTIZRY. BRIV NEPRREY 1. BIF0,? 30 BToD

thy

Likewise &2, @z3%y are found promiscuously in passages

Ut

that smell of dishonour, e. g. 33,38 =)~ Hoo TREoT. WRITT RBGWT.

of

B2 D030 DRBIEY. NTNRR 3»@665&530 TRBIF.

When in Basavapurana

th

six fimes

5, 48-50 women speak to one a,nothe1 of Basava and use

wh

233 (for v ) regarding him, they may or may not do so on account

8

of respect; they perhaps thought the term to be more expressive on

account of the fullness of its sound

(ar

269

Wi

In § 265 it has been stated that the origin of &3 18 o4 &°

+ T

Concerning this we remark that the Sabdanusasana says

8ay

that «333F

optionally appears as 2% and 3FF and SJYZo as

!

R4

¢ (sttras 177

178); (the Sabdamanidarpana derives T, Q3FF o1

3

235

P

lar

032 directly from D¢, sttras

112. 114),

O is used €353, €. 9. D 3

00§

&o for 3 38900 (Sabdamanidarpana);

D Zwds for v Sy (Naga-

0

el

varma’s Chandas); Qo for ey (Abhinavapampa); O ©003wes for e3:3

1y

£003%%¢ (see Dictionary)

The accusative s is used for &3k or dFo

-

e g. 03B for ¥Yh@do or VF/o BB o

the dative

od

for eZyndr

Id

)3y

DIBE or VF, €. g. VT30 for 8¥IRFr, IFF or DF W o

About the

)

meaning of Q¢ see § 271

[

R70. The interrogative pronoun es0°¢ (€98, 0359T0)

the plural of

@il

an

S530, B3P (0IODRY, 009=%0), has been mentioned in § 265 wherein

Késava derives it from &30

as does also Bhattakalanka

we have

it

stated there that eof 1s Q4 5°+wof

(Cf. § 272 under No. 2)

It is used for the masculine and feminine gender singular and plural

)0,

e. g. 803590°, who is a poet? wzm® @of, who (is) this man?

0y

J0

ga%?o&ra SORBP Fowd

Yy

2CPR[o SN IRFBrcnvoe (§ 203) 38m° So¢ O |

1l

=9 e?@ezéoﬁojoézﬁ a8

0

239G3 R0

23693y werossrierRadyo (| what shall I do

to people who do not reflect ¢will he of the inroad of Kala swallow and

he

devour (us) to-morrow or the day after to-morrow? who (will be our)

ab

preserver?”, say “destined life (there is for us)

and are conceited

and elated? agg® @o° 35 o, who brought this? sao3 ©of {81, who

)

is thy mother?

et &ot? @ﬁﬁ Se e ¥of, who (art) thou? who (is)

thy husband? éeaaz% oo we s wof, who knows Siva’s command? Qegs

e

&0 3PS, whose daughte1 (art) thou? &3¢ SoToro (=BTHR 308ono),

g

of whom (is) this horse (i. e. whose horse is this)? e xS &o° ARNR?

10

9553 o3590f 7 VIR €T, who (is) my father? who (my) mother?

D

who (my) grandfather? =onSe, som 035200, (my) son, who (am) I?

b

DBRE, VT CIDTY

O, who (art) thou?

PR 09T =Ny, whose son

)

(art) thou? =8y 03590y, who (are) these men (or women)? & 2P0

who

WD BRSB; VA WRRY, 033980 P Sy, this knife is very nice

=3

gave it to you? 2w R ¢ HIWST HBOR WEY, JWRY CPTW? IT

/0

Le95Ry, somebody met the Brahmana and asked «who (art) thou, sir?”

15

BRRIFIRY, SRATTTY 03vady, who made the sun? @€ o598y BLENY

)l

39 8, who goes there? 53 o590 Sweeint

-

aéoé&gdg_, 3. in whose (in what

50 %

——

236

e

people’s) gardens do they (the mangoes) grow? e =08 035930, of whom

seze

se1ze

(is) that house (7. e. whose house is that)? & RN a3y, who (is)

seize

this man? ©3: %3TT0 VR FoREN aﬂa;)@ﬁ:?@%ﬁﬁ? 59003067 39TIER03R?

(1)

WOIRRE Adodwe, which of (these) three people (is) thy friend (23580,

my |

honorific plural)? (is it) woman? (or) land? (or) the beauty of great

what

riches? D 0N, Bert 0098y RPeNoITy, which (what one) will go faster

than all? & RRIRTO 0353 35T 73,5 8, which of these boys

Gl

@&j}c

were swimming? «S0%0°% $3Re? ARdRPA BB, Boror’ ©38%, which

what

(are) Siva’s attendants? (and) which of these (is) my lover?

From the instances given above it will be seen that the interrogative

pronoun es0¢ (€30, Qfoadq) means ‘who’ and occasionally ¢which’,

In a2 note under No. 8, b of

N

S

102 it has been stated that the

demonstrative prosoun esg3y is occasionally used in combination with

masculine terms.

This occurs when e9z3d pleonastically precedes the

00D

interrogatives €330 and e30° (e300), €. g. VTIDS "ae:)nﬁ ua’g)o? — QeaF

call

WBwTo FRBTTY VTS ? — B3 e VIO %@ezsasw?_aq{ FRODO®

then

SRIDRY VPO Fo* ©3eTe? In the modern dialect the question eszo

The

Le

o%ady, who is that? (who is there?) is now and then heard.

030

Nudigattu has: zgobmy w3 BBR wmeds ne? Bemdng, A

e(¥]

ﬁaﬁ?'cfmm BTONRY ?

(thi

271

Regarding the interrogatives esss, 03953, wass in the so-called

0%

gamaka compounds some instances have been adduced in §§ 253, 2, b;

265.

From those instances it appears that their meaning is ‘what’, ¢ what

dog

kind’, and ¢whieh’ according to circumstances.

buj

The use of e3530, &ITYE, e3Hz30; WVITT0, T, 03I YD (0TT,

0z

TORH), 0DITE, TITI; By, XY (PeN) has been alluded

thy

to in § 267 where instances are given that might be supposed to be

0f §

relative ones,

Here follows a

number of various

instances :— 530

)

1§

FwTR0 TRFo! BTo wIFoRTEIAYT® wr3tide, who killed Mura? who

)

overwhelmed and disgraced Baka, Kamsa, (and) Kési? gsea’eo)oaa;jaé

by

VOTF VPR, W¥IH, except thee, Arhat, who (is) excellent on earth?

R3290 WHTONRS, 1T

(an

o

£ D VSR ¥, WUNBRED JwoRwY, T |

()

RR

350 W8 ofed,

(ar

090 NRNRS

-~

2P

when a Jama

:

BEMDS0 g)%O? I

g

e

[ —

237

0m

seizes (his) pot-stone pencil, when Arjuna seizes (his) bow, when Indra

(1)

seizes (his) thunderbolt, when Krishna seizes (his) discus, when Bhima

W

seizes (his) club, who will stand to fight? 3m?,Q003593%¢, what woman

(is) free from desire? @ s3dwss

o)

2B,R009R° ¢RRWP, which of these (is)

64

my lover? mpw HeaRs OB TR wR T YJIB? wZo WY Boeos

fer

vhat (is) the colour of sin (and) virtue? who know it?

WR FTOONFISF

0yS

g53)c3o, what (is) the business (you) have come (for)?

39, RoEIHRs30 S

ict

&3:3)30, what (is) the substance of your qualities? ¢33 efuzﬁu@ﬁseﬁ 0DRRY

what (is) his profession? &30 RoFélo JmA, what (is) thy distress?

176

53 2O,

prerecle)

X

EP IR . DRID e3¢0

QTN |

the

) DT TCI,E ¢

itl

VD RE

30390, ¥RRY 355 IR

8308,300500 ||

«“if (one)

the

considers

those (pearls are) large and these make themselves to be

called (é.e. are) small; even this (is) the difference

Which do suit you?

o

them choose with pleasure?”,

(thus) saying (he exhibited) all the nine

TN

precious gems

RTYY ey BREN3,N, which of you goes? =3P

he

05979T (Or CWRBTY) DPYT

2)

which of these (is) your elder sister?

JN

B[TRPNR 033 e %e%ei on which (person) of these didst thou fix

(thine) eye? & [oRoR09 oHax3Ry, which of these men? &

=l gd

A,

FRFO

led

O399 VN, oSA N 20803 .83, which of these books doest thou like? J8R

l

WTTR WIIRNRI? FToFs9S oIDRY? AT SRRV, AB 3PRNZA 3pe,

i

doest thou even not know which (is) the palace (and) which (is) the

building erected for the accommodation of travellers? 38, HBROS

%,

O3T9XTE? WORKS 09T

which (is) thy left hand? (and) which (is

ed

thy) right hand? & RweRIn¥® ‘@p& S 030938y, which of these pairs

he

of shoes (is) thine? & ZRIYY R, SR 3=y, which of these houses

30

(is) thy house? A, TEIRFRYY SAREDY SR FReENTy oISy ?

)

9, 233008, eud ?N%raed m@w%@eej which (are) the three principal

=

v

branohes of created things? the animal branch, the vegetable branch

h’l

(and) the mineral branch.

Qf\)g 0% QND 55@ S50

DLTINNSY

)

039353, in North India (there are) six d1v1smns

what (are) they?

FONTEE wRITHES SRS Wi B8 9T DO FINFY 353y, what

(are) the chief rules for forming the plural of nouns?-—-

_From the

na

instances quoted above it will be seen that the meaning of €330, etc

pr—

e

238

is ‘who

‘what person’, ‘which person’, and that of esgcsd, etc. ‘what

Ther

“which’

About esgf, etc., the plural of «30, ete., see § 270

SUpp

(D S 269) 9o, DI mean ¢ what’, ‘what kind or manner of’; ¢ why’,

pron

‘how’, when they might be taken also as exclamatory words (¢f. § 262).

dem

00 ~§ 03so, what doubt (is there)? 3BnS eo TaTeo, what (is) the

reason so that (thou) delayest (i.e. of thy delay).

e300, what (is) that?

adpe

$30 SRR PR RS 9o, what (is) the fault he has done? ILZF Vo

)

To0e00, (your) religious austerity (for) what reason (2. e. why are you

0urs

ascetics)? @=3¢o, what manner of man (is) he? w3deo, what manner

of woman (is) she? 33 dwgawemorivdeo, what (do) the discourses of

those attendants (mean)‘> OO TIOR3 BeorIR. Beo 3anNes, how (could)

all (be) liberal persons like Karna?

RETOTTI00R 203089 VB [TlaloN

of

o bfatatizgate) éwma o3wes, O, how that mass of bright f00* shines on

b) O\

the western mountfun' Do BIENNARIFIp JaRweBRY JZone, O, how

our

the birds crowd on the highest branch! ®oJ) 3@38¢o, why many words?

28I PFSeRy, What (is) the meaning of this? & ewds BR3¢y, what

thy

(is) the name of that town? dezy DTy Sse@og,e, what doest thou make?

IR OFo Bedo, what doest thou want? ezZ OF) FeR3 3. what does

4=

he ask? ©33R on¥AR R

39 ddeﬁo what (is) his monthly pay? @ 3

\./’\Jq

AR QI n)% 3o, what did he “find there? BB VN VR YU, vJazéuaa s,

W

what answer does he give thee?—The genitive of Do, LT (03I, 0ISLI)

is frequently used in the sense of ‘of what’, ‘of what kind’, ‘of what

ﬁdp

substance, caste, etc.’, ‘what kind’, ‘what’, e. g. H3C9 Se8Re FRIFRPFS

what kind of word on earth! $3ess933¢, of what caste (is) he? »oi3p,

W

nes’ 03T owonidw, O, what kind of paramour thou art! ef3e3ed 33

Rot9o, what quality of devotion (is) that? en€d3 $50,RoRewe BRINPITe3CI

ol

530, what greatness (is) the excessive killing of beasts? 0329 A

what kind of country? £3e9 S58o, what kind of word? & Tw®E 352

95, of what (is) this pitcher (made)? @) c3598¢9 wosy, What kind of

ey

snake (is) this? w=Ro 03093953y, of what caste (or profession is) he?—

The dative (&)3€¢ D3P, V3T, 0TF; 03533%’ o30e3F, 035eT) means ‘for

sty

what’, ‘wherefore’, ‘why’, e. g. D3FF F0JR o why passion? QFZEPRvo,

o

I do not know why

DIB, BROR T 270, Why do you beat me? T3

dRe* ABOny' wSe3®, wherefore these various (high) ranks? o3g

BoRrdwes wdoded, for what (is) the staying in this man’s fort?

=

g

308 o3a¥, why this word (or speech)? vz o5e3%, Rewo, why (or for

sv

what) is this required? o3se¥ 2 0, why did you come?

(o

239

s

272,

In § 102, 8, b, remark possessive pronouns have been mentioned.

There are no distinct possessive pronouns in Kannada, but their place is

supplied 1, by the genitive case of the personal pronouns, of the reflexive

rhy ’)

62)

pronoun and of the demonstrative pronouns, and 2, by the addition of the

the

demoxstrative pronouns to the genitive case of the mentioned ones.

The first class corresponds to the KEnglish possessive pronominal

at ¢

adjectives — my, thy, his, her, its, our, your, their; the second one

3o}

Jou

represents the English possessive pronouns—mine, thine, his, hers, its,

ours, yours, theirs.

NEr

of

1,

The possessive pronominal adjectives are formed by the genitives.

1)

O, IF, T, 8B, 2, 3y, T3, I3, and a following noun, e. g.

{

=6

DR DR, T, S8, 88 =98, 55:& 308, the house of me, ¢.e. my house;

on

DB BT, 23, FRB, §T0 FoTes, [ T3S, the horse of us, . e

10§

our horse;

ds?

RF, ¥, A, Y and a following noun, e. g. ?3 308, ¥, FR,

hat

thy house; 230 BoR93, Q3, FIBT, your horse;

H

S, 8§, 839, 23y, (reflexive) and a following noun, e. g. 38 =R

bl

068

ol

23, =8, his house; 3z0 ToR3, 339, TOWT, their horse;

0

BSR, 983, BN, BIR, SR, YWIR, VT, B3onE, BT, SN,

2030, swdont® (demonstrative masculine) and a following noun, e. g. ¥3

hat

$IR, H3F [N, VBT TR, B3I ToR, VSR [N, YW 2o, his house;

¥

O¥ST DR, S3ond TS, BST Fores, H3ond %’t)zﬁoé’), VFIT TIRIT,

j

Pw3one ToRT, their horse;

3%

B3P, ¥, AIY, ST, WBY, VIR, B8, YEIT, ST, KT

)W

y

T, 3T, emsﬁ%gd (demonstrative feminine) and a following noun, e.g.

@é

3¢ [o8, BFWP FoF, S I, STCH B, LVIY BoR, LWFR JoA,

her house; ©=3 Foro3, etc., their horse;

BT, BRI, \urey, BRI, B, eI, vYnS, aPne (demon-

)

or

strative neuter) and a following noun, e. g. &ged 308, etc., its house;

0,

LY BoRoB, etc., their horse.

s

W

Remark.

d

Occasionally a possessive pronoun of the second class (i.e. one of No. 2) is

used for the first class, ¢.g. in the following instance of the ancient dialect:—

Or

I3e2800 B33Y, (his) WO I° @RS &S 3¢RM0, the forester thus scraped his bow

(¢f. No. 2).

— B0

2,

The possessive pronouns are formed by the genitives adduced above

a1

a8

under No. 1 and a following demonstrative pronoun, e. g. AP (DT

W

waY), [IZDY ([ + 2, of me it, 4.e. mine (referring to a neuter

singular), @§5° ('nbéa:y&ﬁo“io), 5;30@0 (ZSS{{- ¥30), ESQL‘OSES& (ééﬁ-&ﬁaﬁm),

of me he, ¢. e. mine (referring to a masculine singular), DR[Y (I +

3

¥3%), DY (I +839°), IFB9 (F+ w39), of me she, 4. e. mine

o

(referring to a feminine singular); DRD) (DR +¥T), I (FF+ D),

':(;

10

SRRJN (V- +wynsh), of me they, 7. e. mine (referring to a neuter

R

plural), o8 Bcf (W7 + ¥R0F), IZFT* ([{+93F), BGTD (8 +83W),

mine (referring to a masculine or feminine plural), etc., etc. The following

and

instances may show the use: — & 03030330, & =08 550553’ this house

afli

(is) mine; sorﬁé{so, & Sonto IFFo, & IR I, this son 1s

(¢

ming; & Songe DB, Y D[R 55055%36, g SoRY R"FYJH, this

§6Te

e

"~

5

daughter (is) mine; es PO IR, BT,

)

3of I3, @ BT I,

by

We

those sons (are) mine; B009Y ¢ ITIT[T, HORY ¢ BHY[T, & SN

Ch

n¥ 78533530, these servants (are) mine; o309y Nvs 3], (reflexive),

& 239,150 SZYnFe, these oxen (are) his; & TRBRY ¥[8, & Tom

3n¥s 38, those horses (are) theirs.

SSpRIBRIR, PpAS

the

pre

3o38c, that ornament (is) hers. 2330y &3¢ Qaﬁmééo, of these men

this man _(is) ours.

o)

xiﬁ%zge;g 23,3¢, all mine (¢.e. all that is mine, is)

WA

thine indeed.

hay

The possessive pronouns Q);izjo, ;3\:3%533, mine, gs&\cso, thine, 33);633,

his, appear, in the ancient dialect, also as IS

(DS+930), S8R

([3+932), dRD (AT+93), 3T (38+v2), Oor a8 IR, (AT + ¥3Y),

(U3

BR2Y, (SR+93Y,), dFL, (JW+¥3Y), 383, (3W+v,), ey,

fing

(v,

VR WOTF, IR0 F2CG0F o,

30D RFTIFGHFTSF BBJXIAT |

when (he) said

are

“ Firmness of character (is) thine, valour (is) mine, to the king (belongs)

oy

his great courage” (¢f. No. 1, remark),

or

ﬁd

BRRAR DR, FO3,WBFSy,, THON 3T, :3?3@#0:35%0,

(&

passion (is) thine, patience (is) mine, to the female companion (belongs)

her conciliatory appearance.

by.

Also QR0 (28°+3), see § 122), mine, R, (™R +3), thine, 3o,

By

(3¢ +23), his, are occasional, though undesirable, forms in that dialect,

of ¢

—

241

.

hove

MV

as in the modern one FZIZo may appear as éﬁg, QRT3 as aag, 3330

as 3§%. The plural of OF3, BBy, IRy, I3 is g;jgégg, ;s;joééo,

uter

Qa3y,20, BTB0 Or I

9,39

O

3

9,30

&=

QD

¢

3

-9

oY)

839,39,

),

There is, however, the rule in the ancient dialect that g—ﬁéég, §;$oé:a’o,

N

‘{F

mine

2393, 3380 may take the forms of DTBY (DB A0B), BT,

09,30 and 355.)oé53 before the appellative nouns of number (see § 278,

UWJ)

4, except, of course, wro, etc.) and before the numerals from two to

uter

nine, e. g. @;Soaééosjjcs (@moé:a'wr@ojjjoﬂ, @aﬁao@g@%c‘, Qﬁooéée%c‘,

J

)

@;Sgoéé.@;’sgbadgbcs, QB3 IFTF, 235\)@&39%06, 5500&0333 of, 3333&53&%;306,

Wing

and 280 BT, DRI MO, IRoyZody FoRNE. The

101

156

affix ev3y is the intermediate demonstrative pronoun used for enco

N 1§

(¢f. § 173). The meaning of the instances is ‘we five (persons)’, ‘we

thlS

seven (persons)’, etc., and ‘us eight children’, etc

The same meaning

30

may be expressed by the genitive, e. g. @;Soéojéc*? (@;Soé+ 25039, 0°) &)é@,

4%

we five came, @;Soéoﬁ%cs opedos, you five went, or by the nominative, e.g.

(17

)

URS B0 WD), VeIF @03‘%06 TpeDT.

Instances with the suffixes 3y and ev3dy do not seem to occur in

TN

=

the mediceval dialect in which the forms with the genitive and nominative

/

IOICEY)

men

prevail, e. g. TV (T4 BY,T°), TV T, IV DIRTT, BB, TRTEF

T

, 18)

Regarding the declension we find therein e. g. SE S BWF TR,

SIS 'a%do, 353_)&;36 'aa%do, @;Soéﬂa%)bﬁ, In the modern dialect we

P

have e. g. TODY Ty, BAYW, Ty, D, Ty, Q1Y To.

)

(AN

PPl

It may be remarked that regarding the appellative nouns of indefinite

Y

)%)

quantity es2of, adwos (§ 278, 4) a similar practice is observed; we

)

find e. g. in the medizval dialect des3RwTo0 (e + BAWTI0); VDYRWDE

(VD4 BRNT*) ; 00T, ;);Soé § ARWTR.

«Whose’, in questions like ‘whose horse is this’, ¢‘whose ripe fruits

qid

are those’, is expressed by &30 (T4 ©7), WRTHY, YT (YT+ ¥),

ngs)

030RTIYNSY, €. 9. & TIBIBOWITRY, & TRV 0RWsRY! TEQ ° 333,

es 562@5337%%,33 ova0yn$o? In the ancient dialect 535y becomes also e380F

($T°430), e g. ©53¢F SoToric? (See § 270.)

A0,

Remark with regard to 3 (see § 263, remark):—

i

08

‘Of what, or in what, direction (is) it?’ ‘where (is) it?’ may be rendered

by 308 (23,684 ¥B), which appears also as W), (W5 - 8)), €. g. ADS,

3

BYNAZE 23 8 3 ) DFodIRA, IVFRR 3300, “in what direction (are) the points

of the compass? where (is) the sky? where (is) the earth?’’ (thus) making

ﬂeﬁt

31

.

242

P —

(people) say (é. e. in such a manner that people uttered the above questions)

f

darkness spread about.

23 1 is the genitive of ©3,, a declinable adverb of place

v

&r

(§ 212, 2; § 123).

(et

XIV. On adjectives.

il

273

In § 90 adjectives or attributive nouns (gunavacanas) are intro-

duced as declinable bases, and their gender has been stated, in § 102,

are

s, ¢, to be vitya or viséshyadhina, in which place it has also been

remarked that they are formed from nouns by means of pronominal

30

suffixes (see § 276).

§We

In ancient Kannada and other books thirty-three attributive nouns

0

are usually employed; they are, in their singular neuter forms, the

flan

following : —

WS 30 Or %P 30

-1

)

-0

%Qo&éo or

o,

wRO or endy, wWH or NP,

T

9,390

& =9

TR or IR, msééo or ﬁaeééﬁ, 59%53 or 3%:;3&’ 3%3&

bia

or 393, 3R¢0 Or 3RO g3 or pis, Bea or BRQ 2,

AN

8330

sﬁos{ééo or a"osgé_gg, Se030 or 3003y, u%éo or w

e

wo e or w3y,

b

z‘bs:éa:a’a or z‘:;s;%}a’g&, d%éo or 23%3&, 309 30 or 293y, xeéaéo or ﬁe{%@a’g

1my

(see their declension in § 122);— A, ARG, (BIIWM), DFRY (ERY),

)

IR, OB, SEPRY, JARY, REIBY (XCBERY), OBy (&DW), TPRT

doi

(2pRD0), WEPR), WA, WYY (see their declension in § 122), of which

¥

four are tadbhavas (§ 370), viz. w3, W3, FY 3, Re3 2.

afte

As will be seen, they form two classes according to their finals.

o |

The neuter plural of the first class is e. g. &;%m@, FRTTD), é%dog‘,

lha

30080y, B HI), Se0mRy, Wi, ﬁ%do:@, 20 (see § 136);

aho

that of the second class is e. g. BAGT), VR, TROT), FOWRITF), LIF°

§1

B0, DB, VAT, VIR (see § 136).

to

The masculine singular of the first class is e. g. %9 B0, FIYWo,

10§

Ten,

FROT0, é%zﬁo, 3Red%0, NedRo, WY do, 23%130, 9o (see § 117);

that of the second class e. g. ©Ao0, BRWI0, HFWo0, FRWo, B0,

FE2°0300, R0, TeBvo, wDWIo, 33;9:3;5%)0 (¢f. the formation of the

80y

appellative nouns of number in § 278, 4« and the modern ®WEow), wEFRo

or wEATo, WA, VP (see § 117).

Vj)\

;

X

The feminine singular of the first class is e. g. u%cﬂgy‘, TAYT,

FROTFS, SeOTFF, aﬁ%,édcjegﬁ, ;?meazjg;é (see § 120); that of the second class

day

—e

243

—

ons)

e. g. VAP, BIRFS, (faaoéd%vg), DB0I0%°, TOONY, IEE0ToeF,

lace

RBO3F, BLBFF, DDOTE, TpRDY ¥¢, W[, WP%* (see § 120).

The epicene plural of the first class is e. g. W B, Re00Te, W 3ok

(see § 119); that of the second class e. g. BR300, HBTE, ISCPRIT’,

110

DO3VTF, ;3;3:3;3%)56, WEDT, 2:3%?03&%;06 (see §§ 119. 134).

10

)

Some instances regarding their use in the ancient and medieval dialect

are the following (¢f. § 276):—

Jeen

inal

B, Zoro? (W82 vorta®), a severe disease of the uvula.

m@éjm@’

BRABY T,

308 (for SeSRys, see§ 354, I, 8, b), round breasts.

sweet milk.

)Uns

TOWs 39,0, black musk.

DPB [y, a white pearl.

»0meR, great desire.

2030 eFenc, great liberality.

205300, a large

the

flame. 3€2°%y BWelo, a small quantity. &dRY x%o, great vigour. 3%e

) 01

00y wprRo (for wppRonis®), big buttocks. RedBoI) W¥ges (for a?)de{)\e;é),

A

straight fingers.

@GP TGS, a sweet paramour.

BT DR

3),

2o (for DRRWoNE) Tords RAVJpees, the sweet pleasures of the

?

i

objects of sense (are) like the sweetness of poison.

4,

But though such instances in which the so-called adjectives are

immediately connected with nouns, not unfrequently occur in the

c@‘w}

mentioned two dialects, there is also another more common way of

0

hich

doing so, viz. by putting 0T, O, es® and eszs between them.

@%,

»®, = are the present relative participles of ero (§§ 183, remark

after No. 7. 184. 223), ‘becoming’, ‘being’ (literally ‘¢of the becoming

or being’, § 186), and & is the past relative participle of esro (§ 176),

N Q’)

‘having become’, ¢being’ (literally ¢of the having become or being’;

30);

about the possibility of ez being used also for the present tense see

s

§ 169).

The translation of the participles into English is, according

to circumstances,

‘that

18

b

‘who 1is’,

«which are’,

‘who are’,

\ao

instead of which (the so-called Kannada) adjectives alone may be used in

é )

1)

rendering.

o

Instances in the ancient and medieval dialect are:——ﬁ%é&; c;dg, a

sound that is harsh or a harsh sound. ;"30@650;532) Fo® BP0 TR

the

ﬁ%ms% R, 3o, soft soles of the feet and very rough hands. @B,

oo

3.2, a melodious tone. .,gg,?cs#.s,o T3y, a young cow. &)ad% a%;ﬁg@ great

o)

supremacy. 00RD, Vwae, large fishes. DP0FT, To[O, @ youns

Jas

daughter. w®ITH dﬁﬁ:scs’ powerful demons. &,%35 CEXNE precious

Sk

—

244

i

I

pearl. 2$3R Ay, a good cow. 1OBD B, great desire. 5%@90

parti

FHOBY, TS ¥B g3 398, the small and sharp point of corn. % ¥FIR

the

oo, an excellent gift. FH039, B 1R o, a sharp smell. %@aamago&?o,

extreme astonishment. Z=PZc %53 Ry BNy, various verses

addu

ston

in which compounds are extensive.

307

It is to be remarked that also words which do not belong to the

[

above-mentioned thirty-three so-called adjectives (as Samskrita adjectives,

etc.), may be made such in Kannada by the addition of @z, oz, g,

or 4

fhe f

e. 9. JRFOZNT, IRy, VRTT, FHIF, HETY DB, BIZRPY)

$TT, 0o, 63#339 S0RBTo, BFTIB® SRR, aégﬁsazs O W, DPF

S0 DT o,

:

3

|

Instead of ez, wx and &3 also esP, ‘having become’, together with

%

a form of @UF, to be, is used, e. g. IRARIW ABFTY (4. €. IRORSBY, &N

(foz

BBFaEY), that is brown; dSemenzgroy, that is excellent; DR oo

(for

35097330333556 eATFS%, she who is shrewd and clever; ZRTmoN® e

(fm

uég,l a long desolate road. D39.3Fs* VNI TOWHIRTIT, Vo, the cele-

form

brated capital of Kuntala. oézwh Sch@en amyds, he who is

stout and fine.

Also em%;), ‘being’, possessing’ (literally ¢of the being’, etc., § 186),

w%’(

the present relative participle of eyt (§ 180, remark after No. 6),

=

3

which has been mentioned as one of the taddhita suffixes (§ 243, B,

W0

No. 20), may be introduced here again, as similar adjectives or attributive

nouns are formed by means of it, in which it signifies ¢ who has’, etc.

b

uﬁu(

e. g. cﬁzssﬁoosi)o, a man who has riches or a rich man; %gdg%g)o, a studying

V

man; mz@aiggeg)o, a man endowed with good qualities; z‘saesqsﬁoo%g)o,

(o

a man well supplied with grain; FewnosSe*, a charming woman;

by 1

BEPIF o, wise men (see § 316 under 1; ev$ in combination with the

accusative see ibid.). The contrary may be expressed by 2R, ‘1ot

that

being’ (§ 175, 8), ‘not having’, e. g. %,Qaec)azjo, a man in whom there is no

they

studying, 7. e. a not-studying man; &gﬁaﬁ?)e&do, a stupid man; %039(8%

),

WY (X

8389, a crook-armed man; B3V B Formado, worthless gold. Hg33,

4ppa

oog® werury, that which has no terminations (see § 316 under 1).

§ 2

wFOOT TN FTFIV B [IROI w%&eﬁgd Yo B POTERY,

el

the

though there be a village in which there are no tenants, a house in

Bhﬁr

which there are no children, one’s own people who have no love, what

v

(is their) worth? (see § 275).

3

a——

s

245

o

0

Prominently in the medieval dialect =&, ¢being’, present relative

R

participle of 5o (§ 184), is used like We}fn when it is suffixed to one of

NFO,

the original forms of the thirty-three attributive nouns which will be

IS8

adduced presently, e. g. ﬁ@@%aﬁ 23y, & large ox; 53@%65 o b large

stones; 2.9 ® So®, good speech; 300 %‘agef, swelling udders; u%m’

the

321y, round leprosy.

7S,

It remains to be stated that the above-mentioned thirty-three adjectives

or attributive noans possess what we may call original forms.

Those of

3

the first class are

oF

wie (for ¥neszy), NG (for NP ), wH* (for &’%éQ)’ w3y, (for

T893 ¢f. § 102, 9), sRes (for 3RORQ), (Roeay,, for ﬁozéég), g (for

with

a’s{?}aéo), 3¢ (for 393y), 3wea (for 30¢03y), &Y, (for 32, ded

g

(for d@%ée), Suome (for ;Soz:é)éa), Reo (for 8ed), ué\od (for w@éjéo), ALY

W

(for 29 3y), e (for m%@éo), e (for 23363330), B0 (for 209 3v), ey

o

(for ;:j{éaég), (z%ﬁﬁ is also ancient, though it would seem, as if its longer

cele

form did no longer exist.)

0 18

Those of the second class are

wh (for ©ARY), vg’, 1R (for vdRY), B3F (v, for BIR), DY,

86),

2% (for 29R0), B, TRy (for FA), Fo° (for TORY), 3&2°, 3N, 3,

B),

g, ete. (for 3P0, d, ¥R, ¥Ry (for dBR), =ey (for TeIDy),

B

tive

20, 0¢, 2¢u¢ (for 12m), Bpx (fpr WPRRY), WeP, W (for we°m),

b

Gy

wa (for 2Am), 0P, Be¢ (for VID).

We have already met with these original forms in karmadharaya

Jin

%0,

compounds, in § 247, d, 5 seq., where they are regarded as substitutes

by native grammarians.

nal

Cf. also § 244 (Ses, T0FF).

Regarding oA, a®, 20, ®¢9 there is the ancient rule (§ 253, 2, ¢)

the

‘ot

that where they form so-called consecutive compounds (gamakasaméasas)

g 10

they insert o3), viz. WACTREY, PRWRITIOR, WDMBTZN0 (0. I'. FEIP°z0N0),

V)

2WPoTIYF, to which Késava adds also mAodoeee o, though there is

)

&j

apparently no AR (but =XY).

It has been remarked already in

Z;)

§ 253 that this o3y is o4 w, 4. e. the genitive.

Instead of 5203080

the Jaimini Bharata and the modern dialect have esAg@y; the Jaimini

;

i,

Bharata has also es3:330c¢ for esdiody Boes.

The same Bharata uses

¢ 1

d&nuToes for B e, and BABRTe’ for TAcd 3R[eF.

For 2

hat

o3ono the modern dialect uses %0:30n, and for RYTIHF 1t has ¥

—

—

246

FWI, or VP

BATEY

AT

DABRTO

ENLTatAN,

i)

W

RNITIY®

it

would be regular karmadhiraya compounds like the ancient &9RR%

ey

39e0’; ¢f. TN in the Nacirajia

CD\LJ

2%, W%, (both medieeval and modern) and =233 (ancient?, medizval

40,

and modern) often follow the ancient rule regarding 54 etc., that is to

say suffix the ¢ of the genitive by means of a euphonic o3¢ (§ 130, &, ¢),

ol

e. g. PR (O DFE) RPN, a young she-elephant;

?»230»«) (or %% e)

Hiap)

Fox, a good business; ®CBo (or =eBe) AeS, the old garment of a

female

W

274

If attributive nouns do not precede the nouns or pronouns with

N

%

which they are connected, but follow them, they appear e.g. as follows:

T35 w§zo0dw,, the poetry became good. e=:pe w¥Ho, he (is a) good

Y

(man)

3% w® 3%, she (is a) good (woman).

eﬁ@ 2005y, they

e

(the pearls are) large

8305 wd o, they (are) able (persons)

v 0

It will be observed that in such a case the attributive noun agrees

0

in gender with the nominative to which it is added

I6ma

Samskrita adjectives are used similarly, e. 9. Bwo 3exmo

BIE

woul

908,300, BT DR, ¥ TZ0, VBT WERT, & A eT* 3 030F 3R, O

alone

995, Grammars and other books of the modern dialect adduce various

0n i

form

adjectives or attributive nouns, e. g. ©o20WITT, WG, 28,7, 0B, WP, Td

ag, oY,

therg

3B, %aw FOTOB, B3, 2%% Bz (WSRE), zsase 3;333

53065 o@)éj W3R, mo@wiﬁ ;ﬁoomv, BaRT, Ry, AL, 56033 a'éaza’o etc

(Nudlgattu p. 58; Anglo—Kanalese Translation Serles 1.pp. 30 41 42

DA

OO

etc.), of which several are known to be ordinary nouns (¢f. § 277)

DA

Their use may be learned from the following instances (¢f. § 316, 2):—

W

BRBRRT (BRRBT W) MO, 2 large bunch. ZRZIZRS[y S

W

SOR.— T FRTW

233 NR. T R NP

BSRC SOIR BVEAS NS

%

o S

‘3\05\

RBP TORINDY. /B, NNBY. WD, WD BJREEB, 3D, TORY

c?.mé saREsnsicy,

&razé ’*%3 AN

W)

DL, PBIRO. 55099 DOIBF).

;

98, [onv.

WG @3&

VP 9O,

NS_‘@ ﬁc’s’ﬁ%‘?o

a?oeéo FoLSe ;So‘“\“

dozao

it

0

DIBRINR

(The instances are taken from South- \lahratta school-books

bo(}k\

hat were composed by natives.)

¥Ry ©33TSG, that is necessary

o)

&3 sSoa‘;ossi{S ) .03.0 Boss

FOBIBRFY D Ree 38, DD NBEY)

500590 TR ITBIST

K\m

BRI DB, TNTZ B, T, CS 23 FTF3.

S3nP TP, BRZ D, TOI

nY

QM

P —

2417

P —

T

aSeaso@m?o TRT BB F. %9@5)8?%% T BEF. W %’eaio@ BITVR., BN

(5

Ao M8 o3, 23,19 Teerons nE} Bt . TR0 RRLUPTITSA.

BB BBRZ . ROBINCNTY BFeBTy BrR s wWots BWERED

val

18 £0

o3, © DoTRY) BARE ©3. oI BWERE DB, VI BT

25T ajbcsaoﬁ. %wgv) BROTD

3

b o)

] ;so;smé;so doﬁoo&o%ﬁ@aaa@a". o3 égeododo

838 8D BRoFe? TN 33, 3.

SRty BEomy 3. Qesd 303 3

{JS)

¥

23:3'%3.

BES 550 d@z:%do 933,

TEA% TAEY. € O T

B3R BB, Nede we e BAe BOT W TAG. NRYY Fo

with

QNGB ), T :392%;5) 0008,%. ©Te3Y 0% (cloudless) wd. Famo

lows

wcﬁﬁ@%eﬁ. VRRY WY ucéai;)csaoé’. I 3% SO0 WBTOZ .

000d

A aNe 'zb%?edo 73, & %e)(g’r{%fo 0BY DTV, ejdzb::%aid FOTBNH

they

3o, WIS 3023 ":)szavam. BoNT BMIRRENS {SQUS WRY T A

VANF) ®RT WD,

BRE BOTOWTNTY ATISRI.

3,3 (see § 355, 3).

rees

BV

B3 B.

(Instances from S.-Mhr. school-books.

It 18 1o he

remarked that there are instances among them in which other authors

o)

would perhaps prefer to use =A and a form of 3y, instead of w3y

80

alone, after the attributive nouns, e. 9. &5933 ATy)=aNG; see further

on in this paragraph, and ¢f. the forms with & suffixed to the original

11008

forms of attributive nouns in § 273.

In the medieval Basavapurana

)

there occurs once wWBIRIFIY), 29, 28.)

ol

&j,

efc

vRoSIR RwerRnYy, broad walls. @;ﬁ\sad TERFRYY. 8RITHD

s

£

SIEl; eﬁgazpad%”aacs RESTR. PLIDIB WD, BRI T voN. emé_&@

ed

D98 R0, D TTR NBNK.

3

28,0590 Y. STROWT a0 ﬁf%

o)f-

03590 waNwuniFy, wEY zé%;:azﬁ é@e‘ej@‘. :%os%zsadaﬂm. do&égad

V)

DE,0RT. HETTIT BORITR. TIRCRTIOMWIE BRINRY. §HB,DO3

%

9

FReBNRBY. [ZReDBITG @%ﬁ%ﬁ),

DT, B BONH.

3

sjaogqu sam&@xg

’dpﬂ.

ToB0E. SuRWFOIBRT). BUE BTN ga:@ SEUIB DR, ).

T

m;gdnad 31{5\. gzggssad@m?o. 23%&23 BEIVE YUNITINE., JRFB T,

(Instances from S.-Mhr. school-

fmw

HORBTE TIZIR. a@aagcs BRI,

o0ks

books.)

%;3@35‘5)% R &%, a false friend.

BRIY AyBBR. HOFIF

2355

MBI, AoRB Doy woRYR G, g, R, B8

oBorg, B, TUYR. oD, w&msﬁo._'ﬂm@%cﬁ sa3nW,

208

P —

248

s

had

treeless deserts

DONVT TN

2000 BRI

239030 2OV T

and ¢

Smo03ox. (Instances from the same.)

<having become

i)

Instead of esz3 also e

together with a relative

participle of @3,, to be, is used, e.g. WRY VPTTeNTo=RY (for WHTFT

may

343

Gc0), (it is) excessive. e3230e0m39NTos3 gorvaT, ornamental gold

d.ea0

1ng ¢

8. 5aNTIDITY

illustrious persons

(Instances from the same and from

a Mysore book.)

YLy

“quit

With reference to the remark made above in this paragraph that

appe

some authors would perhaps prefer to use =n and a form of ©3o instead

of 3y alone, after attributive nouns, the following instances, taken from

F,%0

S.-Mhr. school-books

may be given: —ag Kosrrdd dwRendI [

3

21

2EPRETY, CNA BRFI SEY Do DR wsa;smam% 5330 BB TS

the 3

QIS N0, TY0n SISy S0 Sen Ry

=SB0 383 208 o3enNd

efe

FJ) BIRINTY BINBRER @93,0@@ 3%,30eNm3 C.

BIY T RIT) WRY

ﬁdo;sahda%@ 22, ©9TWR uaé%ﬁ wcé‘%zsaﬂdeio

(A

o e§g) WX 38 a;iga

luce

JoBTOIP SNTIST

JORY AB IINTIRDRY

TR, o]y v@&ﬁ aériocaﬁosm

6\)»‘(5

FIENTONIR oS

NP SR WY &daaﬁdowdo

Ptim

Oud‘

Occasionally SIS (4. e. &R, + R, § 223) is suflixed to &3 and ene

0n g

€. 9.

AT T390 (beautlful) éeujﬁm

V~C§ rﬁ%?&

(Instance from a

Jrop

S.-Mhr. school-book )

SIngy

Frequently this ®g appears as eg, (cf- 8§ 223. 224) and 3 without

e or e in the formatlon of so- called adjectives, e. ¢g. N3 T, FTRTOV,

L

suffiy

long hair

39 R, YUKW

398, 3N, BUR TN, TSI &ﬂwga‘s’ d#é

RN, :’mérd 53?.3633 or emcﬁzs IR, ete.

(Instances from S. Mhr

I

ang

school—books) @g occurs also 58 mR e . cfr*’ﬁ ué3 and @8, e g.

DHIR DRF

136

thery

Lastly also forms with R (§ 212, remark 2) have been used as so-

mineral coals are

{8 1

called adjectives, e. g. SQZONYs IR BTE,B,

T

black.

& RoMAR FTRIW ifff:? na.

N@é‘) 0399 msaﬂﬁ %og) SNBE S

mloh

N SoenS. B2 BBNTS B

w% ne Ci?% r{%*o 393, mﬁoa’ ~ 4 %oe)o

latyg

2 NT3 B

NAYRYY wRY 3TN méﬁ

72\ CSJ el

(Instances from

I

S.-Mhr. school-books.)

dFOp

Also so-called relative participles have been called adjectives in

to {}

modern grammars, e. g. RRFE 3T 3.n%, bright stars, T Re=TOL

Wy

—_—

249

—

0f

bad servants (Anglo-Kanarese Translation Series, Book I, pp. 39. 40)

and even plain genitives, as @3(\,, ﬁ@%%co 239,030 (Nudigattu, p. 58)

tive

To express ‘very’ before an adjective, 83, weo

w®e and RO

i)

may be used, e. 9. ¥& B

very thick; weo 3989, very clever

WRY

%

o

RBR@, very great; wxy 303, very clean

About another way of render-

from

g ‘very’ see § 305, a

In the case of inferiority also &eg is used for

‘very’, e.g. 3¢0 ®ep, very small, which 8¢d is employed also to express

ha

quite

‘wholly’, e. 9. Soonin®y 3¢09 OToTes TN T3, 53, monkeys

tead

:

appear quite like men

from

On comparison see §§ 343. 348, 7. 349, s

4

1

276. Looking back at § 273 we find that the so-called adjectives in

,JJw

the ancient and medizval dialect consist of original forms (as WP, TP

N

etc., ®¥A, D&, ete.) combined with certain suffixes

What are these?

28

They are the pronominal forms 3o, 30, @0 of the neuter singular intro-

oy

duced in § 122, so that e. g. w9 30 or 2,3y, would be the original form

030

w4+ D430 or 3o, the g being a euphonic addition (¢f. § 168), and the

primitive form being 2%

To assume that the 5 is not euphonic, and

B30, B3 (for anY) are the suffixes added to 2%, seems to be excluded

0,

on account of the absence of analogy, as 3, ®3y, would have been the

m &

proper suffixes

and the neuter plural w9 zosy and the masculine

singular 2.9 o would raise insuperable difficulties

hout

In ®Az, wdR, ete. there is no euphonic letter, but the pronominal

ool

suffix @ is immediately joined to the original forms ea, @, etc

o

In the masculine form 290 (originally, we believe, w$o) the =

Mhr

and ¢ are euphonic (about the euphonic z¢ see § 119, a, §§ 132. 134.

6]

136, and ¢f. 2% do@ further on in the present paragraph); &)@ Qo,

therefore, is u@6+a+56+@o (or @), the ¥o (or o) meaning ‘he’ (sue

g 80

§§ 115. 177. 193, under remarks).

The feminine form 29 E%° 1S WS + A

are

+ ¢ +%¢, the ¢99¢ meaning *she

(see ‘e.\q § 1TT)

(¥ o In § 243

R0

might be explained similarly as ©® .+ @4+ %0, but the given expla-

N0)

nation seems to recommend itself.)

10m

In the masculines ©X03v0, BR300, etc. the neuter suffix 3o has been

dropped, and o has been joined, by means of the genitive (see § 130),

The feminine forms ¢~

n

to the original forms &, «Qd, etc. (see § 115)

o3ogs. ete. are 9203

58 etc

)

o

32

250

e

3 o

The neuter plural e. g. of 2930 or %P3, is 29Ty, and this consists

of wef+euphonic v+ euphonic ¢ 4 euy) (see § 136, a); the neuter plural

ort)

e. g. of AR is VAT, ¢ e. A3 (the genitive of i)+ e (see ibid.),

§

53 having taken the place of eng) (¢f. evs)) and 33 in §§ 209. 210).

[:9)

The epicene plural is e. g. %® BTF, 4. €. w4 B+ 4+ »0° and BT,

(i

é. e. aQ3 (the genitive of =mY)4esvs, the

0L 7=

A2 @)

¢ meaning ‘they’ (see e. g.

(1,0

§ 177).

and

Thus the pronominal suffixes of the mentioned so-called adjectives in

it-dig

the ancient and partly in the medieval dialect are 3o, 3y, BV, 8o, WP,

a gl

V), W), BTE.

1n8f0

In the modern dialect the suffixes are partly the pronouns e§c5§, 0530,

the

a It

©3P), WY (or BIYNL), WIB, €. g. c%@zgm (5@%+@cso), d\rac%assg,

d@%sﬂ%, C&@zcéa@ (or C?)@Zé@ﬁ%), z&@%;ﬁda; RE9 Ty (Reg 4-u8), ete.;

z%%&cio (W83, +9R), ete. (see § 124, 4), the pronouns being added to the

othe

Gbou

short original forms (see § 273); partly the pronominal forms o, egs

(=90), B (=0%), W3 (=8T), €. 9. FEPW, ICPRR, ICP WL,

FEP O30T,

a0 §

277. The so-called adjectives or attributive nouns in Kannada are

dist

partly ordinary nouns and partly pronominal nouns.

The first are represented by their short original forms (§ 273), e. g.

VNO; VA,

At least some of the forms of the first class mentioned in

1ou

§ 273 are declined, e. 9. vno?, vRwy, wrond; w3 T, g E, NETD;

300030, 3ReTHRY; ReniFe’; and some of the second class too, for

The

instance @03, 363203, AR, VY.

1nd;

The pronominal nouns are represented by the forms composed of the

short original forms and the suffixes 3y, 3y, etc. They are used also

(0]

Just like ordinary nouns, as will be seen from the following instances:—

W

—0.08

(NOWag

T3¢

SCPACERY 2OBSFFon® (for 20BuSFFones’) sePTes

Con

&30 w90, he who brings about to make known great things even in

an(

short ($£°3E230%, 4. e. in a few words, is) wiser than that man. $¢03 o

SPBIFRY, to make right. e Io B Fo, a man who causes welfare.

Wil

BRGo 8RS, & man who utters pleasantness (4. e. pleasing words).

zo%z)ecﬁs T5% good (and) bad. 0030, 2 Brahmana. wc%oﬁao%é % D303,

si

eminent persons who have (or wear) the jaté. &903:0R BOTIN NEIYT.,

b

rising (from a sitting posture) before elders.

FCPTo VDT WRBIYI,

to make a small thing an extensive one.

¥

BRR 23%&%230330,

g

e

261

e

1815ts

DIV WO T3S

N

a paramour (is) indeed a man sweeter than jaggory.

lura]

SODF3 MoYVT®

can rustics become persons of (greater) ability than I?

hid)

Such compounds as 2.8 837, BR,BR0 (§247,d, 11), VBRI, Bor

10)

@ (ibid. 8) are, therefore, to be translated literally:—a goodness-food

)

(¢.e. a good food), a sweetness-meal (.e. a sweet meal), a largeness-bunch

b

(é.e. a large bunch), the sweetness-sea (¢.e. the sweet or milk sea);

and such as 383 2omo®

0T

3R0030y) werRo (§ 273), a severity-

S 10

it-disease (é.e. a severe disease) of the eyes, a greatness-it-desire (¢.e

D%}’J‘

All these

a great desire), bigness-they-buttocks

(¢. e. big buttocks)

instances bear the character of karmadharaya compounds, as do also

33

W,

the compounds of the three dialects:

okl z%@ez:%ﬂ C%J@cs*@ 8,

NE’o)ﬂ )%>

22

VW)

a littleness-wonder, a greatness-elephant, a bmallness-ﬁshmg hook.

6

In §275 it has been remarked that modern Kannada grammars and

the

other books adduce and use several ordinary nouns as adjectives, e. g

U

09022020000%F, timid

3.0, B, ToB, BT, 33N

FRBTF, AL, TIWY

n}\),

Occasionally a so-called adjective in its neutral form is used as

an adverb, e. g

20D, to burn greatly; &0dzmo 232 8o, to be greatly

disturbed in thought

are

f

XV. On numerals.

1

278. Numerals are declinable bases, and comprise also appellative

¢

nouns of number and words that express indefinite quantity (§ 90).

for

Their declension is given in §§ 122. 131 (¢f. § 354, I, 5), their gender

18

indicated in § 102, 8, g, and their figures appear in § 44

he

1,

The not compounded cardinal numbers up to ten are:—2mQ

Q0B 2, [oREN

INPA)

9, 4, @Oﬁoo

6

50

o)

3

(3, also medlseval) 51 e3e9

oD 1,

D€, 8,

wﬁo éo

)

18

(%'a’o

also medieyv al) 10.

=0

compounded caldmal number consisting of 25 (another form of aodo)

and

g, or ®3y, (see further on in the present paragraph).

1

|

When, up to nineteen, the mentioned cardinal numbers are compounded

with a preceding ©So, or ®ID

10. this =32 or =3y takes the forms

|

56 or ﬁ-(GG

D or B, SO or BAF® (§ 248, 10), except before

?»;50 30

No also mediseval) 11,

%)

Thus we get w3y (¢f. §215,7,d; BRIR

N

SR, dcéo (®R,0B, also medlaeval) 12, S0S0REN (5@ w&%) 13, SOTY

S

e s e

o

)

7) The numbers in parenthesis are such as occur, partly as additional forms, in the

0

modern dialect alone, if ‘also medisval’ is not added

32*

s

252

e —

AV

umﬂ.ﬁ

(ﬁam@%) 14, “a;ﬁojo% (&’@sojg%; also medieval) 15, TdTED (BB

©9¢9; also medieval) 16, naReess (DR, also mediwval) 17, o

oy

N

?\imgj (aé&)zi’

(,Oai,

also medizval) 18, £38,33y, (B38,3,8,) 19.

|

From twenty up to twenty-nine the compounds (a kind of gamaka

for 1

Al

compounds or tatpurushas, § 253, 2, @) have as their first member

0% (§ 248, 2) or xS, which are other forms of »3®s. Thus: vz,

WY

(S

(a3, also mediwval) 20, wmFaRy) (B8x,3R,d) 21, wxnFg,0@

(“a";%dcéo) 22, BTFZY,TIREN (fa";gggdgd@&ﬂg, a*;é@é@‘)» occasionally

kfﬂl‘

?a?.g)_éjﬁo@&ﬁo) 23,

W)

BTEA,TOVY, (BHLTIOY, B IYVY, B,

So0y) 24, BmFgohy (BPZEN) 25, wnFEth (aXERN) 26

RE)

=

BIFELN, BARFGLF (B Be) 27, vxFgmy (aF,de0) 28, anF

(023

~J AL

BR,32,89, (BT BR,T 35 South-Mahratta also EERCT R

2

e =2

N

'&8333

VIO

‘3:?31@5&3&) 29.

P

£80.0

From thirty up to ninety-nine the compounds have as their first members

Vo

500 (§ 248, 3), o0 (¢f. 248, 3, other forms of SoR), ToeF (§ 248, 9),

dia

1€

Seo (other forms of ga@o&), 03¢ (§ 248, 5), e0od (other forms of

il

16 1

©03% ), L (§ 248, 6), 989, e3¢ (other forms of es&9), HCIF (§ 248, 7),

DC¥, d@ (other forms of DES), HEE (§ 248, 8), > (other forms

I0m

these

of D), and 3e&5¢ (§ 248, 9, about which see further on); their

second member is ©3y, or X3y, joined according to the rules of euphony

Wl

(see '§ 215, 7,a. b).

The forms produced are the following:— Sow=3s,

ADLS;

(593%339) 30, aa%é_og (ﬁe)osj'é_og) 40, @0333539 (BNITZY, also mediaeval)

LYV

50, w0, (8LITD, also medieval, ©3ry) 60, DCI L, »CI By

N

(f(n

(

-Hé

e

moq

P

3,) 70, 2833y, (03239, also medieval) 80, 303y, 90, to which

the cardinal numbers from one to nine are added in the same way as to

008 |

BTFEBY, BT B, € g FRTIRR) 31, RTZR, T8, (FRTBR, D02,

200¢

D

39, 3R BRF By, (BT8R, [y B, S0 Z,EE0

2

3v,, the BP9 8,69

ud)

being the genitive, see further on under ZL) 99.

6,00

100 is Zwe9y, to which the other cardinal numbers are suffixed in

W

N

the manner indicated above, e. g. ;SJ@C‘;??»J@;S% 101, 3R&B0Rs 102, SRE3

0

3y, 110, wEI3y3y, 150; but this manner has been generally given

vy

Q

up in the modern dialect, wherein Zwe€3 becomes FpCI=> (the short

the 1

genitive of RREQ, § 120, a, 6, instead of FLEII 4 ), e. g. IREID 2

100

101, gRt5» TOVY 104, S»EI59 aﬁ@aﬁ% 141 antos 'a%é—% 120,

(i

—

253

[US—

BREID ToRTEY oY, 134, SWEI 2903;)3 3, 150, 8RC%9 é@dgﬁ@aﬁ%&égs

3

j

0

R~ (gl 5@5&%@33.@5%339 190.

If 3»e9 is preceded by not compounded numbers, these numbers

naka

for the greatest part appear in another form. The other forms are

mber

DTS¢ (§ 248, 2), @t (for HTRY), e (§ 248, 3), Fog® (for ZoREN),

78

Do (§ 248, 4), o9 (for azw%), €9 03¢ (fox: @oﬁgg, § 248, 5), @D (248, s),

e

eots¢ (for &), HLI (for e, § 248, 1), z.,w%)odo‘ (§ 248, 9), &:a:%o&o

ally

(for 2055:33339), 6. g. zoéé SRE, one 100, 2 TLIR,E0 (’353‘%&%) 200,

é.'ﬁ

SORTRCR (BoBRLN, also medixval) 300, 53@\33_5@&“)0 (SouRLN,

-Ei

sa;i@@r)o) 400, @Oj)v%@\) 500, «CORREN (BIRFLN) 600, :363@&630

A

(DCN[RE, also mediseval) 700, @m&ﬁ@@ﬁo 800, aogj\gsojo@iﬁf}o (?»;3&033

359

SRE) 900, =3y, 8Red 10,00. Observe also e. g. ARRLTD zsa%:ﬁz'agi

248, ﬁooﬁ%ﬁﬂ (for 53&0&"%’293@, Basavapural’_la,) 938y, 360, @Cﬁo\.@&@sa

nhers

2529330, 560.

8,4,

The Kannada language has no own special word for 1,000; the ancient

ng of

dialect uses moAT and oW, the medieval one zAT and zJT, and

the modern one z»N3, mox30 and =zpITy. All these terms are corrupted

8,7)

Orms

from Samskrita :.3555, When not compounded numbers precede it,

their

these numbers (mostly) change their form in the ancient dialect, wiz.

hony

%0° (for ua’g)), DTCF, BT (for osdzé.)), 3399 (for SR, see § 248, 3),

NEY

oo (for DoY), CoIF (for Bwa), (B, only mediaval), ¢ (for

CN), o (for SO P 23, 035° (for 20;5%53_%), Dge (for £3y), BRCF

oy ch)

98

(for Jwes, § 248, 11).

Thus we have, together with the (medizval and)

fhi

Ci

modern forms, the following:—~uega+‘?\>d (see § 215, 7, ¢), (&)sg) pIee))

08 ¢

one 1000, aesorAg (§ 215, 7, 0), @)6633'%206 (ITRIFIDT, also medieval)

2000, 80039 AT (¢f. § 215, 7, ¢; SoREFNT) 3,000, oo AT (mm&m

J{N

\:

28) 4,000, ¥oisn AT (8032 mT) 5,000, (smor 28, medizval, SE30F00)

g%

6,000, aws%%d (2%0F00) 7,000, @522\;6 (§ 215,71, ¢; E20,mONT) 8,000,

u:f%bodsg)?od (uaﬁ%é&e'&aed, also mediaevél) 9,000, 50%0e50AT (aéé_o_oxa&’)d)

ol

11

AR9

10,000, (5\@3:353_%:5@;’)6, also mediseval) 90,000, gResorad (§ 215, 7, ¢;

1760

SR FDDT) 100,000. Some instances of the modern dialect regarding

the use of the genitive of z»d3 will prove useful:——-&;ﬁ% TOVTR aué%

hort

1,0015 %m0 AINTT WS BRESD B3Ry 1,115 BoeeNmaNTmD DTBISP

)

190,

€959 BoRTIY LY, 3,234 ; aa%_%dda FoNTTD BB Eo"D aa%_%?@& 42,548,

B

—

e

254

18 €

100,000 is very frequently expressed in Kannada by Samskrita ow,

4 01

e.q. cm&oe)'gj\cj eﬂo*o% FoVTTo PR, EN 7,05,036, or by its tadbha?&

W

0T, 0. g TPVQORT ¢S 3R F,LNEINT nedonst, 4,96,000 songs;

‘o

e)%%_;jooo é@ﬁ&é&aa@dde&wéﬁéoﬁoﬁ%ﬁ, 4,90,000 immoveable Sivalingas.

each

As shown above, the short forms for aﬁ%, TR, [IREN, oY,

W30y, e8I, DL, W9y, Ty, (BS,) and FRE are W, wof; BT,

oy

BB°, w00

), D[ILF, [T, [P} T, TV

903, BA;

geni

Rdb

eSS, B9, BEIY, HGXF; OB, 0K, VF; IFHE, ITF; ;a (®0), =ow

gan

(BOTF), T (BT), TOIF, T,

abl

abhi

wo® hefore a vowel gets its vowel lengthened, e. g. %Sfaaig, each,

aboy

%BR o, each man, as does QD% e. g. = el AN 10, o9t 12, 83363

Siml

14, 69829& 16; 5500 hefore a vowel becomes 3000355, €. g. Zo00%W T,

al

§0

200080, 6, Foo0dyecss 21 (see § 248, 1. 2. 3). Such compounds do

of

not occur in the modern dialect.

2

53D 3y, 9, literally means ‘one-ten’, ¢. e. one to ten or one before

ten

Regarding 305 3, ancient grammars state that 30535 i8 @

plur

substitute (3désa) of 2.x3 (Sabdmanidarpana siitra 190; Sabdanusasana

sitras 90. 361; Nagavarma sfitra 166, formed in order to distinguish 90

nstg

~ A

from 9; see § 248, 9); according to them Zwss¢ probably signifies ‘the

N

ninth’, and 393,38y, ¢the ninth ten’.

But one may think that 3ezs°

is another form of 308 or 23, (§ 253, 3, which appears also as 23mF),

rem;

meaning ¢point’, ‘upper’, first’, ¢prior’, so that sz g,, would signify

0%

‘the upper ten’, or ‘the ten that is foregoing’ (one hundred).

A

The compounded numbers from 11 to 19, having @3, (B3y,) at their

beginning, might be called dvandva compounds (§ 250), as they are

oy

formed by means of addition, requiring an ‘and’ between; but Késava

Voy

In those from 20 to 100,000 the

10

terms them dvigu compounds (§ 248, 10).

first member of the compounds denotes that the second member is to be

added to itself as many times as it (the first member) indicates.

This

;

7

too is a sort of addition which in course of time was called multiplication.

Késava classes the numerals from 20 to 100,000 also with the dvigu

T8

Iyl

compounds.

dugy

The mentioned multiplication is used likewise e. g. in TRTREY 4, T

), 36 (see

Bo3 (=T ) 10, o028 6, w03) 3R 10, 23, Tow

3

oW, etc. above); TR, however, in an additional way, means also

7 (245) and WM 11 (5+6),

Further when the meaning of ‘or’

25

O%

N

is expressed, o30C3»,E9 denotes also 2 or 3, HTRSw 2 or 5, TS0

J

hava

4 or 8, &

8¢9 6 or T

wg o0 10 or 8

Besides

compounds like

JIHY

2 B

DTBTRY, SR T[ORE, B3

mean also ‘one and one

gas

‘two and two

¢three and three

‘ten and ten

in a distributive sense

)"JJ

each one, etc. (§ 306 a; ¢f. § 303, 3)

AWy

A—(

If a number is added to Zwedy, it may be done by means of the

500;

genitive in the ancient dialect too, as would appear from Késava’s instance

)W

)R"b

SPL9LY =3y, (110) that forms the compound ZFeeIsx3,

(§ 244),

gamakasaméasa (§ 253, 2, a); instead of this full form of the genitive its

abbreviated form F®»g95n (4. 6. B0EI 4+ ) came into use, as we have seen

acl

above under

[REN

The . genitive zpooH o =ZedUges of zDT is

)

similarly used; see above under zad3.

That the genitive may be used

Vo 0’

also when a number is added to =3y (aééo) follows from the instances

S do

of the modern dialect quoted above:— @5 3 E580530.30

Q% é@ T8

29, 3RTZ.LBRRZZ), 3N

;30 éJa 0B

\ o)

30

15 &

That cardinal numbers were optionally used in the singular and

plural (§ 131) in the ancient

dialect appears

from the following

Sand

InStances: — w ) TOWY, OF 2R IO, NY*

DTBC3 OF DTBTNNYS

ESICN)

h 90

3

RPN Or T3 RGNS

the

ﬁ (3N

In connection with nouns of any

gender the cardinal

numbers

0T

remain unchanged, e. g. Zo03 ﬁcacg o0 N€5C§‘, FOOT S[IRNY*;

)

yolly

OCRY WA:

wngx)N_@;)d 303 O

aSm“:Jo SReTo,

[

DR su B i f

DOT

3

0T adnons (¢f § 102,8,9)

their

Concerning the occasional place of cardinal numbers observe e.g

are

ORSps @, for one day, (daily, ¢f. § 303, 1, a, foot-note), BRIpILID

AL

in one day, 3T0® 8#C, & hundred years

) the

o he

The modes of expressing ‘times’ in the multiplication-table (303 NE S®

This

N

T, ;Sof\?‘{%ﬁ THe ¢57) nowadays are two.

The first mode, used in

el

100

Mysore, 1s done by puttmg the multiplicand in the nominative and the

lﬂg I

multiplier in the locative formed from the short genitive (without the

augment €9) by means of & (see e.g. §109,a, 7) for instance

20

NOBHRT

OB

2X1=

2

(see

Nelr]of< 1N

SRR

2XK2=

4

DO SRISISMEM:cN

2>/4:.4—-

8

als0

ed’

e DV

zswédca’o 6 7 =42

for

256

The second mode, used in South-Mahratta, is done by giving a final

e (4. e. the form of the short genitive instead of e22) to the multiplicand

and putting the multiplier in the locative formed by «d or & i.e.

03

BRI+ o, ©04 o, exceptionally in its fuller form of e€IS3, 4. e. ¥E2O4+

YY)

For instance:

TR

wdﬁméeee%

13

adéd@n

RB) Q)Q&

a0~

e

WiV

el m,rawi,

el asae%e%

o) £99

&

N33 B3 S

CEEY

origl

FOR

sylla

SRR ‘?35 3

aﬁo.raessdqi

e

or he

STIRE 39H esi

&,;5:30593

RANAL) e;mai

&aﬁm%'

0

(V1N

NN

aae%dé’

&

E15) @03%

IR 393

(tow

epice

DE moi

aa%ég ;53353»

aa%é:)s

from

039% ejo?% i

w%g @o&%m

aa%:is’ooh%.

It is to be remarked that in South-Mahratta also such forms as

mucl

§ense

BoREI7e 208, oo, SU8, T

99, ORS, SO TOVY, VYOI T[T,

%

e

W03 m%% are used.

suhst

2, The ordinal numbers are formed by suffixing esdox tyo the cardinal

()) c/

numbers in the three dialects, e. g. &%ﬁoﬁo, first, >3RI, second,

(uenf

there

RoReI863y, third, aae)&é’om, TOPALINOD (FOTAHIRCKR), SHLIRY,

@050%6@3033, In the modern dialect Swzesc3s, of the noun B[Behw.,

5&8&1}

1s frequently used instead of 2;0__&;))(:3030. Instances are:-—ga%a"cﬁo%&do,

S

oA Froro, HRM IRFo, BFI TR (VR BoF), SHTY

instaﬁr

030 239n.

1ygh

termg

In the ancient dialect ‘he’, <she’, <it’, <they’, expressed by suffixing

Vi

@o (4o, €. g. § 115), we (e. 9. § 177), & (e. 9. § 122), wof (e.g. §177),

N*‘Ci

w9 of (§134), & (§136), e.g. 20%530330, the first man, HTRIWC00, the

Ay |

second man; ao%a"ojgg;@, the first woman, HS@ESc30ys the second woman,

>

.

Plur

SIRCIRNK0%e, T R030%° ; ua‘g‘aéojgcsg, the first thing, etc., HTBIDITY

d

(1}

1

2OBRO300F, the second persons, =3 Ic3oTF; obdcéioﬁo%‘éc‘, the second

u’\,@

women, FoRCIRCRP o°, £3,3c3P 0°; 8 R, the first things, ete.

W hat

—

2567

P

fimg]

In the (medizeval and) modern dialect the pronouns 53, @33, w9

cand

SF, 8530

370, @) are used as suffixes, e.g. ToREIVCIT, RIS

(A

o ;’mo

the third man

ﬁdﬁwﬁw\) NQ;

SOREIJ 0T

SOREIRTS T

o)

SIREIR T T 50@&930&)@ (s&@&ﬁﬁ“us‘ﬁ\ro

The modern dialect often changes the suffix @303 into ege (ef.

]

COIN

T o

%

§ 130, ¢, genitive), e. g. Wi ¢ TOR, SJPTUNe T

T, OB

)N Ty

EIRNET, ¢

ij) R‘)Gﬁv, 0353\(53

Examining the meaning of @803 we come to the conclusion that the

original form was ©g, 4.e. g (of eno §176) and the formative taddhita

~

syllable

oJ

(§ 243, A, 2), originally meaning ‘a state of having become

or being

to which e, the sign of the genitive (§ 130), was suffixed

9,

The declension, in the singular, of the nouns @3>

D, BRBY, YRS,

Q80 which express indefinite quantity or are ©=coo New @:)Fﬁeouéu ongs

(to which .o & also belongs, see §§ 90. 266), appears in § 122,

See the

epicene plmal of the appellative nouns of indefinite quantity derived

from them. under No. 4

©Q8y, that much, so much as that (z933sf)

REN

this much, so

much as this (faojags), uQ3o, so much as this (in an intermediate

5 a8

sense, DIT3F), HVIV how much (—3-03355) occur in the ancient and

T,

medieval dialect

in the medieval one

(ChS)

BN

AR are often

substituted for them, as is generally done in the modern one (§122

b, ¢)

The substitutional forms

@Oju\)

SR

BEE

Oy are also fre-

rdinal

coﬂd,

quently used in the two last mentioned dialects

In the modern one

<

o,

there are likewise &) 6, dvjo e3839; DR, BHedy; D8

The Sabdanu-

N

sasana introduces (under its sutras 238. 441) eﬁom

faow

PONY,,

0J Y

0%

90300,

SR,

AR, A0 as belonging to the ancient dlalect

Some

)U&

0o,

1nstances are: — Q3 TIVO

so much time as that:

DB

how

A0Y

much land: axkyo BHR3

so much time as this

BORY, 32 oNnY®

SO many

terms as those

DR, B[R OF OV, Somni%y, how many houses

fixing

WY, B3, etc., like the cardinal numbers (see No. 2), also suffix

177),

9R03), €. - BABNRY, B3I

c)&égﬁoi)

%,3030, and to this (besides

., the

any noun) the same pronominal forms and pronouns in the singular and

A,

plural, e. g

CHEReo

)

a man of that or such a place, or state, or

degree

22380300, a man of this or such a place, or state, or degree

wﬁ" )

QSR Go, a man of this intermediate place, etc

DJZI0300, @ man of

ec()nd

what place, or state, or degree

TR oW

25ABR O30

R, 803030

33

258

B R,Z0503), ON,N3TRY: 0353;3

0B%y; wF A0dny or Q%ﬁedo; SR

No

0N

and

4,

Ancient appellative nouns of number of which a few instances in

nar

their epicene nominative plural have been given in § 119, are e. g

wWFo Oor

ZQQJFO one man

WWFP® O WDFP*,

one womanj;

DWFD* Or

'ao,Fc‘ two men or women; 50T OF [0R ?5?%36 three men or women;

wor

J[OVTS OF T TFEYS

four men or women:

09030, 0°

five men or women:

CTTL,

S1X men

or women

8 o8

or

€I of

seven men or women

:

»

3. 0°; ero mﬁo o

wam o or Noi’)rﬁo [

RRDFTE;

TOADETY: — PP

A

A

%

d o

3 SFTF, ;SoJa:,Séo TP TOE, eﬁ“f)oséo DB aics€ (¢f § 272, 2)

The medieval dmlect uses e. ¢. wwro, WWFes, and also 2

0 0L H2RONEDS

J

2wrof and % 0°;

T30 0°;

D) ucg

9039, C°%;

Q)ou —3 06

w::s

LR, 0°

(fm

10

202,

8,20, BV

oggu’aﬁda or

el o)

The modern dialect has 220 o

]

See

also

TOs

[T

290303y Or

03030, T

3300 DEEEE T

Cd T

3

00§

88 310; 1: 811, remark

Frequently the modern dialect, and occasionally also the medieval

one, express such appellative nouns of number by adding =08 (or wgEW)

persons, to cardinal numbers, e. g. [oREI [0

three persons oY

300, W30 T0Q, (2830, WRTY)

(]t

Other ancient appellative nouns of number are Fowo

T T

TOWT', BT, T

oot (of D,

T (Of To3y), Some men oL, women

E‘(pl |

of. § 90; § 248, 12, and as to form P[pRZo of in § 273), many or several

STV

men oOr women

In the medieval dialect they are Fewos

B30T

Q

BOTE

nd in the modern one

u@éd‘

[ADK

F TS

W

LTS

BOWTE

SISTAIOM

BT,

In the modern dialect Fo =9 or FoF) BWI

DO

a“m@ or oy w3t may be used instead of : @‘Sdo ete.

Ised

|

%

The ancient appellative nouns of indefinite guantity in their epicen

4

plural, derived from 235, @RI, M), 2V, 2o B (see under No. 3),

N

\)fs)

are 2o, SO many men or women as those, ©Qwgof, sO many men oOr

R

women as these (0QTF) WD, how many men or women OO D0°

(the” = being eupbonic, see § 266), Qvof all men or women, all of

which are found also in the medizval dialect with the exception of

in the forms of DT

203 (¢f. § 272 under No. 2)

Only oo of

and He» B, appears in the modern one

259

H

The epicene nominative plural of eﬁ;ﬁ% and faﬁé (see above under

No. 8) in the modern dialect is @%do, sO many men or women as those,

€S 10

and fa;%m, so many men or women as these. Instead of & oo, how

b

many persons, 03;3’& o—jo‘% or @@’gj a0 18 used.

01

279. By suffixing 3o to the short form of a cardinal number (§ 278, 1)

men

words are formed in the ancient dialect that express ‘time’ or ‘times’, e. g.

men

%W330F, one time or turn, once; =x.30r, two times, twice; SoRSor, ToR3y,

.

men,

aiaoaﬁoé, ﬁooo&)é, three times, thrice; gaeBé; 29039

b

I

aoajgboﬁ’oé 3302)0?330&; [PPF; meANer. For instance 6‘3\)%@6%\@&330? $F9

d:ﬁoﬁgo, for the letter =35 once the letter 3 is used.

A

In the medieeval dialect we find 23or, 2»530& (for &,33?) and @

(for 3yF), and in the modern one &”'5%; (See § 212, 1; ¢f. § 306, b.)

)

In the ancient dialect there are formed also @e0¢ (from sogt of

_;g

also

Fo5y, see 278, 4), some times, and Zodor (from Boo® of Zoy), many

or several times, e. g.

FRZVFONIT &9 T30 F

&va

55%;53?0 SRMIEAD) £ea§§)de’o’o I

N Uv) y

FIRIBFT u@;ié%, 28R, I

OR0F Boed A3, 4T, o ﬁﬁﬁ@%o I

(See translation in § 258.)

N\)j

The 3 is one of the taddhita suffixes (§ 243, 4, 19), and only in

course of time got the meaning of time or turn.

=0

WY

In the ancient and mediseval dialect ¢time’ or ¢times’ used to be

JJJSJ’

expressed also by Zpes (FeC%) or w90, €. g. W) BRLK, TR RRLYF,

pal

)\eﬁ

Wy W90, 20 2390; in the modern one the terms used are ©33F,

66

0J \ )

290, 803, Rod, R&F, Y, T, AT, etc., e g. WP BEF, HTRI A3F.

)V

<7

N

280. To form words expressing ‘fold’ the ancient dialect frequently

0,

used s0&, a fold, suffixed to the short forms of cardinal numbers

(§ 278, 1), e. g. vz3or®, two-fold, twice as much, ZoRT[ord or JoRZH

1060

(e SoR+B), three-fold, three times as much, Tew,& (4.6 TS +

0.9

S0&), 25053355 (6. e BOIF+TR), VENTR (4. 6. ©E+ 0\, § 215, 7, by,

en OF

DRDFB, TIADFE.

Y

A

Instances are:—

A

PSR ¥ WWBR TNV

a’da%mm, WTIO R0 FORIB, W |

DL,

idmé R0 TIY,R, DT

B OR od),® drie:3 0BT Pevo || a terrible man of the heroes

§3%*

260

of fame on earth (he was): twice as much as Arjuna of eminent valour, thrice

0Jv

as much as Bhima, four times as much as Karna, five times as much as Krishnpa.

(ar

(Cf. § 343, 3.)

() e

we

[IIFR WOR, BReWNR

WE

SRR, WeFRITBIoNo, WROIHE, |

[CN:

BRIFR, dAno BY =d

¢

ATIFE QOAST JIR WA BHPS S, 88r0m0 || Nripatunga (was) in

&

ral

liberality on earth surpassing Bali two times, Dadhiéi three times, also Indra, if

cor

one considers, a hundred times, (and) indeed also Sibi a thousand times. (Cf.

§ 343, 1.)

(M

In the medieeval and modern dialect we find BB (for s30F &),

0|

ARESSEA (for [opTZor@), in the medieval one FHZFR, SRENFE,

abu

@9@&35053, and in the modern one 53_39;50@,

5

(=4

To form multiplication numbers in the modern dialect =) and ux

&3

807

(§ 278, 8) are frequently used, e.g. 350_3&&& (3032, + ORY), again so

J

At

much as that, 508 =y, again so much as this, or aﬁ&;&’& (2R + o=

2>

‘e

B ) @dﬁ;ﬁgj (NTBI+ @z;&‘&), twice as much as that, W@ﬁgy four

times as much as that; e. g. 308 ]y, ene or raaisé »nw, as broad again,

Ly

aﬁgda&f);\i& o3, thrice as long (¢f. § 310, 1).

(ui

XVI. On adverbs.

W

281.

In § 212 lists of adverbs (particles, avyaya and nipata) have

bl

been given, and in § 102, 9 their so-called gender has been adverted to.

s

Késava calls such as are particularly used to modify the action of a verb

Exp

<kriyaviséshanas’, and gives the instance 3w0 =e&%0, explaining it by

é%ﬁoaéﬂaégcjg OBN DwlGo. In § 277 it has been remarked that some

ady

adjectives or attributive nouns in their neuter forms are used as adverbs.

thaf

It remains to be stated that in the ancient, medieval and modern

of -

dialect adverbs are frequently formed by adding es™, ¢having become’?),

e. g. BOTZIDN or ABwerx =N, faultlessly; ;’%dsisah %ﬁa)o sg-@cg\)

vert

1) The author thinks that this @A originally was, at least often, @73, ‘so that it becomes

or became or is’ (¢f. § 212, remark 2).

This, certainly, is the case in our present Sabda-

gen

NS

manidarpana’s W3T 3TN JPRTo, he made (a thing) level (by crushing), and Rgd TN

ko

NF

300wo, he trampled (a thing) into a mass of small particles, wherein the forms wimsmﬁ

W

and *‘si%ﬁ:aﬁ only give the required meaning.

Observe also the modern instance THX F

E:

@B BATRY WHY ?fj?épsaﬁ ’aédz)d %Ja% 23030, in which only ?Czéj;:arﬁ can give the meaning

°%

intended, viz. it is proper to keep the books and clothes so that they be (or remain) very

the

clean.

1t 0

—

261

Pe—

hrice

5380, one who loves constantly; ST, =N R 0EP3med, one who

shna,

cannot speak distinctly; H0man 2eBRoF)R, to distress greatly; ABAS

zéga&ﬁ FORE, 3, the trees bear fruit abundantly; ﬁéoé 28 030RY §55{z§3¢

WBY aéga&ﬁ ,;—J@%og@gﬁ, our master fosters us very well; »%9330 Z39

TN

S

B3R, to speak properly; s

), WPIDN SPAR, he beat him soundly;

\ e

2s) in

ﬁ@%oﬁs‘af\ 3eNERY, he cried out loudly; desy 3e3,men SBWw L, thou

I, if

walkest quickly; 2= BBy dogd e wdWza,E, your boy writes

(0.

correctly; :i)g%j;;aﬂ %3 ¢3¢0, (you) must read distinctly; oﬂjaeﬁ'g;saf\

sergy, she walked becomingly. Others are $50¢53a3s9n, covertly; Sooa)

F@),

=5on, chiefly; 313 d5on, exceedingly; mogadeemen, generally; RedHman,

o)

)3

abundantly; etc

From the foot-note of § 166 it appears that in the ancient dialect e9o3ss

Y

(=9h) and & (=) were once suffixed to nouns of direction, e. g.

3o0%y and oWy, in order to make them adverbs, became Bo0TaF, 0T

] S0

A

o3¢, meaning ‘southward, toward the south’, and ToRBIF, TIREIR,

J)

i

ceastward, toward the east’.

T

Adverbs are expressed in the three dialects also by the instrumental,

6. §. DTFY Do, optionally; I8 8o, xﬁ@sem;ﬁu, gladly, willingly; 2¥erido,

quickly; eme‘sgxb;g, merrily; SopE3<HT, foolishly; :doguc‘:)g, happily.

To express ‘very’, ‘in a high degree’ before adverbs 3, wwJ, WXY,

2o may be used (¢f. § 275), e. 9. ©& BZHTTeN, very far; e 30320TT

have

=of, in a very formidable manner; w=% TR, BTN, very cruelly; w0

Boedsyen, very nimbly.

About the use of repetition of adverbs to

ed 10

yerd

express ‘very’ see § 307, a.

D

y

Kesava calls adverbs also avyayalingas (§ 90, likewise avyayapadas),

§0me

adverbial declinable bases, his reason for doing so being the circumstance

»mb“

that in a few instances adverbs show case-terminations, as S08 g (genitive

odern

of 508), ©g,65% (ablative of wg &),

me

1)

When adverbs are in connection with verbs, they generally precede the

ol

J

verh immediately or the subject and its predicate, undergoing no change of

000168

gender and number, e. g. 3.0 SPRZo; BRENTLIo BeLJo (see § 327);

Sabda

dRFTo W 0; %% To FodTo; DR WYY o, R WY ¥, R WEII T;

Pl

zﬁ;j Ll

ar

$03, RReRBo, T3, INCABYS, TG, INCRRITV; BSRCOTRPTF O w;éo;

9

=

500 QTFTF BORTT; eﬁ‘e&ﬁe&doo Specos. If something is put between

"e'mlﬂa

the subject and predicate, it is to be done so that the adverb stands where

ﬂ) yory

it clearly modifies the sense of the predicate, as in the following instance: --

P

262

e

I

23Pe0TR ﬁeﬁiageojocs ¥ T3S, VTG SIE 5%333\}3_963%'66. In a stanza,

are

however, the position may be sometimes chosen at the convenience of its

an al

author, as Snu¥ho FTFTY BonenTRy BZOIZF wRYodwo IFeoF

more

JgeNo, homogeneousness takes place faultlessly everywhere in those

ef

De1or

well-known couples (of vowels, e. g. & ¥).

;ﬁaz DF0F, ®To0o BNJ

suffl

TWEho J¥Y Do, instead of the generally known letter = the letter =

|

may be optionally used.

10D

282.

Regarding the adverbs which have been called postpositions by

1nst

i

us and regarding the adverbs of place and time (§ 212, 2. 3. 6) the following

(lt.

instances may be given in which they govern the genitive:——a‘oddé:%o

30

¢

(3083 ©3,ed0), from the tree; 8398, 0° (9, @8 o), to their side;

jump

TOFRR,B (TooFs 9.9908), like Karna; A0ods, (ndo3y 8, like a hill;

knoy

3908, (398 ©a,), like young shoots; RS, like me; w90IE Jper,

uadg

like Bali; wgrger, in the meaning; 0339, in the tree; »zFY, in him

{rom

soang=n, like (one’s) words; ewde (w3 o), from the village; 37

|

300, in front of him; 230308 (P03 »), from fear; P3RS, with a

prong

parrot; JZR,EN, with thee; Z[ocdnye, in the house; JedH¥n, in the

infini

water; Keoowr T¥A, under a large banyan tree; =F &a;, after him;

Telat]

owd BREIA, outside the village; eTzZoRess =g, before the palace;

{

28030 30¢93, on an elephant; keQBO Fpeer, like the ocean; &I &N,

<=

VYNT

like him; 3@es3035oe3, on the other side of a stream; aéef)ad 5080, round

of 1]

a ripe fruit; FvzY DOONNE [ooced, some years ago; ﬂéﬁéd@;z)ﬁ, with

(15

the army; ege9 308508, on account of that; @z Zw®d, with him;

Y

al

3’;);)303’3 Rona, with the father; ©es33 &)ﬁfg, concerning God; 2369 JR3oF,

6\

except this; SO ®3,J, near me, about me; 2pNeo X T, near the door;

that

Ton,8 3,0, near a lover; fagsas =00, till to-day; ra%é 3x7T, till to-

S0t

day; FoF DIRAF 32903, after some days.

See §

Instances in which some of them govern the dative, are: — z‘bég@oﬂ

g

Ingy

oo, in front of a bindu; %0a3o0R =&oen, before elder people; &7,

(

6365% w2800 Be3, the country beyond his country; =8=eqas ge3on

ap)

2003, 1infront of the theme of the negative; Fog SToRAPR To00%,

some years ago; émiaoﬁd% 3o0ed, before bringing forth; menmsp

Cf ¢

osRweRIn, on account of washing the feet; zodrndwn,es T, on account

/

of battle;

ORTR

3

exorio, on account of that; sgjr;g-sg_ ®3,3, near the

(10 i

mountain.

fally

r—

263

——

i,

Instances in which some of them govern the instrumental (. e. ablative),

[ it

are:— Q08 53060 VDR BRI [oeg wo, & province beyond the province of

NLOR

an ally; PRWRT #9013, below the waist; w03 SANS from that (time),

ho:e

more remote than that; esze%o SN from that (time); 3 9o BN,

ol

before that time; aaaﬁwgsaqgéb’aﬁ?_rgﬁ?o ?gﬁo, behind the noun- and verb-

Yl

suffixes.

See § 352, 4 a.

Instances in which one of them is used with the dative of verbal

nouns combined with g, (another form of g, the termination of the

5

i

instrumental ¢. e. ablative; ¢f. 343, 2), are: — e=F0 WIIRRE,T, [ooE,

‘)g

(lit. he of the coming-to it-from before), before he comes. zagy maLN

7 LUV

aﬁd%&g 390023, (lit. he of the jumping-to it-from before), before he

\ldG,

jumps. o3593wR é%?cﬁd%&a_io w0023, (lit. any one of the having known or

hill;

hil

knowing-to it-from before), before anybody knew or knows.

93383

e,

zsadcé)%#_ug 5300023, (lit. he of the not having come or not coming-to it-

him

from before), as long as he did not or does not come.

"

Instances in which they are used immediately in connection with nouns,

tha

pronouns, so-called adjectives, adverbs, inflected forms of the verh, imperatives,

the

infinitives (§§ 187. 188), past participles (§ 154 seq.), and the so-called

il

relative participles (§§ 175-186), are: —

ace

SRR

@) ag ;3\@&@@6’ like Indra. vR,3380, up to this time.

gl

333, for three days. ZoRFH0E, as far as the sea. 33199, O directions

jund

of the compass! a3, O Rima! $3w,, grandeur indeed! 5303w,

with

(is it) an elephant? o 3 zous3e, even that manner.

See § 287, 3

regarding numerals.

him

A\

b)

338, even he.

e3¢, even you! e3z803y, even of him.

T3¢,

Joor

that very thing.

23¢30e, what (could) this (be)? 283 odse3dwe, why

990

] to

sorrowful thoughts? Cf. §§ 260. 283. 312.

About o, wvo, &V

pJ

see §§ 284. 285.

¢) %?.fgi), (is it) black? ©9Z, (it is) even white! R®e3¢, difficult

o

4

indeed! ev233:3¢, (could it be) proper?

o

d)

one, just so; (or could it be) thus? &enRadse, in this very

o

JO?,g

manner; (or could it be) thus? ws ¢=mone. %%56@0, am not I ruined?

& 29D 1.2.5: § 300 3.4,

=

5

()

) 2BoNe0REIToNS, could this poverty have befallen you ? Fe¥3,

ouib

the

do you not ask? wz@E°33%, did he behave dishonestly ? @5 Swe, did he

fall? BeBdDSwe, did I beat? W T, have you come (in questioning

e

264

————

politely)?

Lerud ege, do you go?.

YERTIORE TR FeoSwem,, would

3

(one) ask for a tale at the time of churning? =[oRB WO R WY IR

11 01¢

538,339, does a fool know the firm devotion of wisdom? T&A LpedeR?

(bey)

BT BHT eLP Moy, should I go to the fold? that remained {ar behind.

findin

%, come to see! FKecyBwe, shall I say? zeOAR,

not fo

j) ﬁf)QC% ?.Qg)

®e3, protect, lord ot the universe! Fedn

FASND)

SRV

hear

hear

Ak

N0

O man'!

LT

gBudenozome, Fwne, O elder sister, give me a drop of

8 lon

honey (the & being here used in addressing a female, ¢f. 283)

2oNe,

2® e5ode, O younger sister, come here!

he), i

(e

g) To® (DoWy+w), when (he, she, it) sings or sang, when (they)

f

Jess

sing or sang

mo&03y, when (he, she, it) speaks or spoke, when (they)

or

speak or spoke

e (w4 wer), when (he, she, it) eats or ate,

when (they) eat or ate

SRS wadny, it is not allowed to speak at all

Regai

Al

TRSERBo, when (it) was destroyed

BReBR@o, when (he) spoke

10 an

wISRRER, directly when (he) came (see § 365)

0

esA\030¢. having indeed

k) ®D2,A03s, having even caused to confide

dialec

become.

Qo e, Dot standing (or waiting) at all.

SweRz e, not seeing

About eve and

NNJV

at all (about the ees see the end of this paragraph).

negat

enp see §§ 286. 287, s.

“g

§) $0030 30LIRenRweRR B, (lit. pearls and pepper corns of the

of en

having been tbxeaded thus) as if pearls and pepper corns were threaded

ﬁe) 20832

T,

o)

mode

(together)

(lit. of the having won or of the winning after),

alter

after having won or after winning

T Al (@%%Fwd—{— 80)

wWeI e

(lit. of the having worshipped-from after), after (he, etc.) had worshipped.

%

the g

EAR W mon, (lit. of the having been or of the being fit thus), as

was or is fit (about =R, ¢f. §§ 298, 5; 300, 2).

zos 308, (lit. of the

Wy

having come or of the coming after), atter coming.

ooxaezs 3S.ed, after

(uant

going;

of the having seen then),

when (he, etc.) saw.

fem&h

p) n,. (Lt

eTaT~ )

9, (llt “of the having become or of the coming then), when (he, etc.)

What

became or when (he, etc.) becomes

S08% Spees, as if (he, ete.) made

or makes

HROORO

T8YRoo, when (it, etc.) dispersed (see § 365)

dre

when (he

etc.) enters or when (we

you

they)

enter (see § 365)

W

SooN030Ton

s no, till (or so that he, etc.) might give (see § 365)

0 Wh(

asw?m e TITSON.

WTITIN,

when (he,

etc.)

when (it) is finished

g

comes or when (we, you, they) come.

%é&o BRRS Tt BTEY,R,

(ogg ,

he is likely to be ruined. Sog=300,30=8,,

so that (it) enters the mind.

A3 A\

573033

sR=xd, till (he, she, it) obtains or till (we, you, they) obtain

L))

P —

e

265

ould

33z, till (he, etc.) becomes or till (we, etc.) become

B3N WA

W

)

;

in order to drink

ooORIS gpewf, so that (he, etc.) listens or so that

<9

{

(they) listen

NE,3 i, (lit. of the not having found or of the not

1na

finding thus), so that (he, etc.) was not found or so that (we, etc.) were

B

not found. [ReVEZS

so that (it) did not or does not pain

92 ®O

Eal

259003

wQSE3, at the time that Aja and Hari had not been born

] of

30028, as long as (he, etc.) does not come or (we, etc.) do not come or

A

ALY

as long as (he, etc., we, etc.) did not come

en$R 3, if (he, ete.) is (or

be), if (we, etc.) are (or be)

903, if (he, etc.) measures (or measure),

if (we, etc.) measure,.

BedR Rw3Ior, unless (he, ete.) prays (or pray)

hey

hey

|

unless (we, etc.) pray

SRE Beor, unless (he, etc.) does or makes

(or do or make), unless (we, etc.) do or make

Cf. §§ 363. 364

a

e

al

Regarding the subjunctive see §§ 287, 5; 314

About the different meanings of the adverbs of question as specified

iOke

in ancient grammars see Dictionary, and also § 283

Occasionally a euphonic e is used in the mediseval and modern

Jeed

dialect to suffix the o or & of emphasis, . g. WCPFS, RIS, T 30 S

¢ing

In the

and

IT03S, BRRS, BRARBe (¢f. the o before enp in §§ 285. 286)

negative participle of the modern dialect this & appears also as eves®

e. 9. RRERRS (4. €. JNTT 4 wd), TRARRSE (4. €. TRRT + VL)

The '3

the

aled

of emphasis in combination with euphonic e may take the form of 3 in

modern poetry, e. g. W T O, wBEDBISO (¢f. § 109, b, ¢, instr.; § 362,

ter)

Y

after c).

E

) )Gd

283. Some peculiar instances of the modern dialect regarding the use of

the adverbial suffixes » and %, added to the interrogative pronouns Qg

as

z

the

WRIPNT, GIONRY, odve=sey and the interrogative noun of indefinite

giter

quantity o)ﬁo (§ 278, 3), are:—x e, what? eh? (used in calling to a

female or askmg a female, e. g. HIJe, ¥o9,? 0Re, 3oNe? ¢f. § 282, f);

oW

et

what, eh? i. e. whatsoever (e. g. S, V3¢ BTD);

SH3we, what? (used in asking males contemptuously); O! (used in

pade

addressing males, e. g. DRRe, ﬂ@e&’)é‘?) O what? what could it be? (e. g-

IO

365)

Wiy z&@cs Be3pe? Zwe? esmas TR o SR S8 ToKRIBA);

0 Wha,t‘? I do not know (e. 9. question: ReCPR FORToNSHE? answer:

mﬁ,

DRRe? or question: FHAR Hudwe? answer: HZ0e?); O what? one

eft)

does not know what? é.e. something one does not know (e. g. Q8we &N

5'\/"

R R0; & FToRT TORAINFNR ARWE BREBA FREN

DRINC WwRY FToORR

ulﬂd

e

.—oe)omf\)

34

oo

e

266

e |

o3sa383we, O what? 4. e. something one does not know, a certain (object,

with or without a.,m e.g. o3a30Pe &3, a certain play; o300 2,.;-53

and

BeTeOtd); oﬁsaﬁ&@e RresFwee, O

who? 2. e. a certain man, a certam

¢

woman (generally with 2. 8, 2.9, €. ¢. (3ITDRe W2

RIDTBRE

1nfo

W Po; see remark under § 292);

I

o3sodwe, O who? 4.e. a certain person, somebody (with or without

Anur

2023V, €. §. B SWoRIRY, 0300Re THY TR

R580e ¥, TN, 03D

W

Bee 200 B3R WRY Reo TREA 00Ry, TR BY);

o

ddwu

QRWe, O how many? how very many! very many! (e. 9. Fog Soon

e B3 RPN DRRW,C

quee

ngy SAREe TN ORW,0 FORRALRY, SRIZ.S

BEPBNTH BT, 3 ).

mms 30083 @&@e wRTY BT B 3,8); O how

stone

and

much or many! one does not know how much or many (e g. 8 IBEFIN

au\ra ¢ D3IB T %?&) 0.

TR BRBVTIN TR TONINTY TN IRR,C

b

and

EB'fm emwaafqadoé 3)

Concerning questions in general in the same dialect it may be stated

\

here that in such questions as vy IR 3R¢, is this thine? vy dFRexd

&0

the ¢

may be used. The suffixed 9z may also become JZwe, e. g TOOY;

AWy

S0 Redwe, did he give four Annas? ?3%?735 o5 Sedwe, did she rise early

in the morning? At the same time, in common conversation, the sign of

then

‘EMQ)H

question is sometimes entirely omitted and the question shown by the

tone of the voice, e. g. é@eeﬁ? Rwenoss, R, does he go to the garden?

Mags

e FPR0Z, T, does he give the (promised) money? ¥ wgoxTv, Will

I

9

they come to-morrow? If there is an interrogative in the question, the

A

question simply is e.g. RBozgn, D3I IR s P& w3 B3, O Hutéa

z

g

what play do you like? See w®zo in § 243, remark

regarding 3

I

o353, ete. §§ 265. 271

regarding questions in general § 356, 1I, 12

y

W

284. Of the conjunctions mentioned in § 21

5, four, viz. €90, Vo

0%

ev, e, are postpositions (§ 212, 6)

ang-

First they serve to unite words, which uniting is called samuélaya

dw

The way of doing so is called also umuvidhi (4. e. um + vidhi, the u after

Spey

um being euphonic), ¢the copulative method or rule

(¢ §

In this respect e9o and evo are suffixed to case-terminations of words

C()mp

except in' the genitive (see § 351, remark)

In the nominative and

instrumental evo alone is used; and again eno alone is suffixed to the

accusative, in which case it is inserted before the case-termination

In

oig

Jasmy

e

]

267

These rules about ¢so

Jock

the locative o is generally preferred to evo

i

and evo apply to the ancient and mediseval dialect

fain

o and eve express ‘and’, the first o or evo being not translated

%00

into English

Instances regarding the nominative are:—gIoRvo STRI SRv0 MTIF)o

hout

200 B®TBmvo, Hari and Hara

Arjuna and Abhimanyu and Drona.

)

236w, Boo ﬁmeﬁ doo, Jinéndras and Ganéndras.

FeZONFoo 30.3Fe3O

r’»%ﬁoc, Kévalis and Srutakévalis.

WIS B@vo, that and this

TR

W

Bomy ©8ANTI0 FRE B wRo, a pleasure ground where king and

30

queen are together

SOFTO @QS&J

B RPLTTN0

PABRG Do, hail

how

stones and fire-flies showered from the sky

3oe303000 FENRB0, above

and below

IO

3306@3050\)0

HR03) 530083030053

=8 S0eSodvoe

i

TOTIBRS Nwo RZFoesome, on the elephants and on the soldiers

.0.;;

¢

and on the horses rushed the one elephant of Bhuvanaikarama

atel

Instances regarding the accusative are: —wld B3R’ TeH,HR HDX

AN

O350

D3030000, must one tie a large tiger and a brown cow in

the same place? ¥ZFoT0Ss® TS0, him and her

PODWD0 P

%

20=00. fruit and flower

BB TIRSS YBRFo=vo, them (the males) and

i)

1 of

them (the females)

Occasionally the first o is omitted, as in ®OJP

%

WORORITV0 TIWRRNN0 FORIS =peF, like the ocean containing a

the

mass of water and a mass of pearls

den?

vill

Instances regarding the instrumental are:— O 3ovo '603\)?3;3 oS0

& 2

A%o, he struck with his feet and hands.

PODR B[N0 PPN DT Fo0

the

o

—-:-))

Spe3acso, he worshipped with fruits and flowers

Gy

¥3,

Instances regarding the dative are:— 3@ etoonio RFMo WO 0¥ 3

1‘)

=08, are Drona and you quite equal in the skill of archery? (cf § 521)

$0WRIFP BTN 00 ARNC3V0 BBWo, cheating naturally belongs to him

o,

and you

S3onF 90AN0 DAz 30NJo T To TwTo WWF0 PRIV

BRy 8RrSy ©dBo, Vikhyatiyasa was born to him and the queen,

Aayd

superior to all in the world as to family and firmness of character

nlter

(cf- § 343, 1, D).

T é% o ~o~ 3350 RBWRNY, (generally there) is no

composition for (¢. e. of) Kannada, and g‘tmskmta words.

()ldb

An instance regarding the ablative is:— 2380308, i%a" Bao FeBRWE,

and

he

33 cdiv0 TR, wRR9, fragrance proceeded from the great-flowered

Ja,smme and the screw-pine.

In

34*

oo

268

e

ot ¢

Instances regarding the locative are:—:3oldRP=s Gwodtidwdo TOIF

BWYo, in firmness of character, and in good behaviour, and in valour

cattl

DV ONRF DO BIBNTT S BBRBIF o 3B9BRFo ToBINRZ, 0, in

kind|

every wise may he give (us) all kinds of riches in all places and every

0 (1

manmner.

To Qﬁ@ (also when case-termination in the locative), 'ae‘) a@

abun

The Sabdan u-

envo uses to be sufﬁxed as 9o, BYaC0, Yo,

must

§asana has ¥330%0 and @aﬁ;&@%ﬁo

i

e0o 1s sometimes omitted in the nominative of the ancient dialect

08 ¢

]

(see §§ 348, 8; 354, 11, ¢ foot-note; 357, 2, d) and in its instrumental or

P

ablative (see the verse quoted in § 352

a 303 ®ANS etc.); and (ac-

and

cording to Nudigattu, p. 185) likewise enn in the locative of the modern

that

ha

dialect, e. ¢ OB EIRSO TRASO MIBIV RO VI,RY, 3300 TSNS,

Nine

(according to the same), at the end of past participles, e. g. 3083 59N B =

i

SN BePRITR. Wk (¢f. § 286), and in the nominative, when a series

the {

of nouns is introduced, which last practice appears also in the other two

U\

dialects (see § 354, 11, remarks a. b)

1nto

285,

©wo and eno appear, as stated in § 284, only in the ancient

W

and medigeval dialect

=

Wi

In addition to them the medieval dialect uses ev and enn, €. g. &3 030

née

DB BB SRSJe3, when embarrassment and shame were arising

med;

PURNRYY 330N, they have nothing to eat and to put on

TOOD

li

FHARBIDIR oD BRZVZW, a lender of money and a borrower of

mod

money. See the close of this paragraph

)

In the modern dialect eno alone is generally used. As the two other

dialects it does not suffix it to the genitive

to the other cases it

Dart]

ok

immediately (sometimes with the application of euphonic elision, § 215)

adds it, except to the instrumental and ablative in which it puts a

erah

euphonic &% between (¢f. the close of § 282, and oz ow in § 286).

m\

Instances are: — gas3u5Re @ a§§Ja W8T, 3, Rama and Krishna come.

ARVE

&)cﬁé FORIIIIN eﬁé %’J@Cé&ﬁw;ﬁ@ m c&mﬁr\

F903033:W, he who

Suceg

teaches knowledge, and he who glves food, and he who saves from

Sang

trouble

BRENZER W3R R, going and coming

BaT I96°ReYN -

! ha,y

AR WIS, SVMRINER Tt dRISER Bewy, to walk and jump about

Apab

at pleasure is the desire of young goats.

QRT T %“N@a'}dda that (is)

390

large and powerful

BRoR B 0e¥w, day and nlght

Ja DN, -v“agse

Sanig

SN oD DY, 11 that way and in this way the chlldren of Kunti do

(I

ctmm

s

269

k!

not get a kingdom. #ZZP, BSRABEZN 3930033, .63 FPIZH 3VR3.3

lour

cattle know when they are beaten and know when they are treated

), in

kindly.

3900 5£ﬁ# SoeS3a3oR u;ﬂoaﬁ Soe3adon 55

2.))

£030 WIS,

ery

N

on (my) parents and relatives my love (is) abundant (i. e. I love them

abundantly). — 298 B0eS 2030308, WTTIT[IN, [wd ey, (We)

ant

must show love and kinduness to others

3wePnSy

a%zs ﬂe;ain [

alect

nesw, umgoéﬁq), wolves use to carry off pigs and dogs. ——weéoam OR

B3, o&oﬁ O c%e;jdéo neaRy, serve God with love and devotxon

66%?

al ot

Neg oo emadoﬁ%?ﬁ oR wFd W 3y, (there) came people from villages

(ac

and towns—-&:;&) 2y d%‘\ra e3 beoﬁ&) S%033, between Hindusthidn and

dern

that island.

gsoﬁ @ﬂ@ e.eaSN 30T @ma BRERT SeRABRY, he gave

30,0

Ningappa and his children to eat.

S

Ao

WROR BPeLER TRAW TIP3

W ol

TRAR ToRNRY 0% (DT3,3, the attention of dogs is (directed) towards

361168

the face and towalds the words of (their) master.

SORNBRPR WTOTH,

' two

BREIN BReROBR z;af\e)omﬁzo &aéosﬁdo

doors are put for coming

into a house and for going out. —-m‘é&‘)d@ B0 TTaRRT030Q 0300 13e3T

cient

O, T30, R, God preserves thee i in wa,kmg and deep sleep B8, B0R

(=38R,09c3ow) WX 3ok, in the teeth and lips

DIFRFRIR® D597,

000

APRYNR wRITToN RF,8 Hmos, 8, they frequently put sugar into

15108

medicines and dishes

O]

Instances of the conjunction e being exceptionally used also in the

ve[ ﬂf

modern dialect will be drawn attention to in § 295

286

evo and enp are in a copulative sense suffixed, also to past

her

participles, the first ¢and’ disappearing in an English translation, e. g

og 1t

DIDTINWNTF DZBRIINBNRSF VFNB0e 398 o, he is a fish and a

915)

crab and all (whateverit may be). 3eomoMi0 IR 030R2 0 TOTIRF V20

ifs &

786)

ABIVRTF IR 0 30 DF IR T B39, 3DF IR 0 FBIHF) B WTL)03Ts

SRV 535° @—56&0556 DRI BF T BW DRDIERBRGS D TTEIDF 69,T,0, 10

pome

who

successive order there are eight topics in the Sabdamanidarpana (viz.)

from

sandhi (literally ¢‘and sandhi a having said’), and nadma (lit. ‘and nama

a having said’), land samésa, and taddhita, and adkhyéta, and dhatu and

3

ihou

apabhramsa, and avyaya.

RoR, 1303 g OWTIT Dononys 93 S0 IWRVo

WRD0 OonRS VT

9,0

3%

; (i9)

@éo zSda)ché 00 TRRISSF O rﬁd‘m $300 300F°

Uv(c‘) Q

Samserta, nomma,l themes ending in consonants become declinable bases

(in Kannada) when they receive an e and when they receive an ey

i do

RN

920 -

.

with doubling of the final consonant, and, further, when they receive

g

end-dropping (i. e. when their final is dropped). TFd ﬁ@&ﬂ@)&’)@ad BRI

‘553§Q8§$ IR Cﬁ?—qmﬁﬁ 0BW eueay, the names of the guards of champions

follos

1

are savydshtha and dakshinastha. ego 35 D) 3039, thus and further.

nega

Soziipssaﬁojoua ’i%aaf\oﬁo@ TePRoS, Wrd, read so that thou canst be

simil;

heard in a pure manner and in an intelligible manner.

&3 TING 55333)

is 80

l

.‘

NO30R ToTIWTTINR BTIZ, 3, that paper is thick and rough. e¢xo

parti

WRE WTTTIN0R 3PRBINBIN B, thou art very little and

it

stupid. 779903 BLoSIA0R PP BLITINR SRR $e3NIRY aézézos

frien

S0y, they use to furnish a house with windows on account of air and

I

on account of light. & acémmeg na%?o&o:’g) TOMNT BRNMC IT, 00 VN

oceut

o8 meroE RAMY F 0w (in the modern dialect e is suffixed to &,

by means of a euphonic ¢f, ¢f. the ¢ of the instrumental and ablative

8.

more

in § 285 and the of in § 362 after ¢; about 3 see § 198, remark 1)

with

0@y don%eay, of these vessels there are two kinds (viz.) vessels that

move forwards by wind and vessels that move forwards by steam. o

mode

9

oceur

B 8 DRINFFY VWG DBA BRLIR TeT WeFF o FoIdh BT

2

dedc

REB3HEN faégdé u%ecﬁge)\@ BeeRdy, some said «it is necessary to

(som

remove the boy from the village and cast (him) out”, and some «it is

Exces

good, if one puts him into prison”. a%eas%d%&ﬁ TN ITR riz?aﬁ wOIYN

thing

o)a&% 08,37, 3, they call a female cat kimi and a male one bavuga.

(are)

In the ancient dialect this copulative sense holds good also when evo

5\)‘@\

¢

is added to the infinitive with final » (§ 187, 4), e. 9. ZFSPFFo Xl leve

Iift

B0 &), 8003aGFo 3REEBEWNTF ¥ zs% BRT TRy BTIF o, when the

AW

sense of the nominative appears and when the sense of the accusative

SIeep

appears, the genitive may be used there (instead; see § 352, 1 a. 1 b).

e,

T, SR BST BoWNTSF woE, 2380300 RNRTIF,A @3 305BoRo KTo,

when (in a sentence) they (the three pronouns) are enumerated together

Bos |

in their order (as &80, deo, o) and when they are (enumerated together)

Iemy

ad libitum (as Qeo, ©8c, o), the first person follows (them, sce § 355, 11, 1),

if the

The same meaning obtains also when evo is suffixed to the postposition

the W

%@, ¢if’, this being at the end of a relative participle, e. g. Jp=FoepF

of the

D BBRBSE eﬁﬁqgosoajsf (STaNol- FaAY @Sefaidﬁf SRRBo %:éds‘ 2,

T

if there is a preceding long (letter), and if the word is an avyaya, and

ey

if it is polysyllabic, there is no doubling (of the final consonant). =&

tern

——

P

271

Celve

RFRFFBRY oBooR DY, RTIS WBABo FwIFowd,0ades =8

)

REFTF® WASF 9553\030:50&50 D03 SRRBo 8 9 © 0N PR %’%

1008

3,8, 3,0, if in the very sense of the negative a personal termination

ther,

follows the verbal theme, and if es23 which in the past participle expresses

it he

negation, follows, (the letters) I e o oo & are always doubled. A

AN

similar way of expression we meet with in the modern dialect when enn

il

is suffized to 38 (=2, »®) and this stands at the end of a relative

and

participle, e. g. £020300 BRIV AR [ 0% ﬁeaﬁ%é%d@ ReIT RPN

3%6@ 5@%5&30, dogs are well known as faithful servants and as true

“

friends of man.

and

o

It may be remarked here that if eso in the last-mentioned connection

occurs but once, it may occasionally be translated ¢furthermore’, cand’,

R

ative

e. . RRLRTS AREBRF DTIRIISF em%?\@a)céo 2)0380 3BIFFHRY, further-

tk 1)

more if (there) is any mistake in this (Sabdamanidarpana), correct (it)

that

with friendly disposition.

The same takes place sometimes when in the

70

modern dialect eTH (wd+ enp) s added to a relative participle and

i)

occurs but once, the meaning being ‘and’, <also’, e.g. Ke@Bo3e %’%,

WBeRBTR B BRYHEY eﬁé%%, begging (is) affliction indeed; and if

\y t()v

(somebody) begs, to say “no (I do or can not give you anything” is) an

it 18

excessive affliction.

SRNIRTR wie Bedy, also I want the very same

A

thing. @9 IO VTIRTR WPe zosg%zﬁ@, cotton (and) milk also these

(are) of a white colour. & FRAFTPEIN WY T ReENT FI8T uozéz"%

o

Sey DEPA Somade me3d, 0, also in this district intelligent gardeners

piec?

lift up the soil at the bottom of mango trees and put seasoning drugs.

) the

B8RS, 3 Nvance BoR ¥B, Swedeg, 3, like horses also donkeys

at

I\

sleep (but) little.

(About the general meaning of %w®@o and 3% in the

10)

mentioned combination see § 287, 5, b; ¢f. also § 287, 6. 7. 8).

200,

Also when in such a case eso is suffixed to ¢z by the insertion of

o]

16!

o' (Wof42Ro) to the verbal theme, the meaning of ‘and’ seems to

ther)

6!

remain in force, e. 9. TR FRBSRR0 JeTT YRS (0. T. 3PTTY), and

1,1)

if the duck-weed is destroyed (lit. and if the duck-weed a being destroyed),

the water becomes clear, though Késava says that ¢Snz@Eo is a substitute

ition

of the o of satisaptami and means ¢when’ (§§ 187, 4; 188; see § 365).

3

%9,

The conjunction ewwsso which KéSava adduces as a suffix with the

meaning of the above ©s3%@o, ‘at the time that’, is in fact the personal

and

termination of the present-future in the neuter singular and evo, ‘and’.

Y

<UL

272

—

Pl

This third person neuter singular, as we have seen in § 200, 1, is used

as a krillinga or bhavavacana

Késava’s instances are the following (see

becor

A

§ 365):— 2T TN FORF BORTIBOT POF THR N, WRFD,BRET

and

OR0, and a saying (i. e. and when he said) ¢tell Vishnu to come (him)

who appears and is coming (there) like the Anjanacala!” b%ene w3

up b

ot el

SReR3P, IpT,0, and the assembly a dispersing (4. e. and when

Wi

th

the assembly dispersed), he began to consider

R, OV

£33 03RS

10b

ad! I50 5D 3woniIBoe, and the female companion a going away

FH0

N )

(¢. e. and when the female companion went away) having said ¢remain

hut

near thy sweatheart”

Similar instances are frequently met with in

e

ancient narration

ende

287

If e0, ervo, ev and enn do not join two or more words, they have

Inean

¥

the following meanings

1, c‘also’, ‘likewise’, ‘too’, ‘and’, e. 9. VITZT VR, T WOFOD

what

8D AnerRws, when Yama all at once tasted also them

eDonBwFo

1§ 81

D DRE P o

39 oo

all the seven case-terminations

RO oRBIINA

NON

are joined also in the feminine gender in the same manner as in the

Zeb 0

ge

)

masculine gender

Nm 8 IR

ﬁ%’e‘)oﬁde‘) 03220

~ oY

5,058, N¥ 0 PHANvo,

%y

also in (originally) neuter terms when they are used as mascuhnes, all

§0me

the seven case-terminations join (in the same manner as in the masculine

gender)

3083 To23 IRR B 339);33 ony 9O sodﬁsm 332,00, rékhé and

£ven

2933R0

el

raji denote likewise the middle of a row of trees and other things

NW'JJ‘

W 0, also he came

WRR B3R Sedy, I want that too

ARH IBeR

e

99

33,33w5¢, are you also fit to go?

38 2RY B J5OLY TR, OP

LA

OO wind, it is also written therein (in the book) ¢one must not

dap

transgress the words of one’s parents

RdoR$w T

033 3R, T

folloy

To.R 0205300, if religious teachers too do not fear sin, how shall (their)

ang

disciples fear it? HTRRSTO IZA ﬁed&dd TP DCBRRBIZON R

N

VRO

S0, if others are not agr eeable to us, we too are not agreeable to others.

lept

S 5o 2558 mz N0 é% when all without exception laughed, the

s

fool t0o laughed zsaéo.aoe) CS@‘) oo, also where (there) are mo collective

§e=

VA

nouns.

*‘éﬁedsﬁo@ cS@ oi)oo also where (there) is no negatlve sense.

(see |

g 0, and thus.

"353 35° @@6 in this manner and further.

N e)zS

D3R

dtmy

oo, thus and further

and besides, e. g. 303R, 033 omad

ﬁdo?

eﬁwm 75998 3edy, and besides whose commands have (we) to obey?

Gomyy

ﬁo 3%

also other, e. 9. BPTTIBIRD TTIFFTY) WRY ALPIR WTT

Pady

—

—

273

used

Torl BB T FBR, TOFY PN TR VBT LI 2069, if anything

(st

becomes too much for one ant, also some other ants join, drag it, etc.

N

208w, and still, e. g. 230, SwE®, [o8w, o3, he sold even (his) oxen,

(i)

and still (there was only) rice gruel.

monw, and likewise.

faaiodo, also

309

when

up to the present time, e. g. 9330 paggcko 3350%%70, he is fighting

with them also up to the present time. ©z% ags, wody, they did

Wil

not come also up to the present time.

Sod BRIA 0B BIREY

avay

THIRABRY, Br3 VR, STAMVC R 2899, I sent him two letters,

main

but up to the present time indeed no answer was received by me.

th 1

B8R, and yet, e. g. BZW, 3%7% oNQo, (they had made various

endeavours), and yet he had not become better.

Occasionally the

have

meaning of ‘and’ disappears, and o8w, may be translated °still’, e. g.

BT a%g&aﬂ*%% 8, 93N 8RR a?azi’;ﬁ R0 & 3y, he knew still more than

)roh)

what he said. e300 ud@%& BRR, NePR ATRY NEPR ¥IF3IR, there

A6do

is still (one) galigé, or two galigés, of time till he comes.

QR B,

tions

RomdUNE) FoFeRANouRING wall Been 3BT, thou hast still to

n the

get over the ocean of mundane affairs. o333, %, BN Q&%Qﬁ»@@?

Ao,

VY, BRR, TOY QUEDY, Are these all the arguments? No, there are still

g, all

some (or some more).

ulie

2, ‘even’, ‘indeed’, e. g. SBRRSTBEY P BWFo ?{’;ﬁdw}\m‘ S,

s and

even in the two first cases @e* is used (SonBer, etc.). & TR BZ0R

L)

BHFDF DFOSFE By, even regarding these two compound words (2. e.

el

Doedc3uesado and %eéojowado, there) is no option (allowed). RoR, )3

Gl

F,0

@ Y

Twor NTDS* 20BEBRT0 :gd;js‘ 2000 BT JPFAT

3

3

4 not

SReTRSF ¥3,0, when even in both, Samskrita and Karnataka, a vowel

5@563

follows, elision takes place regarding the vowels of the case-terminations

;their)

and regarding the vowels of uninflected words. & -ﬂewf’s £99,35° 8%, 835°

Fic)

QOB TS ©3usy), (the throat, the palate, etc., § 33) even these

mentioned eight are the places where the letters originate.

thers:

2339 89,5357

w3nFo, even nine (letters are) not classified. ©@s Tewyo FPERST

], the

[ecti\’e

W€ TFo, it (the karma or objective noun) is (first) even of four kinds

(see § 346). Bpew ToVyo TOSFE HADTFo TRWeRTon, even four

sense'

arms appear nicely on V;shr_m. BRF PUDTE DD BOBIRS WTorvFo

39

(a0

ﬁdooﬁoﬁsaq#&@?‘, ©o oo, even these two are used in the sense of

obey !

conjunction. T B¢ Py, BT & TR0 TRT FROIRF TpWIRBTO,

pada, déva, bhattaraka, even these three, are titles of respect at the end

b

35

—

—n

274

véda

of names

2ePRT) (= woRRerRRp, medieval) g B0Rs BT

RBoD00 TR IBROFRE, BIT

how is it possible to perform together a

(hea

Whu

king’s service and devotion (to a deity), thus even two? OTRITOT &A

L3300

tigh

TR £,

having taken even the two (cadjan leaves).

med;

20339, o$oo (= 239,030, medieval) de JRe30T, do not even once look on

)]

the w1fe of another.

F3TF Do sﬁozc 0% ToTANTS 2»;30 0300 RREORI

;7oR, the oath of even at once defeatmg contloversmhsts who show

Nt

(their) enmity by sophistry.

D3P, IV,

F03R, Mo, he sold even

23)

z&'éaaﬂeﬁrﬁm 3@9%

dire

(his) oxen, and still (there was only) rice gruel.

RRRNRAT FIF Too VFPFNF) ToO,T

R ?»3@ BRI, caturva”ga is the

D

3

one name for moksha, dharma, ka,ma, and artha even (these) four.

BPEORIIPA

2OFITV03eDFToo, Bala (and) Nariyana, even both

MW

SFdoo 3%,0°, if (one) compares (them), even both (are) good men

even to both of them

awa)

esubzo oW, even both of them.

&,asmo ONw,

the

Qe dJa even both of you.

2»3@ 33

GRISIAN dJa even both of us.

)

N, )

5{

mm%m 3pedny BFBR.EN ,\;m;smm sometimes it happens tha,t

DY

even men get into the power of wolves

SBnw, to the very end.

with

%Jas@'a@ B3 %Jazé&’@ﬁn do&) o3omy, if (ome) praises and solicits

o

B

(them), they do not give even one ruvvi.

730309 e%?moao aoﬁn 2Y,

fran]

(there) is not even one thing that God does not know.

(oam ;Sowo&ra%ﬁﬁ

let ¢

BRI, $08 @9 wRIH VR Y, I entered the house, but (there) was

all g

not even one person 1n31de

§&’) Wy d@ W §Ja maaazé@e) not even

3P}

one of us two spoke

Cnf3

3, the meaning of a peculiar emphasis namely emphasis to express

Vinfa

that the whole of a definite number of things which either naturally belong

WAy

together or are considered to belong together, is understood, e. g. ®= oni%

8o, both arms, the two arms (that a person has; if we say BF, 0N

il

SWeg

Sa@v, it means ¢ two arms’, ‘two of the arms’, for instance of Caturbhuja

DTRIO %9@&;6 both

Came

or Vlshnu who is considered to have four arms).

eyes, the two eyes (that a man or animal has; if we say @dzég T B,

toget

it means ‘two eyes’, for instance of Caturnana or Brahma who is

ghee

8,

considered to have eight eyes). ®@n$czIS0 8% B&Ry, having cut off

the two feet (he had). ®3 gk 38WazRvo Jewarny®, when (he) cut off

Mo

the tenth head (of Dagasira or Ravana, who is considered to have had

g

ten heads)

ENTaRIBRBo RO 3D TRy 3003 o, 1 shall utter

Wy

instances of them (of tadbhavas and their compounds) with regard to

PAY

SOREN Sedonwoo, the three

the two forms (Samskrita and Kannada)

afr, al

macsa

—

275

33

SoR0 Bwedone?, the three worlds

védas (omitting the atharva véda)

ler a

(heaven, earth and the lower region)

e&58900 To3uonys, the six seasons

BA

(which Hindus accept)

D00, BANSSE %0300y, the guardians for the

Wiy

eight cardinal points of the compass

TR TF (for JTBW TS,

0k on

medizeval), the two hands (he had)

8 BRONRY, NTBER I &

@!\JN

0359 B> TR, having firmly seized the branch with both (his) hands

show

DTBR 39, 39, bring the two oxen (which are in the shed, etc

OB

gve

230, 1¥RY, 39 would mean. <bring two oxen’)

So0W, B, the four

Wi

directions (north, south, east, west) or the four sides (of a thing)

5 the

Do), TRNW, to or on the four sides (of a country, etc.)

four

J 3’)3

4,

‘together’, ‘without exception’, ¢in concert’, e.g. V303 30300

PSoFwo AREBRWEe, how much soever, Dharmaja gave (it) altogether

el

away (¢f. § 321)

FRD.OANTY ©30300 38 BeLN

tell to bring all

them

the boilers without exception. Foz, \38 wa33RIoNF® S0 IZTFST® AR

3

raf 3?303\);503 o3

)

having chosen Sarmskrita abstract verbal nouns (e. g

ha

end

yes, o, pen) and having added even the suffix «=s to all (of them)

without exception

PP RANYY 823y (for 2300, medieval) R $30

olicits

101

2BNSRRESE, when the Gaula religious mendicants put away all the

‘\’\\),

frankincense without exception

WAWTIFT® TN TNMIT0 PV BIRG

ol

let us altogether in union attack Phalguna!

QESJWTI0 TECAFHTY,

as

all of you without exception tell!

R3BTRINYIWTITo0 T2 RV ) WWFR

gven

TogFo, Arjuna overcame alone all the gathered kings w.e. in fight.

BRFo FOBFo WPETFo

ARR Bo INJB00 RSN IR, furthermore

xpress

YRFo JOBFOo 3PERF o

all these w. e. have a long penultimate

AR

helong

WBYo ey, all you here w. e.

O, Frodoo, to all (of the abstract verbal

7 offé

nouns) without exception.

ﬁeﬁoéow R, ID oy, all honey w.e. is

NOf}

sweet

09530 950&@ e, all that w. e. is wanted.

©RdH w3, they

phu)

came all w. e.

eﬁdeaqsﬁf DO B0 FVRDWBIN Jo, till the whole forest

hoth

together became level with the ground

BRRTY DRTUIBI &3P,

241 ?6’

ghee, curds, and all the other things (made of milk) w. e

DU RERIN0

ho 18

O Too P

38%03)3y, a moving forward of the whole army together

gt of

oot

all of them w.e. went

DO BoRF & THFIJ, Beo NN, are all

Jut Oﬁ

w. e. liberal persons like that Karna?

DO TR To0EFe) TRV BREE3.2e

0 jad

8o 03593, if all w. e. sit in a palanquin, who will be the bearers?

3

att

er

© 0%, all of you w. e.

""@33% WoRTTTY DY Onw ©022039,3, Who are not

i

e

afrald of sin (2. e. to commlt sin) are afrald of all persons w.e. e335¢

35%

——

276

—

i

r{éﬁg 1) %@& aézzi s AP s, health indeed (is) happiness that exceeds all

the

W. e o FRNFY B, on all sides w. e.

bt

9,

‘though’, ‘although’ (§ 314), when they are suffixed

a, to past participles, e. g. @55§%®§S%Oﬁ?€ @esazéﬁ*ﬁss BN0300

13y

wRIY SReTIW oNte PYTIRTBToriwaNc3o SYoRTo, though the terms

93556, %@% are feminine nouns (and) the terms =g, Swew are masculine

£0 8

nouns, (they are used as) neuters. T9To Je¥R . . . @,3‘5@5%98_ 8 03000

fen

FoFeny® 3033, though Z9Fo, JevnR . . . have arisen of the letter &

(=

they are terms with the o% (§§ 15, 229). 33;3@71;935%) SRTVD DePERF

wha

sNodwo 3POTS &3y, though the initial of the term Fvzwrres

med

o

is long, ¢slackness’ occurs (§ 240, 1). 1300 T30 0 BRQ,e0° FoR RBT,

though hot water gets however so hot, a house does not take fire (on

who

account of it).

STo WALy o CS@CS%OSQJO %930, although the king

leas

T\ol

= D

followed and the female messenger pursued, he did not come. “v”?,&ig =S¢

WCIACN (=WEIARW0, medisval) F9ee73, not seeing the tuck, though he

sought (it). 30¢33Y wIAerDV OB 23T APaynsh ABR VLT TR

Wi

=0, if (there) is no health in the body, though (there) are other comforts,

D)

it is in fact so as if they did not exist.

1 ¢

b,

to relative past participles in connection with 2., @@ and esd,

Al

e. g. ¥8, $Fpeos osﬁgvbdcéoasoaff W ADIE) ﬂew%%cso PYNTT BRERIS*

B, though the very two (words) =3 (and) v;ﬁpeef are uttered together,

degt

(there) is not the fault of tautology.

PITT A0VEIBRBo WeDZR P

U

S90) FBR o BRRIW, though (one) repeatedly drops (or drop)

ear

honey (thereon), could the fibres in the neem become sweet at last?

&

FRBVID,BRVBRY (=333, B3RB R, medieval) ABRRRBTRBY BT

at |

oS0, though (he) gives (or gave) riches and eats (or ate) together (with

hog

you). FITNRAR SR WRTIEOWRN (=wx33dow, medieval) %Jao&%%j&ée

fart

33933, though the middle of a saw is weak, does it not cut a tree?

F9N

TReNSod FINGEBR onaY ed3DdysSe, though the crow is like the

Jas

cuckoo, is there no difference in (their) sound? ﬁsjoé}s’gi‘&iomﬁéds OIS

oy

DE B8R B3eSB0 FRYRy, ITENOR BweRsd $on, s, though men do not

e

see us, God sees us always. HDemo 39BITOBTH SR 22)3,33@5@, though

am

he knows the védas, does pain leave him? 0= S3WeEB03PETR JED

the

T, 3@%*030&%8 Speslal] “3«%638, though it is (or be) a Brahmana’s face,

3

does it not stink, if it is not washed with water. eoozcH ;joz,z R, T

an

JO—

e——

277

5 all

$oRTH ey, though diluted, (it is) buttermilk, though stupid, (it is)

the mother

RO R TH T VRO

though the corpse is burned

debts are not burned

At

VN /]

Regarding the meaning of ‘furthermore’, ‘and’, ¢also’ which ©o, 0o, ¥\d

Erms

may have in the same combination, see § 286

6, ‘at least’, ‘at any rate’ in combination with 2.3, &z and 3 added

il

106

to a relative past participle, e. 9. 2Ry 3898 SonweBeRo Bewy, (of the

)

~Febraworsielonts s

ten kinds of sons) at least a son of one kind is required

I d’

ol t]

(= 8083w, medieval) Feoo i3 oo PBewy, at least us (you) must tell

o

what you have seen (i. e. the truth)

BIYBBRY (=D TYBRRIR

&)

neet

medi@val) 0@ o, hence at any rate give up (your) obstinacy

am

¢ 239303 8 BRTTOROR BeeB30.S, it is as if (somebody) said to one

) (on

who does not know a & (the first letters of the alphabet), «repeat at

ki

ng

least the Amarakosa” (as you certainly know still more)

e TIRTR

ik

bV

TyBo3oR@y Wert, B3, thou at least be merciful quickly, O Hari!

h he

7, ‘even’, ‘so much as’, ‘as was not to be expected’ in connection with

i

wes, @i, @B suffixed to a relative past participle, e. g. w=

F3§o 20003

0rts,

APuR? TRIDMIBEY (= 8RR, medizeval) 3¢, RIFNY, is it not enough‘

if one utters «Basava”? even a beast will (thereby) obtain devotion.

0,

FINONVARIFTS BOFINA THOS Nazjsaﬂs SNAGY WRRRES BeSonaldR

3

o)

@o, it is impossible in the world to remove by scorn what is called pre-

fher,

destination, even for a king (or a god).

e:\@zur’x%ﬁ TN WTIRTR RO

W

O¢SONT 9, 83N em?‘.iOSJaeﬁ% B3, 53, hke plants even they (stones,

STTIRTR

10p)

earth, water etc.) are useful in various ways to living beings.

BNTR. 0300 TODINER TRZY TR BRCIIBORY, wodd Wesorod, 30

even

a5t !

)

at that time, just as nowadays, it was necessary to cross the river 1n a

with

boat

VIR JRIN WY TIFIRTN FRROw, he did not give me even one

farthing (see remark under No. s)

v

8,

‘whether—or’ in combination with ¢, »@, 3 suffixed to a relative

i

o

past participle, e. g. & wé%’doﬁe?@%?g obdzgdzs

2 =a F3h e,;f IR0 SPWEI

o

s

BRF BBRFREo 96@65063@%;5 '853@?—"550 ﬁaﬂwrméoﬂoo 2BnRYo, those

pob

ten letters (© & a2 3 oo ene 3 B8R %

&3’ 7)), whether they two by two

mgh

among themselves are in regular order or out of the usual order, bear

the sign of the same class (§ 21).

wen T QHORY A TH =0, zﬁr%ai@

¢0

'aCS S RO, (it is) the same whether a useless man is in a town or in

30Es

A

an army.

T, FRINI

B8R WROR B3P 3D wae, whether

-

278

e

(one) eats sugar-cane from the top or eats (it) from the bottom, (its)

)

nea

sweetness is the very same. S»RoZmeRcR K00dse, VRVSTITEH I3,

mal

(it will) be right whether you do it or let it alone (Hodson).

Cf. § 319.

e |

Remark.

It seems to be a grammatical anomaly, if e3EBRBWo, 3WHo, BSWEDY,

e353%30, €3:309, literally ‘a having become or a being if and’, are combined

of ¢

with the accusative; but there are sentences like the following:— TOBIJIM

3

THFIFNO FSWY W FRB I 3n° ¥RHR0, (one) has to give whatsover to a

ver)

woman whom (one) respects deceitlessly (Sabdamanidarpana Mdb. Ms.), S3°

ot

UEBo T 0T, (he) taking not even a haga (from the devotees; in a Sisana

of about A. D.1200). OIFBRN (= HITRBR) 3N, TRRIZI, B¢, hereafter

varl

we shall give (thee) whatsoever; pray! (Basavapurina). ~33° ©o@ #3380, ww?

givi

3, IRV wRe@Zo 37 IR IIJVY, except always upon me, he does

Y

not think even upon (my) high rank (Bp.).

RERSEESL AL pRarel ?Soéd% VR BB,

Nofy

I must burn up even Poona (South-Mahratta schoolbook).

RPN Sed;madddxa

]

YoeeFTY W% LBAY, I have not read either Véda or Purina (Hodson’s Grammar;

0

about either—or see § 292. 317).

(A similar seeming anomaly is found in the

use of ®2, §300, 1, remark b, in that of ¥71O, § 317, and in that of ®0 ¥, § 338

Gan

under ©9 %),

In No. 7 of the present paragraph there is, however, the instance ®=35 33

23 TIWWOR FHBOY, he did not give me even one farthing, and a similar

“whe

80 f¢

instance is;__mo@ 3¢ HIPON 3393 @ﬁei 033973 H B¢SB0 IIN RV JROFR

¢330, FunEe, SENEIR, ATV 033N %Jaé,jdagpa", though at times the desire arises

to eat whatsoever, God has abundantly given me roots and fruits and leaves of

of t}

the jungle.

The first instance no doubt requires the accusative, which may be

stud

TR or TR (see § 122, ¢); the second instance one might translate ‘though at

instg

times the desire arises to eat — whatsoever it may —, God ete., the ¢ whatsoever

it may be’ being not governed by ‘to eat’, but being an insertion standing by

itself.

beco

But ©39%0% may be, and most probably is, 9% or ®F (accusative, see

§ 125, ¢) + v,

10n¢

One is, therefore, constrained to think that when ¥8»%o, ete. are preceded

PR

by an accusative, they have lost their original meaning and become mere adverbs.

ente

e

W

288. When in the modern dialect esr3,, then, receives the suffix enn and

oWy

is added to a relative past participle, it gets the meaning of ¢though’,

Whoy

“although’, e. ¢. mﬁ%&z}do é;ﬁoé SRWVTIVY aéz?i Eﬁoaa% 0308, IPARFD

Wony

Ry & BRES Bty though they one by one put their knee to

%@g

(the bundle of sticks) and with (all their) strength made effort, that

lot

bundle did not break. =23 5'35303\)(2 déc{;)csgﬁﬁé ﬁ&’)saﬁ@& S\ pleXs)

Seey

PRSS

e

279

(

9

Bwerdy, though there be a pearl in the hood of the cobra, nobody goes

c&e

near

TOTODTD NRe FANNRNT ey, though the sectarian (Vaishnava)

319

mark be (put to the forehead), faithfulness is necessary (¢.e. is not to

be put away by the bearer)

¢f. § 314

o),

289

If eszsori@, and eszsoe are used by themselves at the beginning

hined

of a sentence, they mean ‘however’, ‘but’, ‘notwithstandin

yet’, e. g

AW

fo a

PFY T3y, BuRY, YT, WY edcmeﬁé@ the milk of cows is little, but

very Wholesome aﬂowasiqsiio 38300 mdfﬂ%ﬁé@ %53 ﬁ#ﬁo SRR WY [,

iy

Sand

BRTR WIYNPNR VeSTLCNRY, HOT 3

R 33,0800 eﬂ&i‘éme) man can make

3

after

various things and (draw various) pictures, but he has not the power of

ul

giving them life.

BIT BRNT, [eRed DIV 5&:% % ﬁﬁo fam;'s’

does

SRR VI[) WY ?»%3 0%03RY, he is three or fou1 years younwer than I,

A

notwithstanding he is very good. & RNBINRY & QTR TTVIOZ. BoN I

i)

A d d

mar;

FORNSY, BTN, SBCR VIIN BIN, V 303y, W AIJNTRY &

ROTF, WIISDY

that boy is learning ¥nglish these two years, yet he

n the

3

cannot pronounce v and w well

Cf. §§ 296. 314

38

) 388

290. 90, evo, ew and ev, when suffixed to the interrogatives ¢ who

¢what

‘where

‘whither’, ¢<when’, <how

express ‘soever’, and are used

milar

il

so to say to form also indefinite pronouns (see § 102, 8, b, remark)

The translation into English of such pronouns, etc. in the instances

11868

768 of

of this paragraph and the next four paragraphs is quite literal, but the

The

ay be

student will be able to turn it into proper English for himself

1gh o

instances of this paragraph are:—

ever

WRDODTS

WoR? TSRS

SRBATE

WR[ITIRF B

have you

ogb

become poor, O king? you walk on foot, whosoever is not with you (¢. e

o, 560

none is with you)

$B0R00 PRSF oS TEdTIRSS aRIBT, Bwers

SRR IS B,FRIISF AQRony, if it does not allow whomsoever to

Iceded

orhs

enter and is fit to be the gyneceum, that garden is called pramadavana

PR3uBRe BNF3® wHTo, (he is) superior to whomsoever in the world

BRTR B G YWOR NRRT Isevode $ws, 03

for a village in which

; and

whosoever is not (4. e. nobody is), the washermen’s Malé is the respectable

3ugh )

woman.

"adﬁo

aTR ©?030TY,

whosoever does not know this.

AL,

BREHBOSPPR 035930 Elap 37 o35esH BY, who is in the room? (there) is

66 t0

not whosoever (i. e. none at all).

mm 03a3RR, RRBROY, I have not

that

seen whomsoever (¢. e. I have seen nobody).

oﬁabﬂa %océo 20308

e

RS

280

g

¢

3020, do not entertain malice against whomsoever.

aﬁ@ﬁéeé T, BYTA

03080 BRERIERVITOJ®

B9 BPRBDY, O king, your queen has commltted

(ar

here no fault whatsoever

D) eﬁ@ 33380, one who does not know

10t

whatsoever

BFAR ©ReI ORVT, VR "W o, he has no knowledge

5 BRBOIW VR TulE o, this umbrella is

whatsoever regarding that

pas

of no use whatsoever

WBIR B BRI

DR NIV

in his health

ad

there is to-day no improvement whatever

TRR) B BRI

V36 a2

!

SR o

the child will not eat whatsoever to-day

NPT, T SV

0|

Fo0 5933w, e, pickles absent at dinner are not good for whatso-

ever.

Red 8 NANSRIR ARy ded Po wHBY [y,

WTIp BY,

0

among frult—trees there are none whatsoever which bear fruits so qulckly

eve

wh

(as plantain trees)

VIR B RR WSETR, ®ex, he who has nothing

whatsoever, does not feel aversion to whatsoever

o

DRZ00 TG 0 WD FoR RodRy, though hot water gets hot how

whe

much soever, a house does not take fire (on account of it)

TR B8

§0e

DRV 0

WD

S &9 0. there is no disaster in what manner soever to a poet

FoMC 3P0 30, we have not seen whensoever such a wonderful thing

IR

DR RO3T 3B, & plece of land that is not cultivated at what time

pat

soever

ARR VIB T3 TomBe DRy [T N P, a horseman

00

who did not mount (a horse) at what time soever, mounted the horse in

a reversed way

D NP X ToNRE FTE DI waTRy, one must not

1

T —

transgress the word of (one’s) parents at what time soever

330 RO

¢

%

yo o 8, a piece of land that is not cultivated at what time soever

tan

e San$oe. whensoever

;’)c?)o 393 Bon=R 383, ﬁs'a IIN, F,PZN, 0VSD

(he)

NOPd RN e

maDsgy. a fema,le who has 1earned science, will at what

$66s

time soever make her hushand and children happy

230D SRR, 05T

g0

T NP B.ORSNR 90300

Row &egs3e, a miser’s mind is whensoever base

e

533 598 wde3d® . howsoever on the feast there will be no school for five

NN

days

SZIRTFE (4. 6. oRF+ov medieval + wIFd) 20 W SNTE

Says

000N TOORY AESONRS HVE,BDEY %asaqgom‘@ QQRoNY, whatsoever a

ARY

female is somewhat old and has put on a cloth dyed with red ochre, 1

)

096 O30SF B C30TF DO WBWo =J0, there and here

called katyayani

foll()“

(and) wheresoever (is) Arjuna

ST 0300 (=9 oo, medieval) Jeo &

it does not stand wheresoever

AR, DOV RIZ T8 I R, Torw

B

2331w @@ 030 %ﬁe’ae‘)@ wheresoever I have not seen such a

bea,umful bird as “thee up to this very time.

NS @O?)JQS%‘ AR AT

281

n

] 7

88 208 30 FOIFTE AR, PITFF, with lifted hands he attacked, there

fed

(and) here (and) in the intermediate places wheresoever the enemies

10V

not waiting approached.

Ige

291.

‘Soever’ is likewise expressed by suffixing w0 and enm to the

a18

past relative participle ez (of &riy) combined with 2z and &3, and

alt

adding the thus obtained forms »3n@o and ©x€cw to interrogatives,

8

Y

e. 9. So0R B0, whosoever.

DR, BR&Eo, in what manner soever.

o1

b

oS39lw@o, howsoever.

SONIBOR TPSFTFSIF WEE, actions done in a

18

former state of existence do not leave whomsoever (Dasapada).

035909

av,

%0, whosoever.

0359 Oner SR, to whomsoever.

09T IIWTW, Whoso-

ever, whichsoever.

CM‘;

0N Han0w, whatsoever, whichsoever.

SSIplateNsH

hing

whatsoever. DT BIR, however so much. DT BTN, whensoever. o3

nazcw, up to what time soever, at what time soever. o&a;:aﬁe:acﬁd@b,

whensoever.

how

B TORTH, howsoever.

29 0XPROW, VU TBW, Where-

soever.

20

QYNOBTH, whithersoever.

Qogo‘)a%csd\@, whencesoever,

DR/

B398,70050W, whatsoever, or to whatsoever, extent. o352 0e300ER BB,

)Sg 0

in whatsoever manner.

ing.

fime

The same meaning is obtained also by adding any past relative

mal

participle combined with e3 and enn (7. e. ©Tw), % and o (i. €. %B0),

e 1

o and eo (4. e w@o), »@ and ew or ey (4. e. vrR or &), to

100

interrogatives, e. g. To%® TIRINF WRY 3¢33,39N WRITY, VR SRBROR

o

%03‘9\ ?\)ﬁ})\ $0Y, jungle dogs run very fast; whatsoever one does, they

S99

Yol

cannot be caught. @x.&. SRBTTR

3%

Sonte WRGY, how much soever

o

(he) does, loss will never fail.

N9 JPCRRTH TRy, wheresoever one

phat

sees, (is) a wilderness.

0, RVRETTR F39,3% DBE, whithersoever (he)

99

goes, death does not leave (him), &3 IPBZTH =R 666030330%3515@,\

W&, whatsoever (they) may do, (their) son does not leave to say ¢<Hari’.

)

five

F° 0332)553 (mediceval) @ﬁ%ﬁ&%o DB 3605\2;3 Q028 oo, whatsoever one

says (and) however so much, a vile man does not give up his ways.

)T

o

DI, BWBRTBo, howsoever one reads.?

]!

)

g, b

1) Instances in which the conjunction ®o is not suffixed in such a case, occur in the

following verse of the Jaimini Bhéirata (16, 43):—

here

ESi Yot

DO BJeeBBRE Nome

)

TOLTE,

0O JRBNA Y59 3, J0z0ddeBonvE,

)%

PO BpeARAB JAVRERY, TP 03T FIRIFOTRVNP, |

;ﬂﬁ

2O JeeannRd 33?&%@:0&.@6%&7&&:‘,

ch

P BeeRBAT A TTS wR [YNRTITS,

,/..e

NG BRABAR ToROT TITRISUINTE IRT[wIFSS 78 ||

36

ES——

282

P

Also if evo is suffixed to the infinitive with o and this form is added

afo

to an interrogative, the meaning of ‘soever’ is produced, e.g. BRBRP*

‘508

% Sonle® &35y 8030, when whatsoever vowels stand in front

bW

292. Another way of expressing ¢soever

is to suffix esZoo or esge

ab 5

to interrogatives

This suffix is composed of e3x (see § 176) and evo

will

ATV

v

90 (=%vo), and literally means ‘having become though’, <though having

become

E. g. 809500, whosoever

QTORvo, Whatsoever

DTIR 9P

00

25930, whatsoever a state

QTR (= VJOR20 medieval), whatsoever

N

DT, 800, howsoever

S

239, 300, in what place soever, occasionally

stan

8o, whensoever.

@@O&Samo wheresoever.

$Jwony, Whatsoever, e. g.

§eN8

SYRRT P o 3@@)7‘0@5& the removal from whatsoever a thing; &5

will

z:;a;&ram mdd 30ee3, on whatsoever a (piece of) wood. @379, whosoever,

fo d

i, eﬁsmaa‘iraao 89, whosoever a man.

aboy

When e300, @330 are not suffixed to interrogatives, they signify <a

little’,

‘moderate

e. . BRAFIRV0 VeNBRGs

in this much little or

moderate haste; —or ¢a certain’, e. g. 225980, & certain one, in 2259, 3W

¢

J

WY, & certain one man (¢.e. some one man, some man); 223 aﬁ@z&%ﬁo

a certain woman; 2259 R0, W%, ORRy, a certain husbandman; g

i

a certain one (neuter), in wFd RPRTY [ePoY, at a certain one time

Y

(4. e. at some time or other); —in repetition ¢either—or’ (¢f. § 317), e. g

Bﬂt [

SoRBoUIRV0 WBNwIR0, either east or north

»E 03TIRITF B IRV0,

AN

i

either there or here; 939 0= BT oo, either then or now; Fd FIs*

%,

20TORVe, either one or two; T39,800 SREI=9RVo, either ten or hundred;—

<about’ in DT, Eﬁe% (59, Sk E 2) about eight.

also ]

Remark

wGQ ‘

In the modern dialect ‘a certain’ is expressed also by the interrogative suffix

0553

% (see § 283), e. g. @F 0dOTRBe W, VLI B3 8, she (is) the wife of a certain

boatman

0

(f. also § 310, 2 at the end

o

i |

9

293. The e300 of § 292 appears also as esedo, ¢. €. o (for e23)4 o

and this esesc again appears with a short e (see § 176) as eg90, 2. €

of ‘b|

weo (for o) 4o

es£90, Beo0 mean ‘soever’, ‘whatsoever’, elliptically

gwm

for HT00, VMo, €. . NS $HSF Bw, (there) is no merit whatso-

APpe:

O303S°

ever. ToO3F S YNDS BY, (there) is no business whatsoever

dng

VEdo IIQY, (there) is no doubt whatsoever,

C(]mm

RO

283

————

lded

294

If the interrogatives 33, 035953, R, etc. are connected with

oYt

a following noun, eno, ene are suffixed to this noun in order to express

300238 S[oeS

‘goever’, e. g. &3 d#oﬁo@oﬁago in whatsoever direction.

oI T

IR, TP Y, (there) is not whatsoever book (s. e. there is no book

SO

at all) on the ta,ble

R0 O35 @daéséoﬁo;dﬂ R& & zﬁeeaﬁ@% v, you

JU%

will not have to suffer whatsoever distress.

é%e&%odmdo o:&:a—s T

Vg

pSENO) mmm

foolish boys are not good for

whatsoever business

RN

A=

3

Q

o9 O %ad&m VR VY,

not in whatsoever manner (¢.e. 1n no way)

Vel

@m aﬁsaé TR

T%’

to whatsoever extent

Also if the genitive o388 (%3)

o

stands before a noun, ew (¥vo) I8 suffixed to this noun in the same

6.4

sense, e g. AR, 0B 03593 TollPp Xenicy, annoyance of whomsoever

s

%

will not come upon you

BB

SIREITHY GHT - DRATRE: WTS

g

3

er

to do this will not suit the mind of whomsoever

(About o see § 298

about we § 300)

‘@

|

If 90 is used instead of o393, the enn is commonly suffixed to Do

g

e. g. & BRRWW VIR FoRg o, this umbrella is of no use whatsoever

1)

BRE ®3.0 DN B0 o, (there) was no money whatsoever about him

;j

RN DIN NTR, D SPRO

90 VEW 3. SRBOY. JLRCIH VTTIGP

,'ij

il

[PES

DReTH Ro3030 NeFDe

& IBRINFO VIR BREROW

6.f

But on the other hand there is e.g. ¥30,0AC0TY BReRS[eI[ow® BY

SRRV

your queen has committed here no fault whatsoever

)ﬁlo

A

aGE, RodoSesw o, about this there is no doubt whatsoever

.-

295

In § 285 it has been stated that besides in the medizval dialect

also in the modern one erv is used instead of enn

Thus we find e. g. J»

30y (for DFeBTR), cloTaRy (for 3PTaRTR), JaaEdy (for oFy Boe),

®

suffix

®5907aRTy (for c3390maRTR), IT[HIRTY (for ISTIRTR), T

&

)rtalll

B8 (for QmDRIW), O WRWPHH (for IO WPEIW) wsesseriey (for o3

Tonow), 0wesmEandesy (for cwesnmerte wiy), Ry, (for HEw BY)

296

In § 289 e5w8P (i- . BB+ &34 ow) appears in the meaning

L90

of <but’.

It may get also that of ‘also’, e. 9. Fo, Jwed IPd JRERTT

1 b

DIMITTR anoe 3weeedy, if (thou) reﬂectest a little, it is likely to

eally

appear also to thee in that very manner

TODIRCR BVAR DIN BTN

AL

A

IPBE 3T NS, BBy, till now also I put up with the faults

committed by him

R AR T

36*

eSS

284

[—

A remark is here to be made regarding eswd3 (i. e. &84 @3), which

literally means ‘if becomes or is’, ¢if become or are’, e. 9. FS00 B3 B

e

R330 B AT B

if (there is) a wife, (there is) sorrowful thought

when (there is) no wife

(there is) sorrowful thought

3P 030 <RB

catl

F9 R esnde, if it is silver, is it not agreeable to the thief?

303,938

3

3

§

e

TR, 207,90 83 X, if (there) are children, (it is) trouble; when (there)

3

30’_1

(WY

are no children, (it is) trouble

BTH THI BT Howd TR e, if the cow

is black, (is its) milk black?

momand, if (it) is so

Rezord, if (it) is

Rk

required

?

333, however, is often used somewhat like eszcw, ¢but’, if it stands

i

at the head of a sentence, e.g. eF0 TR TBFSBRER Bwend, =TT

USEC

50 AIW N o JPE WeRd

go all of you into the veranda, but you

N

must not make any noise there.

FOY NERP T BT 2RES =o0s

%’J@%ﬁoé;ﬁ =38 ©neR waeémﬁﬁ Us3 Bund ezEde,

some

plants as soon as they are touched close, but do not experience joy and

‘j,

krly.

of 4

sorrow like living beings.

= deéd@ FOT N%?ﬁ%@ BWOWFTONRR NBNRL

Wil

£99, 908 VYR TR T @Tb;ﬁ&e) S country there are in some

W

places nutmeg trees, but (their) nuts do not become like (those) of that

place

Cf. § 314 and see the use of 8x33 in § 334

ol

297. The conjunctions €3 | e, (WP o, ete. § 212, 3), 08,0, 03

“9

soes®, again, further, and, are used in adducing something additional

:0F

€. g. SUZ, (VF° DT RV) "59)304(3 ERBRY VR0 WTBIDE IIFFaNI® YRS

T 3

TS TOIEBRY’ B8T00R (¢. € esoaﬁzsod) 3003 BIAINTTTF

)

3

el

TAE IPAT ST BN, T3, BER, BRB [oTTanosdw 3pe?

03 0

I

is composed of 53038 4+ eso, so that it originally means ‘and further’ like

0y

SOE o3ovo

AT VIR . DBVIOD

GOUJl

00D PPNV I,

D WRIPY |

R SToNSI), 2R RI°

V)

VI ReTIVON S¢S0 ITTJIVO |y

18 gh

mé o}

of t}

A FoFed BU 3,8 I, 9D S0

i

3,03 o, ete.

o

|

*

308 TR &R B30, RISMS I3Rk»

904, PW,TAR WIS 3,T0 WY A0, S9tH° WITVIN |

983038 NBHRROARHBFY, JINBR D

the V

®0&, ete

Uin?

PER,

285

pe—

hlch

An instance in which s3.em¢ means ¢or’ is the following:— Qsdcé%%do

i

S30em° 5@56&60 33085 es;gJaQSesiQS;ﬁsah FRABIJR x%oﬁ’oaﬁomo.

oht

In the modern dialect 303y, (which we met with already in multipli-

<ol

cative and additional numbers at the close of § 280) is used like 03,0,

43

g, (¢ § 810), e g. 3, BHRATAY B, Doy d; waB Iy, BT

161’@)

3%& o&@ﬁ@a BY, FB, T &)%Q WREISH VY. I, 3038 ao%%@ﬁdo

COW

0300BLETE RIHIDAT DL, B3, WY %J@%@%ﬁ_ BEP030TY, 0By, WE I

) 18

39300 I, BRYR FLNVS, 008y, WORF,B. See an instance in § 289

(V 208, w).

ds

In the same dialect mon® (moonw), so also, likewise also, has been

Sole

jou

used in the sense of ‘and’, e. g. B % (PeRIY)) WIS BIRNBOL, FHaNR

WRY :\‘éeérieée?o 23%903003363%.

iesz;’_

Jyilly

298, The Sabdamanidarpar}a states that 2 (of B = B0°) is a

kriyatmakavyaya, . e. a particle (avyaya) that partakes of the nature

and

of a verb.

i)

Its formation has been shown in § 209, note 1 (see also

Uity

§ 210). ©Q appears also with a final euphonic s6nné as Lo, e g.

B3B3, ARACRRS® BY o, and in the modern dialect with a euphonic

that

J (¢ e 0+ V) as faeo)o@ (§ 209, note 1;.§ 212, 7).

When followed by a vowel, the final letter of -] either disappears,

29

e. 9. vo9ny, adw (¢f. § 215, 1), or a euphonic ¥ is inserted, e. g.

0!]3:]1

B oM, B 8¢ (¢ § 215, 3).

MES&

B is used either by itself, or in combination with nouns, pronouns,

7

ete

In combination with bhavavadanas, ¢. e. verbal nouns ending e. g.

W

.;;

in evzdy and ey (§ 200, 1. 3, once also in 3o, see § 194, remark 1) or

in e (§§ 187, 1; 188. 209, 3), it forms so to say a third person in the

conjugation of the negative.

In the modern dialect bhavavatanas with eey (the nominative) and

g conventionally convey the meaning of the past (§ 209, 3). If esen

is changed into the dative (esej%_, eﬁe‘)%) and 25 is suffixed, the meaning

of the past disappears.

In the same dialect B is joined also to past participles.

1, 15} by itself.

RewN,ESIF ¥SFot? @Y, and is (king) Nilagriva able (to gain

the victory)? (No), he is not. Qe DTYHEOH B onBe Teay é\@e&%

o359 7? av, ever having seen a ripe water-melon art thou? I am not

pm—

286

pe—

(¢. e. hast thou ever seen a ripe water-melon? No, I have not).

9530

inds

I3 Zodc wnSedee? ww, baving become (i.e. have become and )

kno

thor

are all those (things in the house) of themselves? (No), they are not.

fo ¢

IOBAIN AERY VTR %’é& DN eﬁ@%e? VY, F9,, having spoken

whatever bad words to him wast thou? I was not, sir (i.e. hadst thou

mot

abused him in any way? No, I had not, sir). LRegoRRconss 3003{0\ DT,

o ———

180

g1éd

Bow TRRFERV? B, did the bees sting (you) anywhere on the body?

N

They were not (i. e. no, they did not). SoNg ZTE [ Towy BATE,

Bedwe? DR, 3Re8RR FePro.

‘&%3&@3@ BCI°T udogeé’%ﬁa,

hat

«is (there) grass upon the cocoa-nut tree?” asked the gardener. « (There)

pure

W}

is not, (thus) saying indeed (to myself), I come down”, replied he (¢. .

no, there is not; and for that very reason I come down, replied he).

wor

hut

2, e in combination with nouns and pronouns (¢f. § 316, 1).

o

TRTET 0 NoF )30 RRwANY, (generally there) is not a composition

3

are

(i. e. generally there is no composition) of Kannada and Sarnskrita words.

)

R0, yETT0 ;35%@%(5*@3@550 dwesdve, also if a Samskrita word follows

iy

t

(the terms o and D), a fault it is not (4. e. it is no fault). esg, B8,

havi

ooy, O, doubt (there) is not (i.e. O, there is no doubt). roToDe

——

)

TOFRY MTIAT JRY, Drona is not (present), Karna is not (present),

(ther

the son of Drona is not (present). 2BTTIY, (there) is not whosoever

with (you, 4.e. nobody is with you). $&dow, (there)is not a pot (7. e.

parti

there is no pot). sveew B 3B, an eating and a putting on (there)

is not for them (¢. e. they have nothing to eat and to put on).

Qan B

TOORARTS B8R, for me great trouble still (there) is not (i.e. there is

4 hay

no longer great trouble for me). ZonzR Soed 5330%, (there) is not a

the |

fault on Madana (é.e. there is no fault on Madana).

¥E, IS BRION

F0233y, BoDY, in Yama’s messengers whatever mercy (there) is not

(¢- e. Yama’s messengers bave no mercy at all). =8 223 3¢S @eo

BPE, BIVY, after the period (of life) has expired, for a moment a stay

(there) is not (¢. e. —there is no stay for a moment). S8, %30 R

9%, %30 @, near me whatsoever book (there) is not (. e. I have no

lot (

book at all with me). & 2R3y, VDS T3, POL) 2Y, to-day (is) Sunday,

4

at

school (there) is not (. e. — there is no school). 08 B @ISR A3 vY,

of fea

for those who have no understanding, fortune (there) is not (i. e. — there

is no fortune).

881 Besode v, for me (the sun, there) is not fatigue

e

287

P

30

BT IRA RWIY, bQ,

that to me

indeed (4. e. I never suffer fatigue)

1|

knowledge is not (i. e. I do not know that).

DRy bR %e@do:ﬂ FoRDY,

10f

thou whatever saying a business (there) is not (i. e. thou doest not V\d!lt

kep

to say anything)

9NE, D3IV, N'O' 3ng, AWy, greater than a

hou

mother benefactors (there) are not greater than sugar sweetness (there)

V)

18 not (i. e. there are no greater benefactors than a mother, there is no

id) {

greater sweetness than that of sugar)

Z,INT, [ WOMITIV

ST,9NS. Soeew 3039w, better than pure gold (there) is not, better

| W)

than children lisping (there) is not (i. e. there is no gold better than

ore)

pure gold, there is no lisping better than that of children)

PV, IP

7,8

OB TNR & FORT) B & WIS, to-day it is not, but to-morrow that

work will be accomplished (7. e. to-day it is not likely to be accomplished

but to-morrow that work will be accomplished)

QRN 3R FNRLIHBH

f1on

035900 B, to thee father and mother are (there)? Whosoever (there)

are not (. e. hast thou still thy parents? No, I have nobody)

R &

1ds

WRDVORY, 03593y %’Jaéj 327 CPBR BY; TR BHERY TOTRIET ’19@0

Jows

wa% é’@d’gb_sn 89, who gave thee this knife? Whosoever not (. e nobody)

havmg opened the bundle of Nariyana I took it to myself.

QDY ®E,8

;

;f

300 3R? ORW B, is (there) ghee near you (¢. e. have you some ghee)

ent)

(there) is not any (¢. e. I have none)

evel

3,

@e in combination with verbal nouns (¢f. § 316, 2.12) and past

(&e

participles (which are finally also verbal nouns, see § 169)

6re)

08,300 MUSPOIIRIBY FeRVBTIRNT, 2300 &R, till now (he) is not

| oV

e 18

a having become an object of aim to a stroke of an arrow discharged by

the hand of Kama (é. e. till now he has not become an object etc.)

ot @

FRENS TP SPTTBRES

\?Dﬁ

FON03) BRB LSRN QTBOF PENLITF BTuBo

ot

)

BFRNRVTF D0DEBAT, VISSF

st

4y

831%030?3@3555 BFOY WIBRS

o

| the young cuckoo

WOl

in a mango tree among a flock of crows in the wood a having been able

not (z. e. was not able) to rise and go away, and also at night to cry,

s 10

1dﬂjy,

and to open and shut (its) eyelids, (in short) to do anything on account

of fear

Y,

TRREPT BPEBRY DRI

[ere

AR a¢ BEREDRDFe,[0 T |

mduf

e

i

)

288

oz

R TR Fre

9% SEENFA U

(t

SORNTIFT aﬁsar{ =N ”@3 0903®% || the month Mage

W

ma

grandly made its appearance so that in the covering cold the points of

1§ |

the compass, the sky, the earth, mountains (and) forests, howsoever, a

200

W

baving been able not to be seen (¢.e. could not be seen) on the earth

xeq

which is known for (its) misty heat when fruits are growing fully ripe

st

16

©BACT) BRERSEI[T BY SedRo0Y, the queen a having made

Wit

not any fault here (4. e. the queen has not commltted any fault here).—

{03

Fo) [VoNNENR VY BBV

to some monkeys a tail a being

W

(there) is not (. e. some monkeys have no tail)

YRV D0 S8

ink

|

wdvssde, if (there) is mo knowledge, honour a comin

(there) is not

(i

(¢. e —honour is not obtained)

2PRCBTVORBINTY 093 TORTR, WIIID

stupid boys a coming (there) is not for whatsoever work (¢.e. stupid

boys are good for nothing)

09 Bo PRe? FENTOY, where is she?

fut

(she) an appearing is not (. e. she does not appear).

B aée@o mw

PN

n9gy wde 303 SRy men IR wrimdy, so that (I) ha,vmg sat

§

(th

down eat such (good) ripe fruits alone is not a being pleasant to me

(3.

(¢. e. to sit down and eat such good ripe fruits alone is not pleasant to

2

me).— TS TOR TIROV

FOIBF TROO

(he) a having

abandoned not deceit (and other) sin, (and) a having obtained not the

e ey ok o

desired object (é.e. he has not abandoned deceit and other sin, and has

['pl

not obtained the desired object)

538 90 WeTIRRVY, SPA BCPZTH

4]

FeFO®

though his mother having made clear (and) told (him) so

(Mo

much as was necessary, (he) a hearing was not (¢.e. though his mother

clearly told him all that was necessary, he did not hear)

T NPT

sta)

he having trodden on

iy

P

30°Ty WeR3B.

SROH Td ANV

the

stones (and) thorns grew fatigued, but the way a being found was

|

not (¢. e. he trod on stones and thorns and grew fatigued, but the

LA}

way was not found).—ezZ RReNOT,

he to a going is not (¢. e

d §

he does not intend to go or probably will not go)

SR S[R3

of h

W3S A

T IOV N Entad)

ARNR 23, WeFOE,

if (you) do so, his

anger will be assuaged, and blows to a falling on thee are not

(¢.e.—and blows will not fall on thee). 28 gy, 0390w B3,T WIRABO

3

)

whosoever are not to an allowing thee to come near (¢.e. nobody will

Intg

allow thee to come near).— u3H, JZ, TONE [OT WIT® S0 [pe

yet writing on thy board a having been finished (see §§ 168. 169) is not?

gy

s

289

s

(¢. e. has writing on thy board not yet been finished £ :3@033?55%& 0

g

ALV SPRy, men a having made the sun are not (4. e. man has not

of

made the sun). de;ﬁd@i 330 0R ;Sh@e@e()q, whosoever a having seen God

is not (i. e. nobody has seen God). & a\a)f)\oﬁo aésae%mfo TP @53, &3

A/

£2-09

ith

S | 2 &3n ﬁeﬁaﬁ%, these grapes are sour, therefore these a

requiring for me having become are not (¢. e.—therefore these are not

required for me, that is to say: I do not want these).

&SN MBOTIBNA

ade

wRd N8 F). o ! oNE 3[SBRIR Fod B Y, mégmﬁ g3,

‘

230300 TINRTp 28 ©, then Gurupada was beaten (by his schoolmaster).

ing

Why? In his inkstand ink a having been was not (4. e.—there was no

o)

ink—), (and) in his bundle a pen and paper a having been were not

1ot

(¢. e.—there was not a pen or paper).

A9

o'

4, about AL IJ.

pid

Swgaie N8 7egsdw sy, a means (there) is not for (obtaining)

he?

future happiness (é. e. there is no means for obtaining future happiness).

W

D) BNy WA OITDE, 0 Y, however so much (the fox) jumped

3

sl

(the bunches of grapes) a coming in reach for (his) mouth were not

e

See also Dasapadas

(¢. e.—could not be reached with his mouth).

b 0

93, iL; 48, 2; 148, 7.

g

5, about the combination of g1} with BoR.

the

69, BT, 28 u%@ Rezy; oy FREY! AR, BTAT) KIeTReE,

has

Tomo? Bwotd Y oe Te@! IeeeRdE, RS TNy, mother, mother,

00

a basin is required; give (it) quickly! Why so much hurry, Rama?

| 80

(Mother) give (me) first a basin! a staying thus (quite literally: of the

her

staying in this wise, see § 186) talking (there) is not (4. e. there is no

“n

time for me to stay and talk now). Be3< S %03?\ QUUTT TNY,

on

the millet-stalks a reaching thus for my hands (there) is not (i.e. the

was

millet-stalks cannot be reached with my hands). S, SWoEY TBIR

the

DL BREWBRYFE N e «also my prime of life has passed”

b6

a saying thus (there) is not (¢.e. you cannot say that also my prime

30

of life has passed).

s

R99. About the combination of », », %, & with Be.

nob

V)

b 'aegqa’i or faeg“sSe.

a

("1’

In these two forms @e is combined with o and &, two particles of

will

interrogation (§ 212, ), “suffixed by means of a euphonic 5. The

y

¢

meaning of CO and CORBE first «is (there) not?” “are (there) not?”,

ot!

37

b

R

290

B

15

e.9. P IRYNRM e 3¢, is there no oil in the gingely-oil seed? (answer

yes, there is)

PR, SRR WIveF F\onB, Jpdw 3, if one flower fades

to cuf

are there no flowers for the black humble bee? (answer: yes, there

T

are)

5 for

This meaning, however, often changes into ¢or’, literally ¢is it not

d,

(this)?”, 4. e. if this is not the case, then it may be also this, e. g

In

DJIRTR VP Bnon Bvw D WBed wIdn 390

INP Fed TWIST

ofa ¢

when thou getst any pain, is it not (this? is it not pain? then also

‘oerta

¢. e. or) when sickness happens (to thee), thy parents will grieve

0L “Cf

sgéoﬁéﬁ FIRRY VST FBWE B S SRS 89030033, man’s mind is

In

known by his words, is it not (this? is it not by his words? then also

witho

i. e. or) by (his) conduct

R0NBRSNT 83,00 N33 IR LRI

Not ¢

PO BE & MICVTTY, TRY,ME AT INT) NeBdw, if (one) removes

here

the blood out of the wound (made by the teeth of a snake), the poison

i

10 un

will take no effect, is it not (this? is it not the removal of the blood?

Bl

then also 4.e. or) if that wound is cauterised, the poison will take no

and 1

effect

theme

2,

B Fp Or B JFpe

efc,, ¢

When the interrogative particles 2, and & (§212,6) are suffixed to

‘18 110

e by means of a euphonic ¢, it conveys first the meaning of a question,

akeg

occasionally one of more or less displeasure, e. 9. J=R ;302371 (A D)

Qr

3p¢, does buttermilk not agree with thee? =3 e °9ojo® WO fywe,

rang

is there no sack near him? & mowo ©CPwIpe, has tha.t milk not got

[re-gn

cool?

WRR WIOS e3pe, will he not come?

2830, AR, BONRE B0

(thi)

WIB 00w 3pe, has writing on thy board not been finished yet (é.e

T,

doest thou still write on thy board)?

9T aRe, BReROVZpe, has he

e e S T s A SRR

Fo

not yet gone?

R0 WDHY Fpe, wilt thou not come?

the PY

But then v ;’JJ, 'ae)i’yae frequently mean ¢is it not?’, ¢will it not

be?’, ¢was it not‘P’, ¢.e. ‘or not?’, e.g. 33 ea“{ 3830390 3ReRATIDY Fp,

Apea

a having strained the water of Siva, or not? (5. e. Siva’s water was

In

strained, or not?)

FAC IPRT [T BN, 03, W

3RR3 30

L

DIMSTOV 3p0? BTPACNE FBRIQ T

S .3 B3 3R IprorganoSdY 3pe,

N

a pruned tree will sprout and grow, (and) become a large tree, or not?

tO (l

The moon that lost its splendour on the day of new moon, will become

begay

full on the day of full moon, or not? 335, VRE FRE BN IVBIZIR3Re?

thlS 18

o Ppe? J0eB BeTRY, TR FHIIV TR ®S,B, he (the boy) said

tO&t

D

291

]

SWer

«“is my (literally: his) new axe sharp? or not? let (me) see”, and began

ales,

to cut down all he saw.

there

To 25} the % may also be added without a euphonic %, and then

its form is faei@oe.

t not

3, 'aeg,a%e [ or 'aeie - UR

it

30,

In BR3¢ BY Al D of emphasis has been suffixed to 1) by means

of a euphonic ¥, and e has been repeated; its literal meaning is

also

¢ certainly it is not, it is not’ (or ¢certainly it will not be, it will not be?,

reve.

or <certainly it was not, it was not”), by which ¢not at all’ is expressed.

nd 18

In cae(:joe B the © of emphasis has been joined to the first R

| also

without a euphonic ¢, e. g. BB ra%om? 'aeie v, art thou tired?

Sﬁ)g,

10VeS

Not at all. xg);’%joioe?o ©03ReNR. TR B e B, in the universe

there are unsuitable things not at all (4. e. in the universe there are

)0IS00

:

no unsuitable things, none at all).

lood?

800. In § 212, 7 ee is introduced as an avyaya. In § 209, note 1

ke 10

and in § 210 we have seen that it is a form of the negative of the verbal

theme ese, meaning ‘fits not’, <is not fit’, <are not fit’, ‘was not fit’,

etc., ‘is not corresponding to’, ¢is not becoming’, ‘does not answer to’,

ed 10

¢is not equivalent’, ¢is not according to facts’, ‘is opposite to’, etc.

It

ostion,

takes also the form of @e o (¢f. w0 in § 298), e. g. W VeNF SEIZYo

el

BonFBoo TS PRYReT0wTo PEORe[o, now came Bhimaséna, a

stranger he did not answer to (¢. e. he was no stranger), invincible,

op

of gob

pre-eminent in the lotus-pond of the Kaurava race. (amv) 230390,

(ar)

3008

(this) does not correspond to justice (z. e. this is no justice).

SEISF ¥o, (this) does not answer to silk (. e. this is no silk).

(ve

jas he

For the existence of ®e ) in the modern dialect (¢f. a3y in § 298, 4

the author is unable to cite an instance.

When followed immediately by a vowel, the final of ese either dis-

it not

g

appears, e. ¢. 8¢, or a euphonic

-]

is put after it, e. 9. weTaM.

0 H)

Instances are:

T was

1, regarding ©e .

} 0

8083330 2LoORQe3TanS e009,0, Arjuna a stranger does not answer

::c)q @"3‘83

! got?

to (i. e. Arjuna is no stranger), he to become is required (¢. e. he must

become

)

(BRY) B, (this) does not correspond to a pot (7. e.

6C0Me

this is 00 pot). (BW) NWTY, BRDWIBIT, (this) does not correspond

e

to a town (é. e. is no town), it is a wild. FIoFIYIRY, this is opposite

) S&ida

ST

s

292

PES—

to virtue (2. e this 1s no virtue)

HBRRPRT,OD, BRY 2390 B3NN

fac

)

TORRRY SREBRRFNY, 930.© 3wensss s, a teacher is not corres-

it 1

ponding to a farmer (¢. e. is no farmer), a goglet is not fit (to be ranked)

in the class of pots (. e. is no pot), glass is not fit amongst metals (i. e

this

is no metal), indeed porridge is not fit (for) a dinner (¢.e. certainly is

)|

no proper dinner)

W, ONRPREBY, BB, BWLOWY, SFHN NBY) WS

¥

S0; Y FoREN SF,30¥NRY, a peasant’s reading is not proper, a cat

two

is not corresponding to a royal tiger (¢.e. is no royal tiger), a swallow

Y

0011

wort shrub is not corresponding to a garden (4. e. is no garden); these

three are not fit in account (¢. e. are unworthy of much notice)

BT

B 3

OB 3RedTe: 30

F.Oo0) =o3030e. wherein there are no birds, is not

)

b8

LTS

answering to a garden; wherein there are no children, is not answering

I

to a house (4. e. a garden wherein there are no birds, is no garden; a

are

house wherein there are no children, is no house)

NOTINOT B

9ok

H00d0T o803, wherein there is no guru

1s not answering to a

matha; wherein there are no elders, is not answering to a house (i. e. a

matha without a guru is no matha, a house without elders is no house)

T —

] BSRSROL, IFRENITO

n

ay

DBV TSV, Vithala’s name

)

a fair wheresover a putting and selling is not equal to (é.e. Vithalas

name is not such a thing as is put and sold somewhere in a fair)

39

form

38,39, (man’s) body his is not according to facts (¢.e. man’s body is

108ty

not his own).

BTTY, VI ey, this man is not fit (4. e. not this

fray

man, but) that man is wanted. X¥oe wey By BRTEBNTBY WoraBY,

o)

all that shines (with) yellow colour gold does not answer to (¢. e. is not

BRI L BN IRnBRE? @R? wey, hast thou perhaps

gold)

put

stolen this? Stolen property ? certainly it is not answering to (¢. e. cer-

book

tainly it 1s not)

23030 Towd BTFY TIORRY, BRI, buffalo’s

AR

A K N S S

BT

milk so much wholesome as cow’s milk is not fit (4. e. buffalo’s milk is

not so wholesome as cow’s milk).

opYSpLe el "’ejs'a ST ~e§mﬁe‘) b

RT

328

3

Bo30Ry, BWIF,T, BBV WE WRE WSWRY, they manufacture sugar

emph

(also) at Rajapura, Pattana and other places, but its great goodness is

cally

not according to facts (é.e. but it is not very good)

FPIT AR

dan

WRF TR WELI RSN IV .8 AR YO

B, BB DTS, 0

L

addiction to opium is a very bad thing; on account of it they do harm

lndee

lllsta]

to (their) property, this much is not corresponding (é. e.-not only this,

ha

but) also to (their) life

9 R,e ©e, this much is not corresponding to

TN

N

293

s

My

facts (i. e. this is not all). 5=, BReeoridy wR eB0e? BY, BRY

68

FOT) VA

b

are these all the arguments? (this much) is not fit (. e. no,

el

it is not so), there are still some others. ) BRoF 7980309, ¥TFIR®BW,

(A

this a poor-asylum is not corresponding to facts (4. e. this is not a poor-

J s

asylum, but) a palace. & RBRY WY, HTBY, BFRLN FedRTRY,

©NOTF, 3, one is not fit, two are not fit (4. e. not only one, not only

Cat

two, but) three hundred mines they have dug in this hill.

eRY &R

low

BRBIZDH 8F,59, thou in this way a making a proper thing it is not

3

hese

corresponding to (¢.e. it is not right for thee to do so; ¢f. § 316, 9).

8 BRrdod VFW FoRG o, (is) this umbrella of any use (see remark b)?

;nog

it'is not fit (¢. e. this umbrella is good for nothing). <3593 %,3900F 0N

g

¥y, in whatever manner it is not fit (i. e. in no way). Other instances

Ny &

are: — 45y Sowy, BELNL.

BT DBRRY, THID. BID By

39,

30309, 59003,

BBT YT, TY, ZHONe.

fo 8

Remarks.

g, &

186)

a)

Regarding the practical difference in the use of 92 (§ 298) and ¥ it

may be said that 9% expresses positive non-existence and positive denial, and

10

©e relative negation and negation of quality, nature or character.

ala’s

b)

It is not impossible that ©© when following a noun, ete., originally

3w

formed an answer to a question.

Let us take a few of the above-mentioned

instances to show this.

[y 18

SodznBo B30 might be translated ¢(is) Arjuna a

this

stranger? No (he is not)’.

Likewise (%) 8300 ¢(is this) a pot? No (it is

339,

not)’.

(AR NNBY, BRICIIBIW ¢ (is this) a town? No, it is a wilderness’.

5 10t

To give this meaning to ¥ would recommend itself, when ¥® is sometimes

put after an accusative, ¢. g. SFI) VY, II, 3B IIy, BeBWEI (Bombay school-

»haps

cel

book 3, 6), ‘me (i. e. did I beat me)? No, I beat my younger brother’.

QI Y,

333y T8 (Rev. F. Ziegler in his Practical Key, page 27), ¢(shall I call) this

108

man? No, call that man’.

Cf. the accusative after ®2® in § 338, and see

|

§ 287, remark.

:

7

Sttra 47 of the Sabdamanidarpana teaches that ©® @, when it denotes

—

e

¥, + o, or is the so-

;ugﬁf

emphasis (nirdharanArtha, and is composed of @9 &,

called negative participle, see § 171 and ¥2® in § 338), occasionally drops its

g5 18

%, and gives the instance R#833w Friw’o which stands for RLIITY @ Jprico,

o

A translation would be ¢Gorava a being not fit indeed (or a being not meant

39 85

Thus the

indeed) I do not praise (i. e. I do mot praise anybody but Gorava)’.

i

instanece appears in LingAyta manuseripts; a Jaina manuseript of Madabidaru

sy

has @300 Pre’o which stands for Be30s3w 8 Jprie’o, putting the accusative

ReSTBo before ¥V X, but NBeS0%, the nominative, before ©Q.

The Mtdabidaru

]g tO

e

294

e

MS.’s writing in this case may be wrong, or may be not, so far as the accusative

is concerned

has

Il

2, regarding e9e in combination with &ar} (or e3,).

§2

oy, thus (as you think) it is not fit (. e. thus it is not).

3T

566

FREVNRY %‘odoé’oio BRINT manY, Ae9ses,d, the hoof of cows so as the

hoof of horses is not correspondmg to facts (¢.e. the hoof of cows 1is

unlike the hoof of horses), it is split.

D3onBRER BRI3% TIN zéai

reg(

P riéSovoJa ®o, amongst beasts like the horse beautiful and stronor

(any) are not ﬁt (é- e. amongst beasts there are none so beautiful and

«f

strong as the horse).

DIRINH VT Ve aangr‘i WRIBSICITIPE, TONRCR

Sivg

v (3R N9Y) vy, as fishes cannot leave water and live, so anyhow

these (frogs) are not according to facts (¢. e. — so these frogs are in no

03,

the

way)

3,

regarding ese> 53, e9e) 3¢ or e3¢

SIxb

These forms bear the suffixes of question o and ©, expecting an

ny

answer in the affirmative

the first two insert a euphonic ¢, the last

i

one adds £ immediately to so. E. g. Qoanse doansvons neansvoe

o,

Q

D20 08 ©s, wos3, instead of the augments &of and Dof the

ee

augment nes is used ad libitum, is it not fit? (4. e.—is it not so? or

not ?).

ad;)odw ﬁ;ﬁo e WD ‘aojoe) 3?7 IVTFHES LIS zacé:‘)zsa&

nam

0300 3?7 a hvmg bemg that says «this (life) is unstable”, (is) a wise

Part

person, or not? an apathetic man that forgets the fear of hell, (is) an

this

unwise person, or not? | A SN ATI QESENRe B, W 5¢? to-day

Pass

six days (or six days hence is) the illumination-festival, or not? g,3®

B3;

e Tod, o Se? and thine (is) the same road, or not? ©xks R, ¥Se

dieg

how

that (is) a sparrow, or not?

4,

i

regarding e&o3p, Yo3pe, O BSH e

In these three forms the suffixes of question 2, % appear, the answer

oy

being in the affirmative; in e_ee&fae the % is joined immediately to o,

W)

E. 9. $3pqe30 w590528 0889530 Vyoma (is) a well-behaved man, is it not

got

fit? (¢. e.—is it not so‘> or not?).

TR R0mORERTYRpe? we are

mortals, or not? Jpcesd %22 803, 88% ¢7 —

9903@66, 53 SNnRe, TB

Tay

39¢08 VR T T "Iy, BPEME, D, @@J\Q?

301

Do,

g, 3@)53 cae)c% and 3¢z which are classed under the

avyayas by the Sabdanusasana (§ 212, 7), will be treated of in another

b

place (§§ 338. 316, 5)

5

o

—

295

ative

In the Sabdanusdsana’s wo o (§ 212, 7) the nominative of Jo (§ 266)

has been used adverbially (see the verse quoted under No. 17 in § 348);

in its Oz the same has happened regarding this interrogative pronoun

(§ 255)

53¢

Its drv30 and D330 are compounds of %, what? (the accusative

the

see § 125) and curtailed 303y 0, I shall do

i§ 18

302. Here follow some peculiarities (chiefly) of the modern dialect

%

Q

regarding the way of expressing certain English adverbs:—

10ng

1, Since (with regard to time)

and

This is expressed by means of the instrumental (i. e. ablative, § 352, 1),

s

e. 9. B 33 O aﬁaﬁomadrﬁéa"we, since how many days has this

how

Siva not dined? aoaio R0 FRARREN IO

Roowen BNy By,

n 10

LB DIROR 9D

since many days there existed in the mind of a fox

the haughty desire to become like a tiger.

298995330

SIS0

since

sixty years

~®e§osad®§ [0 éﬁ oo ééo seede , I have not seen

¢ a0

my brother since Monday.

S8 QT ¥ 2T HeSRw By e IR

) as

©3, 033y, since (or from) that fime they began to love each other SEN)

o

3;3 since (my or thy or his or her or its or their) youth (or from my,

he

etc youth).

)7 o

But there is another way of expressing ¢since (in the modern dialect),

1500

namely by means of the verb esr/> in combination with a so-called past

16

participle, e. 9. & ewOR BRI WY SN OFF Yoy, literally: to

)&Il

this town the gentleman a having come (§ 169) how many days have

o418

passed, 4. e. how many days is it since the gentleman came to this town?

goé

B[ [, BB 5,83, SToWTNBY, it is twenty years since he died (or he

died twenty years ago).

DY FSBA e%@eﬁ@% 23, SESECTAL-DIVMEA

68!,

how many months is it since you began to go to school‘? D5, TRTIY

e.eaéo T/OTIT BN, RPN &N RSI3 SPVREN JToRAPRY, 1t 18

now about 400 years since the art of printing became known

B

pgwer

DB WBY BRI, My, much time has passed since he got up (or he

)

it nof

got up long ago)

Also the past participle of SemenrReY), may be used in a similar

, 410

manner, e.g. ¥ 3 OIR SPTIRPEY, since that day

38

The Samskrita ©Tz3s 1s used 50 too, €. g. ¥R & © 0%, since that time

) the

2, Hence (with regard to time).

This may be rendered in the following manner: B8R, N &t SR deS

other

one 52.) to-day six days (will be) the illumination festlva,l or six days

——

PR

296

e

5 SoneN &% Jonyy, Six

hence (will be) the illumination festival

months this month. Cf. § 348, 29

T

3,

29

Before (previous to)

e

In § 282, as will be seen, some instances in which this adverb is

¥

It is to be remarked here that

not

expressed by =002, have been given

it is rendered also by SpBoo, €. 9. NS, JRTY BY 0T AT

teac

3 09, before you who were living here?

¥33,8, SRFwY, prior to that.

(we)

as I

aﬁoa‘i B 3TE ai BPBO WIYN P RReR Bezorug B, before building

a house it is necessary to clear the foundation properly.

A0

Thus also: IP IR SRBL OB, NWEF, SRTLI YOV ITIN, previous

10t

to words a proverb (is fit), previous to dinner pickles (are fit)

In connection with =m0, =ws, before, previous to, the negative

it

participle is also used, e. g. $93F RPELP I BR FINRNRT TGO before

|

the neighing sound of the mares entered the ear; ¥g, FRTYNA T 5003

Gon

SRR, before the black colour came to thy throat.

The same 1s done

90

in connectlon with 300023, €. g. ¥To 2393E Savoed, before they came (¢f.

clos

2938 za'adcs

g

S

Soveed, ete. in § 282).

3o

4, As

¢ As usual’, ‘as on previous occasions’ may be expressed by QRGZR, or

Uy

R TN, e 9 ToRR) OIBR, JS,VCRORTH TICR, [IRT WIIW

DI IR WwET

of

as usual Sama may have annoyed thee somehow

<)

2R3y BReY wWoBTRy W3Ry, as usual the servant came at dinner-time

9T\

Also: SH3OR3., as before; and in the mediseval dialect

O V., QS

TP, D JRND, 2 B TN

9

W

¢As to’, ‘as for’ may be rendered by means of =zd, if becomes, if

o

become, e. g. FoooR3 S3 FHRRY (Hodson’s grammar), as for us we

BT FR3 Bwenuss,. 3 (Ziegler’s Practical Key), as to

cannot do (s0)

him he will go;—or, as in the South-Mahratta country, by means of

W11

WRR, (¥RY), € J- SHE wAING ©sR, I[N 3er, as for toys they are

Say

not required for me;—or by means of Samskrita D= a3y, regard, concern

™

€. . DT IN0NT, GolH VIR, IR

) DEPEBTTT PO TRBRD

&

11})1

as to ghee it is impossible to say how much it will still rise i price.

in)

33@6#53 &)mo&%’ WQ,RIZI, R, he is anxious concerning (his) moksha.

En

Thi ;30&0305593 as to him.

39 ORBuzeN, as for that. (Cf. § 348, 17).

Use

R

297

o

), SIX

‘As if’ is rendered by means of the relative past participle with

AR nedoney

TR (or wy), € 9. TSR RPeRB, FRITRF, D

FePmon, JN, w0 WA B B[ RCPTT RoPy, BeCFR HonoMey; R2ISZT

th 1§

B, T B0, BYNYRY T6) Teead ¥R AT IRE ®ereod, it (we) do

tha

not go to school, stay (at home) to play, and when on the next day the

A0t

teacher asks (the reason), say that a fever had befallen (us), it is as if

that

(we) had told a lie; if (we) steal the books etc. of others, it is (the same)

lding

as if (we) acted feloniously

¢As long as’ is expressed in the ancient dialect as follows:

033 3350

Y1008

A0 émm'@;ﬁ S0 AR08, w¥do, as long as they possess riches, will

not also scoundlels be honourable persons?

¢As soon as’ is rendered by means of the relative participle combined

{178

with an adverb of time to which the » or & of emphasis is joined, e. g

yefore

BDRY W R O 93 WINSe

38 RBREI[

as soon as he had

00

come, his father started. MoBoRPY ¥R WSS Or WTITINSE TR

lone

See also the

2OBZ Ty, as soon as the guru came inside, all rose

6 (4

close of § 349

5,

At least (with regard to a sum)

This is expressed by 532335&!@

if (one) says it is nothing, e. g

w30y wﬂ%rﬂe@n@ﬁ;ﬁ

sa‘ad% Ngéscﬁ 282

©F CRJTINVING 39

0l

Ei

W

BREIRB, B, out of all those mmes sxlvel is put at least to the amount

Wid

of one lac of rupees a week

TR0 B DBAR VIS Z TR HDRY TRTIN

330,50 3x0, I shall get at least five rupees for this box

fime

6, Just, precisely, exactly (as to a standard or fact)

wm

These terms may occasionally be rendered by 033,43 &R (% e

BHEGY Bd ®an), to (i e corresponding to) its belng being thus,

03, If

e. g ”au% C$ Tl U938 Seard S0, you have described him exactly.

7

For.

l\ We

25 f0

If a person wants to adduce the reason (or cause) of something he

18 Of

writes or speaks about, ‘for’, ‘because’ are expressed by o3e®R 8, if

say (or if one says) why? e.g. o) & NBG FoF SPIT B RFRY

i are

%ﬁosﬁqgef’a@@? 3ed! 30938 3 W) mHyHY, shall we cut some (of the)

certly

o)

ripe mangoes of this tree?

It is not fit, for they are not ours.

;jv’aeﬂ)

aplestelt O&azﬁ&@sﬂo TORGY wRY 208 Bezon3, 3, o&a%*é 9, 95#3@

prlce

330R SReRan mdcﬂm WB Y oszc@ﬂas 8 3989,3, deceltful men must

ksha

, 1)

use much shrewdness in any affair, for all beings are watchful, lest they

38

o,

298

—

be deceived

for

SR TEY) SR 25908, ONOTI O WY 90% COMEANEAIS

whic

R SPeROT 5 Be30 IBYRY 030NN JNeRI, T3 N, we must

not (or should not) steal, for though men do perhaps not see us, God sees

AN

addi

us always

Cf. § 322, and see further e. g. Bombay school-books, 2, 1

10. 48¢ 3,.38. .105; 4, 10..16.,20, 52. 98, 111. 141

A, 0

= A

‘For’, ‘on account’, ‘because of’

In § 282 we have %=z0n, WRONT, %R,0

(Cpr

to b

with the genitive to express these adverbs; similarly are used also Ze

9N, lit. the reason a becoming or a having become, e.g. ¥z FwTN

a th

on that account; 30z, (reason?)

e. g. ¥R 30807, on that account

H

and BdxR0g, lit. from the side, e. 9. 933 B[, on account of him

of al

The same is expressed also simply by the dative, e. 9. ©3%,, on that

BT

because

T8

account; FoXF, on account of (a) work or (a) business

of the feast; 3e®@y33%,, for requesting or begging; %zo3RF,, for read-

ing; 0¥ OF,, for buying; —or by adding esP, a having become, to the

diale

dative, e. 9. A=, lit. for thee a having become, ¢.e. on thy account

3

RBe8303y BRedwe,n, for search (or in search) of game

33 0 Iwenadd

[ihit

on account of the father’s word: = Fox59,n. for that business

BRBY

1§ V¢

339,0, in order to buy

3

(Regarding the use of the dative see § 348.)

W)

«For

‘therefore

‘on account’ are frequently to be rendered by the

hook

instrumental (¢.e. ablative § 352, 4a) of &, e. g. Soonns ISy, TN

DTBE TIOIR [IRWIB 53, wEtrs @) e

Ingf

om@éé TON T3

monkeys walk like us even on two feet; therefore they appear quite

plac

like man.

QERY JF, Fo0 3371%?8

39 ?S ADIEAE

W3PS JRN ¥ST

B3eTF T WO, RaS3, honour thy mother and father;

for it (on 1its

account) their blessmg will come upon you.

«Therefore’ is often rendered

4 |

also by &33e9°g

S (BR4 93PS and sometimes also by Samskrita eud

for

him

g (with the genitive), 3203 (with the genitive), 5930, ¥@ T30, VR

(Or &) ToTLOY, BB FToTD

(Cf. § 322)

‘For’, ¢in order

‘for the purpose

Above it has been stated that

03

hese adverbs are partly expressed by the dative or by the dative with

ay

edrlo; but there is still another way to express them, namely first by adding

DD, 2 having said, to the dative (see § 332), e. 9. To¥NT 25N fmcsaﬁoﬁ

by

233360?1&&)&5& 3% z%oﬁo@ B 0RIXsY, to place the army tbat is ready

for battle, in the proper place 035371% Ry SRR wid, an altar prepared

for sacrifice;

m B2 3300 me):%o LR

having bought a sheep

l&lg

E——

e

299

W

for the purpose of killing; dé;ﬁéﬁﬁ% deo WO 3] T, the sheep

nust

which you have bought and brought for the deity; e_egjgez égcseja?ﬁx% %

&

2)

§e€s

556%)%:’30, there was a pupil with him for reading; —and secondly by

21

adding DS to the infinitive ending in e9e® (§§ 187. 188), e. g. ¥TAR0

?«":vai 0335623@’_,39%0, in order to comfort the queen he spoke in this manner

Ny

(Cpr. 3, after 63); 3,37 RBSTy w¥ s¥R, wood piled up in order

.

-

) 50

to burn a dead man

9 0oJ

303 TSR TYRY sS4, oY, a post fixed in

o,

a threshing-floor for the purpose of binding cattle to; ReSRIR [0 0%,

unt

;35?5@“"303&;5@71@3;%, IWBT wn), a prayer muttered for the removal

of all sins when one has immersed himself into water.

that

‘For’ (with regard to exchange or price), e. 9. ®3), TRZTIWA 'acﬁeﬁgi

AUSE

%Jas—r‘%ém, I bought this for ten rupees (see § 348, 19).

read

‘For’, ‘instead of’.

These adverbs used to be rendered, in the ancient

o the

dialect, by the dative, e. 9. Doanr=v &’)Uari;ioom}’\ Rgansio DTY OF ©nd

unt

030, instead of the augments dzf and Do the augment Res is used ad

libitum.

(See § 348, 15.)

b,

)

In the modern dialect the Hindusthani og3e* (WBW), change, with ep

8)

is very frequently used, e. 9. ©zI8 HERe YR IE wRUN TS BIIN

y the

WY BRR PF,TRTY %u’a%m, instead of his old book I gave him a new

book; ©@?, wroan, instead of that (in its stead); wdEwITF, wRN,

unll

instead of writing. The Samskrita %3 (Tadbhava m&, o), in the

3 3,

place of, in combination with espy is used in the same manner.

quite

‘For’, expressing time, e.g. O33Ry IxFF, for two years.

Cf. § 348, 2.

T

‘For’, when it denotes privilege, duty or assigning, may be rendered

) 1S

Jored

as follows: — Bsee0mod, 00 W9 Hro THWD (0F TR IZHDY), it 1s

for the poet to sit in the principal row. =330 & o8 S@ BBy, it is for

)

him to do that work. & ZeT REDY Tos0RGY, this mango (is) for Rama.

[T

‘For’, denoting that in view of which anything is done, e. 9. ZBRIICIT®

mﬁ%@&go&mﬁ %@%o, he gave a plot of ground for a rentfree grant.

that

B.J935N %@é&éo, he gave for (or as) a present.

fith

¢For’ when it expresses that in the character of which anything is regarded,

jding

e. g. VT caaﬁoﬁd% 8980, I took him for Rama.

;)m

8, Enough, e. g.

eady

8 FoS03%0 ﬁe%adxg& (3-6. WBe BT BXY) CSJozécSrB, this house 1s

)Med

large enough. IzoR BesanRY, 8@% 23, we have bread enough. 889

heep

38*

e

—

300

s

dgaad;&’& R0 98, I have money enough. See Dictionary under zpzo3

and 23e3o.

400!

the

disc

XVII. On the repetition of nouns, pronouns, adjectives,

sou

numerals, adverbs, interjections, and imitative sounds

[ 89

(¢f. § 253, 3).

£vel

P

303. In §§ 152 and 211 it has been stated that repetition of verbs

%

0r (

is used in Kannada (see § 339); such a repetition (vipsa) obtains in the

three dialects also

(1. ¢

1, regarding common nouns when it is intended

you

and

@) to express simple regular succession (vipsi, &nupfrvya), ‘one after

the other’, that occasionally signifies totality, ¢all’, ‘every’, e. g. T¢D Fed

af

te

3R%* 306330, he appeared with pomp in street after street (or in

A

§0n

every street); o8 Solne* &3&53@, house after house shone; enpcH

3RYS ©3303TToRY, 80 that one could say (there was) auspiciousness

5ee

in town after town; TOFRREFRY BN FORNARTROR oY RIT z‘s&éj

(the

ONT® W8S FORT Jpew IR00305O, when Karikilatola went from house

A

to house, from village to village for the purpose of ordering all people

lar

to perform press-service; %@@\gﬁ BNE VI, RDR T VD VeDRG,

dail

I will just now sow gold coins in all these streets; 3% ZIR TBone

©T95sy), in direction after direction (¢. e. in all directions) lotuses

oy

Ay

began to flower; &% BXNYs® e K08, looking at one point of the

dlSp\

compass after the other (i. e. at all points of the compass); @=8 dedF

&ont

3% 338¥o =00x0F, when his renown covered region after region;

breg

0000 . . . BOH, IB SRR 3008, Kalamégha . . . began to rage,

von

and whilst spark after spark (of anger) was emitted (from his eyes),

looked.

ever

oy,

3% 3%&3@?‘ @g)’ﬁeg) DoowaNnsAS

ever

T, %33“303& HONS BWIFANYR,

Jear

W, u?.g%?asao:ro\%ﬁo TIRPFORY, WY B BRTRER; WCPT |

Ume

i@ﬁ\gj ﬁ.@@&mﬁ 308 BoenFo AREIS,

g

3% 382)53 30 3Ton%¥o é’ﬁc%zag

303, 305 3 ZyR SyRendo FRHA TIRRAR. HBeeLI? ||,

)

S0me}

on table-land after table-land (as to the Kannada form see § 253, 3)

there and there (. e. everywhere) the host of Sabaras came like a

Mo}

B} 8l

—

301

———

W3

spreading out of very black hills on which fog appeared, holding the

accompanying and accompanying (¢. e. the many accompanying) dogs by

the collars

then beating bush after bush of abundant foliage they

discharged, never failing to hit, arrow after arrow, and with the repeated

5,

sound of falling blows felled all sorts of game in the wood

What shall

I say? Bo¢ 339730, he made obeisance to stone after stone (i. e. to

%o, having eaten mouthful after mouthful

every stone); 302y 30371

oPCS3 JPLBRY e,

the beauty of river after river (¢.e. of all rivers

eths

or of every river); S Jo (ejze e5%3 do) aﬁé’o R9, greet elder after elder

the

%&3901, %C@%oodo zS*’r’%m;‘

(é. e. every elder)!

ask young man after

young man (4. e. all young men or every young man)!

SIoNel9)

there

and there (here and there or everywhere, also @ ©); vaR&RA, step

after

%00

after step (i. e. repeatedly or again and again); Ro& SVBNRPBRFBoF

L 10

333 Z0oma B30 0, once and once (4. e. once) at every word taking (his

WO

son to his breast) and caressing (him); 303 SHRSR%* (as to form

Sness

see § 253, 3) BRQ 3,

300 30DRBRY* eus“o in every one of (its) roots

| A%

i

(the tree is) stout, in every one of (1ts) tops (it is) small; ed3 g3

10186

S5000 SPNT ISND BRez0E28,838,:3, all around the stem (of the

»eopl

plantain tree there) wave leaves every one of which (is) a fathom long;

9

Do BNy, BRA (FeSR) BwWerhd 8 Bey, (you) must go (to school)

U

daily time after time (i. e. at all the definite points of time); &%) 2w

J

11158

Ry 30N TR, BRJN Towd FNR0Y 3y, the cow was very mild in

pf the

disposition, and used to give milk at the proper times; SoNg S0ONEN

£08F

3o} o9 (as to form see § 253, 3) NI VBRI %33, cocoa-nut

1g10ﬂ )

trees get new flowers month after month (i.e. every month, monthly);

1age

goR 3on¥R BRCIRVS IZoeeFeCIYS, ¥, a magazine that is published

e) eS)»

every month (. e. a monthly magazine); sa=o 39AR, hour after hour,

hourly;

QS DI or BR DRT,, dHD

= O35 or RS aaﬁ“@

day by day,

every day, daily; [0ow &Sdosﬁ or 300X éd\m# year by year, every

year, yearly ; 2590 2590 Or 2390 23900, repea,tedly, orvon, that time-that

time, e. g. repeatedlyV; (also with regard to the interrogative o3&

S8 30, what time-what time-soever, .e. at all times, ever contmually),

Remark

1) As to the repetition of nouns of time it is to be observed that the intended meaning 1s

s

somehow also obtained in the following way:—®Snt 3oni®¥r} I WSexd, what is his

]

monthly pay? 2.595 Fodh TRABOJI® 960 éoﬁﬁﬁﬁdaﬁa 73 0A®o, he cut the hair of the tuft once

53, 9)

in six months.

#e):é) faf~Yessrlefatilal @3#@ 53)

-ﬁv@mﬂr& :)ad'a’-Ja 9.

, FOIYNYH Boﬂﬁhﬁmeﬁa

ke

—

et

302

s

b) to express a distributive sense (pratyékartha), e. g. & c3a9R030%s

1

BNAF ZPRo BpFe TR, & méda's’m;‘ BRAF ZPFo BpFo T, give

pl

each of these persons a gold coin out of this purse! give each of these

i

persons a gold coin out of this bag!;

an

which takes place with regard to 2%y and Soero also in close

proximity (sdmipya, pratyasatti; as to form ¢f. § 253, 3), e. g. 3% FSR

S0T0wone’, the pits of hell (are) lower and lower, 4. e. each at a small

g

distance below the other; P[o¢ SoeR 5 RrZtiwonies, the (various) regions

Y

of heaven (are) higher and higher, ¢. e. each at a small distance above

the other; &% J3¢R CSJ'Z;)FE\O, times of famine (were) preceding and

fir

preceding, . e. preceded each other at small intervals; 30e SoeR :ﬁoz‘p?\)\o,

times of plenty (were) following and following, ¢. e. followed each other

at small intervals;

ha

let

¢) to express previousness (anyatdtiSaya), e. g. wES B3R BRIR ST

i

SRRSRY (as to form ¢f. § 253, 3) T[p3omy, the Asdka tree flowered

e

first of all; BooBRY VST SRR SPTSRF ngg o¢, these shot first of

all in the battle;

Vel

d) to express high degree, excellence, intensity or emphasis (atisaya,

03

L]

visésha, adhikya, prakarsha), e. g. 30¢9°¢f 2oe°eF, great valour; oSexo

the

Sexo, excessive pleasantness, etc.; ao%csg;‘ u%mg a very good woman;

(RonRo) BIRFRRYNY SIw& 3W¥o3, taking (his son) completely inside

into himself (from love); %¥RweR Sos® w13, when the soil burnt

cat

deeply inside; o3y $PeROF w D %e3R &eay 8B, in order to see

Vaj

Val

that people assembled in large crowds; ;jazéﬁodo 8es Tyl B Tow

®oP w0083, what is the taste of buttermilk? it (the buttermilk) is

the

very sour; Aen g’;gggiez) ;soag;%ﬁﬁ, the sigé is full of thorns; (%@&dd)

the

’N"%@ W TN TILIDNTIZY, the elementary substance (of camphor)

kin

is white and consists of many small grains; o8 R0%8 BRBET Fwy N

Qf

wBTRY BHTO WRoEMZ 3, if (one) beats (them) with a hammer, stones

a8

break and become bits and pieces; SwBewr SeBws [F, By, T, ¥F,

08 TOIDT, TAWY FRA Wewanod, sy, at the very first it used to be

dig]

Ay

#¢Og 380 eI B, some clocks are to be wound up every day, some once a week, some

(o

once a month, 3@20??@53% TR B3 T AR [WIY, if she bears a child every hour, (there

is) the same amount of kisses.

&aﬁpgi ®BIZ 30, (instead of I, ®IY) '3&:)&23% EpTele]

hig

&0

TINBRASTY [, %033, B, every day they print from ten to twenty thousand papers.

(U

o8 &aﬁ% is expressed also by dFowI, a contraction of AIFMLY, ¢ when a day becomes’

brg

i. e. every day.

this

S

——

303

]

A

necessary to pay postage according to the measured distance of the

ive

place to which letters had to go; 8®@> 8z033, in the very middle; EScH]

1686

30‘@5@@?\ 3, 0h, having cut (the sugar-cane) into very small bits; 58?3;

%% R, more and more, excessively ;—

lose

39 ¥R (as to form see § 253, 3) Lperko, he went down and down;

41l

nall

X3 Rono, great calamity or sin; 3% B39y, excessive lustre; 3¢ 3¥B,

great shine; 32¢ 3oeny, (as to form see § 251 and § 253, 3), up and up;

01§

076

FoR Zowry, great dumbness; SHeR FPRITREPR B3 SR Fo

SR BCBe wRT TRA Q&@ec;@ﬁ%ﬁ WK, by doing so at the very

and

first, for a while, quarrels with old people may arise;—

st I3 (as to form see §253,3) SN %doﬁ@z@%, even at last

having taken the high-road; Wiy WD %'e%%’z%oﬁo SEA the very last

9

letter of a word; #ééd Zwn, at the very end, at last; S0&%Son$ 5% SR

red

Ny, the very centre of energies; ﬁégj s8®yss, in the very middle; 73

b of

D0 SReTH deg 208, Sotcdio, thou rosest to the world’s far-stretched

very point; & 233D «:Sé\zaéeca@’odom?%w& uxs:mm;\ SR JRT

X

@333355_33 SRS, IPReF eaﬁﬁﬁd@%ﬁoo, .. 9O¢ew938, there always shone

A

Lilavati at the very first, as the chief (town) for the inhabited countries

that were situated on the south bank of the Sitd river;

131§

side

¢) to express variety, e.g. 38 338 wea B 2350&71% 008,33, there are

irnb

cats of various colour ; OSRY 3T 3TH BETRT) BTN, leaves are of

§ee

various form; Y Forneg wil wic Fe@und wrng 3, by bad deeds

79

various evils are produced; 3weRBRER wR WRR m%mﬁﬁgﬂ_ JRERTT,

)is

they saw various creepers in the garden; SR ZJyNonFo FBLTTF,

they felled all sorts of game; ©$¢3 X383 VoY 30X WwRHSNYY, many

i

hor)

kinds of things of various countries; Boea) B0e9y BRI TR do£9)

1

A

&) %ﬁg TRRARCs, the various petty chieftains came together and

assembled an army that formed a miscellaneous mass; BPO Fo03203330

1nes

o,

U A curious way of expressing No. d is found in the following instances of the modern

) be

dialect in which the action of the verb is intensified by the repetition of nouns, viz. =3

RIWDS & NTPNR0 OB % WE %@s‘%ﬁo, because the buffalo died, the cowherd repeatedly

some

(or vehemently) beat (his) breast; “S zo0dy, Sort aao&osgoa’asc%, OB W WR TRE) B3 T,

fiere

his mother saying ‘‘my son dies’, began repeatedly (or vehemently) to beat (her) breast;

a0

0, ATFY IDY FTHYNSE AR IF, Soce® e wARZ S & IR TR 0309% WT3,B B,

O mother, if thou hadst repeatedly (or soundly) beat my head at the very time when I

brought and gave (thee) the chain (that had been stolen by me), why should I have got into

168"

this (miserable) lot?

P

304

e

il

L B oSt L0, wk wdRMF wadd, they who watched the

oJT

corn-land . .. seized this cow, and beat (it) with various clubs;

ESTORPSIS

TmeFnRivy, things of various sweetness (z. e. various sweet things).

In addressing a person repetition of nouns may convey the following

meanings:—

A

envy (astiyd), e. g. BeIRI, BeITI, ATRIID FY ;

¢

approval (sammati), e. g. SonS, FONT, AT 29,3 Rody 037!

br

anger (kdpa), e.g. WONAT, wWorAn, ez’ QUFBIRe? AZ03R¢F

(0

reproach (kutsana, nindg), . g. R0, 8205, a3, B, IF0 RBM !

it

(&4 £ W ™ [

menace (bhartsana), e.g. 0¥, B3¢, &3, FeFZo! FAIIo!

1t

Instead of repeating the same noun for the sake of intensity, variety,

W

and comprehensiveness also duplication and reiteration are used more or

[t}

less in the three dialects.

1

G

Duplication denotes the use of a couple of nouns that are not

the same as to form and often also as to meaning, e.g. 8% ®TY,

excessive tickling; e85°d o, all sorts of cloth; e&sxe9y Bext, great

fi

weariness; zrodor, abundance; zo® Xpew, a very profligate fellow

4

to

TN T, pod and leaf vegetable; Nz@ned (_%%), all kinds of small

trees and thorny shrubs; g 3¢9, cattle and calves; ;sazéz,; 0e9°, frag-

&

:

ments and bits; wmy ¥n, all sorts of kinsmen;

[T, TS,

3

children and grandchildren; D53 33, words and speech; = ﬁ@?g),

3

narrow ways and nooks; =03y, 03y, the state of being all around

(roundabout).

2

Reiteration denotes the use of a couple of nouns

to

@) the first of which is meaningless by itself, forming a sort of

‘0

alliteration, e.g. @3.& 33,&, fraud in weighing; VTP B, prodigality;

©eP moe?, great tumult; £330 $edy, considerable unevenness in scales;

0r

3UTE (-=04), great fraud;

v

al

b) the second of which is meaningless by itself, being a mere

tf

alliterative formation, e. g. 1) RO, opposition; ?,.;%3_&9)3 3%, tenants;

2ox Bena, all sorts of work; Bwosy BPRD, great crookedness; T3es3

(oM al] g3, all kinds of deities (or idols); c&rac;%) zbcg , inarticulate, stammer-

i

ing speech; 3¢90 mowoo, trade of different kinds; ;S?,g :dzg, various

B

eXpense; WY B3OV, all sorts of fruits.—In this second kind of

reiteration the syllables A and ¥ are often used, being put instead of the

f

[—

305

P

the

first syllable of the first noun, e. 9. 3%y Aedy, T AD, 3D NN ?»%%w

7

W

DT, 30% T8, ST, F,, BN T

2

?

regarding nouns of indefinite quantity (§ 278, 8) when it is intended

g

@)

to express intensity or abundance, e. g. N‘gé @é’

=39 zea?ee" 0300 P

SNy’ WERoo TTO30I5D

©3 V3.0 TIRIBREE d;@eacdo 383y, DU RF

¥OR* @S TeRonvo, how much, how much (4. e. the more) the plump

breasts of the lotus-eyed Kirita woman increased, so much, so much

(¢. e. the more) the forester in the wood thus scraped that his bow

BRSVZINET 3 FRBB® VN B SOFI0TING

if (one) cuts sugar-cane be

1t (ever) so much, so much, is it not very sweet?

TBALRY VN TREA,

ey,

eRY 3o e, so large, so large (are) the cakes

how many, how many

6 Or

canst thou eat?

b)

to express a not specially mentioned amount, e. g. “5\;3 'a;s 2R3 R

not

CEY S %\mmﬁm TR zﬂe%a’m TN w3y, SRR ;Soeéﬁ <) %emﬂ%ﬁm

u‘g

7Y,

when it has been

%c%nae% ISBF, NRWIT) u%%ﬁ D RRER TR

I'e&t

fixed that in such and such a time so and so many (various) works are

low

to be done, a watch is of great use to finish those (various) works within

nall

that limit.—This "aoa ﬁo is similarly rendered by =, ﬁo e. g. 3Re¥NY

84

5\) '"5»@93 Py} 236""0260

@@030 W), BOR

&, 'aibou

5 3@@@71%3 33N¥RY éso

(A

&

%,

%JaéJ aﬁda A, m a&ra:;)oomw

Sy D& %mﬁ ﬁe%ﬁ O, fasi fas 3@

A,

;Ssa@zssjco AR, m 3Re¥ne 5937*%3 8, :—Sm %Jaejﬁ msmz%o:uamaﬁcx @J@

and

TP SRITI

3,

regarding appellative nouns of number (§ 278, 4) when it is intended

to express a distributive sense as to persons: ‘each’, ‘every’, ‘each severally’,

b of

Bone. by one’; etc., ¢. g. WS FOR avsﬁsargcé%'ééoﬁov BRPDFLE T, DR

lm )

WATo FRBI&Tey, when Basava with unparalleled affection granted every

Jes

one numbers of things desired; 2.23%»

RBOBINY 2»;3@ gSo maaﬁsﬁo

ARA)

VUL YRFN[Y, RSy, Bwen 3edy, each boy must rea,d every term

jere

and tell its meaning; 33 3F wBRW, ROBININ & T,

mﬁm Fed WeB,

the teacher must put these questions to each boy; uz&o

ZS*-@BN@@O:SJ

Iltb7

9,

®3,T m&r@

oA, near each lady (there is) a servant ma,ld RBeRTO

)0

ﬁcéu@wé@u@

czj SN&X Fodooewy, when each (or every one) of the

16!

0us

Bédas rose w1th commotlon and spoke arrogantly; Q‘é&cu@é#v ogjaz?aﬁz%

Qo° .

mm

of

28wy FRA, they (two) fell headlong on the ground ..

each one to a 31de 20 2309, 2

the

w

WRY 3 éo&eﬁ 98¢ B©TY39. 8, each one

39

—

306

p—

remains for himself: 2,230

DR OTRTEY CRTIN FRREZ e, I shall

)

give them two Rupees each;— 2,23

By, one by one, by ones; %) 2.8

two and two, two by two, by twos

[T TS 3. three and three, three

orig

by three, by threes;

IR VZTRY DLW

cah THOHA wé&m

he sent

them away two by iwo; z953 @33 ¢ 9ﬁ oo?3ﬁ 2T B d.) 35035 9

ab |

[0 ;I

$,T90 BweN 3,0, we are to go to h1m by ones by twos, (and)

1

sely

by threes in this manner — Fo Fowdy means ‘some here and there’.

whe

Remarks on No. 3

a)

Samskrita © & is also used to express distributiveness, e. g.

W

§2

BIBINR 3R,

8,3

8 W

118

PR, T3y, 30 WY, each boy must bring his own book

i

I, 3O &5355»@ @JE)OZ}J '3503 (] every man has his failines

hel

b)

‘One another’, ‘each other’ in a reciprocal relation is rendered by the

all

declension of %383, w3F WWE, or W in the p]ura,] e, g (@Z\) 03.)06) 33 3R

FOR) FTRH) VPN BUORYT® L.BHIFOF L3308 Soed3 320 BOTOINRYS, when (the

t0 §

females) went to some distance from one another, and besprinkled one another

all

with various kinds of scented water; 237 2IFRF J00WJIW, (to try) to surpass

one another

VF0) %W T J0tdeW B0 @ INBIITB, they love one another (or

EhY

each other); ®I0> %2 0w 8y #tIZBY, they are not in peace with one another ;

oy

22, 0 TRT 2%, 3 D

2,68 oboé I} zSe*u'-’o

22, 0%, 2,00 WO, they left one another;

D ——

othe

(they) must be on friendly terms with one another

The nominative plural 2WFBLWFTY

wWBHWTY expresses ‘these and the

others’, ¢.e. all, e.g. 888 WONIT® LWFBHWFTY TR, B I, when the

of |

assembled Jangamas all clapped (their) hands and laughed; 2 3HWTO WD

Iecl

F09,0 2¢), come you all and sit down!

perf

¢)

%W, in connection with BW3V, 7. e, W W 39, denotes ‘one or two’, e. g

the

2,29, 28 RoM=ED, one or two women

BIR, W WO RBew 23¢39, one or two are

still to be invited

CF. § 278, 1 (V00RE), ete.)

d)

22 BRW I, wWRRW P, as we have seen in § 292, mean ‘a certain

man’

‘a certain woman’

About another way to express the indeterminate

thre

‘certain

see § 283

W

304. Repetition of pronouns is used in the three dialects

10y

@) to express ‘respective’, ‘several’, e.g. RITO T 3

e M erleIat=lo)

ey

SowN BRI G Ty, the people were sleeping in their several tents; 9302

3

OR 00, 353y, 83y, FReBRAPWENR KPeETy, even they two rose, and went

(i

into their respective rooms: es0% Zof 330 839, $o3n9R, they went to their

oY

several houses; 3535¢ 33y, (a dvandva compound, § 250) G950, their

Tow,

respective kingdom; 353s¢ égjg FoR803) Tode L0308, 3, they take the

very

o

307

s

hal]

way to their several houses; es559 (Or €0309) AR BB INGVToo 3H,08

V0

BRY 32 O NTI D

d e e

Mg

the excellent goddess Speech who

ree

originates the respective objects of sense in the ear by words

& 0359

sent

BD030T, Yoo FORSTY SPRIZ, BREN WeTo, (one) must do every work

AN

at (1ts) respective time;

&@35’3 A& F BB %VS DoINTF aw epleronl

nd)

in the assembled mass of demes who are those each severally by them-

!

selves that stand just opposite? o590 598 W B TOF 3wy, of whom

when severally mentioned have (I) to obey the command? 33 3I3R

W

(§ 225) o3 WRABRT TIVIBTINRIIFKSF

when they respectively

Wl

raised the loud cry <the victory (is) theirs (i.e. ours), the victory (is)

theirs (4. e. ours)’

DO OIR ‘e’;ﬁqé 330, RB3 . ®BBRBY T9W3 B, even to

fhe

all their respective behaviour appears to be nice

Al

b) to express reciprocality, e. g. 330 3Z0R B R0 Bweay, having gone

(the

to some distance from one another

39y 3D SN Too SJoRSpes

her

ass

all of them having taken pleasure in one another

YORIIV.Boo 33

330R Voo, all the towns-people looking astonished at one another

(or

11

DT/ 3 3:‘3@ IR wRPaRLS, zs 39,

daily they used to fight with each

()

other; =30, 5&50, 338,91 weéobois faaaé they love one another;

¢) to express emphasis, e. 9. &53rx dm‘ nBesems, what does this cry

the

of pain mean?

QReINe, A8 TO SRy SeRo

O what! the way of

the

D

reciting is very excellent!

DVEBR BN SHBISOY, (they) do not

perform the least work; I3z QFexsp @& wo, as for me there is not

the least hinderance (or objection)

a1e

305

Repetition of so-called adjectives (§ 273) takes place in the

alll

three dialects

ot

@) to express excess, intensity or emphasis (adhikya), e. 9. 30e8 3%0eT

S03). Nes, very large pearls

2083, & (see § 247, d, 6) SeSne*

very

round female breasts;

NP0 VP30’ NP,

very white swans;

z&razé

i)

A

z&@d g3n*, very big elephants (these four instances according to sutra

391 of the Sabdanusasana), 3R¢0 30eTr 303y, 1%, very large morsels

n

nb

(in which 3»ed appears as a noun); 0 20, that is very large; z&@cé

311’

z?mzé wodw 1o, very extensive plains;

zﬁ@d ﬁJazé =Y rish, very lalge

tow ns

2»%% 8%, ®BNY, a very small vessel (a boat), e_abcﬁbcﬁo that is

1!

he

very wonderful (also thrice repeated: ©0z05303)); B3 BRIR IR JGE

395

e

308

[E—

%

psfol=] 35395

IRGFSBOYFT0

[0

seeing that chiefs after chiefs

had fainted pierced by many long arrows; Zwg 3»T, very far

RBSRe

9

2

w3we, very fine;

w3 wai, very poor or feeble; Reo Rea, very small;

£ac

b) to express variety, e.g. @Ry, (N%’ 3030 ) "SJa"ﬁsaéJcﬁ IS Ferotal

%

off

BRT BRT B3e3F, T9R39,38, they send that (sugar) to various distant

Qo

countries in order to sell (it); BT BNT BIRIR T TH&LE Bezard

i)

w3dF SRHTI, ;Soﬁa%oo 3RTIN, &)50 du@o\) JouN 3;3% DeFaSR, if (in

by-gone times one) had to send letters to various distant places, the postage

was half a rupee, three-fourth of a rupee, up to one rupee

SR

Fj

RV NED R 3 NPR), I0BIZ9,8, at first (before they commit great

e

crimes) people use to commit various small faults

ORIN B [0 AR

a0

) 393,59, he has six little children of various size; F3003,839 @&f@e

AD)

)

N?@ =9 §zéor1z3 NER LRIV a£ $%¥H 933, how many small 1s1ands and

il

AN

sandbanks of various size there are in the sea! (but also e.g. 289

the

BZR%NR wI0T B0 BPB Be3n%o 0303 53, to a division of the terrestmal

fru

globe belong many small and large countries); ©edg SSJJ@JS $08)y AT

(th

0

w908y, the various chief officers of the army; @;Soéécas ﬁ@QQ§ TORTOP

ST, BTTRY, cﬁoaf. QRB an,zfuaéem Ty S9&, having made Amrltarava

£a

Govmdaravakale and othels various eminent officials.

(All the instances

A

-

under letter & are from South-Mahratta school-books.)

an

¢) to express separateness, otherness, e.g. 3ee53 Secs3

separate

gl

different, several; Ko FINPY LGN BRT BRT ATy, the tiger’s

ears are small and far from one another

@n

PR3 WD TN BHAD DR O3

of

OB DORY WP BN BREMNIB.ORDBY

S0 RECPR

««according to

o

each occasion I steal away by another trick”, said the fox

[9y DT

i

DRI BRE INRNRNPRY, mPeRS 53, daily we see new strange things

|

of

Remarks

1,

3

The meaning of ‘very’ (Adhikya) may likewise be expressed by W®%

§0)

ete., as shown in § 275

o

2,

Also reiteration (§ 303, 1, after e, 2, &) of so-called adjectives takes

place, e. g. W8 W, (a) very poor (male person)

0e

306

Repetition of numerals takes place in the three dialects

CCE

a)

in a distributive sense, ‘each’, ‘every’, ‘each severally’ (cf. § 278, 1),

B

i

e. dg. 5@%0“#@%}7‘@&03@ 5 3@(33 0 w?bm.)é

searching the vegetables

:'O

(and) separating each one;

&)N@O&-@ﬁf)ﬁ"@ ?.ué)J“ 53 [0eSAT DononFo

il

—

309

.

16k

38 0, he brought one excellent linga to every basti

230858 23eCITTINRF

3a

- 3§Qw56 zo;'s’Ja ;io m%ﬁ BT, PYTo0 e%éj o, he gave one balla of pearls to

each of the dlfferent persons separately, B2, aSo‘@ o a)cﬁ"’a'\'{m%; 57

MY

=3

230

B3 [N TE

A e Y et el obzec‘ then the ten renowned chief

tan

officers discharged each ten arrows; awfym‘@ ®3,3), (¢- 6. By, BBY,)

0

Y

(2. e BB 3y, BB 3Y) FINT FTINRNTRY [0B,RZ,B, every

(10

day they print from ten to twenty thousand papers

3RnoxOn

u;&e ) &Sg% ngy TOVY 313208 NG %008,:3, each wing of the flying fox

tage

AN

is four spans long, S aéu@‘“’%:io u?w'\) SEEBERENT WRR T N ﬁodo:;;\

reat

230832 236823 S8

E32039 %ew%gﬁa he made (them) untie that bundle,

by

and told (them) to make each (piece of) wood separate and break (it);

o

vl\

239033030 RN RAJBRIR B3, BOTY TARRP BTITT), LI

and

BOAR B, B®S,0RY FToMNRF B335, on each bunch of the plantain

6D

there are from ten to fifteen clusters, each cluster has from ten to twelve

1l

fruits

BORRY 3003 wRRF) BB I3IN, 238, write even each letter on

»)C

(thy) board; ®»TII3dR wIR I SWTIMY BRREY, give a rupee to each

%

9030 0300 SIIFONPE WRN T INF SN SIRFST® oSy, 0, as five letters

v,

each form a class, there are five classes

DTRTRY

S9Ke TRABRT

1068

wNES

Nes, SRF 305° RETIR, 338 O

e36900 T30 Ne* ©B,0, 1f two

and two months are taken together, the six seasons, namely vasanta

e

grishma, varsha, Sarad, hémanta, (and) SiSira are formed; 330,13 T9OR

7ol S

©03 300 untody B8y, there are five claws on each foot of the cat;

(WY

z3e:$da DV OMR HTBIRD Tea) 119y, %ﬂﬁaaa" God has given two eyes

1 §0

@dzi%dzso :3@&365 ©5,08 3063 Fow

to every man; Rex3s% ?’lé’sﬁ%ﬁm

A

SR a‘éeéosa 3, they plant the bulbs of saffron in rows at the distance

of two cubits each; aomn w9, each separately; (Zog8xo) ®o& SOBNRW

SeFSor (§ 279) 3RR Nwmazégg’o o, once at every word taking (his

79,

son to his breast) and caressmg (him); sanARBRIL ) LR 3803

DR 38, 50

WY BAIRRRBIS NONRYS,

mountains wlnch thus without

e

ceasing again and again once at each galige sounded loudly;

b)

in indicating a thing, etc. as not known more specifically, ‘some’,

‘certain’, e. g. GB’ F 0 BT eﬁﬁo o &8@;3 B30 (Commentator: 2»3.@

8) Zo0TY; see '§ 248, 1), and © becomes © or ¢ in some places; w35

] 1)’

e ?»3@ z3ea§ onVP e e,wrﬁ ee2° 2

330303, when the minister valiantly

hles

WRH T DINT TOLS

%o

mounted some excellent elephant and followed

G

Gl

310

[nen

3&03%&3 TRDOY WA T3 33, on the body of certain cobras hair has grown

o

WRR B TR MY BB TRECFe DEPRYTY, o3 33

some frogs are

sald to swallow whole chickens

WL R0 3e¢, at some time, at times

occasionally; Feo FoF) (¢f. § 248, 12) HBw Frumy nys, diverse (Kannada

thus

words) have an optional bindu; 2y To Fo O3, some few days hence

how

To TOY) "%3?1%9@ WIT oﬁsae)% ﬁeé RANYRY, ®28o 39,8, in one place or

other (or somewhere) people plant seedlings of cardamom; Fo TJ)

the

B TORY ARBI N 30603 5 53, some few fruits had become ripe and

looked fine

sometimes

also

20803307 (§ 279), sometimes

2% 534,539,

3

the

2%:30FRWs30F, occasionally. Compare the instance (R03R80) S SRS

SPESoF ete. above under ¢

shor

¢)

in multiplication, e. 9. HTBTRY, four (§ 278, 1)

N\DQ

R

Remarks

Of f(

1,

Distributiveness is also expressed by Samskrita

0,8, eg IT,803H0 &

e

o3, each village

3030 ) TR WD, the people of each country

2,

reciprocal relation is expressed by declension, e. g. @09 23J &Vdohw

3NONVAY B TVY WA 3 T, 200IF NI, &irilli, timi, timingila, timingilagila

these four are fishes of which the one is larger than the other

& O NLO

%8 TR 30 BRYCIZ S, those divisions of the terrestrial globe join one another

?»5 @JB Rfo 53 (efwpia] 3.3\)('3?1%3\) houses that are near each other’ & (2»33033() Q8N

555503 ndc&e#ﬁé 2«:5 & ?:oﬁ-fa 50 BRI Vo> D3 3, between those (planta,m) leaves

(there) rise still folded leaves one after the other out of the tree

nent

There is the following curious instance in the Sabdamanidarpana, called an

the

instance of itarétara or anydnya L3RS e 303200303 LBNTY TBR MY SNBISB3R 6

U

where one (party) takes up and performs the same action of another (party, in

T,

mutual fightin 0‘)

3,

Also %D SATY uses to express ‘a certain’, as wIRATBY 3@%3, a certain

I

time, at some time or other

WM IRI) B3, a certain country (see § 292 and

g

I f

. § 283)

Worq

307. Repetition of adverbs (§§ 212.253, 5. 281) in the three dialec

Stang

expresses

a)

‘very’ (atiSayatara), e.g. %, ¥ 8, very blackly; TR TR

W

or I3y Fo98, very fragrantly; 808 3o or 59@ 39@3 very coolly,

agai;

ool oo or Do Do, very gently, ete.;

)

r-Jw n)w

aqa

;3 very insipidly,

[\

etc.; 309 3Co8, brightly, ete.;

B BN, dazzhngly, 83, 3z ;3, very

g

quickly; ney $E9 8, very qmekly, BERY YRK, rapidly; é%’ %3 vehe-

AN

o

oo

311

e —

Wi

mently (as to form ¢f. § 303, 1,e, reiteration); DoR R, very abundantly:

are

ony ony, very quickly;

e,

b) variousness, e. 9. 2,3y, IHe@Z0 w3, when (he) was seeing thus-

ada

thus (¢, e. these various objects);

106

¢) mental excitement, e. g. OF 3 ©Ip, Sortatdy Heess

9

how-how (2. e.

6 0r

how is that? how is that?); Oh, tell (it) again'

v

308. Repetition of interjections (see § 212, 8) happens in intensity in

and

the three dialects, e. g. 93T, ¥TD0, VOBV, IS IS, HSS, s s,

als0

309. Repetition of imitative sounds (§§ 212, 9; 253, 8) takes place in

W

the three dialects, when the sounds occur more than once or repeatedly at

short intervals, or also continually, e. g. MR, 2o Wos® ©RYEN; 3%

B0 [wgoiy ¥R 3,B; ﬁzi Nof Nof BFy8 3; NEO RIS Rty Ratd

S830 TOTZIPRS® BRNRNRINV0; 3ng, 33 R (with the repeated sound

of falling blows).

Such a repetition may be used also thrice, e. g. ¢

5\)@

Ny oo’ Roes mgg.

\Oh@

gils

o)

XVIII, On the expression of ‘other’, on the article,

her,

and on the expression of ‘only’, ‘alone’.

gy

aves

310. The pronoun e9 (a?;&‘)), other, in its masculine, feminine and

neuter forms, has been introduced in § 266; another way of expressing

j an

the English ¢other’ we find in the reciprocal use of appellative nouns of

a¥,

number (§ 303, 3, remark b), of reflexive pronouns (§ 304, ), and of

m

numerals (§ 306, remark ¢).

Cf. also § 305, c.

It is necessary to bring in the manner of rendering ‘other’ here

fall

again, viz. 1, in the sense of ‘additional’, and 2, in that of ‘different’.

As

and

in English ¢other’ is used in both of the said senses, so also the Kannada

words to be given below admit both of them, according as the circum-

stances require, in the three dialects.

acts

1

9

The meaning of ‘additional’ is expressed by prefixing the adverbs

48

BRY (&), afterwards, further, @3¢cc8, separate, and 5333, (23y,,§ 297),

again, to appellative nouns of number (§ 278, 4) and to the numeral

dly,

&;a{%, one, e. g. fa'?ire)dﬁro, (lit. afterwards-a-man), another man; faﬁ\@ia:)bo,

another man; aﬂg.z%)#g, another woman; 23®» 2 %’%;ﬁg, another thief;

! Bl'y

ehe

'aﬁﬁisg, another thing; aﬁ@g@% fox, another business;-—de&‘}&@z&m,

oo,

312

o

(lit. separate-a-man), another man; 333&23@%%, another woman; ¢3¢

and

633\@55‘% , another thing; dewgﬁaé s, another place; 8@&33.@5% &g, another

artl

day; ﬁeﬁgﬁﬁc% o0, another dog; 3¢632 BoFoy, some other persons;—

3088, o, (lit. again-a-man), another man; Z038, I ¢F, another woman ;

SVCRORSAR another thing; ;Su"é\@s%zg, another place; 88,8 =0, another

|

gar

manner; S08R,8) DAY, another thing, a substitute; ﬁo:&@oﬁg) 33,

P

another country; ;jeé’@ogs% Fo3s¢, another (or the other) hand; =08, Toof,

of

some other persons. (About =93y ¢f. § 280.)

W@

The same is expressed (especially in South-Mahratta) by o@RE03e

feac

(DTEIC), second (§278,2), e.9. HTBEICDZY, another man; HTRJRIT,

ol

another woman; 3BSc30300, other people; HTBRIC30Ro, another thing;

0

|

QTR %e), another place.

4

K)

oy

The meaning of different’ is, as remarked above, also expressed

(o

by prefixing the same adverbs to the same appellative nouns of number

)

and to %R . o3, separate, different, may be prefixed immediately to

gatl

a following noun, e.g. 3¢G9%»os, another or a different village; 23eC3®

fox

2ox, different work.

s

Both numbers, 1 and 2, are expressed also without the mentioned pre-

%

&

fixes, e. 9. w3 %’J@éﬁ& W BRB B, to give one thing and take another

il

(i. e. bartering). w2 RTBRIR TR T 2B, W) %sfagga, Wi

3

ﬁe@% , a gentleman had two children, the one (was) a girl (and) the other

a4y

a boy. 35 s;’)oéz&d SoeBc3R FOo3vaN zoﬁoéommc{ SRR, u%sa

j

i

13

ﬁ@;ﬁg u%ﬁ@ﬂ@ﬁg) $9®Ig, 3, they (the parents) do not equally love

tha

us two, (but do one thing to the one and another thing to the other.

Jen

AN BReN SBT3 AN @3wen, if one (is) a sensualist, the other (is) an

hog

ascetic. WY ©3,¢ TV, még XeRe sow, the mother-in-law’s time (is)

A

35

one, and the daughter-in-law’s time (is) another (¢.e. different).

s

W) FOR, ¥R ?»5% fox, this (is) one business, (and) that (is) another

d ]

one (i.e. a different one).

R

To this belongs also the expression u@aég’aﬁ% (uaﬁg) ) &);5%), lit.

one it is not, one, 4. e. if it is not this, it is another, some or other, e. g.

ele;

WY ;Ssagacéosjcscﬁ?’% 2»23@@3@,5% 308 WRoIFTIND DBR BTTY, by

talking much some kind of offence or other always happens. ao%a

Q@Qﬁoioa 2.0@093-@)5% a8 “&I-)Oﬁd@%’r}e 3¢z, a born living being must die

some day or other.

W)

boe

-

——

313

, B

311

There are no articles in Kannada that are perceivable by the ear

her

and eye; both the English definite article ¢the’ and the English indefinite

1§ —

article ¢a’ (‘an’) are mentally to be supplied, e. g

man

Feordney &, the sensible speech of Karna

329 3208 ReREIF Toed

other

Bozsy, the sun rose brightly

wIRRPR Jpen, having gone into the

\4

garden.

T, BRI, V3,

the poetry has become good.

S fefatc) %)

;)639550 he descended from the tree.

~MO) %a%d?‘ﬁméﬁo I am the son

BT,

of Mallikarjuna.

TORINTY WRIZI, B, the boy reads

9.9&560 R N%L

AV

3203

w0303 8. he beats the ox

33 TF0 RoBINJIN TORZo, RN, the teacher

teaches the boy

933y Ao®P, wWowyzs 8, they fear the lion

TS O

Wi

nRAY. the bird’s nest

3303 TRZY. the hair of the head

FITVTO3

hing;

R W, «r, the child is weeping

DL, the horse is white

FRR 3900030 SRV 30063 TREYE,B, the child sits on the lap of the

essed

(or its) mother.

DR Tede é@e&fﬁ SN zﬁegﬁ I am showing the way.

mber

BRe8NR SNy IR FR093,T3 &9, the daughter of the gardener was

]

yto

gathering flowers.

TINIT0R xboswa Wy e SAFEY, the dog and the

N

002

TRE

fox are of one genus.

e 8RB ;55)50 the word you spoke.

59X, the Kannada language

30?502::&53 the Hindus.

*’d@ewfabmatﬁ

| pre

Feor ), the philanthropic Karna.

K809 én)%s Oy, Alexander the great.

30308, 80, the rich. Rorvogd, the river Ganges

esnR=ed, the gem of

other

ot

the sky (¢. e. the sun). —

3STel, a head-tie.

nRBRBA3V0,

other

3@?&,@@9@ a fort with a choultry.

a village- chlef

WP RTo, thls (is) a learned man.

0953%°

mzﬁﬁ

)&) 50‘

that (is) a respectable woman

e wOoR BRIRNF BRF T30, & garden

Jove

that is at a distance from a town. ©=3 33,0 83 980300809,

he has a

other

pen

RE, ®S8 T230300eay, you have an mkstand

~9'a aﬁozﬁ a small

15) an

house.

o

NN

&

BBINTY PR, TSFY WRISTYE, the boy reads a book IO

¢ (1

F0503_ 08

I hear a noise.

B0 BPIF AeSTINY, TPRVTY,, the master

I

sends a servant.

DL 55557?5;&) SReBeS 33, we see a ship. KRR YR F

other

7Y,

a new book. m?e TR, 4 good child. c%d'azé *"’&ﬁ a big box.

BoRono, a bad boy

DT Z3Jazé DEN DY, what a grea,t storm! oac,u

)

e

)’ Jif

emNO&QQﬁﬁeé SleviNintwl how useful an instrument! faa") &, such an

0

elephant.

) by

Remark

M e

The appellative nouns of number 37, %W, %, (§ 278, 4) and the numeral

f dle

s

28 (§ 278, 1) in its different forms (3%, %%, ?'055 23, W7, WU, WIF, WO,

é»‘3"') when used so to say as adjectives, cannot be used as articles; they denote

40

—

PUEEN

314

“a certain’, ‘a particular kind’, ‘single’, ‘one’ (nearly equivalent to the indefinite

1m0

the

article ‘a’ or ‘an’) %WFSdT0, a certain king. R INRIF NIFFP) 300 SR

odanief awo FSR YT 33y JTe, and when one proud king treats an excellent

(}

poet stingily, will not continually liberal persons be born on earth? 33 OF)Z=0

20, 03 SBRE BBINAZ D, (there) was a certain hoy of five years called Sivu.

184

ROR, T3 W) IWY0RI) W) WVRI wewrn FeeN, a certain bad scholar having gone

to a certain king.

ﬁoscgpﬂsﬁodga 2»:5% 23330, multaga is a certain tree.

23 T,

the

a certain crow.

%3y IR0, one day, on a certain day.

%3 039, one mnight,

3

in a certain night. &:é% a3 2, mﬁomﬁm Be0RON BRENITIN WBEIBLEN W)

3083 8RN zox?b B¢ Jercd JowAB), when one day a certain man went to a

foreign town, there was the young of a certain tiger lying under a certain tree.

a,

©FOR 2w IR @uesy, they had one boy.

22), 13,3 09 AL 23 FFP 930,

51

in the house of a certain Brahmana there was one cow.

VO %Ry FT 568803 5,

there a single tree appears.

23 DIRBR®® W30, he came in one day-

2039

G

SHFBFO, he stayed one year.

22, ﬁéé

2

P

an zé%mcﬁﬁs% 2y JoNIH ROP@I)

)

DT, W DM ‘3%50, a certain gentleman had a certain son called Candranitha,

and a certain daughter called Subhadra.

P\

B

312, ‘Only’, ‘alone’ are expressed by suffixing the postpositions

he

2 0T 010 WIF, WWF, W, WY, € J- wFd NeasY, wrid3uness, is he

are

not the only powerful man in the world?

wWrS 3309 33883, “0, is

he not my only son?” (thus he, the father) not saying. &%ﬁe FHIJ, he

rgs

sat down alone. ?»2%)[3@ SMNMURENIA) %@9%50, he lay down alone in

st

the house. IR ep%pﬁg & B0 B5 %@%@%&2, I alone cannot manage

¥y

that horse. @38@%6@ WE 8, they came alone. TR &%ﬂe Etaga)

g

&g{ %‘séﬁo, I saw the king was alone. 380 3@3®%£Q A %"eé 30T 0

1tp

wxd I eFosy, if he alone has to build the house, great toil will

Iem

come to pass. FoRY BEC1T AN $5930 @5359233(38 Fe9R0, he alone

IIBR

took to heart the advice I gave. ‘3303.@&5?%3, the mother alone.

Mot

W%

(A

, she alone. @6@%8 SseniF, this is the only way. 3R aﬁﬁﬁ%ﬁe

let

=ongv, this is his only son. wR ¢ ;jéga, a single town. (See § 212, ¢,

and ¢f. § 282.)

i

Le

XIX, On additional tense-forms of the verh.

hap

313

Ancient Kannada grammarians enumerate three tenses (kalatraya,

fo

§ 145): the present (§194), the future (§ 200), and the past (§ 198).

Why

We have seen that both the two forms of the present tense of the

M

pE—

315

UER—

inite

modern dialect differ from the form of the ancient one (§ 196)

Besides,

O\l

30

the contingent present-future of the modern dialect has been introduced

llent

R

\ ~ <

(§ 195)

On examination it will be found that the ancient form of the present

VL

is a compound-tense, and that the two forms of the present and the form of

o008

'Jﬁ

the contingent present-future of the modern dialect are also compound-tenses

Analogously also other compound-tenses are formed in Kannada (¢f.

ight,

WY

§ 362), although they are not specified in ancient grammars, viz.

t0a

A sort of continuative Present, e. g. w33, 'az3 e, writing 1

1,

e

am, 4. e. I am writing (see §§ 172;

196, 1), or

uéoﬁoosa

2803,

98),

(§ 196, 2).

¥F SBR[, BT 3,

VTR TOVY ToEO3NE, ap) St et

I 63,

9,3

ﬁsoéaio 0S50TOR VR FRERIG TSR, TR onw WP &is@zéoé 3 23e3.

dm)

8P IRBoNTTR _&_QN 3 a%m mzb o35 ﬂocéo mzb o3RO 83,050 e

f

ha,

%Jacéo ERAER

pNoY~TaL=N Ndmﬂ ;Sm&ﬁcaei% uzﬁo;ﬁ SOR wYNYIY

dsarﬂo-j %a~€ zf%efam:ds; aﬁo;} BRA,TY 033@5 i?em%’da Bezond, o

(L NI}

till ueedles become 1eady and can be sold, (there) bemg are not,

1008

i. e. (there) are not, required for any other work so many persons as

s h

16

are required for the work of making them

18

It is to be remarked that this continuation is also used, when the

he

present participle is combined with the infinitive or with the imperative, e. g

) 10

REspE o alole] @@adr'ﬁogf 3%38 SR, VIPFRT AT d Ino

336

) 330 Rod3000, when &3 Wthh as a particle (or adverb) has the

e

meanmd of ¢a little’, expressing is, ¢. e. expresses,

<the half of a thing’.

e

it partakes of (the rules regarding) euphonic combination (see § 215, 6

yill

remark 1)

8ro8d 3e®, (you) must not (continually) laugh. Sorde,

one

93 SPu TR

NEQRVS TY

O daughter, (continually) serve (your)

80

mother-in-law and (your) mother’s brother

SO 3RCHUBY BB BRE

e

let us play in the garden

), 6

e e

A sort of contingent present is likewise formed, e. g. @SR SN W0

Fistl

SX~DY 2, writing he may be now, ¢. e. he may be writing now.

{)

H,

The continuative Imperfect, e. g.

PrIdoontro, entering he was,

i. e. he was entering

228,20 P, JSSFRZY, T, when the monkey-

banner rose to its full height and repelling was, 2. e. was repelling, (the

1a,

foe, the idea of the past arising from the past participle ¥%)). SonoF &3,

whilst he crush d (them, see § 362, 2, b).

EANOIIR cﬂesﬁw 0030T* VFYTS

9)

o30R¢ emmyoﬁ\ow»omm 3;3 3,8, BFTF, then the Apsaras, sa,ymg “huzza,

the

40%*

=

P

316

—

|

huzza”, quickly brought waving-platters and holding (them) up were,

2

i. e. were holding (them) up

BNRRDY P3RS

WNR0E Iy, the

¥

washerman washing was, 4. e. was washing, clothes

RERY wLWTIN 3

33 %Dmﬁ;’ﬁo 23,87 B AT, ITPGeS SwES 3 3o, when thou (as

of

little child) weptest, (thy) father laid his work aside, and comforting

art

was, ¢. e. was comforting (or used to comfort) thee

SO0 BReTIN

wh

09353

w0e2) 3 B3 89, When I went, dining he was, 4. e. he was dining

ol

10

SRTVZe YR.T WRITIN ST ONF IUNR VWS DO BREPR RN e

38 T W08 &, when reading the first book, the letters being known well

were not, ¢. e. were not known (to thee) well

therefore reading thou

4]

08°

WA

wast, 4. e. thou wast reading (or usedst to read), even each letter

separately

[

URIBOR BNTS. 0300 TIVIREN TR0 BN aé@@&godomo{

1§

oo Wezarvd 8y, also then just as now becoming it was, 4. e. it became

g

(or used to become) necessary to sit in a boat and cross the river

Wa

3,

The continuative (or habitual) Future,

G- 9

DO3RARSTDETS

(Sabdamanidarpana siitra 14)

employing they will be, i. e. they will

anc

employ (or use to employ; vritti

BRENRIFTF)

Noaoéo&ra%;‘

80&%3

(ser

TeoWIDF WY VODLF DR VBN YTy (Smd. s

59), in euphonic

%

combination of letters consonants without a vowel uniting will be with

a1

¢. e. will unite with (or use to unite with), a following letter (vritti

g

050390 5353))

R B3 NBN WIS TR0 BN WRIZTTIN D39, w3030

whi

00238y, if thou comest at five o’clock, most probably writing I shall be,

i)

i. e. I shall most probably be writing, a letter.

RoNRTY eﬁajdeom?:o

(an

Wew@o @ 0038y, women asking for will be, 4. e. use to ask for, ornaments

Cf. § 366, c.

by

4, The Perfect, e. 9. ©FerzonFo

3 ReNToFo B3, darkness

having quite swallowed is (see § 203), 4. e. has quite swallowed, sun and

the

moon

SNFET ﬁomﬁg‘ L% RUTOATD

odoo 3¥BTrFo. know the last

b€C|

letters of the (five) classes; having got they are, 4. e. they have got, the

oy

name of nasals.

%30%?;5 o RRF WRABFTA, having been born is a son,

2. e. has a son been born to Kulinda.

Wi

TOOTIRI Ndn)ﬁa;ﬁn ﬂ%};ﬁ;

X809, N, Kalidasa having composed is, 4. e. has composed chatmlng

the

poetry.

TBINT moSR BReNma e, having gone are the boys, 3. e.

S

have the boys gone, to school ? faile Q:?cé@m ooeF widy? «F 8,

RRPEBTHOID RN ;)a” %Joef\m 8.3 aﬁa"‘% uso B39 2, &:dd docﬁoe

Al

JDwe 3 TP, — ZRES™, @eﬁo

O BOH T ori@e Ssoo

08

bg

i

317

——

6r6

the

Reown? —on[ SRRy 2328 (1. e zb'ejgs o, see § 196). — o330

5]

)

l

vy

4

wBiB, BRIT (i. ¢. 383 ©8). (f. § 315,

In the ancient dialect this so-called Perfect may convey the meaning

as &

of the present, e. 9. 305 FTowYyo FIRF HRDTFO Sﬁ@éﬁddoﬁ, four

ting

arms having nicely appeared are, 7. e. nicely appear, on Vishnu.

Also

o

when the common future of ¢ is used (1ike BFIFO), this meaning

LI

15

A

holds good, e. g. 303835 HRBWYYFR) BoednetdT. . . . Neagade3ons*

00

gneoon®, nicely having appeared and having shone will be, 7. e. nicely

well

appear and shine, even the numberless shops of jewellers, etc. aRFXs*

thou

ot

er

WLPOYFRON H3pef 8B¢Z0, a substitute having destroyed will be,

i. e. destroys, like a foe, that which is (§ 198 under 3).

If the final verb

o)

is in the infinitive, the meaning of the imperfect too is produced,

ome

¢. 9. TRYTo W¥SX0Y, when the ear-ornament having shone beautifully

was, ¢. e. when the ear-ornament shone beautifully.

N

Fo

If this Perfect is formed by the combination of the past participle

Wl

Il

and a verbal noun of the past, again the present may be represented

\d,‘pé

(see § 169 and § 198 under 3), e. g. £,7)3 T,F0HTF WBIB VRWBNNRB

010

WXOF WBeRTBoF 3P0 ""CS&ﬁQC;SQSo xddgqso &’)Cﬁri@o ?5‘{3)@833030;35‘ DTRTY,0,

W1

i

a union of two words which consist of a base (and) a suffix, having

ittt

desired by having been (or by being), 4. e. when a union of two words

dou)

which consist of a base and a suffix, is desired (or is to take place), two

| be,

euphonic combinations are formed by the learned, (viz.) the internal

&

(and) final one (§ 214). 2PICDIABIFTY DOFIDA 'v"%?oﬁoé& SRIaEAY

ents

SNRY WRBRY® BeSonaBdWRoe, it is impossible also for a king to remove

by slight what having been called has been, 4. e. what is called, destiny.

It may still be mentioned that this kind of Perfect may be used in

(11688

and

the imperative, e. g. goRd wESREBHBIR wdA ©ng®, dinner having

Jash

become be, ¢. e. dinner be ready, within my arrival! RodoRgs wT=H

e3R8 Ty RweNdeeed, having gone let us be, 4. e. let us be gone,

the

§00,

within the guru’s arrival.

i

It is scarcely necessary to state that this Perfect is used also when

ming

the participle is a negative one, e. g. & 335° VR DIBOFY 0 BHF BIWE,

5. 0

since how many days has this Siva not dined ?

%

5, The future Perfect, e.g. gos> ¥, TR WIAR R VY BFNFRY

7308

28838020, when I come to thee how many letters having written thou shalt

08

be, 4. e. how many letters shalt thou have written? @oﬁag waR Soedd

-

318

s

TIRY BREAN BRENT3RY, when it has struck five o’clock, having gone

it

cal

out I shall be, 4. e. I shall have gone out

AB, BeDIIWFR SROSREBR

¥R 33 ©anR 8AZusRy, whilst thy worship of the gods takes place

wa

ha

my cooking having become will be, 4. e. will have been done

6, The contingent future Perfect, e. 9. Regs wman &7, BORG SOD

63@33 when thou comest, my work having been ﬁmshed may be, d.e.

kar

ex

may have been finished.

035900 & T, w@baa o, who having written

this letter may be, ¢. e. who can have wrxtten thls letter?

@ma P31

de

it

weR @ndedy, at that time dinner having become may be 7, e. may

have become ready

7, 'The Pluperfect, e. g. 9= WTISET, D, S00W TR B39, WIOR I

e

having written I was, ¢.e. I had written, the letter, before he came

B3> RoBNE. Fovotd [ o3 0l 3 <o, having left he was, ¢. e. he had

left. the house before ten o’clock

BTT WIIBE, B, Do TR

Ik

30, w0303, TR Xy, having sat writing letters I was, . e. I had been

before he came.

83

writing letters,

Seny B8R SRR 63&)@?\53;53 333

R

PRR SRRRENB W, having gone I was, é.e. I had gone (or went), to

ho

his house, but he was not at home.

-3@3 AR ZoSR 059F W QW

Tl

why having come thou wast not, . e. why hadst thou not come (or didst

thou not come), to school the day before yesterday?

8 SDNZTI oIN

of

DT BOW BREAD 030e? DB, BREND R0, having gone thou wast ever

Having gone 1

00

i. e. didst thou ever go, to the house of this old man?

was, 4 e. I did go, the day before yesterday

WA STB FHNR W) BOE

I

S89° o3

under a certain tree a certain tiger-cub having lain

down was, 4. e. had lain down

BAR ToOR WR TIRY A, TOT

1

0

a certain snake having coiled itself was, 4. e. had coiled itself, round the

foot of a kite

the female sparrow

i

38 ¥ Sued a%e@omz:) TR,

having sat was, ¢. e. sat, on the eggs.

09230 303030(\40 ir#\ou To00NT,

a8

N

S0 [oTeR %Jazs 63830 king Adyuta having died was, 4. e had died,

one leaf

Ul

before king Kr1shna

bBos DR ICHINIBRR DY BEIDD,

within the reading book having been torn was, . e. had been torn

(i

& TRTION OO T BRHB? 33, 30O DA

where did you find

Y

this rupee? Having fallen it was, ¢. e. it had fallen (or was lying) 1n

my house.

ea;:a 839, &3, SRENT SOOI 08 Seed ey **aé.»

W

O mother, in our back- yard on the mango tree (bees) honey havmg put

f§

was, . e. honey had been put (by bees).

22, ADTIMRN ToENRT, BREN

it

ot

319

—

0ne

236%53) 2»5% WRY VIIIT #iwoa’i ;3:@&?\)653553, a native soldier having

39

caused was, 4. e. had caused, a certain very sharp sword for going to

war

108,

»33 8, aﬁe&ﬁ ua%ﬁ [ mc?;%%, when he came to see me,

having dined I was not, ¢. e. I had not dined.

Ao

Already from the instances quoted above it will appear that this

b

kind of Pluperfect, though in form a pluperfect, does not always clearly

fen

express the meaning of it.

Thus in the ancient dialect it may simply

3

denote the aorist, e.g. S» FToRABoFZy =R, the month Migé grandly

10y

made its appearance (see § 298 under 3), or the present in the instance

@eo*oadaio%wﬁsg VRO DROTIFRR 333;35@@)03@@6? and in the instance

oY

Qo BLNTFRp DRRBRT IRorto? (see § 271 under do), Compare

16

§ 315, 2, I (about the passive).

14

Remark.

Also relative compound-participles may be formed, e. g. the continuative

%

el

present one:— ©XI W33 BT XL3Y; the continuative imperfect one : — T30

@;5?65& eﬁmcéoim%r{ 033933R ¢ mg)m fﬂams% m’%do; the perfect one:— TG

]

OmaF ¥ onody 28> BB, (let the wood of) that Cénnangi tree ornamented with

to

bosses (be taken) for a elub (§ 241); MW, 23 Se¥R WOTIT Toe) FAMEIY ©OA

V)

)

BR 89, 839,33,

st

314. Here may also be introduced, especially if the compound-forms

of the modern dialect given in the remark on this paragraph are

1,

1

considered, what is called the Conditional or Subjunctive by Europeans.

Does it exist in Kannada ?

Il

1

There is no subjunctive mode (mood) or particular form of the verb

in Kannada, which is used to express condition, hypothesis and

)y

contingency; the Kannada conditional is formed simply by certain

e

suffixes added to such parts of the verb in its indicative tense (see § 144)

W

as we do already know, 4. e. to the present-future relative participle

)

(§ 180 seq.) and past relative participle (§ 175 seq.) in the ancient and

medieval dialect, and to the latter participle in the modern dialect.

The suffixes or postpositions for expressing ‘if’ (§ 212, 6) are %z

I

(in the ancient and medieval dialect), @ (in the medieval one), and

%3 (in the medieval and modern one), ¢ being the original form.

%8 very probably is 2.z¢ (which we believe to be another form of

9

%%¢, euys, to be, see § 194, remark 1) and the o of the infinitive

(§8 187, 4; 188, which ) means ¢at the time that’, <when?’), e.g. JpedRa,

at the time that, or when, (I)'go (=the English ¢if I go”).

et

320

ety

About %@ (=»a®, »8) the grammarian Késava says the following: —

V)

«The word 23 which expresses a case (or supposition, paksha) and

ends in (the vowel) o, is added to the end of verbs (dhatu), it being

B0l

connected with the three genders, the three numbers (and) the three

persons”, e.g. SPELIHEN BI§¢ FCIP° o, if (she) sees (or inquires, ¢.e.

part

for inquiring), she (is) the junior; ®zo J0BZJpITo LORe, if (he) speaks

bug

2eBIRP

properly (é.e. for, or in, speaking properly), he (is) the senior;

thes

3O FB308 edono, if (it) blows, a fragrant breeze blows there;—

"53

am;ﬁpz&@;ﬁ?ﬁ w9 o, if (he) fights (i. e. in fighting), he alone (is) ove

i)

who possesses skill; wﬁQ@NJ@a@ﬁFdoo 3% o, if (they) compare (é. e. for

diale

comparing), even both (are) fit pexsons,

SoBi3pwe Too Ss035003a0f,

if (they) speak, all of them do not know (proper) words; — DRTFIPBRS

are

se% 3o, if he approaches, he (is) a good one; 3BorRpAETTEYTT, if

it

(they) correct, they (are) good ones; 230239 @ Jew W, B3, 1f (thou)

solicitest, thou (art) a good one;

RIPRB S am?&)u‘ if (you) give,

ton

you are good ones; gANVRTIT® W¥ C3o, if (I) consuier I am a good one;

I]egc

100

RO BROTODS w® 53@, if (we) serve, we are good ones. (It will be observed

that 2@ may Sometlmes be translated into English by <for’, ¢to’, <in’, as

wel

also e¢3. @3 may get that meaning in the medieval dialect.)

49

(oY

«Also for the three tenses 2.7 is used”, Késava adds, e.g. YARAE

zl’)éio if (he) lied, he ceased;

RHoIRIPR TR o, if (he) opposes, he

Ex]!

kllls 238 2T 3R FFWR0 S0RIT0, if (he) will pamt he will have a brush

the

brought

Another instance of Késava’s is the following verse:—

010

to 1]

@em%‘m RoeY, TRWLO;

@Q;So%&.@ e weq Soaz’a

wee?ﬁOde

%5 |

adde

‘peéo@n z?mm 2393@ z%

Wi

QXY a;ﬁe) o.;J@%ﬁ;S m@éaé*@m? ) (See its translation in § 360.)

Acg

Instances ﬁom other sources: — @33 VONY FLeLUS3oT DEIRIIPR

18e(

390 [3D3R RBow. — zeIpRo (if he protects and) Snosspn (if he

kills, 4.e. for protecting and killing) 3083 desdAWE F3F30 B T

Slal

ang

SpBo BRLIPRABT Lo 23r8e? — VRONRIBPRIBSS0TY, TFF3B

Stat

359RFo.— BRRISR=eAY (if we shall give, 4. e. to give etc.). — 3 ¢

é\faw [] ﬁO:SOQ d)“

In§

ang

1) It may be remarked that the Tulu 3 in the so- -called subjunctive, e. g. in SIPPY, S-3,

if T make, seems to have originated from ®® (=®u®) by the euphonic elision of mltxal )

after a preceding vowel.

by ;

—

321

e

ATZTODNT B, FRVIST TISTZTIIE Birde?

LN

& EDY

e

1

500N BRI B. — BRI NJES&?’J% THE WPRE 09,003 QRN —

13

B BB BBF, ®3.0 AR 3 B

00

w® and g are suffixed also immediately to the negative relative

L]\\

participle (§ 175), e.g. 30399, CBNB, B BRB, V0 BRB, B BB, FLIEH

P

but they are chiefly suffixed to a following amF, as vBeF® and B3R

these being joined to a preceding so-called negative gerund ending in

0e

83 (§170), e.9. ¥UDBRFR (VVB+BBRFR), VO DBRFE (VL B+

In the modern

for

BRHFAR), T3, 0RDBHFR, 3LBOBAFR, TRBOBRFE

",

dialect wherein 53 is employed and mzg takes the place of wziF, there

col

are e. g

D3, VOOET, IRKOEB, SRRIB I

instead of ©© 3

if

it uses also BReS (VRET+ ¥I), €. 9. INABB RREIT, ReL3IT BRETT.

o1

Also Samskrita 5% has been used by Késava in the so-called condi-

tional instead of 2, (@z% and 3), his three instances referring to the

06,

negative relative participle, viz. 5930805036238 BT o, if the conven-

ved

tional meaning of a word is not destroyed.

aaﬁow r\)& IRE D Nvo if the

a8

well-known meaning of a word is not destroyed (gagjgw AR OVAN @Céd =T

D,3RCFPIPOITS wRIB BT 0 (sutra 235).

39 commentator)

rfvé

calthough’ are

In § 287, 5, a. b it has been seen that ¢though’

he

expressed by 2.3, o2 and 3 in connection with &o, evo, ew joined to

ush

the past relative participle, and without those postpositions by evo, e

joined to the so-called gerund (§ 154 seq.), and in § 288 by &nwg joined

to the past relative participle

According to § 287, 8 %@, ®r and &3 1n connection with o, enn

added to past relative participles express ‘whether —or’. In§286 we see that

%z and 3 in connection with e, enn are used also in a copulative sense

0)

According to § 287, 6.7 w3, &3 and e3 in connection with eo, evo are

te

According to § 289

5ﬂ

used to express ‘at least’, cat any rate’, ‘even

SE0R O &ane, express ‘however’, ¢but

tc

According to § 291 23

79

and 3 in connection with e5o, e mean ‘soever’

and in § 296 1t 18

e

stated that es3 joined to the past relative participle &3, expresses * but’.

X

In § 338 it will be stated that 2@, etc., when added to a past participle

and followed by wo 3, get the meaning of ‘except’.

Gy

In the modern dla,lect ‘unless’, ‘except’ are frequently expressed

1&1 @

by Rw3F (a&faﬁﬁéo\ following a relative past participle (§ 282,%),e.9,

41

e

322

———

101

DT BPRE BRIJF mev wIdd o, unless (the guru) initiates, final

beatltude does not come.

mﬁ) é“:ﬂdﬁo @% AT BRZF BEIZTY 83 4%

(i

Loy

3 BTN ©& 8B

unless (you) take notice of other persons, other

I

persons certainly do not take notice of you

DOTIFD IPBRT BRIF

Tookel Fe¥, except (one) makes a legal complaint, the kinsman does

U]

not hear

211

(0

‘Lest’ 1s to be expressed in a particular way, viz. by monR (or @8)

in connection with the relative negative participle, e.g. QY FoON TR

(1.

bec

ARew) 3980 xoR BReFwing, take care lest your foot is (or be) hit

by the sickle.

gar

Q30R aﬁ@ﬁa"fae@ Un8 TR WP T8 &3, wWIsHY, do

not eat many pungent substances lest your stomach pains (or pain).

the

BREINDVON 035'@5:3@;50 FORRY WD woR) ReTong, 3, 035@556 wﬁ@%

gral

N 330R Swesen mdﬁm WY 2B was 2.0059, 8, deceitful men must

use much shrewdness in any affair, for all beings are watchful lest they be

Lsh

deceived

Remark

dﬁ

Some pertinent instances from the modern dialect of South-Mahratta

(S.-Mhr.

school-books) with regard to the use of «3 in the so-called

i

conditional are the following: — 88 u8mg®§ W30S, 538 DORY JF, TRA

a3

23030383 §o (literally) coming if it was (or 1s) to me to write, wrltlng

or

I was in company with thee, 4. e. if I could write, I should write (here)

J3b)

in company with thee

SRR ¥R T, Yo Se? WS 33 [oPe w!

TRR BP9, is mine not the same road (to school)? Coming if (you)

are (4. e. if you come), come even to-morrow! Let us go together.

v

Kar

RROFRY BY 63:38 S} %5303093 30w 2BY WL By, T, TOWNS, B,

AB WP RS b@f\ %oé&oé v, zsaja wHTE v, the sun not being if

was (. e. if there were not the sun), on all suies coldness falling was

is

160

(¢. e. it would be cold everywhere), darkness would cover, trees and

creepers would not grow at all, and we should not live

RVRANSY B

hag

&58 ""Soocsc&faems aosa cSea’@N SATCNON aio deé% RRNROFH, WIOTR

1ty

Pra

233367% &)doé 9, Sh1ps not bemg if were (z e. if ShlpS had not existed),

coming not was to men (¢. e. it would have been impossible for men) to

Ouy

Blity

go to and to come from one country to another country. T3 zIo0®

203 TG 3 & ©0R,T) S’N 09T W03, 3y, my mother’s word having

heard if (I) was (é¢. e. if 1 had listened to my mother’s word), this

Sl

misfortune why befalling me was (¢. e. why should this misfortune have

e R

befallen me)? I3, SoNRe, TR [OT VAT 3 [Zy, TWwervd Q, my son

-

e

323

nal

from the tree having fallen if (thou) wast, having died going thou wast,

(¢. e. my son, if thou hadst fallen from the tree, thou wouldst have died).

z’N

her

9.90333339 SR TR %Ja%éjcgd@ & NBITY, 9%y 0P0NW TRRG, B o, fifty

3)

rupees (one) having given was though (i. e. though one had given fifty

Jges

rupees), this tree to whomsoever giving I was not (. e. I should not have

given this tree to anybody). & 300w 3§, 390R SPI Fe9g S enT

N

TR @ﬂoi%%, the young one its mother’s word having heard if was

N

(i. e. if the young one had listened to its mother’s word), to it disaster

hit

becoming was not (é. e. no disaster would have happened to it),

Re-

do

garding B Y see § 316, 2.

n)

The author of the present grammar has not met with similar instances in

the ancient and medieval dialect.

The Rev. Mr. Hodson writes in his elementary

200

grammar of the Kannada language (second edition, Bangalore, 1864):—

ust

¢ ReR0 3od BeerdB 3, WOINIY, if you had told me the day before yesterday,

v

)6

I should have come yesterday.’’

“This sentence may with equal propriety be expressed by: 30 3wd e’

%6 S, m&éom, or R BRF, ée@’%ﬁ RS, W BIFFY, or AW S0 éecos%d CIERALN

it

33 30, or A J0eF, BT AF, W0 TIII. !

Jled

el

“The negative is similarly expressed by the use of the negative mood, as:

]

2eS0 99, famfac‘s’ S, BB BIR0 IR, or RO 9L, famg%é o, RBR TBBRY TR,

g

1ng

or R Y AP 3 B AVBHWIR FIBNBD Y, or R BY, BBV T, AR WO

pre

m03@ 9BIRY, if thou hadst been here, my brother would not have died.”

!

815, Also what hz;s been called the Passive (§ 148), named karmani-

jou)

vidya in Samskrita, may be classed with the compound verbal forms of

her

Kannada.

s!

%

1,

The term of karmaniprayoga, or the use of the passive voice, was

10 11

distinctly used in Kannada grammar first by Bhattdkalanka in the year

was

1604 A.D. (§ 8, note); long before his time both Nagavarma and Késava

and

had not yet given that name to the peculiar compouund-verbal form and

%9

its use which he designated by that term. Sttra 2510 about karmani-

i )

praydga that has got into KéSava’s Sabdamanidarpana, is not found in

d),

our best MSS., and in those wherein it is found, it is called an anukta-

1) t0

sfitra or interpolation; it is based on Bhattakalarka’s Sabdanusasana.

i

Bhattakalanka’s instances regarding the karmaniprayoga under his

o,

stitras 443 seq. are the following:—

11

393° ATY* ﬁ'egjo, 393 ATSE xéésc‘; AT BTSE 33%0356, e

WAL

g0l

A TF 33%0‘; SR AT s%o, B35 AT x%@;_msrw 298%0

41%

—

—

324

9,3953%0 zSecéef H RREIFRR BoF (=3,) Tovo FEEes By T;

get

SRESRISDIeVL 50—3’660 5%5&0 WBRARTF wwo; WeRoTolIT® VTR0 R

are

oo FePOF ?dégjo;_éowoﬁe;‘ NPT @03%:3@6 xu&;@ AReSERo; 1T

per;

NPSS BORo FIIFZ0RS WEPRNIRS® ;:égo,o; BTRAIY Bo DWBFRSF z:éé’jo;-

Bx]

under his sttra 530: —3»BE* BT el T EIR0; ROED® T4

{n

BTRF® Bonyodo; WA [Y 30083 TRo; [RRS' DRMSR

Was

330,Bo BIRN0; IRV RRINRHY, BosWRT, & 238%0; — under his sttra

(i

ex]

5D R Séejdo or IR ?'.Ségjo; NPT ?Jééo or NS T

to; TR

&

:-.jéjgjcsg or IR 5&3&5\); — and under his Sttra 209:— @#&maéoﬁoo

all

TBTo ﬁOZ')J?SQJ‘ 5&3&53; ¥BFRo IRANJT® ¥Fo SPARS Séﬁg&do; ®D

ull

00F FRR0 TEFO IR Fef 5%0.

Iy

Now let us see how Nigavarma and Késava introduced the form of

(1

the verb which Bhattikalanka says that it belongs to the karmaniprayoga

fog

or the use of the passive.

kin

Néagavarma introduces it under his stitra 80 when he writes, the agent

to

Ar

(kartri) may be expressed by the instrumental (tritiys), e. g- B3B3 o

SRR 5&3&5\); oﬁow@dgao 2eCIed ajéjgscso.

1§

Ké3ava introduces it under his stitras 126 and 128 saying: also when

gt

the agent has the meaning of the instrumental (¢f. § 347, 9) the nomina-

T

tive (prathamé) occurs, e. g. for ®¥=Zo IWBE (0. r. IPBF) aﬂéi&z:ﬁo

fi

there may be used @30 IPAF; VRITIS® ¥F,FSWo TPBS (0. IS,

B

Soen and F9B) ;:és&m; 6@';563356 Q0 2ees 23&333550.

B

£X

In other places of the éabdamanidarpana we find: Z[eede* Trrde

(sttras 51 and 128, where the commentator has £eC9sf TRJ)s, TeLoes

tu

RWYT)); o3y of 2RIy (vrittl to stitra 127); & Do TBF 3y one*

i

(vritti to sttra 272); and zodwens mwnrvo (sttra 110, commentator

1

:’N)o&@eﬂ:ﬁ@‘ TRIFRY).

.

From the above instances it is learned that what is termed karmani-

i

prayoga by Bhattakalanka, is the use of the infinitive ending in @ef, o

Ui

and & (§187) followed by the verbs =z or 3. Instead of ese the

medizval dialect frequently has eeo (see Dictionary sub @ 1), e. g. ®en

a

ne 5&3&60. The initial £ of %Ry may be changed into 2, e. g. eveoes

mu&éo (¢f. § 215, 7, a). According to § 188 the said infinitives are verbal

i

nouns.

i

o

e

325

Both ©zs and =@ mean ‘to experience’, ‘to suffer’; ‘to acquire’, <to

0

get or obtain

Nagavarma’s instances under his sfitra 80 (see above)

0)

are therefore to be translated literally: by Dévadatta a making it ex-

perienced (. e. it was made by Dévadatta); by Yajiadatta a saying it

experienced (¢.e. it was said by Yajiadatta);—and KéSava’s instances

o

under his stitras 126 and 128: by him a making it experienced (¢. e. it

was made by him); a padaka by the goldsmith a making experienced

1%

(¢.e. a padaka was made by the goldsmith);

poem by me a saying

experienced (¢. e. a poem was said or told by me)

NO

Let also some of Bhattakalanka’s above instances be translated liter-

20

ally: by a Brahmana the king a village a begging (the begging of a

village) experienced (3. e. the king was asked for a village by a Brahmana);

by the cowherd a buffalo milk a milking (the milking of milk) experienced

of

(¢. e. a buffalo was milked by the cowherd);—by the king by the cook

o

food a causing to prepare experienced (i.e. food was ordered by the

king to be prepared by the cook); by Hari by Arjuna Karna a causing

nb

to kill experienced (7. e. Karna was ordered by Hari to be killed by

Arjuna)

The so-called passive, especially in the instances of Bhattikalaika,

is rather queer and clumsy in character to a European’s idea; but as

en

stated, it was used in the literature of the ancient and medizval period

t)

That it has been used also in the modern written dialect will appear e. g

o

from the following instance met with in a South-Mahratta school-book

I§

30003S) RIPSBRT. WRGSY RN BB B, VRO BBREN TR 8, RIS

2@038. 8, if (there) is no sickness of any kind in the body, that a saying

experiences (i. e. that is called) health;— but it is rare in modern litera-

0

g

ture, and in colloquial language it is avoided, and if used, is generally not

understood by the populace

¢

A peculiar way of expression is found in Bhattakalanka’s first

)

etc., which are to be

instances gogf BT To, FTF VIV [

translated <he a being experienced’ (. e. he was), ‘they a being experi-

Il

enced’ (¢. e. they were), etc

This may be called periphrastic, as in the

present case the simple verb woF, to be, is expressed by =o¢ and =@y

he

A similar expression presents itself in the following instance from an

N

ancient classical work:— 593, 30 F03NRTe Now’ TROVTD IBTLSF

ﬁaowwﬁo 203230, Cupido will lose his wits, not an overcoming obtain-

al

ing (4. e. “not overcoming) that Nayakirti, the chief of those who strive

after mukti.

326

s

2,

Other modes of expressing the idea or force of the passive in

Kannada are the following: —

1nal

a)

the mode of joining the verbs =z> or T to nouns, e. g. 23 OZBEy

(on

A

(-@), lit. to get surprise, 7. e. to be surprised; ©833) (-zQv), lit. to

&

get a fit state, 4. e. to be made ready; Z&o Tz, to be bound; ;’\g)eaaizgg

(-=a@2), to be loved; Tow¥ m@y, to be ashamed; 350 2Ry, to be wearied;

qui

ang

FOSA (-n@), to be cut off; HAEIR (-x@), to be powdered; &I (-x@),

to be struck; s300e9°=3@ (-x@), to be broken or defeated. Cf. letter .

n

b) that of joining the verh 3896 (3€99), to get, to receive, to nouns;

I

in the ancient and medizeval dialect, e. g. 9327€2¢, lit. to get a wound or

wounds, ¢. e. to be wounded; 2%.23322¢ (-3&), to be arranged in proper

pla

sal

order; TR (-3€¥), to be cut. Cf. letter n.

mn

¢) that of joining the verb pero to nouns, e. g. F&Jperdd (-3peny),

lit. to .go a cutting off, 4. e. to be cut off. (Y. letter o.

b ¢

car

d) that of joining a&eer> to the past participle or gerund of verbs

Car

that are commonly used as transitives, e. 9. P30 BReBRY, that is past,

that is lost; 933 QTBR TowIRB TRRY BReRT), his two legs were

ha

o

cut off. ﬁm%usgm %’@9%8 38 Rwened 3, if (I) buy sweetmeats, they

will be eaten.

(Ui

e) that of using the causative verb QR0 (®d=0), to make say or

(i

f o

call, to cause (one’s self) to be called (see Dictionary sub wvoce), very

frequently in the three dialects, e. g. 8030 *i%&daﬁooo SESAOI I ST

Ronrvo, and the first ten letters are called monophthongs; 833 390

Ve]

P

B305323v0, the mother of the Dinavas is called Danu; s@r@e®35° 2

B0 R8s, the wife that is called the half body (of her husband).

SoRIYo IR0 ﬁ?ﬁ@éﬁé ST emdo:baaééo, of Udayaditya it is said

th

“ Manu and he (are) virtuous people”.

In the ancient, and especially in the medieval and modern dialect,

13

any causative verb in the past participle followed by the verb 3¢ (TR,

d]a

&

%Jaeéga)) also expresses the force of the passive, e. g. T, aaﬁﬁ;s% @aa;&@gﬁg)

DR, ZIA TR =9, T9Y)0, any object which is called a recipient, (is) a saying

sampradina (é. e, is what one calls sampradana); 330d5° ©dA FRFS

%

&

L

3%,3=0, one who is fit (or deserves) to be beheaded; %%?\’ %’Jaag;ﬂm,

one who is fettered; FwdA S =FZy, one who is pushed away; 200

(3

Feg I, one who is calumniated; BIBRANET BRRA FRF 3

B, SR,

3

one who is fit (or deserves) to be whipped; 3359 7,008 YRTIBTo

Al

32

1t

SRBA FRPITSRY, one who is respectfully saluted according to the

manner of the Sastras

WONT FTRCH W FHRZE 38.Oe, though

&)

(one) gives the desired object, (one) does not go without being abused;

o

T DN 033530 RRRITZTR NJSJ&@"Q BREA %-J)”@o mmgmﬁ n)éjo pafet

e

accaomgsa@ however so much (one) beats (the doo) one has reared it

i

quietly allows itself to be beaten and does also not become inwardly

angry.

Cf. § 341.

3),

/)

that of adding the verb esm> to a verbal noun used more or less

1§

in all dialects, e. g. T 3weNRSZBoR, lit. it becomes a using, 4. e. it is

or

used; JpeORIZS

o8 3pee® dZwBv0, lit., where comparison takes

er

place

a saying ed (and) Fpeef becomes, 4. e. @3 and [peer are

said (or used); wmy) ZAZWER D0y, FIVT 39 B, RPN B

in one hour four thousand sheets (of paper) a printing it becomes

o)

3).

¢. e. are printed; ©ZJZ AR, PITS BDREBRedTINGY, lit. by him a

hs

carrying such a burden it does not become, ¢. e. by him no such burden

can be carried

~ %m#éo

30weaTeNG, lit. a bringing the books

i

6

having become it is, ¢. e. the books have been brought;

'@é&

~Q)C$®

ly

SRR wﬁe Bonngy 83 %’éj FoRnSe HIZTINIRY), also good deeds

one performs in an improper place, a considering bad deeds it becomes

z. e. are considered had deeds

BBy WECBREDTINI) OF VTR

!

e3PPI 30

that was said; ToOTIRIZ ‘TR, VonoNTR) TR

i

ooN0dy, the drama Sakuntala was composed by Kalidasa

(About

verbal nouns see § 243; about verbal nouns like Zwd Sweed, etc. see

§ 205, 8,1 pers. plural.)

In the ancient dialect there is found the following sentence in which

)Z

the infinitive or verbal noun ending in esef stands in the dative:—

D3 ORI, BWTNRT DT MBI TRE VR0 _3_17\)0 the term o3 eoz0

3

is (or may be) contracted, and uttered o3 90 ;—and in the same

dialect esny is joined to a verbal noun in the past, e. 9. ¥383 SHR®

7,00

y

3

émsmdm o, the writing on his forehead will be wiped out.

9 that of using the verb 8¢ (2%, ) with the noun ooéSJ e. g. VIR

igj

*’é&o 35 he was beaten, lit. he ate blows or the verb ?De&‘)‘ (2e2)

Wlth the noun WRZ (or ©3)), e g. MBTIBN WEZ (or wi) VBT,

Gurupada was beaten, lit. to (or on) Gurupada blows fell

k) that of using such transitive verbs as are more or less commonly

also intransitives, in the three dialects, e. g. w@@ozy, that is broken

JR—

328

PRSI

IENARI T8 3 =94, a cow that has been covered by the bull; 3e3&

z‘ga

$83%, a window that is opened; Fed,nR%o

EPTBOY

the ties were torn

(the

NYBS [os Kot 3, the Gauda’s house was burnt

‘e

¢) that of using such transitive verbs as do commonly not allow an

?

{

intransitive sense, e. g. B QEBRY ﬁa%’@éruoﬁ DecotZe* Wea, (you)

(on(

must not say that thus in this (section) all signs (or letters) are mnot

(i.¢

call

mentioned (Sabdamanidarpana stitra 51); wcﬁﬁo BIPFRY RRZ BRE

weu&) 3, the nominative and dative are mentloned in the rule (s 140,

vrlttl), 288530030559 %éSé’o Teorzed, the arbour was built in a

mnen

wonderful manner.

)

k) that of using transitive verbs which are not accompanied by an

skil

agent, but to which the agent has to be supplied mentally (¢f. § 254, 2

are

under b), very frequently used in the three dialects, e. g. 2¢C3 P NRF*

ups

the mentioned terminations

lit. the terminations which (I) have

hou

mentioned (see another ancient instance in § 351, remark); 3387 530300

mill

3RedATIB Sp, was Siva’s offering of water not filtered? lit. Siva’s

offering of water (I) a having filtered was it not? 85 B39A8 HTBEIR

o

u3,, 4 revised and enlarged second edition, lit. a second edition which

b

o

(the author) has revised and enlarged; NCS S[PIT TRY), a prepared

fluid, lit, a fluid that (people) have prepaled, BRONT SRPRF, cast

dan

Rén

types, lit. types that (workmen) have cast; e.m{o TOTH YA,

Fn%y, printed

books, lit. books that (people) have printed; aodcf)

-t )

PR,

¥, a written book,

1f 19

lit. a book that (somebody) has written;

Re2PBY modo, what was (or

(i

EX XNt

(4

has been) said is sufficient, lit. what (the man) said is sufficient;

SRTOIRITEPo SPBRT 93303, a palace made (or built) of bricks and

he

i

other things, lit. a palace which (they) have made of bricks etc

WwRIBR0 TR 3233, one who deserves to be killed with a club, lit

one who deserves (people) killing (him)

ith a club; =m0 TR 37,3,

0

one who deserves to be slain so that (he) dies, lit. one who deserves

als

(people) slaying (him) etc

¢f. § 358

tows

to say

Very often the present-future relative participle of ¢ (8

lit,

to call, is met with as an instance of this rule, e.g. FTaR002 MoEw

NP

BRY* ¥R BT, a@%- S e, the goddess who is called speech and is

Wan{

endowed with the quahty which is called splendour, lit. the goddess whom

h&pI

(people) call speech etc.; e @ ev 83y oy 228 23, these (vowels) called a i u

1

ri lri, lit. these (vowels) which (they) ca,ll a, etc.; FIOTTQ® DD 3R,

the chief called Kulindaka, lit. the chief whom (they) call Kuhndaka

(%a

U8

i

329

e

A

ﬁaaée-u Ry AT HBRY, & grihasta is called a snétaka, lit. a grihasta

)i}

(they) a calling it (é. e. they call) a snataka;

m%’woo %39, what is called

cenough’, lit. what (they) call ¢ enough’; »g@o0 3 ouﬁa’ma %3 DRODRE:

all

TR0 Iwd, 033:533 %o, a matré is called that length of tnne in which

ou)

(one) pronounces even two consonants, lit. a matré (they) a calling it

10t

(¢. e. they call) etc.;

d@d* w%

obdo "5\2.) 3y $30%,%, two children

J

Y

called, lit. whom (they) call Doddappa (and) Cikkappa,

See § 332,

40,

l) that of using the compound perfect (¢f. § 313, 4), the agent heing

mentally supplied to the participle, as under letter %, e. 9. RwzRRF B0

B ol BoIRe Wz, Twen RBDTZ S, lit. nests (birds) having

all

skllfully knit (them) Wlth hair, wool, threads and grass are, i. e. nests

L 2

are skilfully knit etc.;

WINO [PRTF, 3O HTR (-ad), lit. to the

¢,

upstair house the key (the owner) having put (it) is, 4. e. the upstair

PALS

house is locked; moen 3§ @3, lit. milk (people) having brought (it) is, é.e

000

milk has been brought ész PF,TRY OR

218 AReRSNRE Rondny wW3HT

7o

3 33, lit- how many wonderful thlngs (somebody) having written in this

J

jich

book are, ¢. e. how many wonderful things are written in this book

DT SoNPRy, T3 oR™R Fwe,B, lit. (they) having given Bhima's

ed

cash

daughter to Rama’s son it is, 4.e. Bhima’s daughter has been given to

Rama’s son;

ted

PR, INYRY, 7 &, lit. (somebody) having brought the books

it is, 4. e. the books have heen brought; —or also the compound pluperfect

00k,

(or

(¢f. § 313, 1), e. 9. RRARY FoRE: 83 NP oG Y, in the nest three

eggs (a bird) having laid (them) were, ¢. e. three eggs had been laid in

bl

and

he nest (by a bird); Ae3c3oRy, TazoanR SWed,3,, lit. (they) having given

A

Sité to Rama it was, ¢. e. Sité had been given to Rama

it

m) a curious way in which the verb 3ezo with an infinitive is used

P

to express a sort of passive in the ancient and mediseval dialect, may

IV

also be mentioned here, e.g. ¥Ry SRR BeRRIR), VRN FvFo, that

toward which an activity is directed, is the object (of a transitive verb)

say

lit. that which desires a doing (concerning itself) is the object

SS9 f

B8 won&o®

i

Lo

AT 6356@ a substance that is to be sold (lit. that

1

wants a selling) and is spread out in a shop; &Rey Bedrozy, what will

happen, what is about to be, lil. what begs to become

jom

10

n) then the frequent use (in the three dialects) of the verb HR¥*

A0,

(3w%y), to take, to get, in combination with nouns is also to be adduced

ka

(¢f letters a and b), e. g. 2303003 P%* (-3R%F), to become or be alarmed

42

vmemanrern.

330

S

lit. to get alarm; &3 ojorﬁ@e;g), to become surprised, to begin to be

)

surprised, lit. to get surprise; &@é 83@@&’2} to get or become embarrassed;

hes

23@;3“3:32%@%3% to get or become wearied.

0)

lastly the verb Zpero (¢f. letter ¢) in the sense of ¢to become’

Ch

remains to be mentioned, e. g. & Eodpens (-R¥peB) T, a stalk that has

by

become dry.

hin

All the modes of expressing, somehow, the force of the passive, men-

tioned under Nos. 1 and 2, go to show that the Kannada language is

253

destitute of a passive which as to form and idea corresponds to the

o

Samskrita and English one.

A8

i

XX. On so-called auxiliary verbs.

Ly

b

316.

In English there are some verbs that are called auxiliaries, as

has

have, be, shall, will; such, in a strict sense of the word, are not in

lit,

Kannada.

It is, however, not only instructive, but necessary to learn

how Kannada does express them.

30

1,

The English auxiliary verb ¢have’, e.¢g. in ‘I have seen’, 1is

A

breg

expressed by the aorist (imperfect, perfect), e. g. o (Fe9B0, TEIRRV,

§ 198, 1 seq.), I have heard (I heard), or by the compound perfect, e.g.

s

%Jaehcs%a", he has (or is) gone (§ 3813, 4; ¢f. § 815, 2, I),—and ‘had’ by

hun

the compound pluperfect, e.g. 9233, 309030T0 30Ted a%@‘(’bm% 29, king Atyuta

had died (§ 313, 7; ¢f. § 315, 2, 1).

Cf. also § 314, remark; and § 155

(¢

seq. about the past participles.

hag

The English verb ¢to have’, ‘to possess’ is expressed by the verbs

hag

evy® (§ 194, remark 1), to be, or @0f (ady), to be, or &, is, 933, are

0

(§ 196) preceded by the dative case, etc., e. g. 2RSS woededon, lit. renown

is to him, ¢. e. he has or possesses renown. eeemrsas%g% e3on, lit. flower-

ny

like eyes are to him, 4. e. he has flower-like eyes.

@ZoR ToBIBNT® 2wF),

Ly

lit. to him horses are, i. e. he possesses horses.

W3R B v

o9

d’

3t

he has money. ©IFY wody 889oe0, lit. with him five cows are,

i. e. he has five cows. ®IJZ X3, 0 F°3 wurey, lit. near him an inkstand

3&

hag

is, 4. e. he has (or has got) an inkstand. g WP TALI0ER), lit. in

my vicinity corn is, 4. e. I have (or have got) corn. 3R B2, T SJ%&

g

9530, he had two soms. g RTBSIR 2Ty DFEI Y, a certain

undg

gentleman had two children. AN R=3ens u&%oﬁoeg) zoag @ﬁsé a3,

a certain cowherd had one she-buffalo. maIRER TR FRLT ;3;3#%

Way

asacre

331

e —

be

By B33 3, snakes have two pointed hollow teeth

8, 3.0

d

B3Re Fans 3, I have fine paper

6393 33Jwey @B, she has

headache

337 esdF =NG, 1 have got thirst.

23§ 53 o o)i'\) 59@\)

16’

28

933, thou hast eight ripe fruits

Also: SN ®3,0 R0 o8, 1 have money

by (or about) me

ODR WEPNO ﬁ@ossad PO, he has a watch with

)it

him

Cf. § 360

18

Regarding the so-called relative participles (§§ 175 seq.; 180 seq.;

253, 2, d; 254. 267.273.330. 364) the following instances may be given: —

he

B335 ev$o, he who has riches

PR, B 530

he who possesses gold

RPWNRYY %, she who has beauty. egrz=s¢ evg) o, that has meaning

%39 of, they who have knowledge

Be9:3)%,3x2, he who has money

0530303308 3%, she who has love. ©z933¢ FoRIRgR, & man who

a8

has authority. €53% 03009 ®oc3, an insect that has wings

W3 S aIBIRY,

1

lit. he who has nakedness, ¢. e. he who is naked

I

If the negative is to be expressed, me, @ o (§ 209, note 15 § 298) or

2RO or ¥3de (§ 209, under No. 3) are used, e. g. Be3EZ,, dSNe

18

3¢ oo, Dévadatta, thou possessest nothing. & ARF, 28nPe, that

tree has no leaves

938 X3 T BRRRYL

she has no needles

IS

!

WEROE 28ewDe, he has no sack. =39} ved BTI=d, cows have no

by

hump

©Z) 3R ReaNTDew, at that time he had no money

i1}

As to so-called negative relative participles the following are instances

g

(¢f. § 273):— 33980 Bo, he who has no knowledge

F99 B30, he who

has no feet

B3 Do B30, he who has no sickness

v 33%, she who

rbs

has nothing. 60w B FAHY, soil destitute of water.

308 v 338 NS

16

B, those who have no understanding, have no happiness.

wi

"It is a very curious fact that, in the ancient and medieval dialect,

7}

em%f the present participle of e (§ 180, remark), may be used transitive,

3,

e. g CRLoRS em%}o he who possesses gentleness (instead of Foeso e;o)

30003 @z&’ Sh em%:’ g%, a cow which has swelling udders (mstead of

B,

u

16,

3RO %?:aﬂ e)oeé @?%}o) There is also D, 00T B W, that which

vIld

has no texmlmtlons (Sabdamanidarpana stitra 72 and vritti; see § 338

1

under ge 13)

For ¢to have’ followed by an infinitive, e. g. he has to learn, see

M

under No. 4 of this paragraph

)

)1

2,

The English verb

‘to be’

is auxiliary in the passive,

the

by

way of expressing it therein in Kannada has been treated of in § 315.

42%

[—

332

P —

whi

. When ¢to be’ is no auxiliary, it is eroes (w%°) and 20¢ (Bdy) (BT,

in the negative, frequently forms 0¢°) in Kannada; e (003y,), BB, is,

£ase

and 33, 333, are, being also used (§ 196), e. g. RO YZ® wWEIZO

post

are

oSwy* sﬁoaasﬁo% nef, (there) are also swallowing fishes in the ocean.

I0F YOOTS® WP WoRcRTLRPE, are (there) any protectors in the

Y

it

base world? es3%% w%o, he is (present or he exists).

¥8s¢ anFo, he

W

was (present or he existed).

o

See some sentences in § 275, and regarding

BT (BD) being omitted when a mere copula see § 359.

§§ -

If evy®, etc. are connected with a dative, etc., they express the

futy

English <to have’, ¢to possess’; see No. 1 of this paragraph.

About the negative 29, (I) am not, (thou) art not, (he, she, it) is not

&

etc. (of ver=20%) see §§ 209, note 1; 298. 1t has been stated in § 298

not’

that it i1s used by itself, in connection with nouns and pronouns, and

i

in combination with verbal nouns (see § 243) with which also the

whi

so-called past participles or gerunds are classed by the author of the

und

present grammar (§§ 154 seq.; 169).

In paragraph 298, 3 there are

given as instances the forms ooy, PEFRY, SPRAIBVY; AWNIDY,

sha

WOIBRY, TONBOY, FRINNY ; TRy, TR, TPy, ANdY ;

30

%@eﬁ@%&%, z‘:)ew@%%e%, %@d@%_&%; 3009, [IPAY, JNRY, YN,

'a%e%.

0

Forms like VDY, BPFRY, IPHEDY, in the ancient and

Shal

medieval dialect, stand for the simple form of the negative (§ 209) to

)

express the past tense of the negative in a clear manner (though there

T\

occur rare exceptions, as Tog* ©tPdoby, I did not know, has been once

ady

used for ¢I do not know’). Forms like BADVTRY, WAITIL, TN

1edg|

B, 8roxDe, in the modern dialect, take the place of the simple

&y

negative to express the present tense of the negative in a clear way;

FIDIe , SR, Fe¥de, Arde are used in the modern dialect

e

to express clearly the past tense of the simple negative, which use however

Jou

is conventional (see § 298 just before No. 1), because verbal nouns ending

in ©eo originally rather denote the present tense, as 3Scden, an

shoy

We g

abandoning, #®odoew, an obtaining.

This their

primitive meaning

bOur

appears in their dative, when e. g. it is, as in the instances quoted in

§ 298, 8 (¢f. No. 12 in the present §), followed by EOP

Forms like 8¢dey, SRR, SRR, eNe), ade of the modern

requ

dialect are such in which BY has been suffixed to short past participles

e}{pr

.

g

333

v,

which we know also to be verbal nouns from §§ (168). 169, in the present

I

case 360, &, PR, 9N, By their use it is intended to express the

oA

Other instances

past tense of the negative in a very conspicuous manner

all

are: — B3R, oo wdde, I have not written (or did not write) this

the

AR, ¥BZ0 evrg e, he has not yet eaten (or did not eat yet)

»38

he

SOOI Ry BRITVWE By 2O © 3pe, was not his turban of a green colour?

Ing

BT TP Y he was not happy

See the instances quoted in

§ 298, 3; 313, 7; 314, remark

the

3,

The English auxiliary verb ¢shall’, when it implies a simple

futurity, as in ¢I shall give’, is expressed by the future tense in Kannada,

no

€. g. TOBIJ0 OF FRBEISRY, I shall give (§ 200

¢f. No. 12 of this §)

¢Shall

98

not’

as in the future

I shall not give

is expressed by the negative

nd

e. g. F0Bo O FRRBRY

shall not give (§ 209), or by a verbal noun to

which v is added, e. g. o8 BRRSDe, I shall not give (see also

t

he

under No. 2 of this §)

are

When ¢shall’ indicates a duty or necess1ty, as in ‘he shall go’, <you

)

shall go’, it may be expressed by (e3¢coy,0,

w)) BeBo, € g. TRV

e Be

e R WeT

¢f. No. ¢

0;

]

In a question ‘shall’ is expressed by the suffix e or e9de (§ 207, 2

a. b; ¢of. No. 10), e. 9. 93¢ SPRO? FRenOoe? what shall I do?

Shall T go? 3823?\ 3,680 ¢, what shall I say more? egb 833 CEp!

nd

{0

%éS mae 53&/303 eo35a? 0N SEYRT TORY BT &@%a 80@030@6‘7

pre

'ado 'c"omm 3268 TR YRISDe f’epe? doest thou give me such a bad

i

advice? Shall I take away the money of (my) mother without her know-

0

ledge? Would this not be the same as stealing ? ; —or also by a verbal noun,

€. J. om0 VY IRWe? Rwerntossidiwe? shall 1 stand? (or) go?

plé

|

The way of expressing ¢should’, the imperfect of ¢shall’, by (23ec9o,0

ech

236299,), ¥ewo will be seen from the following instances; Z0eR %@ BeTd

ver

you should read carefully

PR & BRI, TRRS BRA Be, you

g

should pay this money immediately

59 Oy Sser Bedy, what should

an

we do? I3:BoRT SoeBd 2,08 Serd Sedy, (we) should love (our) neigh-

n§

bours.

See Nos. 4. 9; § 314, remark.

m

About ‘should not’ see Nos. 5. 6. 8. 9.

4, The English auxiliary ¢must’ (‘is solicited’, ‘is desu*ed’ ‘18

)m

required’, ¢is mecessary’, ¢ought’, ¢should’, ‘is probable or evident’) is

expressed by ’aﬁewoo 3eCD

les

Y, WeB0 (§ 203), e. g. Rmegd ZToOTITHI

U,

334

e

DEornodve

IR

e8, 7oBodReY XSRS 0 (-Beedyo), in (4. e for)

exer

the verb which expresses the growing of corn etc. and that of trees and

creepers, ¢3¢ (and not e¥) must (or is to be) uttered

8 3

0 TR

&“éf

B33y, you must (or please) put up with this mistake.

if th

@;S;So sa(sir"dm

Fol

S TO3 BTy, he must (or has to) learn grammar

zba)ossazﬁo (S vty

i

3

3¢y, you should make cool what is hot

[ Lwdn a&@er{

oD,

we must go to town (or abroad),

F9R0 Oessan W W¥esy, when must

%

th

jJ

I (or am I to) come? w330 BweNT 33, he must have gone

&=n

fo

00O WRY @Y VYT Kedo, it must be very cold now at (the town of)

Puné

0ITIBTR BRAIN & IRWRY I3r3wa 3PAT ¥eso, somebody

Al

(it)

must have communicated these tidings to him

ms

It will be seen from the above instances that infinitives ending in

#al

o or ¢ are used before 23e09,0, 23663y, and Jezy; the infinitive ending

A

in e9e) and its dative may also precede 23e3y, €. g. VIV WEP By WeT

I must learn to know this man

BABY WR S0 B3R WeT0

ng

Fals

08 TRER PIoF fai ROy 0o e,

”a?;eemam’) SPBROT WeT

(by 1

BRING T, 30302, A 35, B3, I5RY 38O

B, e

3

RPeTR, Qe

J0u

Roke 332 833 aiaa"oioe’)oSoe fade.’)%’ e

IR RRENOF,e Ve

(any)

[ R TRBOFe LeT

‘Must’ is also expressed by 23¢€3,z30, a verbal noun of 3@y, e. g

01 g

D093 RI.NE AT 030300 BRTE3C BTRoN D9y

§2

‘Must’, when denoting obligation, has been expressed in the modern

i)

dialect also by the infinitive ending in ese, esex, followed by ev,, being

A

(§ 180, remark), and a demonstrative pronoun, e. g. F930 FTRBLIE TI?

lo 10

Forms

(¢f. %’Jazé@'v? RS ®), I must give, lit. I to give a being-he.

(t

hoy

as %J@%ﬁ e)o%? Qo%DR 0, occur also occasionally in the medisval dialect

thoy

(e. g. of the vaekacmtamam), and may denote the simple relative present-

Sho)

future participle, as they do likewise in the modern dialect, e. g. T3 ==y

i

RBEOWRT, %e0TRY e)ge; %Ry, @ worm that sucks (or abstracts) blood

lOgue

without causing pam

zéaaﬁ %Ja(if)e)oeé T3, a horse which carries

Qece

i\

nicely

10t |

To 23¢30 the verb esro, to become, is frequently added, (when 3¢z is

8 ;

considered a verbal ‘noun, see § 204), e. g. B ¢ TIWNAF WO ﬁmaﬁ

ey

8‘3% DR FRDY ITRY Boni®y Bezeonod B, about two months are requlred

$

D

fov* cotton pods to become full-grown and ripe

Y ARy, TR BW

0; ni

e

335

[

fo)

3,30 Eo"@ﬁa_eag FO®R Bewanosry, it is necessary for you henceforth to

and

exert yourself to learn.

B WF), TowTd Werd, IPIRTT, TN

W

?d#@iﬂ éé—)‘ % Bezorosry, thou must not (or shalt not) utter falsehood,

ot

if thou utterest, I shall be obliged to punish thee. TRy Qy On® e

008 v

w N

Fo83, Rama was (or is) wanted by all. emy, 2008 8 Bwy BeFo

N3y, brother, a little grass was required for the calf.

BDRTY SRTO

$,

s

5':%) ;mééf 37 5@%3:5 90308 [P[DeR TIAW TRT Wewaned 3y, at

3

o)

Vi

the very first it was (or used to be) necessary to pay postage according

to the measured distance of the place to which letters had to go.

o)

hody

QR e ZonFong IPR FRB WBesondy,, you ought to have given

(it) six months ago. N w303y WesoNdy,, how was it to be written?

wIRY Reen WezoRaSy, he had to go.

Besorory, that is needed.

e3¢

¢ 10

ding

FIBRZ) I I° 3,0, he gave as much money as was desired.

A

Wy

3R, as much as is needed or required. o ;SQJ;S%)OSJR RPN Xeze

%

NG, I must go to Bombay. & aésago@ﬁ%ﬁo BVIPA0E3, eﬂa\;‘t}gzg DY) " e

o

o)

FaNg, these fruits are sour, therefore these have not become desired

(by me), %. e. therefore I do not want these. 3, Bedwe? Wezone, do

e

you want (some) rice? It has not become wanted, i.e. 1 do not want

)

(any). eF wTOFe WezserosBy, you need not come. Cf. No. s.

5

9

‘Must not’ (‘is not fit’, ¢shall not’, ‘should not’, ¢is not desired

6.f

or wanted’, ¢f. Bezarvzdie, ete. under No.4) is commonly expressed by 23¢z

(§§ 209, note 1; 212, 7; 301; and ¢f. No. 6), e. g. DATY0 SRTY0 AR,

dern

B VB0 (-23ew), one must not (or should not) say L&TY0 FRF0

yeIng

R Fyo (§203). w8 wo Bed! dope, BRery, (thou) must not (or

5553

do not (¢f. No. 13) come this side! O, go away! %%és SN[y, ¥R e,

orms

(thou) must not (or shalt not) use bad words. Qegy m#% S03E Wi,

alect

thou must not (or shalt not) lie. Rogy Be¢Lo WBewd, you must not (or

sente

should not) utter falsehood. o3y =[P =B B¢, 3@36%2}53%2% BRen

o))-<’\

R3¢, (thou) shalt not utter perverse words, (and) shalt not learn from

rogues.

plood

BYeotdzen &don Be®, (thou) shalt not wander about as a

deceiver.

B0 &R By Bed, womoRcH BT Bed, (you) should

;,rries

not be behind a horse (and) should not be before a royal mansion.

28y 8~ e, I do not want this.

23w B3¢, (1) do not want anything.

O & NRZ FOJ SIS %ms%ﬁﬁa‘%t @Jaoﬁ‘@q%eo‘%em? 30! 035@%;28

J@%f\

el

O 8BYNY, shall we cut some (of the) ripe mango fruits? (No) it is

not right, fqr they are not ours.

B8

e

336

pe——

ez is also preceded by the infinitive with final ese® or esen, e. g

AP 2R, TLIINE SRR wRBY BRI ¥eR

2B 030N L2, 0

W

the

St

303, BPT3IF wIan T ALY BeR

The idea of 23ez can also he expressed by the negative participle and

the verb @, to be, e.g. Fwe

D)

SRRDTY, TIDH, NN INAT

1§

10

See under No. ¢ and 13

i

As frequently to 23¢@y (No.4) so also occasionally to 25ezs the verb

esrd is added, e.g. [oRWFRY

RO BeEINIZI.R. SBRCTIDTORON

%

il

BWION BeEIBIR.

BeBSIRT BRRAGT @aeée?

6,

The English auxiliary ¢ought not’ (‘is not becoming’, ‘must not’,

«should not’, etc.; ¢f. Nos. 5.7.8.9.11) is expressed by 2093z (the negative

or

o

of wef, W), e.g. BTo (W3, TRTYF) BTH 2RTZZ0.S. eed OF 239000

(fo

(one) ought not to pronounce (or should not pronounce) these (233

%Jadof) B33%y, TRTL

BRB 3T 0 SPINEI), TeF 25900y, eminent

4

9

persons ought not to listen to insignificant words

$OR wWotl FTOR, a

G0 B 88, 98Ky, (one) should

i

business that (one) ought not to do

il

not steal and (thus) eat

oty 390308 Ssez9R wedre, without know-

ing propriety (one) ought not to speak

33 3001Y 35930 D3PI Wl

Dy

%o, (one) ought not to (or should not) transgress the word of (one’s)

parents

BoRNY IR 598, (you) ought not to (or should not) commit

I

theft

9 29,0308 %R, VeRE 5Ty, (one) ought not to (or should not)

e

torment little creatures

Qe ¥OR Been 298Ky, thou shouldst not go

See

8 ® T 23903

there

SN

W3 239070, you are not permitted to come

b

Do) BYR) PR 290Ky, we must not (or

(you) must not remain here,

o

should not) steal.

cS:’o 3R Wi 23903Y, WRosven

WSRO SVTB WITRY,

o

wBY N3N z:aﬁdo wBF G e 3953, (you) must not drawl

ho

in readmg, when reading (you) should not hurry, (you) must not read

too loud, (you) must not read too low.

%é& 'é’e)forﬂ#ao DOB WTRY,

e

(you) ought not to do evil deeds

IOR ;ﬂsacédsﬁdo S) w90%y, those

do

that will not work (or have not worked) shall not eat

c,%de%om FOR 33

By PR [IPB WBR0

TNNOR O TRJY, SFLS 30eeI zsadcﬁo

thy

2R BREANLYE O BBINPEA. 3R 2390RY; WRS W R 39,0 WoN

g0

R0 239030

Zo08 A0 3900 33NY UDFOIIY, [AEB03) 23ITI

3

SRy (930 BexORYy) TNV TR QAR FaEBE0H weThE

29533, Bade

ele

D9 WA®RY WITRY

Jor

.

337

.

The idea of 2598z30 may also be expressed by the negative participle and

¥

the verb =3, to be, e.g. 395 raecsa SPBNERY, $RDY, you ought not to

speak such words.

See under Nos. 5 and 1s.

nd

7,

The English auxiliary ‘must not’ (‘ought not’, ¢is not fit’) further

is sometimes expressed by BRWM, €.J. LRFY TWY THRZ, (one) must

not kill that.

ARy RPN FRBTY, you must not go.

RN ésav eS80

erh

RPRT FRTB AT YR BREAARRIDT), VBC Je T3 3@ FPB WT

R

[0}

TRARY, I shall allow thee to go to play with thy play-fellows, but thou

must not loiter and come at night.

8, The Englishauxiliary ‘must not’ (‘ought not’, ¢is unfit’, <improper

ot

176

or forbidden’) is not unfrequently expressed by esr<z, e.yg. ?.?gjaéi efzg P35

o

SISEEA 5%03&0 $aRwangy, (one) must not spoil euphonic combination

o,

(for instance) by using Jpg, s3d0 (for Fpgs o). RBFOING 7B,

ent

a word that is unfit to be uttered. ®Ro3 5—39[@\%3;‘ 9TINBRE PNR

BROTD

14

wencdy, (one) must not allow inimical women to enter palaces.

N33y, alas, (you) ought not to kill (it).

AR a&@er{eﬁ)@& iy, you

uld

0F:

must not go. cdPdR Y wIweNG:, nobody must come here. (Cf. No. 11.)

iy

9

The English auxiliary ‘ought’ (‘should’; ¢f. Nos. 3.4) is also

s

expressed by 3,00 (ST, fit, etc.), e.g. e &eR [PR ITF,R, thou

il

ought to do so. =) BOR WO 3,3, they should come here. & Qe

ot

E

n¥sy, & B3e3RY 0, ’”ﬁeé-)\:i 3%,30m0 8, they should sow and try those

80

seeds in this country. ol égjoé%dg 2,3 30&3»@2,3363 2,88 RPR 3,00,

<gj),

brothers ought to love each other.

¥R BREN 3T, 1S, he should have

(OF

gone. 03 BIIR deR} Rec 3¥,030,, you ought to have told him so.

@,

QR € PR TIFy V¢ 30N TRa 5#_&255:\0, thou shouldst have returned

gl

that book to him long ago.

ead

‘Ought not’ (‘should not’) is, in this case, expressed by suffixing @e or

ol

©Q), €.4. 3oNE, R TN BNB 3T Y, sister, thou shouldst not have

1056

done so (see § 298, 3 about @9, and No. 2 of this §). @y, ws0e T 0007

&

3

40

& TSRy VeI '@@9@% %Ja:g) S

7,009, you ought not to have hought

3

s

this almira at so high a price.— ez ®ReR 35,30, thou ought not to

3

NY

go (see § 300, 1 about SORE See Nos. 5. 6. 7. 8. 15 (39).

y3

10, The English auxiliary ‘may’ (‘is allowed’, ¢is possible’, ¢is fit’,

)3

etc.) is expressed by 223om0 (of wof), to come, e.g. Ve WHNR WT W,

you may (or are allowed to) come in.

T VR WY, thou mayest

43

B

338

e

8w

(or art allowed to) go.

$9,9 8 w®ory, you may stay with us. &N

wxago, it may be so.

oI JF, BeS3 AP BT WK, he may be

thy true friend.

©38 339,83 V0w RN,T0 wRry, his tale may

(al

(more or less) be known to all. =z 210) %o%d wRaT), you may sit here.

TP VBIY WOBT WKy, he may have written this. razj%_&gg %zé;

TRR wBIDIZY, you might have given more than this. =33 Bwex I

he

869 w8 WwRomaN3y,, they might have come last year.

m

Another way of expressing ‘may’ (in desire, wish, permission, expect-

ation, or possibility) is by using the imperative (§ 205, 1; ¢f. No. 14; § 367),

e.g. SeTBRY* &%maoﬁoo {’\mﬁ%&, may the age which prevails in the véda

03

(¢.e. one hundred years), become thine! =0 ForoR, may he give! wzo

i

(AR]

J59e%3,, may they make! &30 SRIFBo or &30 SN 3o, may he

make!—or by using the suffix e9& (§ 207, 2, a.b), e.g. IR Fogeomend,

may you become happy! &5 33r=3wsy) 53(8;3'@71@, may that news prove

Rl

true! 9938y WO, may he come! Hp A, TR BRENDWID, may I go, sir?

this

TR0 WIAIR &en BecIDoxse, may I tell him s0? arte wr®, may (it)

19

become so (i.e. so be it, very well)! sn®, may (it) become (i.e. be it,

of ¢

very well)! @g®, may it be (be it, very well)!—or by using the contingent

st

i

present-future tense (§ 195), e.g. &n VT, she may (¢.e. is likely to)

a g

come now. M3 9SS BT WAL, if (he) learned to know this, father

tel]

might beat (us). =pSooToWF, 00 &)%Qéo, it may rain this evening.

il

TR uﬁoé wR e, if T come, I may come, 4.e. I may come (perhaps

D)

I come).

1o (,

‘May’ in a question has also been expressed by a verbal moun, e. g. &

TROBAING Ty BReRReresy, may we (i e. are we allowed to) cross

W

this field? (regarding the form BneRwess see § 205, 3).

cang

11, The English auxiliary ‘can’ is expressed by 230, 283,58

s

AW

and other forms of the verb 200¢ (w8, ¢f. No. 10), to come, preceded by

Stap

the infinitive ending in & or esey, this last termination being put in the

Cann

dative (95@%8-)’ €. g. s90 Bk, what can be seen. eomaOR 39,2908

3 wore¥d, BRen wBnd), if (there) is power in (one’s) sole of the foot,

00cas

(one) can go to Bengal. &@Cﬁa% %géojozﬁaa\ BRLY ToT WTBE, can

the

(one) throw out darkness with the bamboo fan? ©Z3z0 BuRZ SPB VR

&3, he can do work. BERY, U0TY [PAT wRry, who can have done

this? &N é»tﬁ@??& woga, 1 can read.

RIR $ROT, wthg d, 1 can

Ny

PSS

339

]

\0

swim. 3R B30 w3y, he can write.

BRITE, R ao&t)@% 00V

be

3,3

S0 0

Hanumanta could jump.

3 m@mems IZN BRENOF zo:s e3e,

ay

can we cross this field (é. e. is there a road for us to cross this ﬁeld)

Iy

ATB uBOSQQ'D% 03590R wR §e3ds, who can have written this?

23?;

‘Can’ is also expressed by the verb es30, e. 9. & FuE BSZII ©N3. B

he can do this work. 23 «rvd dwe, canst thou do it? T HEIST

R, TOI B SR XRR. ¢R TR Bedy, we should make happy others as

ot

much as we can

1)

‘Cannot’ is expressed by the negative of 0% (W), e g. 8 BoRA™NA

a

WB0NOF, 23933

ened DR 2390

3

(or wBBHY), that boy cannot write

DY ¥F,TSF Ben

such as cannot be uttered, are no letters

S

3

he

200000, that cannot be counted

(Cf. No. s.)

0,

‘Cannot’ is expressed also by the negative of esro, e. g. & FOIJ VD

ove

Sonay, I cannot do this work. =& ©33 %0336@ %o, he cannot do

!

this

STatal] 9.903@6@, 33, %’0‘50'23@ alas, you cannot do it.

"825 DASD

89 8

(1

QB BRenomao (or 3&@@&@@9@@) ngy, I cannot go in such a heat

1,

of the sun (see also § 315, 2, /).

Q5 B ev5onRy, thou canst not

ont

stay (or stand)

Sy [RY NPT Y o FRAY N, (one) cannot cut

f0)

953

a diamond with anything

R0, 0R TR, BeCITINRY, (one) cannot

ey

tell his joy. #3383 & Fo5 oSO (or &nzy), he cannot do this work

ng

R0 59030, 2 business that cannot be effected. BezoR 390T TN

)8

DRBIST 033 n» ﬁi)aéaa nay, w1th0ut the knowledge of God we can never

do (a,nythmg)

(Cf. No. s.)

‘Cannot’ may further be cxpressed by s> (¢f. No. 7), e. g. wed 3OB

088

B wBoBy, dde SoRARB FWRD, (one) can break a rock, (but)

cannot break the mind of a whore

2B B0 © 23963 WRITY, BEC T

R0%0,8 FRBGY, (one) can live where familiar intercourse is, (but) cannot

:

stand the trouble of cold

b

BELO BRBIRY, B e339Ne, s0 much pain as

cannot be told has befallen (me)

f

3

For ‘cannot’ eszo (see Dictionary) in combination with e is also

occasionally used, e. g. @ S0RTT RRewatl TeLIwsRY, (one) cannot tell

the lamentation of those three

(an

There are some special terms in Kannada which directly denote ‘to can’, viz

A

one

@) €982 e. 9. IR0 BEPCNT FEHUF BEPNT BRFR VBZORTE®

Q2R0RY, if (& man) cannot speak (and) cannot hear, he is called dumb

cal

43*

—

340

—_—

and deaf

SORWVFTY Fe3FONRY, NEPReF t2030Ty, fools cannot gain

M

fame

3

b) e5836, e. 9. BN WO BT* Bief ¥TFS nIDwTE, can rustics become

abler than I? RoBiRTy WFFSRY, R,0Re ©LIovy, the boys cannot under-

ale

stand the meaning. BHFY B2, IR, moeF &3, I have gold

I

(and other) property, I cannot die

DR BReRe23RY, 1 cannot go

3

BEEY DROVT, TORY DN BWY RELIVIE3R

I cannot tell you more

00t

about it. 3Ief ¥ (= ¥nFI) Rwmadseny, if (thou) canst pay, become

)

a surety. 3WIR ToERS IwRVeTIo, a valiant man can fight

30308

038030859

8

o) VRCRH B 0B, we cannot hide anything from God

(se

E9RS3 J

FTIRNNNIND, T3, he who cannot write is inferior to one

who feeds sheep

g

0) WO, e §. TR WV D JeRTINED RORwF, can the male buffalo

recite the védas? oz &

WS

I can swim. @33 W30 WO I

N

he can write

FINP SR, NFRY, S3FR we Ty, poets can depict objects

12,

The English auxiliary verb ‘will’ when it implies a simple

Th

Cor

futurity (¢f. No 3), is expressed by the future tense in Kannada, e. g.

FoBIT0 Or %@zéoaﬂ;io he will give.

FIRIDTE Or FRRIND, you will give.

he

90,0 OF 53, O 03Ky, it will become (§§ 200. 203). The future ‘will

log

3

A,

=

not’ is expressed by the negative, e.g. @0 or FRAERF., he will not give;—

or by a verbal noun to which 4o is suffixed, e. g. Q¢ FRBISOY, you

e

will not give (§§ 209. 298, 3)

001

Regarding the suffix e in its connection with the dative of a verbal

3

noun ending in ee) (Bwf, § 298) it is to be remarked that South-Mahratta

he:

people, at least sometimes, attach the idea of doubt (samSaya, Nudigattu

Wh

P. 155) to lt e.g. @d?&) NN&. 230300

&,o, he is not to invite me (to dinner),

§ee

3o

4. e. he will (probably) not invite me. Eﬁ? ey e‘)% o, she is not to eat, 4. e.

W

Other mstances chosen at random from

she will (probably) not eat.

(0

S.-Mhr

shool-books, may, or may not, express doubt:—e9z380 WIS

&,

3

29530

9300 WRTIROE,©

3% BRCBONSY FEWTRY, SRR J%—e)

it

FOR SRROFT,©

AERMEREARS

0TI

F¢ TN 08,0,

aeﬁo BI8VTO)

1¢)

093, ©

330 B mzéd@%ﬁﬁ 90 An®

&

See also some instances in

3

§ 298, 3, and ¢f. No. 2 in the present paragraph

atl

The English verb ¢‘to will?, ‘to be pleased’, ¢to desire’ is expressed by

§

2ef, of which (w80), w3, »d, vulgarly 38, I will not, and other

4

persons of the negative are in every body’s mouth, e.g. eves SRS or

Wa

341

[e—

Al

SOEY ;Se?o, I will not eat. m@sme&m or BN ;seo)o, he will not give

FedSRe 3o or Fe¥ I B, they will not hear.

me

el

13,

The English auxiliary verbal forms ‘does not’, ‘do not’, ‘did not

w3350,

ld

are expressed by the negative or a verbal noun with 2, e g

I do (or did) not write.

g 669030, I do (or did) not know.

9530

20

e

3Ro, he does (or did) not make.

ARy wBiShy, Soma does not

come.

me

asazéoﬁo‘gaeaﬁeéi} %5980, why does Balayya not come here?

;

BoBINTY ejcée‘)%-& 09T w3, why did the boys not come to play?

w9 B¢, do not cry (¢f. No. 5).—Also the following way of expression

o}

e

(see under Nos. 5 and 6) is to be paid attention to: &8 LRy, FFH

D0; g 33 Se@ROT, do not spend (your) time idly! do not desire

110

great things!

(V)

The English ‘does’, ‘do’, ‘did’ in questions is expressed as follows: —

LAREPRRNE? 833 RRZwF,0o 3RBRIBTY,0, did he become dishonest?

fs

The writ on his forehead will be wiped out.

3R W, Jee, does he

ple

J

come? e3Fd W AR, did he come? =R DR Bwervz,Semy, does

[

he go abroad? TRE WRBWD, 8, O brother, didst thou break the

il

looking-glass? 38Fr Fpedso, why did he go? SEANES BB QAN

RS ARID 0¥ DARRDZp dOFNE,Bo, alas, why did the mad black

bees become inimical to campaka trees?

0l

350F wg 3y, Why did they

come? o35p¥ BWeRogedn, father, why do you go? Ae3, 09T LN

bal

8.¢? o35eTedH wandwe, Sité, why doest thou weep? Did somebody

tta

beat thee?

ose?o;g W&o, whence did he come?

BP0 BWTR0 %Jo){go,

it

who did kill Mura? e ﬁoz:z)dodoﬁo& eR0 oo RPedd, when did you

1)

see that sparrow? e3z BeeRISRY S A, whither does he go? ey

wZ oo odse¥, why did you come? ey wg F900:3¢xy, why did you

i

come?

V)

The English ¢do’ in connection with the imperative, as ‘do write!’,

may be expressed in Kannada by the simple imperative or by its

M

{J)

repetition, e. g. 238! or wd w3!, w0Wd! or 23oND WIWD!

10

14, When the English ¢let’ is used as an auxiliary in the imper-

ative, denoting ‘exhortation’, etc., it is expressed simply by the imperative

(§ 205; ¢f. No. 10; see § 367), e.g. oS, let (him) do! Bpe, let (him)

by

go! soruo, let us attack! evzodos, let us utter!

S@o3ws, let us

[

)

walk; Bwereeso, let us go!

-

342

—saa

Compare also the forms with e9¢ of the mediseval and modern dialect

in § 207, 2, a. b

On

The English verb ¢to let’, <. e. ‘to allow’, ‘to permit’, is expressed by

the verbs gy, to give, etc

TR, to give, ete

and by their causatives

§ 151) &y and FRARO

The first syllable of &=o is exceptionally

shortened by some writers so that it becomes @&> (in imitation of

Télugu =23y, to permit, of its &, to give; ¢f. § 151, b, 3)

The medieval dialect has, e. g. R¢3 Zowoe® &H%B YR 38, 53

he i

DQRoNY, a structure which does not allow water to flow, is called

adhara (dam); and 3gories ) *—3033 Fo Deodoe RGPy, the trees

oW

<=

there do not let (their) ripe frults a,nd nuts fail.

&&=y occasionally

occurs also in the modern dialect, e. g. RooBToN TV TEE33OLRIS

then

=3y, a cow that allows itself to be milked with ease

BT BR,RY, BT

the

©ex, he does not allow me to come

Thus also does w5y, 6. 9. ©I=S

0]

X

githy

ReoO=Zy, he does not let him enter

N

The modern dialect generally uses 30y and THRARY, 6. g. WISSY

BRenRRRY (-3wRY), let him go (or allow him to go)! e3Z 8, wo

[

RRBR, he does not let me come

3R89, 99 duRPERY, let me stay

ol

here!

& B8 o33R0R, 3R, BT WINRRRINDY. (0r WIRRRITHV )

DRy

that horse lets no one come near it

BonSROD 1O 3 0oINRE VHURY

(BE

DBRPRR w8y, one ought not to let filth lie either in front of a house

Gom

or in (its) back-yard. See an instance under No. 7

¢

Also the verb 9. to let loose, has been used in the medisval and

R

modern dialect for ¢to let’ in instances like the following: —E3on$o

e

mRen O&, let the cattle go!

IR D), BRer DR, let me go!

3IR/N FTo&

thep

030, BoRRHANG OR, he neither drinks himself nor lets him who will

v

drink (do so)

d

15

It is still to be mentioned that the English ¢ought not’ (*is im-

Ht

proper’, ¢f. 32,83o under No. 9) is also expressed by Ze (§ 209, note 1)

hayi

preceded by an infinitive generally ending in e, e. 9. N8y HDONTIT

fl“len

20 BB Re; FRWS TBIRIR S0BHIIN BY; BABRBY A LRI

(Al

®

39 xo (Dasapada 157), (one) ought not to abuse those that are

githe

(one’s) guru and elders; a very handsome woman ought not to become

i

2&

the wife of a blind man

(one) ought not to court the friendship of

ngy

enemies

the |

343

gt

XXI,

On either—or (§ 317); neither —nor (§ 318); Whether —or (§ 319);

by

the — the (§ 320); as—as (§ 321);

for (§ 322); namely, as

ves

follows (§ 323); what is that? (§ 324);

what happened?

lly

(§325); in this manner (§ 326); as —so (§ 327); how much

ol

— 80 much, how many —so many (§ 328); when? (§ 329);

who —he, etec. (§ 330).

0

317. In the ancient dialect ¢either — or’ is expressed by ea??&—- 693"_&, lit

Jed

be it—be it (§ 205, 1; ¢f. § 316, Nos. 10. 14), €. g. BEIReD [oodRe S LT

£es

SRBSINGE Cﬁwﬁoeﬁé’emgﬁ?% eﬁoﬁoﬁ%_—sao% nes 93%%, Soem*

lly

BIRFMIT NT0SF F,— 3DUIFE ©F

)0, Wwhen (there) are nominal

3

themes that end in 1, 1, r or r and have their first (syllable) short in

M

the back part (. e. in the beginning), slackness (§ 240) takes place

i

2

)

either before Re¢ or further before the R of the dative;—or also by

e300 — e300, as appears in § 292,

As has been remarked in § 207, 2, b, the modern dialect uses ese® —

00

est®, lit. be it—be it, to express ¢either—or’, e. g. BOTY ATIND &I

{4y

oon® IR Wed, either thou or he must do this.

éaga’ad SnO 3

v),

o0 9n® HWEIHIeTdy, they may start either on Friday or Saturday.

JAY

wPsan® FRTIND /N D, ¥ ;B3¢ [T ), either good or bad your

156

command is agreeable to me.

FINBHINY RN VesoRBY [03,eTB TR

end Fwey Bwe, buy either paper or whatever thou wantest. @gos

®)

2

nd

236%}71%7%@ 23

3y

8 SEPRPIND ?0'3'6(58 aNoTafal=N Teyy B3, OJYNF

4o

@@@%smwo, if at night either cats or the young of cats are met (by

JJ&

them), owls will peck (their) eyes and kill them. e nad9 23 39,RO

ill

mo® §,030 Tx203) BaBe, 8, either for vomiting or for bile they drink

a decoction of cinnamon, 908,53000300F AeS INAFEPIYN Y

il

30e83 euTFTT SHACEPTI N BRTFR BT[N, 2 present got either by

having done service in an excellent manner or by having afforded

)1)

friendly aid to others. oo FBRW®IFIRY BorBeH FedFYNO BY I

o

Jw

u:éoja 3303@6’%71@ 33;,@5 555@55\)@_0%63, they used to travel abroad

either on foot or on horseback or also by means of carriages.

A& 3T

e

me

5"@6 SANWI] Ko %@ﬁgﬁ@ (4. e %@2@% nY) %03 71639%”030(5%71@3

of

BTV TIF® ZONROSTY, such people will subsist either having entered

th'e house (4. e. by living in the house) of relations or by what has been

e

344

P

acquired by (their) fathers

AN =oone RVRBIEIATUI NSO TN

v

RReAR DTNRToI RO ARBy 3, 3wy 088, parrots build their

(

nests and live either in tufts of trees or fissures of dilapidated walls

2603 FF, 300, B0 TNSRENING WeonSRFnand éoa:ioa 39,05,

then

101

@?

they fill the sugar either into boxes or sacks.

oﬁoocs aﬁsat‘é $ETF9,N

0

m@ atel a%ee)zéosmrij FReBTR3I, F £oeoz§oﬁsaﬁ® U\)w R0y %) ne

035371@‘) %é?) da;ﬂ 398, a building that has been erected elther on an open

ne1

W)

hall or on a bastion of a fort or behind a palace for the purpose of

UL DBE, ToB0HING MY HBeoINYO BeZTR

Ry 88

fall

warring

praise God either before (thou) eatest or after (thou) hast eaten

As will be learned from the instance quoted above (TanZmon® VA

‘ ]f9

103

BeTIBRR B8, 0THTR BN TR THE) BNRO—unO (be it —be it) 1s

constructed

as might appear, with the nominative after a transitive

verb: but sentences in which the accusative occurs in such a case, are

0

=(

not rare, e. g. w33, VWAYYNEY BVBIKNG SeeNT aﬁomoxqsdaaf\

2e0nex9 RO RoonosSsy, occasionally boas will swallow either people

that have reclined in the jungle or calves

R0 IR BELIV /R

SFYNY TNBDTYRY 3T, T R RIBYR ABIDARE, if I, without

telling thee, take away either thy book or paper, shalt thou remain

quiet? Regarding this see what has been stated in § 287, remark

The Rev. Mr. Hodson, according to § 287, remark, has used @30w —

s305H also in the sense of ¢either — or’.

He has the following additional

“y

sentence: & N#Ea BT0 & ~%§aa 38n Bwer Beid, do not go to either

-

hig

this place or 'rhat

10y

318. The English ¢neither — nor’ may be expressed by the copulatives

(.

evo, o and e (§ 284 seq.) followed by a negative, e. g. R 3

DTN

S BNDF B, for the worship of idols (there) is meither fruit nor

o

ﬂower &93363;50&555 BS30IB0 BOFDRR, he disrespects neither those nor

I~

b

these persons

“FNR e)ﬁ Bwo FIRTWWRT B, she has neither a sense

hay

of shame nor modesty.

eazds m%;ﬁweéﬁ LN :5%‘030@ NG 28Y,

(o

in his bundle (there) was nelther pen nor pa,per

B3R, VRN ‘v“oae

397, 9R oot . neither in that nor in this manner (there) is a kingdom

for the children of Kunti

RPN BB, FoBWNIIINR DR, he neither

1y

drinks himself nor lets him who will drink (do so)

BXR BOONR BV

29530, TIANMR BRI, he fears neither tigers nor snakes

VIR BRIR

Joy

345

O —

)NU

PRy

he will do neither this no:

that

DRBIIDY, VI[P

casatédﬁae)

11

(Hodson).

LH:

23w DRSF B, 5% 58 do:a;ﬁoo;ﬁsg vo, 9303, it is neither a hill

hen

nor the headless body of a demon, (but) an elephant.

ﬁﬁ 5P CON

A

TOP VY, zoé30.»., T 0309 it is meither a rope nor a snake (but) -

1%

long piece of cloth radg N;jg,)tj;j@ ¥y, IDR VY, $e53030¢, this is

pel

neither a sea nor a river, (but) a lake (Hodson). 'a@ BPET 8&0@@

ol

By, BEdn By, sOTSe, these are neither balls of white sugar nor

A

fallen out teeth, (but) hail-stones.

819. The English ¢whether — or’ may be expressed by 2.c, €9¢s and €93

f

if’, in combination with the copulatives

e90 and ery. for which see the

b

instances in § 287, 8

five

In the verse quoted below the five times repeated “ZRBRIN (=uBW

e

@o3ow, ©@Tw) may be translated < though’ (see § 287, 5, b), but ¢ whether

79

—or’ would also not be wrong

DD, BRTO30

RS0

ple

Iy

RWESROTH BPBONY 30055 A3

out

223030039, BRTBR00 WCP

=) e=meade |

1l

305 RBTAG BRRBRON SN

3RNET RIRTIRPRBRN OF

-

BWIDERY T3 FCI. Bo¥ IV 79 3TE ]

nal

“whether he gives (you) riches, or eats together (with you), or also gives

ther

his own daughters, or follows and joins (you) without weariness, or utters

novel wisdom, it is proper to keep down a hostile king” said that Sakuni

118

Cf. § 334

occurs in the following

WY

Another way of rendering ¢whether—or

modern sentence wherein 93¢ — 58, be it — be it, is used:— T

N0

10!

3 . SATO IPRATY IRIBS ¥ ﬁoﬁom AR .q@% 3¢wo, whether I

onse

have committed, or have not commltted, a fault I have to honour the

command of Badasaha

0Y,

M

320, The English ‘the— the’ before comparatives can be expressed only

s

Jom

by paraphrasing, see e. g. the ancient instance quoted in § 303, 2,0 South-

Mahratta school-book instances are e.g. the following:—Qe3) ¥ya®

her

SRBIZY, DHCE BRCT TON %?32&) (. e a%aéo %%aéo) 293000, the more

you study, the more you will 1ea1n

Na#&@e}ﬁs 385y 3R 3R3 TN

f

44

G

—

346

wif

23,8 3@y B¥nerSns, the more (they) remove the impurities of the

syrup, the whiter the sugar will become

BRANRJ) 300, WS WR TN

(pr

),BRT 37 TR BEPTR, T3 3, the more a ship approaches the

south, the more the polar star seems to go down

]

321

The English ‘as —as’ may be expressed as follows: — es3che3o

E&

g

Ny

33,0, this man (is) as deserving as that man (§ 348, 14). Bw.eo0no DR

Ro VU B3F0NT 88,3703, doest thou know archery as well as Drona?

hro

(¢f. § 284 under dative)

QRBIT[IF BRABoDoo FPIFWo IREBRWE 0

Yudhishthira lavished as much as he had

Intt

QQ@O&)&)E‘; @N@éﬁg a3

having given betel as much as possible

B [VZ BABS00 TPpA, having

wha

applied as much ashes as a (forehead) circlet

AR,B B, TRR,0 AODOVR

can

do I not pour out gold as high as thou art? —esx o0 w3 0TI

§im

aéséaiﬁo BB worya), poppy pods become

by degrees, as large as

¥

balls

%’Jaaomad @aﬁo :’m J) BRELPE 33 03 #FFERY, ©r, the diamond

chil

called Cohinor is as large as the half of a hen’s egg.

SPBFTIY Be3T

ipe

hon

WORRY Wi c&:azs =B, =0, esd&?aio Z?)JS)CS B, Ng)a By 3088 9 BoR

2S8R a%e@&aaa 8 W1th the king of Portugal there is a large d1amond

A0

people say there is no diamond on the whole earth as large as that

a7

S c;ﬁ &) WRSRY, he (is) as poor as I

B SOOR D fﬁ%doioﬁ

9

23

(o2

=, this r1pe mango is as sweet as sugar.—a©3xF, as far as this

§€e

place

AT, FoRe 33F wdod. e, I come as far as your house.— 58F

30083, as far as the ocean

Son S008d, w3 R, he came as far as the

sald

house.— 3359 8 o3 R, as much as possible

SO0 WAt Tud Dotdn

expr

as long as I live.— 2003co, as far as the end. — 233K, as far as

Jron

the ear.— ¢35y wgo nde RPEITH

as soon as the king came, they

WY {

Q

started

&3 O [ e3. as soon as that news arrived

09T Qﬁwiﬁd}i

0y

2o IHRS. as soon as it saw him. — DR, DR Zo RTTONS. WU

ury

B d OV o8, nDedo, (he is) as big as a hill, as strong as an elephant

B

)

of the gods, as deep as the ocean

WO, e wHTTY, he (is) as

W

th

liberal as Bali.— 303030%R w0038 8o, as many persons as are in the

said

house

SoatiB, 33 ’ﬁaw;ixo %Jaeav %@mm he bought as much

13

(Nt

grain as was brought for sale.

esdﬁo @So sta ON@QDNJ@Q, em 733630

Rl

z’amﬁaeﬁ dama;ﬁ he is as virtuous as he is learned See an mstance 1n

ity

§ 327 (CSJ@ZS 2308-0305"%) gy ele.).

N

thig

‘Such-—as’ 18 expressed as follows: ——ﬁze 80 WONRID SIS

’

such a

A

PENUIEY

347

[ ——

the

wife as a husband desires

[RNF WO I BIDNRY, such as know the

>'Jﬁ

(proper) way

§3E$5 Z90%, such a mother as thou

the

‘Not so—as’ is expressed by adding the negative 8

(see § 300, 1),

e &

¥330 I8N, wBSIw, he (18) not so poor as I

easao SNFE WO

&

S @379, he (is) not such a one as knows the (proper) way.

am:b

;)J

éwoéém 2IRE0RY, the elder brother (is) not so clever as (his) younger

1./

brother.

o

322

In § 302, 7 o3y9ws 8, why if I say, 4. e. for, because, has been

J )

)

i}

introduced

It may be added that s93¢a3e3I3 3, the reason (or cause)

ing

what, if I say (or one says), and FToosesSega008I3, the reason (or

R,

cause) what has it become (or what is it), if I say (or one says), are

)32,

similarly used, e.g. 3909 3ZR 32y, FTIN WHA Y w¥)¢ SBSRTY

) 4§

FOR BeB,

TOTLORR O, parents must teach good conduct to their

ond

children from (their) youth, for —

DPIVO T WP IN, FoY SRR

o

BRESAT R

F90003¢Rs 8, death appears preferable to a life without

honour, for —

& DR DCIOTF, ToTSe

5o

B099YTS8 B 3RTH nwdy

nd;

~o3s 8, Tuldpura means the town of weight [lit. Tulapura, if (one)

hat

says, is town of weight]; what was the cause that it got this name?

Jo,

(or why did it get this name?)—

Regarding the verbs eg® and ¢

this

see § 331 seq

i3

323

If a writer or speaker wants to adduce something that is or was

the

said or that happens or happened, the English ‘namely’, ‘as follows’ are

i

expressed by adding 9330 @, HII 3, if I say (or one says) what, to the

vs )

r as

pronoun €9z3>, or to a conjugated verh, or to a verbal noun, e.g

T3

TBOBINTY BB BB, ;3;3;38 the

they

SR B or =r3¢33 8, that is to say.

boy speaks as follows—

oonsy 3N T,

.J_')-—?

IS®

@aﬂé ;)658 the

LD

guru has given me the following command—

%W Neao's’m 33N

a0

Zf)&oga%‘ 2L TR, a-esa a certain friend gave (lit. told) him courage

with the following words— e3 98 RITINRY RT3 e;ﬁé 8, what that prince

)

the

said was this (or that prince spoke as follows)—. @9 da‘amj&a’b ST

yuch

558 Mr. Dvaranatha spoke as follows—. N85 @sﬁ@ﬁ Ut 63(’5 55353636

25)

;gg 3, the guru instructed him as follows —. £330 aasozbabeamﬁ DS

AW

g I

RT3 e 3, what the mendicant represented respectfully to the judge was

this —

SlaleviM @ﬁo‘idg;ﬂaﬂ8 thereby happens the following —

3

2903 SRR 8 afterwards (there) happened the following—. Cf. §325.

h 8

44+

—————

P

348

To this class belong also 0332 IT B, which (thing, etc.) if I say (or

one says)—.

)

@;3;33%@, which (things, efe.) if 1 say—.

03535%9%8,

which woman if I say —

$8RRE or o3wedg 8, who if I say—. 3383

the

4%

Yol %ee?% Tmc% TRE B T

7,900, ©30) a3 3, Dasaratha had

3

five children including females and males, they are the following —.

Siva

324. ‘What is that?’ may be expressed by ea% dey, if 1 say (or one

cioy

says) what, e.g. 3359, ¥SA 3R @%8@;30 Rw3g dodwe, brother, do you

A

80 b

know what cattle are? 53 eme Tl ea#%aem, St they (are) hail-

W)

stones (the father says). What is that, father? Awexyd @%8@3, what

thee

18 a gopura?

325.

‘What happened?’ (¢f. § 323), if followed by an answer of the writer

@

or speaker himself, may be expressed by Hzo00ZowS, if I say (or one says)

i

what happened, e. g. da%&‘;ﬁ&% bmo&aé’%é, what happened through bad

can

oy

luck‘?——f

@%@ﬁgﬁ%ﬁeg@o&oég& what happened meanwhile? —.

326.

If a writer or speaker wants to tell the manner in which something

i

is or was done or how something is or was, the English ¢in this manner’,

f

a1

‘in the following mamner’ is expressed by 3,803, Ben3, BRI G,

how if I say (or one says), e. g. aie%a%a_@ome%dozﬁg) 5,303 6L &

©3S, ;'3"% @, he told (7. e. wrote) the treatise called Vivékaéintimani in

[L]

b

the following manner —

ARVNFRY, BerRm RS, needles are

b

made in this manner —. o) WS B @-@ér{% 8, we came in this manner—.

up

ﬁ»#o&ri%ﬁo ;)érgcﬂe?n TOW ;Sfaﬁdoﬁe?#g) WHITE, S éeﬁ;gﬁ, cats live con-

hur

tinually (by stealth) on milk and curds in this manner—.

wF, 30

of

Ryt O a-@(gﬁ% 3, the way of refining gold is the following —. ra%&éés

vioh

RRENT T90HB TN 3, they got out of (their) strait in this manner—.

L

& ORRBY Wiy %éoﬁaom& %N 3, regarding this (there) is a story

0

(I shall tell) in the following manner —.

1 ¢

Instead of suffixing e, if, to %Y, how, the ancient and medizeval

80 ¢

dialect frequently suffixes .3, when I say (one says), to it, e.g. & 33

oo, &, that story (is told) in the following manner —-. w8 S, it is thus—.

Preg

& A ;R o8 R, that dogma is as follows —.

Sue

327

The English ¢as-—so’ is expressed in Kannada by an interrogative

elep

of manner followed by a demonstrative of manner, e. g. 3o 35 DBRBITBN

Sl

Se&To0, as (lit. how) is rash, so he made (= 5%‘7 SPEB0). BReR3TL

B

33T HBRBIBIA gﬁe(&%c) as is‘ faultless, so he spoke (=ZpeRTHI0

haC

JRSPNRT,

349

Je—

(or

BeLI o). W, RBonBidRon, as is according to fitness, so (:030&58%0).

0

Toi BB TooR, as is fit, 50 (=R o).

387 s BARENA, as

:

:

the remembrance (is), so.

QBN FT,0 PIIAI, T, YBN T & CRY

had

ﬁ@%%?‘)aﬁéado ?»&9655,530, is it a wonder that as the devotee thinks, so

Siva will graciously assume that form (i.e. such a form Siva will gra-

One

ciously assume)? ¥g Ronad 533 BeA B3FR Bedwe, TR BT Ronad

fou

QeRY 8B Fwe, as thou wouldst that others should behave towards thee,

A

all

so behave thou towards others. :Soﬁoé iR

e

wRB3 JIN TR A

hat

WBITTRE, TR STINW w3033, as thou becomest angry, if (one) beats

thee quite causelessly, so does a cow too. IR waqsﬁ RRET) BRITTRE,

ter

Tt & SReeTH, 8oz @, as thou feelest pain, so does this fly too. D

7s)

Rty DT WY @R wTOLIFpe, TRy FH AT Yy, as fishes

ad

cannot leave the water and live, so are frogs not at all. &é&%& ;Soe)@g%

OB, 8T 003 FTOR Bwony* [YHIITTF NDITIRTITTIE FRYBF,

ing

€PJR, as clay (is the material cause) for a pot, so (one) must consider

oI

(1t) to be a substance which is the material cause for the origin of sounds

8

as represented by letters.

Z

230%030?3%§% & T zbcé@ z&.@% n‘océd N zoi%zs 03530302 Wi

i}

@diwd\@e}ﬁ m'aéﬁ :doéj& WRAOIINISZBRE, smanodoe ?»\2%5 HOBY IR

L

&:5% xs;% %"e):ﬁ@% zasézj ;.3"3@%3;3@% So3oenosny, as a stack that is piled

up as high as a big hill, if one spark flies from a fire and falls (upon it),

o

burns and is reduced to ashes in half a moment, even so all happiness

B

of (one’s) life is destroyed by a small act done (lit. that one does) in

.’

4

violent passion.

33 9e &’925;5 3008 $ToeBIZ, 003 VPR BedR

FHR WS BA HRR BtP DEPITHY Fpe, TR 5@%0'50 0008 ToRNg

)y

TR TP VeLNTOY, as an ant that walks about on an orange, though

it comes from above to the bottom, does not roll down (from it), even

il

so does also a man on the earth not roll down.

4

328. The English ‘how much — so much’, ‘how many — so many’ is ex-

pressed by an interrogative noun of indefinite quantity (§ 278, 3) followed by

such a demonstrative noun, e.g. X003 TB FTDBRT TORSISILBRT,

elephants how many, even in so many (places there occurs) a number of

\;

)

suras in union (3. e. seven times VLU Chandas under kusumagara). %o

<

&0 @-aﬁo%sﬁeia‘ DRITIT, 030, @so%mv & BB TonBRTS FORABT;

é

& WOBHRD O %oﬁogﬁgﬁ wé’fezsm‘s;jcmgo %m%ﬁﬁgzﬁao 3BRABI; VXS

o~

350

o

-

St

FoBIBRPS TS %03 0 meeé ¢ QR0 300° NTIIRS e.eoi)c'ﬂcsejo S

Al

Be%; QR JJANPE eru&szbécxo =0 BRI o, how many arrows the warriors

shot, so many arrows he caused to appear in the body of those valiant

men; how many weapons entered that force, so many weapons he stopped

1t

i

altogether by cutting (them down); how many elephants (and) horses

has

attacked, so many he split; how many chariots came on with impetuosity,

the vehemence of so many he broke; how many people rushed on, even

1§

an

so many he killed. =) Bon%* ey, RN & B0, how many horses

pro

(thou) wantest, so many I shall give thee.

BRI WIFRETW 3

BIROFRBeR09, [ JRPEPoD Wi IF I30%0wy, when he was offering

are

add

sandalwood, (and) his capital how much it was, (so much, &=, which

foll

is to be supplied) was spent all in succession for the sandalwood

0

W) OIBO BRI0 AR, BRT T00RY, SRV UT[HRRE, VR, ZHIB

rich

w90, how much far (7. e. how far) a horse can journey in a day, so much

has

(. e. 80) distant a road (= déeﬁ_)

B30 Tk A, 3 2BT,B wWID

o

830950399) WRERPA %Ja%ﬁo'j ;Széé’r’s aa@ omw érﬁoée 3pe, Q.Jo&@ ;S;i: 03359

Wwho

ﬁsa R3, ToN=RTY 3&3 WRLP A

%ne?o;ﬁcséo SRes "’dcﬂeé do ;5710538

thre

how much we laugh at the custom of the Egyptians to have (thelr) whole

stea

body shaved, if a dog dies in the house, even so much foreigners laugh

doea

when they see that in our country a woman whose hushand has died,

of I

has (her) head shaved

8399 IRy, 8T, suidRe, 8339 ST e?% LD,

g}

how much money we have, so much calculation we have

Chy

329

Where a relative participle with a demonstrative adverb of

W2

actic

time, as woTen (wooS+en), when I come when thou ' comest, when

he, she, it comes, when we, you, they come (§ 282, ¢), is commonly used

N3

~QN

the ‘when’ is occasionally expressed by an interrogative adverb of time followed

What

by a demonstrative ome, €. g. JeY) 0T PYHBOWR 30N wWToATRE, G

Pogg]

530 2383 3¥%,9 0, when you come back from Puné, visit him. 8 =3

Nﬁgr)

T ROTAN [WNDCITTEE, SN STIMIROT, BREN BRI

when thou

pufp<

hast prepared thy lesson, thou mayest go out for a walk. This is, so to

¢

say, an imitation of Samskrita odoze, when, and its correlative 3o

acy

then

Cf. the close of § 330

V:(

330. Regarding the translation into English of the relative past

d@cg

participle followed by nouns and demonstrative pronouns see §§ 179. 254

bElng

and regarding that of the relative present-future participle followed by

(fory

351

.

i

such terms §§ 186. 254. (f. §§ 363. 364

In § 282 the use of those

i

participles in connection with adverbs has been adduced

0t

It remains to refer to § 267 in which it has been stated that

o

it might appear, as if there existed relative pronouns and their correla-

o

tives in Kannada (just as in Samskrita)

That such an appearance is not

by,

based upon idiom, has been indicated in that place, though in English the

(g}

instances given there, would naturally suggest the existence of relatives

§ES

and their correlatives, e.g

¢who —he

¢who— she

etc

However the

N

pronouns resembling relative ones are interrogatives, and the correlatives

are demonstratives, and therefore the instances quoted in § 267 and some

ng

ich

additional ones in this paragraph are literally to be translated as

follows: — 383008 &° ¥=33¢? ©¥3I8 B3 o, who (is) a rich man? he indeed

od

(1s) a prince (in English: who is a rich man, he indeed is a prince, or a

o

rich man is a prince indeed)

FRoTT wa;g e 3ona3o %r”otéa;’)@o who

1ch

has an (always) bent bow? he (is) Kama

wﬁz’)ﬁ o%déo,o;ﬁa WA

233 B3RP Wa30F 03030 P ARITF® ¥B? ¥R aﬁdzsn@dﬁ):'ﬁ RSN F T

4

who (is) the man that only once contemplates joyfully in (his) mind the

)

three syllables Ba-sa-va ? the lotus of his countenance indeed will remain

ol

steady.

QRBRY BT FITDE SN R Zvo WRT9cJo, Who

1gh

does think of us in his heart? (Siva d,Skb) that one (or he) even is a part

16(],

of Basava.

U39 B33,30303% N@a"é, who is a wife faithful to her

husband? she indeed is a venerable woman.

RBIOZR TOR SPRITIRe?

‘31

B3S0 e 5389, who does work? he shall have a dinner.

3TN0 "3

of

osormﬁefo :;Ssacéo;’)&@e? BTR0 R TR, Who does perform virtuous

actions ? he is happy.

el

3593 -js)(v\)e& Do B8R %@@Swsaﬁ 23eFR WORY

39,80¢7 9ZTo T 3 SR oﬁsa;ﬁé@ RRIT 3008 NTTIT TPR Wed,

ol

what man does desire welfare? he must be kind to all men as much as

el

i

possible.

foutr Tefofat) ﬁﬁoﬁo:ﬂdﬁo ‘%@gdzﬂa@ NS WIFTON BREIRISY,

730

e? VT B V0G4, Who does frequently march out with the very

purpose of overcoming an enemy? such a one is an abhyamitrya.

ot

BB BRB WeRTBBTRO F3oFo, what is that towards which an

)tO

A0

activity is directed ? even that is the object (see § 315, 2, m)

&R0 TR

@O.aoe&)%io 3o? @303 Sexy, what is in customary usage? even that is fit.

BT '23@3@ B030? ¥R B33Fec3r0, what is beautiful? that is worthy of

st

being seen

Ereto I BYT? BBy BHTTeeo, What is location? that

'047

(form%) the sense of the locative case

2300308, 009R0BVIXI* VI SO

by

352

—

sl

SIRO 08, wRoD, e 3nu¥yo, what is a combination of mutual action?

are

there also a bahuvrihi compound (§ 249) is formed

28030 FIW NN

oo dwe? @y ©I.wen, what is an elephant’s forepart? that (is) the

(oc

§a)

antabhiga

03093 Be33Y R Dk FOWNTOY 3pe? & Be3BY APa)

%

DBoRde . in what country do people not study science? in that country

(there) is no happy state

B3N R), DOBRWTT 030953 083000 [BA

i

FRE BeBR 3D, 92T w03, B303Re? e 33RO 395y HTRIWITTSY

382 BRIOF, Bedy, in what manner do they desire that others should

treat them ? in that very manner they should treat others.

00!

B

SIRZINS ST T, o eaoédo:@gj S el &5’563 DRI B, who are

gl

some friends of the bridegroom? they are called janyas.

QR aido @%

Wi

3593 3F 56@67 &95 63553 ‘('363 oleaoécaﬁ e20=0, who (are) fit for thee to

i

trust? such people choose for thy friends!

qu

ARTIIRY ORFENIT)? BLILP T B3 8030, 9RHP, 0, which (pearls)

flo

do suit you? them choose with pleasure! (See § 271.)

Such sentences appear to have originally been formed in imitation of

Samskrita ones with the relatives o3zf. o35z, oom» and their cor-

Qﬁ

(

he

relatives 3o, 3a=3nf, 3@» (¢f. § 329)

Their translation, as given above,

hi

can be easily changed into proper English

ut]

XXTI. On the verbs »¢ and eog*

|

1

331

In §§ 302, 7; 322. 323. 324. 325. 326 the peculiar use of the verbs

o8 =56

he

DT (I, OF),

¥

(¥R, ©8y), to say, when their past relative

W,

participle (in the sense of the present) is in combination with %, (VE),

7

\

and 3 and an interrogative (0359¥3 0 FOTSCRI T, DRRR B, VIR T

O

$330 D, etc.; 88 3eR0; TON3IT; RPN B, BN asasﬂﬁi) has

been introduced

v

(8

It appears from those paragraphs that if a person wants to state the

¥

reason (or cause) of something he writes or speaks about, if a writer or

speaker adduces something that is or was said or that happens or

(]

de

happened, if a writer or speaker is going to answer a question put by

himself, and if a speaker or writer wants to tell the manner in which

1t

N’

something is or was done or how something is or was, those verbs in the

mentioned combination are employed.

332. Before expatlatmg on the other use made of the verbs 3¢ and

1

L

e9¢ we have to give their past participles aa’;o eaa’n (§ 155) and their

~

)

0!

substitutes o, and e0g, (§ 172 and § 198, 7, remark 1), as the said verbs

i

are often followed by ¢ %, eVADE (NFITF), [0, BeLI or Becsk,

the

(occasionally also 2,8) combined with their past participles, for we may

say either FRB IS0

TR II Do

FHBII I

or also BRI 20,

) mé

iy

TREID B3

FRBIZ0 MATFo: FRB IR FRTo; FRBIZY [ o

an

BRR T VELPRRY, TR IS, Be2PRRY, THE

BDeCP TS, all meaning

¢he said I gave’ or <he said I will giv

%

uld

It may be said about the use of >3® and e3¢ in their simple and

combined form that they generally introduce a statement by words or on

paper (or on cadjan leaves, copper plates and stone tablets), this being

are

)

either a statement made by somebody regarding himself or another, or one of

what another has said or written, or one of command, or one of message,

{0

when it may be said to answer to the English conjunction <that’ or the

quotation marks in English, e.g. 3pn¥o 38 25° 3 ¢, she said «I bring

1s)

flowers”’

B BR0 35933 5 30, he said «I shall do this”

B3P

SF w2 DT o3 0f, they said «if (you) give, you (are) good ones

0f

0r

B39, 395Y DTIT DINHY, C3TPONR WoRBITY IRY, EBIRY BANLPITY

he said «sir, you (are) a great hero and fear nobody”, and (thus) praised

M

him

SR RORTY) — BB B, TV, IRN $0o3,30 W 3v, then the lion said

«“this (is) my share, it fell to me”

308 83, 18 Gemededs, ¥N 8],

P enY widy, 1t did not come to my mind at that time that hereafter

my fate would become thus

TRV 8 NBOR BREN WTS eRR,, BREIURY

89T, $030 =&

ths

he said «I go to that town and return”, and started

176

WY 3T ReRoowmy, Fwze! Be=To AN %@aésa BRTYRDO T, BB

)

'@@2533 “elder 31s‘cer » prayed she, «kindly give me a drop of honey'

26

God w111 make thee happy?”.

£33 30eS IPAD NTTITY QNP FeBF

16

TN BATLBOG Y, PRYJLIA dZ 03 IPB TRy, he svivedian 4l

certain decmon that help aﬁ’orded to others Would never be in vain.

the

¥SR— 2338, VO ZRD0H SEBR FTRB B, SWENZT IR,

or

BRNGR, “ha, what is this?” cried he, «in this straw there appears a

or

deer to be hidden?.

SPIdL 3 23902 TN, =D éoﬁm

BREEIIZTY

by

it appears that death is pleferable to a dishonorable life.

“pseno BT

ch

TPWIBFT BORTIN0 RO I® éez% BF OR0,00303AT Sowne TR

he

o © Ze RURY O3 goo, when they told (the king) that the florist, say-

ing “she tasted the flower (and) fragrance with which Hara should be

nd

SEY AR

el

worshipped 7, cut off the nose of this queen at that moment.

P

4

)

Oy -

)

PSR

Tell

S300T) VIR TPTD STRZ0 DR, uewﬁuﬁo&o% @g =0, he said hastily

“the meaning of your word is perfectly known to me’

& $3RTR030

eﬁ%a

0290¢ MW Smotic, having said even ¢this worldly

0 ¢

EST AN DIehoE

existence-removing-story (shall become) a cause of pleasure for the ear

3

WOu

I endeavoured to tell (it)

DO RVIDRY, BV TR BRETIRY aé\ca%seéo

she said “he took all the money and went away”

AR TREB YT

(AN

BT IR [IN B30, they told me that the decision thou madest

L

was not proper

03, V3N TSR FNT VR TITN BRENDILS 3R

I}

®ec 3y, the ox said «thou canst not be saved from his hand”.

‘3»@&30

%JaéS’ ;3#;& n)oaseé’eﬁ o Su&To, I shall certainly give’” king Simhala sald

o\

‘ﬁsam @Qa’o ﬁ@aﬁéa S

, BEed30 Becn Ry, Phakira said «uncle, thou

didst call me”

(‘aJ

mdme; B8 DRV! T AINFRY, W3R TIRWIS

4 10

%3.0 ToP33 eX ¥x oy, when it (the wolf) said (to the wild hog) «give

ez

up anxious thought as to those (your) little ones! I shall sit near (them)

i3p)]

guarding them with care”

SR DPBOS, RN, BeL1BRY, he said « 1 will

o L”

he

Whe

3

32 RONBR,

;:mosm méooﬁmr%@ 8, 33n mae ReLP

¢

gu?gﬁd S3INRY 505!“?‘ 553

SR NENIY T A 22)&3 <9, the son took to

%

;

heart that (his) father had given him the advxce that it was much fitter

to bear with than to punish, and pardoned the boy

DD NR 30 33N1%

By

Weg

$3393) D 23T LR OB d

F NB BHD SBT3 KPOIF

BWE [NV.BINPR, 0 RewsSe Bl ABRR, 0P HEEIO wiHRA, 1t is written

wh

in it (viz. in the old or former book) that (you) should never transgress

the word of (your) parents and that God created man, beasts, birds, trees

ver|

the earth, the sky, the sun, the moon, and all the other things

Srlo o

(pe

SOVNNTRY, R NBTF, T8, ToF BREND S

u(\)(v

3, he said « tie the

dogs to a tree and go!” SEVE) Bo3 RR3 WY %éj m BnRY, BayN I8

e

6@ N QDR ,

W e PO TR, he exhorted him “the habit of using im-

NG,

g,

proper language (1%) very bad; remember this well!”,

exRdNeEIR e

ng

R ¢

QWRR VoD %ﬁ?ﬁ o 2L o, that Kulinda told his son “do not become

subject to envy!™

asa sér 33, m%s

o..UN

— o =D

o9 SRV TR aSe%’*b

10y

B NONR ex :Me wsacfécﬂm, the klng commanded the boatmen that they

hould first transport all his soldiers over (the river)

e33R0 RREBII

SFw, when he said «let us see!”

Ve

BRETBL D, 239 IR BV, he said «let us

see, come!”

by

»RAINRR, Be2IO? FIOR 2

3e€Rs, Re2°0, whatam I to tell him?

W

[r—

S

355

tly

Tell (him) he must come to me.

BREN, FpOVoTIVREY 3T TudR ew

30

&3, W3 EAGTY %e2%, 2o, and tell (him) that I will come to his house

dly

to dinner this evening.

o3, Ha 2052089 33, =i waedv wT3, e

I

89, éewu% o)ed 8y, FFRATTY, the gentlenmn sent me to say that he

ol

W,

would come to your house to dinner this evening.

BR300 aé%’ SSFO0Y

3

A SIP DB FTITIWRE, FBHEN BNy IXoR ﬁm%%oasaﬁ

est,

%woéon)dosa 883 &0, the messenger went to the ruler and said «O king,

o,

my master has sent you these things as a present”

WO

8

The verbs 3¢ and e are also used in questions, ¢. g. oF =uBT

id

3003 DEPY 035 &9, he said « why hast thou ascended the tree?”

& %va

10

29, ¥, fuoovovoﬁ T WTO DT, W3, Ty, when the cripple said

V3

“«how shall I come to thy help‘?” and was sorrowful.

03593 385 S:

ife

weTo 0y, 3¢, what doest thou say that (we) shall play? & Zoo38y 8

g}

TOBRY [WBTTTY RITY ORI,

BRCUBRSNR SN % F3539 %@?d;ﬁo

vl

he called the servants that were in the garden and asked “ who are they

a3

who have treated this tree in this manner?”. I3ZoR TN LNV IR

FeP3Ty, they asked «“how did you know (that)?”

0T BT IEY

fo

Fewowo, he asked «when wilt thou bring (it)?”

R 0T ©203 D

e

DRY, TITWR VR, TEET

he asked Ramacandra <«why doest thou

¥

weep?”’

W

fen

Further the caid verbs are used to express ‘for the purpose’, regarding

which some instances have been given in

302 under No. 7

()

Then the said verbs are also used to give an explanation of nouns,

36\,

verbs or adverbs, e. g. TCB, 033;@ Roree, kalté means an ass [lit. kalté

(people) having said (is) an ass]

04»\)\/3 ﬁ-(\f O)gﬁl N\) OJ\)dO

multaga

the

means a certain tree

FRCORZS3 o, kiilla means a rude man.

J EgNJ

49

TCPGo, tégaldan means <he reviled’.

eﬁﬁoﬁ S0 eIFSBY B, aguldan

|1

means ‘he sank in water’.

kalkané means suddenly.

FCI 50305& eﬁ%’n) %o

v

ﬁwrﬁ&&;ﬁoﬁam 3eno, gdlaoalane means qUILk]y — Also when a series of

me

nouns is given Ogf or ©x¢ is used, e. g. NG T, TEOL T, [

)

3

%933, WA ¢ T, wIRBIT9Y),

WO, o)

BuR) 3TH TIYNFE

&)

Also when imitative sounds, feeling, etc. are to be expressed, the said

verbs are used, e.g

¢o

3 TEOLINTOTL ¥

VATF )

~ihialel

us

hailstones fell down from the sky with the sound of palapala palpala

BRLe) N0y MooMe IR

Tomu3.83, the fly sings gumyi guiyl

S8

m‘)

45%

PN

356

e

80035 203 989,33, the palm of my hand has the sensation of jum

ﬁﬁ(

fak

(from cold)

kn

The relative participles of the said verbs are used similarly (¢f. the

use of O3, in the passive, § 315, 2, k)

Regarding »530, when forming

B!

of :

a verbal noun in combination with evzio or e, the following instances

may be given: — JTISTAZ Fo00300[N BT wBodTy, do not say

9]

«this investiture with the sacred thread is sapless to me”

TR, zoe)o

o

il

B T DR @aﬂood o, does the cat know (the d1ﬁ’e1ence between

I

common) milk (and) tha,t which is vowed ? ga30 & RRZY, BHRITIN WY

FO3II0.BR

2. 308 20eR3. 3 Besv, he must daily examine «how much

more have I learned to-day?”

TE.P09, WBIIDDRARY TORT, TONE ToTV

m

bir

SBE,R. 300W3TIN VBRI, INRINRERT ITONRCTITTN BT3P ENSR03Re

B 3P ITABRY, IPLIFTON DwFoC Iod Rwe&d, children, before you

W

apply (your) hand to anything, examine thoroughly whether it is in any

Sa

way useful to you or not

DO RSN N WT TN DRIIRB W

RDBVR.RBF, Wi BRB T9TLI0

there is an eminent reason, why we

1€

should not vainly (and) inconsiderately speak. & T[Y=E FZO 3R T3

e

nYoeey;:

w)

OINTF), WD Wd VIV, TR BREIZ, IB TR, VeFDY

TN (239,39 + 8N) w3xd. in that book there are ethic rules; it is

3

written (therein) that you should read and remember them carefully and

0

walk accordingly edg)ééaso F383 Hen ::Ssaz?ris woN w3y, 1R, calling

a8

(one’s) servant and ordering “do thus”.

deom eﬂma BREN W, 6R,

ol

SReEITO 82, w3 B¢ (past relative participle) %ﬁw&éo the fox said

ab

with emphasis (to the fowl) «elder brother, I go (now) and shall return.

(Your) favour remain (on me)!”, and started

333. I8 or eI B are frequently used after a conjugated verb to express

ad

the meaning which that verb would give, if its relative participle in comhi-

U

Y

nation with €8 were used, €. . 2QRT R ®D, TSR DTS WIVE, 20

R 8 W 0BV 2oNBRFNRE RN F3,8. wBOF, wl €8y, if hence thou daily

lef

come [lit. «daily come” if (one) says] to our school, you will probably

D

become able to write like me even in one or two months

BRB WSTR B

the

if master has come [lit. if (one) says «master has come”]

OR300 o3

38,030 3008 TR 3S3Z 3 WREY [o0%59,008 S eenes, B, if the sparrow

(i

sits on that egg [lit. «sat” if (one) says), a young will be born by the

[]

warmth of its body. 353 303 SERY, WRTT ToITVOT PR Wesv ¥R 3

13

357

i

i

Be38 3308 B0 IPRITRY, if you take care of the poor [(lit. ¢ you must

take care of the poor” if (one) says] as much as you can, God will be

the

kind towards you.

FoONEY aSsm diﬁa DRONN nePnw 438 w¥NS

Lng

23, RECLIR w83 B, if the pods are ripe, they will open by the effect

1668

of sunshine and wind, and the cotton that is inside, will come out.

DO

sy

PYoB= Y NROR BRERY @55 ABVNR TR aN1 ) ﬁfﬁo 30N TN BRBOSN

AN

S 1f thou goest to the town called Rbmmdpura thou wilt get a cocoa-

£e1

nut for two duddus

29 B3 90383 3N & B BRSN T ANDE ©

if darkness sets in here, I shall not find the way in this hilly country

)

11Cd

B TooI0IRY, FODWTN BoW BRMY DRIT WA 3 BWRD BTOB, 2 R,T

JOTY

o3, if we two divide this costly pearl among us, (our) poverty of

birth will cease

WAy

Observe also the following instance — 3R3R%s 33793

you

30; B 32559038% ¥ 3 W) o0 8wy, the gentleman came last

any

Saturday; (from that time) till this Saturday, if one says, it is a week

o)

It is to be remarked here that >33 or 9338 is also used to express

y We

the English ¢that is to say’, e. 9. 88, OYECORe VRDNT NLeeFe BRI

ROl

3T @33

DRVTY BRR,ED

RFn$ 28R, from A. D. 1490 till A. D

3

1687, that is to say for about 200 years

R DR RNoWBNT CEZLQSCS

1t s

%e:a’ 0 3080 T2 0%63530 NOBOD TRV, B3 3 98 [T zéw"a%a”o&e»

and

guezy, the area of the united kingdom of Great Britain is about as great

Iling

as that of Ceylon, that is to say 25000 square miles

B O S0nod

g\ﬁ

58 FRT, TY BWOST B3 ©RY, BRRB Doy, if this fish moves

said

about, the sea swells and increases, that is to say such a big fish

tur

334. With regard to the use of >J3 or @68 after a conjugated verb

adduced in § 833 the remark is to be made that 033003, e3T3T8 or 33T

pres

(¢/. the verse in § 319) are similarly used, e. g. ROZFTe ot evidaleu\D)

omhl

3073, if thou knowest Siva’s mantra

ATIRLPNRTE 3D ~d§@&@:€ if he

D

left your service undone

BRI DG oardRB, If they escaped

R A8

dail

oor@, if they touch. Also exy 7998 YRR RPeNSERT, if to-morrow

abl

thou goest to Puné

Cf. § 296

930

R

335

In the modern dialect ¢intentionally’ is expressed by 3e¥s,,

il

(lit. having said «it must”), e. g. omo ReFT, TFRONTY, wRBOY

I have not broken the looking-glass intentionally; (and ¢unintentionally

) the

may be translated zo%

or 23eBT))

#a 0

0

)

336

In the same dialect ‘they say’, ‘on dit’ is expressed by adding

iy

0. (§ 196, remark 4; § 198, 7, remark 2) to a sentence, e. g. 239O

& BATOTOR WER BREN, BRI By (see § 337) — 5p00T3e, 3ZBeRdRe

Sal

T 53533 ;Sc?).rawo

c?mcé 559@

2913033;3

the Brahmana went to that

s1|

money-changex and sald “su they (people) say you have a certain

large metal vessel into which water uses to be filled ”

LR WSO

TP wBe FREUPE FOTPRRY, RIoTVF ST

they say that a sort of

frogs swallows a whole chicken

WTIS?. O

«they are coming” they

say (or I am told)

wa 83, «“they are come”, I am told

a8

337

From the instances in § 332 it appears that 3¢ or esg® are

generally placed at the end of a statement, etc.; it is, however, allowed to

put them also before it in order to introduce it, e. g 38 0000 VW 0Ry, TR

(un

53 30OR Qe LS €5F§ cSo L DE %?ce, Qe SR DTV TR, e RPTBIBY,

orig

20, etc., the fathel called both (hls chlldren), told them to stand before

§Cie

thes

h1m and said (lit. a having said) «children, daily look on the looking-

glass”

WR) OF 2, SWRITRY BT RIBINONR 88 B — [0F,909

TRV

w8

SR SIoen WeTR)

©ed 203,08, on a certain day an old man said

not

to some boys ¢ children,

I desire your welfare”.

5368535 N ﬁw») (o'l

sile

S’aoﬁ 930 wXISeRSe mod, the god said to Namblyanna-—“always

(are) even the manifold védas the road”.

‘“éuﬂ’oa')’ o BR0300N— 9P 030

0r ng

RE°030 38 ovo, the wife told the beloved one “I do not know, I do

§ 29,

not know devotion”

0 m

In such a case D% or €% may be preceded by I

(of. § 326 &

9K

35\.@@.), e. g. WOPRNS ®TABo R 3SR 8o, thereupon, in order

the |

to appease the queen, he spoke thus—. =03 =5 »3=s* @8 T e, again

?”N\)t

the king spoke thus —. =03 3 ©3,8%°, again she spoke thus—. e3¢

(i

23 & ¢, she spoke thus—

530 B3 8 of, they spoke thus—. 3ZAR

'3,('1)0

2368 ]88 80N TIBRELTI RS BF, % o,

he spoke thus to (his) father—

ol

to the son of the king the son of Patimohi spoke thus—.

Also: =& &@dm

Posg

having spoken thus (with reference to preceding words)

0r

Or @amo, this, may be put after SP% € 9. ¥TI* I3 BHo, he

i

spoke this—

algo

There is still to be mentioned the use of a relative participle in the

Who |

form of a verbal noun to introduce a statement, etc., without >5° or esgé

e. g. 9380 BSRCWAR) — ST, TOL VEWH WEDDTY, BELNTE DT

Tay

has i

Sataa

359

PREUR,

g

)

edew33), he reflected «what she says is a bag of black seed, (is) the bag

of gunpowder”. RQox53) 58633925%._;)63%6@ X dabaiol 8¢9, the lion

e

said «all of you certainly know”. In such a case Dﬁéi is to be

14

supplied, for which see § 323.

A

o

ol

XXIII. On B, e, s,

16y

338. In §212, No. 7 e @, @e a8 (¢/. §§ 170. 361) and esen, appear

as clagsed with the adverbs by the Sabdanusasna.

are

’ae(g)cS.

to

In that case B 3 has the meaning of ¢in absence of’, ‘without’

o)

(vindrtham), e. g. ©%,055° B8 3% 0° @%{%_33, do distinguished people

%,

originate without letters (i. e. without the knowledge of letters or

016

science) ? Q0RF VR OBY DS w¥E, yIRoZteesd, without thee are all

ng

these (valuable things) in existence (for me), O Karna? g e d TE,

R

®0ed, without devotion thou wilt be ruined. 3Ieode e SER shall I

a&ld

not come even without delay? éwaoe&cﬁg, even without intermission.

wleTndon B8, Dy B 2R ez, many men like to live without labour,

xJOi

3,8

But originally e a3 is the negative participle of e, not being present

o)

or not having been present, not being, not having been (see § 170; ¢f. vy

[ do

§298), e.g. €RIVDB TIWgo RBWFOTF HRFyo, a kingdom in which

Z30R

so much (viz. a strong king, etc.) is not existing, is called weak.

G

P WE,Foo, B¢ BT BYBRP, 2 son generated by one’s self (is)

1del

the best; and if not being he is (7. e if he did not exist). =g 2,3;})\:3@‘

yIll

WEIFYo mogad%acﬁ,@%-z%, thereafter not being anything to eat here if is

o)

%”l

(¢. e. if thereafter there were nothing to eat here). AN 20033 A0S

Yy

B0B0Y, if (there) is no understanding, (there) is no right behaviour.

]

| N

<0

B o3RRS 9 Be B,0070N BWerodF Soh3E dRRAE, to a useful pur-

50

e

pose even not being a spending a going (i. e. spending even for no use

or without use) is called vyaya.

- he

293 being thus originally a negative participle or gerund, forms

also the relative participle AR (see § 273), e. g.

$ysde tioe, those

e

who have no sorrow. OR339 'a?od ooy, a line that has no break.

%@D&eg’d 239, an ox that has no horns. ) BYTIIF, & man who

2955‘5

Neg

has no understanding. B BT, that is not existing. —It is to he

e

60

pe——

remarked that me . like sv®, may govern also the accusative, e.g

Y

D23 00w TR (see § 316 under No. 1)

8L

wed (¢ §300,1, remark a)

AQ

¥ 2 when considered as an adverb (§ 212, 7) means ‘excepting’, ‘except’

g:

i eﬁe)c%

& |

(vnmrtha,m Sabdanu$isana), and occasionally ¢but’, e.g.

101

Beso’ w¥de, are (there any) gods except Jina? Qe v 93¢ @&%”5‘

ad03ne’ 389, except thee, Jinapa, who is an excellent person on

has

hay

earth?

DU Qéoﬁ%? Bo¥ Q) DFF IS

2 OBRY* ;3&03.@6#9'0303;‘ HBIFID,

EX(

except at night ﬁre-ﬁles (ha,ve not the ability to shme), let the sun

he

shine in front, what ability (to shine) have they?

BORITPRBNG, ¥,

WY wsa%’ PR ¥ Y, Kama, except among females, thou hast no

wh

power.

%o%‘fﬁ 3035@:5053@@;‘ omo '6%3@ e:e%d;’)ve) 3 BY; DTY 0

o

g

vegla*f B0 DY, in an alliteration Wherem the kula (the Kannada ¥°) 18,

kn

the optlonal use of the letter e for the kshala (the Samskrita %) does

&

never occur; an optional use, excepting (that of) the kshala, is not to

eO3F RO3E

RO 2035° aaémi‘h@%" &3635‘

me

occur (in such a case).

By DY DTV, in the verbal themes uy ndy suy Oy (there) is no other

use e\cept the doubling (of their final letter when eo¢ is suffixed).

bea

BTDTOR, 0 ) 3P R

daﬁ%o&.mﬁ oﬁ%? 2303 BBFH ﬁoﬁas B0 %0,

o

excepting the terms that end in e, (there) is (the suffix) 7§ for the datlve

(i

when it (é. e. its suffix) follows the rest (viz.) those that end in (other)

o

vowels and in consonants

PR SO0 uw%‘d@c% 3035° BSOS

w3y, WIHFRY, it is possible to offer (one’s) riches, “but how will it be

hes

possible to offer (one’s) body ?

SDIBET, o SoBIBgy' BRID To N

10y

o3 T v Te Boddcvo FOR R0, except I reverently marry (her) to

Y

a devotee of Adigiva, I do not give this (my) daughter to a worldling.

BeRT TYHOWR QT D[ ir’ TOTmITDY, except through the grace of God

stil

(there) is no forngeness for (i. e. of) sin. By SRRTIMSHY R SRRT

Wh\

sowatede, except that milk becomes curds, could curds become milk ?

Y

Occasionally 223 or e9z§ (or ©3) may precede e, e. g Q3 %03%3@

4 |

BoRBRBY B, FITDBRLF TN, except he “die by your ha,nd I

1ot

shall get no delnelance from my curse.

SEANESE TPVABRY T FT, 33

3(

o3oRv, except one adores me, devotion will not be obtained.

eff

e sometimes loses so much of its originally verbal character

§ 167 be

that 1t is added to a relative past participle (unless the rule in

the

RS

361

PEEECN

+

applied), e.g. dgo VPRRL T (=FPABT wed, or perhaps FpeRR

ve %), except I see thee. 23%3F\c$e)z3 except it become bright. 33 3,y 208,0

RoR éécﬁmef e atetalo N i ov 3’%363&)23 (Commentary: dbdde)ﬁ) %szé

b

09 donsSwniy dwdo, a term W1th final e3¢ may well form a w01d in

E

o

a Samskrita compound, but in (true) Kannada does not become a

i

nominal theme by itself

LWON W S0 wvre o B¢ BReny, Mari that

0n

has come to a town, does never go away except she eats.— On the other

hand we have also

2,

38 dNAGOD (=3dNATY €5@)Z3) 200 25903

sun

except he knock (his) head (against something), understanding will not

be obtained (by him)

)

Likewise this disappearance of its original character seems to occur

4n0

when e 8 is followed by an accusative (see § 300, 1, remark 0), e. g

390

BB BT ¥ D8R3 9EP=8rRY), except devotees of Siva we

) 15,

know and love nobody

does

AP VB R0 WePFR, TEIRIT SBW

w930 (see § 287, remark) 38, FIDNH IIF0

except always upon

it 0

o)

me, he does not think even upon my (high) rank

i

Ll

ther

e9e &3 may also get the meaning of ‘besides’ (&3¢

$08,), € 9

o 3. besides that

ane . besides this

BRIV 3, FOSTY WR T

ced

besides him some others came.

SRNSY mrar{rass TOLITIRIZ, BRI, ne

U\g_oy

B cﬁde)ﬁ 55& 038 FORDS QSJ@ S8 %‘J@%ﬁoé&e) the flies spent

i

176

(their) tlme by JOyfully flying about besides (that) they did not do any

ther)

ork useful to themselves

Re3ToRI0 BT 0T, 3 oo D), WPATB © B

WU

ORBORY, ST, 09

Dévaraja

1t

he

NS TR JWOPYTBRHT BRRFREIC

besides enlarging his kingdom much towards the south, took, in the

)

north, the district of Hosakdté of the Vijapura people.

Y NI

1) {0

Q8 FAFI mﬂmﬁa" besides a rich man he is a very liberal man.

ling

The or1g1na1 verbal character of e9e>z$ as a gerund (¢f. § 300) appears

(God

still in the following instances: ——,\)G;S’S VT A &\Q% 5003 3Ry, @ man

0

who, (his love) not being steady, loves, (¢. e. & man unsteady in hls affection).

Ik?

SRFV0T B Do, a mango tree not being it is not (4. e. it certainly 1s

o0

a4 mango tree)

AN B 0O RKvw e, a jasmine of rich fragrance

ﬂds ]

not being it is not (i.e. it certainly is a jasmine of rich fragrance).

400

O

$,0308, 300 DRF Ru88 BRS*, in r espectability that requires no (particular)

effort (to acknowledge)

The relative participle of eveyc3 is @3, €. 9. VXY 303, if it be not

goter

that (or thus).

VO BT that is improper.

aaa‘ B cﬁﬁso another

)|

he

46

RN

e

362

—

who is not he. 1?’%5‘)%5 o8&, speech that is not distinct. VO B FIFO

fol

nes, acts that are not proper. m;s%aor‘% WRBVE JWIHYF FTT,

such an 35° as does not stand for the bindu. géﬁec’;;ﬂs‘ @ég’dezoﬁooc,

(d

also where there is no negative sense.

b

o

e,

St

In § 212, 7 e9exn, is classed with the adverbs that are verbal forms;

it is a bhavavacana of the verb esey¥ and another form of D) otk dbie

t

0F

used, like ee (which see in § 300), in pratishédha, negativing, etc., e. g.

WBT3T Y% ORF 250000 BTITS’ B, (sounds) that are written

(but) cannot be read (except in an inarticulate manuer, as sounds for

01

0w

thunder, etc.), are no letters (lit. letters a being not).

¥3J0y,, not he!

¥3¢¥ey, not she! ©gZey, not that! IF,@ey, it is not fit. =PRSS

nodR%y®, we have no (such a thing as can be called) anger against

him. Qess, 20065%3@% o 2830 DS AT YO, O king, Simhaléndra

is one who has never paid tribute.

T

e9¢e3,, @. e. @, to which the . of inferential interrogation (§ 212, ¢)

is suffixed, is used as follows: — 2S¢, BRS, 30305@@}\@’3%55333;7&5’@@

lea

lan

i8Ry 232008 usg) moﬁo% 5o SRemezednomamee, O look, is not this

the water of the celestial Ganges that runs swiftly down on the table-

an

lands of the snowy mountain? ZpR0 IZRRAIT ©E, ésagoao RLONCH

leg

hea

are not women and lands acquired by means of gold? (Gf. vy § 300, 3).

fing

[

XXIV. On the repetition of verbs, and on the combination

Wer

of certain verbs.

(S

339. The repetition of nouns, pronouns, adjectives, numerals, adverbs,

to |

he

interjections and imitative sounds has been treated of in §§ 303 — 309.

la

In § 152 it has been stated that there are no true frequentative or

iterative verbs in Kannada, but that a kind of iterative verbs may be

EY

AVY

he

formed by simple repetition (yugal

0ccaran

a, dvihprayoga) or triple repe-

tition (triprayoga).

he]

Instances of such iterative verbs elucidating their forms are given in

he‘

aliy

§ 165, b, 1—4, where short participles are concerned, and in § 211, 1—11,

where all the various repetitions are given, but without the respective

0

various meanings conveyed by them.

(G- § 361.)

U

363

RS

FO

In the present paragraph the meanings are adduced. They are the

o

following : —

1

directing the attention of others to a distant object or affair

Ne

(diira, Sabdamanidarpana), e. g

BROYF IO SRCYFRY 259RPS* G %

wtdo, there in the sky (lit. in that — that sky) appears, appears the banner!

2, directing the attention of others to a near object or affair (samipa

m§

Smd.), e. 9. A8 28 FFF ZoTF NLeTISE DL SNIRRSFo, lo, lo! let

b5

(them) approach, let (them) approach! (it is) the time told by the assem._

.

blage of astrologers

tten

3,

repeatedly directing one’s own face or attention towards an object

for

or affair (abhikshana, abhikshna, pratimukhavalokana, Smd.), a person’s

own repetition of action or experiencing (abhikshanya, SabdanuSasana), e. g

he!

} 3

AYBLBIRCOOTRED VBN, SITIVRTIWTVOR

1nst

£ YOSRNBTIRRVR VBN, FUINNFILNI0 [0 |

\dra

RRS 883 08 IRed B3’ IeB3 B

TOINVEIO PV

CIPSR PVIRRRY PISTONT' WEST* JTF, TJo || having

9.6

read and read (¢.e. having repeatedly read) with parrots and (thus)

O

learned speech, having played and played with the assemblage of flamingoes

languid with passion and (thus) learned walking, having inquisitively

s

able

and carefully seen and seen the dance of peacocks and (thus) having

learned to dance well, the females with (their innate) taste for the

w) 0,

beautiful contmually grew up to the development of the excellence of

0,9

fine arts (Smd.). —@&&wowdo, he lowered (the pot) after continual

boiling (its contents).

eN0ERY £33 Jpero, he repeatedly ate and (then)

went.

i)

308 IR ;S% o, he looked on and looked on and (then) laughed

(Sabdanusasana)

emm)%aazﬁeo 9080, he was and was (. e. continued

to be) silent; what (is) the cause‘> (Basavapurana).

03000 X083 R,

erbsf

he read and read, and became tired

SEo® F&30, he played and

309

played, and (at last) was ruined (Nudigattu).

M TRONY TPy T

76 Of

30 TN WBS WeREI wd, Q¢3y, having sat and U5E in onis place you will

] he

be much wearied.

(a8 chSo §3,®, he fell and fell and laughed (. e.

pepe

he rolled with laughtel) o3 zS 3030;5 R3y, Ry, MLIPTRY, of that disease

he died and died (i.e. was on the brink of death) and (still) remained

o 10

alive

-1

%‘"

4, enjoining on others the repetition of an act in order to encourage

yotive

or incite them (Kriyasamabhihira, Smd.), e. g. 38 SRy FRIT*

46%

—_—

364

JR—

“walk, walk!” they said. «@&wWrodrs wte0dw, when Jatayu said

1e¢

« withstand, withstand!?”

o)t

5,

(c

ordering with ‘agitation, or

hurrying an action

expressing

anxiety, (Capalaté, Smd.

; sambhrama, Sabddnusisana), e. g. 23 A0y, A

an

A

Ro3803s0, deliver, dehver the woman with handsome teeth! eseo £y,

&

be manly, be maniy! (Smd.).

BRENY %J\Qﬁojoqs, go, go, sir! D@ D@

,.ga"ea-sgj give up, give up (your) doubt! o8 w3, B 2RR

FA XFalowM)

et

é@a"@aﬁ O Basava, give, give all the gold of the box! (Basavapurina)

1t

Vel

?»zgnz&@zgés 3R BTRTY® F0TIRTOD ToD VA P ¢, the female

buffoon saying ¢ resist, resist, resist!’ resisted, gathered saffron water

It

and threw (it, Smd.)

28, w9, B3 W, B, wo, come this way, come

ol

this way, come this way! &8 wR)moR 2R mad W Ro, an elephant has

)

come! an elephant has come! an elephant has come! CSQ’\) &)53 36C.,

0

csz@a uﬁa ReC, dz@g um B3¢eco¢, the army has come, arise! the army has

Ve

come arxse' the army ha,s come, arise! (Sabdinusasana).

let

6,

continuous,

unceasing action (satatya, Sabdanusasana), e. g

s

w0 W o, he came and came.

?i‘ao

CX(

BpeTio Bpeto, he went and went.

%pﬂo he saw and saw.

=3 & ué) when (it) came and came (Rsv)

il

W, BREMZ, WTL3 a%@eﬂoé 29N, he is coming and going, coming

and going (Nudigattu)

WTITD, WTITD, TI0NT ToRIB T3 &sNu3v, the

for

foy

kmgs horse coming and coming (nearer) was (but) a donkey. e 3%

ab

3F I ey e,é3 '&@ro BRerozy, BRENIZY, BIT Be33 aﬂocﬁqsqsaﬁﬁej

a&@@h BB, that emperor pursued the foes, and going and going

Ol

(¢. e. marching on) arrived in the midst of their country. Fo&923

WBIBR RIS, B WRY IPeRRS 80e¥ ww, when all the shepherds

10

running and running came there and looked, (there) was no wolf

10

BEITLPNT BD[OR Jwcor RuPmeney w3 W, (see § 172)

Booneg 3, though the ribfaced deer at first are afraid of men, coming

;

and coming (¢. e. in course of time) become attached (to them)

(SE

v:

200 WT WD, WRIIRY, BRB TonV=3y. the pods of opium become in

n

course of time as big as balls

VRN BPENT, HoD3RSER ©30W. TP

3S30e¥AT esord, proceeding and proceeding on the road both of them

ll]g

reflected as follows

[N

7, completeness of an action (kriyasakalya, Sabdanusisana), e. g

THW® TRWF o) Fe0o, he said (to himself and another) «reap

he

[E——

365

e

aid

reap!” and (thus) reaped (the whole harvest)

TP VPR, 03

Py o, saying (to himself and another) «beat, beat!” he (thus) beat

g

(consummately)

239 2390003, WA o, saying (to himself) « come, come!”

). A

and (thus) came.

The Nudigattu has the following instances:— =35

NZSC:‘)ES) wad

FoB TR BRI

LRI DR DEINR

%

fef)

8,

intensity, emphasis, high degree (Adhikya, Sabdanusisana), e. g.

ol

S0y5e 880, it has been done, it has been done! Bl te) cﬁaﬁoﬁ@) 30,

m)

it must become ours, it must become ours! 39 uda#ﬁdociv, it shone

ale

very much. ¢3¢ BNz, it became very bright

§399C3) RICNTR,

fer

it sank rapidly.

BRI BRLSNTIT, it roared very much (Sabdanusisana).

e

BRVIZROGY, it will become, it will become! VABIREZ R IRTF $BRENA

has

BorTRY e, Siva drank poison, it is (s0), it is (s0)! wE=w & DLSH

P3¢

msaos@@?{) SR e®@Dw, the unborn one (Rudra) is, is in this earthen

has

vessel' (there) is not the least doubt

gnoen®, may it become (so, or

let it be s0), may it become (s0)! HBRoo3W eT03BRF 338 3rery

)

Res® 3wewy, having dipped well, having dipped well in the ocean of

BEP3INS BIRSe BB &I

T

00

excellent joy (Basavapuréna)

)

#0383, ants work and work and exert themselves the whole day. o3e&3

ing

B3 %em@ Dodunsh Bede Wed,

dogs are absolutely required

for the chase.

the

%"a" 00 & n)@e ana8 3, a red water-lily will certainly be

found. zga‘(’bﬁéo Qaﬁoﬁomm;ﬁ

zt)é‘s’e NBYZ, 3, the wise will decidedly

3%

30

abandon sensual enjoyment,

f‘az:)e 20938.38,

it certainly is.

QBI

2

ing

SPBE SWBEINO, you will certainly do this

0%

LPFF wne o, this is not, is not the proper way

e Wew, 1t 1s

s

not required, it is not required. Be@ WReRTy VRATo, he said «it is

olf.

not fit, it is not fit!” and loosened (him)

VTR BT VDY) SRon Wede

7)

Xew, we absolutely do not want money of (i. e. acquired by) injustice

?»e3 OIS 3 &, I will not, I will not

Zo%0 medv, enough, enough!

)

9

Y

g

ed

1

oﬁoe‘) eﬂo&@e SORISVILS S e v, certainly (there) are no useless things

n creatmn

) 11

4

3n. 300 30 30on%Po 3nDw. 3, taking arrow after arrow and shoot-

DR

e

ing without ever failing. 2o 2o @3, without waiting in the least

VBT B 33, Dedngy, waves that came incessantly

In intensity, etc. triple repetition also occurs, e. g. w3 WS WRo,

AP

he came, he came, he came

R0 £0 £30 opeRo, he ate and ate and

366

PR

ate, and (then) went.

3nY 3n¥ 3RENBy, it shone excessively.

3

kit

0

X¢ WPN3y, it became excessively bright (Sabdanusisana).

G

th

SBong,, trembling excessively.)

9, pain or trouble (abadha, pide, Sabdanuéasana), e.g. Jper Tpe

Go, alas, he went. ‘g% u;gow?, alas, thou hast come. 2390° 259380, Oh,

¢0

I do not come.

2pen BJpeSo, oh, I shall go.

\i

10, succession (one after the other): totality, e.g. 33030 TEY %sg

WSt B8 ¥d8o¢, the women who one after the other happened to see

the child, called (it near). Ty Fry=OAwY Wy S0HTW Ny R, B

%ﬁ BRECPIBe @D, though the widow whose husband has died, grins

at all she sees, they do not let her be unshaved. SIRRNENE :s‘%%)dé’

la

)

nee X3, 3oz wéjfj swedede, if all who come revile (her), will the grief

caused by (her) husband’s death leave (her)?

%t'% %’eg*déle% SO DY DL

Wa

SPRRBIZBTN ¥ SNBTFI TRAB 03T %?033@\35@@30, the endeavour

861

made by the old man to please all he saw, was unsuccessful. T TEY

Cﬁﬁ‘&e(g0 %&0:500%9% =9, he was cutting down every thing he saw. &R @z=c)

&3 %%ﬁﬁ#ﬁi 200 (see § 181, note ¢; § 211, 5, foot-note) ﬁwedoﬁa’;‘@ﬂ@)

[EPRY e R, then (after the bundle of sticks had been untied)

:\)

they broke the sticks one after the other as they saw them.

11, variety, e. g. (3¢308,80) 33 RPeT BRERY WRTY caza;)aﬁ@

S1§

g

0WE SRAT SrveER T, WBE ﬁo?;icsdo, he (the Prince of Wales) was

much pleased with the courteous hospitality which the people, from

a1

attachment to the ruler, showed in the various places to which he went.

W

VTR (TITTIWRY) DR RRERY 03e0NRIRY FRABKY, be (Rimaraja)

destroyed the mosques in the various places to which he went. u%e e

b

303 mmsém 2® ON% BeTeBTRY; BRET a'?’..raezsea WRITIOR a&@zﬁg

o}

S0, a man of good conduct is welcome to all; in the Y‘arious places to

an

which he goes, he is respected.

Y

¥ HIP0EY BT BeTa TIN TREBH FRIE FZR FoT,IINTRY

SeRaT30, that sheet of glass they cut according to the various require-

il

ments, and make window-panes, etc. (of it). w&RBIZTZ 5%%@5& BFH

Na

623030 T, Wedo Wewel Ton BRRA BR¥ 3evy, the carpenter has to

Vo

cut the pieces of wood, to plane (them) and to join (them) according to

ol

the various requirements. Fgese K338 aé%g)oﬂoaﬁdo SRRENATRY Tped

R208,380; SINeR Lewo 23663556:)? B "D wHI0nERy womy H3eds

Say

.

367

P

TRBIS, 3 0o, the villagers near Karaci used to worship alligators; they

1o

took, according to the various circumstances, different sweet eatables to

them and presented them as offerings.

)f*

340. Certain verbs are often (especially in the colloquial dialect)

h

combined with others, being placed after their past participle (gerund).

They are principally the following: —

(44

oM

1

ey, to play, which gives the preceding verb the meaning of

66

@) playful motion or action, e. 9. BTy BodmORIZ, S, WREFD

W

B3, 3, e @RIz, 3, boys dance, cry and scream. 2eoNT OS WTBITY

1§

Sofy BA0WS Fere8 B, when the dry leaves drop, the green leaves

10

laugh.

RORERTRAY SwS0r® FODF BwCWTeRRTF, the women

ief

joyfully immersed themselves in the pond. =3 RLTyeRIZ,3, the ass

wallows.

O]

i

b) moving here and there or about, e. g.

Toy BOBIBIZ, B, t‘he

14

serpent creeps about.

SEISYORE- SRR &:ﬁ@dzsa Bont¥n Wy WHeR

®39,3,53, young dogs begin to run about well in one or two months,

4

¢ w3 &0nMarysy, 3, those people wander (or walk) about.

%%do

;

)d)

AP moBes, 3, thieves roam about.

B, TaCSTeBYE, 3, birds fly aboat.

3

¢) moving backward and forward, moving to and fro as a body

suspended, oscillation, waving, e. g.

BRez08 3eneRIgB, the swing

R

148

moves to and fro.

33N wSwerog [, the ears of corn move.

BNRTR

)

] cf% 3.@.‘\'@6&@’@ does that which is poised, oscillate?

TRTFY Rez0

B0z w@3, a pendulous ornament depending from the neck.

b

d)

reciprocal motion done by one (or each) to the other: mutuality,

)

e.g. @WRB3BAY BoA Jpownaccf, they met in the van and beat each

other.

2

Q

TORY 093ed) BRREIBF,S, Rama and Ravana beat one

{0

another. 302280 WO B33, 8, they revile each other. (Peculiar is

30C9=9Ry, to exchange one thing for another; to sell).

It may be remarked here that eszo is also suffixed to the infinitive

)

e

ending in ®wef and o, e. g.

SER LRV cawéaﬁmc{ RRENUIRTR,

Nala made (his) kingdom to go (é.e. lost his kingdom) by gambling.

f0

SBRY soTwaRnsy), the chariots struck one against the other.

TSR ST

to

BPeN@%30, he made to go (é. e. lost his) honour.

%

i

A-J’

5z, to put, which makes the idea of the preceding verb, so to

@

say, complete, e. g. &ﬂgaamﬁo DT Ry, a’mz@-&i @033, 8, stupid persons

===

e

368

.

o

completely hide learning from sight.

WV B VEOTFY, RRLFRIF,T,

B

greedy persons bury (their) money. sz %%d&r’l{ %e?c{ﬁax\@d FOTAT,

s

w8, he wrote down with deliberation what he saw and heard.

ot

3, B, TR, to give, which occasionally, to some extent, complete

the idea of the preceding verb, e.g. S3RRY ABFFFToo B3, ByHorad

|

RSN DaNA DRIDELo JPE, NBdRoN0, from separating the

meaning which is in a word, into species according to their various

c

purposes, the vibhaktis (inflections) have got their name (Sabdamani-

po

darpana, vritti to siitra 35; in this case 0@y is superfluous, as is shown

di

by Késava’s stitra which has only Smogrzie JpenRsmtd@y D%3,).

00

T 3N SRZ,ToNSoSTo B IRWA %“@%035‘, thou indicatedst the

he

arrival of spring to me very nicely. wazogy %ﬁi@aﬁ eﬁa}ﬁ 39 "@Je)égjéo,

Rama made known arithmetic to Krishna.

B[ TN VL FRBIFI,S,

3

he tells thee. Fomodods egdedoy, &o"&’@_&%éo (for 2R3> Bwed ), the

(te

horse threw the double bag off (from its back). @@ (& @) 3073 AT

39, wagy ®Y %Jaég&;so, he thought that it (the piece of jaggory was)

for

small, and threw it away.

¢l

4, B (W), to come, which sometimes is used to complete the

the

a8

idea of the preceding verb, e. g. 233 ©€233, a&:”& BB R PR,

a soil in which barley ripens in sixty days.

SOTITINTR B TOR

il

£X

FRONY D3y, Bo03y BB E, Feay W WE,T, it has appeared that the

depth of the ocean in some places is nine miles. ;Soa.sanaﬁddQZOSJ 23%

e ddReyanngy wI$ ‘%%ﬁd% A3 3[oeS Tea) 2398,3, the tops of

1t

mountains in the ocean in ‘many places appear above the water.

oy

It may be remarked that to say e. g. @35, BRero3 s, is unidiomatic

in colloquial language, it is to be ©z=w,, 2N 20303 ¢, mother, I go

W

and come (back).

5

¥

?

9>, to leave, which also makes the idea of the preceding verb

th

somehow complete, e. g. 3R 532?33050§0°L z‘:)éj% z‘séejﬁg, he left (his) wife.

09R0RY TR TTERFRY 3O W, Rima learned grammar. &gy

£V)

TR 2R3 ¢, I shall kill it. ez SHeH méédgsg, he went away.

W

Fo3)80398y S WY, he sold the horse.

6, ovo, to put, to throw, which also makes the idea of the

I

preceding verb somehow complete, e. . BZISy sﬁrc&ra%}h;g 3RT T

W

i

%%, they removed him out of the class. mos%)cg-em @5,55 SR, NTRY

]

369

e

)

v

23 TOBTD, 3, great talkers remove the things of others by stealing

TR

:

DI TPORORY, TN HoeRR), Bhima killed the Kauravas

nY=

°5%y ey, they broke the pieces of wood

gaofsm?ssod

ete

w0 NBT, T8, Tedrdy, they tied the dogs to a tree

7,

Beertd, to go, which likewise makes the idea of the preceding

R

verb somehow complete, e. g. 3% Q) 393 BReON 3y, the account is wrong.

the

FR3 2»;&)

1N

QoR,By TN BRENIT, T, bad people will be ruined.

3~@3€3®%‘3h§ i OB BRes), the duddus fell out of a hole in (hlS)

1l

Wi

pocket

BoT08 TR B3NSR DB 8By, BReecdwdv, the horse fell into a

ditch and died

SP30 WIAR ARe3 BRERISZRe were, when a dispute

comes on, even he is a wise man who submits

2830, BRENVS TINGTIR

the

he is likely to be ruined

i@’

341

In order to form what may be called a sort of reflexive verb

),

Bov¢ (Bn¥y), to take, is added to the past participle of a preceding verb

the

(to that of B3¢ itself too), also if this participle is a short ome (see

)W

§ 165, @, 1—1, and ¢f. § 169)

We have already met with this kind of

1)

This so-called

formation in the passive (see § 315, 2, e; ¢f. also § 260)

reflexive verb is used to denote that the action takes place in behalf of

the

the subject (agent), regarding the subject’s good or damage, and so on

\QJ,

as circumstances require

it will be seen that ¢to take

the original

9

meaning of B®¢f, will not unfrequently offer a sufficiently clear

the

explanation of its meaning

The following instances taken from the three dialects will elucidate

4

1ts use: —

® T 850@33‘

ey 20¢, in this order one may learn to know (the

termmatlons of the instrumental). —3Zoo[ole, 893 %”Ja%‘b B33 208

e

®o, O wife, understand (the dandaka metre) even through my rule.

gO

FORTTY BRERMILIVTITY, Bm a%zédo 89R0z9,B; wrtId e 303,

SRTR 3% %Jaea g9, foolish people think that the dumb are tricksters;

oth

thus also this mald-servant thought.

neRnSy IHNET %’ezsamaﬁdﬁo

i

W8 SoeRT 3% 'é’&-)eao B0E39,8, foolish persons think that if owls cry,

o)

evil Wlll happen, and are afraid.

DESHBR Tod IBRY, B3R, JTRA,

1Ay

2020, 239 BT Wy TR DTT LR BREN, ToPI) TR, 3D Ro3ne

NS T TR0 VY BR); VTRY DORRe ToOFTIEITy RRER, B TITIDR

the

a%z%a FIB032039 a"m 3% %’Jaeao m.oz?m}ﬁ oﬁbe 20233, a Brahmana

0"\%

who had travelled in the hot sun, felt fatlgued and had become thirsty,

2

417

e

———

370

went to the shade of a wild date tree, sat down and began to drink the

A

milk that was in (his) copper vessel

other travellers saw it, thought

E

“this Brahmana drinks toddy”, and spread the news in the town.—s9s3

8!

%awaém§68§g QA TR, even they blamed themselves that they

(!

(were) destitute of pity.—£ooR @ IR 3IZIR Se0 SRR FHH B

causing damage to others and causing welfare to one’s self.

[98 %J&sa

;Se'a 29, a friend that one has acquired. 28 T S[OB @J@ea 89, he made

hlmself a knife.

B¥BP SRR FoRe FPeRY ;Ssac% 309 8,538, B hurting

I

even himself. o359, IR, F99R W P& 2eed Rama what hast thou

W

done to thy foot? w330 caned,BRomy, RS I8 BPe Ry, he married

th

a king’s daughter.

o3 mzb 29 TR SR BR0) D008 3? 65% o0

e a————

RPPNR %osﬁoe 30083 ﬁfezéo %8 %’@wo B3, where has that sparrow

n

made (its) house‘? it has bullt (its) nest on the balustrade of the flat

roof of our house

WBINTRY, Tet3° B SWE TR T, he sold (his)

Jewels and (thus) made money. & BoRon3 Feo BoBRTZ L RSRTR

J

3

hi

S8 %Jaeé 236%‘50 I 93T VR Z R, this boy felt great desire to

st

make all the boys he saw his friends. —3ax 09)3 300508 INTYY T

%&3 ‘3@2@0 z‘t)dc? SRE 32978 =D, the 11ver which became a hundred

th

branches When the son of Vasishtha, from sorrow, tied a stone to (his)

-.J-.J

neck and fell (into it).

onvo %&3 %Jas@o having made the seven

il

divisions of the terrestrial world his own —*oo»aozéa‘ KR %J@ﬂao BATF

I\

389, he who has lifted up (his) face. — 95y Bw®, grasping (t01 one’s

[

self).

2oy TONTIORY 39 TOORRSR D) Do T ??J*msio a certain

1)

merchant lost all (his) money in trade.

‘@e@ %) &;ﬁ oSoﬁo ] "vch)S"a’s

b

3weed 3, it seems as if you had lost a camel. —--"dzjzsrs '”eé‘do -cJaNo

the

A

$93%330, the sin of robbing the things of others. dedn RAVT RT3

do

—@@m o, he who confesses his being overcome. —oaﬁo§a

DR, IS 3 %8

I

'v”@e}oa') %, RAma reads a book (for his own benefit). — gomy & zé@bcﬁa

the

z

R mmoﬂomﬁ neey, W} 3%w,Mmo, I opened the bundle of Nardyana

%

and took his knife (to myself). - & mows IeeP TR ©3P DY

i

2023, Fweay, he sold that milk and (thus) satisfied the wants of (his)

0

stomach —%éj %5303393 VIR R L SRl %’J@m R, at last he sold even

he

hunself—-—z@a‘# %"Jaeao WTIIRY, I shall buy a “book (for myself) and

a

return. -—&@E@ @J@é&) IR HeR FRARS IJone Berdy, if you thus

3

wastefully spend money (in your own behalf), it will be even our ruin. —

4k

P

371

—

I

ATIN SRy SR 03 BBRTIE T, 03080, FFH,E0

S BB OF, BREN

bt

28, WRE, FHRZY BRML D

the native soldier’s son took the sharp

ol

sword of his father, went to mince vegetables (with it) and (in doing so)

oy

cut off one of his fingers.— ez o8 W@ @Jaeao w3, SwaE B¥eR, you

must not (thus) beat your chest and grieve. ——a3%?r§ TP NAERY BRA

%Jae@o 2eeN BRDBRYNS AR ﬁe% ne8y, a’meoswzsm at dawn he drove

;%

(his) sheep to the jungle and made them eat the shrubs therein. — Jo=

0§

NBER TONFR BR,[), TR 353, 33, NAINSRIR BRSL FowN FNRF3 3

ou

when lions and tigers see me (the sun), they lie down the whole day in

od

their respective dens

SPDFT3.0300) Wen Sown TR WER Werd LN

[B wXP &Y, 1t 1s very salutary to lie down (to sleep) quickly (early)

oW

in the first part of the night and to rise quickly (early) at dawn.—

lat

BRTBY TP, 4ed, a garment that is wrapped round one’s self

BBAIN

RRZ TRFOF, 9393 ®oRd® wd e, he had no cloth whatever to cover

1s)

%

himself with. — c30RSPII BO3T® T 3RF TR e‘)é& 3 30, the master

0

stood up to wash (his) hands and feet. — 335 0035° SoeS ejmﬁ WIS

30

035eF WR %Krae;o 3,837 SPmo WRA ‘éJa%;b 3,83, why does the cow aow and

red

then beat (w1th its) tail on (its) body? It drives the flies away. — =068°

1IS)

BodNY Fg Do FHB FRBBZ00F wSy B, the breeze joined a flock of

ven

young black bees and came along (with them). — 399R Swexy) SRREF S

DY), DXR TORY FBR BRENRUILID SN0 0308 IR, TR, because

168

I had got pain in (my) feet, I could not go to school for eight days and

Al

remained at home.— 553y cgaﬁ = 3o BC3 ‘v’&)s‘b 83(5%"@ g *83&3 3 C§€50F€§3 3,

that is a house built with the ObJeCt that travellms may ahght (or lodge

b

A

N

therein). — ma 8.8 wI N 2VEN BRH T BoWBNRFY LFIRTR RN Ry, ?

e

do you know any means by which one may escape when danger ap-

proaches. — gaoRY wRy HRe S0eS TP BR JIRBI[INTT, WR I

e

ooy

the king took a seat on an elephant and came to Vijayanagara

3088 [

PR BREN TR FRw v, he went to the shadow of a tree and sat down.—

and

WBeRWT Beow B0 3, he who is exhausted by sickness. — 280 33, SN

ok

his)

029 ®), he had a knife made (for himself). — 33,8y s8¢ TRA TR

he ruined himself. — 333 Recra BH¥®, obtaining permission.

»JB%

76l

RELPA

%Jas'a 29, he got evidence (in his own interest). — 2.8y zsaéoﬁo

and

s

23230F N;SQJCSd 652'3030@‘3 32 %Jaeao FRCIZ [IVOR T[T, €$§0 35503%

a kind of leopard hves on the sea—coast and eats decayed ﬂesh and other

g

47*

—

comaniris

312

things. — ooy SR, THH TR, adééiea"éé&e R0 TEy FRCB, g

R

SR udﬁﬁeiﬁ*e% #d% ‘@Jas'a%, oW @@%aﬁd%& 29353303@%??\&3@55% B

Benvond Tode HRRBD, four thieves united, made a hole (in the wall) of

the bouse of the chief merchant, stole all the valuable things that were

(there), and took the road to a dilapidated temple in the jungle in order

¢

to divide (them among themselves). — 33 €9 SNT,BINEEY ROOIIDN

ORI TIWY 508 Rod %@%Ba’g S3ET[ éﬁd 30850 ;So"% ;ﬁo%&?ﬁ

Ree®, Ry, BReRRY, the merchant told his three children to make three

w

equal parts of the cattle etc. and divide them (among themselves), and

il

died. — & BB 33y Boed F XWYY, TRy WTF,¥, what does

that woman carry on (her) head and comes (here)?—-a?,g?3 30308y, BIR0

|

%@m&, RO BRI Rwendy, he called (his) wife and went abroad

(with her).—%ozo8 @rey Fwegdwe, did they find the horse? — wzdQ

|

faéjgj '&raege;g, where did she hoard it? & o503 faéjgs %@?&é e3eR9, are

you going to keep this horse? — dngd R BRU)Y BP0 woh, the

jacket which the big boy had put on. — Q¢ 0&@60&@6? aégaézo: ;saobgmigdg&

1l

g

&3 %Jas'a‘% 29 R Rperad,¢0? who are you, sir? where do you go having

N

seized (i.e. with) the mad dogs? Fnge &7 %"J@S’a% ¢ é&)eé.i%; W8 3, he

It

seized the axe, and went to the garden. &z %@e}%sm, seizing (laying

R}

hold of). — zpSeY 8ediIIT BT BRI, 83 0¥, 8wy, at school (one)

must conduct one’s self according to the command of the master.

[

di

S0 é% eﬂ%’_a_ 3oN STl 3;30@36 TRRB éeéo&o% 3 %Ja%é) BeFy, we must

1t

converse in love with (our) parents, sisters and brothers. ©38Y 3 Hoed

wWRE VTR ¥FH3 Tp,; VFINR BTTY FENAT LRTIONTND BFT

e

a

PO HT,E I3 %@% Xed, over them all rules one king; they must

obey him and the officers appointed by him with fear and devotion.

1§

S22 TRRWREY BRI R SNg VB3, Brt) ZeBRINE, Wy TB

3N 83 -‘3@#2);3@, a chief horse is in front of the herd, all the horses

¥

follow its guidance. — QonRzyRo 20, FTE TORN BREN, BRT FO* T

n

DVBY — TP, F, SNHRRWR SR ﬁeﬁo&o;{ﬁa aioemcsa@a"; edi‘?&_

18;

B BB RSFT wWRY, ¥SITY Xeed, BRP %@%8 DR WP T

iy

SR I3, BoxEa3 3306:33030@%&% DY, VLS TR, Ningappa went

s

to the house of a physician, fell at his hands and feet, and spoke ¢sir,

for

a son of mine lies prostrate in the house from sickness; if therefore you

Wit

please to come to (my) house, examine him and give (him) medicine,

wh

U—

373

o

0

I shall not forget your kindness as long as I live”.

RRFR — 3,

)

Nosoéﬂe i@aﬁzﬁﬁ@@o 0359F 30R0&,e07 TIRY BTRY, aama 3%’2@ wdae)

of

Ere

DR, &’)2%54;5@?\ RELPTRY. &1 :393 ) 05T a’ﬁr@ %ﬁo aﬁae) N3 %ee}m_-

CSOSJ [PR 8 T30 FeF WFerd! TR %Qﬁ@@%ﬁgm oaﬁo NJES%ESBCSZ&)

Jor

05, FFI— VFoPe? VENITF, s@heh? R wHe IUIPWO

ol

FTOLNS L 9,00, PRRR— TODID, BN =B TN 393, 3903 Werd!

¢

B9, AROT Becs® FR Iy, “doctor”, Honna (Ningappa’s son who

ree

was not sick, but nearly starved, as he refused to take any food himself

nd

in order that his poor father, brothers and sisters might have something

08

to eat) said positively, ¢“why do you send for medicines (on my account)?

)

I shall never take them?

Then the physician asked “why will you not

d

I cannot tell

take (them)?” Honna answered «please, do not ask so

39

(you)”, and became silent

Thereupon the physician said ¢sir, what

are

obstacle is there to telling (me)? You seem to be a perfect obstinate

fellow?”

the

Then Honna entreated (him) with humility, saying «O sir

please

only do not think so!”

ORON DeCP FRY B3edy, you should

1)

('i

speak to him. =Reco? %ne,} e‘}-@ 35938, I have something to say (to you).—

ing

he

Red %‘fam 37, WA, %cﬁo 'v“.ram 3%, Wosm,

one may solicit (and

ing

receive alms) and (thus) eat (but) by stealing one should not eat.—

SR 33030 et 300 Tod TR

(the sun says) «I having put a

\ne)

diadem on (my) head”

8030 S VBRI F0 P33 3P BRBBASH

o

ust

Tod Bwe, please, put his fault in your belly (¢.e. conceal and forgive

v\3

it) this one time.— &3 efﬁo.,oﬁo Y3 B, @d’e)i"\) 30N Uéﬁo@ﬁ RREBRY,

he mounted that elephant and returned to Anegund1 ——NJaecéa's’;ﬁJ 343

30

030, 38R I

8 30p% 363, (the sun says) «I put a muslin cloth, that

st

00

is to say clouds round (my) head”

Y

For comparison’s sake the following instances which contain verbs without

568

¥29° (and of which some show at first sight a not easily perceivable difference

in meaning from the above-given ones) may here be introduced: —

0

0% IR, PIF0T3J9¢

5 ™S00 Soenesr, @l (commentator 297), those

¥

ready nouns are of three kinds, v:z. ridha, anvartha, ankita know!—3e ¢

oAl 3T =[O

)3

¥, TR0, 89, O beloved woman, I seize thy feet; kmow!

ent

#3330, 3080 2980, Madana perceived that this man (was) a suitable husband

sit,

for (his) younger sister

30053 0RF, 3R, 3 PT,039[0 9T

the woman

with tremulous eyes understood it differently, ©22t335° B 38T 3 RB), 39

yOﬂ

whilst yet living learn the marked peculiarities of final liberation! — 308030

Do

“ ave

i

S»&30, he made a house. &3 ) T éméf @%;30(2550 3»R30, let all of us

now make a horse-sacrifice!

M3 SeRde ®EGFIO, bathe in the sacred

water of knowledge!

A ?ééi ﬁﬁﬁd), VRN IR dR¢®), build a house and

(then) see, marry (. e. unite in wedlock) and (then) see! 28 Bo3n¥® FYIA 1303

g

YO0 FHL03090, must (one) tie a royal tiger and a brown cow in one place?

©¥ TH I3 woRs, Tww) 9 BEIt 598, one who has enlisted soldiers (is) a king,

)

one who has distributed boiled rice (is) a donor.— SPII FRILET Bo 3T,

@

880350, I shall not lift up (my) head and walk in my uncle’s house.— 3%, B<3

TRRA, &")C;Sﬁ SRAY, B oS3 Fe$odRy FH3IB, they will have proper medicine

e

given, have diet prescribed, and quickly remove their sickness.~— w830 3¢50,

Ju

having pulled an arrow (out of his quiver).—®ZToo &, speak the truth!

al

A0S R0RIID, he who acknowledges that (he) has been overcome.— StBIT°

it

L.0%9339, he who has read the védas. — 3RB03® 30T & w¥odvo, thou tookest the

road of final liberation.— B3#° TS0 B>BI AIPFF, power which fills

IR

life into a corpse.— ¥, SP®)3 1B, a house in which toddy is sold. & YL

3307w =we Be@d, you should not sell these elephants to anybody.— %9

he

FH32S39, he who borrows. %S e B, a place where spirits are bought.

P

D uéga FOWIS %mf_) $3¢3, T must buy a horse. ~IRE do% S oW @Jaea 39, he

wh

bought milk for two duddus, — TIRIR, N¥0 FoBIJW, granting the things desired.

e

Told), FEaY, 308 WHIBIRY, (there) is none who has given (alms, etc.) and

1ng)

(thus) been ruined, (there) is none who has (idly) roamed about (in quest of alms)

kng

and (thus) lived (happily).—-—%’daoi% TV, T éa%éczio? o) éajaﬁem? what

eat

does it matter whether a dog eats the leg that has been cut off, or whether a

¥

jackal eats (it)? TIRTY T VBB JRAD ‘%ae{) Y ? @aé N, as if (one) said

and

“though (one’s) nose be cut off, do not the nostrils remain?”’ — 2%, FROTII

doeg

35, @69 20diRy, Wl WRENID, a day-labourer used to beat his (quarrelsome)

()

Y

wife repeatedly. — #33 S8y, B I BeEIC Swtcdrde, if (one’s) parents apply

(the

the blows with a cane, do they not pain? — $993veradiid S0t anIRA FONT

€N

Sont), an infant that cannot (yet) sit up and lies with (its) face turned upwards.

g

B

9B NIR BN ?»5% 388 FER 20533 DI 39620329 50&”\3&, a young tiger la,y in the

)

i

jungle under a tree,— @ornde Snee, fwon@t Bw3, he sold (his) shop and put on

W

a blanket.— ©33 ééboi)o OIN OFIB3R i?ma% 33y, ozﬁga VY md% @Jaé.gdso,

@

his father gave him six duddus, saying “buy something to eat!” — @83 o

¥

B30 3,233, SANARERD, S0FYado, Candrahisa quitted sleep, washed (his)

al] lnl

face, and rinsed his mouth. — ¥33 33t BoeN¥RY WWRAEI, I dusted away the

WY

insects of his head (i. e. I beat him soundly). — ¥ReNLLBEI FRRB B, a

Wil |

night united with moonlight.

BTIVRRYE TRET o.’n%ad#*o Qj%d 2TV e.-a#o*o,

#MQ:

and the letter 3° combined with & becomes ®°.— 333 @3FS, a man who

) ;

»

stands. 30, a man who stands. — 300%58,88 °do, he came down from the tree.

%3

Beay 5e*®3 B ©, a place where an army is encamped. -— T 3903 WeraRP® evey

e

o33, a calf does not leave the company of (its) mother.

TR R NVFIIe

hand

PRSI,

JUST—

375

§

3@, even he who has remained alive, is the chief officer of the ruined village. —

i

VRS8R ¥ T, 370, he sat down in the basket-boat.

& T3, W3 0N #odo

d

B, N¥o FUTF ever® IR, 3eAS ¢°, the wife sat in distress, performed several

W

meritorious acts of devotion, and became dispirited (as these proved useless)

Y

Bdo 003 FIR TRB ¥¢ Foad TR, as if (one) sits under a wild date tree and

drinks buttermilk

N R Fed BTN, Don 2da B89 the male sat (1dly)

B

and (thus) was ruined, the female roamed about and (thus) was rained

&

WRTY 3Bt TR Y BT RISy By Fovezdy, they thought that even

16

both of them should take this property to themselves, and sat (there in the

o

jungle).— &8 && @t Eeddds 3JX 223 @3¢ Y, though the boy ran and ran

h!

and became tired, (his) father did not care at all. — %, ATINEN TYNT, Baen

BeFIY &ado WB) BINE T, INRAP 35, a native soldxer having said “I must go

he

to war’

had had a very sharp sword made. — 8330 BB BRWY, FVABNLIY

|

@@Ndm wherever he went, he destroyed the mosques

33 TRAROR TR

o)

SPEIT, (one) ecausing ruin to the man who has ruined him.— Fa3cd0 Jeweddo

O3

|3 Soney

he had a poetic composition told. — W3 BWRFSI¥Y, she who is naked

bt

331 939, give me the stale-food (thou) hast. — T3 %3 I03) WZ T ©&ES ©I

he

what is it, if a thief’s word (once) become true ?— ® 3T TIRIN Jed) oy

ol

9892 338, even brothers divide a ripe fruit and eat. — B3 BHBY, WHTITIT, a

nd

man who lives by carrying loads. ¥3 woy @ Br3 F& 00 wﬁ&m’ﬁ does a donkey

1)

know the fragrance of the musk it carries?-— ?555 ovedd | if (one) invites (thee),

hat

eat

QU OF, JToQ e FTV03 23 (you) should invite people to dinner

33, &%)

P &

FOR), 230 3D RBRER T B2, BRI WD DT, BEPIEY she called her servant

PIZOTo TRITR TaHY We

aid

and said “fill waterinto a brass vessel and bring (it) ”’

53

does an owl see the sun?— 33 28 Fe#oIR), to apply the mind to and listen

me)

TV B AFF JW, ARFIoo AomdR, having put on trowsers and embellished

(their) helmets, — 33, 3FF S 300 éiaé.b TIVYLI

Py

3,8395° 98y, having invested

n@

themselves with shining golden coats of mail and put on trowsers

3u&noda0

rds

8080, he put on (his) ornaments

Ragonodoo 30 Y, he put on a green coat.—

[ynioni¥o QT WS, a net with which wild animals are caught, — SoRMmPTRToo

the

8®d0, he walked three leagues.

;Soaioqu 0 WRIT [T ;Soé? At zge,?e msa?oﬁﬁ

:)c% #@36

;g

SBod 8BeF, g person should walk very properly as long as he lives.

0

%

©FT RS AT IBNFD, if (they) learn knowledge, they will walk properly See

(hxs)

an instance in this paragraph under ‘to fear’.— Soedcdhmedn Bz e Beewosd

TN ST, W Re, if (he) tells the maniyagira (his) bad and good eircumstances

31

he

will he not count the mounds?

B30, REIIRTR ?»ﬁo BoWT B oo#m

23l

i), &

5

?odo,oéosgo

7,0

FL0 P, she requested mother, tell even you a means (to me)!”’—

BN wt@do §803080350, Vishnu asked the half of the land of the lord of the Kuarus

wiho

8 INDT VY, Fe@ o) 830833, this old man solicits alms and (thus) brings

tree

e

grain (to his house) — A 03@%#8 Foi® T 80 @B BATIB &, when (he) put (his)

hand into (his) pocket and examined, (there) was no money.— To¥ng wed cdoo

o

¥

e

376

P

Fo e 030

8y 30, I shall

288 BrBBo, he who mounts a war-chariot and drives

ascend the fort

30AS =8 0339% X302, why doest thou ascend the cocoa-nut

L

tree? ToR3033), ®3) S BT, a horseman who mounts a horse. — ¥903 ed I°

wn, 80930, Agni surrounded the women of that place

The terms that express ‘to fear’ generally appear without TRV, e. g

3 RBOBINRY o3, 3ReF

TORT oMo 3z

3°

3,0, a worthy person fears sin.

o

WA, S 3% WY Qéo 2355, the boy feared, and cried «the wolf

é

has come, O the wolf has come!”’

BoG0S BRTT, BT B, the horse

is afraid of the bridle

o 303y BOEPCY.. that servant-maid was afraid.

On the other hand there are also instances like the following one: — 30301

$023 TR®Y RIOTINOR wsi'?e 003007 3383 ¥3) FPNR VT [IVRI

J

=5, it (we) fear God and always behave properly, He will help us. Cf.

1

§ 348, 6

342. For the sake of emphasis evesd,, is, is occasionally added to the end

of a verb which appears in the form of a verbal noun, e. 9. o3 N&ER

also of the bark of some trees

(!

L= éfeéﬁﬁ@ﬁ BR FTING SRBIDTIEN,,

I

B TP WA m;m@ 3& 5 Seenean® n)% o3 nen

(they) make paper.

ney %s'ao %a% WJINTRY %@@osdomo

if at night cats or young cats

1l

are met (by them) owls will peck (thew) eyes and kill them. Ro3oDRR,

11

éﬁ N umssms*a

(they) use to say «the pupil (is) like (his) spiritual

udo;ScSosfao

tea.cher 4

aoocso,,,m% *’daeéﬁ@é 38 38B

DOTINE

a‘o’é

fr

various objects of commerce come flom foreign countries to India.

Il

S0033. S7930 T BTR IR DRINBIoW, does it ever happen that a

0

metal pot brings forth young?

W BRI PRWY WIE WI 3T RRIWBE,

i

will the writing that Brahmé has written on the forehead, fail?

k

4

XXV. On comparison.

343

In Kannada the comparative and superlative degrees are expressed

I

in the following way:—

(

1, by the simple dative (¢f. § 348, 7), e. .

by

0) Spegdedn’ whTo, this man (is) excellent to the world, ¢. e. this

man (is) most excellent in the world.

2oATDNSE @c3®§%43 ;So 20

fi

33, D39, the timingila and so on are fishes of which the one 1s large

to the one, 4. e. of which one is larger than the other.

‘zna’s S0 63 2D0%

:

232 D39, fishes of which one is larger than the other.

P

—

377

Il

\

b) [BoetodSoNe3s® wnFFo, this man (is) great (or high) to Méru, <. e

higher than Méru

FOTo BOTo HRIPBNRY wNF=s® $PTo, superior

]

to all in the world as to family and firmness of character (see § 284)

RRO A BeR3 93P3RR FE°C0 397° O© OR HOC3y, the small one, if

(he) speaks discriminately, (is) great to all, . e. (is) greater than all (or

If

the greatest of all)

FNN Ve XV TH

the ripe fruit of the

Eugenia jambolana (is) black to, 7. e. blacker than, the crow

3%

FIT

e

3R ¥, Tomo8 Bw@ Ry, thy horse (is) larger than mine. (Cf. the second

I

verse 1n § 280.)

¢) 3IIR BTN, wRY Vo WeFI v, he said he wanted much more

Jaggory than even this,

JIONT TR

8 20 TIW, F&,3, the poison of

RREDE 3R, o BR, S0eTarRcy, wheaten

the cobra (is) the worst of all

bread (is) the best of all

1d

2, by the dative combined with a3, (@3 or) ug, (vwp,), ‘from

1y

(8%, being another form of w3, ¢f. § 282), suffixes of the ablative (or

instrumental, see §§ 109 seq.; 352, 4,a), e. g

@) TENWT BBH Fﬁri FOBR

9 3, a jungle (is) good to-from a town

W

in which (there) are envmus people, 4. e. a jungle (is) better than a town

4

in which envious people are.

b)) ©T33R, D30IV, BRANN, 8RO

(there) is no height to-

f

from the sky, (there) is no breadth to-from the earth, ¢.e. (there) is

nothing higher than the sky, (there) is nothing broader than the earth.

:

C)CS‘S%aﬂ W ieﬁ wWIB NE, @Nolgeo& intellect (is) far better than

|

b

science, food (is) far better than intellect.

;’)zﬁéogoa a3 ;So% S, c%@cé 89,

knowledge (is) greater than wealth.

39 53

.3._9

)

uoﬁad@ 30&3 'adgécg

Ao EE, 2IOWBN wRY FH,TY, the tiger (is)

gold is dearer than copper

much fiercer than the lion.

'&Zﬁ% 5 2739 dsﬁasgeo@oasacsm that (is) more

ed

beautiful than this

VR

"f)%i.ﬁd 23,8 8,8, %3, he who knows nothing

'azﬂ-cﬁ 09539 é’w@cé CSJ that (is) larger than this,

(is) viler than a dog.

mg% S, aazég fas SRR ojgagjcsg What (is) more dear than knowledge?

118

¢) 3@050?\* %380, AFONG, 8D @29, (there) are none more bene-

'55‘*;3&’)@55

)0

ficial than a mother, (there) is nothing sweetel than sugar.

m@&-"%ﬁﬁ =0y Semy, death (is) better than a life without honour.

ge

0y

T3, 05\) T TARIBON TINT, emm

the ears of the donkey (are) longer

than the ears of the horse.

DPe %d&mﬁo ¥oYels wmd FORNRENT, 63,@63

48

—

.

378

D08 53, white bears are bigger than bears of brown colour

(A

IR IS

NS, SO, SVRF 87,3319, he (is) four years younger than I

& 23900

ot

B 239000 &CITNT3B.33, this well is deeper than that well

& IBN

mo

NS, QY BIBNC3 2398, your girl (is) more clever than that girl.

tha

THEOF) NT, FouNINg, wIY mxﬁﬁeﬁ@%}m iron (is) much more

useful than the other metals.

BT WeBR) %’u%fue FILPNE, WD N?@ 3,

old

the seed of the Banian tree (is) much smaller than poppy-seed.

a%zsa

tha

Wit

INFY NPT TIYNPNS, wR¥ Be@ ), boas (are) much larger than

the other snakes

Fé], ToINSE. FINC TN A, WBY

cobras have

firs

more wrath than the (so-called) vicious snakes

Po0RENT, 3RePn

R0 BRB@Y, wolves (are) a little larger than dogs

TP TIONS

0

OR H8TY HIONT VN BAT TV =0 TN

D 0033, the milk of goats

40

is thicker and sweeter than the milk of sheep and the milk of cows

(ir

DI ENT, SEVOWMTITNY, FF,PNT, S0ee3REOe, (there) is no gold

better than pure gold, (there) is no lisping-nicer than (that of) children.

le

AN ROMOWWIR IO DY ~o§ d;sadé B"Qza@%ﬁai WBININT, 300993 ~u§ of D)

§Qua§)%ﬁ PR (ARG \Faaz:)) 5@;3@, of all the beautiful and brilliant thmgs

e

3NT,

on earth even I (the sun, am) the most beautiful and brilliant.

thay

;Soeoadsjdeio ~'071é3 %Jae;? ﬁeﬁa’)o WX, the vain pride that wants

Jam

to make equal to one 8 self those who are greater than one’s self. Jo

D3oneR ©30 LINENT, %aéo uo& 8008 3,

some animals

have more

ic)

understanding than other ammals

SIREN FRINYNR. 223y, more than

(or

three hours.

R CRTINT, TBB, less than a hundred rupees.

an ¢

QoBOD eRTY BRI ésﬁoéebf\ii aaaéa the rainy season (is) more

(abundant) in Ceylon than with us.

mw z&:a#ﬁs OR "5&) aaboaoa R

appe

m% BRI, %’Jam BRen Besand %adoz%rﬁs?hﬁ %3 3,n%e aSeéo if (1t) is

(

necessary to ca1ry burdens over mountains and stony roads, donkeys

Jouy

are more desirable (or useful) than horses.

hee

d) woreB3,R oW IR 552,% 839, knowledge (is) something greater

%%’

than even gold. DY ONE, R zﬂesdo 303 3, God (is) greater than all, V

g

3, by the ablatlve and its substitute the instrumental (§ 352, 4, a), e. g

a) TN I 80 WO 0 HBo, Balabhadra (is) old from Krishna

N {

53

1 It is to be remarked that uneducated people occasionally use such sentences as S9O¢

orYa WOTT, R, aaaem-s-s ETN) ey,

m.mz&d% 5 2:559 A,

aao:s..Ja 8 TRTIWNRTE aﬂ TS,

T3 M z&m a&faeéuﬁ-ﬁ =, QB azoZ =, They evidently thmk that e

S, or Qﬂ-&§ are

horg

separate sufﬁxes which 1equ1re the trenmve case,

!

—

379

JE——

i.e. older than Krishna. Z3o0z3 o RBBexo 3600, Sahadéva (is)

;

younger than Nakula. eenrsSRgdo sorotdess® wago, Visudéva (is)

N

more excellent than Arjuna. @55%95%@30 $edy, this man (is) more clever

than that man.

See § 349, s.

[0

b) %Q)o'si’xeélo 203 woito, Balabhadra (is) old from Krishna, i. e.

J,

older than Krishna. ©oo3wergdzsdo 369°030%* CSQ%QB, Dussalé (is) younger

than Duryodhana. EISVY T 590305y HeldWwT maRbo TR, a body

)i

without knowledge (is) even worse than a village in ruins.

(Cf. the

6

first verse in § 280.)

)

€) B®W 23%@%330300 (—23%630 B00), & (or my) paramour

y

(is) indeed a man sweet from jaggory, 4. e. sweeter than jaggory.

ofank-7

;)ia; Qo [V0e3R03sF, thou art more excelling than I in respect of war

(¢. e. thou excellest me in war).

i

d) HNF I BFBRFL Qe edD, you (are) mean from us indeed,

7. e. indeed meaner than we, on earth.

0

¢) IO [oeSDo, a man who says «I am better from others”

ga

i. e. “better than others”. QI0G, (O BT aoegf)ecso, death (is) better

W,

than poverty. aaﬁo&)% St ey %3%{), the ripe fruit of the Fugenia

18]

Jambolana (is) blacker than the crow. B0 DIPR YRIDIEY w3 AT

3

33, a man who utters low words (is) worse than a fool.

)

J) 233 Zp %0, a male older from him, 4.e. older than him

ll

(or an elder brother). BB 0P 2D, a female older than her (or

S

an elder sister). (In these two instances the Jp andhe)\ra, ‘also’, ‘even’,

16

appear to be redundant.)

)

4, by the locative (¢f. § 350, 2), e. g.

1

a) SRRWORFS 2%%’&;30, in (or among) sons the young ome, %.e. the

Iys

youngest son. Be3BRY ARREF A0 H,0, the fit one among princes (is)

the guiltless one, ¢. e. the guiltless one (is) the fittest of princes.

déohoﬁ

or

FO%F S8 S wug,Boo, the ruby (is) the best of precious stones. 265

1)

N8Re ToooBY Zoendy iy, of cows the black cow has most milk.

f

SR 3R 23%%03@%3’39, white cloth (is) the best cloth. e=38we* Lr@Te

14,

ﬁa%eh, he who runs (is) the quickest of them.

¢

D) O FTeRNY PBBATRIR vTRm R ForBA% Dewy, Arabian

horses (are) the best horses of all countries.

are

¢) SINFY FHS @u3 3, the brown cow (is) the best of cows. Boro

48%

PRSI,

Y

380

r{de;)o Tom0R 39eRy, Rama (is) the most clever of the boys. ;ﬁ@@ 038,

e ée%saddg, the diamond (is) the most excellent of precious stones.

NoBRY) 2O ZQTENTY WO FR0TIY) 808,83, the lion (is) by far the

ex

most formidable of all wild beasts. DY §53°r{e§e2 B3 FOOTRRY,

11(

the diamond (is) the hardest of all things.

& 3300300 DY msmg

Beo3eRy, that house (is) the oldest of all houses.

5, by the genitive as a substitute of the locative (see § 352, 1, ¢), e. g.

FNNRY 2w Do, the best of liberal persons. &30 3¢30, the most emi-

Te

nent of donors. TATT BT 387, the most splendid of the witty.

bl

XXVI. On Syntax.

ikl

344

The ancient Kannada grammars which the author of the present

grammar has consulted, do not use a particular word to express syntax

or the construction of sentences; however the Samskrita term vakyavinyéasa

o

which expresses it, may be adopted.

Regarding the construction of a sentence (vakya) karaka, ¢.e. the

by

relation of the noun to the verb, is to be considered. Késava says that

N

karaka is on account of the verb (kriyAnimitta), and that the case

th

terminations (n&dmavibhaktis) are suffixed by the power of karaka

&)

(karakavaSadim).

(Regarding karaka see §§ 253, 2; 357, 1.2, a).

Cf.

N

also § 354, 3, a.

tw

There are six such kirakas or relations, viz. ,

he

1, kartri, the doer of an action, the active noun, the agent (¢f.

i

§ 150), used in connection with a transitive or active verb (sakarmaka)

or if expressing the agent’s circumstances or state, in connection with

1t

an intransitive (akarmaka, see § 148).

It stands in the nominative case

Vel

and is the subject of the verb (¢f. §§ 347, 9; 357, 2).

&

2, karma, the object on which the action of the kartri falls, 4. e. the

[

idea expressed by the accusative case.

3, karana, the instrument, 4. e. the idea expressed by the instrumental

case.

Z,Q

4, sampradana, the recipient of the object of giving or of the gift,

of

7. e. the idea expressed by the dative case.

5, apaddna, ablation, 4. e. departure or removal from a fixed point,

coming from, 4. e. the idea expressed by the ablative case.

1

po———l

381

mosvn

6, adhikarana, location, place of the action or state of the agent

i. e. the idea expressed by the locative case

The idea of the genitive case is not considered a karaka, because it

expresses the relation of two nouns to each other (sambandhartha), but

%

)

not the relation of a noun and verb (§ 351)

345. The nominative (¢f. 352, 6, a. 6, b) considered by itself expresses

1, linga, é. e. specification, e. g. aéﬁ o, AR 0, FWITVINLO RREJR,

I

TN, ¥, FORT, 20To, NAY, w% ;’)oﬁo

2

9

artha, bhava, 7. e. sort or kmd state of being, e. g. R0, Moo

Fo2o, FOOV0, A0, BRB0

3,

vacana, vacanamatra

anang, i. e. (mere grammatical) number

numeration, e. g. w ), TR, 2PN, WSFo, BTFTF, PIATTF

nt

4,

sambddhang, abhimukhikarana, i. e. addressing (see § 140), e. g

S

Rex3! B3er3! BB er!

§o

When it becomes the agent or subject (kartri), simple sentences formed

he

by it are e. g. the following: — e w9, o, the king (is) good. soof

198

293, milk (is) white.

W&o JIFUT, he (is) pure-minded. o ToTVo,

156

thou (art) Kama

&0 §§3 I (am) Nandi.

gog° ¥3o, it (is) he.

B30°

ka

PHooNof, these (are) males.

w30° Bedof, those (are) females.

ReREHe

BIFT VR0

(f

SRR, the sun rose.

W3F0 ?.o~ o, one man came.

930 %Ja;o

two persons spoke

weso 398 e, the king was pleased.

he killed

©930° F9L3B

let them make! =3er3, Fewe, hear, O para,-

¢

(o

mount lord!

ka)

It is to be remarked that when the subject is a personal pronoun

h

it is often omitted, as it is contained in the personal terminations of the

280

verb (see § 193 seq.), e. g. wmsFSo, an €8, BBIZEE, I am; wg o, WO

thou wentest;

6306355?‘ )

393, he comes;

TPETOIF, BPeT 5@@@

3. she uttered; 8330, BRI, they walked

the

346

In sentences in which the accusative or object (karm&a ¢f. § 352

otal

2, seq.; 5,b. 6,b), 4. e. the case of things (vastu), etc. on which the action

of the verb falls, occurs, the things, etc. may be said to be:i—

ift,

1, ishta, 4. e. wished for, e. g. Res3=00 8R%o, he took the necklace

38R0 30k, he put on the ornament; TpzSo So@To, he set flowers

int

in the hair

332

e—

al

In such a case also a double accusative (dvikarma) uses to take place,

W]

e. 9. MBYTo 32 IS0 ?Bﬁﬁ.:asgo, he asked wisdom of the guru; mododvo

GoR Y0 WeBo, he begged a gift of the liberal man; Todozdcioo @&t%

BeaBo B303u3d80, Vishnu asked the king of the Kurus for the half of

ol

(his) land; Z3s=Z0 Towe 55380, he extracted milk from the cow; es53

:

nF¥o 3%, Jo S&30, he made them devotees.

ac

Regarding a double accusative with causal verbs the following sentences

may be adduced: — s550 )& R Wi ©0d) Ao, the king caused

(his) servant to go to the town; RBeZBo B08NRYo =00 PYNATo,

(¢}

the cowherd caused the cows to enter the house; Bners® ¥R ©8

(A

0sf VEPARo, the driver caused the king to mount the elephant; Rydy

m

d%, S0 D TTL[F® WBARo, the teacher caused (his) disciple to read

ga

the grammar (see § 149 seq.).

13

2, anishta, ¢ e. not wished for, e.g. moz0 msé&do, he crossed a

snake.

Con

3, nivartya, i.e. to be produced (as something new), e.g. 203030

by

S9&%o0, he built a house; T30 300 £Q@go, he told a poem.

0:

4, vikirya, . e. to be transformed, e.g. £€3=0 F&R0, he cut down

Cen

the forest; sa03v0 RPeeI 0, he split the fruit.

Un

5, prapya, ¢.e. to be reached or arrived at, e.g. enndx® o) o,

he reached the town; =0880 merFo, he approached the tree.

i

oy

6, vaishayika, 4. e. to be observed by the senses, e.g. Se=C90 Swed

GQo, he saw the sun; Ae3=vo ¥ o, he heard a song; Fpz=o S0wARo,

A

he smelt a flower; =0 Swedno, he saw him,

an

7, Kkila, 4. e. relating to time (¢f. § 348, 29), e. 9. ©ENBoRFo 32 Fo,

§6as

Qo

he lingered six months; 3,098 30n° BRFo, he remained three nights;

29T g‘@w%“ he wandered about a night-watch; S3=00 (;3@73%699

(Sa

$08°) Lanroe, he studied (grammar) for a month.

8, adhva, 4, e. relating to space, e.g. @3maBZ00 ©ORZo, he ran

Vi

0

half a league;

SIRNIYBR0o JBRo, he walked three leagues.

m|

3

347. In sentences in which the instrumental case (karana, ¢f. § 352,

2,b. 3. 4,a. 4, b) is used, the following specific meanings are considered to be

8o

expressed by it: —

1, karana, 7. e an instrument, e.g. 30RO FRGo, he cut with

gy

383

e

an axe; N0 BWeAZo, he struck with a club; Bedo 2R:&Z0. he saw

with (his) eyes; ForBoR®eDo BB 0, the cut off with a sickle

)

2, hétu, 4. e. cause, instrumentality, means, e. g. bonR®o =3g0. he

f

obtained through service; 3r&o 49,50, he was impeded by an obstacle

c?)ésjao w30, he lived by fate; @g®o Bowo, by wealth high station (is

acqmred), 22)@ Mo Ro, by learning fame (is acquired); 33&.@ Qo

8

3R¢¥ o, by the knowledge of truth final liberation (is obtained).

i

To this class of sentences may be added the following instances with

causative verbs taken from the SabdanuSisana:— 5dwes3as WTR0

o

PR30 FoRARo, the-domestic priest had a gift given by the king; 550

N

NYBA0 WPORT® NCIPAZo

the king had the field ploughed by the

gavuda; 7030 88,0 ;saqg'v”dsa;i)a‘ WOATo, the teacher had the gram-

ar read by (his) pupil

3,

samyoga, ¢. e. association, e. g.

Ron®@Edo &)5 o,

he came in

company (Sabdamamdarpana), SN0 TR am o, he came accompanied

)0

by (his) son; @8- oago 30A BORD CSESQ Hari shone joined by Lakshmi;

eV 0 ~oﬁ@~ 530“3630 e °3c$3moo, he on whose forehead is a cres-

1

cent (. e. Siva) assumed an ostentatious appearance accompanied by

Ume (Sabdanusasan a).

4, upadana, ¢.e. material cause (¢f. § 350, 9), e. 9. So3do IWED

280300, make an elephant of wood!

5, siddhi, . e. accomplishment (within a time, within a distance), e. g

O,

SPAD0 [ TTEo0 FpearSwo0aZy, the grammar became complete within

a month; 20200 9% 0 SVNZT

the treaty was finished in the rainy

season; ¥H,0300 ST LDZ0, he read the véda within a cos ot

0

Qo Jox oo ROARo, he recited the treatise in the course of a league

5

)

(SabdanuSasana)

6, bhéda, prakira, ¢. e. speciality, particular sign or mark, e.g

ed o BoBoRo, he (is) blind of (both his) eyes; mo®o Bo9,0, he (is) lame

1l

in (his) legs %05‘){8(7 Swetdo, he (is) deprived of a forearm; ezp&odo

%ox3Fo, he (is) a Brahmana as to (his) caste

F) 300 ¥ 3o, he (is)

)

e

good as to (his) nature (Sabdinusasana)

7,

(vidhi, Z. e. manner, e. 9. 3309038 SBZ=0, he walked in a quick

manner

B O WOBR, he read in a beautiful manner; ;o8 MR =W

h

—

384

s

52888y, he spoke in a clever manner)

Cf. adverbs expressed by the

instrumental in § 281

8, itthambhiutalakshana, a so circumstanced characteristic mark

characterised in such manner, characterised by, e.g. %a’m:@ 50 esaé e

%’zao he discerned the pupil by the (characteristic) water- pot z?;ﬁ% @o&oo

;Sédo;jgf ©e°50, he knew the boy by the tuft of hair (Sabdanuba.sa,na)

i

9, kartri (¢f. § 344), i.e. the efficient cause of a thing (in the so-

called passive, § 315), e. g. RRFRS &S0 IPE YR, the

It

breast-ornament was made by the goldsmith CED VNI Decd T

%o, the poem was told by me

K

In such a case also instances with a double instrumental case occur,

e. g. ©¥ORYo WIRANRIY ©Fo IRRRY’ "‘éﬁo %o, by the king rice was

FTLIFO ?fJ‘D ReF %So

b

caused to be made by the cook RO uo%@»

¥

by Hari Karna was caused to be killed by Arjuna.

348

In sentences in which the dative case (sampradana, ¢f. § 352, 2¢

We

5, a. 5, b. 5,¢) is used, the following specific meanings are considered to be

40

expressed by it:—

oﬁ RPe30 @Jaé.i o,

1, sampradéna, . e. (simple) bestowing, e. g. 239

10

he gave a cow to the Brihmana;

o3R DT B0’ f“a% Zo, he gave alms

[

to the religious mendicant; wxan ogaajwéo&a a3, o he gave a garland

of ﬁOWGlS to the temple.

a

9, ruéi, i. e. being pleasurable or palatable, e. g. AR e)cés 3ot

sweet-meat balls (are) agreeable to the taste of a child; dﬁ%oms@ on

0b1

odoCe?

rice-cakes (are) agreeable to the taste of Ganésa

AN TN

¥

B39ro BuesodBo,0, alms-giving is a pleasure to the pious man

3

3, 1irshe, 4. e. jealousy, e.g. BOR ¥D Swd[o, a poet uses to be

Or

displeased with a poet; Bowgo Kool AOW,Ro, & bad man cannot bear

a good man

:

B

4, matsara, i. e. envy, e. §. IS3R RIS PRI, a rival wife uses

the

to envy a rival wife; DIBRF WIIRTE 2e3=130°, men of distinction use

1e

to envy men of distinction

(7

5, hita, 4. e. suitableness, etc. (the Sabdanusisana has ishta, <. e.

Wy

desirableness), e. g. T3oDon N %30, grass (is) good for cows; 3HeN

y

PR30 %30, medicine (is) fit for a sick person; 033@23 Fon Nﬁe;-;jf fa;g o,

heaven (is) an object of desire for the sacrificer.

385

—

16

6, bhiti, 7. e. fear (¢f. § 349, 2), e. 9. [ITT, cWINV0 3F, .0, a good

person fears sin; [PHORY

0,0 &, a female elephant fears thELb

3

7,

4

unnati, adhikya, (gurutva), ¢. e. greatness, superiority (age, in com-

parison, ¢f. §§ 343, 1. 2; 349, 8; 352, 2,¢), e. 9. SREFEEIT WOTo, this

0

man (is) greater than all (or the greatest of all); B.ecoDoNeds wRrYo

30

this man (is) higher than Méru;

20N VTS WPTo, Hara (is) greater

than Hari [wRER,R oM Bouoi)ww S50, (various) fishes of which one is

0

larger than the other; aﬂ.@d on 233, évam oe;azzrgug Brahmanas (are) more

he

respectable than Stdras:

vﬂﬁﬁ eI ®eay B, the ripe fruit of

)

f

Fugenia jambolana (is) blacker than a crow; ooz302R -v“@ T T220%0

b

I,

Krishna (is) younger than Rama]

8,

a8

svasti, ¢. e. well-wish, e. g

VRNR wWNF, D RBTTE wPeR 0, T

T™

o,

wme)e FJVo, WagTo (Ngv 3““?30)7 ﬁeoﬁoo 330, 35%30, m) FaeNn¥o,

%Jeﬁeao (a quotation of KéSava from Nagavarma’s nwhantu our MS.

p. 105), may everywhere accrue to the world desired objects, a state of

20

well-being, happiness, ‘prosperity, bliss, luck, joy, auspiciousness (and)

he

good fortune

9,

svabhava, 4.e. natural disposition, nature, e. 9. Ao®Z a’ao.m"o

oqﬁ JJ'N

the

ho,

to the lion (is) valour (4.e. the lion possesses valour);

it}

monkey possesses agility.

nd

10, + hétu, i.e. cause (¢f. § 349, ¢), e. g. Nuﬁadﬁfggﬁo by wealth ofﬁces

(are obtained); [oeBA Soones, clouds (are the cause) of rain.

) 49

i A

namaskara,

2. €.

obeisance,

e. g. BOSAF oJatgo_SdejO

he made

o

~Q)f‘<

obeisance to the king; mo31DoR%9N%0, he made obeisance to the guru;

200

R0 DR

= DAZc. he made obeisance to the Jina

3

12

pranyanadarasmarana

¢. e. contemptuous thought concerning,

be

or contemptuons mentioning of, beings, e. 9. 3PIXTo HS

[SHn &8

el

So, when misery happens (to him), he will count men (but) straw; 297

TR

SR @30, when misery happens (to him), he will speak against

%, SR,

1568

the goddess of fortune (Sabdamanidarpana); ©=3z° ©3o 8)e9

3

1se

he counted him (but) straw; ege TP, Y13 TSBN wiko, Saumitrl

{¢. e.

AN

Lakshmana) counted the rogue (but) a worm-eaten cowrie;

U3TY° wIBTA wiRBow, thou countedst him (but) an areca nut (Sabda-

% b

nusasana)

He0

o8

5,0y

In such sentences also a double accusative may be used, e. g

3

(o]

R

49

—

386

—

¢

SELRERCRAR wiR3o, he counted him (but) straw; ®=Eo Yoo 8980, he

regarded him as (mere) straw.

Ve

13,

anishta, ¢.e. hatred, dislike, undesirableness, e. g. =30} DR

fo

20w 28,00, he poisoned him;

3R T3, 0300 [aATo, he whetted (his)

f

3

sword against him; m%"ﬁ m%ée)_og 32,5309

N

&35

the vajramushti-weapon

04

(is) noxious to wrestlers; 6@9%%@@%0 w90, famine (is) disagreeﬁable

to the world.

W

14

sadriSya, ¢. e. similarity, e.g. ©8oNego 3%,0, this man (is) as

deserving as that man;

DoONBE, T, BeFn’ oM, the (elephant)

(s

Supratika (is) equal to the (elephant) Airdvata; Reedon Mo xcﬁéeﬁo,

08

the (ox) Gayal likens a cow; ?moJoﬁ A3580 Swwoe, a face (is) like

vl

the moon.

th

15, pratinidhi, ¢.e. substitution, the being put or coming in the

LV

place of another, e.g. 23 éo?”.&'@% 5%8 Ry iy, for honey sugar may

MK

be used;

)

W

AR

€

TS 003y, for that poetical composition this

poetical composition has been substituted;

@S%d%&ed% ot 95%’9& o,

for

costus is used instead of Ricinus.

Jilk

16, ishta, é.e. love, e. g. 83 o3 [IE® 3,0, he gave a boon to

the devotee; B¥03oort BT RS0 SPBFEo, he made (his) friend glad.

b

175

prati, 4. e. regard, with regard to, as to, e. g.

(0

Al

sjo@ﬁe(%o SOt =

RBBRT 2:32,8053000 WHR 0TS AR ¢ |

trg

nas dniesd o 'ﬁ‘&éﬁ@?‘

13

WEDY Bo BIWRTT PHoossFRe* || that in Kannada which

hay

(according to the opinion of some) is wholly insufficient with regard to

(its) words, (there is) jattana and bédandé, the ancient poets have proved

ey

by (their) renowned poetical works that now still exist.

See § 284

(under dative FooTo ﬁ@z‘r&o); § 287, under 2 (TR ’és:aﬁ*’cjﬁa_o‘); § 287,

¥

N

under 3 (@5553 :‘goj;)\o . (f. §302, 4.

v

%

18,

(gamana, i.e. going to, the point toward which movement is

directed, e. g. #3850 YWONR BReERY, he went to the town; sanR¥, =0

(Sal

ES)%% R0®wg, 3, rivers flow into the sea; 00 ﬁé-@% S&8®, Rama

walked to the forest).

i

19, [arghya, é. e. price or exchange, e. g. ®Z, TRTHOWA BRI

fr()g

BR %;ﬁg> I gave this for ten rupees; m%ﬁ To2sedy, five sérs for a duddu;

flag

———

387

—

GeT30 WRP B0, NCFE BRTIONAR WY Redy IENF,B, opium (is)

e

very dear, one sér is sold for seven or eight rupees

OR T, THRBEVS 0D

\

for how much will you give (it)?

QTR THTINNA FLRES e, I will

give (it) for two rupees]

Cf. § 802, 7

20,

(métra, 7. e. mereness, the one thing and no more, e. 9. 301

[

0UR, a king only as to name

SER PR, @ wise man only as to

words

¢k § 3524, )

N

21,

(dikku, 4. e. direction, e.g. modz»RS, ¥$ned w3 g, Belgaum

)

@s) to the north of Dharwar

¢f. § 352, 4, a. 3)

29

vy

-l.i’

[diira, . e. distance, e. g. HITTIRT, RPOD IDTLI BTHIO

(8

973, Belgaum is sixteen haradaris from Dharwar

B3R 0N S$IpT0 RTmed

WBoNBRORN DR ONRR

that village (is) three miles from this village

18

R, BP0, what (is) the distance between Bangalore and Mysore? ¢f.

|

9332 4,a. 4]

18

23

Sakti, . e. power, e. ¢g. Sowof Tow o 3T, 0, a wrestler (is) a match

0,

for a wrestler

$30Ne30 BoBFo, this man is able to mate with that

man (Sabdanusisana)

24

t0

asliyé, ¢. e. detraction, e. g. BSoFoR TOUIF® BALONRY 0, the

TOTVON D9S8R0

Kaurava takes away from the reputation of Dharma;

REEITT UBPeLATo, Ravana ascribes vice to Rama (Sabdanusisana).

25

droha, 4. e. mischief, e. ¢

% BXoNe30 TR

S this man (is) a

traitor to the king; %@cSconims20 woXeTce, the servant does ill to (his)

master (Sabdanusasana)

ch

26,

svaha, svadha, vashatkara, i. e. the three ritual invocations of

to

hail and prayer, e. g. @ﬁﬁ %2,8959C0, hail to Agni! wé *1%3 Nawaam

el

benison to the manes! B3 oft = &2, Jo, vashat to Indra! (Sabdanusasana)

84

217,

tadarthya, <. e. sake purpose, material cause, e. g. ;3@6%3

3@

Jl

, for final liberation knowledge of the truth (is necessary), vos'a

%

a\ ’

for an earring gold (is taken);

3987 =030, for a chariot wood

1\

(is required);

&:"?Démﬂ (\a—'g

for pounding a pestle (is required)

9

(Sabdanusisana).

né

28,

utpata, 7. e. portents, e. g

292, (lit. regarding famme) 39,0230

SReFTIST,

OSJ @3 2,

white flashes of lightning (portend) famine

'd‘

<y

frogs’ tufts (portend) the ruin of the world;

d

%),

EOR :\)\.{%\ %QUO%J re

flashes of lightning (portend) excessive heat of the sun (Sabdanusasana)

lu

49%

—

PO

388

29, [®29, 4. e time (¢f. § 302, 2.7; 303, 1,a; § 346, 7; § 352, 4,4

of

5. 6,0), &-9- 3R R, to-day; ?:)aojowae)é

in the evening; 0By SIRFT,,

%

for two years; 203053 aom?ﬁ next month DB ﬁmﬁ at seven o'clock].

30

( owaerﬁé

e. deserving state

e. g ;35@5

33,332, he who

deserves honour; 3gROZIIBTE 20T9F, T3 %, she who cannot bear

k3

(0

A

patiently deserves death)

VTR WY

%259 FRIY,

3

(23¢3,

i.e. difference, e. 9. 23TH

(there is) a great difference betwixt this and that; ¢f. § 352, 4,a. 2)

3_9

32, (900, ¢.e. cause, purpose end, see §§ 302, 7; 352, 4,a. 115 ¢. ¢

E

03393F, W

why didst thou come? FoxF, w30, I came on business

SRCBDRY, VRV

went to see)

(Al

Remarks

d

(

L,

In § 316 it is stated that ¢to have

‘to possess

is expressed by ¥v®°

0

etc. preceded by the dative case

2,

Regarding adverbs used with the dative see § 282 under dative

3

Some verbs are often used with the dative, e.g. RR0DFRT IR BEF

DAy BeB3N3 &, from the sun we get light and heat

33, ¥FP I w3

e

0N WRIIBRPI IR BRES, 3030, [ BRTFVSAY XY Ierd), the tame cow

o))

said “because my master is poor, I do not get sufficient food to fill my

I3R A3

33N &9030R, I know not

O3 BOWY

the

stomach”’

I found (it)

208 N3

he went mad

%{

349.

&

In sentences in which the ablative case (apadara, ¢f. § 352, 2

2,d. 4,a)

is used, the followmo' specific meanings are considered to be expressed

by it : —

0

2

1,

apadana, ¢.e. (simple) separation from, coming from, going away

3

from, e.g. SoTB3 90 Teew DRIFY, ripe fruits fell from the tree; AD

0303 890 T TRV ), stones rolled down from the mountain; F2530303 20

283 0. he came from the tank; %zE03 o083 BP0 O

o. he fell from

83

(his) horse which was running; =83 2030303, £380 oo, he rolled from

GXI

the cart which was moving rapidly m“am030m§9 do 30293035950, he

0N

hid himself from the teacher; rogoR®s

o) %uwﬁﬁo he went out of

fat

the way of the guru; Swhes 230 Doty woo?,ség a flash of lightning

the

flashed from the cloud

[y

2,

bhaya, <. e. fear (¢f. § 348, 6; §

a. 6), e.9. BTRT3, Ao IS?

N

g

2Ry B, an inroad arose from the king; 3H)©03g 3

8 030

, he was afraid

Q

hoy

e

389

—

!

of the tiger; g©033 3o zpeé, fear (proceeding) from a tiger; mo=z3, o

;

$¥69, anxiety (coming) from sin.

3, svikéra, i.e. adoption, making one’s own, (acquiring for one’s self),

10

e.g. 73@&30030_3{9950 ATIF BRI ¥Ry, from (his) king the achievement

Al

(of hisobject) was got; mmqsaéososgs%o DT 0T BTIFPINE 0, he

acquired knowledge from (his) teacher.

0

Ny

4, ishta, ¢. e. agreeableness, pleasure (¢f. § 352, 4,a. 7), €. g. BT:30,030

3,530 Roalo 09,2, A%, from Rambhé pleasure was obtained; TOTRY, Mo

g

88 Ao, he saved from sin; 2£983 30 Bo&Go, he saved from famine.

M

5, anishta, 4. e. disagreeableness (¢f. § 852, 4,a. 8), e. 9. TRV, 3o

w—-é

e

8o &)'*%Cso, imprisonment came from the enemy; z» 5:5%250 SR A

zﬁo; he suffered bewilderment from sin.

6, hétu, ¢.e. cause, means, e.g. mzﬁ@qggﬁrjisﬁo 20 u?ﬂg)do, wealth

came from office.

Cf. § 348, 10;.§ 352; 4,a. 9.

7,

udaya, ¢.e. springing from, originating (¢f. § 352, 4,a. 10), e. g.

)

#%05‘55_33950 3o, he sprang from a good family; 03N BFITE, 30

3

RoR 33y, the Ganges rose from the Himavat mountain; Dewn3, 883 0

0w

FoTSSF SR, the sprout arose from the seed; %oﬁdé?ﬁo 302 ST,

g

the water proceeded from the top of the mountain.

)

8, gurutva, pérmé, i.e. dignity, age (in comparison), e.g. TF S

gé_'gz%o aoe)a;go 00300, Balabhadra (is) older than Krishna; ergss,

30 TORIBEN T wHTo, Vasudéva (is) more excellent than Arjuna; 3o

)

S

sed

o330 IBBeZo 81030, Sahadéva (is) younger than Nakula;

2533@63’0 e, this man (is) smarter than that man. Of. §§ 343, 2, a;

343, 8; 348, 7; 350, 2, a—ec.

i)

[V

a8

350, In sentences in which the locative case (adhikarana, adhara, ¢f.

190

§ 852, . 5, . 6, @) is used, the following specific meanings are considered to be

il

expressed by it:—

onl

1,

adhikarana, adhara, 7. e.

(simple) relation to site, place, e.g.

he

‘i;;

TOARRYS géﬁos%o, he slept on the bed; =zCRReSRP* ‘5&%5?0, he

0L

sat down in the basket-boat; ;joaadz&fa%?‘ 3o0ne¢, the cows (are) in

10

the house; [o0x BdoTeceBRYS VEg 0, he ate from a plate of wood;

DB BR* Bewo, (there is) splendour in the disk of the sun; ©o3H%*

)

W

23%333, (there is) white colour in the flower; so=33030%* 5\;%50, he was

aid

born in a lotus (or sprung from a lotus); [;53“"03&@3:3%;3, he is in the

P —

390

—

1(

house; eeaéé:;ojge;o ®§§§4%6°= they cooked rice in the jungle; ;3o0$o§§

TR0, (there) is strength in (his) body].

>

9, nirdbarana, i. e. specifying one out of many (comparison, see

§ 343, 4.5; § 352, 1, ¢).

-1

h

a) as to quality (guna), e.g. BeF3RY JAVREF(BIWIT,0, 2 fit one

among princes (or the fittest one of princes is) the guiltless one;

d%yoﬁ

PR 535@95%’93555 003, 300, among jewels the ruby (is) precious; L3N

SR FT20ITY [OWIP),RY, AMONZ COWS the black cow (is) that which

has (most) milk; aﬁgd@g;ﬁ z%%éédos@%gi’ among cloth white cloth (is)

good ;

T

b) as to action or being (kriyd), e.g. R0TLICRY B30 TV,Y To,

among the runners this man (is) a strong-footed one (or this man is the

most strong-footed one of the runners);

W

FoS3RY B30 3305;\@

among those who fight this man (is) a strong-bodied one;

9 3BRP* 0B

1

So 393 en, among them he who runs (is) a swift-footed one; ajs?f?-.@egé

DL 3 303, among ripe fruits that which drops (from the tree 1s)

of

a mature fruit (or the most mature fruit of ripe fruits is that which

drops from the tree);

¢) as to race (jati), e g. SS[ZRY PYToNT' ¥, T[oo’, among

y

men males (are) chiefs (or males are the most eminent of men); I

fo

3ee* T 30dn* 3RTT, among males Kshatriyas (are) valiant men.

3, dravya, i. e a fit object (considered by itself), e.g. w=3ZLe*

th

S35 DT Zo, among these persons this one (is) ours; ©IBRY*® Yo

29®, among those persons this one (is) the hero (Sabdanuiasana).

W

4, phjyasadhunipuna, . e. the' introduction of persons who are

Q

good to praiseworthy people or are skilful in praiseworthy things, e. g.

I

39030%° w9 o, (he is)

39030%° magy, (he is) kind to (his) mother;

¥

Al

good to (his) mother; RododBdRy RIwo, (he is) true to (his) guru;"

Tp303Ry* t3oeo, (he is) proficient in adoration;

WIRRY TuIwo,

(he is) expert in (drawing) pictures (Sabdanusasana).

oy

5, vishaya, i.e. a peculiar province or place, e. g. FJRXRF* TEF

Go, he whispered in the ear; SRR3R Bewo, he was suspended by

by

(his) mouth [o. r.———ﬁo% o, he chewed with (his) mouth].

6, vyapaka, 4. e. inherent property or substance (¢f. No. 1), e. g.

%

TPARRT TR, (there is) fragrance in flowers; FTIFIRF® TRo, (there

fa

PUGEIE

391

——

S

is) juice in the sugar-cane; 03"3@%;6 o:,s;‘)%, (there is) oil in thé oil-plant;

T8RS [oZoTo, (there is) sweetness in milk.

19

ly

vyavahara, i.e. engaging in, conduct or action in, e.g. 3TBRY

ﬁﬁ&g}o, he engaged in austerities;

DeTWRE DRBo, he distinguished

16

himself in (the department of) valour.

)

8, Kkila, i.e. time (¢f. §§ 348, 29; 352, 6, a. 6,¢), e.g. SRR, BRY S

7

wR By, mangoes appeared in spring;

I0BRY° DAWRITSE @ 3o,

ch

universal conquest (is) proper in autumn; (u;ﬁg} 301’?%392) 9, TIED W0

5)

%R0, he read through the grammar in one month; 2055% DI, FORT

n93, %, in one day the work will be done).

0

9,

upadana, 7.e. material cause

(¢f. § 347, 4), e.9. SHTBH%* ‘R0

he

3

LG0T

cY

0V PTo, he ascended the decorated seat that was made of

Y

wood; [3ARTS I&TR, that which (they) have made even of curdled

i

milk].

(yd

10, [karana, 4. e. means, e. g. sa@% 5@0333_5963, we walk by means

18)

of (our) feet; %99%&2 RPeRa3 e:3, we see with (our) eyes].

ich

351

The genitive case that is not classed with the six karakas (see

i

§ 344), expresses the connection (sambandha) of nouns to nouns (¢f. § 352,

NN

5, a; for adverbs with the genitive see § 282), which connection is of the

following kinds: —

1,

svimisambandha, 4. e. connection of ownership, e. g. enndRBE®I o,

the chief of the town;

J

;

SoBwRco, the chief of the district;

(eﬁoﬁsﬁ%ﬁ

Rewod, the house of the king;

000308 Toad, the horse of the rija;

are

BOBONT PA, ¥, the books of the boys; ERSRNSSI a%szaaé, the wife of the

potter).

6§

2 18)

2. kulasambandha, i. e. connection of family or caste, e. g. &,

1ruy )

i@mo@ the property of us (i.e. our property); 39, Sweess, our face;

50,

339,830, our son-in-law ; 2233, B3y0, OUT younger brother; (mgbg

SN, a Stdra’s son; 20303 Sonwy, a merchant’s daughter).

iid

3, jatisambandha, i.e. connection of genus, class or kind, e.g. 98

| by

o3y 8, a troop of elephants; Bomedods C;Sé,’«:)d, a multitude of horses;

NP edy, a flock of parrots; egw %’sﬁog\),\the fragrance of flowers;

%z‘% 2:3%33‘), the white of the eye; (5&:@7«;053 ®¢a0, the ripe fruit of the

0.

tamarind ; 23993030 Taody, the fruit of the plantcain; ;’)Q%{S«'ﬁé, the leaf

here

—

392

—

of the betel plant

[0S Boese, a dog’s puppy;

FRELEGN TRNY

the cry of cocks)

4,

avayavasambandha, ¢.e. connection of membership, e. g. F0TE

FRT

the branch of a tree

Ipon=e®, the petal of a flower; FRBDH

Ty, the stick of an umbrella

(

lakshanasambandha

?

4

connection of distinctive marks

D,

g

BRN 03 IR0, a man with a cap; 33 93 vey3o, a horseman of per-

((

plexity (i.e. a perplexed horseman, o.r. ¥3¢% or 33 $3 0980); AR

0!

©3e38 ToWIT, & horse of Sindb; (FR9DT9FY, a person of power, a power-

ful person; Z=ZF3 Weg Y, A proud soldier; %33 svxi3es, friendly advice)

6,

sanmdhanasambandha, i.e. connection of proximity or vicinity,

e.9. BBy Twed, an outlet (in the proximity) of a tank

NPT DR

the place in front of a town; Y feo, the vicinity of that (s.e. 1

vicinity)

[F

sarhsparsasambandha, . e. connection of close contact, e.g. IFQ

Ir

39o¢, young foliage on a threshing floor; Jed ma3=, duck-weed on water

a

3RS wd. an ornamental tie on the arm

fa

8,

sambandhasambandha, 7. e. connection of connection (occurring

4L

when two genitives precede a noun), e.g. SRV %’S’a Bdez0, the god of an

eye of the forehead (i.e. the god who has an eye on the for enead) 3nesd

(0

3. the

wo¥ T, the lustre of the sword of the arm; oo TpBY,C =

v

lotus of the navel of Hari

0

9,

$éshasambandha, ¢.e. connection of remainder or rest, e. g. W

CralimBie®

neo?, the substance that remains in a balla;

the young one

(which was left) to it

10

9

o

vikdrasambandha, ¢.e. connection of change of form, e.g. Lps

8

B

TS

staff of gold; (

Zoonio, a ring of gold)

il

(sthalasambandha, . e. connection of place, e.g. ®BIS) TTTR

fo

sojourning in the forest; 803y =9

, dwelling in Kasi;

Sonody s

u,;e

dinner at one’s house)

Remark

()

It may be stated here that several genitives, one after the other, in

ka

connection with only one noun, are sometimes used in the following manner

(from which use will also appear that the conjunctions evo, etc. are never

suffixed to the genitive, see § 284): —

N\(

pu—

393

——

3¢08 BoRR JFH B3

TR BT, ,0088, SPERE NBIBR |

BB [NS S VB

%608 INBTR PES WeFwFedNTo || 125 |

330 ISR B %Ja:as oa:ozsn’é BPOMRT® wIFBHTFORIFT 3¢S AR ROTINS®

(Candraprabhapurana vi).

They dxscharged the shining syringes of emeralds,

pearls, sapphires, diamonds (and) rubies which (artificers) had made (i.e. which

had been made, see § 315, 2, under k) like parrots

swans, cuckoos, partridges

(and) ruddy geese, against themselves, and besprinkled one another with water

of various fragrance.

SIRIVIE330 #éus amudﬁ 33

JRININ S 030 zﬁeéﬁﬁ@ IMN3s IR

ARSI 3¢PFrRoNSI RS FRLHIT S0 FOEBIFI |

DATZFR IR 0300 INWEII I

RIBO3RPE NI, FFRIPSF O3 INE I WHBD

DBFFIFoNTo TRINT FoFBe 9’ ¥R 3 WBR IVATFER || 67 in Jaimini v ||

The goddess of fortune continually remains in the house of him who utters

friendly words, is grateful, is intent upon giving, is kind to others’ wives, is not

addicted to chase, is rich is honour, associates with worthy persons, never utters

false witness, does proper works, does not hide (his) doings, engages in abundant

)¢

agreeable things on earth (and) performs various virtuous acts

1!

Compare also %0333 Fo0 oo, the bone of the arm (and) of the leg

0

(i.e. the radius of the arm and the skin-bone, Halayudha)

oo rSPT] TS

e

8 307,98, 30et=y, show (me) the children of Rama (and) Krishna

DFD, VTTD BeR530, there is enmity between thee (and) him (Nudigattu)

¢

352. The seven cases sometimes change places (¢f. also § 253, 1,a.0), viz

‘é

, @) the genitive stands for the nominative, e. g. 23, 0B Mo ST

) g

3 and %8 23:3?'{9)6563 RRoF stand for 3 0FN%0 dq)

o0 ooy

cj’» and ¢33 ¢3

I Do JRoT

)

The author of the present grammar considers this statement of Késava

)My

to be erroneous, as the genitives T and et stand before the nouns

2ecs3 and ZRoF

see §§ 188. (369)

'\by

The SabdanuSisana has the instance R g 03¢ for Qeo wa okf, thou

camest, the proof for the correctness of which must be left to Bhatta-

kalafika déva

1

b)

the genitive stands for the accusative,

e 9. DVIP, E° I

(3

%Jaﬁo.& and 3o0Fzo3 a’m&‘godoeﬁ Sao 3080 wders3y stand for el

yer

‘ae;f DF,0 -@Ja,o o, O thou kllledst me, and 3o0TTIRo c‘duwgojo@ 80

50

——

—

394

oo wHIFs3y, does it ever come to (my) mind to forget the southern

country?

The author of the present grammar thinks that .3 and @ are

)

123 o

accusatives with final ¢ as he has indicated in § 117

& s raa)

c)

the genitive stands for the locative (In comparison), e.g. 3FINNT

wu o stands for 3ANRBRY weo Ko, a supreme one among liberal

persons

Un

&338 Bess for &38Ry BesSe, a prince among donors

¥0 wT S 3F for CATSRY @37 337, a king among the witty. See § 343, 5

and ¢f. § 350, 2,

2, a)

the accusative stands for the nominative (¢f. No. s, b), e.9. Toed,

éﬁﬁo stands for goes, %ﬁo (resting on evy® meaning also <to possess’),

|

one who possesses ﬁneness

The Sabdanusisana has also the instance:

BeSB3, B wGFo, instead of Bes3Z D vBFo.

Cf §§O46 348, 12

b)

|

the accusative stands for the instrumental, e.g. D[pdas weira

Go, he worshipped with flowers, stands for geags ©w-Ace, he presented

t

flowers in worship. See § 347

0)

the accusative stands for the dative (¢f. No. 5 0), e. g. wﬁéﬁo

m

&)@ S0 ’o-sfﬂ

e&

o stands for FpFo u@ﬁ %“J\jo he lent gold coins on

1nterest

SReFTor vdTo for e‘i@g%é ago the greatest of all (this

second sentence is from the Sabdinusasana; ¢f. § 348, 7); (BexTRY =

i

R e for e

Cuta) :do@ 3,08;

DeRSRy, Oe8rd 68 for TRRS otony

3 0:: “OURIR ‘Sowg 5@

R0 for xR Foes3 68@? =93

;mey

IV

l

B, R for JwezF B Ro;

thus also Ndd msj'*o °*5~ 303 ; 3&303350

(t

VROTP; TTTRY, NEPIR.; "3, uoﬁqugaﬁ emadm SJslalo8)

d)

the accusative stands for the ablative

€9

PTFR0 FIF

fl

S0 WRRWe o, he demanded business of the lad, for

SRR TIS 0

FTOWIF oo WRRPD 0

See § 349

o

3,

the locative stands for the instrumental

e.g. TRRBOBRY BETs

11

stands for FRREO®Ie B&Zo. he cut with the axe

RBo3R%* P03y o for

nAB30%o

ogfe)Oi) Q;

FOIR S %e%ﬁo for QMoo FeLo;

FOBIRL SR

(3

%J@Oﬁoo for zuBIRWEDo %Jaoua c.

See § 350.

he

4, a) the instrumental stands for the ablative (¢f. § 117, a, 5; see§349

§ 343 ablative and instrumental in comparison; § 302, 1 instrumental

§

for ¢since’

; § 282 adverbs with the instrumental).

i

395

—

1

in simple apidana, e. g. 33800 wIo stands for 803038 o

WA 0

he came from the tank

T08TQ0 [oodR, 3,3 for 303833 830

S0TOI S

$003R,79,5y, from the head of the elephant pearls dropped;

DESY & for 30333, @3&3 RE3Y z3o, a leaf fell from the tree.

astw

%#awsg AR NPT [0 N\nﬁmoﬁw &o

é%‘?ﬁ@%ﬁéﬁ 2P TIY) m"o’é%{)%‘}o

i

I

(NROR WIR; OT DR BEPBRY; nonR aoaisae)oﬁoaﬁ ®OBWE R.)

F03. BANE T0= FDo DODo Tede

20 03, IWeNAF WNRIDFS TR 0 TR, Do |

30,08 ﬂavaojo&@g;g WT %ﬁsooé 3,09

cﬁoa 3, &’)owr Swd&’)w 00T

;’)o‘@oﬁo%’;?o || by the beloved

women of the Sabaxas who were gathermg the fine pearls which were

loosened from the heads of the mad elephants, from the bamboos, from

the heads of the cobras (and) from the tusks of the formidable hogs, and

dropped on the massy rocks.

2

[in bhéda, <. e. dxfference (¢f. § 348, 81), e.g. ©TPT AT 236623,

Al

this (is) different from that].

3

(in dikku, ¢.e. direction, quarter, e.g. F37oBOI VI WA

v

neoy, Belgaum (is) to the north of Dharwar; ¢f. § 348, 21)

01

4

(in ddra, 4.e. distance, e.g. © LN VOI LB Sy ©B

115

that village is five miles from this place

RO VBRI WY TRANTS e

i

2@

the jungle is a loud cry distant from the town

cf. § 348, 22)

J

5

[in kila, ¢. e. time, e.9. wRzo»OR 33, BIFIToNI, it is

long since you visited (me);

BT A WS[ BOR,R0, he (is) poor from

")

(his) youth;

¢f. § 302, 1; § 348, 29].

6

(in bhaya, é.e. fear, e.g. BT ©o233R, he was afraid of the

tiger; cf. § 349, 2).

i

¢

~

Qq

7

(in ishta, 4.e. agreeableness, pleasure, e.g. 83,3 TonOI TF

90

%R0, he saved me from sin

of. § 349, 4)

8

(in anishta

. €

disagreeableness, e. g. 3,008 WA ST

g

imprisonment came from the enemy; c¢f. § 349, 3).

for

9

(in hétu, <. e.

cause, means, e.g. BRLENAT AD WY,

wealth

t‘ﬂ

came from office

DTIOWT DTS 20938, 3, from xearnlng comes good

behaviour; ¢f. § 349, 6).

10

[in udaya, .e. springing from, originating (¢f. § 349, 7), e. g

49

©F ,003 TOTOR

DeBROT BoTTToNN3.3, the sprout arises from seed

tal

2o B33y, Kama was born of Lakshmi]

50%

—

396

—

11

[in FoTe9, cause, reason, see §§ 302, 7; 348, 32; c¢f. also:—

gaﬁ&a"g) =3 8, on account of (his) wisdom (he is already) a full-grown

3

person; fj%éad&);g I8 Ry, on account of (his) right conduct (he is) a

th

good person].

pa

b) [the instrumental stands for the dative, e.g. 685635’& ©3xRy for

%R0 ©TRRY, a king (only) in name; ¢f. § 348, 2.

Observe also:

R

3

o008 0, TRy, (he is) a Brahmana (only) for (his) sacrificial thread;

he

2:830007 29xAR, (he is) an ascetic (only) for (his) matted hair; I8

=X

QF ga%%m, (he is) a gentle person (only) in (his) words].

110

5, @) the dative stands for the genitive, e.g. 7923%,80300 stands for

th

SORPBWY0, the chief of the district;

ZRBRRBNRV0 for FHBS3RBR0,

al

the lord of the umbrella; .Brmacae for OBrFossecgoe, a heart’s ruler;

2:71%@&@0300 for wRdwBoo, the lord of the world; (6@53-’%% £ for

110

SReT3 5;{3’3).

3

b) the dative stands for the accusative (¢f. No. 2, ¢), e. g. 88508 B9,

2o stands for 3x.30 9, Ao, he ordered the pupil; 23R 3910 for

(

¥Foo 391Ro, he informed her; (BeoR ;S‘%mieaﬁ for ©e=TRY, ;5%

he

Ro8,0R; @ad%a_ QEIMZ e for TOBTRY AEINVB,ER; thus also ©gxR

J

Soess %J«)%&a’a; 5&365\%& ¥R, R; "’dgm%& 838 XerE; 3SR VBRVBY;

of

STT, AEPTRY; ]IIN wo:ioo%a@si; PRONR NeOBRY; SONIBTR PBFFOF

3

ol

VBRI, see § 291).

a

‘)

the dative stands for the locative (¢f. § 350, 1. 6), e.g. 333N

Je

?@%do stands for sa=3030es 0@%50, he sprang from a lotus; 7555;33%&

Wi

Bewo for WD Bwe* Bewo, (there is) splendour in the disk of the sun;

vonr B¢y for wodee’ 3¢y, (there is) white colour in the flower;

01

J

=8 for @@%g;é »8, (there is) oil in the oil-plant; (& wwdR Foo

3

%‘f%ﬁ?rﬁeéoeaé for & ewsd SEES FEERoeay; SBoRFOR w@@o&oe% for

ax

SIRWFTS uo%o&og).

da

6, @) the nominative stands for the locative (¢f. No. 6, ¢), e. g. 2»53)

In|

BZRo &)%o for 2,05% DSIRBRYE waéo, he came in one day.

al

b)

the nominative stands for the accusative (¢f. No, 2,¢), e g

of

mdg IRFIF vrFo stands for u;ﬁg SRFI* BBFo, he stayed one

T

£

year; o Sn&%To for Do Sw@Bo he made a water-vessel (the

first instance is from the Sabdamanidarpana, the second one from the

Sabdénuéasana).

1y

—

397

—

There may be adduced the following ancient additional instances (see

§ 120, a, 2): — RuRPBL Too Bw32°due®, if (they) speak, all of them

do not know (proper) words [Sabdamanidarpana sub sfitra 250 where

the Mudabidar

MS. has

YT Boo SAMMEVEAo

if (they) grow

passionate, they do not know what is to come]. sjaﬁﬁ 318, [0S W, 3

Ra3) 037, O son, O son, thou didst what is good (Sabdinus$asana s. sutla

;

399) $30 FERR* aax o, he came to milk the cow;

33063 BReRBSF WA o,

he came to see the woman (Sabdanusasana).

TPURGPRT JFEPNT

(a person) who did

FORILPCNT DoNT [P IPSEP3T (Fogo8g0)

not know the direction, who did not know the place, who did not know

See

the side, who did not know the three ways of beasts (Smd. p. 127)

also § 339, 5 (TP T 9A),

362, 2,0 (e@o&@éo ;i)

In the modern dialect it is very common to use the crude base of a

I

noun for the accusative, e. g. Tz DR,

nnd) SIWREY; WD ReCI; B0

SPRY; T30 FORY; NPRY T ;

obsfa %’JDNJ =98

SRR,

)

I

¢) [the nominative is used to express time instead of the dative, etc

(¢f- §§ 348, 29; 350, s, etc.;

and No. 6, @), e. g. BReT 3TV WA R

he came last Saturday; 2 W B §T90 BHRINF YR IRYFY, BATORN TR

%

SBF, W0039,3, on Thursday the gentleman will come to make a present

of books

£29, OF IR TN BRENTWIB ToI030S 0308 DR, TP

&

eight days (or for eight days) I could not go to school and remained even

at home

¥R S ITBY IR AG I, he lived here two (or for two)

BN.3 O3

f

years

200023930 RIS, early on the day of the feast he

will come; 3 ZR3Iy,, to-day ; 289, to-day; mn93.%, by day and night

[y

& HSR, on this day, RRCTTT &

i

~,

on Monday;

Ry 0SS, one day,

[y

on a certain day]

Ny

353. The instances in § 345 seq., as far as they are not in parenthesw,

L

are taken chiefly from the ancient dialect (as it appears in the Sabdamani-

darpana, Sabdanusasana, etc.), which regarding the meaning, use and

interchange of the cases does not materially differ from the medieeval

T

and modern one

That there is some difference concerning the form

of the seven cases in the three dialects, has been shown in

109 seq

J

The instances of the modern dialect in parenthesis belong mostly to a small

)6

Kannada grammar of the Southern Mahratta country, called Nudigattu

16

354. Some special rules regarding the use of the singular and plural of

it

nouns, ete. in or without sentences are to be given, viz

398

I

The singular stands or may stand for the plural in nouns

Gf. § 133

1

For the plural that conveys the meaning of a pair (yugala) the

singular is used, e. g. for Zgc3oriorie’ there occurs Tmodwrio, a couple

of verse-lines

W

2,

Further, the singular is used instead of the plural in avishta-

linga, 4. e. when the base of a noun (in an inflected state) refers to a

noun in the plural which comprises more things than a pair, e. g. Seco

ne* ©,35ecco (for Besony® =

2,390 0N ), the (four) védas (are) proof;—

{]

or when 1t refers to a number of nouns which are connected by the

:b'

conjunction eno e.g.

éaﬁoﬁoo SIS NG DT, 3 5303000 TIT B0

BoFR20 FDEN TTe0 (for

T900Mny), genius, exercise, the service

of the learned and the acquaintance with poems (are) the means for

poetical composition

(That the interrogative pronoun & which has no form of the plural, may

get the meaning of the plural, appears in § 262.)

(1

3,

An optional use of the'singular for the plural occurs regarding

nouns of race, species or kind (jati), such as saeess, =3, 338, W3S

o@@g 28I, (o)éd) N®, ®oR, AREN, TRENS, 30&)\) BRELY, Tk (55\)\))

W

FCI:3, Tp, etc., e g. TOUeYF Or FTowoR &F

foot- soldlexs, B3 or e3res

A%

elephants; similarly also =

© or Fpee®, the pupil of the eye

See

]

§ 900, L84

But

a) If a jati noun in the singular is pleceded by an adjective which

is, so to say, its karaka (i. e. determinating the case and number of the

noun, c¢f.§ 355, IV, 5), it always has the meaning of the singular, e. g

B89 898, such an elephant; w8y €0 Fuz0d, such a horse (R03y oo’

cC

a straight finger

BSReRy Swets3, a beautiful face)

I

b) If jati nouns stand.in the singular and are preceded by an adjec-

U

tive in the plural, they always convey the meaning of the plural, e. g

Re0mY WTof, straight fingers

3Re0RT wRo, big buttocks;

AARAD

) =R

stout breasts

§

0]

¢) Observe the following sentences in which, either by a preceding

noun in the plural or by a following demonstrative pronoun in the plural

the plural number of a jati noun is indicated: — RRABHER Ty 3 N%H

DGR, VLAY, 3¢ (4. 6 3ZATRY) Wik, VRN P BREWEN.

SRR BT B R — TREHBOZATR TPOT B (6. €. BPIT LN TIERY)

o

399

P —

r&é@% 5@\@\55‘)

BRTE, S8 U DR — IR

£ (¢ e TPV B

n$0)? ©F) /R QOR WY

4,

An optional use of the singular for the plural further takes place

when objects are to be counted (sankhyéya, sankhyavastu), e. g. 83, 33

or 35 BAN*, the ten points of the compass; SoH22) BweTo Or

AR

ReForie®, the (mentioned) three worlds; Zont9) Dorlo or ZoRE Oont

ns*, the (mentioned) three genders

PN

BhTa R ey

)

odoonones

the (mentioned) four ages of the world; &:3ecds Swedo or &3¢ SHe

Foniys, the fourteen worlds;

e%dow ;’s

or & GO\«Q

ﬁ%;‘

the ten states

or conditions (.:@e)o&_ Songs or ;33@0 éomﬁméo tour months; TV,

Somne

B Or F900, Sonsonsy 3553;5), it is four months)

3

9,

An optional use of the singular for the plural further takes place

when numerals are counted (sankhyina, sankhyéya), e. g. %) g9, or

280 mowunet, one fours (i.e. four); &ooswy or B:ToBuReF, two fives

(i- e. ten); B3>, FRE or T3y, SRR, ten hundreds (. e. one thousand)

g 02181

6,

An optional use of the singular for the plural further takes place

with regard to nouns of quality (bhava), such as BRZYF, TJHF, €. g. T

¢ FRJF or F ¥ THZPYFNAeE, the penetrating looks of the eyes

PN

@B or Zpnd BF) nee

TIODVE @ TYF Or TITIX ¥ TRHFNS®

II

The plural of nouns stands for the singular

1, in spontaneous respect (i.e. in respect that proceeds alone from

natural feeling, ayatnakritagurutva, prayatnam alladirpa gurutva), e.g

0355)6 dew

o our deity

030, 33 nef. our father

2oy, SO0 F°

our

mother:; o530 ojogoﬁegé our master; (r?)eajﬁ;' 200 o. he made obeisance

to the king).

Cf. §§ 257. 258. 261. 268.

The modern dialect when referring to ‘God’ uses 3@V (see § 355, I, 1)

)

in (considering) the excellence of gurus, muniSvaras, etc. (an

speaking or writing of them), e.g. Rugone®, guru; =3 doriys, master (lord

or guru);

“o’

esﬁs%ﬁoiap

®

-

~® 63& T)‘n

=N3 NC

~d O\

T oJdov

o3 |

>

~

on

w'&-\ C\)-acs

~

z

aneg

DoGonE BN T 235*53 o0 || may the feet of

25

)

—

—

400

[

the illustrious svami Samantabhadra, of the world-famed poet svami

Paraméshthi (and) of svami Pajyapada give perpetual protection

3, Instead of the singular 32305330, the three worlds, its plural & 23,

S3xonys has been used in Kannada

4, If two or more nouns in the singular connected by eno (ew),

g

‘and’ (§ 284) are formed into a dvandva compound (§ 250), the plural is

generally used, e.g. 08800 NGB0 become ZooNRone*, trees and shrubs

3 0S000 3903200 become 38 3930 v¢, father and mother, ca=oRi0 © 3,900

become vozow® roof, Rama and Lakshmana, =0ogi0 AR0Jo 20903000

Y20 IPTREII0 £F,0000 Anove become JooNBoWPTHSH BED

LSO Tate!

3

ne*, trees, shrubs, creepers, grass, bushes, birds and antelopes

WFRI0

\

oo TedR0o become wIBoRIeINY

e.9. ©30

)FToRTINTo BT

3o, who subdued Baka, Karmsa and Kési?

Likewise in the modern dialect there {requently are sentences like the

following: — 2820080 NI, BB T SIW3, B2 03039, 3, only stupid persons

revile knowledge (and) wisdom; 3930903020 TORT R 33) 3T 8o Ned

|

d

207,90, Kasiraja (had) two sons, Rama (and) Krishna;

%03

20400,

o

old (and) young persons;

§;So 3@7‘1@&3% ORES, N?eﬁi‘ﬁgﬁ‘i%}éa

W3

n)?.é

{

<o 'aéb ??Ja%:? 33,039, it is proper to keep (our) paper, pens, bOOkb (and)

&

clothes so tha,t they remain very clean; 3303038 MoT.030R SORTY BT

TOADRY, TRRSe SE Wewy, (we) must do at once the work which (our)

¢

mother, father, teacher (and) master order (us to do); ToZod03.3y

I

FRELANHY W

0303003, 33, horses, oxen (and) buffaloes draw carriages

:

539, 0359THINBY ooy e 3.3, female buffaloes (and) cows give milk

g

Exceptionally also the singular is used instead of the plural, as

i

appears from § 250; thus there occurs in the modern dialect e. g. Zo@oricy

3D, S9ONBRNeTY BELPR [0 Bes edewy, boys must listen to the words

{

(t

told (them) by their mothers, fathers (and) teachers®

1) It may be stated here that occasionally Vo (¥w) is omitted, see end of § 284; § 355

III, 2; § 3855, IV, 5; § 857, 2, d, and compare also the following verse:—

SPINW BTIPE, IF 030

TP T OS5, TIFPITRIFIQV T TN, |

THOWL BB IR IYBRC

WIFOV W R1F, RO, 3530635909 ? || will a night without the moon, a

play without one’'s own wife, a flower without sweet nectar, a meal without curds (and) a

congregation without intelligent persons be pleasant

Sarasvatimanihara? —The moder

1

—

401

Remarks.

a) If in the modern dialect two or more nouns occur one after the

other without enn in the singular or promiscuously in both numbers,

their plural is indicated by a demonstrative pronoun in the plural added

to them with the proper inflection, e.g. ©»0%® mowo @) e msg@d@,

dressed cotton (and) milk (are) of a white colour; o3, wwdh SWee

DD, AIYNER T ¥y 33,8, oxen, cows, male buffaloes (and) female

0

buffaloes are called cattle.

FOODI VST odonSe 3:53&:3 3 &)o%do 3

QFT 2IBR T @58@336;3& 969 ST WOR AT, the Pandavas overcame

the Kaurava, his gurus, (his) younger brothers, (his) friends (and) them

who desired the welfare of those friends.

Similarly the medizeval dialect

.j

has e.g. T3 ﬁedzﬁﬁ%d% & FoRto TRBRF JpesesERoe (see § 287

under 2).

0

b) 1If (especially in the ancient and medizval dialect) two or more

nouns are enumerated without enyo or enp as mere terms, and SHRZoE,

<having become the first’, cand so forth’, cetc.’, is placed at the end, a

:

demonstrative pronoun in the plural (always neuter also when masculine

or feminine terms are concerned) follows the nouns and another one in

i;

the plural is suffixed to SwRwez (the first pronoun being sometimes

omitted), e.g. 33 30F3 TERY e VIR BT (FW ) SABVIRD), Siva,

Saikara, Rama, Bhima, king, etc.; 2088 €erSs $erdsd 2g) 303

)

Srlabhe) 5aﬁa§5m‘a§3%62®oﬁ§5, khaliléné, ¢haliléné, ghaliléné, etc. (are)

%

imitative sounds with hard breathing; enz@or RS RN RRETIS BREM

SRBTRIT TS 'a%% @% Bne9, food prepared of urdu, kadalg, togari,

goduve, hésaru, etc.; $BF Ty DPITY 5@53@3@63;3%)00 ﬂ&%aﬂsg DRI,

1D

dialect has e. g. 2030300028 3¥oNBWSIRe TJusy), he who does not know justice (and) injustice

"W

(is) a beast. oa?.t-s;seﬂd@m ?ﬁ?ﬂfﬁ@?ﬂ nazgs&@o:bez &5&5& BT T30, 3, God protects thee in

&)

(thy) waking, dreaming (and) soundly sleeping.

The following additional verses may be quoted from the Sabdamanidarpana:—

SeBIWo F2OZ 00

))

2ed WBLZ, I wFESrTOZwo S0P |

Bpemodg® g [oTt wae

SIFBBTo ITIFo PYBRLRITTYO Il

TIRONT BIRNFo ROTMIVTY

QDR s:sjmmx@&ma%od:a 3 |

aiﬁmﬁsia TLOFRRTY R

IZNWo AT I T2 OPoNBo3n%s ll. See also the half verse

) q

in § 272, 2 (dTTY WOTUS ete.) and the verse in § 364 (TIFIFT 0D

0, ete.).

%

)\

51

40

DS T SRTSIRTo PR

milk of cows, curds, etc. are called, gavya.

592 FoARRY, leaves, fruits, etc. mixed with curdled milk.

In the modern dialect =0om9,® is more generally used instead of

SRBwd in such a case, in the following manner:—orod &3, % Bend

BOT,BING; B, 23% 39539 T SNT,BIYNB; mmﬁ’qg 23 *‘é\ ¥

)

BR ET23 TRWF zéa;) ﬁ?}\% domgd@ﬁ#ﬁ& BeST asaéé?\)csﬁo;

Regmo0 B59309ema8 Snwp, BT BeRd BT RRFY B0 BRFYT

SEXIoN @%ﬁodoﬁ&#& ST, B30,

If a noun follows 3RBeeT or =BT, B, the way is as follows : —2:3

nan 0590 SRR asa%ﬁ%?o; e 93%8_ RReE BT, B TN,

Occasionally the pronoun suffixed to R[eTwerd (or [Fy,r) may

stand in the singular, e. g. ©2:2R3RTS WI[eT ST, BRV.

g

Sometimes only a single noun precedes Z00T9,3, €. g- 2R RS0

23205 BNRCIT J90X sjooa"_@gzégs\zi \%aiggégzﬁ, a kind of leopard eats decayed

t

flesh (and) other things. ReSIT PYI,F SNTLBINERY, FBY TR T.

b

III

The plural of pronouns stands for the singular.

I,

Where two words are connected by the conjunction eno, ¢and’, and

(i

I

both are demonstrative pronouns, if they are referred to and are to be

expressed by one demonstrative pronoun, the second one has to stand

(Q

in the plural, preponderating as to form and gender, e. g. ©3R035° &3

R0 become 2R, BIRo0 NWIR0 MSTF, YBWWRSE SHBRWo BRNT?, BT

o;oo;ﬁsg ©$3m00 VN0, U300 BRI)o ¥, VRIYDS® PTO300 BITh.

i

2,

When two words are connected by the conjunction envo, and one

W

is a noun and the other a demonstrative pronoun, if they are referred

to and are to be expressed by one word, the plural of the pronoun has

st

to occur, preponderating as to gender, e. g. FoBoB0300 ©3Zvo become

@305, WR0 TBIGOSN0 BT, D3RR BT BTTE, TpYSS® NBe

Y

S

i

3,

When two words are connected by the conjunction eno, and are

personal or reflexive pronouns, if they are referred to and are to be

T

expressed by one word, the second pronoun has to be in the plural, e. g.

fo

3900 [0 become JETHF, VERIDS® Yoo WIS,

Where two words are connected by the conjunction wvo, and the first

one is a noun and the second one a personal or reflexive pronoun, if

they are referred to and are to be expressed by one word, the pronoun

—

—

403

has to be in the plural, e. g

P03 B0y ©R0o become 333

03022 B3

R0 QRO VR, D/ N RV0 FIRV0 ST

355

Peculiarities regarding the use of the singular and plural of verbs

in a sentence are the following:—

I

On the use of the singular or plural of verbs in connection with

nouns

1, If @dexdo, “God’, the honorific plural of w3ess (see § 354,11, 1), is

used by people of the present day (¢f. § 2568 where instances of prayer

are given), they put the verb in the singular, e.g. ﬂeabzﬂﬁ (there) is

God; Bes30 AV Y0ERY, BRI, 8, God causes it to rain; ©es3

SReFTTY DY AT, God created the world; Qe300 JBR Boaee =™

Wy God may make thee happy; De=cy BeBS, God (is) great

TOY BTT HFHTorY OTRY, TIPABTI de33e, DO BR,ND SER Se

N

|

SA; [RERY,

zﬁeasdo DT 553 NI, @aa RIBFRY, DT ao%?o,oaiao

even God has made the terr estmal globe on whlch we are; all thmgs have

become even through Him;

look, how wise, how powerful how good God

(is)! Regarding the use of the singular of a demonstrative pronoun

referring to Z¢s30y, observe also the following instance

DeSONR @023

I

TREY) OITOTONVR 2P e DEANT [RBET ST ITIN BHI03 SRBITE

(see § 341 under ¢to fear)

|

¢

Exceptionally, however, a person says 3¢=30w9 3

=

If Bes300 is used instead of B33, as is occasionally done in vulgar

speech, the verb is also put in the singular, e. g. @3S 530039 O 3e3T

16

w33, 3, an evil spirit enters his body

Al

2,

If a person is addressed in the vocative singular, the verb may

18

stand in the plural, e. g. BemeRod=oo (0. I+ DTRITT0) FeEB, T3

16

O king, did you (or do you) not ask the kingly Asura? e£5°00:5° QeR0Ts°

J0

IRNTS WEILLRBBT B, wep (0. I. o), O elder brother, do you

not know that you and we ran together‘?

16

Such is especially the case in disgustful conduct, ¢.e. in order to

he

ridicule a person for such conduct, when the personal pronouns relating

to him also stand in the plural, e. g

WRSIDTE

30R! ISR

st

SRBAT’; LRTITUST BY; TLISNTEeo Q |

S[N,BBRFNR?

BOS DO

if

un

BBcreth? BoRG d=un=e &odaeIvecdye? || O king,

bl

—

404

—

you have become poor; you walk on foor; nobody is with you; why (are)

small thorny twigs in your pouch? what (is) the place of the temple

where you repose? Could have befallen even you who do not give (alms),

this indigency ?

[It seems as if the small grammar called Nudigattu, wants to express a similar

thing, when it says that if an act of the subject is improper (holla), the verb

may stand in the third person plural instead of the second person

Its instances

are the following— 2 @OROE 30¢3 TP S 33omOTT, after you have become

king, should they (¢. e. you) roam about ad libitum? 37, AR JTPINITB

O king, should they (¢. e. shouldst) thou become bewildered? ¢ %ot} $RBIZIB

do they (¢. e. doest) thou make thus?]

3,

If a noun of race, species or kmd, . e. a jati noun (see § 354,

I, 3) as subject is in the singular, it conveys the meaning of the plural,

whenever it is connected with a verb in the plural, e. g. &8 8R03TIY

(= BI0F° SRoTTR)) the elephants pushed; k08030832053, the horses

ascended; zmawo%®

DB, the foot-soldiers attacked; 290, wPETY),

the oxen went; 30es 38e03.:, the fingers (are) big; Fu& XRTHP ¥*, the

; 9% W ); AL L=M

words (are) imprecating; T zozéd@, %‘e)o WOLNT,

RS euitate) 0¥ IBN 3@6@(’58

Q ﬁ)v) 3,33; _also When preceded

by e or & (§ 264), e.g. 0333 ogjaecﬁo@, those deer went;

503283

W30 ), these antelopes came

It is not uncommon in the modern dialect to use the singular of some

jati nouns which seem to allow no plural meaning in the respective sentences,

with the verb in the plural, e. g. Dedo ¥uTY,39, ¥33, the water is boiling

BTPY, SREATT 2500000 QeTy WIS, if (one) sees that, water comes

BB0RY BReRITN 1735 03

to the mouth (¢.e. one’s mouth waters);

w83 53, when (I) see them, eye-water comes (z.e. I shed tears);

‘@QU&

ROo30w3 3. the water runs

3oNT DPTISRBNT ETO WIBY 3D AT,

o

the water in a young cocoanut is very sweet;—ed, 3ot c35ars]), rice

became dear;

>

ra@ 9%, €953, g, Ssory, here is rice, cook (it);—FaL30

%

WwBE 308 035@65?@, corn became very dear; ——mz%r‘% TP BR3P ATE S,

buttermllk i1s very sour;

'Soz;%‘% w93, buttermilk was spilt; =& 3 w8

353, fever comes;

RE, u0 w@d@ yesterday fever had eome

220

rain falls from

DS, ),

fever ceased;— es ‘SJaecéﬁ%?ﬁ SoeSB 2eLIE, 3,

those clouds;— 23u33on %0 e%@éﬁd@z% Too° eunosase, if (he) cut devo-

tees with (his) nails, will milk come forth? (this sentence is from the

medieval dialect)

e

405

s

On the other hand we find e. g. Qecs 39308y, the water became

clear;

9oy derires, the waters (in tanks, etc.) became clear;

=63

y

030 QDo WSS PP, land (the crop of) which grows by means of the

water of rain; TR, QLT IW W, he brought water so that (his) eyes

filled (¢.e. his eyes became full of tears);

Qedy ®Dodwd W, the water

runs;

o9, ’a’o@oﬁoo;ﬁd-‘é’% edy BeRy, O mother, give (me) water to

é

drink; Soes8e e z:s'ejgj, $00233 edNR Fo* w® & oon, he left the

water of rain and held the joined palms of the hand to the water of dew

|

(¢.e. so as to catch the water of dew);-—zﬁou;ﬁ 392y, buttermilk was

spilt; — DX TST BRY TR, ms;\doﬁe, O excellent guru, at once

g

remove the fever of (my) body!—=ZeeBow d Ry, SPIWVT TR,

,

a‘young crop without rain (is like) a motherless child;— & f\zé%% BWRT

)

T TE ®eRT wi¥NF UYF, oo wgd, if (one) makes incisions

S

with a knife into that tree, white milk will come forth.

Jy

4,

If however a jati noun as subject stands in the singular and is

0

connected with a verb in the singular, it always conveys the meaning of

)

the singular, e.g. IBRBoBY ToX, a (or the) swan walked;

FOOTOT

d

[wen, a (or the) peacock cried; m&30T0 2oy, & (or the) black bee

r Q.‘Q

hummed;

B3Iy BSR0B, -the (crop of) kalavé grew;

need Teay,

the wheat was destroyed; ZABBESQSO S28r3y, the corn increased; 3de°

6

3203y, the finger (is) big;

08 BRTovs, the word (is) imprecating.

Ls,

9,

Also where the noun is no jati noun, it occasionally happens

0

that such a noun as subject is used in the singular in the sense of the

e

plural, in which case the verb is to be in the plural, e. g. 080 Ro%m

0)

o3 &80y, the minds became fickle.

d\

6,

An optional use of the plural of the verb may take place, if

oy

some neuter nouns in the singular are combined by the conjunction

06

nn (wvo), ‘and’, e g. DBONF R FOSOT cSwer o3 odner3

0

W

0T BPITp BRB00Z. T or B3RS0, S, by learning wisdom is obtain-

ed, by wisdom propriety, by propriety honour.

o

0

II

On the use of the plural of verbs in connection with pronouns.

0

1, If some pronouns as subjects of a sentence are joined together

)it

by the conjunction evo (enw), and the last one is &5 (Yo, DO, IOR),

0

=

I, the first person plural of the verb is used or the <I’ has the pre-emi-

he

nence (mukhyatva), e.g. 83=00 2ERITS SRV JPEIMONTFYDEFHSR LRI

i —

R N AR Fo b T

=

"

s

e

406

—

2990, he and thou and I were not connected with the slanderers of (lit

as regards) the king. o336 e8® SRR BREBI

If the pronouns are in reversed order, the same takes place, e. g. Qe

SR @3RT BRY0 ITRUINTE, Jpesy, thou and he and I shall

go to the town of Manikita

BIRIDF PRJV0 VR0 TRE S &SR0

2023 ), he and I and thou knew and told the manner of the affair

BP0 JEDTS W3ZRoo WRF0 Y, I and thou and he shall worship

2,

If two pronouns as subjects are joined by the conjunction eno

(vw), and the second one is Jem® (Reo, VNI, thou, the second person

plural of the verb is used or ¢thou’ has the pre-eminence, e. 9. &35v0

NERI0 TRABDT Q%gp 33033’6)565'@ %?Eoo PRV TRITA,,

he and thou

joined; when (it) happened (it Was) as if fire and wind Jomed for battle.

BTRR ACRD DR

If the two pronouns are in reversed order, the same takes place, e.g

D99 ORRRYS PFITS B3T0 FRAZLTE, to-morrow thou and he will

join

III

On the use of the plural of the verb, especially of its gender, when

combined with nouns of different gender

1,

If nouns of different gender are joined together by the conjunc-

tion eve (ew), that noun which comes last, is the chief one, and the

!

verb in the plural has to conform itself to it as to gender, e.g. Jex

0300535° ©BARBIZFE BWII[0 W of, the army and the queen and the king

came

HRRNDF WTRISS 90ARe W of, the elephant (or the ele-

WTRTITS 9TAI0 uéc‘

phants) and the king and the queen came;

1]

the king and the queen came

WTRIIDI® WTA0 ?Eéodoﬁwwmoo

wso ), the king and the queen and the complete army came

NQ&O@J@

TORRP TOL30R W T; COWRP T30 R ReRWoR W J

2,

If some neuter (here compound) nouns in the nominative singular

(without the conjunction eno, see § 354, II, 4, foot-note) precede the verb

1§

this has to stand in the neuter form of the plural at the end of them

all the nouns having to be supplied (adhyaharya, see § 3

b) for it, e. g

Ui

29330 AP :9’ O3IBRO %*’%EEO%%Q&)FS 8o [RTFTD

W

dﬁmoﬁbémdmamwdmawséo we)zsu@ w3 |

ll

1,09 RW0e3, L Zwrao 30@)33?553 %o a‘éz: )

3. IOBT0.0

)

|| the beatmg of the blue lotus-

of

camomcen

407

—

garland, the band of the gold-zone, the striking of the pleasant left foot

with the anklet’s sound, the excessive threatening of the points of the

moving-about creeper-like eyebrows (and) the tremulous red lower lip (of

the woman) gave pleasure to the king

IV. On the use of the singular and plural of Samskrita adjectives and

their agreement with nouns

1

9

If a Samskrita adjective is preceded by a neuter noun in the

plural (see § 103 about Kannada gender), it may stand in the singular

e. 9. J0Be 533’05393?5 RBoFony® ARV S5 wgyZo, the great riches of the

great Indra these all (are) impermanent

2,

If a Samkrita noun in the singular is followed by an adjective in

the plural, it gets a plural meaning, e.g. 93 03F=5° B3y, Jony*, riches

(are) impermanent

3,

If a Samskrita adjective precedes a neuter noun in the plural, it

may stand in the plural, e.g. RYFa woOBAZPony® Nzonly®, when the

cloud-resembling elephants roared. See an instance in § 313, 4 (9595&0

T3° osﬁ)waoa ?@F:’) ete.).

4, Regarding Samskrita adjectives and their use in general (and

regarding so-called Kannada adjectives and their use) see §§ 273

{4

274. 275

5,

If Samskrita adjectives (viséshanapadas, appositional nouns, with-

out the conjunction evo, see § 354, II, 4, foot-note) in the nominative

precede their ruling noun (karakapada, ¢f. § 354, I, 3, a), they receive

in construing (anvayisuvalli, ¢f. 357, 3), the case of that noun, e. g

i

)0

DeTR® MGeTo 0¥ NI

wn Jo 8030799 o302 Zp8,T 3930 |

r\‘“c‘ IR TE (S@wé’oor’\

)L

|j of which the construction (anvaya)

"’:ﬁdoﬁoﬁ

D,

is: — QedonR evmadon ﬁ;:)so Boft 833059OR T2 38,0 3ezon &

I,

80 SEINTY, to erpa,tunéa- to the hero, to the liberal one, to the pure

g

one, to the profound one, to him who possesses political wisdom, to him

who is the lord of them who carry weapons who will not make obeisance?

Ron3x édo Bo0oT9%0 Fearor, of which the construction is: —Noﬁé“é Jond

vodocozzoﬁ Ieoron, to Karna, to the quick one in friendship, to the kmg

of the Kurus

b

e

P

408

356. On the order of words in sentences

I

From the simple sentences quoted in §§ 345. 346. 347. 348

349. 350

it appears that the nominative (subject)

the accusative

(object), the instrumental, the dative, the ablative and the locative precede

the verb or that the verb stands at the end

In § 350, 8 there is a

sentence in which the order is

locative, subject, verb; and in § 350, 9

one in which the order is: locative, the relative past participle connected

with it, accusative, verb. § 851 shows that the genitive precedes the noun

with which it is connected. § 352, 4, @ adduces two instances in which

the order is: (instrumental or) ablative, subject, verb, and two in which

the order 1is

(instrumental or) ablative, verb, and exceptionally the

subject at the end

Sentences in which the order is: subject, object, verb, are e.g. modnc*

enwpTo ZodW0

D3, TIVRY, 0353

The vocative begins a sentence, or stands at its end, e.g. T3, Te¢%*!

{

BT, IR0 & TRIBE 3308 TR TRE Oe?

DD IIIW,, Nk eRE!

Fog

N> ﬁg)oyae.)' BRENY, BoNe!l— AR, WTHTT) TR, To3e?

II

The following instances, quoted from the prose of the modern dialect

will serve to show the order of words, when there are more component parts

in sentences than subject, object and verb; it must however not be expected

to find uniformity, as every author is apt to use more or less slight

variations according to circumstances

/

L

Regarding the accusative:

QF [y GIP3R BE,T WINRBISOY . —

J

=2 ac

o3 03;306 DT TR 3&’)37? TOVRY,

T\

3@00@ 3,. — & VAN wﬁo obe;?o

Tﬂ)bﬁmo DTBRIR0ST ssa:m ve%ﬁozﬁae)

i

2,

Regmdmg the instrumental: — To0 NPR TR [RI,BBRY, VRERY

3.053; TCPR 95y wRNBNYRS, HRRE.e8. — DANDR JR,®0, Bl

303008 T ¥o

3, Regarding the dative:—Qesy ¥, 5@0&3’371%‘-?7“% AE9Rs SR —

57 SO JReBTSOIZ [N @a” %Jaemsa%? _fsesjdo DY ONW DTBTR

%’e'aoﬁ%im %’Jaé.?aaa" TR TP Suooa,aa?e 83, z%ﬁ;Sﬁ SRR BDREI

é?)e(oo __ef% Nﬁr’» aézo

&rio BoNe BROA %@doé Q;Sm

BN T B, —

DIBNF 33.¢ fac%oésﬁ VYRR I[RR, 3D, 3,NTRR, RoTZ, A %Ja%ﬁo

380

mébm&oﬁo £9,. LAy s mmdcﬁﬁ SRLOMCR AN _§§ %‘ae‘)ﬁ

vozéoﬁ@ee)o 3a%ao —_osonadd.@ SROT, BRI

U s — SR . SNl - R e B

R

409

E—

4, Regarding the ablative (in the form of the instrumental): — 2

-

O 9T z@&o‘oa o Su AY,

T

SISECIMECE R TOVY BB %@&

. !Sowuu (oM ..qu? u&m&ouoa TRT ﬁaoug — & %U.a@ 8&9 Uu Uu

B3, la& as %&c BRI BB BTHD BRCTI.

5, Regarding the locative: — 3Ry D3RO R ©3yTV XY

0300 B TVE, 3. — W, RWHYTIOR U@@?@a%&ﬁw DY DT, TS TR

DY 02,07 BN ToIRN BB BRIN R azﬁwn@aou& AR

09,78% wFT FA, 0300009 — 2 TE BondRPR IR 8RS, WIROT

W 030

SEIToORD R O TORENRBON TR RREJTIRIOA, 03

@z&aou&o SR T30 3003 DL TA TR, $IFTIIDZ DY, WS

BRIG . — & FINDR 3008 TP BRI BREO YA WI030Z,eR. —

?uo

&m@ Ou,m.u ocoo@w

& &&o &%@8 WRWNR ﬁauolvs n39ns

a(oa%.u Sup 2339, ﬁuo Il,@w%bm %G@ 33,N% BT I

e me _Lu(

39 Wl T® olvm mmw,d Tl

6, Regarding site (expressed by adverbs): — 22, ToENWS B3,T BV

]

BEPRD BB ). — IR, BoNB 2L, B WIINRI. — B FOBON 3¢S 307

BRRBY,.— BT BREIN F3, 3ReIF, 2!

S

T,

Regarding time: — 5 206°

2SR FNT TN JReA 3R BeT

it

WR) OF W) VBN, 2Py IDR FRE BRI, — BRI

3 037 dween

@dwuugm CERa %,@& Bo.— DRV AR S29, A Dvw WTO3, 239!

Lo wuﬁo &o&a 20027 BoI) DIINY IdN T 3LE30BNTOY . —

Y

%bovaozo @&98&@1 33 TOR DBRIALELY 39330, — ARRNT S/T (¥

TOR) IPABTP 08T, — qg @owo 3 30083 méau@m Q3TOY.

(Cf. DT

A

above sub No. 1; @wa 8. Zo 2° v%& 5993 s. No. 3; 8809&15& s. No. 4;

)

&0, Quo Ba s No.s; &vlb shoSonew further on s. No. 8; a@& s. No.9;

Wy & 8. No. 11)

8

?

Regarding reason and purpose:— &G 30R0T BR3,0032. — [

b

A% oleTenow 38 9%T BRTERITBER,

a STIMOBIZ, 3. — uao

6

38 SwozaNode 030, FBT Sean %mm@om@alo&@ug&mbuo q%&

3Re WG WCPT BT &ml DRBTOY, Y FDTD DRRBe &3 ao@mwauuw

Y

i

LRGN &mqo — (BEeITRY) SEN &aow &3 S9IINPNT, &&u SERE

Q&&@%

SECERTSN u@&c oo ] N 30653030 2w dR.

52

s

P —

410

9, Regarding condition: — S3WR30 FRE3 &Mmo WHIBTR. — JF, L0033

SAOH] m@ouww L&M _F, uo.«#ﬁ R, IPE ToWNRD. — A, TRB? 599

Swm uu&&o T

5 BIEES Bt

7@%&&.10@9& %m&ovﬂ Fox 30883

5

%b.cw nwbmw et w&&%m mww TONE WRIT.

10, Regarding the verbs ¢, eoT¢ (28, BRY) see § 332.

I

Regarding past participles (or gerunds, § 154 seq.): —Reom 3030 o

Qo3 TR WRR) $90), ¢ PRBEN EFOT, WP, — & Tows TR’

%,@Bm% 95380 %bwwm @ovus %&awwmwuo.immog A as nwwow@av."w

&mw %wo.&uwmwﬂﬁ WBTY, mSNV% 33, SED) SR WY Doy THB SN

B30 WePR WRAZ, BHWWR. —FOR Wiy, W JFIY 2, ©B

TRy, JEA SRS FRBG,T Yo, — BB Tea), YT VFR. — & TRTON

u%b%o%% & WTWIY NI BTN %&mw&uo.lm%oao S3930 Tew, 30

BBy, NFIT TR, PETIRY, VT, BX IPR BIY, 39A ! v —

SIFTIRY 0B, PO, T wI) wowwaouwf ¥9 3067, 3Re698.3

2B, ¥ZI.— & S0e3R & aMWmu VTPRFRIYFEWRIRY DPeR, IR

WRY WBEINITI.

(Regarding the present participle see e.g. the ancient sentence in § 339, 5:

WRR RN FBRQ etc.)

12, Regarding questions: — &), To0308 08 90? on) [eS o

A

S\ rtwrola m,@mw BeBo? — BRINT &am PNOR BRENIZ, 37 — y@mwa%w it

[

TORNS 07 — & wwuaauw e[ o%ww uw@ ARERS o&@ao&@% — TR

FoR? — & MR 0359ILIT? — BN, wm 0359F? — Rore, & BRI, 05T

WBY youaquvmwwlo&@mau &ﬂ&&

— s

Qe

TERRFNYY Boosys TIREN

FReWNS o&au@ﬂwl R, SHFRY. &&mw RBOBINTY @&wluawwa wea baw

II

Bo? — & BRHOTTY DR SPRZL? — 39 WS T2 D! — FoY RPENRY

h

el ou@w%lg RO BR3INS AN &aw YR} @ogm%.!v%ﬂ 03593

T907 —2eR0 TSR JRER B3, &uw SonFy 0% &!ugmwao o35

I

&@,m%!m@ao& e BT, 8&@ 59 IPBRISRER? — WorTITT

R, 233, 9NN

3

%&%. TRZ D! —JF, DR L) (how old art thou)? Regarding

questions see also §§ 265. 271. 283.

Iy

13, Regarding exclamations: — & QBORIN AW, DR m@&aombw_l

al

@amw umw b&w &&yw_luomwu SoeS ©

RR,0

&/

w0 ¥ry B8l — 37

i

%3 o DT BBRe Tona! — 3R, SReRY, BT &aw RBBRE FXB BRENY

i\

P —

411

e —

33! — oo, & $IP o)c\) B 33—

UTY T, Ao TR D38

éJaﬁe)o

T BREIVRIZ T

@v%ﬁ é@é’d SHBRH aosﬁ e3R8, 3!

III

As the works of the ancient dialect are principally in verse, it is

Késava

obvious that the order of words in them often varies considerably

the grammarian, also wrote his Sabdamanidarpana in verse, and says in

it that, as the words in the verses of his grammar may be in irregular

order on account of the requirements of alliteration (préasa), poetical

measure (Chandas) and construction (anvaya), he has added an expla-

nation in prose (vritti) to each verse, to which explanations we must

refer our readers regarding his order of words in prose

Here follow some quotations made by KéSava from ancient poems

which we give in order to show something of the license taken by their

authors as to the order of words: —

1

The subject is placed after the verb, e.g. 9B Bone*

Ry

RERIJGeny® Rwmonys, when the horses neighed (and) when the cloud-

resembling elephants roared

éf:m.@ésd %aﬂo&?t&n ©f BBFo PeSe,

)

Bhima was like blacksmith” who plied the bellows.

zsa@wdo@ VBB WRRY

3a3e33n%¢, the sylvan deities continually menaced and checked. &1

Lo & DBoDF3wY*, that king was famous on the earth

Nzgdo =0 223@

RR3 03000, Brahmi obtained the three worlds

F0030.830 3039 3ewo

235 30 mooon, the sunshine increased, the forest-conflagration died away

WEPTH TR 3TRRT I VY TF T, this woman knew the whole

2

manner of the sons of Pandu.

50&)&5 DERINV0 71;3 S0, the wind blew

i}

gently

eFer Ry Yo 33 BuoNsoro %e@ 3, darkness had quite swallowed

0

up the sun and moon

S PYOBRS BTF® BIPVDET0 DPYVE,FaTo0

;

in that town (there) is the light of the solar race, one of great valour

VB T0, 830, 2390300 W T° z‘peoae

Bhishma was astonished and cried <ah’.

J

TOARD),. SIRRDRBRY’ SPRF 0

a dazzling red colour spread about

in the east

SBBBY o, the swan walked

iy

9

2, The accusative is placed after the verh, €. g. F3ToB300 DN Bedno

I3

65805080300 Vishnu asked the king of the Kurus for the half o (his)

land. 3zag5° mz; o Qgﬁgs S5 vy G090, he shot arrows at the enemy’s

army (or r1ver) that was no river.

B3 BEPIPRTS GUATS WBYTIE

8 &30, though we know (it), we cannot tell (you) the condition of the

ruler

WIS Rew o $0e83 FeoZwense, Arjuna quite alone overcame

W

D2

41

the force of the Kauravas. 02200030 ;isaeac‘ﬁzggs‘ 80T 03Vo, till

(he, or when he) suffered distress, he shot arrows at the enemy’s army.

3,

The dative is placed after the accusative and also after the verb, e. g.

ReI30300° 3&257 $0SS® ©TRoNI, o, the gods were pleased and gave a

boon to the king.

NBC3e FOWNo RV T [RTWT %Jae&?\;iss 33

239% o, the mountains and the elephants do not stand the point of the

thuﬁderbolt’s head and his sword.

Observe also the following verse (¢f. § 241): —

WY 0% ST dﬁ&ﬁ, R0

BAZE 3T BTN, FTIDRDTIF |

WF,oNC 330 wIEN,

BRF e PRIFEN T 3, weTTAd! ||

4

o

The genitive is placed after the noun it is connected with, e. g.

TIOINTBT JQDARIT 3BT 230%° %@Sa-@, the sword of the arm of

Tailapa caused itself to be called Rudra, the fire that is to destroy the

world.

HR3030 0BT 8P oS00 TRV LS00 TORIRY

nwo FoSFToomome, the elephant of Bhuvanaikarima ran upon the

elephants, and upon the warriors, and upon the horses.

5, Regarding time observe e.g. FoTH, TR DT, TRELF TRNTITIN.

3

357. As the words in the metrical compositions of the ancient

dialect are combined strictly to the rules of euphonic junction (§ 213 seq.)

and therefore are separated with some difficulty by a common reader,

it has been thought necessary by commentators when commenting on

verse, first to offer a padaééhéda or resolving a veese into its elementary

parts, as has been done e. g. by the commentator on the Sabdamani-

darpana.

Thereupon an anvaya (¢f. No. 3 of this §) or arrangement of

the words in their prose-order, without regard to euphonic junction, is

adduced by them, and then they give the tiku or explanation.

The

grammarian KéSava, as told in § 356, III, wrote an explanation in prose

l

on his slitras in verse himself.

In reading poetry the following remarks of Késava are to be noticed:—

|

1,

It is required to use adhyédropa, ¢. e. attributing or assigning, with

néya, ¢. e. logical inference, e. g. in the half-verse

80T, 8¢ 8N [P

G

BRTNE BRTOY weRmanRo | the sky became reddish

S]

P

413

]

and became equal in appearance to (the colour of a ripe fruit of)

the FEugenia jambolana, one has to assign as the cause the redness of

evening and not red dust, though also red dust might (under circum-

stances) be assigned as the cause.

If adhyardopa becomes wanting in

precision (asamartha), being referable to two or more things, there is

no (definite) néya (possible, as perhaps in the half-verse quoted above).

Adhyaropa is also needed regarding the six karakas and the genitive

(§ 344) in verses like the following one:—

FRNO, RO Poev ?

WwiB0n 3% S TIT? ? cﬁod%?\raﬁcsmﬁcac‘? |

BRRBBPFR Fono WIIFo.

RANSRIRY. BNy SeBYBEP BeT oo! ||

wherein ¢80, the nominative, is to be attributed to ¥@B:RY; &3 o, the

f

accusative, to Beax033 3ioac’; Y¥IQo, the instrumental, to 2EWBI0NS%0S

ooo’; ©3on, the dative, to csod%?@%csmaﬂoacé; »338 9o, the ablative,

)

to 3RRBBNFB Fofo WHIFo; 3R, the genitive, to IBRTIRY; HIZNTF,

0

the locative, to 2030530 Soe33)c0: (He is) a great hero. What warriors

do envy (him)? Who (are all) they that (through him became) intimate

friends to (our) king? Who will come to war (against him)? If (they)

attack (him), defeat will come (from him).

This (is) the grandeur (of

i

him).

Indeed victory will appear (in him).

Know Boppala!

)

2, It is required to use adhyahara, 7. e. supplying, which refers

)1,

@) to the kiraka, in this case the kartri or subject (§§ 344, 1; 345),

)l

or also to a predicate of the subject, . 9. DB? JIIFRHT ﬁe){)\ﬁ&-), re)0)

[y

Il

B8R Bo F)dwg Foo?, in which case %327 o is to be supplied (adyaharya)

as subject: Why? will it (the kritiba:ndharh, ever) be accomplished,

of

18

though (you) have promised the composition of the poem ? — FEOF S0

D9, S0 &3m0, in which case maR 1s to be supplied: Karna (is) a

\he

liberal person and this man too (is a dant).

080

b) to the kriyé or verb, e.g. PTIRPEZ,Ho0 ;Soa’ax_sﬁ@%ibo?, 1n

which case 9o is to be supplied: (Is) Purushdttama a mere man? (no,

~:29

= Cie

ith

he is not, allan).— g 300, o MY aDEE

®BO Boriow FR! in which

case &t (BCITF) is to be gupplied: (Is) Dhritarashtra able, when he

speaks? (is) Hari able, when he hastens? (no, they are not able).

ish

(See @GN also in §§ 355, III, 2; 358.)

e

414

P

°)

to the adverb o of doubt, e. g. eEB3B00330? BB=30? 33N

339, B¥exs?, in which case the final o of en@s33s which has disappeared

in the initial & of 02330 on account of euphonic junction, is to be sup-

plied: Shall we not hesitate? shall we not fear? shall we not be

frightened? shall we not bow to the injunction, O king?

d) to the conjunction evo, €. g. oo AD 3903000 33; TE 0 R3O

RABTo ﬁooﬁéigﬁé\éwo, in which case evo is to be supplied for 2o, gﬁa

and $8: King Simhaséna causes himself to be called (our) life and

wealth and mother and father and eye and refuge.

(See § 354, 11,4,

foot-note.)

e) to vakyadipaka, ¢. e. the clearing up (of the meaning) of a

sentence, e.g. ¥3R035° B0 wio, in which case, in order to show

that each one (pratyéka) came, &)E%o is to be supplied; 3x00 m%#

¥TS0 &)R’éo, that person came and that person came.

3,

It is needed to use proper construction of words (vakyanvaya, cf.

§

the beginning of the present § and § 355, IV, 5) regarding €930, e953%¢

>

953, 3RV, e3TYS, e3Jso, that is to say regarding their use in so-

called relative sentences.

2

¥To, W39, ©¥K3o (and their plurals) are anvayasvatantras, . e.

independent of another word, e. g. TpJd %g);ﬁﬁ T09¢R0, he who has gold,

(is) well born, in which case one cannot say esSo 3319%‘3353 F0©eR0;

3

ﬁ@zom%é)aﬂeé‘ “m°, she who possesses beauty (is) a .woman, and not e&z¢s

1§

ARWNE =8 IS¢ d@@o:ogs,)#%c% Sexo, that which has customary usage,

(is) fit, and not &Yz PP HI SeRv.

¢

9T0, 83%°, Yo (and their plurals) are anvayaparatantras, . e.

dependent on another word, e.g. ©=Ix¢ ©wHT ooy T ﬂesqso, who

0

(is) very virtuous, even he (is) to be served; eszes T3S, O 553323,

who (is) a woman faithful to her husband, she (is) to be honoured; &g

39 z@mgmdm 5337 e03d0, what (is) beautiful, it (is) worthy to be seen.

:

See §§ 267. 316, 1. 330.

N

Also zo%¢ (and its plural) Késava classes with the anvayapara-

€4

tantras, as it is to be followed by a demonstrative pronoun which shows

its gender, e. g. 39R° @ZJo ®@WRITo, he (is) a clever man; sax® ©3%*

@308, she (is) a clever woman; 3og° @ny LO®, that (is) a large thing.

N

About S0 (393°, S8y, 33) §§ 256. 259.

\

415

358.

In §357, 2 the grammarian KéSava’s rules about adhyihira

or supplying have been given; it remains to be shown how it is to be

used also elsewhere, that is to say where pronouns (or their respective

nouns or ‘one’) are to be supplied (see e.g. § 254, 2, a—d; § 315, 2, k. I).

This can be best shown by citing some instances, putting into

parenthesis the words to be supplied, wviz.

9

¥

2e8 DPe,ree, the terminations which (I) have mentioned.

2

;’% Beo, the goddess whom (people) call speech. HRHROZ w3 BEPX

So8nEy mz?’g 35y, the threads which (people) have sewed, will be torn

and the leaves become loose (see § 315, k. 1). %Gﬁioﬁagﬁg n3rego, kalte

(people) having said (is) a donkey (4. e. kalté means a donkey, see § 332).

SBZpB Bro I93L°0cF, if (they) speak, all of them do not know

(proper) words (see § 314). 333 B doo%&@‘a%ad@% PPRRTT

DAY 803y AT, a cloth which (they) have woven after separating what

silk-worms have made in the form of buds. es8c3 8065033&3@@65 SRR

B3y Moe3?, a pit which (people) have made for catching elephants.

CASORSA :33&3&;3:2) TRB ¥938 B,Be3 WM, if (one) measures (2 span)

with both the thumb and forefinger, it is called a pradésa.

BREN W05

még , & road which (people) are unable to go. T[pedy WP, a place (of

the body) to which (somebody) has applied a blow.

DRI BenooBB O3

BRETT

%)

Iy, what (is) the place of the temple where (you) rest?

WEY TOY, u;gé’ 28 weay if (it) goes, (it is) a stome, if (it) comes, (it

is) a ripe fruit (i.e. what goes in one’s giving, is a mere stone; what

7

comes for it, is a ripe fruit).

AT BoO HIN, TREMITN ROW

on, when (he) comes, (he is) like a tiger; when (he) goes, (he is) like a

mouse. QJF, FATO TP zo;gz‘ﬁ RRB T DBRR W QVIET, if (I)

10

come with thee to-morrow, my study will be interrupted for four days.

0

woR SWRT Fely, Beerad, if (thouw) behavest thus, thou wilt be ruined.

y

SPFT TRRT 23% 2003 R0, if (one) churns curds, butter is produced.

23692 WS, R %’J@sgé 38 Bwenog 3, if (I) buy sweetmeats, they will be

eaten.

28e BonRe, nIT FRAE RE3E SPRIRE WX oazgt‘f:)@% SACIC

3¢o, O sonm, if (thou) wantest to form friendship with people, (thou)

)

must do so with much caution.

eﬁgg@sm&s TRE 32,0300 ﬁzé%@sg)

=593 TOARDS

3¢5y, (we) must converse in love with (our) brothers.

USSR

NeRYy B 39308, 33, if (you) teach (them) words,' parrots will quickly

RN T

P ——

416

P —

learn (them). See e.g. also §§ 302, 7 (o327 8). 314 (the conditional).

323 (bﬁg&%z@, etc.). 326 (Qé’ﬁ%@, etc.). 332. 333 (g%& etc.).

3@03\®%36~%%C$o’ (he is) good to (his) mother. 7Ty éa’;{sdo sa,sﬁds'a

0T WOABo, the teacher caused (his) disciple to read the grammar.

B0 S& pZ333F w0, please come as far as (my) house.

039235359

S0 T T 3RY '@@%@%’ 23 &, the master stood up to wash (his)

hands and feet.

¥ BoRRY 3SWy [0S VR BRIy, %&mc% WBT, Y,

what does that woman carry on (her) head? 2ZoNR ST° éeé.‘@?ﬁ% , 2T

So 89%0, Madana perceived “this man (is) a suitable husband for (my)

younger sister”. 33 39030 60T MEIPRTY, a calf does not leave

the company of (its) mother. RIBIDRR, 3, the pupil (is) like (his)

spiritual teacher. %‘gga ) RReBOZ ¢3, we see with (our) eyes.

2R @C Sondne BIR Jw@ Bewendy, you ought to have given

(it, 4. e. the money) six months ago. & [3I, 3T 3TN #éﬁ&eo)o IR,

Fedoo, when that physician asked «“why will you not take (them, 7. e.

the medicines)?” The grammar called Nudigattu adduces also the follow-

ing instances: — ©sR Y03 [y, BRAEWy Ber, be (is) a good fellow, do

not beat (him). 2598 com0 ma%%;m%a", ®3y, THATINY TWRRE), the

Brahmana is an honest man, give (him_)‘ ten rupees. W:J;SQL T I[N

SR IALN :-3%%803& %o, insipid milk does not agree with me; put

(some) sugar (into it)! & IRBO RIFNG, %%ﬁofm &, this axe is

sharp; cut the wood (with it)!

359

In § 275 there are various instances of the modern dialect in

which the verb =%, to be, is the verb of a sentence, €. g. RIMF %KQ)& =Yoh)

3,33, elephants are black; 23970 We3weroy ©n, the penknife is beautiful;

&3 :"_\séeododo %8

%3009 8, those women are small;

3

DRAFY BIT I,

the flowers are green.' On the other hand we find there various instances

in which the verb =g is omitted, e. 9. W=ty BBWe Bo@ono, he (1s) a

nice boy;

w8 08 Be@, his house (is) large; ete

From such

instances it might appear as if the insertion and omission of the verb 2T

were arbitrary.

n

1§

But the above instances belong to the present modern dialect;

dl

the ancient and medieval dialect the verb @0¢ (o) is always understood

il

and never expressed, if it is a mere copula to connect a subject with its

predicate, e. 9. ©93FE &;%cﬁo, he (is) a good man. 3%* &%Cﬁv‘, she (is)

N

—

——

417

|

a good woman

BSYS Be3T 3PCW

she (is) the king’s maid-servant

|

Towf wWeRy, milk (is) white

©3o° WO B, they (are).able persons

%

¥y D03, they (the pearls, are) large

oo v, I (am) a servant

%% @0, he (is) a servant

Qoo FoSvo, thou (art) Kima

&So oD

(am) Gauri

03 oRPR Y IWEITxS® o3, B[oo, among jewels the ruby

(1s) precious

SRIIVRY YIRT® Y3 =ocf, among men males (are)

chiefs (see § 350, 2, a. b. ¢;

§ 354, I, 2;

§ 348, 5. 1;

§ 349, s;

§ 357, 3).

WINBRY* &Zo Fowy3o, this man as to generosity (is) a Mandhata.

FoRXNITFYs, 33 30t

3 the mother (is) one (¢.e. the same), the father

(is) different

g3¢r 3BoTono, whose horse (is) this?

NOTIT FoNY*

whose daughter (art) thou? Instances like these are the rule and quite

idiomatic

In sentences like the following Kannada people would also nowadays

scarcely use the verb wdo:— w380 035980

who (are) these persons?

BT 03990 30 3, whose wife (is) she?

03599 30T, which (is) your

1S

elder sister?

BEBY T, I9OWOTY, Vo Jpe, this (is) your mother

she not?

(CEeTe) bl 3;5&;5 Sd‘) they (are) brothers

In the following 1nstance of the present modern dialect also the past

tense of the verb =T, when a mere copula, is to be understood:—

—

b

SONFT [P PR RoR 9)5;5,

eszICE°

N

sjoaﬁ RoT) PIRNF ot zj@,

[y

the original language of the Aryas (wa,s) Samskuta from that, in course

of time, several languages came into existence

360

It is a different thing, if the verb ‘to be’ is not a mere copula,

1

but expresses ‘to exist’, ‘to be’, ‘to have’, when the verbs evg, acf (D))

3

and the forms es030

s, B8, @3, w3, are used (see §§ 196. 316

lg),eq

66

ATV céosf\) TR 0;

&

RERIBR, T '*“é& B worey,

we?ﬁoioasaﬁ, ;

b

AETBR cﬁm)o BEL B :

D DBV BF 2w§3, Ponodawme? || if thou art, (there)

is an empire; if thou art, (there) are the insignia of royalty and (there)

are boxes (with money); if thou art, (there) is the white umbrella

if

10

od

thou art (or be) not, will all these (things) exist?

G

TS eueny, (there) is money. Bo@BRYs wFay, (there) are horses

RIS wved e30n, (there) is fame to him (4. e. he has fame)

B30° WPT®

15)

53

]

418

USRS,

they are present.

WIBZ, darh rafaRot=d eﬁoushao&s;ﬂo Trgns’ S

to the north of that forest (there) is the mountain of AnJanaglrl

BRE

8 SRy BT wEY WO YVELY, (there) is a well near that house

”@OVJD wwRe 2d §J (there) was even one man in the boat.

B W&

M) uaé%* %J@ﬁ :3 (there) are many tigers in this jungle.

3038w &

(there) is God

8 RRIE Rond wHs T [e3803 0o, (there) were

many”® servants with that gentleman

% 29003RYR Qe B, (there)

is no water in the well

390003, 1330w, XF,8N8. IV, (there)

are no greater benefactors than a mother, (there) is nothing sweeter

than sugar

N oRRE DRFIP*

she is in the house

D5,380 AD 33

Rote 3 300 Be=.08 %900, as long as they possess riches, will not also

scoundrels be honourable persons?

In such instances the verb evw$, ete. are often also not expressed, e. g

TPOTRE® TSN

(there is) fragrance in flowers

B3R WH

(there

s) white colour in the flower.

ToSRY* S0R0To, (there is) sweetness in

milk.

RENAN Bwes 3ewo, (there is) splendour in the disk of the sun.

.-o@) 0309\> ézo B Dreawet (there are) eight chapters in the Sabda-

manldar pana

RTODRRY RReo, (be is) true to (his) guru.

R BRY

3313 =28, woOR

To.00mo0Tes, for

s3oce0, (he is) proficient in adoration

N

the cat (it is) play, for the mouse (it is) extreme distress

uonad%%;s

=5 R 5‘52,% 330, knowledge (is) superior to gold.

¥ WRY [ 9

m@ﬁdo (there were) many players there.

It will have been observed from the above sentences that the English

terms ‘there’, ‘there is’, ‘there are’, ‘there were’, etc, used to begin

sentences, cannot be expressed in Kannada, to which may be added e. g

SZoMB* YFMo DasearZaTo 5383 &30, (there) was born to him and to her

Vikhyatayasa

90X Bo TP wey 3y, (there) occurred an inroad

from the side of the king.

Notice also the following: a0 racs e or e, it is L.

Y] fazf) 053

or m9s3¢, it is we.

830, [0 mﬁ eﬁwgé es3, it is we, not they, who

say so

RoBIN BT ¥ or Vi, it is a girl

§

361

In §§ 154—170 the forms of the past verbal participle have

been given (¢f. B3, ©®wd in § 338, and the repetition of verbs in

§ 339)

It is used

e

419

pe—

J:

1,

in simple succession of actions, the actions having the same subject

|

e. 9. wRB BP0, he was delighted (and) gave

30w RPneY o, he was

l

pleased (and) praised. Ho& Bo83x0, he sang (and) danced

WeR BRMo

;

he begged (and) received

©E9A Feoo, he sought (and) found. Fped

§

308930, he saw (and) made obeisance

R R EINTo, he ate (and) went

to sleep

TORTINVEY o, he drank (and) spit

IR €20 . FBTY [Nl e

he bathed, ate, drank (and) turned back. SPoZB3:3Z[o0 TBA 3T o9

)

PYOA. e030To BRCP. ¢ [wRFo, he ruined the country of Malava (and)

)

I8

made the women of its (town of)

Dharapura (his) maid-servants

IPTLP TIPS’ pPT TP wpeBo 330, like a gold-coloured young

antelope the white (horse) rolled about, sprang (and) went.

[OIR) RhH

0

BPeN ey PYE,INATTY :%i?n €93 T30, 1 80 home, eat, take (my)

Nﬁo&ﬁ

J

books (and) come.

emam 55@@ wdaé 3.e8, 1 will eat (and) come.

RRFNT 0Ty VROR ToBY NOPIN e, BREN SF30R%N zuéjo

NPE SWeRNS =nod 3, the water in the sea is heated by the sunshine

becomes vapour, rises up, joins together in the air (and) becomes clouds

BHROY FRRBY [BNRRY, =SWRS, 8, they churn curds (and) make

buttermilk

NeBJBmoRVTo, he seizes the pole (and) plays

Sde

y

I

wpedo, he did not make (it and) went

%R0 T N0, he did not

run away, fought (and) overcame

2

(It will be seen that in translating the past participle the verb finite

in combination with ¢and’ has been used.)

)|

2,

in manner, the actions having the same subject, e. g. ToAZ SBTo

he walked stoopingly. &% 208 o, he came on foot

DARY T3 3o, he

1D

tied (it) firmly

Ton.&A wdBo, he wrote (it) in an abridged way

(NES

ol

234 23830, he wrote (it) commentatorially. 3903083 SR 2Ry, do

il

not speak without understanding

3,

in means, the actions having the same subject, e. g. 30z)e90, he

3

ate by wandering in quest of alms

2R DR 33, WRR, THY TR

ho

38, 2590%0, (one) may eat by begging, (but one) ought not to live by

stealing CRNYRY, RRBRY BT, he drove the cattle away by beating

4, in cause, the actions having the same subject, e. g. ©25°03:83 %J o,

Ve

because he did not know, he was ruined.

BTN WA BYR, the boy

10

was ruined, because he did not study. reg S FRD %J aaoﬁwo 30N

Fe $o, the husband was ruined, because he sat (lazily); the woman was

53%

1

—

420

P

ruined, because she rambled about.

SEBR RBRS°

BRCBR 91T

zon, as if (one) springs into the river, because he is afraid of the rain.

When a different subject from that of the last verb occurs, it is used

chiefly

1, in cause, e.g. IS0 %’saga B3082035° &30, grief originated, because

(he) saw the corpse. 3y oda¥o T RIDTS ST, joy originated, because

(he) saw the beloved woman. no%® ed a’;xja;@ 359@533 03y, because the

wind blew, (there) fell a ripe fruit from the tree.

D VRN WRDTIRIY,

because (his) money went, he became poor. 3 %z?;%r DRZEP BTRD

=g, %9, the king died, because a snake bit (him), and the poison rose (to

his head). nd $0TTB 0D0NT® A2 Fox® 3’2&) WA =33, as if (a man)

ascended the top of a high tree, fell down, because his hand slipped, and

died. Pod FpeRD T3, Bewe SRB By, because nobody took

care of the fruit, it was spoiled; because nobody cultivated the field, it

was ruined. Qo3 e%ﬁ%g%% 28Ry B30y, the lead-pencil wore, because

(people) wrote (with it). e300 WS¢ zm% R3,39, he died, because disease

attacked (him). o33 WO o3 Reany z9d eeezég% ‘v‘o"gz%@%}ﬁzs NBX BRJ)

TR 03y, the flower of a shrub which was put there in a pot, fell down,

because the end of his garment touched it.

2, in lapse of time, e.g. ©¥=3F0 BReN SIS B[R] BNy, it is five

:

days since he went. TR WRY Y Sonyaodn3y, it is a month since

the king came.

362. The forms of the present verbal participle are adduced in §§ 172.

173

It expresses

1, contemporaneous action, e.g. SRo300 Wi o, he came laughing

=@

oo0800 Ppedso, he went calling. B3 0 u%o, he came fighting

a303y,0 PpWRo, he beat chiding.

39,3, F&o, he cut chipping

Fate)

3, u%o, he came blessing. DuCorod Jpeso, he went shining. Frog

20e°BRy, he spoke laughing. %R03, BRLAITTDY ABD RapEAS he who

goes running may stumble (and) fall. I3 3838, x93, he prates

f

(whilst) laughing (and) eating.

TORIR THOBIY, Wl RIS, ‘g, Ted

03039,8, Rima dances singing, playing a musical instrument (and)

i

laughing. wwmp), 3007 ¥ FBOWT FREVI NWLNG, W, FNFHTI WI

s—

421

—

39,8, see, father! from that side (there) comes an old man putting down

(bis) stick on the ground (at every step to support himself).

2,

continuation (¢/. § 339, 6)

a)

in the present tense (see § 313, 1).

b) 1n the imperfect (see § 313, 2), e.g. v=08%Fo, he was shooting

(arrows).

MESDTF BHFo, he was eating.

R Yo THR [RER T

DR BT B8R, Ro38cF o, both of us looked about, did not see thee (and) were

in anxiety (as to thee) up to this moment.

SOBARZTREI w3908

SRBLo BN, SonoF 3,303 |

Xy O WS 0F,35° eudodd

3D03R3, 3 %S:Soéﬁﬁag\%@d?o pes3yo || Bhima seized the

end of the tails of the two furious elephants, (and) whilst he crushed

(them), was like a blacksmith who plied the bellows, the blood that came

forth from (their) mouth being the flame.

Reos 3030 3;& %ocﬁazﬁc>:$o§o¢L

RBITIZ, SBRRY, Ganapati walked seeking his horse.

c)

in the future (see § 313, 3).

When in the modern dialect the present participle has its own

subject, it suffixes the vowels » or » combined with a euphonic &f (see

§§ 282. 285. 286), e. 9. IR, wTZ S %@Sﬁé 303, 3, the cuckoo cries

even spring coming (¢.e. at the very time when spring comes, as soon as

spring comes).

SORDRIT SoS0TITE V0 TR WwBWBZO [No3T 36,

do not laugh on account of love for (your) wife and son, (your) heart

even taking pleasure (in them).

363

The forms of the past relative participle are given in §§175 —179.

0

Cf. § 254.

It is used to take the place of the relative pronouns in other languages,

L <l

e.g. s9®T0, he who sang; Jpecio, he who went; 3e@k%¢, she who begged;

5

W30, he who considered; 2emory, it that drank; %€9os, those who

rise; =83 Jpwo, a place in which (people) played; %@% S8y,, @ (or the)

thing which (somebody) had given; 3p$3 3o, the grass which had

germinated; o, medo, the lesson which (somebody) had learned; 3:'3;@’:3%

)

2263°, the place (of the body) to which (somebody) applied a blow; &3

DRo, Vishnu who had become; =o®R& Hos¢, a field which nobody

)

‘;

P—

422

P

cultivates: 833 2B o, in case that (something) should not be destroyed

3035 B0, an affair that does not end; ©o & s903sFo, an affair which

is not proper; DAZ 0¥, a strap which has been tightened; 3¢&7 w0,

a gift which has been asked for; 2,3 3¢ %=0AZ0, he whose affliction was

removed; HI aﬁo&j 5335y, they to whom a son has not been born

%Je)ﬁoo Al e 95350 an ox whose horns are broken.

Cf. § 267

About its use before adverbs (postpositions, § 212, 6) see § 282

364. The forms of the present and future relative participles are given

in §§ 180—186

Cf. § 254

They are used in the same way as the relative past participle (also before

dverbs, see §§ 282. 365), e.g. o0, he who is or has (see §§ 185. 316);

592 3¢ she who knows or will know (see § 186); BRzs Ye*er, a sand-

bank that is accumulating; 3RS RRRTE

a lamp that hangs

PR

3038, a rain which dashes; ©¢8)s3 t¥930T0, a chowrie which (somebody)

waves; 393 33, an ear of corn that grows; Jpd= ¢3¢d, a kettle-drum

that (somebody) beats

$PB3003 Jo2yo, a conch-shell that (somedody)

blows; =0z 30253, a stream that runs

283 3RS, a trumpet which

(somebody) applies to his mouth for blowing; Jpees,s FPSoFRVoNy*

perspiration which comes forth (see § 253, 2, d); RpdS3o, he that nourishes

or will nourish

PeSoF, a woman who scares away (see § 254)

£

2R s BRIy, &3y, the time in which (the cows) are milked, has

come

See §§ 273. 330, and ¢f. § 267

An additonal instance 1s:—

TIRIT 300, BEBISVTF BREIT RPN FRFonBRY 80

TR 2923 BREBIS [LPYF BB TRBIS TWol S08, [0 |

GRS ze

8- ROTIRIS %565;5% 'Soomain

SR zsam % ST RREBITNFC, ofma UERY S@no || the black

bees which hum, the wind which blows, the lea,ves of palms which wave

about, the plantains which fluctuate in (the water of) the ponds, the

small islands (in the river) which are cool, the herons which do meet

together, the ruddy geese which mutually touch and kiss, the parrots

which play about, the clever birds which utter pleasant words cause

much pleasure to those who look on

After one or more preceding past participles the present-future relative

!

participle is often used

iving it or them so to say the sense of the

present, e. g. JeP ©IF wowo, a tail which is long and extends itself

e

423

v e

LBREPTOT B8, SRemo

&030e9ne3 3y, the doorkeepers’ sticks which

drive away and strike those who are dishonest

oK

Po2d RN

3@ B0, R¥0=0, the speed of the arrows that touch, knock against him

(and) m1ss (their deadly aim).

BOWFVTIBDTY aoejoud TON® HRBY QYA

%e%;souo T 55(5;- TN acﬁc:‘“@s 9330R) aﬂn@cﬁd@ Nomﬁ 399

FRED a‘éu@eﬁ WPezonos. 3, because Weak persons have not sufﬁment

power to seize the hand of very strong persons, to stop (them and)

demand (their rights), they are obliged to bear quietly whatsoever those

do

It is still to be mentioned that occasionally present relative participles

are put in an uninterrupted series one after another, e. g. MCPEIRTIRIT &e

ANDAXRSITTORBITIRSS

8Nz

0o ©By0, the suffix atiga is used

(regarding) a man who seizes a pole (and) plays, (regarding) one who

bears (or uses to bear) a lamp, (and) regarding one who carries on a

betel-leaf trade

j

3T TR B OT IRFD VAV LA TISE TOIF 0™

BRonIDE 03

080,53 ¥V, RO, P |

2993 o@eja"e&‘) waoﬁo DN PR, SRBoTIT é’JaeéSﬁoSa FRo

%o:ﬂ eve maoéda"ew« 03 oo WRAREN B 3&%'55@65@ || that

8

(kmg s) son’s grand army wh1ch was piercing, causing to retreat, whoop-

ing, behaving proudly, shouting, crying aloud

coming near

and

:

N

attacking, striving, crowding, surrounding, closing with, standing, gain-

ing the victory, coming forth, jumping up, advancing, beating excessively,

getting entangled, struggling, rising (and) pushing in a good manner,

attracted the attention

365. The forms and signification of the infinitive appear in § 187. 188

k

Here follow some instances;— ervcee® 28 o, he came to eat

clolod

7e

Lpeto, he went to bring

453 wRToo FIDRYF PETOIE ?

e

3

e

DGR BC@3 38F, which world doest thou go to subdue?

Tell, O Vidya-

of

dbharacéakravarti!

NS ;ﬁew

SR 0308 ws o, he came to speak.

I

RoSHBReF3S,Txv0, tell to make large the heap of gold!

;Ss'acées‘ 3% o,

§0

he (is) clever to make

SReBSF

S=2.8F0, he (is) suitable to examine

MRS’ WP 3y, it (is) good to eat.

SReRS RaSo03vo, it (is) time to see.

{

I

RPENSF B,

1t (1s) time to go.

URIL (OF RS Q\,j*?) tell (him) to

put on clothes. 3gZecs¢ (or 33 QCOG) ~§dnaz%~ac§§;$oo tell to bring

I

e —

—

424

the force of well equipped horses

MTB,[RV0 BRA R (0r IBSF

unoy Be®x0c0, that is fit (or about) to

23e®), do not cause trouble.

become

RoBONTY BRFHRY, ﬁ&w@;@%ﬂm the boys cannot understand

the meaning

0 T ooaaﬁ wdeﬁJae) 3o, mean persons will not come to

the (proper) way. oz YWOR BREAOF, 3eB), it is necessary for me

to go to the town

2P 30 £9,3 IR BREAOF, ISR

L8300, they

ordered us to go home early

333 WROR, wovd s, I can read

39

68-~ Besy, you must deliver

D) PN wT WRoGY, you may come in

BB 2590,

@ BT BIWBINFIY

you must not utter such words

9530 %\Dﬁ wt 3% cf)o it is proper for them to come here.

See § 315

(concerning the passive); § 316, 3 seq

The locative-infinitive (satisaptami

satyartha, see Sabdamanidarpana

188, remark

under its s@itra 133) has been touched upon in §§ 187, 4

286

It is the infinitive with the final vowel o (see also the passive in

§ 315 wherein it is used, and § 352, 1, @)

According to the grammarian

Sabdamani-

Késava it is used when there are two subjects (ubhayakartri

darpana under sfitra 249), e. g. ma00To Joe KBS0 9028 Bo, when the

singer sang, the king was pleased (lit. the singer a singing, the king was

pleased)

D9Z,TeR [IBTo AT, When the actor played, the musi-

cian sounded (hlS) musical instrument.

s:s SPRCS3 wFan %@é&o when

the bard praised, the liberal man gave.

w3 3690, when (he) came (the

king) saw (him).

SO VAT IReLToS "’ea @i SOZoRWIR,

when the

earth quaked, when the spectators’ eyes became tired (and) when the

mind was afflicted

«Some authors”’, Késava says, “do not hesitate to use o¢ instead (of

), but that is not proper”, and adduces the following instances as

wrong (abaddha): — 5323 oNnTTE 23),3,00° 3RD,FD

TISDANCRIVNGF

¢ ©niys, when (they) shampooed (hisy lotus-like feet king Stdrika was

then comfortably seated.

&)OUJFS %Qo 2F YRS Qﬂcﬁo;saei S03Bon%*,

when (they) desired the purple sunshme of evenmg, the trees of the

hermitage appeared (see § 120,°a, 2).

Késava remarks that in the above instances ©8nRo (2&f4wREo)

%

would have been right (Suddha), for which he gives the following in-

stances: — D[RR 0 WOBPRBo BRENSWBWODMo

when spring came

the

cuckoo sang. 7799 VeRSRRT S FLOwo Y, when the wind blew, leaves

dropped down

i

—

JR—

425

According to that grammarian substitutes (AdéSas, as to use) for

are g0, ARNo, YB0 (FBI+¥00), BT ¢, ¥R Mo, ¥SRBo and also es3%

BE (VS +LBo+ ), €.J. TZT00 FTESE BN ﬁoﬁ;%sﬁo FoNT°

Qﬁcéoﬁfy.goﬁ%o, when (his) pride hides itself (and) is crushed completely,

Skanda beats him so that he becomes ashamed. 38 wAFIrio ROvY, Ao,

when extremity comes, he bears (it) patiently. cgsSe23s DTV TS Be

)

VBT oPS* %5%@\330 uﬁF*og&é@eadéo, when (he) said “tell Vishnu to

come (him) who appears (and) is coming (there) like the Anjanacala!l”

RYRR HeLE,080%° 388y D dpenYdso, when the female companion

said «remain near thy beloved one’’, and went away.

boono TI)BISS*

SR/ IN ;fg’a%ég, when the assembly dispersed, he began to consider.

(See § 286.) NT JTF RS SRSF0 ‘5353030%@3%%%?@550, when he who is on

high jumps down, jump upon (him) in order to beat (him)! WO BIF=°

$0a0ABo, so that (his son) may receive a boon, he worships. merRodd

SOBNBR® VBIRA YNRoDFo P 300, when from fear (he) rushes for-

ward (and) enters the pools of the Ganges. faasré"%)a‘;’gsg @3;,5 %ﬁego,

N

when he comes to meet (him), he embraces (him).

HZE DS BnFo, $0

that (the king) may give, he remains.

2B38REE BB SRy I8

i}

WHFRNDF 1o, be together with the fire-place when in (thy) old age

16

grey hair grows.

BITVTTIDTo ReRGSReEo, When the chief of the

16

Kuru race spoke.

D938 $RSRRBo JeTF 39T, when the duck-weed

16

was destroyed, the wate? became clear (see § 286).

WOBRER %J&'egjo,

when (he) came, he gave (him something).

of

Késava remarks that @g's;rio, Vg0, v3no, BFo use to express the

8

present and future, wuzoo, wBHNBo the past, and according to this his

2

remark the sentences quoted above have been translated.

a5

¥ )

Concerning Késava’s rule as to the use of the infinitive with final o

the observation may be made that Bhattakalainka, the author of the

he

Sabdanugasana, does not take notice of it, because he quotes (as it seems)

the following sentences regarding the use of «¢f without raising any

0)

I

objection: — a0 To TIBSS ©TRo ;ggaz%:cso, when the singer sang, the

he

king was pleased. ©@r Bedos mpINF,0, When the beggar begged, the

88

liberal man gave. g‘,g:‘)c& SORTBSS %cgaeﬁ opessery, When the sun rose,

darkness went.

54

—

426

s

In the modern dialect there is no particular rule regarding the use of

e (=u), although it is also employed to express ¢when’, e. g. Fedo,

when (he, she, etc.) asked (lit. an asking). agé’;)) %fa%e)o, when (he, she,

etc.) assented. 8wo, when (he, she, etc.) said. FZoro oaze%;S Qje;‘)%g

geo RERT WHRT Ty, when Dharma was ruling the kingdom, (his)

subjects were happy.

eR0 WL TIRY Bwerud es, when thou comest,

I shall go.

It is however more common to suffix en (the past participle

of &) to wwy, e.g. Fedwen, a hearing having become, . e. when (he,

she, etc.) heard; IRRoeh, ©$3 TN,

In § 188 it has been shown that the so-called infinitives ending in

In modern poetry the form

», Wof, ¥ey originally are verbal nouns.

with o occurs occasionally; see e. g. the verse from the Dasapadas quoted

in § 366 under remark a.

366.

About the conjugation of verbs, (nouns, pronouns and adjectives)

in the present, future and past see §§ 189-204.

Some instances are — SFI TOWR® oai’gi"’a‘, O] 0% WRIF Q. Do3ee

:j

AR, the king of spring comes; to-day (and) to-morrow (there) is no life

R0y

for him who is separated from (his wife and other dear ones).

DR WIYRPBRY® FoeTE, soN%, there are also devouring large

fishes in the ocean. gems?y@a)zzow& 23%3’4';)\5%, if thou art, the white umbrella

18

SIS BR3R BReCBadTt 293¢, are there (any) deities like you? @02l

2B BRSHeF[eo 390F0, Taraka frightened the three worlds. 2roR030

3R Bo8n¥o BoedARo, he caused the kine to eat grass on the

banks of the Yamuné. ﬁ:yég-aaéoésjcﬁd(ﬁe)si d%ﬂmo, he increased in

force like fire that has obtained an oblation of ghee.

(Tlevdnl=d m)ea% 3

Soud 32989 Sox° &P, this woman knew the whole state of the sons of

Pandu.

S

o Be B0, HROREP IV,

DIRTOPBLP I ¥TFF ¥EPTo, BTy |

gaamaﬁeasa‘ Zovdn-¥

et eﬁﬁr§gdoaﬁs‘ ©e°300f, soedmde? || I shall

I

know, Prithé will know, Krishna will know, the sun (or Indra) will know,

I

the very wise person Sahadéva will know; thou to whom (didst thou

make known)? When will nobody know, king of Anga?

e

427

]

323;52:%0 DoWRS F30 PP JIJIN [pNPRo®W®o 23@71&%0

JZNe30 ENIIN @zs%ﬁﬁoﬁo RD a‘s’oé@gj\oﬁoo s:@efacﬂai%o I

A3NeNo RoR ?33,3\)0 ARRPRVIRIDo TRR ZomoPoSoRdR,e

Fvfod 'aa%dojo% 3%;&’@@@6%5@5@@'@3% S039B3TFy¢ || She was

saying “I will give thee a fully ripe fruit as a present, O female parrot,

quickly I will give thee a bunch of flowers, O black bee, ever without

stopping I will give thee a soft shining bud of the red lotus, O swan, and

I will give thee fragrance, O cool wind, if to-day (you) search, bring and

place my lover near me”.

;jooé‘éjég m&&m DRTo

Bo8,30 oYt TxeZwAT, TR’ HFRO* |

22)&53%‘3335*? &SNS DIWT

@%ﬁ RANNTHT B0F 305 SBoo || In front the moun-

tain Mandara appeared to the eyes of the deities in such hugeness that

(they) said: ¢did it touch (or) did it not touch heaven? did it place down

(or) did it not place down (its) foot on the top of Rasatala?” &3 cx So8=d*

VD BER, LR3I, %5&6%560, fsvara’s mind became agitated, the army of

the Kinnaras ran away. SR0AG3), S0eBBISRY 23@?735—';333&, a dazzlingly

red colour spread about in the east. Yoz, :‘)%aéo, lustre came in.

)

BRIRD0 5#7%03;)30

TR0 RReDRT VI BRTHONT 3pee |

20300 JpeE 3SRETD

w:smm%o woﬁo;)\zjsg BRI, SORT 230 |} With haste

he will make a crop like a farmer who does not remove the weeds (and)

sows; the wife examines the young plants, sighs deeply (and) reviles the

AL .

way in which (he) has done it. ZHZ[oWIPTo SRMTS & oR3on %a&

3,N 395 oo, the king told the messenger the meaning contained in his

——

own mind. FReNSBORV0 ﬁoﬁaaa;’a DeRo0 IR S0, the cuckoo cried

nicely, the wind blew. eFerginvo 33 BooNToFo TLI,8 ABY FEIMIMo,

darkness had quite swallowed sun and moon, thunder-bolts came down.

& 3RNBRY &3 SReRRwEIe HoXOo, in this manner (he) will

|

remove whatsoever sickness.

0%, 0 wABY Do FRwPTo, Brabhmd

3

rules the whole world.

3BoFnes BP0 WESLI3R

o8 OF 30933030 00T BTIVFDTNV0 |

54%

e

—

428

WARFOD0WRY TRDRYE

853?03\)03&3\%5& TR OIBeRFRRY || Ringworm will

disappear in five days when (one) rubs (it) with dried cow-dung, rubs,

in a merciless manner, the root of Senna and also Emblic myrobalan

in the juice of a well-matured lemon, and applies (this medicament

to 1it).

Remarks.

@) In § 195 the contingent future of the modern dialect (the Nudigattu

calls it samSayarthakriydpada) has been introduced.

Here follow some

additional instances: — 330 o9 ma'%do, they may come to-morrow.

WRZ, RBLENITTRY. DB zbc:%a’g, he who goes running may stumble (and)

fall. =9 AOTIRY, ABIVACS, a tiger may withstand a lion. gecdio

FoR0NY vkl A e3y, in the king’s house a dinner may be obtained.

VR &1 Wi we R, he may be coming now.

AT GBoFSS S BRePA 3033 SodhoR Aenaede?

‘e’%d OBF DBZ D [eLv) T3 030 SagAon 39nede? |

‘@_9_’5%923‘95%3033 %80 W33 TN, %Jaégst% Sosvese?

¥2),080FIF g TrOBRY vl ©3rod 3093 20e3e? ||

Dasapada 9 || When (one) teaches (her) the duty of truth continually,

could it be pleasant to the mind of a female servant? When (one) tells

(it) the real nature of the soul manifoldly, could it be known to the

8

mind of a donkey? When (one) has drawn a figure of pure gold, if (one)

7

kisses (it), could it speak? When (one) applies a mark of musk to the

fi

forehead, will it possibly not cause a nice appearance?

b) The past tense, as remarked in § 194, is not unfrequently used for

the present or future, e. 9. ©cdn;, TR KGR, alas, I die (or shall die).

%@%ESO %@%a"sé &9, know I shall certainly give. Fo=o WR B, W0

2008 R8odod, I come, walk on! ©&R0wa3), o3 xedd, dinner will

(soon) be ready; put the leaves (used as plates)! =3 WY S0ed3

3%, T30 BEPRRE wiP 3’%, he who knows (proper) words, brings a

)

ruby; (but) he who does not know (proper) words, brings quarrel.

(It

may be mentioned here that sometimes the English ¢is’ is expressed by

e300, it became or has become, e. g. BRHF, W03y, it is late.

XSaodo

el

3y, 1t is morning. FaCoTILTOND, it is evening. DY, T390,

Ca]

do

what o’clock is it? &;&5 ﬁ%o&sasﬁoéo, it is one o’clock. &9y =38 ﬁ%oﬁa

(to

—

429

—

®agy, it is half past six o’clock. =3 3B sow ﬁ%o&ao&)é\), it is a

quarter past twelve. zowo TRD B3I, ﬁ%omaoméo, it is a quarter to

ten; but eﬁod%% CEESY DI FRZJ ©33, it is four minutes to five.)

¢) The present tense may be used for the future, e. g.

WRBRSNR PN sPTP

DT NPRBOTS,

T

_8_’

) 3%%0, . | I go into the

garden (and) bring (for 3o, I shall bring) thee, sister, a bunch of

fresh flowers (see § 215, 5, b).

The Kannada grammar Nudigattu says that in speaking (e390359,30)

the form of the future does not occur (in modern Kannada), in its stead

the present is used, e. g. for gacdyds TP woo=ITY people say TOITL

o9% w3y3d,3.

Also when in the modern dialect the meaning of ‘to use’ is expressed

either by the simple future tense, as 29, B000 DT AYR JIPRITT,

people say 239, LeTY DTV XY SRS, 3, or by the continuative

future tense, as ¢33,@Lady RHBY AYR SRBG,TH, they say 39,3,

ITN)

~e,

S SR8 Toae,B (see § 313, 3).

l

£900 @équf)e:)o

X,

A few additional sentences are:—ga$ LLero3, ex, I shall go to-

s

morrow. Qeds WeFoR3 FRBo3 ¢, if (you) want water, I shall give (you

19

some). Y WIS ITF R, T8, I shall stay till you come.

%

THED To¥ WIT SYE Towy, DTAB Wk DV EE, if (1) come with thee

16

to-morrow, my study will be interrupted for four days.

367

0

The forms of the imperative appear in § 205 —208."

)

The following instances may be given:—

3

Singular.

U B0 BP0, let me do it!

2

RS 0, ui)\“é Rend! edd N sez! hum, O black

bee! ery, O cuckoo! blow, O wind! 20, Bes*, hear, Hari!

It

f

1) 1t may be remarked that according to the Sabdanusisana the imperative with final 73,

W)

ete. includes asis, blessing, benediction; vidhi, ordering ; nimantrana, bidding ; Amantrana,

calling ; adhyéshana, soliciting; samprasna, questioning about or considering what is to be

{),

done ; préshana, urging (an inferior); vijndpana, begging (a superior); djnapana, directing

\j

(to ifollow a rule); prarthana, praying.

s

e

430

Se0VRTER, Jwero! 20‘6;3238 SO ;30&&! %%Téfae

ToRoBRoR! Jef gﬁ);ﬁobz@seﬁ! 2,5300332398 ﬁz;stcam! & ]

wg&oazﬁwaaﬁaﬁoo PPT DoowR Jped 3 DeRY! o ¥

aaqsoiobﬁe(%mo 32203 Foy,niedegar SResidny*! || Look like a

crow! Step slowly like a crane! Hide with the stratagem of a tortoise!

Stand like a spinning top (?)!

Be roaming like a bee!

Swing the

sword-weapon-bow (?) whilst resembling a shining flash of lightning!

In the manner of a scoundrel learn all well (and) become a teacher in

the world! Qeg® @3y or Qe of, be thou!

B0y, Forg (0. 1. FoF) ! B, FHowe

F00oN0 éoﬁ_&@a%‘r“%oﬁo 23% |

2,0NoNo DROVD T

)

SN wé%éod%ﬁ?dﬁ&%&):ﬁoﬁoo? I Remain, O daughter!

Have the vain grammarian and the vain disputant and the rustic as

their aim excellent poems which are (only) the aim of the mass of very

‘clever poets?

LX) RB3RBEI03

3092, 03003303038 FTXDWRSRDwo |

)

H@’Je)a_%? DRTTENS Fo

u%@ag $RoBy R0ReRTo Fu3weo || When the pond

took the waters that fell from the hands of the young women who said

«take! take!” and all at once sprinkled, it became reddish-brown water

on account of the filaments (of lotus flowers) that became loose and

ey | —

were scattered about.

3359, aQR v, brother, come here!. 3one,

emaé&%t} =@, sister, go to dine!

soride, RWDT B0, daughter, be

o2

Joyfull Qesse, SRRy em%@:ﬁo, God, save me!

come thou who

Wol, [TeFFINTIR! SReR, zé%@ed&)e%@ee)ﬁe:%!

walkest like a female swan! see thou who hast the fickle eye of a

partridge!

Qew® a3, be thou!

g%

e

BIFOPYD W B0, listen (thou) to (my) respectful petition!

DB, save (thou) me! Zoroes? Beeo B wecdy @v, even pray (thon),

8

pray (thou) again!

¥Z0 ToroR, may he give!

wZ0 3¥F, let him (or may he) bring!

BesSTo TpW®RoR wogdo, let the wise man worship the gods! ZoRSRe

f

o0 Sse@en, let him perform the religious observance in the

&

o

431

—

evening!

2B0T0 BREWN o0

may the hungry man eat!

AV DIATD)

oo TWEITTIS® wORIN, let the teacher instruct the boy in the Sastras

T

Do T TFURZIT BN, 00H SRR wion, the son may read the

let the ser-

grammar, or he may read the véda

W NRCPRoN

vant work!

¥0Ra° vBo Sw@on, may the king do this!

52008y e

®on, let the people do thus!

DNeZ0 NPT [oo Toron, may this man

give us alms!

SRR @ 36IDo DWF B, SedonPo, may the king cause

the countries to thrive in that manner!

SeBRRY® 2R TIWN JIRNT, X

no, may soon the life that is usual in the véda, become thine!

50330

AR BX0 I3RS, may God have compassion on thee!

B3R WSk WIS

let him come in! (see § 316, 10. 14)

BRI 30N RoDToo 99 o, may the Jina give us joy

Plural

BRWTHSF WY N SO0 Nae)asama%?’-‘

let us altogether attack

Phalguna! es35° DV TR BNy ©3 sgedoﬁojgo let all of us now per-

form a horse—sacrlﬁce‘ D3y 0, what shall we do? =

BRY, 3R BRERPED

let us now go to (our) house! 33 oz BoPRY, Fewd

let us ask the

permission of (our) father!

D PBR, Fo¥Do0 By FY0, make ye ready the thOp of beasts (and)

elephants! Rogon®os, ;ﬁosd@a‘ TR B3RN0 BR300, O guru, delightfully

commumcate a story tous! 0% o9, gg'scs@ z%ggjom BRNC?d, O children,

T

praise " God continually! 8w, B9 WD, 0 brother come here! z3 D9,

d

FORy TR ‘&@?b O sir, sit down ;3.@@@ 20:3), see ye!

\s

NES® oawompe@ S0R¢ BYT, give ye us the desired object! =5

)

B8Bo [eLd) 5o, make you this!

93T 33933

]

may they (or let them) do (it)! 3::3 SSCESEVAN N DWIGTE,

10

may the wise put their trust in true knowledge! “335% ;Sarﬁoh‘ﬁc“ %e9 0

BoRoR, may they give a female to our son! @330 w3o®, may they (or

let them) write

:

S92 B0 S5O Zo. let them do this! 380 Bwenosdy, let them

go!

J

368. The forms of the conjugated negative are given in §§ 209. 210

o

¢f. § 316, 5.6.8.9

Regarding bhavavacanas combined with @e) see §§ 209

he

298. 299. 316, 2.13; ¢f.

254, remark 1

———

(TN

432

Here follow some modern instances:— o533y &R 239830, they do not

come now

RBOX BT BE9F0IR am SRF=O? ¥ 3 %am)csma

DERNE Y. BRI

CA e0300R), [9D

NN

@030;5 SREBRY EEpNa how

much shall I praise the virtuous conduct of Yudhlshthlra‘? He did not

utter abusive words even against his enemies, he did not look at the

wives of others with a wicked eye, etc.

2Ry TS wRFERY, I shall

live no longer

BRTRY TPToBTH T 030@)13 &onzs, even the king’s

chariot does not go without oil.

deddo =09 %Jaéj TR Tpwed S0

FREIY, though God gives a boon, the officiating puest does not give the

boon

BeON BPCNE TN DVBIDRY St R DY

Spl ﬁdo acting without

God’s knowledge is never possible for us.

esas Qs\ouo 25903 BDRBRCD

=Sangy, he cannot bear such a load

TITORY RO BReNISH , Rama

does not go abroad

Q. BREZTN Zody BReNOe, though (his) be-

Tox0 3R ©x39e, I have

wilderment goes, (his) fear has not gone

said nothing

XXVII. On words corrupted from Samskrita.

369

The Kannada language consists

1,

of words that are peculiar to the country (de51yas) or are pure

which are represented by fat types in the

Kannada (ac¢Cagannada

Mangalore Dictionary),

&

2,

of words that have been borrowed from Samskrita without any

alteration (samasamskritas, see § 70)

3,

of words that have been more or less corrupted from Sarmskrita

(apabhram3as or tadbhavas, see §§ 74. 79. 81. 82. 84 —89. 218. 219. 223

:

273. 370), regarding which it is to be remarked that they may also (in

¢

speaking or writing) be used in their original form

4,

of some words (about 21) that exist in Kannada as well as in

(«

Sarmskrita (tatsamas, see § 71, and compounds with them, § 252, s) or are

as it were Kannada and Samskrita

(x

s

Of these four kinds of words the language was made up at the time

%

of the grammarian KéSava and his learned predecessors

Afterwards during the reign of the Musulmans many Hindusthini

i

terms were introduced, and also Mahratti words became naturalised in

Kannada

|

—

433

e

370. Samskrita words which only change their finals when natural-

ised or used as declinable bases in Kannada, have been introduced in

§§ 74 —179. 81. 82. 84—39

Samskrita words which undergo further, so to say more essential

changes when adopted by Kannada people, 7.e. the real-apabhramsas or

tadbhavas, are now to be considered

It will be sufficient for learning the

way of their formation from the following alphabetical list in which all

the Tadbhavas especially mentioned by Késava as such (about 800) are

included, the terms in parenthesis denoting the original Samskrita terms

Final e of Samskrita words is represented by o

t

©%T (¥FT); VAR (¥3A); VR (v¥nFv); wn (@og"r") sh (o0),);

BOTOR (esoﬁos), BOTIED (WoTE O Gony); ms (& z‘i or

D)’ 0923 & (e®F

8); ¥% BA (9TTA); 8B 0 (BI0F); ¥k (&9%)

003 (VT); Ve (YOBF);

6

05023 ('&oev)

VN (VRN); VARD (BD); WG (¥FF); VAT (VGT);

W8, (¥8,8); 98¢ (IRINEY); VRN (VR T); VR0 (VTYN)

DITE

(8598); ORPA (OBWTR;); VBN (BBRER); BTIB (LHF); LORM

(Cﬁu v), BOIT

S (29); ¥B0 (958); ¥s3 (e«mN) ©33 (©T; ¢f. BT

3); @35:3 (d‘isaasaf\%, of. ¥BWR); VA or &R6 (B=R); VA (V);

VAR (W3ReT or B30eF); weT (vdew); VPR (¥9TF); — STOIAT (YT

peis }

10

N

£); YTR (UT3; ¢f. wnR); wnd (¥3T); YRR (¥Te3); YNl (YT

he

3: ¢f. ¢

$3); @oNT (BoNTX); YBRIRA (STR

) 353 (‘d&,)

(SPONEY (d

R ; GOWA (SRWT,); €T (YTY); €T (¥nod); YT

2 (8 d;’;o), 333

)

(¥090); 3T (¥308); YRR, see BRA;— AonY (eﬁo*rad) Bony (&oerd);

KT (&

it

PoNNOT (aoom@u) ﬂaz% ('a?N

ﬁ (f‘aou%), “856 ('&5 ); —

éz:),-—emﬁéﬁ em‘e’éd) emomejox emomc&( oﬁoou),emzs m(emzsaéwﬁ),

J

I}

ot (vw o); evwyr (eocdagen); eméﬂ% (o2 302); ZOR (903,00

i

CT); WG (WF); NI TE (3 ); wuRy3 or uRy3, (WFE,) SIVEWN)

10

(GJ\)M );— o)% (81)%)

DBF (vTF)

2% (Bd); — IR (VBT); — 0

Y

— =

(09%,);— wﬁ (23); WA (20F); —

VI3 (BRG); — ToRIF (TR 390);

(vé‘r'c’)) FoTO (220%0); %?3 (v%), TwOT (IIV); ‘c?:i (To03F);

me

;;

WoF); Fotd (T00%); ot (Tooxy); TEIT (TBRCT); ‘Gej ()3

3

:(z

%é«) IEN (v&gv), U& (%aﬁ), Fed (PR); T

T, (Te); v"%vOX TR

Il

..J_)

TS

(%’

?); TEH (IT); %9" (aam) 3 (%a‘%), 23,0 (%5

1

g-\') "" )

FelT)

(%m 9); U@d (203; of. -o‘OC’)J <%

(vﬁ‘), v§ (v?”‘r‘) 'J'fo

55

—

434

PR

(FRgB); TR (TR); TRR (ToFH); T (TRPFT); T (T9y);

muo@ (F3©); TDY (TRoF); T, (TVIF); Ty oOr wwa (283); FT

@gu 390 (33@); ¥ORA (¥9:F); TI=y, Rau 2); TS (TD0);

TRP (FWW); TOonF O Fowd (TlLowW); q&& (3L8); TJoo (¥

B0T); TH (TIN); TY (VW); TIER (TuI); TLIF (FoR); FoN

(39%); ToT (T3); TOON Or TPOAR (&593F); TR (L9K); TR

b

(Tomo);

ToOA

or 3o~ (T939); T

o8 (TXSB); B%° A.&ev 363 EA&

Hees (Zeo)s qo% Qﬁmv FIOTID Qbomou&v m%@ ASSY NS u (TR

TOFR); TIFDYy wao& NE TITUE (TRIEY

9); T AB&% FoT chuu@a

of. JHCT); .qt,v%mw,v Amouo&

K

TRS (TRB);

BRCIF (TW,T); Feed

(B¢e9);

Fe3e9 Adazn@v

SR oW AwLomafv

BRY, (TRER); TRRBO (Food); TRRAR (W)

B (Bo2)

BRZ,TAD (FORY,BNT); FRR, (R,); TRET (®T); TRENS (B¢

30); TR or FRe

%

(TRed)); TR (TRckd); Fwero (FRd) BROH

A%LXBV

FRCT Amomgqv

BRESD (TPNER); TREES mmomo 0);—ned

(RB); o2 (To0); NAR (PF); 1B (PV); %8 avv 13 (35);

nos (5)383); i, Auuf ngee (B®e0); ANRFT ?}cﬁa Jﬁv 3 :ACU R,3);

neen (s839); mowd Adqﬁ mo® (Nag); Nas (RBR); madR, see Fo0R;

oS OF 7193 (M9,R0); M (M,05); MR (Meg); NORY (ANFY);

NOR (AD3); Rugd (Mwrd); Ml (Jokd); noed R Azc&.duvv 18, (Reg,)

AN Qpawev IR R (MSyR); ¥ Qé&v e (083); Ngw

Aaéwu ?2& 32&

mbm% (B30e8); RReRID (RReFR); RPesH

or mbma

Amoa,u 9); Nwes¥ (Reempv);

RPERH

(RReR

v w(@ KCU

br@?u (DRed); RRePA, 0. . PREPA (PReBF); P (TT3); —

.ﬂ.“

?VUMM,W

(FHea);—

BT (¥3F); BHYO (3539); B8, A%&v BB0T (W21 T);

B

(@, v“ BON Am&ﬁ B (D); a@uz (a8 R); wWom¥

2

33);

Q

239 Gv

M

WS

Aam@&&mov %¥TO (300); @mm&q A.%w@v B33, Awm )5 8%

o

R BT, (VF); 83, (d3v,); ¥R (893); wmd (3308);—wNR (RPR);

wi (wief); wnd (Bpnd, o.1. TPRR); =R (DWR); WoF (TPoT)

wowd (TPoBpR); kB3 (Tptdd); B (w8); w3 (B0F)); w8 (W3); T,

(B8,)5 =, (98); w§, (o%); wF (Bosow; ¢f. wRY); wBY, (TPD));

%30 Az av 253 (03030); wRed A%maozv of. Besee); wIRNT ﬁaouv%vu WIP

M

Ao%uocv BRT (CNTY or ToY); BN (0N); BIR (CFPIR); WA

R

435

P —

(0303); ﬁz,@m&o (0303ReR); wom* (FoR); mwm (028); b A%@mv

200 (G922); WS (Fg®); 2% (:98); %5@ or ¢ (wowd); 2

0. r. 238, (23¢eoF); TN, 0. T. 230N (B¥eT7); Wesn (Be3F); w0 or

B3 (C33,; ¢f. 208,); W (Ban); Wartaso (G300 ); W@, (RWE,)

ga Aatavv WY, 566 WRT; WRTY, 0. I'. 2L A&b&uv 23083 Q\wm

gum@ A%aao@ WRT, (BRg03); Bwert (Swen); Been (c5een); %,@m&u

(Gpoeesn?); B0ed (2Rge8); BREONR (BRgedR); B0es (BRER);—

TPVESP (TP D); ¥ (Tpd); p$s, or perhaps dypess (Bpod);— B2

(@%,); Bo0n or ST (B05r38); Bo# (FoF);— 33 (3); 9B (3K);

3aR (3,3¢03)

9,0 (88)); B8 (39%); IxA (BBA; ¢f. 3RA); 3[%0.©

(soxoR ©); BTomy (EBom); 3T (39,09) @at (39)7); Bror (BooF)

DA (3% avu

3% ml@v

399 ?@3 395

B (7%

®)

3L (390);

s T

%, (363,); o7 (§7); 30 (F); 3 (363); 8203 (8,203)

391

@Oma. Amomm &v 5

8 (R3,9);

300 Au @mv

3RY AZQ@ @v

A%&Udv“ %&m@u \mo&vu 3030 (S2530); %bﬁ@w or 3R¥E ( 8@&

3Re3

(RR,630); Iado (Be3); B (BR); BR (B,Q); BY, (BEF); B3y, or G

(BSoF); BB (FRormoeod); 33 (@9,3); BRS (BIFR); 3R (B3);

ooB (Bos,); T9C (@9,8); ©8 (Fad); T (Fawv); TS (meBR);

ol (otd); oed Awﬁmvv Dex (BeT); DD (B eR) U?uw (Be

<)s

3 (&)

aon AU& TOnoe m&omr@cv

AN AN «naow,@mn&uv 3083

(Box); TR (Q); BRB (BRI); TR (BRT); BRT (FRSB); BRRED or

(BRRD); BRAT (FWRT); Bwe (FRY); B3

(83R); 33 (83)

Beeo (Bu,ee0); B0eed (B0 eed); B (BWRER); DR (BR,ER); —

(FoF, see B3y,);—&F (Fw); 8@ (RSFS); &Y,

a%wv [N Auavov

SO0 (TR0 ¢ Beod); LY (Ded); TeLeR Aﬂ@&%v ey (ER);

@ Avmwv @ © Q% ¥ (D3 ©) v@wu A@w =) v&oaAvﬁoav Na& v&v

RTOR (RFR) RO (¥); W (3G, v QB @8&.@ afs @sovv vszu

@&o

mau

(RWFR T)

QWD (DWFY)

FAPONEN A@Uooﬁv

(dS0F);

Ava,.@.lv» DI Amu&@@v A Av%v QX 0T Aduomv Q0T A@mqv "R

Au,? ) 53 a&

o3 (Re3o3) ReO3 Aa@ow&ov ~IOYS Aa&uv IL%AW.

(=3)

oJ

(R2); =NBeo (T,T0es); B¢ (T,TRQ); o At?er

()

or = mt& 3)

WS (BoB); ko (2Z);

U (28,

ot

@ (T8

o

W

2@R (FB%?); 2ERL, (GRE,)

& (5,3

of. RCP); tw&u

(5

W

55

27

436

$

); T3 (5]); B8, (BE); =&,

wv, P [ o] Au

JE

o< OS0

o

A~

%0

:

039¢€9 A

Ouu@mov“ b

Aaauov

NM

mom%% ROT

R (043);

W

Mv

Mo

P

€9

TRM);

e

o~

oon A

ﬂn pJ

=

ee &mwm@ aaﬂo«ﬂ

M

O or

W

N

~ORR)

3 oY

aoA

¥ (Fo);

ﬂ’wnLL

ST

m

3,89);

¥Io Or

Wt

P,

)

. a@JGw or JIN®

(393,

DT Auo.u&mvw B (F8; ¢+ B); FINB (J)T3)

F90); DoLA0H (TaRLeR); TGO Or FRO (Waklv); [k (Ted); HIW?

Ao (Powas); DR or HOYR (TatTF); TR (Te3; ¢f. mR); a@umw

(PoRe3); ©oARE (JoFaLI); momety (Hemed); WOV O [a¥ (PHIV);

(8]

9

By, or bl (DF); MBR (Re3P); Wedwod (Rewow); Seay or &eoy

e

(

EYan)

@

); 2RI (DBT; ¢+ &RED); 20898, 0. r. BeeFR (2edF, 0. I. %mw%m

.

.

)

ﬁ A@vnd

>

¥3, %, or perhaps [ILP (PHEF); LR (VYTF); NVT

= =)

b

.

(Rp3); BP (R4); BeFo® (POR); TpOA ([p09);

9] .q.m.m@

T..w,mmm@v

%www A%mg%w ¢of. 2esR); %&w (5e8d); 2eR A%muvw 2e9, or perhaps

oy g )

.

2P (B9, [ed?);

29N Abmg%vw

P (

S el

]

)

b

Bpeen, see

BRYR; TR (FPUR); T[BVOB (£, TI0); — wT& (F,); wi (I1F);

.

WO

Sﬁ Au@%muvm Sw@q% or Swmq%@ Aum&vw 2% A&%vm 2o (Fo3)

3

.

£);

Auowm%v

3

woed Auw@vw Y (PF); wiEN or wiEN (3FFF); W

nm\.w ﬁoL

3Fs

v

8);

weg Or gjeg (ReY); WD (Seer); W@, ([EF); wBBeo (I

<\

wu@

)

WO

(SRF);

wy, (wR); wMh (W8RT); wpT (Wurd; of. BRw

WRIF (B, of. BRDY); OB (S9F); wST (FIT); wd (FI);

wAD (RRY); WAS, (JRR,); WAS (HYNF); wd (IF); we (TW);

wond (TORR); wWaRy (Fekl); wady (Ted); wad (TYT); 20 (TON);

RY, (SORR,); WIA (FoR); W (J90); VF (YF); Wonl (Fen); Wo

T Or Wonel (&)oned); 8%% AUNm_ousf &mwmw Awﬁwmv, 8&% A%.dw,f

S%a A&%&vw 8%@%&& Amumu.@.mﬂavw Do AUM&vm WE,T (J7,0); WA (VY);

5,9

PN —

e

S

wan (gecd); wg (F); B (Jgef); ©

n

AU%@@Y WY T or

S

Awwaauvw V1T (TF); WD (F95R)s WO3aFon Aa@,wuouvw.%apﬁ

(F95v); DR (DF); WEM (DeF); WeD (DeR); W3 (PR3 ¢f. 0es); WeT

(6T); We (Pea); WIB (WF); WA (FRSY); WA (FRW); &N Aw&a@m

Fow Aﬂwoﬁuvw &wwmqmu&mmmw&w 233 Aao%v 233 A%@r BT (DT0NT);

wwm%o&mo A}mw&mbvw 3en Amwmlvm 2303 A%m&%vw 233 (3,0); ¥ed Ammmmvw Bexn

(3,925 ¢f. %&M.@va AN eple A&&&&@avw &mw.m A%&%&vw mwm,va& Am.w&auvm Rewon

(FPowent); BRWHO (WWFT, WWRFT); BRD, (1,3 ween (gwen); AN dal

PSS

437

—

A&(@myv

am@ 568 e ; &@QAPB );— 30

F.B O VoTH Au&ng aom ®

3

A&o& 2); aouo& A&%moav o,zmq A&o&&v uo&q Adcmav uo&o /uowv

uooﬁmw or aoo%&w Aabo%&mr 083 Au&v SR Auoav aOB (R022)

209R (R0 %); soa% (oBFR); E, (=%); D08, 59 A.&ouvv uouo

AoLo

Q\u

2R, T (F0F, Y SORLY (e 9); So03089 (STR); So8oR (30

SF); FOR (Y F); SR (

(3,29%); S0A (d); SePR (308%); [

(F0m3); Zoody, see BnA;

BRN (395 ; 03 (Iok); BT (Sedsy)

SR (FIWE,); SIOVA Auu@é&% BPJR (S0RRy); D3 (IYyn); N8

(QB); DSy, or DL, A&o@uoc AW (VW) ; BT (Sww; ¢f. Sen);

BRTIG (F908,); SoMF* ([wFow); IR Aaoo&%v B0RR (VYR LF);

SRR (F00F); SRR ([N TF); TR [[oLeR], [08Ry (R0R);

230069, Or 53063, (B9€®, 0.T. 30e8); B[R ([oeR) 3930 (Rods); Sy or

200 (Soddy);? BRR - (Bww)

LD (Swow)

BRER (SoRT); [T

(F030RT) ; — coartaRe (SBon,); — 8,3 (TeF R); UF, (83); INS (S¥)

o308 (T3 ¢f U8, ); O, (T3,); 030, (053),); TRCSE or TR (SHICIT)

09030 (To); TRA (TR8); D (88a20); 0o (33069); D3 (33:80); DA (3WON)

SRA (BRF); BRTY) Or TR (SRT); 8RS (BRERY);— VTVTIED (VT ,F9)

VTN (9F,); 0T, (VT); L.m

(0329 oz (oBod); omR (97)

AR or oA T (TNT); Q&S (eP0R); oI (VFXT); OB Y, or

perhaps ©=0.83 (o b); weRB Or SIZB AG@uo,&v

SPWY) A@.@ &v

LR (VotleedT); S (Sewy); Snew (SRey); —ToT (3T); S8

(B&F); Soe¥ (Svedl); IR, or perhaps also Seen (ST); TR (T90F)

TORIN (T9RVT); ToRY (F3my9); TP (ToTay 9); wa T (D%,0); D3

(HF); 92, (32); 28 ()B); V05 (D0aR); DI @83 28 (I 001-

WR); RO (DNO3); vaou (Do) ; JeeR @m&& Se” (3eR); Fywon

(Fpee; ¢f. WeRR); Be? or BJwa? Au@iu.m@vulzozao (Ro3630);

ATV m&ﬂoo& :

TR (BF0R); RHTB (RoFyy3); ATy 3 (29F9); RS, (79F; -

l@.m.vv ZJ (R Jm.vu RoT AMOMCV“ RoT0 A&o%av

0TS m&&otcv pxfokod)

(Bo); 20% (30%); Ronl (Rozd); Rontd (Rogpad); Roflss (Ronad)

A aov =& A%%v 28 ﬁ&@v 28 A&MOV lm,@ ﬂ)v?owv Da.0 ar 5% = (

2); BB (9839); AN (R

%)

b Al%,.@ mob

2% Alo)@v

)

1

A):cv uﬂow Alﬂ@ ®); loﬁﬂ o H. lwm,vﬁA 3 @vv RWOT A&movu W Al&ﬂv

X828 (RRBR,0); "B (35,0); A=Y (I30); Aoy (I2); A

—

438

e

(@0F); RO Awao&o,&vw <Je} Awavw X8 (30); [T (30B); RTRS

Auawmv“ RORT (IRFD; ¢f. 7IRD); KGR Awa,@af o (3o99); "D

Auﬁvm =3 A&uovw = Au%bmﬁvw ptian) Acﬂ;ﬂmo and mw&movw =9 (33); =2

(RBy); =0 (RR); =3, (%e3,); o or mam (Fa83); %od (A 8); AIWR

(F3R); mov Auwuvw RoR, (I9R,); AIT (ToT); AOTY (IYT0); WO

(Ay0); W98 (Z90F); AORT (I90LT); AOVM (IVW); 8 (299);

ROTE, (FITT,); AN (I R); TR (FOWR); TORS Au@mmf AOR3 (REF

)5 Aorl (AoR); NorT (Fyorved); RN (Fon); At (&) ABYT (AFT);

AT (80); AD (3Q); ADS (30); AR (3WT); AN (33); Ae3 (3¢E);

26T (28¢T); Aee® (3ew); AT (3¢TT); ACKT (eRFT); RNT? (RNFY);

B (308); u%w a&@w u%w@ (BRF); R, (D,); @R (RREI);

AR Auove.ﬁ Rw (3g9); RTy (o=); R0R (600F); Rowf or R

(309); WY (00; of FRY); BRTF (IRF,); AW (38W); 2053

(RA%); BeY (F00); A (J0dy); AT S (RS o {3 3); 80 (RRQD);

RS (38); Reed (3eed); Re3 @%uﬁ Ko (B o) Rem (3ex); ReR (3eR);

%&mw& A%&Mg&vw %&& Am&&vw ART or AR (Row); RN (308F); JRT

(Rog); AWT, (Beer); RRE, (397); ARwRY (2a53); RRTk Aada@m@vw

AR (RyR); Awerd (3peed); AwemdA (RTAR); A°D (8°0); — =N

(&

B,®); BN (1)) ; Towd (FowT); &m%w A&wmw%vw RROR (HoF); 233

(&

e3ed); g (:e2); ©3, (R5,); o or =od (58]); Tows or oW

mﬂ@@%vm BT, Aodmwvw T (F%); B A@ﬂwvv T3 (T,89) 5 reeJefewh)

(79,03); BISK (RVTSF); BVOR (BRF); ROB (FoT); DY Or R0

DO 0hR); BART, see ITF; BRT (F,R0); TG0 (Totdw, ¢f. BY);

TN (FwT, ¢f. TIJYR); TR (93, ¢f. TOR); moaw (DR, of- mo.awvw

moB%w @mm% L] DN ) 5 wou&@ (28,9); &3 (030); oRED (WBT, ¢+ HR

0); ot (s y s () SH & k) () B8 (R, o B

BY, (BR); B3R (28T, BT); B (FRod); Beont (FedT); FHen

or ammww% A%&u&mvw mw(@mm.a& A@&mo&vm BRIZN (YR, T, o+ P3,R); RRE,

(edF); Rwedn, or perhaps BwecsR (AR, ed3, of. Jpeen).

Regarding compounds with them see § 252, 4 seq.

In the Sabdanusisana there are the following additional tadbhavas:—

@%cwmﬁ A@%@m@w ¥n® (N3, q); @ﬁqu, (VT TFF); BWAN (VR

ﬁao&m 8 (%23); QonROT (RorhwT); Qcﬂ& Ameum&vm g B (3 );

439

ot (s dl); ooz (YWR); 0% (0F 28E2 BTF); DOBITA (VFIRI)

T (TR); TR (TowW); T (TR ); 300° (3€T); TONF (BF); TR

(300); A8 (PY); BAD (BF); B, (§7); WS (BRGF); wRA

(B30BF3); =AY (TpTE); woR (TpoF); w, (ZeR)

23539 (zﬁoaﬁo)

WX (TPR); Wan (0IaN); T (0WIR); WIST (CVINT); WOST (WoR

v); 3BV (FMw); 33 (A8); 33X (FBReR); BB (3

&8 (§9);

(B3); moY (wod); dT® (ByR); dont (BoriF); B3 (53935) o= o)

(R3FR); SRB (Soom); 33%@%?5 (%33 @5)

LORS (SSOL), S0Ron (TO

son) 2913 (9,390); ;mad (3,850°); TIPS (J90EF); WD, (IN);

uo:’m (8302); T3 (38); WRBA (9,833); VOR (DUeR); =T (aﬁoﬁ W

M (B8 8); Soen (S9F); SWYT (I9T0); NOR (3,0F); SRR

(F003); SRexT (SRERR); 00T (0303); BT (Bwd,); 28 (3391);

ORw (aR); WD (R); 0w (0F,); OFYER (0 FY); BFF

(zoFS ]); TR (VwaF); Ve (&’)eéfi%) 2o (Saﬁo), Rowod (Rowod);

RS, (NOZ%), ESIAN (:dd@) ROS (3,0030); RO (3, ;So) 7% (RBw); NOBT

Red (Wew);

N@'Zé

(m5%); AonT (59)07736), AeS (8¢); ~oé3 (Ry);

(38); Bowns (FPyary); Aeesd (3068); 587"1("’3-&-), B3 (a'o;)do.,o)

%0 (&e) &eTT (e:30)

Of these 91 tadbhavas twenty-eight [viz. &3¢,

emrizé TS, TIONT, za*(od T8, N, oS, 33, 3¢TX [as $¢TA], BA

z58 BRS3 [as BRY], Ebcé csm 53;5 zﬁzéa*a SRT, ToRI, 0303F, RwTS

See

BBy, w8, DEP3, Ry ,Jau f\)or{d NQQB) are in the Dictionary.

also the Sabdanusasana s words with €9 in § 231

It must not be thought that the tadbhavas mentioned by Késava in

the ahove list and the Sabdinusisana,

are all which Kannada contains

Késava himself knew more, e. g. 2e302R, RCIR, etc

There are many

others, as the Dictionary will show

It may be said that most of the

tadbhavas are used in conversation by all classes of Kannada people

XXVIII, On the doubling of consonants.

371

As in Samskrita so also in Kannada a doubling of consonants

takes place which properly does not belong to the department of grammar

It is now found mostly in ancient inscriptions (S4sanas), more Or less

also in anclent manuscripts

—

440

—

The grammarian KéSava teaches such doubling in the following

instances in all of which it is optional :(—

1,

in the dative plural where R is preceded by ¢, e. g. BeSIRF, 23

;;:- (§ 119, a, dative), &

eo:bﬁr (§ 132, a, dative; § 240, 5);

2,

in the past participle formed by @0 preceded by o, e. g. Ve 7,

Nu@QCSOF' VEF, WABIF (§ 159);

3,

in the present-future relative participle, if 3 and

are preceded

by of or e3¢ e. g

OB F, TVIF, BTRISF (§ 180, 1), ¥vBIF, NAIFE

e, F, WD F (§ 183, 1), agF, 3T F, ¥TF, 3eexF (§ 183, 1. 2);

and also, if that is not the case, e. g 3RTT, mﬁw

SIES

, 303 (§ 183,

7. 8)

4,

in compounds after a répha, e.g. QenFwy, ewSerd (§ 246, a)

and also when there are no compounds, e. g. 3oz FEPREIRY, Ve FLROT

(§ 246, a)

His other rules regarding the doubling of consonants (§ 109, a, dative

s

for &; § 194 e o ete. for esTo etc. in the present tense

§ 198, 3

3

%30, for 3y in the past tense; § 203 2,0 for 3o in the present, future

and past tenses; §205 & for & in the imperative; 215, 7, d the doubling

of ¢, =, of, o35°, ¥ in declinable bases

§ 215

7, e that of ¢3s® in

certain verbal themes

§ 215, 7, f that of &%, =°, of, o3, ¥ in the

negative

§ 248, s where a following consonant is doubled after Zw;

and § 273 eno, for ¥n93,, etc.) belong to the sphere of grammar

Bhattakalanka in his grammar Sabdanusasana (sfitra 65 seq.) expatiates

on the doubling of consonants, giving e.g. the following instances:—

TOP BN

eFBITNVO, aaﬁ% Fm ATITE, em'm Fos

3

! nodzjgriﬁmaosﬁoc‘ RRBF

T2 30, TR FBOTTE 'aﬁwafr'éce 2002 FOVATTY, WoR FRIeSZ0n

I FFIORITS

23 DARTS, WP CFSFABTS, Ztrd FooRRY*, zozérﬁcwf:

0. 0°, aia@smre;?c‘ @;Sms-'aado WIS,

"dé F),3900

RR3Z3, Fai o5,

¥, ﬁjwma%‘zﬂ&@dv *z%uzﬂreﬁﬁﬁc‘ Bed 3YLF BT, e 3,89 3eF,

QﬁQ)w FODE SR, zo%

urﬁﬁﬁ

W

, R, 0F Tone?, BXBe3059,F DROITE,

SEOTES %@wr%cﬂ SRS oMb ée), B03IRTY, QAY, 0, WU A

E

QESN—

441

o

g

&3O

3 030T0, BRI

Loo%baouem wa o, muo BT0; — WOAD 5, @ORT0, Ty

2, ¥RT, SFRo; ...86 30, &%c oS 8@ &0, mw@@ G I.sa muo,

VLD

239RC &,@ oy

@2% ROy w9, oo g e &aa 3, ®

RIPD, NSF; — %mzu% eF s

&

N

?mlﬂ.@ Feeo,

%%8@3& FQo

AoeEnees &

8@%8 £03;— PPEITPR n&

(0. r. 7 &a&c@u@ @vu aﬂu@w@ n¥o; — AWIF, %N 1 eF

aoo%,@ 02BSF, N

[

e

03T

@a&,@ mé o, .810

7, WROBLF, KNSy

@1\0 Ow

oJ

NI

Q

@WS

R FonodRys, Gu@@ B398 F,

asgr

£3 o, ﬁa@@ m@o%& Bouvnw

&

P9

A

o

u.wuaao qowa?b FR,5300 @auﬁuw mozo 2. .du‘@uwn @wmn

5

s

: wu&@l@,wwv ROONR Fof auzm% &

& mwﬂmw QUL O3, AR FRo

Q

o2

D

P

, TROD FO®

..\\.JL.J

3nes

l\

o, ?zuono a&a@uoo B oo ol @.@08

m\mw%o

\/

u

Fos, BHROZFONS, TR 0T FRSF, T, 0, F O qm@%uoﬂo gzomo,mv

A

239R0C)

RTD , BATIH 03— FPEITIONRF, REITN Fo° ?a&,@ﬁwu

n

9&153 s

au,@mano WPRRCT FE0 2P RPLT FTOF 9@%2&8

W

RN 7

, BOHIS &

SOTILY

%&?@@% v,dab@ﬁ wmwaug o,

)

D

)

N3259C9 To

, RS2

CI o, 3w

o e uo%w aoou *,

33 T .%ﬁ )

>

N

D

D

3

=

T 01— DA

WA mumv

<3

duc P, TID B,

o

mnwo

(@]

N

N

N

Q

3

%

N

o~

=

PR3, TR, 0, BBIVY 0; — LORR OF TP, RPNLIY 01RL0NRo, TZFEYF

N

N

,0300%, FWNVPD 0.8

BISFR T — TIRVRF, TIBVNFF;— T F

£9533° DARITY; WR YLFo — BeRw nm&v 30RR,FB, SPWFY FATE, WANWFR

SR — BB F e

33

3. — 30e39,F R0

S59R F e — TIOBW,eFSE

08,7, B3eT Fédo, vﬁn

M

b)

FRRFO lwm&@oao, &m%na; v/uon%w

BT, BIW,FN: —

FS8, B FIR,

(oa)

o3 €9

o7, W eNFHT; — W

3,5

[}

03¢, BN FR;— BFD FAT0, WiFD FATO;—

w

)

)

205, 78

g

Professor Max Miiller gives the following instances on the doubling

of consonants in Samskrita in his ¢A Sanskrit Grammar for Beginners

56

—

442

e,

p. 59:—-&5%8_;- (for e3F), @)aéégs (for WB), s%e:s (for IFFR), 33, F

3e (for cﬁég;ée, it is shown).

His general remarks are as follows:—“According to some gram-

marians any consonants except r and h, followed by another consonant

and preceded by a vowel, may be doubled; likewise any consonant preceded

As no

by r or h, these letters being themselves preceded by a vowel.

practical object is obtained by this practice, it is best, with (the gramma-

rian) Sakalya, to discontinue it throughout.”

372. An alphabetically arranged list of words (compounds and

others) which are contained in various places of the Sabdanusasana, the

numbers referring to the sfitras under which they are found. When a

word is explained in the Sabdanusisana, the explanation in that grammar’s

generally Samskrita form is adduced immediately after it in the MNst.

;:j

If a mere number is added, it denotes that the meaning of the term is

not given by Bhattdkalanka and is not known to the author of the

present grammar.

)\

©%.9 ¢, Tadbhava of ¥¥p 8. 160.— ¥nRA2, A washerwoman. 190,— @o¥Fo

m®. A warrior. See under 83380me.—weHIB. 80. (f. ¥onIH in Dictionary #—

@?38’%3. 2350?%0308 zéodona@a’:%es?deao <. \Vorking in leather or skins; the

making ready or decorating horses ete. 425.— ©23) ©3039. A man who is at the

head of, or engaged in, ®23) ¢, 425,— 98 ¢on. = W) ¥20d). 425, — BowT. 80.

(Tbh. of 6:90503')?),——-39'355333. B3e[0 e BTI0TB 0. Producing dissension or

disunion of others. 407.— w8J0WA. A man who practices VI8 407.—

Z{;

VU IR 67. (Of. ©83% in Dictionary?).— ©339. A female who carries her

mistress’ betel-nut pouch. 200.— v&a8, The lower part of a spear. 348. —

©VRTI9. BBIdtws A man who practices cooking. 545.— ¥®AT., A man who

q1

eooks. 410.— ©ToIN. = BN, 410. — @833, The act of touching, ete. 561.—

VT, 441.— 98 8. Dative of ¥3, 265.— ¥BT0°, Grief, page 101 in the

of

following verse: BRR0THR ALPBIBIOOT ©0S° B0 GO0 INoRO® woudo |

FII HR0BT T2AY W0 I IrIVBR R #oi;ﬁﬁ qw [BRPS || Thereis no pillage,

1

enmity, captivity, grief, weeping, and poverty, cheat (?), fraud, bribery, theft,

P

slander, hunger, famine, blame, destruction, weariness, trembling, sickness in

44

that distriet,— ©dJ07. Tbh. of @adR. 138.—wonox:. Not to be passed

beyond; not to be disregarded. 441.—®30%, 80, —- @08, 375, In that

manner, so, thus. 437. — ©@Ron, Thh, of oR3on, 151, — @R, A joint-

it

bed. 73.—©03one°, A king’s daughter. 248, —wddg . A flower-garden.

fy

e

443

B

783.— @303, A flower-bud. 95.— 9333, Tbh. of ¥RBF3. 147.— 293, Thh

of OFBF, 147, — VIR . = OB

147. — ©3%3. Grinding, ete. 561. — @I AW

Six cubits

355, — PVONRFN,S

402, —

A male who has a flower-like eye

wonreerol, A flowering amaranth or barleria

74, — PDORHREFON,, = VTSR ¢B

&

79 e RTOD) ,

A woman who is hasty from necessity. 195.— ©38033). = OIF

T30

195.— . 4738. 515

(It appears there as a verb together with

23)

YT, 473.— 939, 67. —°RI, TIB VIS

A vile man

296. —

BFL ¢, Tbhh. of &0 &

140. —on@, 3wy, At that time

19. 20. (Cf. @@

in Dictionary). — @833, A male addicted to play. 423, — @¥%er®. Addietion

B3 I CIPFS

Either -or

20. — IR0

(\’050

An

to play. 431.—&%%0

elephant-killer: a lion. — ¥8,. Leaving upon, ete. 557. —&dR, JPFoIHee

Vehemently, ete. 20.— @038, =&odR, 20, — &ody

Selecting. 556.— &3

©PT, 33 TI.T PTITS

Placed at the head of, ete

being engaged in or occupied

with; ete. 425. — ¥ F, (¥3oF).

An able, great man, 88. 352 in the following

verse :

FRSF NI & :Soa:ooSao a-’eaa F9,F0 AT BYBY oméss 8Ro |

FORIE z.uﬁaﬂo

083 JoRr Buerd ol P oo 23 ﬁuaz‘ao | — 80P (i, e. TBYY). 3,¢BIR 2153;5c

545, -maa

A male who is mclmed to play.

Smkmg in a fluid, ete. 140.—

@00R. 80. (A sweet cake?). —98¥. In a crowd: greatly. Ina verse under

65, and in one under 193. — 93 8. Datwe of a8. 265. — as . '&3 o. Thus,

in this manner. 437.— a38. A smxle 95, —A/INI (0. r. A3 ESE@)

A sweet

mango

55, — QFIFNRR Y

In the sentence @VTIFI,0N3 B0 JB,03039° QFoFe?

Aweo. 221.— 9B¥F38. Two pairs. 93. 94. — BWFSR Two choultries. 93.—

3 reony

Two ends of a garment

93. — A®IFA. 90. 101

(Two armies ?, see

a cat

DoR). — B3eFI. Two points

92, — QOMID. LaPIT

A rat-killer

547.— &3. Giving (3ID)

579. — &3d

Bringing forth young (S:39)30)

579, — QUTFY, 30 &

A rising river (WFIID 3w

333.— wwzdNn. Tbh. of

QUWRR.LA. See WV WIN. — &V

€9

pd

Eating. 557.— v ©R. In the sentence &

Forloea ORcdaey

214, — 202 8. Pulling up by the roots, destroying; a disease

of the external ear

See W . — I

How? in what manner?

W

FZo ?)

437, — T 8. = q0Fd. 487. — 3.1

. 437, — V3.2, 308& 0, Silently,

quietly. 437.— @v3338. The state of being high. 431.— ®IJAR. A man

who abstains from food. 407. — VW &. Thh. of w3 &. 160

NBTRY

Tbh

of NW3I=°. 133. — VR

e

So mueh as this in an intermediate manner

441, —

eVen. Foor. A suffix to denote a maker of

410, — VTS

140. — uerFey

140, — o>

140, — e,

140. — ol

A great eater

415, — 0¥

NIV ESN]

3808, = ow8n. 415, — w8533, Feminine of YW&IBA. 196, — vwR

441. — «w¥. Crying out, ete. 558, — ~TF0A

Tbh. of 9F0s3. 875.— R. A

1

stupid ete

female

197. — 2833%0. To cause to reckon, ete. H41l.— 2B JIA

Eight gavudas

351, — 8. 33.80¢ D0. Eight times. 351 — 30 &, FFo

How? in what manner? 439, — 23.= 3380

489, — J0BI3PE

A second

female. Plural 23&88c309 0f

185 . — 02363, F9030023923¢

A wind-eater: a snake

56%

P —

444

e

546, — obdw%@- Two times. 313.——m>5&“°g°%’6- Two knives or swords. 359, —

D30F. A female buffalo. 444. — 20 or DVNVe. A particle used in smarana,

vig¢ira and Amantrapa. 21.— 23¥ 8. The fragrance of flower-leaves. 73.—

wR€3Z. A mat of (or for) petals. 73.— ~"®3e. A place of petals. 73.—

28¥,¢. A ring of petals, 72.— 2¥M®. A young calf. 87.— 2¥E2:0). A

berd of young kine.

87.— 6. (¥TF, 0¥F). The gigantic swallow-wort. 140.

160.— 6. 140.—~®. 140. (Standing up?).— ~0,088. An upward look, a

bigh view. 332.— »T093. A heap, a crowd. See »F03A. — HX3BA. Thh. of

»T23d. The eleventh day. 160.— 9093 I3. Seven gavudas. 356.— 00303

"X ®% 3 A male who has seven hands. 356.— e, =T F023°. Seven times.

356.— w108, Bursting forth, ete. Plural %nodnee. 560, — w8S¢w?. Rising,

etc. of the body. 335.—%®3. 67.— %03, Pulling or rubbing. 561.— e

TSF.

A female sheath-maker.

201, — WFF03°.

One hand.

90. 101,—

WTRFS’. One stick; one arrow. 101.-— %R¢F®°. One span; one sword. 73.—

wdreomd. One end of a garment. 94.— wgRFAT. One thousand. 94.— w3FS,

One head. 358.— %9 Trembling. See under ¥RZOOS. —u¥ FB3X. Ina

verse on page 78 beginning ©0®.— %% 3n¢d. An inner garden. 101, — %%

*@N¥. A quarrel of the inland country. 73.—%%. 566. (A verb from which

%93 is derived). — %93. 566.— 2¥¢3. A good pearl. T1.— “¥AIBR. 71, —

0]

%930. A fine string of pearls. 333.— 2¥0n8 3. Good Kannada. 55.— %%

QY

02%. A male who has been born in a good village. 420.— %¥2,07. A male who

belongs to, or has been born in, a good village. 419.'— &Boomn$. A fight in

which one runs. 344.— %&®>%9. A person addicted to reading. 140.— .

Loving. 573.— &onsadr. A female servant, in the sentence ¥OSoNs® BSF Lo

R HONTF 3T ooen)ﬂos éo?g)dcﬁ. 84, — L3399°%. The basiness of a 6]ékéra.

|

431, — ToROME . = FoRMER in Dictionary. 431.— FoROIRN. EBO‘N’QSEBUS. A

3

R0 REIFO3V8 |

33° :5&5%"66. A male

brazier. 416.—FEF. T 92 @Yo

(s

who makes a decision that is not to be disregarded. 441.—F&E 0. A strong

§

bone. 339.— TRF. A strong, or rough, man. 403.—F@BM&R. Great grace-

fulness. 340. — FRo@BRBR. A great wonder. 93.— F&ooam. Excessive love,

8

ete. 296.— T T0&. A male who is blind of the eyes. 301.-— 0,03 Tbh. of

§

T 160. See however 3,038 — Fe§ 2. To be angry with, in the sentence

v onc3es @%mw,

D4k a*%ofmdd.

Tbh. of ¥®,Fw3. 378, — TR

0. = %‘%oﬁozﬁd. 8B s #%osowad. = #%oﬁudd. S8 = %‘sg@iu@acae:). BT BB ¢FUTFo.

I

An eye-ball. 346.— F@ S0 ¢ (T I efr). 55— FB S . A water-lily-like

eye. 95.— émwﬂ. The pupil of the eye. 89.-— ¥»,3. A male who has eyes.

Bl

403. — FOIFY. A man who has ears of corn, etc. 73, — Fe203. 80.— T3R8

A man born in the Kannada country. 420. 421, — F382. A Kannada woman.

190. —Fw9n. A poet. 410.— ¥ T3 OWF. A fragrance-sucker. 308.

;

546.-—55@53- The wife of a blacksmith, ete. 199.._._3‘-‘;)%71. FIFFSF. A

male who does any act or work. 412. —¥0®&3. A man born in the country of

¥

44

A

Karahida. 420.— #33@3. A woman born in Karahida. 196.— FS&an. A

man who resides in, or has been born in, Karahdda. 419.—F0F. 5553%5559‘%?

T0To 33,0 #330%53506 ©8w® &. Black colour, (as that of) cloth, blankets, etc.;

one who has a black colour, one who is black. 402. 403.— TOFII. A man

who has a black colour. 402. — F03%. A female who is black.

194, — T30, T

B2 ¢ a’o;:eardusammeaﬁmodo;gasm&msarsﬁe 0Re dReWBIPFo &%%aﬁo)égéaf@é

Sowe | ﬁq)aaa@amara’e‘é’e ﬁoeﬂ&s@p&égqﬂmém S928¢ 3. The word F39 denotes a

likeness (or form) made of bee’s wax ete. (surrounded with clay) in order to pour

out (the metal) in a fluid state (into the form), when one makes statues of gold,

silver and other metals (¢. e. & mould); or at the construction of a house, ete. it

denotes the first (or principal) post erected at an auspicious time. 296. See Mo

#do.._@ﬁmgs. 344. (Coulditbe FRFY ? CF. zscsﬁregd under BINFR, ?), — FIIFE,

A black pool. 334.—TFwx® 330, in the sentence B FuB&; (perhaps =

a TOTIR, a quarrelsome female). — FOW. TSwY® YK WRo, BeF2s. Who has been

born from the feet, a Stdra. 420.—FO3FS. A mutual fighting with stones.

331.— ¥o303), A superintendent of (precious) stones. 425.— FOI .= Fo3cdy.

425.—Foe® A plantain hard as a stone. 70.— Q0. Stone-rain. 93.—

TSR 569. (A verbal theme from which TI&F comes). — FI*8 S. A forked

hora of a bow.

83. — TIRIMIT® gr TIWIOMWEH’,

/

To see a wilderness.

380.,—

2030 @. A person addicted to take pods. 414.— 303 . Fruit having developed.

Plural s2c3)0n®%.. 553, — Fo0RT?. mMI;=os, A village. 419.— To080n. A man

who resides in, or is born in, a village.

419.—3v 8. A male lame in one

leg or in the legs. 301.—T38e’. A tank with a channel. 305.— 0,3, A

man who has feet. 403.— T23,cA. A fleet person. 223, — ®*R 3. A black

belly (7). 91.— 3@ nies. ©ASvedse. A male who has eyes like fire. 311.—

33 @306 A small pile. 53.— ¥2¢¢. %e@ed. A small orange. 337.— 338,

Low condition, ete. 368.— 33, Making close, ete. 557.— T®oRwed’. A small

stick or arrow. 87.— ¥3. Tbh. of %F. 158.— 37:T9c. Red new leaves.

343. — 3030 or TY¥IYR. A certain imitative sound. 140.— 300 Uprooting,

etc., that may stand for o 478, — 300 or $90S. A certain imitative

f

sound. 140.— 3w’ 368.— 3R ¥. The abdomen. 90. 368.— T3P IR

An inexaet solligé. 93.— F0%,. Tbh. of 9. 110.— FoBRReSR 3. To cut

0

with the sickle. 300.— 303. Boiling. Plural $o0%0ne?, 562, — oI 3. A

potter-female. 199.— S0P erd. =ToF)e3. 198.— TIDYT, TOTTSF. A potter.

(6

412, — M. A potter. 384.— ToeRady. A male who has a small hand or

S

small hands. 97.— 30303, A small house. 369.—30&. 3 e)zgsoﬁ:sa &

QU3 BIFwo 23¢83. A mind deprived of strength by fear or shame. 441.— F3F.

A man whose mind is deprived of strength by fear or shame.

441.— FoARRTY

A woman with a short neck. 328.—39. A suffix used in 3¢o, 8,593 and 3,78

545. — F@s,. Bending. 557.— T203. Sharpness. See under RSdTomse. — Fp

;A

O, A sharp warrior. 90. — FRn1Fe. A sharp knife or sword. 845.— FRnFd

|

%

%

e

446

P —

=TFRFFO. 90, — TR E

A structure where boiled rice is to be had (?). 90.—

111, — Fonaods®

342. —

goned, A female with red eyes

A red unripe fruit

T3 T

A red kind of rice

343. — @3, A reddish elephant

343. —TWO

A red flame

343. — 89 ¢3. A red cadjan leaf, ete. 341.-— Fomox. A purple

twilight

343, — FTR2RS. A dishevelled head of hair

83. — BRIFS. = TRZHTS

83. — TR ono. TFWBwedo. The red eocoanut tree (= ¥I0MY); (or a red plantain)

341. 342. — 5%

223 3. 343, — T00.=FWO. 343, — T3

A deaffemale

197 __-%‘:)o 3.

A red seed, in a verse under 193

see it under =3 &.—

B3R, I

R)aao.n:

02380

Burnished gold. 341

Cf. B39 in Dictionary. —

T, 0230,

A red lightning, in the instance RIVAS T 0830

218, — TRV VNS

A female weapon-maker, a woman of the weapon-makers. 192, — Tob@.e@. A

handy earthen pan. 305.— FO30F. A few times. 441, — ¥$03383. Companion-

ship, ete. 432.— ¥o. 140, — T

140.— Fenoodeeal. A erying peacock

344.— @I, Tbh

of T8

155, — TS

67. — FHRoTHBAS

A Concan

Brahmana female

190, — FROTITIH

crooked staff. 379, — TroTom) B

= BROTOTIB, 379, — FROTIIJF

A bent eyebrow. 372, — FRBORR, To cut

with an axe

300, — THRTw &3

A stain on the throat. 305. — 3w &, o

SO, 3 03FTA0E WD

3

Jumping and other surprising art

441, — TR P

140.—

BR RO’

380TT,3% ¢&F, Water from the end of a tank. 82. — TRtIITRD

FRED0 FRED0 FP3,RY &8 A3NF BRYT BT

A fight in which they mutually

strike one another with sticks

331. — FRPR, 3. Bonn,o

The top of a

mountain. 82.— 3,¢83. Playing, sporting. See @) 9, — T 3,008, A woman of

the Kshatriyas

190.— 299, 140. =0T, 67, — NS, Tbh, of P

143.—

183, ne3dzR o

Tbh. of 133, 408.— AR, A man versed in arithmetie

408.— N 33

Valiantness

See under R®IJBomew, — 18, Tbh

of .37

e P i e e T - i Tnl¥, B o

160. —n@3. A false woman. 329. Cf. 8% in Dictionary. — %2 N3. A female

seller of perfumes

192.— 1. See under NO38N. — n8333. The state of a

decent woman

430, — 11938, See under NIJVN. — NTIWR. 118 BE ORI

NPT aoﬁoa? g

A man who is engaged in (the business of) a certain water-

engine. ©®F NI B Bomdra® I BBt I B¢ Jodor WdTd F0InBA¢ dsf D3N

88,2030% ¢, Or one who is engaged in the guarding which is made in a fort ete.

= 2 £2 O £ o

by wandering about from watch to watch, ete. 441, — RI0FAL.

Fo23¢003 €.

The

i

plant Bignonia suaveolens

716; DR

A cow. See BF3MJe, 3 NDe. — BRI

A man who bruises bamboo rods, ete. 548

B R e

Boiled rice of the stick

f

B

(¢. e. boiled rice which has been turned with a stick ?). 89.-— 1¢*Re®d (0. r. Me®

of

MR 6D 9)

78, — TEPIBN. TeB B[S VODTIE, 3 0NFFOL VR, LTFOMo 3n¢ eTeRede

th

3. A Domba

441, — k3w, A charming man, in the instance to M&

TIE0

al

80. — ma3n&. The wife of an oil-maker

190. — ARN&. To cut a tree

4

380. — NBMAA®. The unripe fruit of a tree. 380. — NBoR&. = NBINR. 380.—

203

As R

)

FAL-plAf

With a whirl

ete

20. — RIBF30

ﬁui:eDESDO ;)) $;5°N & o

S

296. See FTY. — ROBIF

The most excellent of properties

Cuffing. Plural

E

R

447

FESSEES

NEOFRes. 552, — M9, TM@o, A seizer or taker. 414.— MO*Fe, 140. —

nwe®dS, Tbh., of TR FIMT. 378,_710)%56. (ﬂaﬁéeaﬁ, ﬁag‘ée, ﬁéﬁsf). Seizing,

taking, accepting; using, putting on; ete. 414. — R me, A gainer or winner.

383.-—Reomd0R. A knife (of the length) of a span. 55.—Red . The length

95. — RROR,

of a span.

140. —tweds?. A tubular vessel of the throat.

346. (Qf. Rwewe®, R0e30m99 in Dietionary). — fwm 9, = ReeTP. 346, —

BRGOB, Thh. of RRROZE.

129.—1n?&. A female servant. 240. (See & in

Dictionary). — 9. Tbh. of M™&. 140.— $208. (=mMOR or 20K in Dictionary ?).

See 9oTIR. — WIS A frightened cow. See ﬁdﬁ?&.ﬁﬁ&&. %9)9%3"0050

sw@ﬁ%g;{s#drmﬁ)ém RTSWR0. A term for the perfuming (of the body) which

is performed with an unguent of sandal, saffron and other fragrant substances.

441, —B8TF, 233373, A man who performs that perfuming. 441. (Cf.

B8 in Dietionary). — @3 3%. Tbh. of @§ So=’. 133.—BZ°. 140. —.

B398, A golden seat. 55.— @¥IBF. Cutting off with the nails, ete. 570, —

2830m9 0336, = Formd adde. 342.———?32335- %30,6F0. Manifestly, clearly. 20.—%0

mwo¥, = Towor. 343.-— B33 Beauty. 430.—2B8¢. 105. —WP&. 105.

(A

crested female? or cf. ¥J@ in Dictionary ?). — 23, Thh. of ¥3FF. 376.—

@P303. Tbh. of 'aé:%m:doso. 376. — @B38. Tbh. of 2332373, 160, — B3I,

A man who makes

gaupadas.

410

FRIRDYN. = WIAN.

410, — ®PPaN.

Sharing in, or entitled to, a fourth part.

376.—@*8. Four-fold; of four

kinds, in four ways.

376.— g0, Deceit (?). See under VITOS®. — WY

Tbh. of NPT,

143.— wni¥®am. A male who is clever in quarrels. 292.—

®R¥ST. A quarrelsome male. 402. — xoR. Tbh. of 0% 143. — wINTST.

A man who has a sacrificial cord. 402.— 3. Tbh. of 33,

143, — BRI,

A man who has fame.

402. — =¥%. Thh. of BV. 140.—=3933,. In a verse

on page 77. Cf. @338, in Dictionary. — 23%. Tbh. of 035&0F,

141. —

@R, 140, — BRWIMEF. A female gambler. 201. — ®2R1. A male gambler.

384. — mAWWM. A man who is expert in gambling. 305.—®ef. 140. —

¥eend, A female yogi. 202.

23w eeoons. 140,,__&'36053. Tbh. of ze;aﬁoSmG. 184140

WR0NR. = W0, 134, —TPTU. = wnd. 143, 402, (Is SPFY in Samskrita

Dictionaries ?). — 339, A spring, a jump; springing, jumping. — BN An

imitative sound, in the instance TNVTLI WRWF. 20, — BHIEB. A mutual

fight with tlubs. 331.— ®%. In the instance SATOS md®. 531. See 3@

i

% 8, — ®¥F. In the instance &t @¥Fo. 80. Cf. F¥Fo?r —BaTR. A kind

3

of adverb. 49. — @Jaﬁﬁ- b Cg@ﬁéﬁ- 49. — B3¥T. The bearer of a banner (?), in

the instance S0RBT® E¥TCE. 65, — ST ™. Cutting, paring, planing; a cutter

an abrader ; the divisor employed in certain computations. 538.—3&) 7. = 3&) 3.

441. — 38 WB. FHTYW FEFe. Bluntness or perplexity of speech. 20, — 33 .

Tbh. of #e8©. 149.—330. Thh. of 38 . 147.—390. =330 147.— 3&Y0.

=33 0. 147, —— S300°. 140, — 3FoFS0. Bringing. Plural S5oF3oi¢f. 572, —

)

3d93GF. Joining head to head. 570, — 3¥%. 8)98?@053@23& Decisively, certainly.

———

448

—

20.-—893. Sprinkling, ete. Plural 8930n®*

562, — 3YRFIN

The redness of

young leaves

it gy

140. — 3R, Becoming dry, ete

565, — 39e3T

The tree Terminalia bellerica

82. — ZTFBA

90, in the verse 3¢FF 03 3W3®

¥ZBLe P’ TRTrONYS® 8 ATURBRST DT ITo |

SITFB BTCFT IR IRTFFRNRRTO

Sy PIVT0 OPWUT0 ||. —39R. Suffering, ete

565, — 336

r S3)

The palm

Plural 33t 9 or S0IN®°

140. 193. (See the verse

(and other plants or trees)

quoted under SI»6 &)..— 321N A woman engaged in (gaining her livelihood by

= ZaeN. 193, — 3n. = 8¢

the produce of) the palmyra tree

193. — sd0N

378.— amye. Thh. of &30, 376.— 38 AR. 383. 49, See 283 in Dictionary.—

8383. Tbh. of 33. 376. — &3%n. Tbh. of 30, 376.— &00%F. Barterin

ete. 557. — 8 R, 08 Jowegre. Whirlingly, ete. 20.— 833038F, Tbh. of

TR F. 296, — 3930

‘What is thin or delicate

See 3930WRIB). — S8PIIWAIND

39,3, Boes

5.— 893, Becoming clear, etc. Plural 893on#¢, 562, — 93¢0

Bright lustre

See the third verse on page 100.— ¢.=2n. Tbh. of &F

378. — 308

A wicked, ete. female. 197. — 2839 (7). See B980T, — S900T)

Tbh. of 3082

160. — 3@y, A jungle for kine (to graze). &7.— 3RMORI &

An oscillating staff. 344.— 333

Taking. 561

me

140, —33:03°

A

mass of gold. 332. — 3woF

80. (Cf. 3 in Dictionary ?). — ¢,80°

Tender

2

green grass. 66.-—S€.970, Delicate lustre. In a verse on page 100. — S¥y5)

2O

A thin or delicate belly

55. 347, — 3eo

3ex3¢R0

w3 FFF 982, In

an unfirm ete. manner

YN 3w

197

(It is a term for a certain female). —

38¢TR

Thh. of 3,030¢%3

302, —

160.—3S¢30FS, A tree (used) for a chariot

2’

3e=9

Plural snire

or SNt

85. — 38R, /Proy

Excessively,

(

ete. 20. — SR U, Smearing, ete. 561. — 3#8I3. Swinging, ete. 561. — 29I T

d

STJYT0JIS A 3we

361, — 383

RishioR)

Nine times

Nine persons

fa

361. — 3003

Becoming wet, ete. Plural $%03)ontes

553, — SR¥D

Shining,

Vi

ete

SRFDONPE

191. —

562. — 326

140, — 32¢83n2, A female florist

E0t0%, A big male. 403.— 3n¢e3dF®™, A place of appearing. 87. — SR’

g

140. — 3R¢eE

140. — &%, Having three pits (?). 376. — &id¢t. Three cows

See Sop9), — 8T, Three faced ; name of an Arhat. — 3,08. Making haste

534. _.sms Thh. of 33,

194 cSeJo 833,

Page 65 in the instance I90°

z:éjo S0R

b}

Cf. 53@35@ in Dictionary. ——-5@33 &% 140, — B30, To satisfy,

fi

i verse under 474, —5598 33. Having a stlck etc. 402, — 3353, Thh. of

il

3,339 8. B39,0 FITFISe

WoFTr0y 93,3

A mint

378, — B

14Q = TR0

A man who sells corn

160. — B, 140, — W

[

405. — B3, Tbh. of B3

9

880, A very liberal man. 65.— 20

DM B8 PoPISTFIFITDTIRIYUWF 0

di

The (savage) bodily power of a man who is without fear and deliberation. 441.—

b

Qeay ¥, W, A man who is possessed of that (7. e. ®), a wild or savage man.

W

441 .__@\a\?ﬁ Tbh. of DwIIPF, 378, — Qe 3° (Do),

Playing, sporting.

of

See ™Y, — BT, Thh. of & 0BT

377, — 5333033-

Tbh. of &303>

377. —

Ro&eodd

Thbh. of & 8¢0d>

37 7. 22 BORT L Thh. of DB BT H; -~ R

Tbh. of

Wb

)

R

449

—_—

Qsa-’. BEQ e BEHT. =80 BT, - Bndodne=rmoded), (ST T. = 2adrd). =

36030, 377, — BRVVT. = HINF. 377, — BeSRNY. A female who worships an

idol. 111, — Zedn. ReIBo INFoTo.

A man who makes idols.

410, — B9,

=GN, 410+~ B9,

A woman who makes idols.

1992, — ®e3¢23°. Saeri-

ficing to the gods. — @¢Sex. Tbh. of WS, 129, — ®WIFI; A man in whom

faults are. 402. — 3,39, See under BIRB. A certain coin, a drachma, — 803395,

Two night watches. — @,0M. A doorkeeper. 418. —@3oro®. A person who is

addicted to receive money, etc. 383. — FIIS. A rickh woman. 402, — B83F3. Thh.

o

of 8. 123.— B3F. Holding, bearin

a7

supporting ; a bearer, supporter, pre-

server, — ®%. 466, in a verse. (Qf. @ in Dictionary?). — S35ve. GRS

TR,B0 WELTW,¢ T, A man who is proficient in laughter (or jest) or addicted to it.

423, — 38587, A female who is proficient in laughter (or jest) or addicted to it.

201.— 32%. Being extinguished, ete. Plural 33 #ne°. 568, — 8200008 To

bow, etc. 534.— S0n&y. A mauscle bundle (?). 332. —32F. A man who has

3R, q. v, 441. — IR0F0YR. Slight anger. 101, — IRD0®. Small power, ete.

g1, 58, 35 93 Fohaw SERAR ':'r’e)%;so;m"esa =9 2ewro Mo, A body beecome

441, — 0%,

decrepit by old age,

sickness or artificially made poison.

&3¢ A plant, a herb. 424, — 5300, S3050¢I®, A man who uses herbs,

ete

424, — 300N, A woman who uses herbs, ete. 193.— I980N&. = TadoA,

193.— 93 I3, Four ghvudas. 351.— 808y, A male with four hands.

53.——33%93033. A male with four heads. 97.—3@@3‘0%- A male with four

arms.

294, — IV, TaT DT, I, IITFs,

441, — S0,

140.

D

A navigator.

(Cf. 3¢o® in Dictionary ?). — 698>, A district to be ruined. 03,8300, the

district was ruined. 82.— R 3. A district-weight, ete. 90. — 83 8. Not

false, firm, in the sentence StBT® IR0, k&3 to IVITWHN® or SN B¢, 461, —+

b0, 2R o, A long extent(?). 339.— dRINF S, A long or large head.

345. — awonim®» O, The pupil of a long eye.

53. — awoned. A female with long

eyes. 29. 194, — d@MO°, A long foot. 327. — dB9NII°. A long row. 93. —

pB)mB0%, A female with long braided tresses. 328.— o363, A man

with a long body. 53. — B33, 80, — dBoFHHS, A man with a long forehead.

328, — 2833, A man with a long back. 329, — a®309, A female with long

fingers. 29. 194, — B0Be&®. A long pregnancy. 87.— d037. A man who

401. 407, — RT3,

Tbh. of ¥3RT,

1

practises or observes religious observances.

160, — acrires,

BOAMFZOIW,Bo, The opening through which water goes out.

90, — JWRFY, 00 3wP, To wash with water. 292.— &emmiﬁ, Buttermilk

diluted with water. 92, 2e30F@wa%. The place of a water-pool. 87. — eIF

81, [0° 93 wwo IXYPRItws | VDO I JTL Ty Roa, w8 0mdews. A man

who is in the habit of practising with water: one whose habit is to eross rivers

ete. on rafts or also otherwise. 441.— 0% Eo3. A man with soft thighs.

328. — SoBn @ad¥°. A woman with soft thighs. 182, — BoRowy B3R, 72, —

f

20R099,no°, A door (which is so narrow that) one has to squeeze through. 72, —

57

450

e

I3

140. - 303023,

Bearing in mind, ete. 561.— 3367,

A neighbouring

man, ete. 332. — SUM&. To seize land, ete. 381. — BVIR, =IVM2, 381, —

Sdwee®, A firm condition of life. 74.—Jw)e, 140.-—:‘3358&55. Tbh. of 3¢,

124. — 3, One of the chief officiating priests at a S6ma sacrifice.—s¢RwIF .

A sunny place. 73.— R¢RwWFE,. The disk of the sun. 82.— 8483, Swallowing.

561. — 30%°,

(3@@35 9.

A verbal theme from which 2% (3XWJ ?) comes.

569. — d¥MaB>, A wilderness (full) of flies. 332. — 300, 140.—IRBE>.

Seeing, sight, ete. Plural 883119, 549, — 3?2, Tbh. of S0, 160. — 371

or 3%3. See 8T in Dictionary. 49. —IZReB), A bird’s nest. 304. — I

¢3. Thbh. of H530s. 160. — 3oy, The sun, 537, — Jonacds®, Jeoobds,

Green, unripe fruit.

341, — Jow30d,

Fivefold, having five parts or limbs.

376. — 3898, A man who resides in, or has been born in, a town. 419, —

S meONe, A female silk-weaver. 192, — 387302, = I¥m9n2, 202. — B8,

[y B ¢ BF T, A side, a faction.

441,——55&&5_ 38 (i. e. 5&5&) FoIFS,

IT T8, A partisan. 441, — 33@3. Thh. of gér‘%ﬁ 407, — SRR, PoRT,s.

A man who eats the remainder of the food left by his master: a servant. 407.—

S839. A female commander of an army. 200.— 32007139, A man who receives

money (as a bribe?).

414, —3B,.

+

Ripe fruit being produced. 557.———598;)\@,

A man who receives ripe fruits (as a bribe?). 414.— 3@ 8. 80. — IFW.

E¥]nle) :a?pﬁo A8 Pradetne 99 | 333,373°. A man who makes a dwelling place or

abode; one who makes verses. 441.— 300°% in TRBS* AT, a variety of

sounds to join (?). 585.—33. Tbh. of ®3. A path, a road. 142.— 353 3. Tbh.

of 8O, A path, aroad. 130.—333. 431.—33333, 431, — FoI. = Bed»

in Dictionary. See w32 ) 033®, — BOWIR®). BB Sww). B3330. Ten hundred, a

thousand. 363.— BoZ0°. Ten persons. 363, — T DO, B359033°, Ten times.

363. — Jo3 3,

Do B s,

Quickly.

20, — 38w, A pearl-merchant. 424.—

O&%. Tbh. of 8,3, 147.— I0Ron, Tbh. of S0%,0M. 151, — Ze*. A drummer.

416, — 3*3&8N. = Je*n. 416. — SuRBFad.

A man with a board-like

chest.

328. - Boym™. Thh, of 8033, 160.

DA

140, — S,

D[IFFSF, A man

§i

who cooks, etc. 410. — TITOIN, = T3,

410. 411, — 3F9N3, A woman who

cooks, ete. 192.— Twom,

A singer. 384.— 830333, Thh. of ©IReIWT,

378, — T3030090. = TB3IWT3. 378, — TIJ. See VTIIFA. (Is Tamil, ma:aﬁcﬁé,

553, — T2,

an army, meant?). — 3303,

Jumping, ete

Plural o"SDOSiOﬁ %,

%j

Fighting. See ©w3%°. (Cf. Tamil] %), to fight). — DISH’. FoBdeed

A

)

A

woman addicted to quarrel. 82.— B, A jumping iguana (?). 82.— FISFI,

A Brahmana woman.

202, — I3

o~

o —

oJ

V35,

202. — ™I3IBN2,

A female of

j\j

the caste of snake-catchers.

192. — 2Imd. A snake-killer:

a mungoose ; a

D

peacock. 547. — %33 A snake-eater: a peacock. 546.— 29338 . A male with

of

a snake-ornament. 441. (Cf. c"éf?‘&i).~m°9e3€. Tbh. of T99:3. 140, 160, — »o2

s}

@0y, The hind end of a garment. 93, — »3 &, The back of the head. 349. —

140. 160.-—

1

2Z0n. A seller of long pepper. 409.— 2¢93. Thh. of 2¢d%.

iy

451

JUEEENES

DTR TR

Thh. of PTRIT&®

133

AW, A speaker of lies. 329, —

Fixing, as an arrow

admitting, ete

HHT7.—pI&Ne, A female florist

192. —

JEM S,

A hind leg

369 50 9=

One who has a wife

402, — X T

WS‘SJB 95 m)swo 9D, N

0,80 0¢85

570 °

A man addicted to, or oceupied about, women

424 e wwac&@ 0.

A man with a moon-like forehead

327. — I&°I800309°

A

woman with a moon-like forehead.

182. 328. 330.—I0I.

140, — 38WIJ0RA,

132, — 3ol

In a verse under 140 (page 100):— T°03£9¢ WONFI® WA

TR ¥6 WPTRA JVITIT0 T3 | T3P IO 33,030 Jeeworiodro Feodd 8T

FoedeBo )

SRS

Entering, etc

Plural 2pR3nie°

560. — 3p%3

[IeTWI0

P00 TU, » I3 323w ¢

1, a river; 2, an ornament (¢f. TIILW ; T3 in Dietion-

ary)

311, — W@ 3B, An ornamental dress

441, —pow¥. A golden staff

93. — Y3, A male who has a (big) belly, in the instance 8,330 B3Fo

402, — xp00A

To cause to fight, in the instance POART® w00 WeeBo

537. — Qprad, To cause (somebody) to make (something) fight, in the instance

PROWF AR 30300 INRILNRJF® WoRo

541, — Jpeaedor, = PBORY, in the instance

BpeawrB3® ¥R0do WaeRo, 537, — PI MR, A sheet of gold. 93. — PR F. Joining,

ete. Plural 3pJFne°

568. — P, 0Nk

A golden stone

55, — P31, A man

who is addicted to, and busy with acquiring, gold. 424. —p3 9. 67. — P03 ¢

561

Beating; a blow. Plural 23003 1¢*

555, — RS

Nourishing, ete

e

FE

An outer tie, ete

101. — peFodss

The upper part of the hand. 101.—

TR, An outer fort

101, — Jpeszwnre, Jposwes 13, A swelling at the

73. — POINRTFS

13—

posteriors

Cows of flight (?)

260%, Bearing on the

head. ete

557. — &R 3. A wonderful elephant

46. — PR WITR

A new

choultry. 91.— PR 8n10

A beautiful antelope

93.— PR w39, New cloth

91

PR B0

A new balance, ete. 101.— PR 30¢8., A new garden. 101.—

DRR VBT3B

Fine loose pearls. 87.— P& W@, A new camp. 87.— PR SR

A new pool

87. — PR Inew ., A new artificial structure

87. — PRI, P

A

new woman

169. — PR3, A wonderful mountain

92. — PR 33,3, Beautiful

sugar

89. — pertd

(A verb from which PGP comes). — PO

140. Plural

FOJINYE

574.— 3ped. Name of a man

80. — 2w, Tbh. of A ¢4TF

160. — &pce’

Used as verb intransitive in the sentence PN 0 WO ONPS T

239,33 VO

463, — Jpee Bk

Parts to be scattered

193 (in a verse). — J°30

B OIRTR %am’ar

Oh! woe to me!;

unexpectedly. 20. —

718)

See reJa&:rfsao £

o

-

dJ D

0303, Na 3¢ RRARD mm e@a o3 n3as é@a

poe ]

o~

&Dﬁﬁ@v@%ﬁ Eﬁdo?i- = ?3@@&350

€

N,

-

9T I3 el 3

. Pratisthana denotes the eating of the remainder (of the dinner)

of him (i. e. of the master), one (who does so) sitting down in the very same

place in which the master has eaten, risen and gone. 407.—%%322. A female

of noble birth

191. — 235287, A mindful woman

201. — Wn R I

A tiger-

skin, 379.—woni¥x’. A man of Bangila

420. — W8 30BS030e°

A woman with

round breasts

328. —w¥H. A man on the road, a traveller, in the instance

WAV’ WE T WD

536. —W&3. A female who beats; or a lean female

e

452

—

29, — WBNRHYS.

A woman of the north.

182, — WARH S,

To take a cudgel.

380.— w&3R, To cause to make beat, in the instance WRIARFES BRI 3.

541.—weawd, 80. (Tbh. of 65, trade?). — WHOB). = WV, 80.— V3. 329,

(Thbh. of 3,82 ¢f. WS, — WS),30d3°, WBL,IA BI®. Water, milk, ete. drying

up. 333. 344, — o WAL YY), 50%"’a’?§~®§¢§8- What is born in the sky:

a flash of lightning. 420.— WX, d{ePoBrs. Quickly. 20.—waA3). 205 036 ¥F,

wody odY. In the evening. 278.— w83 Thh. of F38. 147, — w3, A road

whereon (somebody or something) comes. 332.— we°T¥°." A naked foot. 101.-—

&Jﬁmgy A vain man. 172.——%3630"30%’6- A vain woman. 172.— 2395, = we)

B2,96. 172, — WsoFrR. Coming. Plural WFFSRes. 572, — W9 0. A big mountain.

463, — WS o8

.

B

A man with a strong hand. 331.— 233, Strong effort. 66.—

&)?ﬂ%

A great villain.

66. — WV WIN.

A man of great exertion, ete. 329.—

g

W BA. A great valiant man. 66, — w0308 Abundant duck-weed. 66.— 2%

oJ

2&. To seize the pot-stone pencil. 298. — WI¥IIB. = WITNB. 381. — WIMPS'T.

The making and selling of bracelets.

431. — wer3en.

A regular lustre, in a

verse under 140.— 2. Living (7). 140.— w2 3S. 140.— we” 9. Living, steady

lustre, in a verse under 140.—2®713e. Thh. of F3F3e. 408, —WnTET. A

grammarian, 408. —ACTH. A doorkeeper. 418.— A3, = WINSK. 425, —

WITY,! Thh. of Fonod. 140. — w39R83." Thh. of a%d?ﬂ 160. — w38. = 790. See

DWW, —LIITONIEP.

nnsndrs.

A hollow of the sky. 346.—%371. One who

resides, or is born, in the sky. 419.— w73

e

&

The swelling of a wale. 73.--

waer. = 2398y, flesh, in WO HCIPBT. 82, — W, A place of living. 90.—

W) D). A happy living herd of kine. 87.—2on?. Thh. of Bord. 140.—

Wzohonodr. In the second verse under 468, — VIR, 3nd . Silently, quietly.

20. — D33 = WA 20, — Ve[E. A rough manner or custom. 369.— W)

=#03. A man of rough manners. 369. — 22 3. Stifly, in Yy 3 Verd. 20, —VER.

Tbh. of V038, 160.—W%3%. Tbh. of V@Y. 140.— V9F. A white man. 403. —

W93%. A white woman.

194. — 2903

A whitish male.

Instance P00 &)?j\ o.

102, —A909°. A white female. @W9039° &37,8. 102. Plural 239?050%56- 884.—

W9T*. (A certain verb). 507. (Cf. $¥0° in Dictionary?). — 0. 140. Cf. ¥y,

in Dictionary? — ¥@3,97. 538. (jf. WFy 94 in Dictionary ? — De@32,1. To enter

an abode, ete. 380. — WRBIPM. = VBBH, ™. 380.— Deedn. A lute-player. 406. —

20eR. Thh. of Peo. 144, — DetS. = e, of which the plural is WeRones, W, ¢°

or W 9. 233, — VeI . A halting place. 55. (f. Dews3 3, — Ve 09, Ve

3969, dWT. A camp. 87. — D¢ T8, The econsonant ¥ 66, — WIS

Tbh. of 3.

147, — WM&, =WoNS. 147. — WR3Y, 2996;5&. Deception, fraud (?). 415. — We3om.

SRI[RENE.

A man living on deception (?). 415.—we3on.

A woman living

on deception (?). 193.— We30N8. = we3dN.

193, — WeIBR=Wr3DR. 415.—

Bondos. BVeFITMs. A sunbeam. 341.— Bones, ﬁ@oﬂw%aé’geﬁo& The sun-

stone: erystal. 342.— 3. Hot. See ©23 nwcr, @3y 0. — W3 eer’. Hot riee.

343.— %0 357 Manifestly, clearly. 20.— 2320, A hot flame. 343.—

——

453

PR

@39 @, A hot potsherd. 336. 341. 343.— 383, A fiorce female. 102.—

zﬁ&&nacsa. A hill-jungle. 379.— 380z, = zSédgdnado. 379, < zﬁé&&:‘)’@wcﬁ A

hill-stream, or a hill-path. 379.— B8)3pc’ = S 3", 379, — e, 80, — ¥&e)

na. (Originally @dernsd). =38nir. 83. — Bxe@. A frightened iguana (?).

82.-- ¥BNFR. (Originally B¥a3nFed). @33ne. A frightened cow. 83.— W3R S°.

The skin of the back. 80.— #®830. A hot flame. 343.— $39,¢3). = 3udn .

o

G480 a:'sssmwtb. BN

L4

Hot ashes. 341.—%¢0 (or ¥¥0). A rain of white

colour. 93.— BT (or B¢ ¥). Podrid=sagrs. Frightened from fear, ete. 20.—

23%% ‘White eloth. 223. 347.—?»39{)71?3. ‘White flax. 336.-23%- A white

female. 197. — ¥0J. 140.—3¢®, 140.— Beddon. A woman who deals in, or sells,

roofs.

193, — 23¢30Nn 8. — 3edoN.

193.—@37%. An impediment of roots, ete.

90. — 28¢R0. Hotness. See ¥R, Ve @, — 23200,

A hot flame. 334. 343. —

BedRe¢@. A hot potsherd. 343.—3:330. A trader. 329.— BeB0RRC. A man

clever in spying. 305.-— #383). RBHFIOISZ, 00 TEIOZ,ZTWIe. An old dirty

piece of cloth, mat and other things. 441.— Ze 7. 3a° (oY) MBI, Aman

who puts on an old dirty piece of cloth, ete. 441.— @3#%,. A vociferous woman (?).

197. — ¥ew. 140, — Bee® 140, —w,xo03. A Brahmana female. 28, 190.—

3 30. Deception, fraud (7). See W83 — 303039. 60. Cf. 393 &30 in Dictionary. —

SRI9,. A washerwoman. 200.— 303820, Water of a pool. 380.— Sx@on5n .

To fall into a pool. 380.— BBV’ = FBJR . 380, — 30838, Bending, ete.

FBIR. 579, Plaral =oe830ones, 554. — B0

140. See STSOS@éCO’ in Diection-

ary. — BITIN. FBITLe 8 HBeRFHF. A man who composes the madanavati

metre.

412, — DRP0OZB. Thh. of IROZS.

129, — J0I3R3F0.

The articles of a

house. 89.— FBTHN. JF DBekne WTIBFY ™, A wood-pecker; a wood-cutter,

548, — J0BN&B, To cut a tree or wood. 382.— JVToNR. = SIVNE.

a carpenter,

382.— 3ododdg @n. A foolish laugher. 66.— S0BoFTRe®. Rice with a drug in

it

879, DRIFoRPES. = IBFNHLS. 379, — mw{s\. 140.— S»R. Tbh. of IPH.

143.— 390%0%. Disregard. See under RTodcTde. — SRoNAT. The splendour of

a mango.

348. — I00B Y.

A small branch of a mango tree. 348.— IPo®RTY.

A cluster of mangoes. 348.—Sn®e H. 348.—In3N. A talkative woman.

193, — SP3DAL. = I030A. 193, — IN303IBN. A talkative man. 415. — SPSIMIEE.

An opening bud of a mango. 332.—=3930%,. The flower of a mango. 348.—

S932 600 A couple of mangoes. 348.— JPON. IPddo FeRIFo. A man who

worships Mari. 413.— TI%e®2. Another iguana (7). 82.-—-SPRRCFSS. A staff

that measures a fathom. 90.— SNIIEN. [NRCITITs.

A male florist.

416.—

SRS836n8. A female florist. 192._—;559;595& See uv%neéﬁ, m:’oo%’aéméﬁ. B r (> Fo

Tbh. of 983, 160.— SRFO. = IRVS. 140. — J9E. 488.— IR, An artificial

structure. See RPF-. — IRELY. Sn) B BewI® &3on. A man addieted to making,

ete. 545. — IPQE. 140.=3nE. See also the following verse under 193:—

=20 8 1e¢ 3recie ¥ Aee9 03 ¥¢ Wen BB FIY B MY0 | e BOFS 9T T3

830 ¢° IO OWNWEI® Ao || —INePR e’ An artificial stream. 87.—

v i i

454

—

2rdd. Becoming great, ete. Plural DTSRe. 560. — 2002030, A fire-fly,

ete. 344.—293). Past participle of 0. 482. 506.— BS. Pounding. Plural

DOBTONS®. 562, — AR, Thh. of I)&eT. 160.— 9. (A certain verb). 566.—

APJ. A bhava noun of 209. HE6. — QRONVD. PeITS T DBeRkpe ;. A fisherman;

a crame. 547.— S0F. Tbh. of J0®. See BOIZNF. — 30T Thh. of =3I

147. —30Fy948>. To cause to rinse the mouth with water and spit it out, etc.

Instance : — J0FY 93T TptA0 ©%eo. 541, —B0FR R Three crores, ete.

101. —30F8, 3. Three kos. 68.— S0mog. Closing, ote. 559. — ST 9.

A budding pomegranate. 74.—I0NOEW on®. A cluster of buds. 73.— 3003 8.

Three bankers, ete. (?). 94. — S0 3@ Three choultries. 93. — 30228 worfo. Three

ends of a garment. 93.— ﬁoozi\zg,. Three halting places for travellers, etc. 68.—

&500%3531)335- Three thousand. 94.~—50023Jaw€@?3-

94.— J00). TN

3

;7o Violence,

audacity, ete. 423.— 328 F3®. A man disposed to violence, ete. 423.— 323 3.

So00e88. Three heads. 360.— =03 @. Three ties, ete. 101, — S0R@Brea),.

2T0H o R

A knot from the root to the top. 83.— TR 3. = FIWBINE),

83,_.3»&%53@5.

Three spans.

68, — ;Sao:)go;wﬁ.

The first sunshine of the

morning. 536.— 3208, & 0. Three times, thrice. 360.— S0 dR.BA.

Eighteen feet; (or three humble bees). 68.—=030833,%°. Three servants, ete.

68, — S00032,0°. Three persons. 360.— JVF0% = [o03)T¢. 354, — F0ge o oe,

A cluster of thorns. 73.— 300?365 (or 309¢3). A prickly garment. 93. — BN 0

nee

A bundle or cluster of thorns. 66.—=293n0%. A door of thorns. 72.—

I eond. Prickly ends of a garment. 93.— S0e0n7R.

To immerse (v. tr.) to

let go down, ete., in the instance '&J%ﬁo ﬁ%ﬁﬁ 9 P o SN0, 53 6. — [,

140.— Jonm@. Three heaps. 353. — SoenRa3y. A male with three hands. 97.—

Swenie®. Three parasols. 353.— S0wdwedd. Three spans. 353.— S0LpBEE.

A female of the east. 140. — SoRRSa).

A male with three heads. 352, — J0®

©93. 31¢. Three cows. 352._._;:53.@@@0536. = mJaﬁojoﬁ. 97, — FRBB03, =

BoRRBE3. 352, — J0RIFA. Thrice. 88.— 3083, Thh. of 32t 160. See Bec3,

in Dictionary. — 30207, A seller of black pepper. 409.— 3005 3°. The skin of

the body. 89.—399&. To cause to chew. 62.—H03 0. A man with a soft

hand. 331.—3988R. A tender bud, in a verse under 442, —39T¢. A

gentle, etc. woman. 59.— 303 urod. A man with a kind heart. 14.—308adr

o8,

Jo0wo.

A woman with a kind heart.

182, — B,

Black pepper.

140. — 3% 140, —30¢w08. A man who has been born in a superior village

or town. 420.—S0twsT%. A superior village or town. 420.— 3003, A

precious pearl. 66.—350,%. An excellent coloug, 92.—3¢03,3%. An excellent

word. 92.—3%0%. Scooping, ete. 561.—3we®, 140.— 383, Thbh. of Sa¢

é

B8, 143.— 30T, Striking, ete. JHIR. 579. Plural SDINSS. 569. —

0 R,

Striking, ete.

Plural Swemonss.

549, — SBLATID.

A deceiver, ete.

423.— 98,33

A man who is guarded; one who guards. Instance:— 0% 330

no®o,

402.— 08038, Thh. of BAIT.

E

160.— 03302030

8oona0RPTITS. A

P

JR——

455

chief of horsemen. 295.—032°Ft°. 140.—09. Tbh. of 88. 159, —doced. (A

feminine noun). 197.—«*2¢@n. A laugher, etc. Seo 505393%@?1. — woun. wowdo

®eARITo. A man who lives by taking bribes. 401. 415, —©023A. A woman who

takes bribes.

198. — vodAd. = wolA.

1983. — ©oB3B8R. = voidn.

196, — 8.

A deeply designing woman. 197.—9309%. 140. (= 930987, - 030 eR. Thh.

of GJDISQ,@% 160.— 035\;@3,5. Lasciviousness, lustiness, lewdness, dissoluteness. —

Sn. Tbh. of IiF. 153.— 363, 80. (CF. w8 in Dictionary?). — S393. A man

born in Varala. 420.—Svo. #)88rs. Clearly, manifestly. 20.— 89 0.= Soo.

20. — D3TIR.

To pass over, ete.

59, — DRIMITL.

To see the moon.

382. —

DREIOMITE. = VP, 382. — ARSI . That has poison. Instance: — DRI o AeRo.

402, —Jwo. Ry tagrs Manifestly. 20.— 30829, Thh. of So®

3. %9.

D

140. — Djes.

Tbh. of ®,¢& 140.—®oZ. Tbh. of 3=y,

140; =AM, = ﬁeaga. 441, — 30T,

== nga&’. 441,_;399%. ﬁs*ao:ﬁs*ag(}zﬁm’go @oz&mmaaﬁosm;‘oéeﬁméa’a. Two words

which denote the particular limbs of a hump-backed and dwarfish man. 441.—

RO F. (A man who is small:) a man who is hump-k;acked or dwarfish. 441.—

RASS,. A man with an umbrella. 402.— &3> Thh. of 3. 147.— A

Tbh. of ¥ . 160.— AFodomam. A combatant, in the following verse under

384 : — WOTOMIBR nes) 380 TH 03 'éo;ﬁwoioacgpcs.wﬁ SWptido | FwoFos RITo

Me JRoFoRcly me) 330 200¥33tw)0 || a warrior’s valiantness, sharpness, even

the disregard of the combatant who pushes away fierce soldiers in a vehement

fight one has to call the essence of valiantness.—R33IB . Tbh. of ?fgd&)%ﬁ.

406. A man who binds, confines or checks the voice or tone (?). — 8SIB 3. A

female saravandiga, 192.—R0&Z. Tbh. of ANFI. 147.— BABRe. A garden

of young plants, etc., in a verse under 193.— 83&¢3. Tbh. of 3d3ed. 138,

29%. Tbh. of ROv. 139, —FWF. Thh. of FRFT. 143, — m0Y 9. Komdews. A

man addicted to contracting debts. 545.— @m0, A place where calves are

in a row or in rows. 87. — @ARFSR.

A male with a thousand heads.

356.—

AAVREFS. A male with a thousand arms. 356.—A%S. With the sound of

splitting, in the sentence AT ANTW. 20.— A0FT, A0WT, 2B, Thh. of 2wWT.

378. (f. A00TT, ete. in Dictionary, and At030T3, ete. — 200230 Thh, of 3,¢0a0.

296.—2¥. 140, in a verse near the end. — 20333, A03WIT, 220392338, = AOWT,

ete. 378. —AwB. 82. A screaming iguana (?).— dtS. Tbh. of 2¢3. A female

;:

who is disposed to, ete. 160.— At¥oore. A split cheek. 55.— 2e¥ od®, A split

capsula, 193 in a verse. — ¢8R &,. A split abdomen.

91.—AN3. Fearing;

tearing off. Plural RonSores.

554.— R0o%N3. A female collector of customs.

191.— A8, Tbh. of A

160, — R0,

Breathing, ete.

Plural ﬁooﬂgpori s,

55H3. — RIFTUFonoBI?. A woman with curled hair. 194.— ?50?%3. With the sound

of pouring, dropping, ete., in the instance Bogd R0D. 20, —AeATeY. T, ¢.

82.— Anodde. Thh. of eVA 0, TR0 A cook’s place, a cooking place, a

kitchen.

378, — RRES.

FTo ¥FWR0 J,

A. time, a turn;— making known,

announcing, proclaiming,

apprising,

publishing,

relating,

communication ;

——

—

456

information ; representation ; delivering, giving, entrusting; an offering, oblation;

dedication. 425.— RREs303). RREPR ¥ ©PF Zo. A man appointed to proclaiming,

otc. 425.—RPEDN). A female AW 195.— AT, = AW, 425, —

R&,2. A female banker, ete. 190. 200.— A3 . 67.— &SI, 140.— R¢%0. 140.—

ARY or BBIY. A general. 426.— 3. Drawing water out. 569. — Awed

Tbh. of ®22. 160. — 326 140 (where PS> is separately adduced). —

Rpwor. 80.—ARAI0B). A kiss, or the affection, of a daughter-in-law. 101.—

3%, See 2%,.—-R3FC. Thbh. of AZF. 123. —F3)F. One who remembers or

recollects. — ROWE T, See #OIY7. — YR Thh. of 383 145.— 3R. Tbh, of

154. —X8&. Tbh. of

29N

160. — BORT.

33,%.

<)

Seratching ; spreading.

569.— ®sF0. Tbh. of TSF. 123.— ®RB3. Thh. of 3,7933. 160, — T0A. See

7 -

&)e}zanoﬂ. —%B. Tbh. of ﬁédojo. 160.—%

%

Thbh. of 3, (3,53) 150. — e,

Thh. of »¢3. 145, — Bu. By BW° 300CIRTS @dé@cmcﬁmr . 1, The body;

2, the front tuft of hair. 312.— BOYBY.

a%e;mo ﬁieg‘mo ;30% [E), oﬁaozgpo.

1, A fight in which they mutually trample on the body of each other. B Fvo

T FF° LORT o HAIWIT oSoo%cms?G ©%). 2, A fight in which they mutually

seize the front tuft of hair of each other. 312.

RSP N

R2I= o=

s

e

S e G il Zan v iy

INDEX.

— e QAVASD T—

The numbers refer to the pages.

|

Kannada and Samskrita letters, syllables and words,

wherever required with due diacritical signs.

a. 1. The final letter of many crude

am. 2. Masculine pronominal suffix 111

nouns and pronouns 34 — 36. 46, 47.

119. 218.

60, comprising masculine, feminine

am. 3. Termination of the third person

and epicine words 37. 45. 47—49.

masculine singular 88. 127.

51. 207, and neater words 41 — 44.

am. 4. In the imperative 148 seq.

a

.

2, Sign of the nominative singular

am. 5.= adi 213.

42. 43. 48,

of the words under g 1.

am. 6. And, ete. 266 seq.

49. 60. 61. (f. 218.

akarmakadhétu. 89.

a.3. (=4a1). Sign of the accusative

akaranta. 31.

akum. = akkum. 147.

singular. and plural of the words

under a 1. 42.43. 50. 52, H3. 62. 63.

ake, = akke. 1.

59. 60. 62. 63. 73.

akkara. b.

a. 4 (=2a2).

Sign of the genitive

singular and plural, in the singular

akkaramaleé. b

occasionally suffixed by means of

akku, = akkum. 147.

akkum, Of agu 111. 147.

one or more euphonic letters (see d,

n2, ina 2, anal, dai, da, na, ara1)

akke, 1. =arké. Sign of the dative 59.

60. 62. 63. 73.

42, 50—60. 63. 656—T5. 80. (Cf.

112

akke. 2. Imperative of agu 111. 150.

338

a.

5. Sign of the vocative 81. 82.

a,

6. Sign of the infinitive 122. 157,

akshara. 5.

160. 161. 324.

aksharamalg.

5

7. Of the imperative 149 seq.

aksharartpa.

4

8. In Tadbhavas 31. 32.

aksharavritti

30

a.,

9. Taddhita suffix 29. 36. 200.

aksharasanjnakara. 4.

10.=am 3. 127.

aksharasanjnartpa. 4.

aksharatmaka. 4.

a.

11, Vulgar form of va 1., 115.

a.

12

Becomes 4 24. 189. 212, and

ageé. 1. Sign of the dative 53.

changes in 0 47. 51. 53. 58. 111. 112.

agé, 2. In the formation of adverbs

am. 1. Sign of the accusative 41. 43.

169 (and adjectives 243).

47. 48. 50 — 54. 56. 58. 59. 62. 65 — 67.

ankitanima. 30.

69. 71. 73—715.

ankeé. 22.

58

458

P

angikara. 176.

atva. 32;

aéétana. 37.

ada. = ada. 111. 142.

ad8agannada. 5. 432.

adu. 1. Demonstrative neuter pronoun

atiga. Taddhita suffix 203.

singular 47. 58 — 60. 112. 222 seq.

adi, = am. 213.

adu. 2. Termination of the third person

adiga. = atiga. 203.

neuter singular 127, 157,

adé. =are, ode. 167. 271 seq. 319 seq.

ade, 1

Sign of the negative participle

an, 1

Augment 61. 62. 80.

106 seq. 111.

an. 2. =ana 1. 60.

ade. 2.

Third person singular neuter

133. 135.

ana. 1. (an-+a).

Sign of the genitive

58 — 61.

adhikarana. 381. 389.

ana. 2.= ana. 111. 282,

adhyarodpa. 412. 415. 416.

adhyhhara. 413.

anaké. (an -+ a+ke).=ange. 61.

anakké, = anaké. 61

adhyaharya. 406.

adhva. 382.

anattanim. (ana + attanim). = anindé.

60

an, annu., Verb 352 seq.

anada. (ana+-da). Signof the genitve 61.

ana. 1.

Sign of the accusative 60. 68.

anadindé. (ana + da - inda).

Sign of

ana. 2. = antha. 248.

the ablative 61.

anaksharatmaka. 4.

ananunasika. 16.

anim, (ana+im). Sign of the ablative

58. 60. 61.

anitu, ete. 257.

anibar. 241.

aniga, Taddhita suffix 203.

aninda. (apa -+ inda). = anindam. 61.

anishta. 382. 386. 389. 395.

43. 47—51. 53. 56. 60.

anindam. (apa + indarm). = aninda. 60.

anu. 1.=am 1.

63. 67— 69. 75.

anindé. (ana +indé). Sign of the abla-

tive 60. 61.

anu, 2.=am 3. 127.

anu, 3.=am 2. 218.

ange. (an -+ ge). Sign of the dative 58.

60. 74.

anunasika. 14. 16.

anuloma. 11.

atisaya. 302.

atisayatara. 310.

anusvara. 16, 21.

atu, =adu 1.

4. 222 seq. 241.

ané, 1.=ana 2. 248.

attanim,

Sign of the ablative 41.

ané, 2. =age 2.

48 — 50. 52. 54. 67. 74. 75.

anéya. 256 seq.

anékakshara. 79.

attaninda. = attanindam. 50.

attanindam. = attapindé. 41. 48— 50,

anékiksharadhatu. 22. 2> — 28.

52. 4. 67.

anékaksharasabda. 32. 34. 35.

attanindé. = attapim. 41. 48—50. 52.

anta. 1. = antaha. 188.

54. 67.

anta. 2. 109. 141.

anté, On dit. 136. 142. 358.

attu, 1.=atu. 74. 222 seq.

attu. 2. Termination of the third person

antha, etc. = antaha. 188. 248.

188. 189.

neuter singular 127.

anthavanu, ete.

459

antyalopa. 32.

ari, =iri. 159.

antyavarpa. 28.

arir,=ar 1.

51. 70.

arisamasa. 215. 216. 218.

antyakshara. 28.

anna. 1.=annu. 49. 53. 60

aru, I.=ar 1.

51. 52. 71. 72.

127, 139.

anna. (annam). 2. = antaha. 188, 248.

aru. 2=ar 3.

annal. Feminine of annam (anna 2)

arugal. = argal. 52.

188

arugalir, = arugal. 52.

annu. =am 1. Sign of the accusative

arugalu. = arugal. 52.

43. 48, 49.53. 56. 60. 65. 66. 68. 70. 75.

aré. = adé, 6de. 167. 271 seq. 319 seq.

anné, = annal. 188.

arkal, = argal. 51. 70.

anya. 88.

arkalir, = arka). 51. 70.

anyakartri. 89.

argal.=ar 1. 5l.

anyatotisaya. 302.

Argala. 3.

anyapurush&. 88,

arghya. 386.

artha. 29. 313.

ayonya. 310.

anvaya. 407. 411. 412.

arthavyakti. 216.

anvayasvatantra. 414,

arthanurtpa. 30.

anvayisu. 407.

ar. 1. Augment 61.

anvarthanama. 30.

ai.l:o 2‘

Six. 252. 253.

apa. = appa. 110. 117. 118. 144,

ara. 1. (ar+a). Sign of the genitive

apabhramsa. 30. 432 seq.

58—60. 62. 63. 73.

apAdana. 380. 388. 395.

ara. 2. =ar 2. 252

appa.=aha. 111. 117. 144. 188. 243,

arattanim. (ara - attanim).

Sign of

abinduka. 187.

the ablative 62.

abhavakriyé. 106.

arannu. (ara-annu).

Sign of the

abhtkshana. 363.

accusative 60.

ame

Taddhita suffix 200.

arali, = aralli. 59. 60. 62.

ay. 1. Past participle 103. 142. 261.

aralli. (ara-alli). Sign of the locative

59. 60. 62. 73.

ay. 2.

Termination of the second

ari. Verb 339.

person singular 127.

ay. 8.

Five 212. 252, 253.

arim. (ara +im). Sign of the instru-

mental 58. 59. 62. 73.

ayatnakritagurutva. 399.

ayl.=ay 3. 252.

arinda. = arindé. 59. 60. 63.

ayila. Taddhita suffix 204.

arindavu. ==arindé. 59.

ayté. Third person neuter singular 133.

arindé. (ara + inds). = arim. 59.

ar. 1. Sign of the nominative plural

aru. Six. 212. 252, 253.

51. 70 —172. 136.

arul. = arol. 59.

alr. 2.

Plural of am 2. 111. 119. 218.

arol. (ara-+ol). Sign of the locative

59. 62. 73.

ar. 3. Formation of the third person

——

plural 127.

aydlage.

=

5

arol. 59. 60. 62. 63.

aradésa, 32,

arolu. = arol. 59. 62.

58%

pa

pee—

488

arke. (ar +ké). Sign of the dative 58

avu. 2.

Termination of the

third

59. 62. 73.

person neuter plural 127. 157

al, 1.

Sign of the locative 42. 54. 67.

avu, 3.

Taddhita suffix 200.

allo 2'

Sign of the infinitive 120. 121

avugalu.=avu 1. 73.

125. 324.

ave. Third person neuter plural 133.

al. 3. Sign of prohibition 153 seq.

avyaya. 31. 39. 160. 164 seq. 179. 260 seq.

al, 4.

Defective verb 160.

avyayapada. 260.

al. 5

Euphonic 265.

avyayalinga. 33. 37. 39, 261.

alagi. (al+agi). 426.

avyayibhava. 213 seq.

ali

1. =alli. 43. 44. 49 —51. 54. 57. 68

asravya. 147.

70. 75.

ashtu, ete. 257. 260.

asamasa. 187.

ali, 2 =alith. 151 seq. 153 seq. 333

338

asamasata. 30.

asu. =isu. 1. 89. 90. 92.

alim. In the imperative 153 seq.

alu, 1.=al 1. 42. 43. 54. 67. 68,

asiys. 304. 387.

asvaravidhi. 5.

alu, 2. =al 2. 121. 125. 159. 324. 426.

altu. alté. 362.

aha.=apa, appa. 111. 117. 118. 144.

alpaprapa. 14.

145. 243.

alla. 160. 161. 291 seq. 293. 339.

al. 1. Feminine personal suffix 46. 71.

allam. 160. 291.

111, 119. 218. 249.

allada. 361 seq.

al. 2. Termination of the third person

alladé. 106. 293. 360 seq.

feminine singular 127.

alli,

Sign of the locative 42— 44,

ala.=ana 1. 60. 61.

49 — 54. 57. 60. 63. 66 —68. 70. 75.

alu. 1.=al 1. 46. 71.

ava. avam. avanu. Masculine demon-

alu, 2. a] 2. 127.

A

strative pronoun,nominative singular

a

1

Sign of the accusative singular

38. 47 seq. 112. 218. 222 seq. 234.

43. 53. 56. 60.

avadharana. 175.

4. 2. Sign of the genitive singular and

avayavasambandha. 392.

plural 42. 44. 48. 49. 52 — 54. 60. 65-

avar. avaru, Plural of ava 51. 52, 112,

67 —69. 189. 305.

and of the feminine aval, avalu 51.

®

3

Sign of the vocative 81 seq.

52. 71. 72. 218, 234.

>

4

Of the imperative 151.

avarga. 14.

0>

5

Demonstrative pronoun 217."230.

avargiya. 14.

6

The final letter of a few verbs

&8>

aval, avalu. Feminine of ava 38. 53

97. 107.

seq. 112. 218, 222 seq. 234.

o

7. It becomes g and & in personal

avikara. 39.

and reflexive pronouns 74 seq., may

avikrita. 39.

take the place of a in some verbs

avu. 1. Plural of the pronoun adu 47.

24, 157, and in Samskrita nouns

13. 112. 218.

changes in.to é and a 31.

461

am. 1. Sign of the accusative singular

ayta. Taddhita suffix 29. 204.

53. 58, 189. 305.

ayla, = ayila. 204.

fr. L =mrd, Tk

am. 2. (dn). Nominative singular and

plural of the pronoun of the first

ar, 2.=ar 3. 127, 139

person 4. 75. 222 seq.

ar. 8. Plural of Avam and aval 72. 230.

akara. 5.

235 seq.

aké. Feminine of Ata, Atam, atanu 38.

aAru.=Aar 3. 72.

67. 112, 218. 222 seq. 234.

ar. aru. Verb 340.

akshépa. 176.

Aru, Six 212, 253,

Akhyata. 88.

aru kriyavibhakti. 126.

akhyatapada. 30. 88. 126.

artu. 235. 241,

akhyatamarga. 126.

ava. Interrogative pronoun 110. 217.

avam. avanu., Masculine singular of

akhyatavibhakti. 126.

aga. For dgadu 160.

ava 38. 47. 72. 110. 223 seq. 235.

agadu. 160. 337. 339.

dval. Feminine of avam 38. 53. 72. 110.

dgama. 41.105. 125. 207.

223 seq. 235.

aga.= aga. 160.

avishtalinga. 398.

agi 200 seq.

avu. Plural of 4m 2. 75.

agir (agi+ir). agiru. 244. 247, 248,

Avudu. Neuter singular of Avam 58. 61.

Agu. 334—336. 339.

110. 222 seq. 234.

agutte, ete. 136.

avuvu, Plural of Avadu 73.

adu. 367.

avé. 1. Interrogative pronoun 223.

ina. 111. 282.

ave. 2. 134

ata. atam. atanu.=ava, etc. 38. 47

asu

339

aba. 118. 243.

seq. 112. 218. 222 seq. 234.

ada, Past relative participle of dgu

al.=al 2. 127. 139,

111. 243.

ali. Taddhita suffix 29. 204.

adésa. 117. 177, 208.

i. 1. Final letter of many verbs 26. 28.

adodam, ete. 278.

88.. 91 92.95. 10¢. 121. 122, and

adhara. 389.

of many nouns 34. 35. 45. 46. 66 — 70.

adhikya. 302. 307. 308. 385.

80

ana. 111. 282.

i, 2. It forms the nominative singular

anu. anum. 282. 310.

67. 68.

anuparvya. 300.

i. 8. It forms the vocative singular 81

ané. 1.=ang 1. 248.

seq.

aneé. 2. 134. 135.

i, 4. Sign of the locative 42. 43.

i, 5. Sign of the instrumental 43. 44.69.

Apa. 117. 118.

abadha. 366.

i. 6. Its being euphonic 23. 24. 28. 33.

90. 104. 249. 250.

amantrana. 81.

Ay.=ay 1. 103.261.

i, 7. Its being a formative vowel in the

ayila, Taddhita suffix 204.

past participle 26. 137 seq.

462

P —

i. 8. Appears as i 24, and becomes ¢ in

ina. 2. (in-+a). Sign of the genitive

some verbs 29; changes into u 91

55. B7 — 60. 64 — 66. 80.

101, and into a in some verbs 95. 100

inattanim. (ina 2 -+ attanim). = attanim.

In some nouns it becomes i 36, & 36.

58. 64 — 66.

210. 211. 213, & 36, 210, and u 211.

inattanindam. = inattanim. 58. 65.

1, 9. Proceeds from i in Tadbhavas 31.

inattanindé. = inattanindam. 58. 65.

i, 10. Sign of the second person singular

inannu, Sign of the accusative singular

127

65

1. 11. Taddhita suffix 204.

inali, = inalli. 57. 59. 65.

im. Sign of the instrumental and

inalli. (ina 2+ alli). =inol. 56. 57. 59.

ablative 41. 43. 48 —54. 56. 58. 59.

60. 64 — 66.

63 —67. 69. 70. 74.

inim. (ina 2+ im). = im. 58.59. 64 — 66.

ininda. (ina 2 + inda). = inda. 56. 57. 60.

ika. Taddhita suffix 204.

iké. 1. =1ige. 56. 57. 59, 121.

64. 66.

inindé. = ininda. H8. H9.

iké. 2. Taddhita suffix 200.

ikke. 1.=iké 1. 57. 59. 121.

inibar, 241.

ikké, 2. =iké 2. 200.

indl. (ina 2 + 81). = 8] 1. 56. 59. 64 — 66.

indlage. = indl. 59. 60. 65.

iga. Taddhita suffix 29. 204.

indlu. = indl. 59. 65,

igeé. 1. Sign of the dative 50. 51. 53. 56.

inta. 1. Another form of inda 263.

57. 59. 60. 64— 66. 69. 70. 75.

inta. 2. = intha. 188.

igé. 2. = iks 2. 201.

inke, = ingé. 59.

intaha. (intu + aha). 188.

intha.=intaha. 188. 189.

ingé. =igé 1. 55. 56. 58. 59. 64— 66.

inda.=indam. 43. 44. 48 —51. b3. b4.

i6a. Taddhita suffix 204,

56. 57. 59 — 61. 63. 64. 66 — 70. 75. 80.

iéu. =1isu 1. 89. 90. 92.

indam, = im. 41.43. 48— 53. 59. 65 — 67.

idu, 367.

69. 74.

itarétara. 310.

indavu. = indam. 43. 49. 50. 59. 67. 74.

iti., Taddhita suffix 46. 204.

75

itu. Third person neuter singular 127.

indé. =indam. 41. 43. 48-——54;. 58. 60.

137 seq.

66. 67. 69. 4. 5.

itti, = iti. 46.

inna. = intaha. 188.

itbu. =itu. 127. 137 seq.

innd. 273. (Cf. indd).

itthambhéitalakshana. 384.

ip. Two. 252.

idu, Demonstrative pronoun neuter

ippa. = irpa. 118,

singular 46. 58 — 60. 222 seq.

ir. 1. Sign of the nominative plural 51

]

idé. Third person singular neuter 133

19 T1

)

135.

ir, 2. Termination of the second person

1

in, 1. (= inidu). 210.

plural 127. 136. 137.

in, 2. Two 253.

ir. 3. Two. 178. 211. 252, 253.

ina. 1. = inannu. 65.

ir. iru. 4. Verb 332, 416 seq.

463

1ra

(ir1+a). Sign of the vocative

2. Pronoun 173. 217. 230

plural 81. 82

3.=ay 2. 133 seq

ira. (ir1+a). =ira. 81. 82

4, Verb 342

1r1

ir 2. 127

et P ped> —

5. As the initial syllable of a few

irpa. Present-future relative participle

nouns ete. 1t proceeds from i 36. 210

of ir 4

116

211

It takes the form of i in the

irba, etc. 258

verbs i and mi 24

It becomes i

il. Defective verb 160

in the personal pronoun ni (nir)

ila. Taddhita suffix 205

4—176.

il t=ah

54. 55. 57. 60

1. 6. Final i of Samskrita polysyllablc

ili, 2. Taddhita suffix 205

nouns becomes i 31.

illa

159. 161. 285 seq. 293. 331. 332

tkaranta. 31

337

340. 341

iké. Feminine of ita 38. 67. 222, 229

illam

160. 285. 331

234

illada

111. 333

ita. itam. itanu. =1iva. 38. 47. 79. 222

illade

106. 359

229..234

illavu

289

M. =1 1

210

1va. ivam. ivanu. Masculine demonstra-

1r.=1r $::211 . 254

tive pronoun, nominative singular

iru. Sign of the plural 71

47— 49, 222 seq. 234

irshe. 384

ivar. ivaru. Plural of iva 51.52. and of

ili. Sign of the locative singular 68

the feminine ival 51. 52. 71. 72. 234

isu. Verb 90. 342

ival. ivalu. Feminine of iva 53 seq

u. 1. The final vowel of many verbs

292 seq. 234

27— 29. 88. 90. 91. 102. 103. 160, and

ivi.=evu, 127

that of many nouns 33 — 36. 44. 45

ivu. ivugalu. Plural of idu 47. 73

64. 68 — 70. 80

ive, = ave. 133. 135

2. It is a kind of augment in the

ishta. 381. 384. 386. 389. 395

nominative singular 67. 68

3. It is the

ishtu, ete. 257. 260

ign of the nominative

isu. 1. Causal suffix 23. 89. 91. 118. 146

singular 55. 56. 58 — 60. 62 — 67

It is however used also in transitive

4. Its radical character as the final

and intransitive verbs 90. 118, and

letter of nouns 64. 65. 69

appears at the end of repetitions 163

5. Its euphonic character 23 — 25, 28

The way of its being suffixed to final

33 —3b. 42. 44 —46. 57— 60. 62. 63

a1l 172, land 0 73

66. 68. 90. 95. 114. 212

)

isu. 2. Verb 342

6. It changes into

36, 6 29. 99

isu. 3. Taddhita suffix 201.

36, and i 118. 211

A

iha,=

ippa. 118. 144. 145. 245.

7

The final @ of polysyllabic

i)

ili. 20

Samskrita nouns becomes u 32

i. 1. Sign of the accusative singular 68

=

8. Taddhita suffix 203

and of the genitive singular 68

9. And, etc. 266 seq. 283

464

um. And, ete. 266 seq. 400 —402. 405

ubhayamatra. 11.

406

umuvidhi. 266.

uka. Taddhita suffix 205.

ume. Taddhita suffix 201,

uké. = ugé. 121.

ura. 16.

ukti.

33. 38.

urasya. 16.

uga

= uka. 205.

ulli. 80

ugi

Taddhita suffix 205.

uvam. Masculine demonstrative pro-

uge.

Sign of the dative 69.

noun, nominative singular 38. 47.

uéita. 40.

222, 234.

uéithksharagama. 170.

uvar. Plural of uvam 51, and of the

uni. Taddhita suffix 205.

feminine uval Bl

untu. 130. 376.

uval. Feminine of uvam 38. 53. 222

uta. 1. = ute. 108.

234

uta. 2. Suffix of the present tense 126.

uvu. 1. Piural of mdu i, 47.93: 1115

135

112. 218.

utam. = ute. 108.

uvu. 2. Termination of the third person

uta. = uté. 108.

neuater plural 127. 157.

utu. =udu 1. 222, 241.

ul. 1. Sign of the locative 42. 54. 67.

utum. = uté. 108.

ul. 2. Verb 130. 332.

uté. Sign of the present participle 108.

uliga. Taddhita suffix 205.

utt&- lTy= uta: 1. 108.

ulla. 1. 114. 331. 334,

utta. 2.=uta 2. 126. 135.

ulla. 2. Taddhita suffix 205. 244.

uttam. = utam. 108

uliga. Taddhita suffix 205.

A

uttama. 89.

u

1

The final letter of one or two

uttamapurusha. 89. 126.

Kannada nouns 66.

uttd. = utd. 108.

=

. 2. It has proceeded from u in siidu

uttum. = utum. 108.

36

utte. = ute. 108.

. 3. It proceeds from uva 115. 146.

utpata. 387.

. 4, Pronoun 217. 230.

udaya. 389. 395.

. 5. And, ete. 266 seq.

udu. 1. Demonstrative neuter pronoun,

%

. 8

Samskrita polysyllabic words

nominative singular 46. 58.111. 112.

change their final { into u 32.

218, 222.

tkaranta. 32.

udu 2. Termination of the third person

fiké. Feminine of dtam 38. 67. 222. 234.

neuter singular 127. 138 seq. 157.

fitam. = uvam. 38. 47. 222.

udum. 271 seq.

Tl

Generally remains in Samskrita

untaha. (untu +aha). 188.

nouns 66. 69. 70; in some Tadbhavas

unna.= untaha. 188.

it is cha.ngéd 32.

unnati. 385.

rikaranta. 32.

upadhméantya. 16. 17. 21.

ri. Remains in a few Samskrita nouns

upadana. 383. 391.

66. 69.

465

8. 1. Final letter in many verbs 26. 28.

elli. 231.

29. 36. 68. 70. 88. 91. 92. 95. 107. 121.

évu. ém. Termination of the first

122

i g

and in many nouns ,34h 36. 46.

person plural 127.

69. 80. 81.

8l = él. 252,

A

2. It forms the nominative singular

e

. 1. It is no real diphthong in Kannada

67

68, and also the accusative

185

singular 68.

(42

. 2. It is final in the verbs ké and hé

€

. It forms the vocative 81 seq.

24, 92. 107.

‘i

. Sign of the instrumental 67.

Sign of the accusative singular 68.

2

. Sign of the infinitive 123. 125. 270.

W W

Sign of the genitive singular 68.

Z

82. 324. 424 — 426. 428.

Particle of emphasis 227. 291.

é

6. Taddhita suffix 200. 205.

Sign of the vocative 81 seq.

[¢¢]

7. Particle of emphasis 107.133. 171.

Adverbial suffix 265.

176. 227,

Is used like ava 235.

8. =ay 2. 127.

D> M > M > > >

© B =N & O

In the interrogative pronoun ¢

.= em. 127.

(én, énu) it becomes yi (da) 62. 63.

< <

10. It changes into i 43. 91, into a

110. 223. 238.

91. 95. 100, into & 211, and ya 21.

>

10

Becomes é in the verb hé 24.

See under ¢ 10.

It proceeds from i 29. 36. 211. 213,

and takes the place of & in hé. See

¢kate. 40.

also under 3 6.

ékatva. 40.

11. Final Samskrita & becomes é 31

.

9

ékamatraka. 11.

but Samskrita monosyllabic terms

ékavaéana. 40.

retain their 3 32.

ékasthani. 16. 194.

ém. Termination of the first person

ékaksharadhatu. 22. 24 —27

singular 127,

ékaksharasabda. 32.

éké- 620 234.

én. Eight 212. 252. 253.

ettantu. 241.

ékokti. 40.

én. énnu. Verb 352 seq.

étake. étakke. 62. 238,

énu, = ém. 127.

dtarke. 62. 234. 238,

énta. 1. = éntha. 188.

éru. Sign of the nominative plural 71.

énta. 2. 109. 141.

gli. Sign of the locative singular 68.

éntaha. (éntu -+ aha). 188.

évaudu. = avudu. 235.

éntha.= éntaha. 188. 189.

€l. Seven 252. 253.

énna.= éntaha. 188.

ei. (ai). It is no real diphthong in

ép. Seven 252.

Kannada 185.

3

3

ém. Eight 252.

1. It takes the place of & in no 24,

éral. 253.

that of u 29. 211, that of a 47. 51.

grdé. 16.

53. 58, that of uva 146, and may

glla. éllam.

élla. 62. 210. 232. 395

change into 6 189. See 0w 1 and 2,

b

élladu. 222. 232.

59

—

466

-

0. 2. Initial va occasionally becomes

au. 2. Oceurs in Samskrita glau 66. 69.

o 21.

Qf. 4. 45.

om. 1. partly =am 2, partly=am 8. 111.

auéitya. 40.

119. 139. 218.

m.=a 2. Sign of the nominative singu-

6m. 2.— aim 3. 127. 143.

lar 41. 42. 45— 48. 62. 74. 75.

ka. Taddhita suffix 201. 205.

ode. If 167. 270 seq. 319 seq.

kantha. 16.

odéya. Taddhita suffix 205.

ottakkara. 20.

kanthosthya. 16.

kanthya. 16.

odu.=udu 1 and 2. 112, 218.

kanthyatalavya. 16.

ombay. 253.

or

1.= ar 1. 51-

kanthyanasikya. 16.

kanda. 174.

92.—ar 2 and 3. 112. 119. 218.

or

. 3.=ar 3. 127. 139. 143.

kannada. 1. 2. 432.

or

.4, “One 211. 253.

karana. 380. 382. 391.

karkasavarna. 14.

orba, etc. 258.

o

karpatakaprakriti. 171.

ol, ete. 1. 198 seq.

karnatakabhishabhGshana. 3. 4. 97.

0l. 2. Verb 240 seq.

karnatakasabdanusasana. 4.

8L 1.=ul1. 42. 43. 48—350. 52.

54

65— 70. 74. 75.

kartri. 39. 380. 381. 384.

karma. 380. 381.

.2.=gal 1. 114. 119, 218.

karmanpiprayoga. 323.

cSe=al o 127,139,

2

%\

42 — 44. 48 —54. 57

67

karmadharaya. 209 seq. 217. 232.

ageé. =0l 1

kavarga. 14.

(6}

kavirajamarga. 2.

ol

u6

=

;;)

1. 42. 43. 49. 50. 52. 54. 67

68

o

kal.=gal. 51 69. 71,

kaliru. = kal. 52.

Q>

. 1, It is final in the verbs ko, t6 and

kalu. = kal. 52.

nd 24. 91. 92. 107.

kalugal = kalu. 52.

. 2. It isno real diphthong in Kannada

kagunitakshara. 17.

185.

kira. 21.

>

. 3. It proceeds from u 36, from ava

karaka. 216. 217. 380. 398. 413.

113, and ¢ 211. See or.

karakapada. 407

. 4. In Samskrita g6 it remains un-

karakavasa. 380

changed 66. 69. Of. 44. 45.

karana. 388. 396

Y

. 5. Adverbial suffix 265 seq. 282.

kéra. Taddhita suffix 205.

onama. D.

kala. 88. 382. 388. 391. 395. 397.

Or.= or 4. 254,

kalatraya. 88. 314.

Oshtha. 16.

kalatrayaparipami. 125.

Oshthya. 16.

kalatrayastcaka. 125.

kalavacaka. 64.

au. 1. Itisnoreal diphthong in Kannada

185.

kalavaei. 64.

46

kavyamarga. 194.

kriyaprayojana. 120.

kavyavalokana. 3.

kriyartha. 120.

kriyavibhakti. 126. 170.

kil. = kélagu. 178. 213.

ku. = kum. 146 seq.

kriyasamabhihara. 363.

kum. Verbal termination 106. 146 seq

kriyasamasa. 216.

kutiga. Taddhita suffix 205.

kriyasakalya. 364.

kudu. Verb 368.

kriyé. 29. 30. 88. 89. 125.-390.

kutsana. 304.

kvaéitprayoga. 39.

kulasambandha. 391.

kshala. 5. 13— 15. 189, 194.

kuli. Taddhita suffix 206.

khéda. 176.

kula. 5. 14. 189. 194. 195.

ga. Taddhita suffix 2086.

kuli. Taddhita suffix 206.

gada. 176.

kidadu. 337. 339.

gandakkara. 14.

krit. 29. 39. 110. 119. 131. 198, 217, 218

gandu. 40.

seq

gadya. 197.

krillinga. 29. 30. 33. 39. 119. 127. 139

gamakasamasa. 112. 119. 217, 218. 231

245.

143. 217. 218 seq.

ké. 1. Sign of the dative 41. 43. 44. 46

gamana. 386.

51. 54. 55. 61 — 63. 121.

gala. 16.

ke. 2. Termination of the imperative 149.

gal. Sign of the nominative plural 49

ke. 3. Taddhita suffix 201.

50. 52. 69.

késava. 3. 4. 11. 14. 15. 22. 27 —29. 35

galir.= gal. 50. 70. 71.

37—39. 46 —48. 89. 94.105. 117 — 122

galu.= gal. 50. 52. 70.

123. 131. 153 seq. 160. 185. 187 — 191

ganta. 117.

195

197 — 200.

203

206.

207.

géga. Taddhita suffix 206.

215 — 217. 223. 235. 245. 254. 261. 271.

gu. 1. Final syllable of verbs 117.

323 —325. 393. 411. 424. 425. 433.

gu. 2.= gum. 146 seq.

439. 440.

gum. = kun

106. 146 seq.

késiraja. 3.

gugum. 147

kodisu. 342.

gudasu. gudisu. gudusu. 20.

f

kédu. 342. 368.

gupa. 11. 185. 390.

kombu. 20.

gunavaéana. 33. 37. 198, 217. 242 seq.

koral. 16.

gunavaéi. 33.

ko. 152.

gunanuriapa. 30.

kopa. 304.

gunokti. 33.

guru. 11.

kkum. = kum. 146 seq.

kke. 1.=ké 1. 41. 43. 44. 46. 61

gurutva. 385. 389.

i e

kkéo 2.:: ké 2- 149-

gul. Taddhita suffix 201.

kriyatmaka. 160.

guli. Taddhita suffix 206.

kriyanimitta. 380.

gé. 1.=ké. 1. 48—51. 54. 65. 66. 69

kriyapada. 30. 88. 125. 126. 170

11. 800

59F

p—

468

—

gé. 2. Termination of the imperative

taddhitapratyaya. 198. 199. 200 seq.

149. 429,

taddhitalinga. 29. 33. 36. 39. 200 seq.

gé. 3. Taddhita suffix 201.

tadbhava. 33. 214. 215. 432 seq.

g‘g‘é: gé 1. Dl

tana. Taddhita suffix 201.

ngal.=gal. 49—51. 74.

tapa.=dapa. 125. 128 seq.

ngalir.=ngal. 49 —51.

tappa.= tapa. 125. 128 seq.

ngalu.=ngal. 49. 50. 52.

talekattu, 6. 17. 20. 21.

figé. = g8 1. 48. 49, T4. T5. 80.

tavarga. 14.

¢. Stands for s 178.

taha. 118.

Gaturthi

40

$4. 1 153

364

éapalate

ta. 2. tAm. tdnu. Reflexive pronoun,

¢avarga

14

nominative singular 74. 75. 223 seq.

éakshusha. b.

225.

¢u. Causal suffix 23. 89. 90, 92.

tam. Nominative plural of t4 2, ete. 74.

éelvu. 188.

tana. 16.

éétana. 37.

tadarthya. 387.

¢h. Stands for s 178. 233.

talavya. 16.

taluka. 16.

¢handas. 194. 197. 411.

j- Stands for s 178.

taluge. 16.

jati. T1.390. 398. 404. 405.

tavu. Nominative plural of 6 2, thm,

tanu 74 —76. 228.

jatisambandha. 391.

jihvamila. 16.

ti. Taddhita suffix 46. 206.

tu. 1. Formative syllable of the past

jihvamuliya. 16. 17. 21.

jaina. 2—4.

participle 25 — 27.

ta. Changed info la 191.

tu. 2. Neuter pronominal suffix 46. 57

tavarga. 14.

72, 74. 79. 249.

tn: 8. =udu 2. 127,

tiku. 412.

tuti. 16.

tha. Changes into la 191.

d. May become | 117. 211.

tritiye. 40.

te. Taddhita suffix 201.

dakara. 117.

tom. 212. 252. 254,

n. Final letter of nouns 33. 53. 69. 70,

tti. =ti. 46.

and of verbs 107.

In sandhi and

samasa 179. 187.

ttu.=tu 2. 46. b7. 72. 249.

triprayodga. 93. 162. 163. 362.

ta. 1. Sign of the relative past participle

tribhuvana. 400.

110. 125. 126.

trimatraka. 11.

ta. 2. Taddhita suffix 201.

trilinga. 38.

ta. 3. Changes into Ja 191.

tva. 21.

takkadu. 337.

d. Euphonic. 42. 73. 249. 250

tatpurusha. 208 seq. 217.

da. 1. (d+a). Sign of the genitive

tatsama. 31. 214. 432.

singular with a euphonic d before

taddhita. 29. 35. 39. 198. 200 seq.

the a 42 — 44. 46.

e

469

—

dési. 188.

da. 2. Sign of the past and negative

relative participle 110 seq. 126. 218

déestya. 5. 432.

seq. 421 seq.

dravida. 1.

da. 3. Suffix for the past tense 125. 126

dravya. 390.

da. 4. A so-called krit suffix 29. (f.

dravida. 1.

drdoha. 387.

bhatavatikrit, bhavishyantikrit.

dvandva. 213. 400.

dam. In allidam. 207.

dvihpraydga. 93. 162, 362

dadda. 20.

daddakkara. 20. 196 seq.

dvikarma. 382. 38).

dvigu. 211 seq.

danta. 16.

dvitiye. 40.

dantoshtya. 16.

dvitva. 40. 88. 121. 188.

dantya. 16.

dvitvavikalpa, 121.

dapa. Suffix for the present tense 125.

128 seq.

dvitvakshara. 20.

dvimatra. 11.

dappa.= dapa. 125. 128 seq.

dvirbhava. 32. 210.

daha.=dapa. 125. 126. 128 seq.

dvivaéana. 40. 88.

dé. Sign of the genitive singular with

dhatu. 23 seq. 30. 88.

a euphonic d before the 4 42. 44.

dhatupéatha. 22. 27. 28. 160.

daru.= yaru. 72.

dava.=yava. 231.

dhéatusvarapa. 88.

n. 1

Final letter of nouns 34, and of

davadu.= yavadu. 72. 223. 231.

verbs 88.167.

davanu. = yavanu. 223. 231.

n. 2. Euphonic 42.

davavu.= yavavu. 73.

n

n. 3. Becomes

4

179, 187.

davalu.= yavalu. 223. 231.

na. Sign of the genitive singular with

di. Taddhita suffix 206.

a euphonic n before the g 42. 43.

dikku. 387. 395.

digvaéaka. 62.

nage.=ngeé. 49.

napumsaka. 37.

digvaci. 62.

napumsakalinga. 37

ditanama. 30.

nappu. 37.

dir. Sign of the nominative plural 52.

namaskara. 38b.

70. 71.

nammavaru. 224.

diru.= dir. 52.

nammake. 224.

dirkal.= dir. 70.

nalu.=nal. 252.

dirgha. 11. 20.

na. 1.=nAnu. 75. 222 seq.

dirghakaku. 81.

na. 2. Four 253.

du. 1.=1tu 1. 26. 27

du. 2.=tu 2. 46. 57

:;

72 249

nam.=am 2, 74. 222 seq.

nagavarma.

3. 1188 89. '105. 169.

dushkara. 188.

323 —- 325.

dushpratiti. 177. 198.

nanu.=nim. Nominative singular of

dira. 363. 387. 395.

the pronoun of the first person 75.

dévar. dévaru. 403.

222 seq.

IS

2 T

470

nama. 30.

nira. 252 seq.

namapada. 30. 170

nfiru. 252 seq.

namaprakriti. 30.

nripatunga. 2.

ndaru. = ndiru. 52.

namalinga. 30. 33. 198 seq.

namavibhakti. 40. 170. 380

ndir. Sign of the nominative plural 51.

nami. 11.

ndirir, = ndir. 51.

nal. Four 212. 252. 253.

ndirirgal. = ndir. 51.

naligéya buda. 16.

ndiru. = ndir. 52. 71.

pavu. Plural of nénu (nam) 74—76

p. Takes the place of h 187. 188.

223 seq.

pa. 1.=va 1. 113 seq.

nasiké. 16.

pa. 2.= va 3. 119.

nasikya. 16.

pa. 3.=va 2. 125.

nige. =nageé. 49.

pa. 4 Taddhita suffix 202.

nijakartri. 90.

paksha. 321.

nijadhatu. 198.

pancaka. 14.

nityadvitva. 187.

panéami. 40.

nityabindu. 187.

panéavarga. 14.

nindé. 304.

pada. 30. 88. 126. 198,

i

ninna and nimma. 225.

padaééhéda. 412.

J

nipata. 39. 169, 175. 176. 260 seq.

padamadhyasandhi. 170.

I

niyama. 194.

L ]

padantyasandhi. 170

P

niyama. 194.

padi. 212. 251.

U

niranunasika. 16.

padin. 212. 251.

Ui

nirdosha. 216.

padyardha. 174.

nirdharana. 390.

pan. 212. 251.

i

nirviséshapavap. 33.

pampa (hampa). 3.

it

nivartya. 382.

payin. 212. 253.

juF

niséitanama. 30.

parakartri. 89,

Pra

ni.=ninu. 75. 222 seq.

parushavarna. 14.

Pra

nim. Nominative singular and plural

pal. 16.

of the pronoun of the second person

pavarga. 14.

?1at3‘

4. 222 seq. 224.

pi. Taddhita suffix 202.

ninu. Nominative singular of the pro-

pim. 213.

1

noun of the second person 75.

999

e

pintu. 213.

.

\\H

seq. 225.

pids. 366.

T

U} i

nivu. Plural of ninu 75. 76. 225.

pu. 1. Taddhita suffix 202.

Dt

nu. Sign of the nominative singular

pu. 2. Used instead of hu at the end of

42. 43. 48. 49. 62. 63. 5

verbal themes 28.

Prat

Iy

nudigattu. 37. 38. 236. 246. 268. 365

pum. 37.

prﬁn\

397. 404. 408.

pumstrilinga. 37.

[

iy

nfir.=ntru. 212. 253.

punarukti. 199.

Lt

T?ba

471

punnapumsakalinga. 37.

pluta. 11. 176.

purusha (linga). 1. 37.

ba, =yva 1. 113:ceq.

purusha. 2. Person of the verb 88. 126

bha. 2.=va 3. 119.

purushatraya. 89.

ba. 3.=va 2. 125. 126.

purushavaéaka. 39.

bar. Sign of the nominative plural 81

pullinga. 37.

baru. 1.=bar. d2.

pljyasadhunipuna. 390.

baru. 2. Verb. 368.

parvakalakriyé. 93.

barpa kala. 883.

parvakriyé. 93.

balla.

340

péda. 210, 214.

balle.

284,

pén. 40.

baha.

118

pénnu. 40.

bahuté. 40.

pérma. 389.

bahutva. 40.

péram. 38. 222 seq. 231 seq.

bahudu. 146. 337. 338.

pératu. 222 seq.

bahuvaéana. 40.

peradu. 222 seq.

bahuvrihi. 39. 212 seq.

péral. 32. 222 seq.

bali. 284.

poda kala. 88.

baradu. 336. 337. 339.

balasiksha. 5.

poy. Past participle 103. 142

ppa.=pa 3. 125.

bidu. 342. 368.

prakarsha. 302.

bindu. 16. 17.

prakara. 383.

birudavali. 215.

prakriti. Declinable base 29. 37. 40; a

bilakkara. 13.

verb’s crude form 88.

bém. 213.

prakritisvariipa. 88.

béku. bélku. bélkum. 119. 333. 334.

prati. 386.

béda. 160. 161. 335. 336.

pratinidhi. 386.

bédarn. 160.

pratimukhévaldkana. 263.

béha. 118.

pratishédha. 88.

bhattakalanka. 4. 47. 89. 235. 323 — 325

pratishédhakriyé. 106 seq.

425. 440. 442

pratyaya. Suffix:—case terminations

bhaya. 388. 395

40: verbal personal terminations 22

bhartsana. 403.

1265 taddhitas 29. 39: formative

bhavat. 88.

syllables 31; a euphonic syllable 35.

bhavatkala. 88

pratyckartha. 302.

bhavishyat. 88.

prathama. 88.

bhavishyatkala. 88.

prathamapurusha. 88. 126,

bhavishyanti. 88.

gl

prathams. 40.

bhavishyantikrit. 110. 133. 218 seq.

pranyanidarasmarana. 385.

bhava. 71. 143. 200. 399.

prapya. 382,

bhavavaéana. 36. 100. 104. 123 — 125.

prasa. 194 seq. 411.

130. 139. 143. 144. 148. 159. 198 — 200

472

maodalada, 401. 402.

seq. 231 seq. 285. 287 seq. 332. 333

431.

mbar. 51.

%

bhavavasi. 36.

mbaru. 52.

bhavi. 88.

y. 1. The final letter of verbs 36. 88. 91.

bhinnakartri. 89.

107. 121, and of nouns 34.53. 68 -- 70.

bhiti. 38D.

y. 2. Changes into v 93.

bhata. 88.

y. 3. Is sometimes nasal 186.

bhatakala. 88.

y. 4. Its euphonic character 45. 66. 67.

bhutakalakriys. 93.

73. 88. 91. 92. 107. [21. 170 seq. 174

bhuatavati. 88.

seq. 212.

bhatavatikrit. 110. 111. 218 seq.

ya. In attributive nouns 217. 245. 246,

bhéda. 383. 388. 395.

249

ma. 1. Takes the place of va 189.

yamaka. 194.

ma. 2. Taddhita suffix 202.

ya. In interrogative pronouns it takes

madi. 259.

the place of & and & 21. 38. 62. 72,

mattam. 284.

73, and also in other nouns that of

mattu. 285.

é 21,

matte. 284.

yaké. 21. 63. 238,

A

matsara. 384.

yaru. = aru.

A

72. 235 seq.

madhyama. 88,

yava. =

ava., —

dava. 110.

madhyamapurusha. 88.

yavadu. = dvadu. 38. 60. 110. 223 seq.

mastaka. 16.

yavanu. = avam. 38. 49. 223 seq. 235.

mahaprana. 14. 169. 185 seq.

yavavu. = avavu. 73. 110.

mahapranakshara. 28.

yavalu. = aval- 110. 223 seq. 235.

matra. 387.

yugala. 398.

matre. 11.

yugaloé&arana. 93. 162. 362.

mu. 1. Taddhita suffix 202

yogavaha. 17.

mu. 2.=ma. 212. 252, 253.

yogyate. 388.

mum. 213.

r. Final letter of verbs 25— 27. 92. 118,

mun. 253.

and of nouns 34. 53. 69.

muntada. 402.

rz. Changes into la 191, takes the place

muy. 254.

of la 193, and changes into 1 194.

mfi. Three 211. 252, 253

ruéi. 384.

murdhan. 16,

ricdhanama. 30.

murdhanya. 16.

ripaka. 40. 194. 195.

mriduvarpa. 14.

T T Final letter of verbs 23. 24. 114.

mé. 1. Taddhita suffix 202

116. 117, and of nouns ete. 177. 196.

mée. 2. Time or times 259.

212. 253. Cf. 195.

maédu. 176,

rakara. 116.

1. 1. Final letter of verbs 24. 88. 91. 92.

mém. 213.

mén. 285.

107, and of nouns 34. 53. 69.

473

1. 2. Is sometimes nasal 186.

vargadvitiyakshara. 14.

1. 3. Is euphonic 265. 270.

vargapanéama. 14. 187.

la. Is sometimes used for ra 193, and

vargapanéamakshara. 14.

changes into na and la 193.

vargaprathama. 14.

lakshana. 195.

vargaprathamakshara. 14.

lakshanasambandha. 392.

vargakshara. 14.

laghu. 11.

vargiyakshara. 14.

li, = ali or ili. 57. 68.

varpa. 5. 21.

linga. 29. 30. 33. 37 —40. 46. 47,

varpasanjné. 4.

lingatraya. 39.

varnanks. 4.

lekka. 32.

varpavritti. 194,

lopa. 117. 118. 122. A170.

vartamana. S8.

vartamanakala. 88.

V. 1. Is eaphonic in nouns etc. 35. 45,

65. 69. 107—109. 170. 173 seq. 290

vartamanakalakriyé. 93. 108.

seq.

vartamanakriys. 93. 108.

v. 2. Is sometimes nasal 186.

vartipa kala. 88.

va. 1. Signof the present-future relative

vashatkara. 387.

118

participle 26, 27.

113 seq.

vala. Taddhita suffix 29. 206

119 seq. 126. 144,

vali. Taddhita suffix 202.

va. 2. Suffix for the future tense 125.

valla. = vala. 29. 206.

126

vakya. 178. 380.

va. 8. A so-called krit suffix 29. 39.119.

vakyadipaka. 414.

vakyamals. 30.

va. 4. Taddhita suffix 202. Cf. 122. 203,

va. 5. Changed into ma 189.

vakyavinyasa. 380.

va. 6. When initial it sometimes be-

vakyavéshtana. 174.

comes 0 21.

vakyanvaya. 414.

vaéana. 40.

vagyalinga. 38. 111. 119. 242.

vadanatraya. 39.

vi. Taddhita suffix 202.

vaéanaftritaya. 39.

vikarasambandha. 392.

vatiga. Taddhita suffix 206

vikarya. 382.

vadiga. = vatiga. 206.

vidhi. 23. 88. 148 seq. 341. 383. 429.

vanigeé. Taddhita suffix 202

vidhikriyé. 88.

vanta. Taddhita suffix 206.

vidhyartha. 88.

var. = bar. 51.

vipsa. 300.

VAT — Vit D2.

vipsasamasa. 218.

varga. 14.

vibhakti. Verbal personal terminations

vargaéaturtha. 14.

22. 88. 126 seq.; case terminations

vargaéaturthakshara. 14.

29. 30. 40. 41 seq. 208; case 40.

vargatritiya. 14.

Regarding the use of cases see 381

vargatritiyakshara. 14.

seq

vargadvitiya. 14.

wibhakianals, 40

60

474

363 —366. 383. 384. 393. 438 —440.

vibhaktisvara. 171.

vir. Sign of the nominative plural 70

442

virir. = vir. 70.

sasana. 2. 15. 40. 439.

githila. 196.

virkal. = vir. 70.

virgal = virkal. 70.

githilatva. 197.

gira. 16.

vilbma. 11.

vildmakriyé. 106.

suddhage. 5.

visanke. 175.

suddhikshara. 5.

visésha. 40. 302.

Stnya. 16. 17.

viséshanapada. 407.

séshasambandha. 392.

viséshya. 40.

srivana. 5.

viséshyadhina. 223. 229. 242.

srutikashta. 177.

viséshyAdhinalinga. 38. 111. 119.

shashthi. 40.

sa. In sandhi 178.

vishaya. 390.

visarga. 16. 17. 21. 32.

samnyoga. 383.

visarjaniya. 16.

samsayarthakriyapada. 428

vu. 1. Sign of the nominative singular

samskritaprakriti. 171.

42. 43. 46.

samsparsasambandha. 392.

samhite. 170.

vu. 2. Sign of the nominative plural

13—~ 79,

sakarmaka. 89.

sakarmakadhatu. 89.

vu. 3. Taddhita suffix 203

vritti. 35. 411.

sankhyana. 71. 399.

vriddhi. 11. 185.

sankhyanavastu. 71.

ve. Taddhita suffix 203.

sankhyéaptrvaka. 211.

vaishayika. 382.

sankhyavastu. 399.

vol, ete. 198. 199.

sankhyavaéi. 31. 33.

vyanjana. 5. 13. 14, 21. 28

sakhys. 22. 33. 39. 71. 198. 217.

vyanjanavidhi. 5.

sankhéya. 71. 399.

vyanjananga. 17.

sati. 123.

vyanjananta. 32. 33.

satisaptami. 123. 424.

vyavahara. 391.

sattrinanta. 31.

vyapaka. 390.

sandhi. 34. 35. 170 seq. 180 seq. 208.

sakti. 387,

sandhyakshara. 11.

sabda. 4. 5. 30. 38.

sannida. 216.

sabdadravya. 4.

sannidhinasambandha. 392.

Sabdamanidarpana. 3. 4. 35. 47. 48. 62.

saptami. 40.

66. 98. 153. 164. 176. 192. 204. 229.

saptavibhakti. 40.

sabinduka. 187.

293. 323. 324. 363. 364. 411.

sabdinusisana. 4. 62. 89. 97, 131. 134

samasamskrita. 31. 214. 215. 432.

seq. 164. 167. 171. 176. 191. 192. 196.

samanakshara. 11.

seq.

199 —202. 204 —206. 294. 295. 323.

samésa. 30. 31. 177 seq. 197. 198. 216

475

samipa. 363.

svara. b. 10. 11. 21.

samprati. 88.

svarayuktavyanjana. 170.

sampradana. 380. 384.

svararahitavyanjana. 170.

sambandha. 391.

svaranga. 17.

sambandhasambandha. 392.

svaranta. 34.

sambandhartha. 381.

svasti. 38D.

sambuddhi. 81.

svamisambandha. 391.

sambodhana. 40. 81 seq.

svaha. 387.

sambhrama. 364.

svikara. 389.

sammati. 304.

h, Takes the place of p 187. 188.

saralavarpa. 14.

ha. 1.=va 1, 113. 118. 144.

sarvanama. 31. 33. 38. 198. 217.

ha. 2.= va 2. 125, 126.

salla. 160. 161. 342,

ha. 3. = va 3. 119.

savarpa. 11.

ha. 4. = va 4. 122. 203.

sahaja. 185. 197.

hadi. 212. 251.

hadin. 212. 251.

sahajadhatu. 36.

sahajavyanjana. 177.

han. 251.

haku. 368.

saku, 147.

satatya. 364.

hage. 289. 294, 322.

sadrisya. 386.

hangt. 285.

snta. 118.

hita. 384.

sarthaka. 30.

hu. 1. Instead of pu at the end of verbal

sasira. 178.

themes 28.

siddhi. 383.

hu. 2. Taddhita suffix 203.

su. 1.=1i1su 1. 89— 91. 118. 147.

hén. = pén. 40.

su. 2. Taddhita suffix 203.

hénnakkara. 14.

sundara. 188.

hénnu. 40.

sitra. 3b.

hétu. 89. 383. 384. 389. 395.

sonné. 16. 17. 21. 44. 128. 136. 148

hétuka. 89.

179 seq. 187, 199. 216.

b

hétukartri. 89.

strl. 37.

hortu. 321 seq.

strinapumsa. 38.

hogu. 369.

strinapurnsakalinga. 38..

hohg. 118.

strilinga. 37.

haudu. 145. 229.

strivaéaka. 39.

hrasva. 11.

sthalasambandha. 392.

hrasvakaku. 81.

sthana. 16.

1. 1. Final letter of nouns and of feminine

svakartri. 90.

pronouns 34. 38. 53. 69. 190, and of

svadha. 387.

verbs 28. 88. 92.

svabhava. 18b. 385.

1. 2. Final 1 occasionally becomes 1

svayankartri. 90.

190

60*

——

476

—

la. Changes into na 190, and takes the

L. 2. Proceeds from ¢ 105. 117. 177, and

It proceeds

changes into 1 190.

place of 1 190. 191.

1,

Occurs in a number of words

from ta 190, and da 190.

191 —193. 211, and proceeds from

-

L. 1. Final letter of nouns 34. 53. 69,

ta. tha, ta, ra, la 191.

and of verbs 28. 88‘. 92 T0¢. 117,

lakara. 117.

2

Indexical

words in English.

adverbs of circumstance or manner 165

continuative imperfect 215 seq.

seq. 251 adverbs of place 164. 165.

continuative (or habitual) future 316.

262 seq.; abverbs of time 165, 262

continuative present 315 seq.

seq.

crude base in the nominative 42. 43.

Adverbs in general 260 seq.

About their formation and expres-

48, 49. 53 — 68. 75; in the accusative

sion 169. 295 seq.

43. 53. 4. 56. 59. 63 —68; and in

alphabet 2. 5 — 10 ete.

the vocative 81. 82.

appellative nouns of number 258 seq.

demonstrative pronouns neuter singular

305.

38. 57— 60. 79, plural 73 seq. 222 seq.

appellative verbs 93.

229. 230 ; —masculine 38. 47 —49. 79,

as — as. 346.

plural 51 seq.; —feminine 38. 53 seq.

as — 0. 348 seq.

67 seq., plural 69. 71 seq.

attributive nouns 242. See gunavaéana.

diacritical signs 6.

distributiveness 305. 306. 308 seq.

auxiliary verbs 330.

Canara 1.

310

cardinal numbers 251 seq.

doubling 93. 107. 162.163. 170. 177 — 179.

Carnatic 1.

210. 439 seq.

cases (vibhakti) and their use 381 seq.

duplication 304.

Interchange of the seven cases 393

either—or. 343 seq.

seq

examination of the terminations and

change of verbal root vowels 24. 29. 36.

augments in the seven cases 82 seq.

107. 157.

Fleet, J. F., Dr. 15. 103.

conjugated appellatives 93. 136 seq.

for, because. 297 seq. 347.

conjugation 426 seq.;

that of the

frequentative action 28. 93. 162 seq.

negative 431. 432.

future perfect 317 seq.

conjunctions 167. 260 seq.

future tense 142 seq. 340.

combination of certain words 362 seq.

Grammar in English of the Carpataka

comparison 376 seq.

Language by McKerrel Esq. 4.

compound tenses 315 seq.

Hindusthani 432.

confingent future perfect 318.

Hodson, Rev. Thomas, 323. 344.

contingent present-future tense 132.

how much—so much. 342 seq.

133. 315, 338. 428,

imitative sounds 168. 169. 173.

—

[,

477

imperative 148 seq. Irregular forms

Pathak, K. B., B. A. 3.

perfect 316 seq.

152 seq. See vidhi.

indefinite pronouns 39. 279 seq. 305.

permutation of consonants in sandhi

infinitive 120 seq. 122. 123. 433 seq.

177 seq.

interchange of the seven cases 393 seq.

personal pronouns 73 seq. 222 seq.

interjections 168.

personal terminations of the verb 126

interrogative pronouns 38. 58— 60. 72.

seq. 223. 381.

13. 223. 231. 233.

pluperfect 318 seq.

Mahratti 432.

possessive pronouns 39. 239 seq.

Miiller, Max, Professor 431.

postpositions 167.

in sen-

multiplication 254 seq. 310.

present participle 108 seq.;

Musulmans 432.

tences 420 seq. .

namely, as follows. 347. 348.

present relative participle 23. 26. 29

113 seq. 218 seq. 422 seq.

negative participle and relative negative

participle 106 seq. 112. 113, 179.

present tense 128 —133. 315; used for

the future 429.

negative, conjugated 157 seq. 179. 332.

341. Origin of the negative 160 seq.

punctuation 32.

neither — nor. 344 seq.

reciprocal relation 307. 310.

nouns identical with verbal themes 36.

reflexive pronouns 73—76. 222 seq.

numerals 251 seq.

225 seq.

numerical adverbs 164.

reflexive verbs 93. 369 seq.

only, alone. 314.

reiteration 304. 308.

order of verbs in a sentence 408 seq.

relative participle 110 seq. 317 seq.

410 seq.

421 seq.

ordinal numbers 256.

relative pronouns not in Kannada 110

233. 351 seq.

orthography 5.

other. 311.

repetition, reduplication, doubling 28.

102. 107. 109. 160. 162. 208. 213. 218

passive 181. 323 seq.

past participle ending in du 23. 93 — 99,

300 seq. 362 seq.

and tu 24 — 26. 29. 94 — 99. Its short

Rice, B. Lewis, M. R. A. 8., etc. 2—4.

form without du and tu 99-—102.

self 227 seq.

Its ending in i 26. 102. 103. 105, and

slackness of consonants 196 seq.

specialities regarding the singular and

idu 103. 104. See relative form

under da 2. and ta 1. Irregular past

plural 398 seq. 403 seq. 405 — 407.

participles 103. Original meaning of

spontaneously, of itself 227. 228.

subjunctive 319 seq.

the past participle 105 seq. Short

past participles used with illa 282 seq.

such —as. 346.

The past participle in sentenceg

syntax 380 seq.

419 seq.

tense suffixes 125 seq.

past tense 137 seq. ; used for the present

the — the. 345 seq.

or future 129. 428.

there, there is, ete. 418.

478

time, times 255 seq. 259.

vowel to become nouns, sometimes

tripling. See tripraydga.

also adding a vowel 36.

twelve modes of declension 86. 87.

verbal themes identical with nouns 36.

verbal final consonants, vowels and

very. 249. 261. 308. 310.

vocative. See sambddhana.

syllables 22 seq. 26 — 28.

verbal forms etc. used as adverbs 167.

what happened. 348.

168

what is that. 348.

verbal noun. See bhavavaéana.

when. 350.

verbal themes altering their radical

whether — or. 345.

i O a7 X . S o ey W e S i e g g B e

CORRECTIONS AND ADDITIONS.

Page 2, note, read Khardshti for Kha-

P. 39, L.12, read 253, 2, d for 258, 2, ¢

noshti.

P. 40, 1. 29, put a stop after 3¢ ¢,

5, line 32, read &° for ¢*.

and read (See 102, 9).

6, L. 29, read ri for 1i.

42, 1. 24, put , for ;

7, L. 11, read bottom for botom.

44, 1.

30, put @ comma after therefore.

8, L. 16, read sub letter for sub-letter.

45, 1.

3, read M J for M.

g~ e Fa- - P s~

10, L 24 (under Present Malayala),

47, 1.

28, put ( after accusative.

read 11 for Ir.

47,1,

37, read <@ for Ta&.

11, 1. 17, read ® & for ¥ &,

48,1,

4, read dialect for dialects.

11, 1. 26, read 216 for 217.

49, 1.

1, read &g o for B 0.

11, 1. 35, read 19 for 18.

49, 1.

18, read are for and.

15, 1. 11, read &° for «°.

o) ne) mel nejiilne) el no) o) o,

53, L.

28, read @%&6%%@6 for %9;3;)0

16, L. 2, read gala for galla.

48%¥3o%, and remove ; before it.

o oW

16, 1. 18, read ananunisika for anu-

54, L. 8, read ¥o00% for Fodo3.

nasika.

55, 1. 9, read dialect for dialects.

57. 1. 2, read 371 for 370.

19, L. 11, read tlri for tlri.

26, 1. 24, read e for Toen.

me)lgolilaeliin,

59, 1. 7, read ¥JIRePRe® for VIR

20 $8.

26, L. 34, add, § 151, a, 4.

26, 1. 35, read 24 for 34.

60, 1. 31, read @V of for of wv.

27, L. 2, remove § 151, @, 4

65, 1. 19, remove B,F3F3PT°.

928, 1. 35, read 0001y for Soveno.

65, 1. 32, remove ®,¥3FRRQ.

29, 1. 19, read » for ®.

66, 1. 22, add B33 Fper.

31, 1. 34, read @ for .

kg 'S FU R RY

66, after L 26, add, 7, Loc. B39,

32, L. 17, read 8,5 for ;2.

e. g. %#%F&)dég’.

eoigla= S e g s B B e B <5 e

33, 1. 20 after V839, read, and also

ae!

71, 1. 26, read %0n3 30 for &3n

ooegncso.

gedo.

3

35, L. 18, read is for are.

72, 1. 36, remove letter c.

30, 1. 25, read 30001 for Joe> 7.

73, L. 14, read 2 J0 for dOZd0.

o) dne

37, 1. 19, read (see No. 8, b) for (see

74, L 6, put ) after the plural.

No. 8, remark).

76, 1. 24, read Malayala for Malyala.

P. 37, 1. 20, read same for sume.

%5

83, L 29, read ®° for ¢ and we&?, for

P. 38, L. 29, note 1, read (’SF, I3, for

eﬂwi_.

(RRF 23)).

83, 1. 40, read dialects for dialect.

P. 38, 1. 42, note 2, read = for an.

P. 85, L. 40, read 131, a, b for 131, b, c.

430

88, 1. 11, remove ( before as.

147, 1. 32, remark, remove § §.

88, 1. 26, put a comma after SSF SN

149, 1. 36, read 203 for ez .

92, 1. 26, add deaF oA after LonR.

150, 1. 13, read ©9F for F9T.

a=l ln=ltine e

92, 1. 29, remove REFT ARY.

151, 1. 19, remove the comma after

o

ge) lme) lgel el ne

93, 1. 4, add, Curious formations are

158, 1. 5, put ( before I have not

268 A (in Sasanas Feg 08) and B¢

seen.

0R0 from 9.)5%55'3 or ?%dﬁ, cutting,

160, 1. 3, remove the comma after

engraving, and 3¢308.

23906,

P

98, L 31, read must have been ﬁdﬁag& i

P

161, 1. 24, read yet to be for yet be.

5

102, 1. 19, read 38 3B I@N> for G

I3 IBoM.

P. 164, 1. 33, after ¥ , behind, read med.

5

I

102, 1. 35, read ©@¥), for &99.

165, 1. 8, ¢nclude within the brackets

%03, behind (d, med., mod.).

P. 108, foot-note, read Dr. J. F. Fleet

Jor Dr. I. F. Fleet.

B

167, 1. 17, read 109, a, 7 for 109 a, 5;

P. 104, 1. 10, read 308, .

and 1. 82, put a semicolon after

(see sub ©B).

P

111, L 27, read wmgﬁéoﬁ for VB,

Son.

168, 1. 15, read 316, 5 for 318, 5.

P

111, 1. 28, put a comma after TRES*.

169, 1. 18, put a comma after $3»eo¢

o

for the semicolon.

111, L. 29, after ©IQTT read DIRWI)

for TARBOWO.

169, 1. 25, read @3 wver for ©3 v,

171, L. 32, read @ for .

118, 1. 2, read ¥= (of ¥®®) appears

in this paragraph under No. 2 for

172, L 11, read 233,03 % for 239030 ¥°.

¥% (of ©®°) appears in the para-

174, 1. 6, read § 96 for § 97.

%

176, 1. 7, read Fewaok3 for TRBD

graph under No. 1.

118, 1. 8, read 320F & for 30oT&.

o3

120, 1. 17, remove (of an ¥V%,3) and

176, 1. 12, remove 6.

177, L. 85, read in for see.

read (of an @V¥; see page 114,

remark).

182, 1. 5, read 235 for 23 ¢.

%

182, 1. 35, read 30 + €903 for 830 +

120, 1. 29, add, It may be thought

that at least in some of the above

23%) 030,

mentioned instances, e. g. in DRI,

184, 1. 27, read 83&° + FO for 3VA°,

e

simply a euphonic =° may have

+39; and L 29, read (or 3D

3 ¢w)

been inserted to form the genitive.

Sfor (3m3¢0),

P,

127, 1. 14, read 254 for 253.

188, 1. 25, insert this before Nara-

129, 1. 26, read ¥ Y for T .

simha.

141, 1. 28, read (23¢+ 03° + 93y for

B

193, L. 4, add, Gf. § 372.

(B + o3¢ + 92Y), and 1. 29, read (35¢

P

193, L. 8, read 5332523 for FBTWy.

+ 033¢ + g3) for 30+ ods® 4 93).

P

193, 1. 22, remove the parenthesis of

DQTE,

P. 142, 1. 17, read &035° for ©03°.

P. 142, 1. 30, read ¥3 for &3

194, 1. 35, read ® 3 for Js.

P. 145, L. 10, read ©%30° for ©% °°.

195, 1. 22, read yamaka for vamaka.

481

P. 200, 1. 15, read 205, 1, 3rd person, a

P. 291, 1. 8, read a euphonic °.

for 205, 1, d.

P. 294, 1. 17, read Q0N JoINZv0TE

P. 201, L. 16, read W&FF for WAFF, and

for TANSD bcaﬁ;ﬁoomf\.

¥

L. 21, put a stop for the comma after

297, 1. 10, read %0 for W¥d0.

(WOF).

P

298, L. 7, read dative for genitive

.

b}

204, 1. 33, read S0t020%3 for S000%.

and 1. 25, read upon thee for upon

205, 1. 35, read Me*zoe for e®sae.

you

2086, 1. 27, read B,B3¢ B3¢ for I I

304, 1. 17, put a semicolon after

8¢, and after 1. 28, add, See page 446.

fellow.

306, 1. 14, read 2.30370° 33033

214, 1. 23, read m-%;s-’dso for meg

AT,

for %8005 LBRIFTS.

214, 1. 31, read 30 300098 Fo for =

309, L 29, read OR» 30,3, for BIR,

VBNTIF, Fo.

32,335 and 1. 32, read ©F)y35° for

216, L. 9, put a quotation mark after

wﬁ%a

(arthavyakti).

312, L 24, put but in parenthesis;

219, L. 6, read played for sang.

and 1. 25, read if one is a sensualist

233, L. 15, compound ©&F and Dea,°.

JSor if one (is) a sensualist.

235, 1. 1, put for after used.

P

317, 1. 27, read WBISRePR 1} for Wend

238, 1. 25, read ©3e for 23T.

S8R ¥Ry and 1. 35, read W3RTOD

g

for W3RTBIJO.

239, L 10, remove the stop after

genitives.

319, 1. 1 and 2, read having caused

240, 1. 13, read that for this.

to make was, 2. e. had caused to

247, 1. 13, read (see § 355, I, 3).

make or had made; and 1. 10, insert

249, 1. 8, read 2¢0 for &¢Td.

300N Y after QET/IT.

g

251, L. 8, read of the uvula for of the

320, 1. 23, add, Let it be expressly

eyes.

stated here with regard to [¥ou

2563, 1. 28, read 26973 for PFITINT.

5P3 that 3 is attached also to the

255, 1. 27 and 28, read FR¢IF for

participial form used for the form-

%?daeﬁﬁi

ation of the present tense (see § 194)

259, 1. 11, read 'asi’o,e for 83.

in the ancient dialect.

264, 1. 29, read of the becoming then

322, 1. 8, read we for (you), and 1. 4,

Jfor of the coming then.

read us for you.

% e

265, 1. 1, remove the semicolon after

328, 1. 7, read BBpFN®° for WERF

Wi, and put a comma for it.

ot ol

265, 1. 21, read ©° (or ¥OF) for WL ;

829, 1. 1, read ™, ®% S0 and grihastha;

and 1. 22, § 362, 2, ¢) for 362, after c).

and L. 10, aéwg’ﬂe?% Jfor B TII .

271, L. 24, put mango in parenthesis.

?32, L. 4, insert large after swallow-

213, L. 32, read :SdJaéedéoﬁ for BX2¢

ing

Zson.

334, 1. 29, read I2ec0RBS, for In¢

276, L. 33, read 38233 for HeTA.

MRS

1)

.ljf.

285, 1. 25, read ¥, ®o) for Vo,

335,

5, read BoV) for B .

61

—

482

—

P. 343, L 10, read €onon¥d for @orio

P. 418, L 15, read is for s; and L 21,

ned

read Eﬂd"’d&iﬁo for ﬁdqu‘ageéo.

P. 345, 1. 11, read ¥V, ¥w for ov.

P

422, 1. 11, after 183 insert 186; and

P. 346, 1. 31, read sne283, for Soewdl

1. 24, read TR0 for FwoB,

)

=

423, 1. 16, remove 3 before TIFIT;

%

and 1. 84, remove 303,

P. 350, 1. 16 and 17, read W for

and L 17, insert 330 3 after 83303,

23REP A,

424, 1. 19, read SBFo for HITTo,

P. 356, L 28, read aQ &% for ARM0T,

426, 1. 29, put a comma before ©FF e,

P. 358, L 4, read ©@03>8 for ©%ad .

431, 1. 15, read &=0° for ¥,

P. 365, 1. 7, read &RODRIR for BRIW

%

434, 1. 14, add § 71 to F»¢&, where

moRe,

it appears as a 8 term.

P. 367, 1. 9, read 3:a@330 for ¥t

435, 1. 5, read (%) for (Be).

) 536.

438, 1. 14, read AT (ASQT) for

P. 370, 1 33, read F000) Fwes) for

AT (23479); and L 24, read ¢f.

L) 899,

$8), for ¢f. 8.

P. 377, L 1, read Soe3an0n¢3s for B¢

441, 1. 1 and 2, read |RI&3 B> for

Bo30n¢e3°,

QIR 1. 10, read 3300 for 3d

P. 382, 1. 28, add, Cf. § 352, 6, b.

; and L 21, read deRFodyo for

-

P. 383, 1. 24, read treatise for treaty.

&eéffsoigao.

P. 384, 1. 7, read kartri for kartri.

442, under 372, add — Through the

P. 393, 1. 6, read (Candraprabhapurana)

favour of Mr. B. Lewis Rice the fol-

lowing “Explanation of some of the

for (Candraprabhapurina).

396, 1. 9, add, Cf. 341, 8.

words contained in Rev. Kittel’s list”

396, 1. 31, read No. 2, a for No. 2, c.

kindly prepared by his Munshi, was

396, 1. 35, add, (f. 346, 7.

forwarded to the author, and is given

397, 1. 17, read 330, 8, for 350, 8, etc.

here as far as the explanations are

sef el sl daeliae

397, 1. 27 and 83, read parenthesis

not conjectural, viz.

and brackets.

gvere, A bird of omen. wcosvﬂﬁa'amsigo

400, 1. 19, read our for (our).

37038 39, (Karnatakasanjivana).—

402, 1. 14, read FROT for FROTV;

¢, A fool. Theold spelling of 7f.—

and 1. 33, add 4.

#Jaog‘ é&}d. Rice and a hollow made for

403, 1. 34, read 3IBRHT¢ for IVBBVTS,

the reception of pepper-water, etc.—

408, 1. 10, read and one for and two.

26, The same as %10 in the Diction-

411, L 17, read like a blacksmith;

ary.— 3¢¥,. The act of hearing.

and 1. 35, read ﬁ@g\ofor ﬁO%o,

There is a game in cards called F¢¢,

412, 1. 1, read S08TINT0 for Foo®)

(or FePod) LS. DR, = TR, AR

rId3c; and 1. 2, read he incessantly

©s¢ »1 o (Karpatakasanjivana). — 0

shot.

©3,8. Imitation of the sound pro-

5

413, 1. 6, remove as perhaps in the

duced when plunging into water.—

half-verse quoted above.

B er. B3P erodnd ¥ZW (Karpata-

P. 414, 1. 17, read &3¢ for ¥I9°,

kasanjivana).— 3tef. 3. As a verb

483

(=$¢322 of the Dictionary) it means

for Xeros, to get pendent roots.—

¢to succeed ete.’

3¢ BI @6’5316 0339

(,'Ssg 30 (zgeg $I®). Buffoonery (from

3ef. e

wo (Karpataka nighantu).

Samskrita 36 + 93%).— oo, The

® as a noun (=3¢3Y3) means ¢suc-

same as the second part of Cicég)ozé._

cess’,

3enF 96 =successes.—REIE.

ro%f\- Tadbhava of &‘55\ -

=WoR e’ (Karpitakasanjivana). —8%

442, 1. 35, read ®RN,0N for @?p?u;joﬂ.

¢ (=R»¢%° of the Dictionary). 8¢

443, 1, 6, read ¥H=d (Sabdanu-

38 3008 Jeedio(Karnatakasanjivana).

sasana sttra 473. 480. 513).

TQTE. FHBS® (HF) IQT® appears to

445, 1. 24, read a black, or bad, belly;

mean [AT® (is) success (FRBLF).—

L. 82, read solligé for solligé; and 1.

TORRY, VBBOBY, TRIBY, AT,

85, read TOSYMoe.

TodB), ete. are compounds of T,

446, 1. 37, read Domba for Démba.

ete. with ev@), a well-known animal.

449, 1. 37, read Sw,W, 3 Teadews for

23> of the Dictionary seems to

ﬁmﬁdoﬁé seodews.

mean some animal rather than ‘a

452, 1. 32, read Wed3A T for W@

cascade’; it may be the correct form

5@wﬂo,

of the modern '&emti - (B8 of the

453, 1. 2, read zfiédgdomab for @3&vo

Dictionary?). — £©3. Lameness.—

™BY; and 1. 13, read ®¥eB08WT for

R¢8220%. One who has cooked (from

%3¢ BB TT.

TW®, t0 cook).— PN, POJY IR

455, 1. 34, read 2¢9R,&, for Aedn .

456, 1. 4, read 203 and "‘Cbﬁ\); and

B8R oy Fo. ((f. o in the

Dictionary).— @90°, A clear mistake

1. 13, read QY3 @WBRET D

g oA S TS

BASEL MisstoN PRESS, MANGALORE.

s

———

o s

o

R

it

|

-

-

=

o

%

rer

BEE

%

»

it

3

5

s

e

o

N

e

S

&

N

=

Py

8

s

o

o

&

-

=

<

#

.

S

&

e

o

»

o

o

=

s

Cacen oo

»

G

%

o

s

Ao

g ks

&

s

.

.

o

T

w.

i

%

£

o

e

>

e

s

s

N

S

i

A

S

X

£y

o

W

w

B

o

Wy

oD

=

e

3

s

-

%

o

o

i

R

S

s

sl

.

.

o

w

o

B

=

6

A

SRS

o

Ao

SN,

03

O

e

£y

axey

A

.

S

NN

&

e

L

a

o,

G

Y

o

R

2y

4

S

I

oy

e

o

5«

»

‘@?

e

5

3

£

G

S

%

-

o

o - o

B B

S B B

-

,

.

v

-

P

et

"

=

@

5,

B

%

Ny

£

B

B

Rk

S

oAy

o

e

e

=

“

h

%,

i

o

%,

5

bt

Wk

Ay

o

W

I

ot

508

S

N

S

e

RO

S

B

uﬁw

5

B e

Y

e e

. &

%

i 05,

s

R

.

e

%

MJ,.

o

e

5

e

B

R

Sa

b

AR

e

o

e

35

Pt Kty

ooy

i

b g

o

o

o e T e

e

A

LY

Waan

=4

Sz

5

5

=4

%

.

5

o

5

‘.

i

%

e

i

5

.\m

,

“

N

oo

e

3

B,

A

S

%

% 1 .

R

o

5

N

S,

N

P e e

5

s

%

i

“

%

.

.

Py

AN

%

5

o

5oy

A

S g S e

-

A

it e

.

o

&

e

B

s

A

e

et e

A

ae

R

i H

.

35

o

%,

LX

72 0

B

s

v

5.

SR

e

Bt

5

2%

2

.

o

-

ey

.

.

v

%

b

5.

i

Ww

N

O

0,

o

iy

%,

e 5

o

2

g

NN

.

=5

N

e

o

S

*

3

&

S

Fal

b

o

-

~

Ny B

Mﬂ.

S

e

%%

A

e

AT

o

B %

=

¢ -

T

H

L

g

v x

o~

o

%, e T

S

5

iy

%

63

AR

R

2

=

5.

o

e

&S

s

.

Halem,

o

i 1

)

%

e S

m

s

U

%

o

%

7

s

s

o

o

o

P

v

5

%

Sy A

.

e

S

oy

o

o

0 Tt S e

et

s

P G

> Far

s,

S

2

3

%

o

e

e

R

e

oy

W

2

5

o

B

vk

%

o R

e

5

x

k0

e

i

Y

'

S

alh.

e

R

B

it

o A

uu.

3

e

e

o

o

5,

5

“

P

5 e e

%

o 1

g

W

A e

St

i

o s e M O

S

7

A A K

i

.0

B

o

.

S

e v

S e

S

ot

5

e

>

A

)

e

o

o

R

.

a

Bk

B

3

CEeRe

"

b

ot

%

e

w

M

% 'h

%

i

%,

.

A

%

i

T

Bk

“

e

e ¥

s

0%

%

o

e

3

5.

R

.

s

A

a8

ot

£

C

b

o

b

)

Ay

b

T

oS A

B

i

A 1

N

e S

A

e

i

i

3

W

2

e

I

&

5

pe

G

5

s o

B

e

B

A

e

%,

b o

%

i

P

%

L%

o

!

N

s

ol

b

5,

%7

<

b e

o SN IS

T

&

“

o

o e

B i

2

e o

e

G

s

v

e

o

S

s

o

i

e

s

e

s

e i

o

G

5

s

i

e 8, e

%

A

o

s

e

e

(e

% e 4.

o .

3

AN A

%

A0,

.

G

S

m

\,«

%,

X

e

"

5

e

B

%,

B SO

e

e

“

Ay

5

o

N

3

it

A 1,

i

.

o

,

S

5

i

Eaoh i

%

S e

AR

B

Bt

SN

R

s

=

B

AL

NS

%S

-

ety

-

o

S

0

i

Ko

e

B o e B

£

£

B

Ve,

B

B

B

.

%

.M

"

WY

i

%

8D

s

o

o

o

e

ok

3

B

%,

BB

o

i

£

*

R

=,

7%,

*

B,

S

I

o5

e

3%

A

£

i

S

Soaenta

o,

%

o

o

B Bt i

e

e

e

iy

e

o

et

S

5 oo

%

>

0

g

i

s

o

2N

£,

5

(x

b

k

\

4K

o

%

i

BoS.

5

o

55

Sy

ROR

el

%

5

5

B

5%

W

A

o

B

BN,

%

5

%0

S

50

@

o

5

e

o

e

o

!

55 o

>,

A

5

i

5%

o

B

s

<

oo

o

BN

o

N

o

e

o e

e

i

e o e

S o e

S

2

i

e

N

A

"

g

:

X M

5

5

5

A

N

S

>

%

N A

£ G

S

o

B

o

B

-

5.

o

.

i

S

i

TN

.4

2 5

7

Fu

B

i

.

¢

5

T

A

@3

e 38

!

S

o

7 b s

%

L

%

o

b

i

7

T Ao e

o

3

29

ia

M

5

“

N

3.

D5

o Vs

5

EoA

k.

i

%

Soa

b

S

ot

o

s

ot

L

N

oA

% o

e

T

ALY

5

4

S

=

5

5

LN

S

7

s

o

A e

%

Ry

s

Ly

g

Ao

e -

%

o o 38

Y

L,

o o

B

o

e

o

-

Fo

b

e

=

\.“

e

e

i

7

.

=

0

T

B

=

5

£

e

oAy

5

i

35

x

AE .

%

.

<

5.

C

«

o

e

%

S

s

-,

ST

3.

e

h

o

8

e

b 45

o

%

e

Py

it

o

b

e

s

o

RAAT B

e

-

L9

e

T

%

R B e

3

nt

PR,

:,

.

e

B

e

A

6 Sy

5

TS

8.

%,

"

L

-

i

3

i

G e

o

L

o

B

e

s

=

o

B

i

%

ey

B

.

e

%,

B B B e 25

s

5

ce

b

i

e e

o5 G

S

PSP Tl e o T e I B

R s

B

S

e

e 5 4

0

> 5.

0.5 8

%

5

5.

X

e ¥

%

&

C

Ees

s

Pt

o

Ve 0N

2

N

.

0

Mo

%

oF

e

M

e

s

£

%

&%,

o

i3

.

88

£y

s

i

o

i

L%

5

2

A

B i

o

o

st o

e

S

i

"

25

e

ER

BB A

X

o A e

P

oy

A

.w

5

etk

%

x

5 7 78

5

s

s

W,

e

bt

s

£,

%

o5

.

-

5.

o5

L

6

S

*e

,

b

B

Mo

o

s

R

o

S

b

8

e

55

Ok

B

PR

oy

v

9Cs

Za

0 B

¥

T

s

E

A

5

.

¢

S

»,

AR

e

B

o e

. S

el

5

oy

Rt

%

4

5

K

%,

S

£

AN

B

A

S

%

B

5,

e

oo A

N

X

.t

SN

5

¥

5

L A,

e

s

£

=

S

o

op

By,

e

£y

Bt T

o

g

e

¢y

Sy

b7 i e

@

B

S,

gty

¥

;

"

T

A

e

5

S IR

Vo A e W

R

G5

i

i

AR

o,

X

5o

%

3

u

ki

o

”

Ma,

-

A

i

s

o

.

T

nm.

e

3.

i

5

e

o

(4%

<.

T8 Rdn

B

i

A

B

e

S

o

%

e

oy

A

5o

.

NS

o

i

e

o

P

oty

% 78

B

b

o

@

o

o

F A

S

. 2

.

i

-~

S

Ko,

e

o B

o

%

3

RS

o

5.5

-

e

%

4

=

B

U

>

e

%

ke

4

W

Rt

5

ry

e

B, 5

i

B

T e 25

x

T,

B SN

B 4%

.

™

S

5

e

v

e

%

T

s

A

.

o

e

e e

b

*,

.

,

=~

R S

4=

v

o

e

S

o

e

T

T e o

ek

s

e

%

o

o

Y%

A

%%

s

D

SR S

4

. %

&

3

e

"\

£

ok

t

.

Do

s

5

b

e

%

3

H

e N K

S

8,

Y

57

%

s

SR

g

i

% N S

Ay S

o

ke

o

F

T

it

=

%

o

s

5

-

e

e A

s

e

B

£

A

EUEeS

s

*,

5

'y

b jre i

A

A

S

%

Hu

.

e

5

y

e

-

5

o5

£y

2

S

2

o

5

5

5

ot

2

S

o

ke

Son

e

£

5

W

%

-

5%

in,

S e A

T,

s

A o

i

I

e

5

e

2

n.

XX

%

e

g e

s

%

%

oo

4

CHHE A

oy

&

.

Sy

£ Ty

N

e

o

Y

At

o

o

R e

Tl

=

*

i

A

'

N

e 55,

Ao

M«WA

"

SR

ki

A

L

N

%

&

iy

Aa

=

b

%

.

5

o

%

o

B

5

Sy S

90

)

*

e

i

oy

B

',

!

e

e

N

e

Sk b

S

e

o

e

%

s

i A

X

e

S

3

iy A

Tt

i

s

i

D,

e

ST

v

Gt

B

M

Soh

a3

=

e

5

B

o

+;

o

S

25,

%

ot

e

=

o

o

Y

et

o

‘

e,

o

T

S

i

i

%,

%

5

5

.

i

B

S

s

Y

o

.

& ot

bE

e e

2

T

W

S

e

S

M

A

4 S

e

5.

oH

Y

o

e

e

25

R

ey

A

oo

!

R

B,

S

i

e,

%

.

i

e

b

.

%

o

L

5

Y

X5,

¥

3

Y

P

i

w

o,

e

o

i

o

¢

.

b

.

e

S

Yy

e

bk

%

i

e B

e

i

)

e

ek

i oy

y N e

e

S

P

A,

g

<

=

-

5

s

S5y

5

e

%

Ak

e

N

.

£k . v,

5

k

b

%

%

o5

o

5

by’

¥

A

%8

%

S

”

5. 2

o

b0 o,

A

o

S

e

TN

o

b

“

A

o

b

T

o

o

P A

-

o

».

93

s

:

e

Tt

iy

a

o

B

5

e

i

e

s

e oy

R

u©h

»:

e

o

Sy

as

N

%

“

M

e

.

N

o

%

%

5

.

5

%,

y

e

s,

v

‘o

o

.

vk

B

bt

%

o

%

o

i

i

.

.

NM«

s

s

B e

S

8 e e,

Vi

K

0 0

£y

b

o 7

i

% %

o

-

»,

o

e

-

ol 0

i

i

4

.

oS

2

>

“

s

ol

L e

o

g

DAY

W

A

:4

%

A

BB,

4

LN S

s

3%

s

N

5.

.M

“

&

o

)

B

oy

R

R

W

wﬂ

e ek

b

\

.

s

i

}

,.m;

e

w‘

%

o

S

o

.

=~

S

A

v

,

e

-5

PR

K

e

5 5

.

-

T

)

s

S

Tl

e

e

ol

A

By

i

o

v

o

s,

Nk

%R,

%

N

o,

i

)

B

%

e

7,

WA

M

4

I

.

%

=

.

e

She

%

"

winle,

oA

4

il ot

-

%

9

s

rat

=

o

!

%

SN

A

e

5

o

e

b

=

o

5

o

o

A e S

o

Co oy

5%

-

%y

T

e

e

56

i

e

.

<

XX

"

.

%

T

N

N

e

"

%

o

o

i e

5

%

s

o

N

5

R 15

"

Kok

o

Bk

B

T

e

A

S

<

o

g

e

S P

e

5

-

o e

%

.

e

)

e

&,

L,

=

=

2N

-

o

iy

S

<

5

M

%

5y

N

T

B

a

b3

%

.

v

“Se

e

k-

M.

RNy

5

5

o

=

5

e

Bk

s

s

ok,

A

.

%

el

o

"

n

A

iy

Ta e

o

i

S

i

o

3

"y

& %

-

o

Tt

e

Ay

e

SN

G IA A

5

%

i

s

%

s

o

o

%

i

%

.

3

s

w.

ok

o

m

%

<

7

;-

e

5

L

Sy

no

ko

b

3

2

A

A

=

e’

i

Ca

Oa

N

2

£

v

PN S

et

o

=

2ot

S

o B Bty

T

S s

oo

S

&

i

2

B

ey

B

2,

A

Y

M

;

N

e

e

R

ROk

%

e

i

o

)

i

A

=%

e

s NS

i

S

T

Yer.

"

e

B 4

£y

0

5

ks

&

g

re

P

s

2,

i

e

o

A

)

o

£

o

W

v

B

L

o

W

5,

W

£

s

-

e

o e

e

e

”

P

Ty

s

e

e,

&

S

s

%

.

s

h

i

e

s

%

r

R

"

%

o

.

R

L

o5 i

by

S o

e

¥

e

R

r

e

Ay

"

e

T

A

Sty

s

o

e e

"

o

iy,

&

&

G0

"

S

S

%

e

o e

n

i

o

o

o

x

& o e

7

B 2B

e

2 g

%

S

0y

@,

A3

b

<3

.

o

%

9.2

e

o

X

%

a

Y

Y

.

o4

A

o8

o

b

oy

o

3

2

’

Ve

b

4,

i

.

e e

& i

%

i

e

o 5 0%

e O

o

Boite o

e

i

o

oy

Foptne

p

Chs

%

"

SN

Wy

S i

Ui 1

g

e

A

o

o

a

ArNAR

)

3

%,

‘"

E m

e

P

5

oA

i

e

5

o

4

AN

5

e

D

Sk,

P

o,

oD

o

.

Bt

A

R

S

. .

T

b

S

e

>

m

T 1 1

5

A

o

e

Gy

o

(5

o

P

Pl

o e 5

4y

%

.

e

e’

.y

iy

T e

e

526

o 2

b

v

“,

O

e

3

&

5l

.

o5

e

.

0 e e

S

5

=

B

6

i

H

0%

'

s

Se A

.

A

d

b,

2%

Bt

b

L,

ks

5

e

N

.

N e

B

o

o

3

2

B

>

Y

e

-

%,

2

o5

sy

S

5

.

.”

o

e

ATy

o .

S

.

s

o i S

yar

- A

.

A

%6

i

P

R

o i

=

W\

S

X

B

&

.

ta

i

&

Y

N

BB,

5

g

L%

iy e e

i

%,

%

%

ok

D

P

%

et

e

o

"

-

R

W S e

2

55

s

=

5

5

o

P

i

.

it

A e

ey

o

T

e

PN

I

e s

S

o o 0

&

At

2

>

o

X

¥,

%

X

5

>

a

o5

5

Gt

78

i

L

)

ok

s

oot b

o

i,

D

5

4y

=4

b X

e

A

ENEN

5

s

!

R

o

%

B

i

Y

2

A

g

e

b s I

-

A e

s

iy iy

>

S

TS

7

s

B

%

B B i Je B .

S,

=

e

A,

B N

Y

R

ek

%

e

R

=

Sk

NV

b

%

S

Y

B

i

4

A

=

e

%

%

5

e

s

e

NS

-

;.

-

S

e hi

CY

“

L

v

o

ST

S

S

i

A

%

e b

0 TR

B0

e

o

o

e

e

TR e

%

A3

Sy

e

%

a0

e

5.

g

S

5

.

25

25

o

B

N

“

-

g SN

o

%

e $

i

i

i

e

ey

s

o e

5

o8

<

4

3

o

a

1

4

y

.

we e s

5.

o,

-

5% 3% 3

o

s

e

s

o

o

s

e

e

.

)

W

"

g

e

St

v

.

Y

i

s

B

o

ke

by

P

AN

e

a,

e

5

%

e

5

R A7 3

T

bk

5,

s

-,

.

-

BT T

S

e

.

%S

- s

%

o

S

T

o

o

e

o

=

S

-

s

s

e

A

A

i

g

*

e

e

-

et &

T

¥y

e P i

5

5

%

o

S

“h

o

Rl

A

i

.

e Sy

ot

S

o

B

b

v

e

B

b

9 4

“

-

e

T

’

-

>

x

B

o oy

Sy g

S

Gy

b

S

%

e

5

i

s

ol e

®

.

]

23

s

T

At

5

T

o

lu

e

P

"5

B

X

G

A

e s

o

o

B

SN

Lt

b

o,

LY,

5

i

A

% e

e B

I S

e e

.

w

e

S

oy

v

i

e

o

.

5

.

v

e

S

S

R

Mgk,

%

A

Y

g

A T

£

%y 2 B

3

Sk

e

b

WP 4%,

o

T

i

5

i

o

N

S s,

A5

T

s

28,

. e

o

N

S

-

.

i

B

B

i

o

.

i

o

%,

e

o

Bthl

>4,

o

-

i,

s

%

e

e

4

ot

H

5

w:,

X

o

e

%

A

LY

%

o

o o

&

8

B i

R

o

o

o

e

o 5

S

S e A

i

5

X

T

G

B

!

A

e

%

55

Bk

£

s

%

N

e

i

s

%

e

o,

e

o, w4

.

e

e

o

o

M

Mw

.

s

b

4

o

TN

e

i g

e

>

e

Sy

i

b

Lo

5,

o

#,

e s

e

3

o T P

5

m

=

N4,

s

4,

%

A,

5

o

~.,.

e s

x

%

5

I

A28

v A

b

S

e

S

S

%

e

B

v X

5

Tk

Bt

e

e

%

%,

T

2,

"y

Lot i o

.

=

5

Sy

a

s,

-

e

N

i~

s

R

e

AR

el

ey

.

s,

P

o o

R T R R

X

.

s

5

$om

5

N

b,

%

LT

5%

S

4

N

i,

e

s

8.

.

BN

3

-

M

5

5

=

%

5

ys

-

o

"

o

<

5

s

.

CEr

=

i

e

B oA

R

g

R

o

R o e

-

o

R

e

2

M

%,

%

2

n

e

3

5

25

a

e

5

f

S

o

1

R

S e

s

o

bt

%

Ve

s

5

O

b e

e

.

.

v

o

A

.

T

e e

o

o

%

2

2

i

-

o

b

g

o

50N

e

75

.

£

&

oo

PR

N

e

=

A

s

a4

o I e

S

o

>

o

5

v

T

e

-

ey

.

B

)

b

-

R R

S

%

e

N

25

P

7T

A

o

B

oo

%

%

i

»

%

5,

o

it

D

s

5

s

5.

e

i

B

o

s

5%,

ST

2

&

o

e

LN

i

i

5

e

%

5.

=

S

-

e

Rt

G

.

e

o

o,

“,

Ly

S

oo

A

8

"

s

e

i

e

v

e

o

P e T P T

oy

05

oy

fon

N

B

R

v

%,

-

v

B

8

Y

e

B

g

Ty o

&)

o

e

iz

ey

.

o

.

-

e,

&)

oo

-

ey g g

Sty

EiNe

S

i

e S

s

e

Shuc

o

N

M

T

4

(o

oS

5

S

oo

EN

N

B

-

B

9y

Nt

%

AL

LSS

M

s

e

X

S

%

e

-

)

3

5

%

.

%0

s

.

5

Hm

B

3

.

%

%

o

i

"

i

2.

5

S

v

L

e

&

e

&

2

A

0

Sl

!

>

R

o

o

i

e

£y

o

o

"

S

N

O

.

AT

A

3.

B A

e

5

A

s

s

%

%

5

.

g

5

o

4

o

SN

S

$ R,

T

£y

&

R

A

oy

o 7

»

i aas

g

:

T

e

%

'

e

5

5

e

%

4

5,

K%

S

e

RO

"

5

he

e

5

&

S

He s

7

4

i

i

5

B

i

.

B

e

e

%

%

s

st

Rt

b

<

e

.

S

e A .

A

=

o

s

g e

5

i

R

oE

R

A

vy

oy

5 Yo

R

3

=

ey

b

~e

e

5

%

LN

v

55

%

%

B

s

5o

e

&

% o

%

5

n

o

*,

b

A

£ S

o

:

T

bt

pAy

e

B

Py

s

3

e

o £t

a

e

&5

Lors

Rt

i s

=,

.

RS

S

P iy

ey

o

e

v

"

i

X

N

“

e

8

-

=

ya

b

.

%

X

g

.,rn

.

.m

=

2o

%,

o,

oS

A

M

=

R

o

5

R

S e e 0

2.

o

o

»

s

e

>y

e

s

s

5

S

N

-3

%

.

5

0% 03

¥

’

5

e

%

e

o

%

&

A

v,

w

e

S

B

o

.

R

S

v

S

'~

e

5

A

=

a5

Ao 0 1

2N

5

i

s

i

R

A

Ty

=

P

e

=

.

S

&

i

>

o

%

w

%

S

4

s

y

¢

NS

o

s

o

5

0]

o

e

.

o

=

o

4

e

4

4

'

o

i

i

>

~

i

it

S

TN

ey

v

o

.

S

2

=

5

>

a

-

Sy

.

ek

%

5

s

i

-

&

’

%

3

o

L

7

7

R

%

B

5

o

T

=

W

b

5,

o

=

oL

.

o

&

-

St

N

St o

Ny

Ay

e

el

s

"

>,

-

At

M

A

o

%

4

e

7

Lo

Y

3

8

.

!

5

%

b

B,

i o

i

o Yy A

4

B

e L

o

v

-

e

o

oA

4

G e

9 S

8

s P

o

5

5

o

o

St

.

e

e

o

-

e A

LK

e

Sy

AN

%

=

<

%

SO

R

i

W,

.

5,

5

7

5

e

=

’,

e

=

i

s

Ao

8

e

%

s

-y

-

-

o

o

.

”

5

to

o h

%

-

B

S

e

a7

T 1o

7,

Y

R

o,

%

"

e

-

-

S e A

%

i

38,

e

M

%

«

o

5

bk

i

b

m

b

&

b

s

ot

N

>

b

M

e

5

o

e

oo

s

5,

%

o

N

5%,

¥

L e

v,

o

e

.

>

o T R

&

o

s

E A

e

P

P

.

5,

e

S

eI e

5 A

"y

%

R

5

5

%

%

e

o

<

A

et

SV B

6%

oy

%

A

%

e

A

5

.w

b

b

o

s,

5.

Y

-

B

%

-

A

v

£

.

=

e

5

-

h

o

0

i

e

M

Sy

S

=

i

B

T N e o

s

s

T

B

3

@

<

"

-

v

it

s

50

e

>,

i

o

L,

-

g

’

W

%y

oo

Shih

g

Sk

3

5

9

=

.

=4

%,

o

*

“

%

e

S

N

e

=y

i

o

~

e

g

E

2

:

o,

=

=

A

A

5

X

A

=

A 5

il

e

by

B,

R

6%

-

Bt

5

s

%

o

=

s

Bt

3

5

7

o

o

i

1y

e o

i

5

5

o

o

=

e

o

=

o

.

o

o~

i

-

%

A

Yar

L

T

%

-

S

%5,

&

“er

M

4

b,

"

o

%

H

,m

‘

>

.

=

L

=

o

.s

.

o

faat

e

-

-

X

B

g

e

T

5

S

~

506

A

o

“

R

%

)

G

e

%

0y

.

A

L

5w

L

g

e

5

4

%

e

m

o

=

&

~

o e B

o

o

-

Ay

E

S

e

e

a

B

&

e

*,

e

508

Ch

5,

=

b

w

v

&

r

. %

r

s

A

b

7.

BB A

%,

o

Y

Y

"

o

.

=

B

“

b

¢

SN

-

i

o

A

~

B

e

o e

ey

.

R

i

-

i W T

LR

~

M e, S

o

e

b

M

A~

o

o,

ey

o

S

>

%

o

&80

Ny

A

T

§

%,

8 A

bt

.

M

B

M. Ko

2o

e

'y

By

>

ol

.

o

S

:

5

5

A,

%

e

.

i

Sy

A

i

o

;-

S

ol

A,

i,

*

St

5

!

N

-

G

i

b

ko

o

)

Vv

g

5.

B

e

i

5

e

S

.

o

S

s

s

5

LR

S et

o

!

¢

3

e

%

n

.

s

o)

ey

»

e o

%

%

o

N

i

e

A, T

i,

5.

%

-

Sy

o

e

o

o .

i

e

e

e

e T

i g8

e

=

oy

R

ke

A,

o

3

R

b

o

4

i

A

i

.

%

oS

o

.

i

oV

o

£

ke

heh e

.

e

g

S

#

o

o

e ok

T

i

i §

v

%

e

5

e

A

v

i

S

o

o,

o

b

i

iy

o

(2

™

%

0

SN

“ap

.

o

Ned

s

.

e

b .

N

e

o

o

M

3

B

2

.

=

o

Y

o

>

3

i

Y

-

e

o e

3P 8

et

i

e

o

<

T

¥

AR

s

o

S

5

s

T

5

e

7

v

P

o

AR R

.

s

A

A

e

v

Sy S

"

o

'

-

e

s

i

ey

s

e,

S

e

g

o

A

%

:

S

o o

%

e

4

e

“

£t

A

e

SR

e

oy

%

o

2

e

b

)

%

S

T,

%

4

L5

508

S

b

B

ey

f N

o

%

N

S

iy

=

=

A

s

o

-

=

A

>

>

W

e

ST

T

e

o

S

~

e

Ag?

“a

~

S

o

=

ey

e

e

5.

%

Y

o

o

&

%

SR

8

R

LT e

y

e

=

=

-

i

(o

5

o

A B e

Y

3

5 e

o

A

i

o

-

M

X

e

-

ia

=

»

s

%

5

i

o

4

s TR

i

b s

S

g b

4

o

Nt R

A

%

S

Lox

e

*

X

i

4

.

-

£

4

o7

. s

o5

¥

I

,

%

e

o

90

M

%

S5

$

3

o

5

%

ot

e

b

18

o

i

o

Y

R

S

%

&

%

A

e

S

5.

"

N8,

e

Ny G

o

o

e

R

&

5,

Ay

ES

,,.,

g .

Sy

s

i 0a

%

i

SAr A

B

%,

5

%

b,

-

o

e

o

5

Y

5

s

e

e

%

%

s

CATH

s

s

o

s

o

.

e

i

B o 35,

W

.

Y

S

T

s

ik e

.

.

”

L

o

o i e

e R B

“d

m.

e d

i

£y

w

H,

e

.

Ca

o

i

"

5

oy e

o

e

.

o

“

o

o)

#

&

8

5,

0,

4

o

W

c S

o

i

o

-

s

.

e

“

S G

o

5

i

¢

"

2

s

e

7

A

%

5

{AA Y

Y

o

s

R

A

N

2

.

N

)

o

-

n/

o

ohEN

4

e

5

%

s

Y,

g

e

AN

e

e

v

Ay

o

e

A

w~

5K

o

"

S

R N

o

e

1

%

e

v

%,

0.

o

A

)

)

i

5

7

-

X!

%

&

%

o

S5

o

S

>

e

-

s

A

R

>

5 o e

"

.

o

%

3

S

.

J

§

,“

5

Pl

e

4

%

% o

5

,.

S

!

4

=4

W

o

e

*.

3

o

5 T

;

i

%

R

N

S

T

%,

b

5,

"

x

-

W.(,x

%

S

%

T

%

i~

Fig i

o

o

W

"

S

A

2

e

&~y

ot

4

o

"

R

e

"y

%

A

s

i

4

5

o

s,

P

e

e

%

%

2

L

%

%

50

Y

s

T

7

P A T

-

et

'

Cu

A

e e

i

o

S

5

.

%

4

.

o

5

,.»

o

5

'

o

pode

A

s

-

o

S

h

o

,

AT

AN

-

~

M

X

o

Hir?

s

“

e

Vs,

R

e

S

-

s

2,

-

u

=3

"

o

T

s,

NiT

%

N

2

i A

S

>

W

o

i 0

2,

R

5.

w

Y

O

i

S e

5

%

o

o

w

ey

ol

o

9

o o

o

&

o'

i

o

e

s

o~

i

P

.

-

.

-

-

S

s

X

>3

g

o

85

i

.,~

R

N

s

e

5

B

o

EATS

K

4

X

%

%

o

A

i

e

o

7

A

R

“

”

e

e

N

U

%

Ew,

e

ey

¥

&

o .

s

S o Wk

5 B

S0 .

%

o oy

i

o)

Py

o

5

3

3

e

4y

S

AR A

¢

%,

(e

5

Vi

=

-

s

o,

R

5

¥

e

s

e

Sk

.

a5

el

%

e

&

#

R o

.

Y

.

kg

-

i

e

b

&

Bh

N

o

"

s

=

o

5

5

L

i

i

S

,m

e

e

.

=3

o

S

%k

e

Hm

-

%

2

a i e

S

o

S

Fo

e

e

i

&

Rt

~

%

s

e

3

M

BOGR

A

5

"

59

o

A

a5,

o

=

%

%

y o &

o

o

LA

i

B s

o

-~

o

=

v

T

74

.

r

5

G i B

:

~

.

!

e

A

G

w2

.

N

A

e

o e

ot

3

s

o

.

S

o

o

i

‘n’

n

=

Sy

%

b

&

BB

?,

A

N th

O

4

e

s

I

o

o

i

Dok

o

-

"

5

o

e

;i

R

-

b

-

i

s %

8

~

-

s

S0

r

3

(-

b

o

;-

-

5

m

%

i

&

2

peey

=

e

i~

e

iy,

£

e

D

5

>

i

2

b

B

v

5

508,

o

s

ok

"

s

“

S

e

W

L e

Lo

o

i

o

o

S

%

W

%

i

o

e

5

S

S,

e

(AL A

B

=

"

S

&

Y T

e

B

g

Uy

%

4

av

%

e

5

%, 7t

B

2

“

e

-,

7

.

-

e

%

.

e

5

”

<

S

.

.

S

LN

%

%

5

A

T

o

5

gy

&

L,

g

"

.

n

i,

i

i

&

LT

.

’,

%

“

IR n,

o

A

o

A

S

iy

3

.

e

e

%

o

“;

e

26

Pt

iy g

T

-

g

at

g

R

5

o,

3

s

b

Ay

S

0,

5

o

T

.5,

el

4

A

A e

%

N

%

s

T

A,

S A

i Py ok

LA

o e

-

%,

N

T

&

36 e S

o

o

e

A

3

g

.

s

S

ke

e

%

6

55

e

P

Sk

9.

s

£

g

A

4

o

s

b

e

o

ey

-

-t

%

~

a0

o

5

5

*

L

il

b

.

-

°y

A

Py

7

G

2y

o

e

o

%

Pyt

- m

Y

o

A e

5

ES)

S

1ty

s

A

o

%

ot

5.

s

A

%

%

.

%

2%

%

2N

5

8

g

=

.

2.

5

A

Y

e

i

"N

%

5

5,

7]

1%

A

o

e

s

4

.

;

N

-,

%

”

=y

e

5 1

Fo

[

.

N

S

Zpty

Ak

e

.

s

&

WV

b

s

e

%

i

a

b

o

%

Feol

Eor

o

o

.

W

%

b

i,

”

Sy

e

)

i

-

RO

o

3

e

A

9

e

¥

S

:

B,

5

i

o

.3

.

i

e

S,

3

g

2k

4

e

Y

SRR

2~

e

WokIh

B o

%,

o

RN

o A

5 T

P

e

e

S0

s

Hyt

£

i

%

S

m

M

)

.

o

o5, 4 A

>

o

A,

AR

e

r o

~

5

o

o

3,

3

n

e

S

i

i

£

o

o

%

>

2

5

o

e

5

p RS

A

%

o

o

T

’

tak

3

x

-

&

!

oy

5 a

-y

%

3

.

Sl et

-

o

%

Yo

b

5

N

R

A

S

4

.

5

<

%

%%,

e

s

i

s

s

g

S

%

R

s

e

7Y

8

ot

R

o e

~

S

m

-

o

e

S

e

A

0

s

i

!

%

-

)»e“

X

v

5

%

0y

Ehe

N

b

Rk

£

>

o

e

b

5

or S

e

-

S

s

SN

P

b

<

s

R

=

S

i

I

N

S

o

4

S

T

et

o R

5

WS

*,

2%

s

o e o

o

w

%

B

4

o

LA

s,

%

B it

..

5

>

e

S

.

.

P

A

A

%

Ty

S

Sy e

oy

o

N

6

o

5

S

i

i

&

%

E

2

E

i

%

27

o

s

fid

%

o

5

S

2t

s

o

e ok

=

-

e

5

&S

>

<

=

o

A B

S

U s

0

Y

Tory

gty Ay

.

Ll

.

i

e

SR

e

o

=

-

%

T

=

W

~

-

=

B

B

by

%

.

%

2

e

P

%

s

St

.

N

>

AN

o,

7

S

)

)

3

5 S

e

%

%

"

o

.

x

R

.\h

5

-

ey

<

e

£y

s

~

M

o

i

%

e e

2

S,

8

“ay

%

&

£

3

ey

S

o

o

Tt

24

;

RN

=

>

i,

o

T

S

o

S,

s

Do

e

3

S

,,

S

i

B

e

<

o

%

s

53,

o

08,

S

b

e

M

o8

.

oy

i e 2

s

NS

M

S

%

Yo

e

f

o

s

oA

s

o

%

5

o

oy

-y

'

Nt

=

i,

Y52

%

n

e

b

ot

e

S

- Ay

S5

e

2

S

-

Yo

"

¥

i

S

.

iy

"

e

g

s

O

>

-

“

£y

ot

K

%

e

=

g

Dk

W

o

ik,

e

)

v

5

e

s

-

sy

&

St

o

o

-

o

%

i

S

A

Cip

e

%

s

S

o

iy

st

=

5o

%

%

S

5

.

5

%

o,

-

Ly

%

m

%

-

S5

9”\

e

e

o

‘

%

%

R

L A

805

<

B on

o

<5

o, e

45

e

LA

"

S

W

;-

%

.

5

.

B

A

A

o

&

;

¥

5

-

i

.

Sy

5

iy,

o

P

S

o

7

S

R

N

=

S

5

2y %

e I

PNy

B

A

o

o

.

5

AH

5

“

s

e

o

=

o

e

ey i

SRR

-

v

o

w

T

o

e

Sy

W

"

o

ik

-

Y

g

e

e

C

"y

o,

e

o

o

s

-

o

%

P

¥y

A

i

5

o

A

A

4

b

,

3%

N

&

"

e

e

g

=

-

K

-

T

o

el

s

.

o

e

o

%

:

e

s

o s

b

~

%

[u

5

-

Tt

e

K

g

%

ko

-

i

LY

S

e

2

S

o

i

B

P

A

A S S

;

o

P

& o

5

b, 4

Sy

S

g

o .

e

-

.

i

2

e

e

"5

oy

e

A

b

Sy

%

=

e

£

g~

o

A

%

s

.

e

AT

i

8

.;\r

Yo

v

o

=

S

R

S

o

Ay

E

b e

e

2

s

sy

s

e

LS

g2

=

g

P

KOk,

%

e

o~

X

6

=

o

S

oA

55

i

o

.

i

2%

@

e

e

i

Aaln

o

P

g

o

A

&

e

=%

'

i

5

L

rm

%

‘e

o

o

iy

o

£

A

o

o

i

-

o

g

.

it

A&

g

e

NG

oy

ot

5

N

%

E

%

Co

B

i

S

8

s

ey

9

”

#

i

A

pr 8

-

e

%

a

e

-

oA

"

o

7

-~

2

)

o

a

e

a

o

G

Sy

Ane

7

-

5

i v

p

%

v

5

G0 e

A

o

s

7

.

Aot

#

e

Lo

.

e

T

"

# o

e

)

A

.

o

M

o

o

o T

o8

o

;

=

S

«,

i

A

L

i

T

)

5

e

i

.

T

o

LS

e

o

iyt

oy

R

it

I

s

o

R T g,

'

5

T

I

e

A

<

%

"~y

M

&

i

N

5

MJ“

-

75

T

st

s

R

ey B

.

-

e

o

"

i

i

r

=

o

-

2

»

v

£

s

2

R,

5

o

Rpint

5

>

%)

%

o

e

e

e i

e

a

iy

g

o

"

Sy

=

22

-

b

%

i

T

5"

%

Ty

ey

%

Y

A

-

7

7

s

e 54

e,

e

T s

@

N

S

S

%

s

’,

-

5

e

%

=

S

S

o

e

s

i

e

P S e S

ey

Lo

w

i,

e

e

5

=

o

2

e

i

Se

S

!

Pk

s

ok

-

%

-

o

.

,z.

”

S

%

=

"

v

e

oy

A

5

=

Ty

N

et

N

7,

D)

bt

=

L e

e

e

e

v

gy

v

¥

S5y

o

e

6

e

%

%

aly

-y

5

s

-

%

%

Lo

Sy

‘.

g

T

0N

e

e

S

s

A

N

o

v

%

G

e

2

%

3

.

-

A

%

Apr

B

N

Pt

i

o

g

-

o~

i

o

s

.

W g2

2

LA

"

-

2

-

75

"

>

£

-

w

o

.

a;

"oy

.

s

A

=

R

o

Lt

o

o

S

i

<y

T

A

s

o

o,

f\

%

"

S

s

o

i,

2E

i

¥

.m

ot

A

=

i

o

D

ey

g

=

<

"

“

L

o

"

5=

e

%

£

3%

%

%

A

o

%57

o

e

e

]

oy

o

S

£

R

=,

S

3

,“/

£

e

ey

T

-

2

3

4

.

%

£

-

o

i

A

in

e

o

e

e

3

i

5

)

o

B

0k

.

o

Ry

l

L,

or

=

o~

4

i

.

)

7

%

o

.

i

e

e

“

o

”

e

¥

S

=

v

%

5

3

AR

W

%

e

~

o

o

o

i

~

e

e

o

o

v

Y

=

3

e

-,

=

e

Ay

Ry

%

A

W e

S

N

o

£

v

ey

e

A

i

o

-

-

"

=

-

T

s

=

=

A

LR

23

.

W,

B

"y

£

P

5

-

s

:

pa

Py

r

L0

i

ot

S e

o

o

ey

e

4

-

-

g

A

oy L

e

i

o

S,

R

I

B

5

a

s

roy

T

" o

2!

S

S

p g

)

=

-

PR

S

s

=

>

Lo

e

33

-

-

o

=

T2

%

ok

L

s

Pyt

S

e

i

v

o

x

-

5

.

i

i

P

s

¥

Lo

-

&

d

-

£

A

o

S

~

-

s

’y

Il

S

s

-

.

o

v

s

Kooy

&

-

fr

i

.

o

oo

i

=

A,

-

-

iy

e

s

*

S

2

R

s

Z,

e

.

o

K

o

%

o

=S

&

£

G

oo B30 3 5

o

.

o

g

o

’y

o

Ly

)i

m

e

A

%

A

L

s

g

e 1

e

o

a

4

S

o

oy

2y

S

X

e

ey

S

o

2]

=

'y

i

-

oy

6

5

2,

Py

e

=

s

L

%

%

g

i

o

Pl

¥

ey

e

>

o

&

&

s

SRR

g

s

-

Lt

-

&

o

-

s

e

s

iy

o

oA

ks e S

P

s

i

e

o

e

i

-

0

“

W

3

P

=9

i

rs

P

b

-

e

g v

%

%

%

5

i

-

i

i

e

A

b

i

¥

¥

i

L

g

e

A

%

Tyt

%

.

o)

"

g

s

e

A

5

S e

it

.

v

5

-~

e

Ly

e

e

s,

A

p

%,

"

“

£

R

&

A

N

e

o

o

-

e

e

<7

‘)

;

o e

‘o

i

oy

“

M

Sy

i

s

5

o

iy

i

o

L

S

-

XL

B

o

£

o

o

2

'\

.

ko

z )e

7ty

-

it

e

<

Syt

Al

-

S

A

e

o

Ay

-

&

=

I

S

P’

Pt

-,

e

K

a

o e

&

£y

2

S

~

-

#ia

S e

o

-

e

£

:

i

o

T

:

S

i

i

-

rs

i

alm

R

i

Sy

=

S

e

s

o8

i

<

Vi

-

%)

.

&

T

i

e

o

ip

e

o

s

o

e

.

%

5

A

%

\

3

4

S

g

£

b

%

&

p s

0

P

2

&

M

o

%

o

v

<

"

A

>

o

%

el

X

oy

oy

s

s

o

47

# iy

%

o

7

-

A

T

i

™~

i

.

R

=

N

.

R,

ro.

-,

s

A

%

P

2

-

¥

5

5

Gl

2

P

i3

S

et

o

=5

i

<

F )

~

”

s

S

=

3

P

i

5

Ww

K

2

2.

Sy

s

T

2

B

i

%

~

3

5

5

S

v

R

4

o

2

e

-

=

<

o

o

I

%

%

o

A

e

%

%

i

x

o

LA

-

w

ARSES

8

Fres

2o

%

sy

a

‘.h«

2

5

s

-

o

A

=

s

%

&)

e

5

o

5%

1

¥

% 7%

Calm

:

o

AR

-

o

o

PR

Ly

SO

Rires

e

p

2

X

Y

v

&

%

P

S

60 g S

v

.

e

3

i

A

A

2

i)

A R A,

7

P

g

"

B

ey

&

s

o

Te

B s

B

&

e

et

J ot

AL

g

o

o

F)

£

iy

S

oy

o

v oE

"

;.

SINRR

s

8

el

i

4

2

SR e el Ve

i

27 7 A

T

LR

A

i

PANIr

2

(38

A

A

-

Vs

Ay

%o

A

=

el

A

P

Aty

SN

AT

AT

7

,u“

e

oy

i

"

i

.

s

PR

¥

ot

g

o

o

e

s

54y

AT

itnis tacdhecria

iy

g

&

a

s

i 3

20

GRAMMAR

OF THE

JA LANGUAGE

R

=4

Q

o

VierFarbSelector Standard * - Euroskala Offset

IN ENGLISH

15

L

Balance

o

o

E THREE DIALECTS OF THE LANGUAGE

NT, MEDIZEVAL AND MODERN)

Focus

15

;

N

14

BY

M

13

EV

Dr.

F-RETTEL

L

12

10

K

11

J

10

AXTTD

A

,B\«s Ca

l/

)

22

I

é‘

€,

\

S~ NS

\iD

1

!

0

N

3_.

|

::

£

&

"‘:

H

%

vy

*ue: g

t\N[‘

9

G

/<

5

.

-

el

5

F

6

R

!h

res

P

E

5

MANGALORE

Il ImER

{ON BOOK AND TRACT DEPOSITORY

D

4

1903

3

Cc

2

y

& & Copyright 4/1999 YxyMaster GmbH www.yxymaster.com